Volume III - Technical Specifiction

Gulf Cooperation Council ‫هيئة الربط الكهربائي لدول مجلس‬
Interconnection Authority
‫التعاون لدول الخليج العربية‬
(GCCIA)
400kV Oman Direct Link Project
Tender 319/2024
Engineering, Procurement and Construction of New 400kV Madinat
Zayed Substation in UAE and 400kV Ibri Substation in Oman Including
Associated Connection and Interface Works
Volume III
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS – STANDARD REQUIREMENTS
(TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS)
July 2024
Contract 318/2022
Consultancy Services for
400kV Oman Direct Link
Document Document Document Document

Document Issue
Originator Department Discipline Type
Technical
Energoprojekt-ENTEL Tendering Substations Specification
For Tender
Tender 319/2024
Engineering, Procurement and Construction of New 400kV
Madinat Zayed Substation in UAE and 400kV Ibri Substation in
Oman Including Associated Connection and Interface Works
Volume III
Employer’s Requirements- Standard Requirements

(Technical Specifications)
Name Signature Date
A Muthuram
Prepared 07.07.2024
Lead Engineer
Atul Chaudhari
Verified 08.07.2024
Project Coordinator
KNV Subbarao
Quality Control 08.07.2024
QA/QC Engineer
A Stanca
Approved 09.07.2024
Project Manager
Document Number Revision Issue Date
ODL – 31800 – EPE – TPSS – TSP - 0001 00 09.07.2024
This document including its attachments is the property of GGIA. It contains confidential proprietary information and may be
legally privileged. The reproduction, distribution, utilization or communication of this document, or any part thereof, is strictly
prohibited unless expressly permitted by GCCIA.
Page 1 of 2
Contract 318/2022
Consultancy Services for
400kV Oman Direct Link
VOLUME III- TABLE OF CONTENT

Sl. Technical Specification Description Technical Specification
No Reference
1 General Technical Requirement 016403-2000-47ES-0000 R01
2 Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) 016403-2000-47ES-4800 R01
3 Insulator Buses and Connectors 016403-2000-47ES-4640 R01
4 Instrument Transformers 016403-2000-47ES-4130 R01
5 HV Surge Arresters 016403-2000-47ES-4140 R01
6 Structural steel and Equipment Supports 016403-2000-43ES-3200 R01
7 60MVAr Shunt Reactors 016403-2000-47ES-4200 R01
8 MV Switchgear 016403-2000-47ES-4801 R01
9 Substation Service Transformers 016403-2000-47ES-4230 R01
10 LV Substation Service Switchgear 016403-2000-47ES-4300 R01
11 DC System & UPS 016403-2000-47ES-4400 R01
12 Control, Metering & Protection 016403-3000-48ES-5100 R01
13 Emergency Diesel Generator Set 016403-2000-47ES-4360 R01
14 MV XLPE Power Cables and Accessories 016403-2000-47ES-5280 R01
15 LV Control & Power Cables 016403-2000-47ES-5200 R01
16 Earthing & Lightning Protection Systems & 016403-2000-47ES-4700 R01
Materials
17 Substation Lighting & Small Power Works 016403-2000-47FE-2000A R01
18 Junction Boxes and Lighting Fixtures 016403-2000-47ES-4500 R01
19 Substation Civil Works 016403-2000-47FE-2000 R01
20 Fire Protection & Detection system 016403-2000-47ES-7000 R01
21 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning 016403-2000-47ES-7000A R01
22 Substation SCADA 016403-3000-4SES-6200 R01
23 SDH Fiber Optic Communication System 016403-3000-47ES-6700 R01
24 Tele Protection Signaling System 016403-3000-4CES-6110 R01
25 Substation Electro Mechanical Works 016403-2000-47FE-4000 R01
26 CCTV & Access Control System 016403-3000-47ES-4140 R01
27 HSE & Security Manual HSE-PRO-001
28 GCCIA Protection Philosophy GCCIA-3-A/GEN-31-D-131 R07
29 GCCIA Cyber Security language
30 GCCIA’s New Expected Network Topology
31 GCCIA’s Metering Code
Page 2 of 2
(GCCIA)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
016403-2000-47ES-0000 Rev.01
July 2024
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA) Revision
General Technical Requirements # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GENERAL 1
2 CODES AND STANDARDS 1
3 SUBMITTALS 4
3.1 Work Control Schedules 4
3.2 Progress Report 5
4 DOCUMENTATION 5
4.1 Drawings 5
4.1.1 Outline Drawings 6
4.1.2 Assembly Drawings 6
4.2 Technical Data Schedules 7
4.3 Instruction Manuals 7
4.4 Language 8
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8
5.1 Seismic Requirements 8
5.2 Environmental Conditions and Tropicalization 8
6 ANTICORROSION PROTECTION, CLEANING, PAINTING 10
6.1 Type of Paint and Painting Procedure 10
6.2 Cleaning and Surface Preparation 11
6.3 Paint Application 11
6.4 Characteristics, Mixing and Dilution of Paint 12
6.5 Atmospheric Conditions 12
6.6 Tests 12
6.7 Method to Apply the Paint 13
6.8 Manufactured Parts 13
6.9 Touch-ups 13
6.10 Warranty 13
7 GALVANIZATION 13
7.1 General 13
7.2 Galvanization Layers 13
7.3 Minor Defects 14
7.4 Defects and Major Damage 14
8 WELDING 14
9 UNITS 14
10 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM 15
10.1 Program 15
10.2 Plant Tests 15

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUPPLY 16

11.1 Materials 16
11.2 Auxiliary Services 16
12 INTERPRETATION OF THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 16
13 NAMEPLATES 17
14 COLOURS FOR EQUIPMENT 18
14.1 Colours for Substation Equipment 18
14.2 Colours for Equipment Wiring 19
15 PACKING AND MARKING 19
15.1 General 19
15.2 Interior Packing 20
15.3 Exterior Packing 20
15.4 Packing of Electrical Equipment 21
15.5 Packing of Power Transformers and Shunt Reactors 22
15.6 Packing of Structural Steel 22
15.7 Protection against Humidity 23
15.7.1 Waterproofing 23
15.7.2 Dehydrating Agents 23
15.8 Closed Crates (See Annexes 4, 5, 6 and 7) 23
15.9 Openwork Crates 25
15.10 Materials to Be Transported on Pallets 25
15.11 Materials to Be Transported in Metallic Drums 25
15.12 Reels for Conductors and Cables 25
15.13 Packing Materials 26
15.14 Marking 26
15.14.1 Marking Models 26
15.14.2 Packing Models 27

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 iii
LIST OF ANNEXES
PAGE
Annex 01 – Drawings Title Block 29

Annex 02 – Wood Defects 31
Annex 03 – Wood Deformations 32
Annex 04 – Closed Crates 33
Annex 05 - Closed Crates 34
Annex 08 – Openwork Crates 37
Annex 09 – Openwork Crates 38
Annex 10 – Wooden Pallets 39
Annex 11 – Packing of Barrels on Pallets 40
Annex 12 – Packing in Drums 41
Annex 13 – Reels for Cables 42
Annex 14 – Packing of Steel 43
Annex 15 – Pictograms 44
400 kV Oman Direct Link Project

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 1
1 GENERAL
The purpose of this document is to define the standard general requirements for design,
engineering, construction, supply, manufacture, testing, delivery, storing at site, installation,
testing, commissioning and putting into efficient and trouble-free commercial operation on a
turnkey basis of the equipment and materials applicable to all substations, GIS new/extension
and/or modification at existing substations, interfacing with 400kV transmission lines installed
under separate GCCIA contract and auxiliary systems complete with all materials and
accessories.
It is intended that this specification section, together with the applicable Technical Specifications,
drawings, Instruction to bidders, Conditions of Contract, Technical details of offered equipment
shall form the Tender Documents which will ultimately become a part of the Contract between
the GCCIA and the Contractor for the project.
The technical requirements specified in other sections of Tender documents shall supersede the
general technical requirement specified in this document in case of any ambiguity.
All conditions specified in Conditions of Contract (Volume- 0I) shall supersede corresponding
clauses specified in this document in case of any ambiguity.
2 CODES AND STANDARDS
Publications, Standards or Codes referred herein will form part of these Technical Specifications
to the extent specified in this and other documents. Some or all of the following documents and
symbols are used in the Contract Documents.
American National Standards Institute Inc. (ANSI)

25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor
New York, NY 10036
USA
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
100 Barr Harbor Drive
P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA
19428-2959, USA
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Rue de Varembe
CH1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
Chemin de Blandonnet 8
CP 401 - 1214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141 USA

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 2
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1300 17th St N #900,
Arlington, VA 22209, USA
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

Ottawa, ON
Canada K1A 1G6
Association for Materials Protection and Performance (AMPP)

800 Trumbull Drive
Pittsburg, PA 15205
USA
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
1310 North Courthouse Road., Suite 890
Arlington, VA 22201
USA
Electronic Components Industry Association (ECIA)
310 Maxwell Road Suite 200
Alpharetta, GA 30009
USA
The latest edition of the reference Codes and Standards shall apply, unless otherwise specifically
denoted in connection with the General Technical Requirements.
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 IEEE Standard Electrical Power System- Device Function numbers,
Acronyms and Contact Designations,
ANSI/IEEE 693 IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Design of Substations
ANSI/AWS D1.1 American Welding Society- Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASTM A90 Standard test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy coatings.
ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (hot-dip galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
ASTM A143 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-dip
Galvanized Structural Steel and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement
ASTM A153 Standard Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
ASTM B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (fog) Testing apparatus.
ASTM B201 Standard Practice for Testing Chromate Coatings on Zinc and Cadmium
Surfaces.
ASTM D522 Standard Test Methods for mandrel bend test of attached organic
coatings.
ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for specular gloss.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 3
ASTM D870 Standard Practice for testing water resistance of coating using water
immersion
ASTM D2247 Standard Practice for testing water resistance of coatings in 100 %
relative humidity.
ASTM D2794 Standard Test Method for resistance of organic coatings to the effects of
rapid deformation (Impact).
ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for rating adhesion by tape test
ASTM D3363 Standard Test method for film hardness by pencil test
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental Testing – Part 3-3: Supporting documentation and

Guidance -seismic test methods for equipment
ANSI/SEI-7-03 Minimum Design Loads and associated criteria for Buildings and Other
Structures
ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems
SSPC – Vol. I SSPC Painting Manual -Vol I: Good Painting Practice.
SSPC – Vol. II SSPC Painting Manual: Systems and Specifications, Vol. 2 (AMPP)
Wherever possible, and except where a specific standard has been mentioned in the Tender
Documents, materials used shall comply with the latest issues of the appropriate standards to be
valid at the date of contract award or later as mentioned in the instructions to Tenderers.
The Contractor may apply other approved codes and standards belonging to the country of
manufacture of any equipment if not specified in the specification but this shall not be permitted
unless the Contractor proves to the satisfaction of the GCCIA that these standards are equivalent
to the codes and standards applicable to this Specification, and the GCCIA issues in writing his
approval of the same to the Contractor.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prove wherever required that the selected codes
and standards are equivalent or more onerous to the standards and codes indicated in this
Specification.
Compliance with Specification
Notwithstanding any descriptions, drawings or illustrations which may have been submitted with
the Tender, all details other than those shown on the Schedule of deviations will be deemed to
be in accordance with the Specification and the standard specifications and codes referred to
therein.
No deviations from the Specification except those shown on the Schedule of deviations and
approved by the GCCIA, shall be made

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 4
3 SUBMITTALS
At the time of submitting his proposal, the Tenderer shall provide the following technical
information for each Equipment/System required under the scope:
 General outline drawings.

 Estimated work control schedules
 Completed technical data schedules
 Valid Type test reports
 Quality assurance program
 Complete set of catalogues
The successful Tenderer or Contractor shall provide the following additional information before
proceeding with manufacturing, or during preliminary stage of manufacturing:
 Drawings schedules
 Assembly drawings, list of materials, cabling/wiring diagrams, etc.
 Instruction and service manuals
 Paint samples, if requested by Employer
 Test reports and certificates
 Shop testing program
 Packing drawings, if requested by Employer
 Marking models, if requested by Employer
 List of tests required for commissioning
 Detailed guide for installation
 Detailed guide for commissioning
 Work control schedules
 Progress report of manufacturing
The Supplier is responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the submittals whether
the same have been reviewed by the Employer or not, provided that such discrepancies, errors
and omissions are attributable to inaccurate information or particulars furnished in writing by the
Employer to the Supplier. All reports or drawings must be prepared and provided in SI units.
3.1 Work Control Schedules
Within 15 days following the contract award, the Contractor or Supplier shall submit to the
Employer a detailed work control schedule. The equipment delivery schedule shall be consistent
and in correlation with the work control schedule.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 5
The Work Control Schedules shall indicate for each section and sub section of the Work as
delineated in the Schedule of Prices, the commencement and completion dates for the principal
activities of the Works including:
 Design
 Submittal of drawings for review
 Receipt of final drawings
 Placement of purchase orders
 Receipt of raw/component material
 Fabrication or manufacture
 Instruction manuals
 Factory testing
 Shipment
The work control schedules shall include the details of major equipment/ Plant items delivery
dates, item having longest procurement times, major design details, submission dates, dates of
readiness for inspection, testing delivery and commissioning etc. Also, the major construction
/erection commencement and completion dates shall also be indicated for major areas of work.
3.2 Progress Report
The successful Tenderer will submit to the Employer a monthly progress report indicating
progress made during the preceding reporting period. The report shall show cumulative progress
towards schedule completion, expressed as a percentage of all items shown in the Work Control
Schedules.
4 DOCUMENTATION
4.1 Drawings
The Supplier must prepare and submit for review of the Employer, drawings as indicated in this
and other documents. The drawings must be A1 format (841 x 594 mm), A3 (420 x 297 mm) or
A4 (297 x 210 mm) format and shall include in lower right-hand corner, a title block as indicated
in Annex 1, Drawings Title Block.
The Supplier must submit, no later than six (6) weeks after award of contract, one set soft copy
of complete set of drawings/documents inclusive of AutoCAD 2020 versions on a CD-ROM
Disk/USB stick, plus two (2) sets of paper copies of each of the drawings/documents to the
Employer. The complete set of soft copy files as included in CD-ROM/USB stick shall also be
sent by email and or uploaded in to the ‘project collaboration portal’, details of which will be
advised by employer in due course to successful bidder. Remarks and the copies marked if any
by the Employer will be furnished to the Supplier, not later than, 30 days from submission of these
drawings. The corrected drawings shall be submitted once again, following the same procedure,
if necessary.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 6
Complete set of updated files including the AutoCAD 2020 versions, plus two (2) sets of paper
copies of the final version of the drawings/documents as approved, shall be submitted by the
Supplier, at least by one (1) month prior to delivery of the ordered equipment.
Electrical schematic diagrams shall show, in a simple manner, the connections between all
apparatus included in the Contract and also those connections to associated equipment which
may be supplied under a separate contract. These schematics shall also show all ferrule
numbers.
All wiring diagrams shall include a schedule of apparatus which shall explain any symbols or
abbreviations used. All wiring diagrams shall show clearly the details of multicore cables
terminated in the equipment, whether such multicore cables are supplied under the Contract or
not.
All drawings shall be submitted by the successful Supplier for approval following the procedure,
time and number of copies as required by the Conditions of Contract or agreed with GCCIA.
In no case shall the Supplier proceed with Manufacture before the manufacturing specification,
drawings and design data are approved. Comments or approval will be given by Engineer/ GCCIA
within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of drawings/documents. Any manufacturing work carried
out prior to such approval will be at the Supplier's own risk and expense. The Supplier's program
shall allow for the time required for necessary comments and/or approval by Engineer/ GCCIA
Approval given to any drawings submitted shall not exonerate the Supplier from his liability to
carry out the Contract works in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
The Supplier shall submit for approval samples of materials or fittings as required from time to
time by the Engineer/ GCCIA.
All drawings, catalogues and samples shall be submitted by the Supplier at his expense and shall
become the property of GCCIA.
4.1.1 Outline Drawings
Outline drawings must be provided to scale including dimensions, weight, centre of gravity for
transportation and installation, in plan view and elevation including the space requirement around
each major equipment for operation, maintenance & installation/ removal, weight of heaviest
component to be handled by crane during erection. The details of methods of transportation of
important and large equipment at site also shall be provided.
Design briefs and detailed drawings must be presented for all metallic structures and supports of
the substation’s equipment.
Nameplates, to scale, where applicable must indicate test results from the factory, serial number,
weight, mass, etc. When available, catalogues references and codes must be indicated on the
drawings.
4.1.2 Assembly Drawings
A bill of material must be provided with all assembly drawings.


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 7
Every device or member enlisted in bill of material shall be identified using numeric or
alphanumeric system corresponding to the one used in the respective drawing/diagram. Where
applicable the identifications shall be in accordance with the ANSI C37.2 standard.
The terminal blocks must be identified on the drawing as they are physically identified on the
equipment itself.
Every terminal block of a panel or cabinet must be identified with the number indicating the panel
or cabinet it belongs to, the terminal strip identification followed by a number starting with 1 for
the first terminal and finishing with the number of the last terminal from top to bottom or left to
right. The Supplier shall arrange and identify the terminal blocks for exclusive use of Employer
as agreed on the specific drawing of each equipment. The Supplier shall comply with this
requirement without fail and the Employer will not accept any deviation from this requirement nor
will assume any costs resulting from drawing changes or modifications of wiring/cabling resulting
from changes caused or originated by the Supplier.
Wires originating from a device or terminal block shall be tagged at both ends with identification
of corresponding remote end device terminal number
Every cabinet or panel shall be provided with a wiring/connection drawing where all the devices
are shown.
4.2 Technical Data Schedules
The Tenderer must fill out completely and attach to his proposal the Technical Data Schedules
included in the technical specification of the equipment. The data shall include the values
guaranteed by the Supplier.
The Supplier shall guarantee that the equipment and the works are in accordance with all the
requirements of the applicable specifications including the data from the Technical Data
Schedules.
Any deviations from Specification/Data Sheets requirements must be declared separately in “List
of Deviations”. Please note that the non-compliances NOT DECLARED in “List of Deviations” will
be null and void, though the same might have mentioned in the technical data sheets or in bid
documents.
4.3 Instruction Manuals
Service and maintenance manuals shall describe in detail, the procedures and the operation
instructions for the equipment and the measuring & monitoring devices.
The assembly method, commissioning guide, adjustments, operation and disassembly of every
component of the system or machine, shall be described and illustrated in detail. The manuals
shall also include a troubleshooting procedure to rapidly locate the defective part or mechanism.
For preventive maintenance purposes, a list of verification points with visual marking and
associated parametric values shall be included.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 8
The frequency of inspection and maintenance requirements of each component/system shall be

described in the manuals.
The Supplier shall submit manuals that are clear, fully detailed and easily understand to ensure
flawless operation and maintenance of the equipment.
The manuals shall include a copy of “as built" drawings, list of spare parts and a complete list of
all the sub-components of every component or item that makes up the equipment. The latter must
include Supplier identification, manufacturing codes and instructions to order the sub-
components. The manual shall also include an updated copy of the Technical Data Schedules of
the equipment, as supplied. The Supplier shall submit the instruction and service manuals for
Employer's review at least one month before shop testing. The Supplier shall include in every
manual a copy of the test reports for tests performed on the equipment and all the accessories.
The Supplier shall provide for every apparatus, six (6) sets of technical manuals, of which two (2)
sets shall be properly wrapped and placed inside the cabinets, panels or control kiosks at the
respective substations at the time of delivery.
In cases where there is no separate room or designated cabinets are available for manuals such
as for current transformer or junction box, then said two (2) sets of manuals shall be safely placed
and packed in a wooden crate.
4.4 Language
All technical documents such as: calculations, schedules, curves, maintenance and service
manuals, quality assurance control program reports, plant tests and manufacturing schedule,
drawings, nameplates and instructions manuals etc. which are to be submitted by the Supplier
to the Employer, shall be in English language.
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
5.1 Seismic Requirements
The Supplier shall bear in mind that the substation may be situated in a seismic zone;
consequently, the equipment shall be designed so as to withstand, without damage or interruption
for seismic movements of up to:
Horizontal acceleration: 0.25 g
Vertical acceleration: 0.16 g
A study report including computer simulation (modal analysis) of complex construction or a

vibration table test report regarding the verification of the withstand ability of the support structure
and equipment shall be submitted for review if requested by the Employer. Any such report or
document shall be based on the standards ANSI/IEEE 693 and IEC 68-3-3 as references.
Special attention shall be given to porcelain insulators which shall withstand seismic activities
without damage.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 9
5.2 Environmental Conditions and Tropicalization
The equipment shall function without dilution, for the guaranteed values under the following
ambient conditions:
Altitude, m.a.s.l. 1000 max

Minimum/maximum Ambient Temp. -5/55 °C
Average temperature of the hottest month 40 °C
of year.
Annual average temperature 30 °C
Max. temperature of metal surfaces in 80 °C
direct sunlight
Average Annual rainfall 100- 120 mm/year
Number of days with rain/mist 24 days/year
Relative humidity 0 – 100 %
Ice build-up 0 mm
Reduced wind speed 64 km/h
Max. wind velocity (Design) 160 km/h
Maximum solar insolation 875- 1200 W/m2
Isokeraunic Level, lightning strokes 10 stormy days/year
Atmosphere Corrosive, salt, dust and sand laden
Geographical (Hills, Forest, desert etc.) Flat Desert (Hilly occasionally)
Characteristics of Soils
Maximum soil temperature at surface 60°C
Maximum soil temperature at depth of 1 m 40 °C
and above
Soil Thermal Resistivity 1.5 mK /W
Soil nature Corrosive
Soil salinity 0 – 140 g/m3
Ground water table level Varies from deep to very near the
surface
Soil pH 7.0 – 8.5
Sulphate concentration in soil, by weight 0 – 10 %
Chlorides concentration in soil, by weight 0–5%

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 10
All the equipment shall be designed with inherent features to inhibit adverse effects of tropical
environment.
Therefore, precautionary measures shall be exercised when employing the following materials
but not limited to
Ferrous Metal surfaces shall be protected with suitable anticorrosive paint or suitable plating.
The equipment inside the cabinets (relays, indicators, terminals, and contacts) shall be suitably
protected with paint, antifungal varnish, plating or other anti-corrosive products.
Products/component items made of Paper, cork or tissue materials shall not be used.
Items/components such as: rubber gaskets, sheathing, cable insulation, bonding substances or
other similar nature, shall be protected against mould, decomposition, cracking, insects etc.
All the panels and cabinets containing control, switching, instrumentation and electrical
equipment shall be fitted with suitably sized heaters with hygrostat controls to prevent moisture
accumulation due to temperature/humidity fluctuations.
All the panels/Junction boxes installed in outdoor shall be double skin panels with sunshade
provision at top with slight slope to avoid water accumulation at top.
Design and components layout in the cabinets and panels shall permit adequate ventilation in
order to avoid excess heat built up.
To prevent entry of insects all equipment as applicable shall be provided with suitable
enclosures.
Slots provided for ventilation shall be provided with suitable metallic mesh/ net to prevent entry
of rodents and insects in to the panels/enclosures.
6 ANTICORROSION PROTECTION, CLEANING, PAINTING
All substation equipment, panels, junction boxes including switchgear shall be surface treated
and protected to withstand at least five years of operation under the specified environmental
conditions without sustaining any corrosion or attacks from fungus or rodents,
All coatings and protective linings which are required to withstand service fluids such as pipe,
tank, pump, valve, water box and similar linings shall be applied in the works prior to shipping.
The outdoor installed panels shall be powder coated glossy finishing with minimum 85-100
microns and durable for 20 years.
The junction boxes shall be either Galvanised or powder coated as mentioned above.
6.1 Type of Paint and Painting Procedure
The paint shall be usually of two component polyurethane type under the product group "Aliphatic
isocyanate". The paint material shall have key characteristic to prevent yellowing and rotting. In
general, the painting system shall comprise application of a first coat of "polyamide epoxy" with

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 11
a finishing coating of polyurethane. Where applicable, a coat of wash primer need be included
for painting on aluminium surfaces.
6.2 Cleaning and Surface Preparation
The surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned prior to application of any paint or treatment.
All grime, grease, rust, oxides, loose crusts, welding stains, clinker build-up, clumps and other
noxious substances shall be removed by any of agreed methods as detailed below.
In general, all the oily grime and grease shall be removed before proceeding with the mechanical
cleaning or chemical treatment as the case may be.
Chemical treatment is always preferred. However, on Supplier’s request, jet cleaning (sand, steel
pellets, etc.) may be accepted as an alternative in specific special circumstances.
The chemical treatment shall be by way of in zinc or iron phosphate for steel articles and in
chromium phosphate for aluminium items. The procedure for the treatment shall be subject to
acceptance by the Employer.
When jet cleaning is chosen, clean cloths, paper tissues along with cleaning solvents shall be
used so that no residual greasy film remains on the cleaned surfaces. The cleaning and painting
operations shall be organized suitably so that dirt or other particles do not fall on wet surfaces or
freshly applied paint.
No surface painting of Brass, stainless steel and galvanized articles is envisaged. Paint
Application
All the works shall be performed in a careful manner, so that the finished surfaces are free of
squirts, drops, ribs, waves, laps or unaesthetic brush traces. All the coatings shall be applied with
high skill to obtain a uniform layer and an even surface completely covering all corners and splits.
6.3 Paint Application
The following minimum painting requirements shall apply to all ferrous parts.
EXTERNAL SURFACES
APPARATUS PAINTING
For both outdoor and indoor equipment, a. One priming coat of corrosion inhibiting
ungalvanized surfaces other than nuts, bolts and paint applied immediately after
washers which may be removed for maintenance cleaning.
b. Three coats of non-glossy, oil and
weather-resisting paint applied after
inspection, testing and before dispatch
For both outdoor and indoor equipment, exposed, One coat of oil and weather resisting, non-
ungalvanized nuts, bolts and washers which may fading paint applied after erection
be removed for maintenance
Panels, cubicles, kiosks & apparatus boxes, for Three coats of paint
use indoors

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 12
Panels, cubicles, kiosks & apparatus boxes for Powder coated glossy finish with
usage at outdoors minimum 85-100 microns and durable
for minimum 20 years.
Succeeding coats of paints shall be applied only after the previous coat is thoroughly dry to
ensure a satisfactory finish. The final dry film thickness of outer painted surfaces shall not be less
than 90 microns. If zinc/ aluminium/ alloy sheets are used the paint thickness between 40 microns
to 60 microns shall be acceptable subjected to GCCIA approval.
INTERNAL SURFACES
APPARATUS PAINTING
Oil filled chambers and tanks One coat of oil resisting varnish paint
Kiosks and equipment boxes for use in Three coats of paints, the final coat being an anti-
outdoors condensation finish, colored white or light gray
Cubicles, kiosks & apparatus boxes, for use Three coats of paint, the final coat being a white
indoors enamel
6.4 Characteristics, Mixing and Dilution of Paint
Proposed paints when applied shall give a well finished and smooth surface. Mixing of prescribed
constituents in prescribed portions shall give uniform consistency of applied coat. Dilutions if
any shall be in accordance with SSPC Volumes 1 and 2 of AMPP.
6.5 Atmospheric Conditions
Any painting application shall be made only on perfect dry surfaces and in an atmospheric
condition that the degree of humidity and temperature allows quick evaporation with no
condensation.
The paint shall be mixed and shaken thoroughly at the moment of application. Basic coating
and application of paint shall not be carried out at temperatures below 10 C.
6.6 Tests
At the request of the Employer or as per agreed methods, Supplier shall perform stagewise
sample checks such as: checks on the sandblasting cleaning or chemical treatment,
measurement of thickness on coatings of paint applied and complete reticulation (with solvent
acetone methyl ethylene) in addition to control of the materials used for the painting operations.
Further, if the Employer requests, the Supplier shall submit for review his schedule to carry out
shine, hardness, flexibility, humidity, shock resistance, adherence, scratch resistance, exposure
to weather elements and saline fog tests. Tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable
ASTM standards.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 13
6.7 Method to Apply the Paint
Application of paint coats in the plant shall be applied with an air or airless spray gun. The primer
and finish coatings shall be to a minimum thickness of 50 micrometers.
6.8 Manufactured Parts
Bronze, brass, finished surfaces, surfaces with rolling contacts and hoisting cables shall not be
subjected to additional surface painting.
6.9 Touch-ups
Sufficient amount of each base and finish textures of paints utilized shall be supplied free of cost
for touch ups at the sites. Supplies for touch ups shall be in perfectly sealed containers identified
with name, code, batch number, shade, special instructions along with, Manufacturer’s name and
date of manufacturing.
Equipment Suppliers shall provide with each equipment being supplied, an amount equivalent to
10% of the volume but not less than a litre of each type of paint used for the equipment. and
same shall be packed separately with clear identification.
6.10 Warranty
All the paints and protective treatments shall be guaranteed for an additional 12 months beyond
the specified guaranty period for the equipment.
7 GALVANIZATION
7.1 General
All steel supports & structural elements and small articles such as washers, bolts, screws, nuts,
counter-nuts (if they are not made of stainless) shall be hot-dip galvanized.
7.2 Galvanization Layers
All steel materials including: bolts, nuts and counter-nuts, unless otherwise indicated, shall be
corrected post fabrication and galvanized, in accordance with ASTM Standards (A90, 123, 143,
153).
All the galvanized articles with defective galvanization or dominant imperfections shall be re-
galvanized. No repairs shall be permitted at the plant nor at the site in case major damage or
imperfections in galvanization. Where permissible the repair by procedures such as metallic
outpouring, welding or similar methods shall not be permitted. All galvanized articles rejected
because of defects or major damages on the galvanized surface, shall be treated with acid,
corrected and re-galvanized by hot dipping.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dipped process. Drilling, punching, cutting, bending and
removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanizing.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 14
The zinc coating must be clean, smooth and of even thickness with no defects and firm adherence
to the metallic surface. The Supplier shall replace all galvanized articles with imperfections or
defects. All the holes in the galvanized articles shall be free from knots and/or zinc concentration.
Surfaces in contact with oil shall neither be zinc plated nor cadmium plated unless finished with
an oil-resisting varnish. For zinc spray coating, surfaces shall be shot blasted before spraying
clumps.
7.3 Minor Defects
Articles with minor imperfections or damages where bare metallic surface is unexposed can be
deemed as minor defects and repair can be permitted as long as the surface doesn’t exhibit trace
of rust or lack of adherence of the original coating.
Repair on articles with minor defects as mentioned above can be permitted using touch-ups made
with suitable galvanization subject to submission of proposed method by the Supplier and
acceptance by the Employer.
7.4 Defects and Major Damage
Major defects include non adherence of zinc on the steel, excessive variations in galvanization
thickness, thick zinc deposits, excessive roughness or of any other nature suggesting that the
galvanization has not been applied according to applicable standards. Articles with above
mentioned defects, caused by improper application of acid dip, presence of grease, lamination,
inadequate draining and handling of the articles while immersing or any other factors resulting in
defective galvanization, shall stands rejected.
In addition to above, thinning of the zinc coating to the extent that bare metal surface below Zinc
coat is visible and damages caused by during shop handling when loading and unloading will
cause rejection.
8 WELDING
These requirements detailed here in respect of welding procedure for iron & steel members is
complementary to the requirements specified in present and other technical specification
documents.
For steel structures, the welds and weld procedure shall be in compliance with the latest edition
of AWS D1.1.
All manual welding shall be carried out by protected metal arc welding procedure and for
automatic welding either submerged Arc or protected metal arc welding method need be used.
All critical welds if deemed required by Employer shall be subject to Radiographic tests.
9 UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, SI (metric system) units shall alone be used for engineering design
and documentation. All dimensions and weights indicated in documents, drawings, manufacturer
Rating plates etc., shall be expressed in SI (metric) units. All hardware and steel angles shall be
in accordance with the ASTM standards.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 15
Tenderer may propose equivalent units alternative to metric standard for hardware, steel angles
and Fasteners.
10 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM
10.1 Program
In general, supplier’s manufacturing quality assurance program shall be in compliance with ISO
9000 standards. Employer reserves the right to request and review the Quality Assurance
documents and do necessary Audit for implementation at Manufacturer’s facility. It will be
assumed that fabrication and assembly of all the equipment components will be carried out in the
manufacturer's plants/ shop floors to perform necessary inspections, witness testing etc. Any
exception to this shall be subject Employer's acceptance.
Employer or Employer’s authorized representatives shall have right of access to the plant and to
inspect the quality of materials and processes used in the manufacturing.
10.2 Plant Tests
All the materials, components and assembled equipment shall be tested as per the requirements
detailed in relevant technical specifications. The tests shall be conducted by the Supplier and
same witnessed & certified by the authorized representative of the Employer.
All the prescribed tests shall be conducted to confirm that the materials and the equipment comply
with the relevant specifications.,
Results of all the tests carried out shall be entered in the test report formats containing all the
necessary information to enable verification of compliance with relevant specifications.
The test certificates/reports shall be written in English and shall show the results of tests
conducted and Ambient conditions at the time of testing., Copies of adopted circuits,
environmental conditions, nameplate drawings with measured values, oscillograms, graphs etc.
shall be included in test reports.
Not later than two (2) weeks after having completed the Plant/Factory tests, the Supplier shall
submit to the Employer, four (4) sets of the test reports for all the tests. The report shall also
include the test results for all the equipment accessories, such as bushings, tap changers, current
transformers, VTs, lightning arresters, etc.
The report shall also detail out any failures occurred during the plant tests and retests (repeats)
& resumptions if any.
Factory/Plant tests are meant to verify and determine the characteristics, performance
parameters of the equipment. In general, type tests shall be performed on one (1) equipment of
each type with differing technical characteristics or configuration. If the type tests have been
performed on identical equipment, within a period not exceeding 05 years from the contract date,
the type test reports may be deemed acceptable provided that the reports are submitted within
the 30 days after signing of the contract.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 16
The routine tests are intended to reveal any deficiencies in material or non-conformities in
workmanship and same shall be conducted on full quantity of all the equipment meant to be
supplied.
The units (build up) (panels, cabinets, control cabinets, Switchgear Bays) shall be assembled,
wired, adjusted and tested in the Factory/plant, to the extent possible under the similar service
conditions that would prevail at the site of installation to ensure accuracy of wiring and correct
operation of the equipment.
The Employer reserves the right to witness any of the tests or during any stage of test regimen.
The equipment to be tested shall be fully assembled for inspection prior to the tests.
Supplier must submit to the Employer a detailed test procedure and program of tests for review
at least one month prior to intended test date.
The Supplier shall notify the Employer in writing with at least 30 days notice in advance, to the
scheduled date of the tests.
11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUPPLY
11.1 Materials
All equipment/ materials used in execution of the works under contract shall be new and of the
best quality and class must suitable for working under the conditions specified. All
equipment/materials shall withstand wide variations in temperature and other atmospheric
conditions during service without undue stresses or derating. Equipment which underwent
repair or one with damaged or defective parts will not be permitted. No welding, filling or plugging
of defective parts will be permitted and welding on Site must be kept to an absolute minimum.
All materials used in construction shall be new, of high quality and selected particularly to meet
the specification requirements. Usage of materials liable to get attacked by termites or rodents
will not be allowed. All workmanship is to be of the highest quality throughout works.
Condensation shall be prevented under all circumstances in the operating boxes, kiosks, cubicles
and similar enclosed compartments forming part of auxiliary equipment. All contacts or relay coils
and other parts shall be suitably protected against moisture.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each cubicle or where necessary in each
cubicle compartment. They shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to personnel
or damage to equipment. The thermostat shall be arranged to switch off the heater supply when
the internal temperature exceeds 30-35°C.
Means shall be provided at each unit for isolating the cubicle supply. A common switch with a
signal lamp labeled "Cubicle heaters on" shall be mounted at convenient point such that it will not
require movement in the event of extension units being added.
All outdoor apparatus including bushing insulators and fittings shall be so designed as to avoid
pockets in which water can collect.
The underside of all tanks shall be ventilated to prevent corrosion.


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 17
Joints employing a gasket material shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under
sufficient compression in all parts, so that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing
compounds. Gasket material shall be of the minimum thickness necessary and of proven
composition when operating under the environmental conditions prevailing at the Site.
11.2 Auxiliary Services
The electrical supply to the equipment will be as follows:
AC 50 Hz DC Protection DC Communication
Nominal voltage V 415/240 110 V 48
4 Wires
Voltage variation % + 10, - 15 +10, - 20 +10, -20
Interrupting Capability kA 14 sym 5 5
Grounding Effectively grounded Isolated- with Positively grounded
earth leakage
detection
12 INTERPRETATION OF THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Relevant Technical Specification as applicable for the equipment/work will prevail over the
reference standards and General Technical Requirements.
13 NAMEPLATES
All the equipment shall be fitted with nameplates and indication plates, which must be
manufactured of stainless steel or aluminium, with a minimum thickness of 1 mm engraved black
letters on a light background.
A rating plate shall be attached to each major and auxiliary item of equipment supplied. This
plate shall be permanently engraved with the designed full load ratings, serial number, type
number, date of manufacture, and other identification deemed necessary. Where required by the
Engineer, diagram plates shall also be supplied.
A nameplate shall be provided to identify the equipment supplied. The identifying inscription shall
be approved by the Engineer or shall conform to that designated in the appropriate sections of
the Specifications. Devices shall be identified by nameplates on both front and rear side of
enclosure desks, panels, cubicles etc.
Labels shall be manufactured of non hygroscopic material with engraving with a contrasting
colour or alternatively, for indoor use, laminated plastic material with lettering engraved can be
used. The lettering should be black against white background. The materials used shall be non-
fading, non-aging type.
All equipment, motors, control gear and all panels and the devices contained therein, shall be
labelled, indicating where necessary, their purpose and the "ON" and "OFF" positions.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 18
Some of the inscriptions on Nameplates and Labels shall be in both languages, English and
Arabic and shall be submitted for GCCIA’s, if requested by the Engineer during approval process.
All switchgear shall be clearly and permanently identified with circuit designation in front and rear,
number plates and phase discs of appropriate colours
Phases shall be distinguished as Red (R), Yellow (Y) and Blue (B) with voltage reaching their
maximum values in that order and in respective colours.
All control and relay panels, marshalling boxes, kiosks, distribution boxes and other cubicles
shall be labeled to show the circuit with which it is associated. These labels shall be fitted to the
front and back of all equipment.
Labels, number plates and their fixing screws for outdoor use shall be of stainless steel or other
corrosion resistant metals.
Danger notice shall have red lettering on a white background or they may be pictorial as
approved by GCCIA. All other labels and number plates shall have black lettering on a white
background.
As far as reasonably possible, labels and the lettering shall comply with the approximate
dimensions in millimeters given below: -
Equipment Label Size Lettering

(mm) (mm)
Main labels on panels, cubicles, kiosks, junction and 125 x 50 20 x 1.5
control boxes and similar equipment
Control and changeover switches and similar items 70 x 30 12 x 1.5
Fuses and links 35 x 15 5x1

Relays and contacts 60 x 20 5x1
14 COLOURS FOR EQUIPMENT
14.1 Colours for Substation Equipment
The exterior and interior finishes of equipment shall be in accordance with the details in following
table:
EQUIPMENT COLOUR (RAL designation)

Outdoor
Outside surfaces of Equipment Grey RAL 7038
Inside surfaces of reservoirs White RAL 9003
Inside surfaces of cabinets, panels and junction boxes, etc. White RAL 9003
Ends of bushings (Live end) Red RAL 3020
Porcelain Brown

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 19
Indoor (buildings)
Outside surfaces of cells, panels, cabinets, and junction Grey RAL 7038
boxes
Inside surfaces of cells, panels, cabinets and junction White RAL 9003
boxes
GIS Equipment
See Technical Specification: 016403-2000-47ES-4800
Crane & components Golden Yellow
Pipe Works Compressed Air – Blue
SF6 Gas -Yellow
Fire Water- Signal Red
Diesel Tank – Light Brown
Lube Oil Tank- Dark Brown
Above indicated colours are subject to final confirmation. No additional costs will be allowed to
comply above colors if the Supplier’s original proposed is different.
14.2 Colours for Equipment Wiring
a) D.C. circuits: .............................Grey

b) CT circuits .................................Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
c) PT circuits .................................Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
d) Alarms circuits ..........................Blue
e) Grounding .................................Green or Green with Yellow stripes
f) 3-phase, 4W power circuits .......Red, Yellow, Blue, Black (neutral)
g) 1-ph, 2W A.C. power circuits.....Red, Black (neutral)
15 PACKING AND MARKING
15.1 General
The following general guide lines shall be adhered to ensure that the materials are packed and
marked according to these minimum acceptable standards and that the appropriate packing
materials are used. The Supplier is solely responsible for the quality of the packing materials.
The Employer, may, at any time, reject any of the packing or marking if it is deemed to be non-
conforming to the standards specified.
If the packing provided by supplier is rejected, the supplier has to redo the same to the satisfaction
of Employer without any claims for additional costs.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 20
These guidelines are minimum requirements but not limited to.
The type and mode of packing shall not prone vulnerable to risks associated with extensive
handling by:
 Fork lift
 Cranes (slings)
The packing and packing materials shall be suitable to sustain long periods of storage (that could
extend to several months) under variable weather conditions. Same shall consider deteriorations
which are typical to this kind of project, such as:
 Cold
 Dampness
 Heat
 Abundant rain
 Fluctuation in temperature
 Saline air
 Vibrations
 Parasites
 Insects /Rodents
In addition to guidelines or specifications, requirements stipulated by technical specifications of

the equipment, dimensions, material and weight of the equipment is other key criteria to design
and execute the packing.
15.2 Interior Packing
The packing shall be adequate and tough enough to avoid any damages to the contents during
the handling or arduous transport conditions. In all cases, the items shall be arranged or wrapped
in such a manner so as to minimize the transportation volume.
Suitable wedges, shoring or fasteners as required, or any other proven methods shall be used in
order to prevent the rupture of partitions, movement of packages within the rigid container to
prevent any damages resulting from shock or vibrations.
Fragile items deemed unable to endure handling and arduous transportation conditions and those
items that cannot be disassembled shall be properly supported before wrapping is done. All items
prone for rolling, rotation, sliding, free movement or mounted on springs and whose movement
is not blocked by a safety device shall be wedged and bound securely.
15.3 Exterior Packing
Materials other than those specified in following paragraphs shall be packed according to basic
guidelines of packing in ANSI/NAS and ISO Standards.
The packing shall be done in conformance to acceptable standards for marine, railway or
overland shipping. The equipment or loose materials if any shall be solidly packed to withstand
the differing modes of transportation and for any kind of difficult roads.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 21
Where applicable the equipment shall be packed to protect the contents against any possible
damaging effect caused by salt water (maritime packaging).
15.4 Packing of Electrical Equipment
It is the Supplier’s responsibility to ensure that packing is adequate for transportation to site in
order to guarantee integrity of the supplied equipment.
Material liable to deterioration or corrosion shall be packed in tightly closed crates.
Whenever fittings or accessories are removed from main equipment to facilitate easier
transportation, the openings left if any shall be properly covered.
Cables or wire plugs coming out of the equipment shall be wrapped with suitable insulation tapes
and covered with a polyethylene film of at least 0.12 mm thick, in order to safeguard them from
outdoor conditions & inadvertent mechanical impacts. In addition, they shall be firmly fastened
to the equipment to avoid from hanging and consequent damages during handling.
Where applicable, the equipment and/or the materials shall be fastened to structural wooden
base built with 100 mm minimum thick wooden beams Equipment shall be handled with suitable
capacity cranes using slings during loading/unloading.
Packing of equipment for air borne transportation shall be made using plastic containers but
ensuring that the container materials shall be as light as possible without compromising protection
from expected risks in air transportation.
Items which can be stacked in bundles shall be sorted out according to length and size and
accordingly made bundle shall be bound with steel strapping and weight of bundle thus made
shall not exceed 100 kg each.
The equipment and its accessories shall be packed in closed crates, designed strong enough to
resist damages that might happen due to unintentional deficient handling during surface and
marine transportation and to prevent theft or pilferage. Further, the packing & packing material
shall be suitable for long periods of storage with outdoor exposure to varying weather conditions
in harbour yards or other places.
The crates meant for containing electrical equipment or fragile items shall have adequate
mechanical reinforcements to ensure their stability. Open crates shall not be accepted.
All heavy and large crates shall be clearly marked the load points for handling during unloading
or during surface transportation.
In particular, such markings shall show how and where to install the slings and hooks for hoisting,
pulling and transporting the crate.
All the crates shall have identification marks, as detailed in the guidelines for marking in following
clauses. When a shipment contains several packages, the later must be identified in relation to
the main equipment. If any parts/components of ferrous base are clubbed with non-ferrous
pieces, the former must be well protected.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 22
Items liable to get affected by water condensation or absorption of humidity during loading and
or transportation shall be packed with waterproof materials. All inserts or filling material used if
any shall be of non-hygroscopic type.
Further to absorb moisture from humidity, suitable drying products (desiccants) shall be placed
in every crate.
Spare parts having precisely machined surfaces or materials, with ferrous parts, shall be
specifically treated and packed for long years of preservation in addition for storage under normal
storage conditions.
The packing/packages will be subject to the acceptance of the inspector appointed by the
Employer.
Supplier shall submit the packing plans along with drawings for acceptance by the Employer.
15.5 Packing of Power Transformers and Shunt Reactors
If the power transformers and the shunt reactors are not fitted with skids or lifting eyelets, they
shall be fastened to a base for shipping and handling. In all cases, the equipment shall be able
to be loaded, unloaded and installed by means of a gate hoists, jacks and crane.
Radiators which were separated from main unit to facilitate transportation from shall be shipped
by fastening to solid wooden bases. The radiators shall not touch each other to prevent damages
to the paint.
Fan motors if any shall be covered with a waterproof film firmly placed with suitable straps (nylon
straps are not acceptable).
The porcelain bushings (HV and LV) shall be shipped in crates to prevent them from breakage.
Where necessary, the bushings can be packed in slanted position on their own support so that
the bushing insulation is always covered with oil. Each bushing shall be laid on a solid base and
protected by suitable filling & blocking materials to prevent any free-movement or displacement
during transportation. If the manufacturer deems it necessary, the bushings can be strapped with
nylon belts to arrest them in place.
The control cabinet shall be shipped in a closed crate and shall contain silica gel bags or
desiccants in order to absorb humidity.
Accessories, piping, bolts and materials other than those mentioned above, shall be shipped in
closed crates.
15.6 Packing of Structural Steel
Supplier is responsible for the packing methods and relevant packing lists and same shall be
submitted for acceptance of the Employer who reserves the right to inspect the supplies and their
packing before shipment.
Metal pieces or items shall not be stacked or packed unless the chromate treatment is completely
dry.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 23
All galvanized materials shall be protected against the risk of corrosion such as formation of “white
rust” caused by moisture, saline air or exposure to prolonged humidity.
Bundles of angles are to be suitably attached in sufficient numbers to facilitate shipping. Each
bundle needs to contain the members of the same structure. Maximum weight of each bundle
should be approximately three (3) metric tons. A typical mode of packing for steel items is shown
on Annex 14.
Care shall be exercised during handling and shipping to avoid damages to the galvanization
and/or to the chromate treatment.
Packing shall be done once the manufacturing is finished. Individual items/articles shall be
assembled in tightly fastened bundles, using non-oxidizing packaging materials so as not to
damage the galvanization and/or chromate treatment.
The bolts, nuts and washers are to be packed by type and size in new airtight 2.5-gallon capacity
drums (11 litres) (refer to annex 11 and paragraph 15.11).
The maximum weight of these drums with contents shall be restricted to around 35 kg. The
diameter, length, class and quantity along with the packing number and total weight of the drum
is to be painted in black on the side and top of the drum. The maximum weight of a pallet
containing the drums shall be limited to 3000 kg.
15.7 Protection against Humidity
15.7.1 Waterproofing
All waterproofing measures shall be taken to avoid water condensation and associated metal
corrosion. Usually, waterproof films such as polyethylene or Bitumen paper shall be utilized to
cover the equipment suitably so that necessary ventilation is available for water evaporation.
15.7.2 Dehydrating Agents
All goods sensitive to humidity and contamination shall be wrapped with plastic film or suitable
waterproof paper and sealed by proven method to make them waterproof.
Generally, polyethylene is preferred, however, sheets made of aluminium compound may be

envisaged for electric and electronic equipment sensitive to humidity and contamination.
Silica gel, in pouches/packs of standard dimensions, shall be placed in most relevant places
inside the package to subject all the hollow spaces of the equipment to the effects of dehydrating
action of the silicate.
The quantity of silica gel pouches for each package shall be sufficient to maintain the humidity
rate at 40 % for a minimum period of six (6) months.
This method, based on water absorption, can be used for all and any type of material.
15.8 Closed Crates (See Annexes 4, 5, 6 and 7)
Where practiced the Supplier shall ensure that weight of crates shall not exceed 3 metric tons.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 24
The bottom of each crate shall be reinforced suitably to withstand the weight of the containing
equipment and to resist vertical shocks.
The sub-assemblies/parts of the containing main equipment shall be solidly bound to the crate.
All lifting points must be identified.
All crates must be mounted on skids.
The structural wooden members as well as the ones intended for forklifting shall be placed at the
points of high load concentration and shall be sufficiently thick (2.5 cm) to withstand the weight.
The structural members shall have a minimum width of at least 10 cm and shall be screwed to
the skids with bolts. There shall be a minimum clarence of at least 2.5 cm between the structural
wooden members and the containing item, on sides and on top. Fragile items shall be protected
by keeping the spacing in range off 2.5 to 10 cm between them. This free space must be
increased for items requiring no impact mounting.
The filling material which will be utilized to fill the empty spaces inside the crates shall be
synthetic. Wood shaving and shredded paper shall not be accepted. The design of the crates
shall be strictly in accordance with the weight of the material to be packed:
Less than 250 kg
Crates intended to contain less than 250 kg shall be built with cleats of not less than 2.5 cm and
wood or plywood to be used shall be 1.9 cm thick.
The crate shall be the type “A” shown on Annex 4. The strapping shall be steel belts 19 mm wide
crimped with steel fasteners.
From 250 kg to 500 kg
Crates meant for 250 to 500kg shall be made with wood of 1.9 cm thick. The bottom members of
the crate must be 2.5 cm thick and uprights shall be made with 5 x 10 cm boards. The crates
shall be the type "B" shown on Annex 4. The strapping shall be steel belts 32 mm wide crimped
with steel fasteners.
From 500 to 3000 kg
Crates meant to contain more than 500 kg must be mounted on a base with supports of at least
10 x 10 cm. The support shall be bolted to the base with bolts of 1.25 cm diameter, minimum.
The wooden base shall be with thickness of more than 2.5 cm and uprights shall be 5 x 7.5 cm
or more.
The walls shall be made of wood or plywood of minimum 2.5 cm thick.
The top must be made of 2.5 cm thick wood with waterproof paper in between the two layers of
the double top.
Annexes 5, 6 and 7 show the construction of these crates. The corners if required shall be
reinforced with steel belts of 3.2 cm width. The crates shall be strapped with steel belts of 51 mm
wide, vertically and horizontally in sufficient number proportional to the dimensions of the crate.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 25
15.9 Openwork Crates
Open type crates may be used to ship materials which are non-sensitive to outdoor conditions.
Annex VIII and IX shows example of crate used to pack insulators whereas Annex IX shows type
of crate that could be deployed for heavy equipment.
15.10 Materials to Be Transported on Pallets
In order to make easy handling of materials and containers (drums, crates) usage of wooden
pallets may be required.
These pallets shall be solid, sturdy and new. They shall be made according to the typical example
shown on Annex 10.
Annex 11 shows a method of arranging material on wooden pallets. The strapping must be done
carefully in sufficient quantity to prevent the packages from slipping.
15.11 Materials to Be Transported in Metallic Drums
New 2 1/2-gallon drums (11 litres) shall be used largely to transport bolts, nuts and washers. If
any other materials are chosen to be transported this way shall be subject to acceptance by
Employer. Where deployed, these drums shall be airtight in order to prevent ingress of water
during transport and storage. The bolts or any other materials shall be grouped by size and
diameter and properly identified.
The drums shall be set on pallets to facilitate handling and they shall be placed in a maximum of
two rows. One wooden pallet shall be placed on top of the drums to increase stability and
compactness when stowing. See example shown on Annexe 11.
The weight of each pallet shall not exceed 3 metric tons.
New 45-gallon drums (204.5 litres) may be used for small articles such as gussets, splices etc.
The weight of each drum should not exceed 200 kg and the drums shall be set on pallets and
fitted with lifting device (crossbars or lifting eyelets). The drums shall have three holes
(approximately 1 cm diameter) at the bottom in order to allow drain of any water entering the
drum.
The articles/items being transported shall not be in direct contact with the bottom of the drum,
and therefore suitable wedges shall be used. The articles/items shall not move inside the drum
so accordingly efficient stoppers need be used. A metallic lid shall snugly cover the opening of
drum to avoid ingress of rain water, in to the drum. See example shown on Annex 12.
15.12 Reels for Conductors and Cables
All cables shall be packed on wooden/steel reels whose dimensions shall be in correspondence
with the length and size of the cables. An example of reel is shown on Annex 13.

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 26
15.13 Packing Materials
The material specifications detailed in following clauses applies to all modes of packing
comprising these materials.
Solid Wood (see annexes 2 and 3)
The solid wood to be used for packing must be new, solid and well dried. It shall be free from rot,
wear, clinker, holes, loosen knots and excessive deformations. The knots must be healthy-looking
and not bigger than a 1/3 of the width of board.
Plywood
The plywood must be new, good quality and well dried. Three-layer plywood must be used for
the crates with cleats and five-layer plywood for nailed crates.
Nails
In general, the nails must be circular and preferably covered with a coating of cement or chemical
glue.
Other types of nails with helical or ring-shaped shafts may also be used if required.
Strapping
The metallic strapping shall be made of non-annealed steel installed with a binding device and
tied with steel fasteners. The steel shall be treated against corrosion. Where the metallic
straps/belts touch the finished surfaces of contents, protective pads shall be provided at those
points to avoid abrasion.
The dimensions of steel belts will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and
same shall be in relation with the weight of the bundle to be strapped.
15.14 Marking
The marking must be in English and shall be in big font as permitted by the available space on
the crates but not exceeding 100 mm. A packing list, printed in English, shall be included for each
shipment and same shall be attached to each crate. The packing list shall be in a closed envelope
overlaid with plastic film.
All the crates shall be marked on opposite sides.
The Supplier shall, according to the destination site, identify the packages by marking the
appropriate code that has been allocated to each site of final destination.
If tags are to be used, they shall be printed or typed with permanent ink and shall be solidly
secured to the wooden surface by means of staples, nails or tacks and alternatively where
possible, they shall be fastened with metallic wire or a very solid rope (the tags shall be water-
proof).

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 27
Transport and handling warning signs such as: FRAGILE, KEEP DRY, POISON, etc. shall be
clearly indicated if the nature of the merchandise calls for it (see Annex XV).
15.14.1 Marking Models
Every item shipped must carry, on one side and on top, the following inscriptions:
ATTENTION OF:
DESTINATION:
PROJECT:
SITE: COUNTRY:
CONTRACT No.: Equipment Code No.:
BOX: OF: (Total number of crates shipped)
FINAL DESTINATION:
Note: If the shipment is not dispatched to the final destination, the container must carry the
transit destination as well as the following: “TO BE DELIVERED TO (final destination)”.
15.14.2 Packing Models
Refer to Annexes 2 to 15.


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 28
ANNEX 1
DRAWING TITLE BLOCK

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 29
Annex 1 – Drawings Title Block

Interconnection Authority ‫التعاون لدول الخليج العربية‬
GCCIA
DRAWING N°:

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 30
ANNEX 2 TO 15
PACKING MODELS

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 31
Annex 2 – Wood Defects


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 32
Annex 3 – Wood Deformations


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 33
Annex 4 - Closed Crates
TYPE A PLYWOOD CASE WITH CLEATS
TYPE B 2.5 cm THICK WOODEN CASE


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 34
Annex 5 - Closed Crates
Wooden Case, with Double-Layer Top and Waterproof Paper, Reinforced, with 32 mm Wide Steel
Straps at the Corners

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 35
Annex 6 – Closed Crates
Plywood Case, with Double-Layer Top and Waterproof Paper, Reinforced, with 32 mm Wide
Steel Belts at the Corners

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 36
Annex 7 – Closed Crates
Wooden Case for Heavy Equipment


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 37
Annex 8 – Openwork Crates
FIGURE 1 Cylindrical Configuration

FIGURE 2 Tetrahedral Configuration

016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 38
Annex 9 – Openwork Crates
Wooden Open Case


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 39
Annex 10 – Wooden Pallets


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 40
Annex 11 – Packing of Barrels on Pallets


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 41
Annex 12 – Packing in Drums


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 42
Annex 13 – Reels for Cables


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 43
Annex 14 – Packing of Steel


016403-2000-47ES-0000 01 July 2024 44
Annex 15 - Pictograms
GCCIA
400kV GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR (GIS)
016403-2000-47ES-4800 Rev.01
July 2024
400kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR 1

2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES 1
4 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS 3
4.1 Service Conditions 3
4.1.1 General 3
4.1.2 Operational Requirements 3
4.1.3 Short-Circuit Withstand 3
4.1.4 Environment 4
4.1.5 Auxiliary Services 4
4.2 Design and Manufacturing Requirements 4
4.2.1 Arrangement 4
4.2.2 Enclosure 7
4.2.3 SF6 Gas 10
4.2.4 Gas Monitoring System 11
4.2.5 Circuit Breaker 12
4.2.6 Disconnect Switches and Earthing Switches - General 14
4.2.7 Disconnect Switches 15
4.2.8 Earthing Switches 15
4.2.9 Current Transformer 17
4.2.10 Voltage Transformers 18
4.2.11 Metal Oxide Surge Arrester 19
4.2.12 Overhead Line, Cable and Transformer / Reactor Terminations 19
4.2.13 Bus Ducts 21
4.2.14 Busbars 21
4.2.15 Supporting Structures 22
4.2.16 Local Control Cabinet (LCC) 22
4.2.17 Protection 30
4.2.18 Nameplate 30
4.3 Miscellaneous Facilities 31
4.3.1 Maintenance and Repair 31
4.3.2 Facilities for Future Extensions 32
4.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Equipment 32
4.3.4 Other Requirements 32
4.4 Transport 34
4.5 Required Data and Information 35
4.5.1 General 35
4.5.2 Circuit Breakers 36
4.5.3 Disconnecting and Grounding Switches 36
4.5.4 Bus Insulators 37
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 37

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 ii
5.1 Mandatory Spare Parts and Tools 37

5.2 Recommended Spare Parts and Tools 38
6 TESTS 39
6.1 General 39
6.2 Factory Tests 39
6.2.1 Type Tests 39
6.2.2 Routine Tests 40
6.3 Site Commissioning Tests 41
7 BREAKER CONDITION MONITOR (BCM) 42

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 1
1 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
The present specification outlines, from a technical point-of-view, the standard requirements
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of the Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) to be
installed in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA):
The specification covers the design, ratings, testing, transport and packing of factory assembled
switchgear bays. Exact configurations shall be as per Single Line diagrams included in Tender
documents.
The layout shall be generally as shown on the drawings however, subject to the provisions of
this specification and the approval of the Engineer/Authority, they may be adjusted to suit the
manufacturer's design.
2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES
For Technical Schedule, refer to Volume II – Section 2
GIS equipment shall be designed and tested according to the latest IEC Standards including
amendments in particular the following IEC publications or complementary standards
mentioned in this document:
IEC 61869-1 Instruments Transformers part 1 – General Requirement
IEC 61869-2 Instruments Transformers part 2 – Current Transformers
IEC 61869-3 Instruments Transformers part 2 – Voltage Transformers
IEC-60060 High voltage test techniques
IEC 60099-4 Surge arresters – Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for A.C.
systems
IEC 60099-5 Surge arresters – Part 5: Selection and application recommendations
IEC 60137 Insulating bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC-60270 Partial-discharge measurements
IEC-60376 Specification of technical grade sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and
complementary gases to be used in its mixtures for use in electrical
equipment
IEC-60480 Specifications for the re-use of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and its mixtures
in electrical equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 62271-1 Common specifications for alternating current switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in
polluted conditions

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 2
IEC 62271-209 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 209: Cable connections for
gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV -
Fluid-filled and extruded insulation cables - Fluid-filled and dry-type cable
terminations
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC 62271-110 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 110: Inductive load switching
IEC-62 271-100 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 100: Alternating-current
circuit-breakers
IEC-62 271-102 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 102: Alternating current
disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC-62 271-203 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Part 203: AC gas-insulated metal-
enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV
IEC-62 271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: Common specifications
for alternating current switchgear and controlgear
IEC-62 271-4 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Handling procedures for
gases for insulation and/or switching
IEC-62 271-104 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 104: Alternating current
switches for rated voltages of 52 kV and above
IEC-62 271-204 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 204: Rigid gas-insulated
transmission lines for rated voltage above 52 kV
IEC-62 271-207 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 207: Seismic qualification
for gas-insulated switchgear assemblies for rated voltages above 52 kV
IEC-62 271-211 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 211: Direct connection
between power transformers and gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear
for rated voltages above 52 kV
IEC-62 271-301 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 301: Dimensional
standardization of high-voltage terminals
IEC-62 271-310 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 310: Electrical endurance
testing for circuit-breakers above a rated voltage of 52 kV
IEC-60059 IEC standard current ratings
IEC-62155 Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass insulators for use
in electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000 V
IEC-60168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for
systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000 V
IEC-60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V
IEC-60071-2 Insulation co-ordination – Part 2: Application guidelines
IEC-60269 Low-voltage fuses

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 3
CIGRE TF 15/33.03.05: Partial discharge detection system for GIS: sensitivity verification for
the UHF method and the acoustic method.
CIGRE WG D1.25: Technical Brochure 654: UHF Partial Discharge Detection System for GIS:
Application Guide for Sensitivity Verification.
ASME Sec VIII div 1 Code for pressure vessels
4 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS
4.1 Service Conditions
4.1.1 General
The 400 kV GIS, in conjunction with AIS equipment, are part of the substation destined to
interconnect the main transmission networks of Kuwait, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, UAE and
Oman. Main GIS equipment shall be installed inside a building.
Contractor shall coordinate the detailed design of GIS building, AIS arrangement, and GIS
equipment in order to ensure total compatibility, between the different equipment and systems.
4.1.2 Operational Requirements
Consideration to ease and cost of maintenance and repairs shall be given during the design
stage so as to provide a highly reliable apparatus, which will minimise operating costs. Aspects
such as simplicity of design, number of movable parts, impunity to high stresses or pressures
should be taken into account.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for safety of all those
concerned in the operation and maintenance works.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient space in the GIS room, including access, for GIS and
accessories.
The switchgear assembly shall be designed with provision for future extension.
4.1.3 Short-Circuit Withstand
The GIS shall be designed and made to withstand, without damage, the mechanical and
thermal effects of external short-circuits, under the following conditions:
a) Short-circuit current levels are:

400 kV network: 63 kA
b) The short-circuit duration shall be limited to 1 second;
c) Network fault current asymmetry of X/R = 17;
d) For design purposes, Xo = X1 on HV, LV.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 4
4.1.4 Environment
The equipment and material to be supplied in accordance with this specification shall be
designed to operate satisfactorily considering the environmental conditions indicated in the
General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
GIS equipment shall be installed inside the GIS building specified in the Technical Specification
016403-3000-48FE-6000. The switchgear shall be of the SF6 gas insulated, metal clad, single
phase enclosed type suitable for indoor installation and shall be supplied complete with all
auxiliary equipment necessary for safe operation, routine and periodic maintenance and repairs
under the site climatic conditions.
GIS equipment installed outdoor, will be exposed to higher temperatures, 55°C ambient and
75°C for metal surfaces in direct sunlight as per the General Technical Requirements 016403-
2000-47ES-0000.
4.1.5 Auxiliary Services
The incoming voltage for the auxiliaries is indicated in the General Technical Requirements
016403-2000-47ES-0000.
The LV a.c. and d.c. supply requirements for GIS equipment, are detailed as part of the
substation’s auxiliary services. No dedicated auxiliary service equipment shall be provided for
GIS.
4.2 Design and Manufacturing Requirements
4.2.1 Arrangement
The GIS shall include the main items of equipment shown on the single line diagram,
assembled together to form a complete assembly suitable for mounting in the GIS building.
The arrangement of the switchgear shall be such as to enable later extension of the busbars
and bays, as indicated in the drawings.
In principle, the arrangement shall follow the latest modern engineering practice, in order to
ensure optimum continuity and reliability of supply, as well as the safety of the operating and
maintenance staff.
The arrangement of the switchgear shall be in such a way that any part can be removed without
interruption or disturbance to adjacent feeders or circuits.
To secure minimum time of repair, all Devices, driving mechanisms and components shall be
respectively interchangeable to those of similar other feeders or spare parts as a complete unit.
The arrangement of the switchgear shall provide adequate access for checking and
maintenance. GIS control devices and instruments (control switches, meters, indicators, etc)
shall always be accessible for operation

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 5
It’s required that the three phases of each switch bay are to be arranged side by side.
Segregated phase blocks of equipment in which one phase of each switch bay is mounted in a
separate block are not acceptable.
Each line-up of switchgear shall be suitable, and designed for future extension on either end
without any drilling, cutting or welding on the existing equipment. To add equipment, it shall not
be necessary to move or relocate the existing switchgear bays. The equipment shall be so
designed that the outage requirements for such extensions are minimal, so that all existing
feeder circuits and at least one complete set of busbars can be retained in service at all times.
An operator standing in the normal operating position shall not be endangered by any moving
external part of the switchgear.
All switchgear shall be provided with adequate safety tagging and mechanical lockout features
designed to lock a device in all its operating positions and prevent any operation of the locked
device. All switchgear, equipment and structures shall be equipped with adequate connections
for temporary maintenance earthing equipment.
Parts of the switchgear providing connections to outdoor equipment such as gas insulated bus
ducts (GIB) and terminal equipment to other devices shall be installed outdoors.
Outdoor/Indoor GIS and GIB equipment shall be minimum IP 65 class, rust proof and shall
meet extreme climatic conditions in GCC like dust, high humidity and high temperatures.
External earth looping links shall be provided at each gas chamber barrier joints to avoid the
arcing phenomena (EMC) during switching in addition to GIS earthing.
There shall be suitable arrangements for HV Test of future extensions keeping the outage on
the rest of the switchgear to a minimum.
The GIS assembly shall be provided with necessary permanent type ladders and galleries /
catwalk structure fitted with handrails and mobile platform / access ladders for access to all
levels of equipment during normal operation or maintenance. A two-step ladder shall be
provided for each substation to reach all the components in Local Control Cubicle (LCC).
The switchgear room layout shall respect maintenance requirements, minimum clearances as
defined in Tender drawing which shall allow for full mobility of the gas handling plant and mobile
access ladders & along the switchgear room and around the switchgear.
The design of secondary components of switchgear such as sensors, gas monitoring units, etc.
shall be in such a way that outage of circuit /equipment will not be required during replacement,
testing and calibration.
Arrangement of the individual switchgear bays shall be such as to achieve optimum space
saving, neat and logical arrangement, adequate accessibility to all external components and for
adequate spacing for overhead line feeder terminations/Reactor connection from the physical
and electrical clearances point of view.
Expansion joints/bellows in outdoor GIB shall be treated and protected to withstand corrosion
under climatic conditions as specified.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 6
Busbar connections and enclosures shall be designed to absorb the effects of thermal
expansion without impairing the guaranteed performance of the equipment and without
application of mechanical stress to the supporting structure both in normal operation and in
case of short circuit of specified duration.
Additional gas tight barrier shall be provided at the extreme end of the bus bar to facilitate for
future bus bar extension works.
Bus ducts terminating on transformers / reactors shall have a small gas zone with isolating
valve or communication cone.
Each GIS Bay shall consist of the following arc and gas tight HV compartments as a minimum:
-
a. Busbar section for each bay.
b. Busbar disconnector and earth switch
c. Section between busbar disconnector and circuit breaker (with or without CT)
d. Circuit breaker (with or without CT) compartment
e. Feeder compartment
f. Gas tight barrier for gantry bus duct for all feeders.
g. Voltage Transformers.
h. Cable compartments.
i. Surge Arrestor
All GIS devise status indication to Remote (DCS) shall be facilitated using direct driven auxiliary
contact.
4.2.1.1 Maintenance, Repair and Extension (MRE) Facilities

Means shall be provided to enable gas system to be safely replenished while the equipment is
in service. All the components of the GIS shall be easily removable for maintenance, repair and
extension without provision of any temporary structure.
The modular design of the switchgear shall offer maximum flexibility from standpoint of MRE
and shall comply with the following criteria:
the MRE on one busbar shall be possible with the other busbar in operation,
the MRE on one switchgear bay shall be possible with all other switchgear bays in normal
operation on one busbar,

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 7
the MRE on one bus coupler bay shall be possible with one busbar at the time in normal
operation and all switchgear bays in normal operation.
MRE testing on one switchgear bay shall be possible with all other switchgear bays in normal
operation on one bus bar.
4.2.2 Enclosure
The enclosure must be made of steel or aluminum alloy, cast or welded. The switchgear shall
be of compact design, fully encapsulated and Sulphur-hexafluoride (SF6) insulated. It shall be
constructed for the single-phase and shall include all necessary switches and instrument
transformers, as detailed in the attached single-line diagrams. The switchgear shall be supplied
complete with all auxiliary equipment necessary for operation, routine maintenance, repairs or
extensions.
The switchgear shall be constructed of suitable thickness to withstand the mechanical and
thermal stresses due to short circuits.
The enclosure shall allow for:
- The filling process;

- The full differential pressure possible across the enclosure walls or partitions;
- The resulting pressure in the event of an accidental leak between the compartments in
the case of adjacent compartments having different service pressures if overpressure
is not monitored;
- The possibility of the occurrence of an internal fault.
Field weld should be avoided. However, if same is necessary, it will be performed away from
any insulator to prevent overheating of insulator.
The switchgear shall be designed for continuous operation under all system operating
conditions, including sudden change of load and voltage and short circuits within its ratings.
The equipment shall be designed to withstand normal operating voltage even if the inside gas
pressure decreases to atmospheric pressure.
Components that may require to be replaced and standard assemblies that may be transferred
from one circuit to another, shall be interchangeable and, if required, this shall be demonstrated
by the Contractor.
Busbars and all electrical connections shall be made of approved materials, and suitable
measures shall be taken to prevent corona discharge, particularly at edges and corners.
The switchgear enclosures shall be earthed through an appropriate tinned copper earth
conductor to be suitably connected to the station earthing grid, at least at two opposite points.
The insulators shall furthermore confine any internal faults to the respective section of the
switchgear. Each insulator used shall be tested for partial discharge as a routine test prior to
assembly in the switchgear.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 8
Also, to avoid any internal fault damaging complete system, each busbar shall be segregated
into separate compartments: each circuit breaker, disconnecting switch, voltage transformer
and surge arrester shall be in separate gas compartments. Each bays shall have different
compartments. Indoor and outdoor parts shall have separate compartments.
Viewing windows shall be provided at the switchgear to ensure that switchgear component can
be inspected during installation or maintenance.
On each separate gas compartment, the following connections shall be provided:
- Suitable pressure-vacuum connection points for fitting of the gas service cart;
- Suitable valves for gas filling, purging and sampling;
- A suitable valve with special connection for fitting the portable pressure gauges.
- Fittings as well as refilling facilities shall have vacuum couplings, so that no gas can
escape by opening for testing or maintenance purposes.
- All SF6 gas-filling, monitoring and sampling ports in the GIS should be equipped with
standard non-return type fittings to avoid degassing of the compartment during
maintenance.
Rupture diaphragms shall be provided in each compartment to allow for pressure relief and a
high degree of protection under fault conditions. It shall be ensured that nobody standing in the
control aisles is exposed to any avoidable danger.
Particular attention shall be paid to the sealing of the housing joints, so that the SF 6 gas need
not be replenished within reasonable periods. The Contractor shall guarantee that gas loss
shall be less than 0.5% and 1.0% per year.
If in spite of all possible safety measures an arc should occur, the following is required:
- The effects of an internal arcing fault must be limited to the related gas compartment.
- Each gas compartment must have its own pressure relief device to provide instant and
safe discharge of accidental overpressure during internal arc. Rupture diaphragms shall
be preferably used as pressure relief mechanisms. Such gas discharge must be
directed away from the normal operation position of the switchgear so that persons
standing at location are not subjected to gas inhalation.. If necessary, diverter nozzles
shall be provided to ensure that the gas is directed away from this position. Internal
relief devices between adjacent compartments are not acceptable.
- All earthing connections shall remain operational.
- The enclosure of the switchgear shall withstand the thermal effects of an arc at the full
rated short-circuit current for the specified rated short-time withstand.
When the insulating gas pressure within any compartment drops to atmospheric pressure, the
switchgear must be able to withstand its rated voltage / 3 to earth

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 9
Joints of different metals that could lead to electrolytic corrosion shall be avoided.
The system employed shall be of the electrically continuous enclosure type allowing free
circulation of induced current in the enclosures. The enclosures shall be cylindrical in shape
and designed for maximum shielding to minimize electromagnetic forces caused by short circuit
currents.
Where the GIS bus passes through building walls and other enclosures, suitable seal or plates
shall be provided.
Each Busbar and bus duct enclosures shall be segregated into gas tight compartments of such
volumes so as to ensure the amount of time necessary for discharging the SF6 gas and its
subsequent vacuum treatment and refilling does not exceed 6 hours for the largest
compartment.
4.2.2.1 Design Temperature
The design temperature is the highest enclosure wall temperature under normal service
conditions. It is defined as ambient air temperature plus temperature rise due to the rated
normal current.
An adequate margin shall exist between the dew point of the gas and the maximum ambient
temperature.
The equipment shall be suitable for operation under the environment conditions of the section 5
and according the General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000
The temperature rise limits shall be in accordance with IEC 62271-203. The maximum
temperature rise of the external surface of enclosures shall not cause harm on touching.
Thermal rating for all current carrying parts shall be a minimum of 1 sec. at rated maximum
voltage (kVrms) for rated symmetrical short-circuit current.
4.2.2.2 Design Pressure
Internal Pressure
The internal design pressure will be the pressure exerted by SF6 gas, at the design density
selected by the manufacturer and at the ambient temperature.
External Pressure
The vessels shall also be designed to withstand full vacuum, with internal pressure as defined
above in adjacent sections.
Special Additional Requirements
Each part subject to stresses caused by internal pressure shall be checked for stress under the
unusual condition of pressure rise caused by an internal arc.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 10
The pressure rise shall be calculated for an arc of 1 second duration, with rated short time
withstand current. Two conditions shall be met:
 The housing shall withstand the arc without burning through and puncturing;
 The stress of any component, under this pressure, shall not exceed the following values:
- 100% of the yield strength or 82% of the tensile strength, provided each enclosure is
subjected to a non-destructive test (e.g., x-ray) during production;
- 80% of the yield strength or 62% of the tensile strength in other cases.
4.2.2.3 Relief Device
Each pressurised section shall be provided with a readily accessible rupture disc complete with
flanges and outlet pipe or elbow directed away from normal location of personnel.
The rupture pressure of the disc shall be coordinated with the vessel internal design pressure
for normal conditions.
The disc, holder and piping shall be sized such that the pressure shall not rise higher than 0.9
times the special arcing pressure during discharge.
Internal relief devices shall not be installed because adjacent compartments will be affected.
Arc barriers to limit the travel of the arc could be used.
For protection against over-pressure during gas filling, a relief valve set at internal design
pressure shall be provided on filling equipment.
4.2.2.4 Thermal Expansion
Adequate means shall be provided for accommodating the effects of thermal expansion of the
switchgear / bus ducts without undue stress on welded or bolted connections on any part of the
switchgear or on the switchgear support structure.
Wherever necessary, bellows or other means shall be provided to absorb expansions and
contractions and relative movement between various items of equipment.
4.2.2.5 Dynamic Forces
The completely assembled and installed equipment shall be designed to safely withstand the
dynamic forces due to short circuits and seismic forces.
4.2.3 SF6 Gas
GIS equipment shall be supplied with new SF6 gas only, as per IEC 60376.
Each gas filled compartment shall be equipped with static filters. These filters shall be capable
of absorbing any decomposition products and moisture that may have ingressed into the
enclosures.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 11
The guaranteed gas losses shall be less than 0.5% and 1% per year. This value is binding as
part of Contractor’s obligations under the guarantee period
The initial gas filling of the entire switchgear including the usual losses during commissioning
shall be included in the Contractor’s scope of work. Also, initial filling must guarantee gas
services periods of not less than 10 years. Additional SF6 will be required as part of mandatory
spare parts.
Each gas compartment shall be fitted with gas filters, driers or desiccants for the absorption of
moisture and the gaseous products of switching.
4.2.4 Gas Monitoring System
Each gas compartment shall be supplied with a gas density monitoring device which shall
continually monitor the gas within the compartment. Each device shall provide a remote
signaling contact for alarm purposes when the gas density falls below a recommended level. A
second signaling contact shall be made when the density reaches the minimum gas density.
4.2.4.1 Gas Monitor
The gas density monitors can be “advanced digital gas density monitors” with digital module
and HMI installed in each LCC. It shall be capable of being calibrated and replaced while the
station is in service and without removing gas from the compartment.
The gas monitor of each bay must be carried out for all three phases commonly. It shall be
centrally located in a freely accessible position. This gas service panel must have suitable
fittings and valves to fulfil the following functions:
 for circuit-breaker compartments: indication of the pressure and monitoring of the gas
density with alarm for drop in density, lock-out of the circuit-breaker in case of a further drop.
 For switchgear gas compartments: indication of the pressure and monitoring of the gas
density in two stages.
 Additional monitoring of the gas density with alarm in case of increase of density of gas
compartments neighbouring compartments with a higher density.
The gas monitoring shall be done by means of density and pressure switches and pressure
gauges.
4.2.4.2 Gas Density Switches
The gas density in each gas compartment shall be monitored continuously by voltage-free
density switches. It shall be directly secured on the enclosure, and shall have two threshold
levels to continuously monitor the gas density. One such density switch shall be provided for
each GIS compartment to initiate remote alarms at two levels:
Level I - non-urgent alarm for all the chambers of each bay to annunciate the need for gas
refilling, due to normal gas leakage.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 12
Level II - Urgent alarm for all the chambers (except CB), to indicate that the density has
reached the lowest level at which the specified insulation levels are maintained.
Level II - Urgent alarm as CB lockout for CB of each bay, to indicate that the density has
reached the further lowest level at which the specified insulation levels are maintained.
SF6 high pressure alarms for applicable chambers of each bay, to annunciate the need for gas
refilling, due to an accidental leak between the compartment in case of adjacent compartments
having different service pressure.
4.2.4.3 Pressure Switches
In addition to the continuously operating density switches, a pressure switch acting for the
highest permitted gas pressure shall be provided for each separate gas compartment.
The high-pressure switch shall give an alarm at the pressure corresponding to the highest
ambient temperature, normal density during filling up, and bus current equal to the maximum
rated value.
4.2.4.4 Pressure Gauges
A pressure gauge shall be installed for each separate gas compartment and Pressure gauge
shall be located in such a position that readings can be taken easily standing on the floor.
4.2.5 Circuit Breaker
The requirements of IEC 62271-100 and 62271-203 in respect of service operations - making
and breaking of fault current - shall apply to the specified circuit breakers.
The circuit breakers shall be single or double breaking chamber, SF6 puffer type as arc-
quenching and insulating medium and shall comply, with the technical requirements in terms of
performance (breaking rating, operating sequence, TRV, capacitive breaking current capability,
etc.).
Preference will be given to horizontal mounting of the circuit breakers. The mounting shall
enable easy access for maintenance and/or replacement of contacts, parts of arcing chamber
and control mechanism. Vertical mounting will also be considered should such an arrangement
result in economics and satisfy maintenance requirements.
Line circuit breaker, shall be equipped with suitable single-pole or three-pole auto-re-closing
facilities. The operating/drive mechanism shall be trip-free, suitable for single-pole or three-pole
tripping and shall have anti-pumping features.
Lock-outs shall be incorporated in each circuit-breaker to prevent operation whenever gas

pressure, hydraulic pressure, etc., are less than the set values for satisfactory operation of the
circuit breaker, or in case of any unsafe irregularity.
Any decomposition products from the arcing process as well as any residual gas-contained
moisture shall be precipitated in a molecular filter cartridge.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 13
An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit breaker’s

operating mechanism to show whether the circuit breaker is in an opened or closed position.
The circuit breaker shall make and break the phase circuits simultaneously and, in the event of
any phase failing to complete closing operation, provision must be made for automatic tripping
of all three phases of the circuit-breakers. Pole discrepancies shall be alarmed locally and
remotely.
All control and monitoring equipment for the circuit-breaker and its accessories shall be
installed in a local drive control cubicle. The related control wiring shall be wired to plug-in
connectors.
Provisions shall be included with the circuit breakers to enable timing measurements of the
main current carrying moveable contacts to ensure operating speeds are correct. Such
measurements shall be accomplished under normal gas pressure with an oscillograph and/or
time distance type recorder.
Operating Mechanism
The breaker operating mechanism shall preferably be of spring operating type or electro-
hydraulic stored energy type. It shall be suitable for triple pole and if necessary for single pole
automatic re-closure. Wherever possible, the use of rubber or synthetic gaskets in the high-
pressure hydraulic system shall be avoided. Otherwise, use of an approved sealing system
with approved sealing materials shall be proposed. The hydraulic pressure shall be locally
indicated by a gauge.
For hydraulic operating mechanisms, the charging of the energy storage element shall be
carried out by a fully automatic pump unit. Drop of hydraulic pressure below its normal value
shall be monitored before it leads to circuit-breaker lock out. The control system of the circuit-
breaker must inhibit the operation if there is insufficient energy stored for at least one further
CO cycle. The pump motors shall each be equipped with operation hour meters, and the whole
hydraulic system shall be connected by means of steel or copper tubes.
Pneumatic operating mechanisms are not acceptable.
For hydraulic operating mechanism, the hydraulic accumulator pressure shall be monitored
continuously and contacts shall be provided for close blocking, trip blocking and auto re-close
blocking. In addition, separate contacts shall be provided for local indication at LCC and remote
indication and start/stop of pump motors. The possibility of simultaneous starting of all pump
motors connected to 110V DC battery shall be avoid.
The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be provided with local operating energy storage
sufficient to allow a complete “duty-cycle” operation required by IEC, following the loss of supply
from the main energy storage system. The control system of the circuit-breaker must inhibit the
operation if there is insufficient energy stored for at least one further CO cycle.
Operating mechanisms shall be equipped with dc shunt coils for tripping and closing and
suitable for local control and remote control. Power supply for all operating devices and control

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 14
shall be 110 V DC. Each trip coil shall operate satisfactorily between 70 Vd.c. and 140 Vd.c.
and the close coil shall operate satisfactorily between 90 Vd.c. and 140 Vd.c.
For motor charged spring operating mechanism, indication shall be provided for spring
discharged, locally at CB operating mechanism/LCC and contact for remote indication.
Electrical anti-pumping facilities, local test switch for testing closing and tripping of each pole
and three-pole operation shall be provided. A mechanically operated indicator shall be provided
on each circuit beaker’s operating pole to clearly show whether the circuit breaker is in an
opened or closed position as follow:
Sign Background color
Open position OPEN Green

Closed position CLOSED Red
Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with at least two trip coils. Provisions for manual
emergency operation must be made. All circuit-breakers must be suitable for remote control.
Main contact position of all three poles must be indicated by directly activated auxiliary position
auxiliary contacts wired to a plug connector in the local control panel for customer's use
Hence, Sufficient number of N/O and N/C auxiliary electrical contacts shall be provided
for using in interlocking circuits and for status indications at the remote and supervisory control
centers and any other requirement and an at least 10% NO & NC contacts (in no case less than
4 N/O and 4 N/C contacts) shall be wired up to LCC for future use by the Employer. Each
circuit-breaker shall be provided with an operations counter and Open - close operation of CB
shall be considered as one operation.
Circuit breaker closing circuit shall be provided with NO contacts on both polarities of supply to
closing coil (Positive & negative sides) and closing coil shall energize only when both positive &
negative contacts are closed.
Provide manual closing and tripping device for operating breaker when the control power source
fails.
4.2.6 Disconnect Switches and Earthing Switches - General
All disconnect switches and earthing switches shall be equipped with local as well as remote
controlled power-operated mechanism. An emergency manual operating device shall also be
provided. The DC power supply to the mechanism shall be automatically disconnected and
local/remote electrical operation shall be prevented when manual operating device is engaged.
The power to the disconnect-switch and earthing switch in the enclosure shall be transmitted via
gas-sealed pressure-resistant shaft glands. Once initiated, the motor mechanism shall
complete an open or close operation without requiring the initiating contact to be held closed.
The disconnect and earthing switches shall be provided with pad-locking facilities to permit
locking both in open and closed positions.
All disconnect and earthing switches shall have mechanical position indicators for the main
contact movement, directly coupled to the driving shaft and clearly visible from outside.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 15
4.2.7 Disconnect Switches
The requirements of IEC 62271-102 shall apply to the specified disconnect switches.
Disconnect switches shall be designed in such a manner as to prevent alteration of the switch
position during short circuit conditions. Fluttering of the contacts must, in any case, be
impossible.
The disconnect switch shall be capable of interrupting rated capacitive currents originating from
switching busbars, busducts and very short lengths of cable and inductive currents.
The disconnect switches shall be equipped with adjustable, self-aligning high pressure type
silver-faced copper contacts. The contacts shall be capable of carrying full rated and short
circuit currents without over heating or welding. Contact design shall be such that no shunt
current shall flow through the contact springs.
The operating mechanism for disconnect switches shall be d.c. motor operated, with provision
for remote and local control.
Emergency hand-operating facilities (with padlocking facilities) shall be provided which shall
allow the operations of the isolators in case of motor or supply failure.
An approved mechanically operated indicator, positively and solidly connected to the drive
shaft, shall be provided on each operating mechanism to show whether the switch is in open or
close position; linkage and levers are not acceptable. The related position indicators shall be
visible easily.
Provide manual crank operation for disconnect switches, when the control power source fail;
whenever the crank is inserted in the drive mechanism, it shall not be possible to operate the
device electrically.
Each disconnect switch shall be provided with auxiliary contacts wired to a plug connector in the
local control panel for customer's use. At least 10% of the NO & NC electrical auxiliary contacts,
but in no case less than 3 NO and 3 NC contacts (including special type of contacts where
applicable), shall be provided for each disconnector and earthing switch and wired up to LCC
for future use by the Employer.
Manual or Electrical interlocking shall be provided on each disconnect switches to prevent its
opening or closing if the associated circuit breaker is closed. This same function shall be
reflected in the control system also.
4.2.8 Earthing Switches
The requirements of IEC 62271-102 shall apply to the specified earthing switches.
Each earthing switch shall be designed to withstand full short-circuit current in the closed
position.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 16
The earthing switches shall be so designed such that they connect the conductive path, directly
to earth.
Each earthing switch shall be interlocked with its own main switch to prevent closure of the
earthing switch when the main switch is closed and vice versa. Local indication of a “safe to
operate” status shall be provided.
Provide manual crank operation for earthing switches, when the control power source fail;
whenever the crank is inserted in the drive mechanism, it shall not be possible to operate the
shaft, shall be provided on each operating mechanism to show whether the earthing switch is in
open or close position. Linkage and levers are not acceptable. The related position indicators
shall be visible easily.
Each earthing switch shall be provided with auxiliary contacts wired to a plug connector in the
local control panel for customer's use.
Earthing switches, high-speed and maintenance types, shall be provided with 10 kV bushings to
provide access to the active parts of GIS, for measuring and testing purposes through the
closed contacts, without opening the enclosure.
Two types of earthing switches are required:
High speed Earthing switches
Capable of closing onto full short circuit fault without any damage and after that it shall still
retain its full insulation strength.
High-speed earthing switches shall be provided at the outgoing end(s) of the following feeders:
transmission line, power transformers, shunt reactors, back-to-back converters and for future
transmission line bays. They shall be designed to withstand an accidental switching onto a live
counterpart, i.e., they shall be of the make-proof type. Furthermore, high-speed earthing
switches shall have capability for high-speed opening operation (both electrically and manually)
in order to switch small inductive or capacitive currents per IEC 62271, considering the transient
recovery switching duty imposed on the earthing switch.
The operating mechanism of High-Speed Earthing Switches shall be spring operated type. Only
upon receiving close command, the spring shall be fully charged and capable to close the High-
Speed Earthing Switches.
Maintenance Earthing Switches
The switches shall be provided with a single drive unit. The operating mechanism shall be
charged up upon “CLOSE” and “OPEN” command. Padlock facilities and padlocks shall be
provided for the operating mechanism to be securely locked in either open or closed position.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 17
Emergency hand-operating facilities (with padlocking facilities) shall be provided for close or
open operation which shall allow the operation of earthing switch in case of motor - or supply
failure.
Maintenance earthing switches (electrically operated and emergency manual operation facility)
shall be provided on both sides of every circuit breaker.
Maintenance Earthing switches shall be provided with minimum 10KV bushings to provide
access to the active parts of GIS, for measuring and testing purposes through the closed
contacts, without opening the enclosure.
Locking facilities shall be provided for both maintenance and high-speed earthing switch also.
4.2.9 Current Transformer
All CT’s shall conform to IEC 61869 (all applicable parts).
Current transformers shall be of the ring core design with grounded cores. No slip-on types are
acceptable.
The windings shall be located in accordance with the requirements of the single-line diagrams
in Tender Drawings. CTs shall be located in a separate compartment. CTs located in same
gas compartment as Circuit Breaker are not acceptable.
They shall have a short time primary current rating not less than that of the associated
switchgear. Secondary windings of each CT shall be earthed at one point only, preferably at
first entering panel. The thermal rating of the current transformer shall allow, at site conditions,
a 50% continuous overloading referred to nominal rating of the current transformer.
All transformers are to be provided with an identifying label giving manufacturer, type, ratio,
class, output and serial number.
Where multiple ratio secondary windings are provided, the above-mentioned label shall clearly
indicate the terminal connection required for each ratio, and they shall be clearly indicated on
the appropriate diagrams and drawings.
Current transformers shall have secondary terminals outside the high-voltage enclosure,
mounted in suitable, accessible terminal boxes. All secondary leads of all current transformers
shall be wired to spring loaded type terminals with shorting-provision located at CT/VT junction
box in GIS. CT/VT connections shall be derived directly from CT/VT junction box located at the
GIS to each protection and metering scheme. Connection from CT/VT to LCC might not be
required unless same is used in LCC schemes.
To guarantee the correct protection relay operation, through-fault stability calculations shall be
submitted showing the correctness of the chosen CT core, i.e., rated output, class of accuracy,
rated accuracy limit factors, the rated primary current, turns ratio, knee-point e.m.f. and resistance
of the secondary windings (corrected to the maximum service temperature).

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 18
The Contractor shall coordinate closely with the protection requirements, and shall make all
required data available for relay calculations at an early stage of the design stage.
For outgoing feeders, the Contractor shall ensure that the CT characteristics match the data of the
relevant remote feeder CT’s. This requirement will prevail upon any figures in the Technical Data
Schedules.
The rating and the features of the current transformers shall be in accordance with the
Technical Data Schedules. The minimum rated output of CT’s shall be as per the Technical
Data Schedules or otherwise approved, based on a stability calculation to be submitted by the
Contractor. The magnetizing curves for each CT protection core shall be submitted for
approval.
4.2.10 Voltage Transformers
SF6 insulated voltage transformers shall be of the inductive type, constructed and tested in
accordance with IEC 61869 (all applicable parts).
They shall be fully encapsulated, the gas compartment to be segregated from the adjacent
compartments. Minimum rated output shall be 100 VA, if not agreed otherwise.
The thermal rating of the voltage transformer shall allow, at site conditions, a 20% continuous
overloading referred to nominal rating of the voltage transformer.
To allow performance of high voltage site tests, the busbar VT’s shall be connected through
hand-operated disconnectors with earthing switch which are to be provided with padlock
facilities and padlocks.
Alternatively, VTs with capabilities of withstanding high voltage tests at 20-300Hz supply
frequency can be proposed without any hand-operated isolator.
Furthermore, to allow the testing of cables without the removal of the V.T., disconnection
facilities shall be provided accordingly.
The secondary terminals shall be located in an accessible, grounded terminal boxes on the
voltage transformer itself. The secondary connections must be wired to spring loaded type
terminals with isolation-provision located at CT/VT junction box in GIS. CT/VT connections shall
be derived directly from CT/VT junction box located at the GIS to each protection and metering
scheme. Connection from CT/VT to LCC might not be required unless same is used in LCC
schemes.
Secondary circuits shall be suitably supervised by MCB’s with auxiliary contact of adequate
characteristics, located in the Local Control Cabinet. The auxiliary contact shall be used for
monitoring purposes.
The rating and the features of the voltage transformers shall be in accordance with the
Technical Data Schedules.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 19
4.2.11 Metal Oxide Surge Arrester
The arresters shall comply with IEC 60099-4, and 60099-5.
In order to ensure safe operation of the HV network at all considerable switching conditions,
surge arresters shall be applied where specified in the scope of supply. These surge arresters
shall be capable to ease the strain on transformer / Reactor windings when being switched off
and to protect the HV equipment from lightning and switching surges. Furthermore, they shall
be designed to prevent any oscillating over-voltages during normal and/or abnormal switching
conditions.
The design data of the arresters shall be proven by calculations and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer/Authority. The Contractor shall further prove by calculation that the
outdoor bushings are within the arrester’s protection range.
The arresters shall be of the SF6 gas-insulated type.
The arresters shall have pressure relief devices and shall be fitted with operation counters and
leakage current indicators.
The arresters shall be built-up from hermetically sealed units containing valve resistor blocks
with non-linear characteristics without spark gaps.
The surge arresters shall be fitted with non-re-settable surge counter having five-digit
cyclometer dial capable of registering up to 5 discharges per second, leakage current monitor
having a scale range of 0-50 mA peak/√2 (non-linear scale) and bypass shunt to establish
continuity to ground from the surge arrester ground terminal.
4.2.12 Overhead Line, Cable and Transformer / Reactor Terminations
The Contractor shall design the required interfaces between GIS and HV cables or Power
transformer / Reactor terminals as applicable.
The Contractor shall ensure the SF6 insulated connections between the power transformers,
reactors, the outdoor air bushings and the switchgear feeders GIS building, make adequate
allowance for differential settlement of the concrete floors of autotransformers or supporting
structures.
Isolating links shall be provided between the cable sealing ends and the GIS to enable HV
testing of the same as well as fault location measures.
To facilitate maintenance or fault location, the size of a section or compartment of the GIS
busduct must be limited to a manageable size.
The contractor shall provide with the proposal, representative drawings of the proposed GIS
interfaces with power transformers, cable and overhead line terminals.
The manufacturer of the switchgear is required to coordinate design of SF6 filled enclosures
with bus duct termination/cable sealing ends, overhead lines and transformers bushings

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 20
supplied by other manufacturers such that the integrity of gas and/or air/oil pressure in
compartments is maintained.
To limit fast transient potential, rise due switching device operates, appropriate protections shall
be provided in the insulation joints.
Cable terminations for feeders / transformers / reactor shall be SF6 type and it shall be a
separate gas tight chamber provided with all accessories such as PRD, gas port, filters etc.
GIS adapter for Transformer / Reactor oil-SF6 bushing
In case power transformers and shunt reactors are to be connected to the switchgear via gas-
insulated conductors, the supply of gas-insulated connection bus with the terminal for the
conductor coming from the transformer shall be deemed as part of the GIS. The support of the
conductor coming out of the transformer including the associated SF6-to-oil transformer
bushing shall be considered as part of the transformer supplier. This interface shall be
designed in order to provide fast replacement of the transformer unit.
Effective gas tight seals shall be provided between the duct enclosure and the SF6-to-oil
bushing.
Cable Termination
Suitable SF6 gas-filled cable sealing end boxes shall be provided, where required, for
accommodating XLPE cable terminations. The boxes shall be designed to accept the cable
along with its terminations from below. The scope shall include necessary cable supports and
cable grounding facilitations.
All cable connections shall generally comply with IEC 62271-209.
The SF6-to-XLPE and SF6-to-oil bushing at the power cable pothead termination shall allow for
power cable disconnection from the gas-insulated bus through a removable link and provide
means to permit AC field testing of the cable. It shall have shielded tulip-contact, epoxy and
SF6 insulation. SF6-to-oil bushings shall be provided with barriers which will prevent oil
migration into switchgear in case of porcelain failure.
Effective and long-life gas-tight seals shall be provided between the cable sealing end and the
cable termination enclosure. It shall be possible to accommodate high voltage cables of all type
up to 2500 mm2 conductor cross-section at the cable end terminations.
All the GIS apertures intended for future cable terminations shall be sealed with effective cover
plates to safeguard against SF6 leakage.
Overhead Line Terminal / Outdoor Mounted Bushing
Overhead transmission lines shall be connected through air/SF6 gas-insulated bushings made
of glazed porcelain or composite material. The required clearance in air shall be achieved by
means of angled compartments or by provisions of spread bus ducts with vertically arranged
air/gas bushings. The connections to the switchgear units shall be established through wall

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 21
penetrating bus ducts with extension/compensation bellows which cater for the temperature
difference between indoor and outdoor equipment.
The outdoor insulators shall have a creepage distance of 40 mm/kV to cater for the site
conditions of polluted air. The profile of the insulator body shall cater for the extreme pollution
conditions (marine and desert contamination). The insulator body shall withstand the live-line
water spray system for washing unless provided with agreed coating.
The switchgear shall be designed to provide the required gantry to attach the end of the
transmission lines.
Incase use of porcelain bushings, it shall be coated with silicon coating. All necessary terminal
studs, overhead line clamps and supports shall be provided.
4.2.13 Bus Ducts
Extension and anti-vibration compensators (bellows) shall be provided as mentioned below, to

balance out the prevailing climatic and internal load stresses as well as to compensate for
maximum envisaged settlements of foundations and floor levels.
Where necessary, suitable arrangements shall be provided for the thermal expansion and
contraction of the busbars without application of stress to the supporting structure, and for
different settlements of foundations in case of joints in the respective basement(s).
During actual work execution, the busduct length estimated according to preliminary layout
sketch, shall be adjusted as per final layout drawings.
The SF6 enclosures shall be constructed from materials, which shall be the same as the bus
bar enclosures provided with the main GIS switchgear and painted in the same color.
The design and installation of the bus ducts shall be fully coordinated with the civil design and
works in relation to the building height, wall openings, wall/roof embedment, structural supports
etc. and for requirement details of support structure Civil specification, shall be referred.
For direct connection onto transformers or reactors, the bus ducts shall be constructed with the
limitation on dimensional tolerances between phases and from the ground required by the
manufacturer of the transformer or reactor as the case may be. .
Bus ducts and their supports shall include any nonmagnetic material or insulations necessary
to prevent overheating or the induction of over voltages in the secondary circuits.
Sufficient number of power sockets rated for 63A shall be provided at interval of every 50m for
connecting gas handling machine if required for bus duct maintenance works.
4.2.14 Busbars
The conductors shall be made of aluminium alloy or drawn electrolytic copper. Both, the
conductors as well as the contacts for the conductor connections must be designed for the

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 22
continuous rated current of the switchgear under the ambient conditions and shall not exceed
the permissible temperature rise.
Adequate provision shall be made for absorption of the effects of thermal expansion of the
conductors and of the differential thermal expansion between the conductors and their
enclosures. The conductors shall be supported within their enclosures by means of insulators
with sufficient strength to withstand the specified short circuit forces. The insulator material
shall be compatible with the compressed gas insulation and shall be equipped with suitable
skirts against possible contamination during operation.
4.2.15 Supporting Structures
All equipment supporting structures, access ladders, stairways, walkways, platforms,

transverse, longitudinal beams and supporting members, complete with all necessary hardware
required for the installation, operation and maintenance of the GIS shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor. The metallic structures shall be designed and manufactured
according to the Technical Specification 016403-2000-43ES-3200.
All steel structure members shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. All field assembly
joints shall be bolted; field welding shall not be acceptable.
Non-corrosive metal or plated steel shall be used for bolts and nuts throughout the work.
Suitable foundation channels and anchor bolts to support the switchgear assemblies shall be
provided. All mounting bolts, nuts and washers shall be provided to fasten the switchgear base
frames to the foundation channels.
4.2.16 Local Control Cabinet (LCC)
Each bay, shall be provided with a dedicated Local Control Cabinet, and shall be preferably
placed in front of their respective GIS bays.
4.2.16.1 Functions
Each bay shall be provided with a local control cubicle containing local control switches and a
mimic diagram for the operation and status indication of the circuit-breaker and all associated
isolators and earth switches together with selector switches to prevent local and remote and
supervisory controls being in operation simultaneously. Closing of the circuit-breaker from the
local control unit shall only be available when the breaker is isolated for maintenance purposes.
Local control cubicle shall be suitable for installation in a separate place and not attached to the
switchgear.
The main functions of the Local Control Cabinet are:
 Mimic panel showing the bay’s single line diagram, with circuit breaker, disconnect switches
and earthing switches controls (close and open commands) and equipment status
(open/close) by the means of semaphore type indicator or turn-and-push control switch with
discrepancy light (discrepancy switch). The mimic panel shall be located on front surface of
the LCC Cubicle and behind a glass or acrylic window-type door;

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 23
 Windows-type alarm fascia with sufficient number of alarms to indicate specific types of
abnormalities and their locations, equipped with inbuilt testing and resetting features as
detailed further in below paragraph;
 Each local control cabinet shall be supplied with an alarm unit/lamp box to indicate/ monitor
the bay alarms locally (gas pressure low, hydraulic lockout, supply failure etc.) with minimum
24/36 indicators. All required alarms to monitor switchgear abnormal conditions with
sufficient alarm windows shall be provided and subject to Engineer approval.
 Switchgear interlocking between circuit-breakers, disconnect-switches and earth-switches;
 Master control selector “Local-SCADA” shall determine either local electrical or remote
control of all devices and prevent simultaneous operation from both points. Local electrical
operation of devices shall be for maintenance purpose only;
 Metering of electrical parameters, analog units or multifunction with three simultaneous-
reading display (i.e. V, A, MW);
 Marshalling box for CT and VT secondary circuits, including those circuits destined to
substation control and protection, each phase of secondary VT circuit shall be protected by
an MCB with an auxiliary contact integrated to the Local Control Acquisition system and
directed to SCADA.
 Interface box for control, interlocking and protection circuits with protection panels.
 Interface with DCS and SCADA data acquisition.
Circuit-breaker control position selector, operating control switch and emergency trip push
button shall be installed in the Local Control Cubicle. Circuit-breaker control from this position
will be used under maintenance and emergency conditions only.
Local manual release facilities shall be provided for closing and tripping the circuit-breaker. The
operation of both releases shall be subject to lockout if insufficient stored energy is available.
Local manual releases shall be provided with locking off facilities.
Sufficient electrical terminals shall be provided for the termination and interconnection of all
cabling associated with remote and supervisory control, alarms, indications, protection and
internal ring main supplies.
Where control cabling between the local control cubicle and the switchgear are connected
through plugs and receptacles, the plugs and receptacle units shall not be interchangeable.
Circuit identifying labels shall be fitted at the front and rear of each individual circuit assembly
and on the local control cubicle. A single line diagram shall be marked along each bay showing
location of all items of switchgear.
There shall be at least 20% spare in terminal blocks.
4.2.16.2 Cabinet and Accessories
The control cabinet shall be of rigid construction, IP55 protection class with hinged doors
opening to 135° and provided with door stopper and means for locking the door in the open
position. One keyed door shall be provided with a flange to hold the other door shut. A three

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 24
point locking handle shall be provided to securely hold the doors closed at the top, bottom and
middle.
All fastenings shall be integral with the panel or door and provisions made for locking. Doors
and panels shall be fitted with sealing material suitable for the protection class specified.
Cubicles shall be well ventilated through vermin-proof louvers.
Each bay shall have its control cabinet containing:
a) Molded-case thermo-magnetic circuit breaker (MCB), for all a.c. and d.c. power supplies.
The MCB shall be sized in accordance with the loads and in coordination with the
distribution panel circuit breakers.
b) Each control circuit shall be protected by a miniature circuit-breaker with two auxiliary
contacts. One auxiliary contact of all MCBs shall be monitored as a common alarm and
the second one, will be provided to SCADA.
c) Anti-condensation heaters controlled by thermostat or humidistat;
d) Panel Lighting with door-operated switch and a double 240 Vac power outlet;
e) Stranded copper wiring tin-plated with polymeric fluoride insulation;
f) Terminal blocks mounted on asymmetrical rails (ENTRELEC or equivalent) and

accessories, 20% of free spare terminals shall be available for customer’s use;
g) A removable rectangular plate at the bottom for the entry of the cables;
h) A grounding busbar not less than 200 Sqmm with a connector suitable for 10-15 mm
diameter stranded copper conductor;
i) All the base plates shall be earthed and panel door shall be earthed via 16 Sqmm
braided Cu wires
j) Rear side of the panel doors shall be fitted with A3 size drawing pocket.
k) Labels shall be provided at both front and rear side for all installed components and
Panel main labels.
l) Indication lamps used within the panels shall be durable energy saving LED type and
shall be provided with test facility.
4.2.16.3 Design
Operating mechanism, auxiliary switches and associated relays, control switches, control cable
terminations, and other ancillary equipment shall be accommodated in sheet steel vermin proof
cubicles. The electrical apparatus so protected shall be designed so that the maximum
permitted rise in temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energized while the apparatus
is in operation.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 25
The arrangement of equipment within cubicles shall be such that access for maintenance or
removal of any item shall be possible with the minimum disturbance of associated apparatus.
Emergency trip button shall be mounted on the front of the cubicle and not behind the hinged
door. The emergency trip button must be conveniently placed. It shall operate both trip coils
from electrically separate contacts for local indication and remote operation alarm. The button
shall be colored red, either recessed or shrouded, protected by a discrete hinged cover and be
clearly labeled. A facility shall be provided to enable a wire seal to be used on the cover.
Sufficient electrical terminals shall be provided for the termination and interconnection of all
cabling associated with remote and supervisory control, alarms, indications, protection and local
ring main supplies.
Where control cabling between the local control cubicle and the switchgear are connected by
plug and socket boxes, the plug and sockets shall be discrete for each duty and shall be
discrete for each duty and shall not be interchangeable with other plugs and sockets within the
substation.
All CT terminals shall have isolation, shorting and injection test facilities. All VT terminals shall
have isolation and injection test facilities. Spring loaded type terminals with hook type
connectors are preferred for CT/VT application
Control Circuits, Circuit Breakers, Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
The operation shall be performed as follows:
a) Remotely, from the local station located in the control room or from SCADA control
center.
b) Locally, from the Local Control Cabinet
c) Locally and manually, from the operating mechanism with proper interlocks.
The control circuits shall be designed taking into consideration the following:
a) Control circuit provided with:

- “Open/Closed” push buttons
- “Local/Remote” and “Manual/Electric” selector switches
- “Open/Closed” interlocked contactors
- Test switches
- Limit switches
b) A separate DC supply for the motor and the control circuits. The DC motor and all other
circuits shall be protected by an MCB breakers. They shall be provided with test switches
interlocked by the "Manual/Electric" selector switch.
c) A circuit containing heating elements and a thermostat protected by moulded circuit
breakers.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 26
d) The terminal blocks should be Entrelec M4/6 type or equivalent, with 20 % of free
terminal blocks. The terminal blocks will be installed on asymmetrical rails.
f) An electrical outlet, 240 V, 20 A.
g) Interior cabinet lighting (240 V).
h) The wiring should be polymeric fluoride insulated stranded tinned copper conductors,
with a minimum section of 2.5 mm 2.
i) The wires shall be of the following colours:
- d.c. circuits: ...............................................grey
- CT circuits .................................................Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
- PT circuits..................................................Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
- Alarms circuits ...........................................blue
- Grounding ..................................................Green with Yellow stripes
- 3-phase, 4W power circuits .......................red, yellow, blue, black (neutral)
- 1-phase, 2W a.c. power circuits .................red, black (neutral)
k) The motorized operating mechanism will permit electrical local and remote operation and
the manual, local operation only. Two contacts from the selector switches in positions
"Manual/Electric" and "Local/Remote" should be cabled to the terminal blocks for
Purchaser's use. The selector switch contacts shall simultaneously isolate both negative
and positive terminals of the control circuit.
4.2.16.4 SCADA Interface
The LCC shall be provided with digital interface for SCADA purposes; the communication
protocol, shall be according UCA International (IEC 61850) over Ethernet or other protocol
approved by the Engineer/Authority.
The following interface points shall be available.
Control
 Close/Open command for each circuit breaker, disconnect switch and earthing switch
 Equipment-unable-to-operate signal for the circuit breakers, disconnect switches and
earthing switches locked by any interlocking scheme.
Equipment Status
 Open/Closed status of each circuit breaker, disconnect switch and earthing switch. Both
contacts, Open (52b, 89b) and Closed (52a, 89a) shall be available.
 Master control switch “Local-SCADA” contacts in both positions.
Alarms

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 27
 Failure alarm of breakers: SF6 low pressure, discrepancy of poles, loss of a.c. or d.c. power
supply, operating mechanism unloaded (unloaded spring or low-pressure hydraulic system),
excessive time of motor operation (spring mechanism or hydraulic pump). Loss of voltage
and d.c. supply MCB open.
 Failure alarm of disconnect and earthing switches: loss of a.c. or d.c power supply,
excessive time of operation.
 Two levels (alarm and trip) of low density/pressure of each compartment of SF6.
 Watchdog of IED’s (multifunction metering, SF6 monitoring, GIS control, etc.).
 Any other additional alarms found required during detail engineering stage.
Metering
 Reading of each feeder: current and voltage (three phases), MW, MVAR, MVA, power
factor, frequency;
 Reading of each busbar: voltage (three phases)
4.2.16.5 Auxiliary Contacts and Relays
Auxiliary contacts positively driven in both directions shall be provided on all circuit-breakers
and isolators for local and remote indication, control and interlocking and repeat relays where
necessary.
With each circuit-breaker, isolating device, and earthing device, there shall be supplied all
necessary auxiliary switches, contactors and mechanism for indication, protection, metering,
control, interlocking, supervisory and other services. All such auxiliary switches, contactors and
mechanism for indication, protection, metering, control, interlocking, supervisory and other
services shall be enclosed in dust free housing. All auxiliary switches shall be wired up to a
terminal board in the LCC of the switchgear whether they are in use or not in the first instance
and shall be arranged in the same sequence on all equipment.
Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanism of the
circuit-breaker when the operation of the latter has been completed. All such switches and
mechanisms shall be mounted in approved accessible positions clear of the operating
mechanism and shall be adequately protected. The contacts of all auxiliary relays shall be
strong and shall have a positive wiping action when closing.
Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by the
auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted in lieu of
auxiliary switches, except as specifically approved by the Engineer. In case of control,
protection and interlocking circuits where it is necessary to use repeat relays due to a limit in the
number of auxiliary switch contacts which can be provided, their operation shall be monitored
against the primary device and their use limited to non-critical auxiliary circuits. Replica faulty
alarm shall be monitored in local annunciator as well as in bay controllers for remote alarms
accordingly.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 28
Auxiliary relays provided as continuously rated devices are not acceptable. Bistable devices to
the approval of the Engineer may be accepted but only where it can be shown that extra
contacts are not required on critical circuits and direct contacts are not available.
4.2.16.6 Interlocking
An interlocking scheme shall be provided which takes into account the following basic
requirements.
 To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the equipment
with other sections live.
 To prevent incorrect switching sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to plant,
equipment and personnel.
All switchgear shall be interlocked via electromechanical, electrical or electronic equipment.
These interlocking facilities shall be located in the local control cabinet of each bay. They must
provide absolute and reliable protection against any potentially harmful maloperation of the
switchgear. The following functions must be provided:
 The operator must be forced into the only safe and logical sequence to actuate circuit-
breakers, switches, disconnectors and earthing switches.
 The actual, completely closed or completely opened position of all switching devices must
be checked before and after each move.
 Implementation of logic checks and issuing the resulting signals ENABLE or BLOCKED for
the switching device.
 Manual local operation and automatic remote operation for all essential functions.
 Local emergency unlocking equipment via safety key switch under full responsibility of the
operator.
The interlocking scheme shall be performed in the LCC and shall be effective when the
equipment is being controlled locally, under emergency hand or from a supervisory position.
When the bay is operated locally (bay mode selected), the local bay interlocking is “hard wired”
and kept separate from the remote control. Maintenance and safety interlockings are of the
mechanical/key type.
When the bay is operated remotely (substation mode or from control center), the interlocking
shall be carried out through the remote control on a station wide basis
All mechanical interlocks shall be applied at the point at which hand power is used so that
stress cannot be transferred to parts remote from that point.
All electrical/numerical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating supply and a
system of interlocks shall be provided which shall cover the emergency hand operation of
apparatus which is normally power operated. Failure of supply or connections to any
electrical/numerical interlock shall not produce or permit faulty operation.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 29
Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Means,
normally padlocked, shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a
failure of interlock supplies.
Disconnecting switch shall be so interlocked that it cannot be operated unless the associated
circuit-breaker is open.
Earthing switches shall be interlocked such that they cannot be operated unless the associated
isolator is open. Interlocking will prevent closing of earth switch on live circuit.
All isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit-breakers and isolators in the
same station so that it shall not be possible to make or break current on an isolating device
unless a parallel circuit in that station is already closed. CB closing shall be activated only when
associated disconnectors are in defined positions, either in fully closed or fully open position.
Locks and locking facilities shall be provided on each item of substation equipment and shall be
additional to the mechanical interlocking devices specified in the above clause.
Where a mechanism is to be locked in a specific position, provision shall be made at that part of
the mechanism where the operating power is applied and not to remote or ancillary linkages.
All hardware interlocks shall be included in the software logic for interlocking operations from
BCU/HMI. Dynamic interlock views shall be provided in HMI for each device of respective bays.
Electrical operation shall be inhibited for circuit breakers located in the affected chamber when
the working density is below the specified value.
Electrical bolt interlocks shall be energized only when the operating handle of the mechanism is
brought to the working position. Visual indication shall be provided to show whether the
mechanism is locked or free.
4.2.16.7 Partial Discharge (PD) Monitoring System
The Tenderers are required to provide an online Partial Discharge Monitoring System. This
system shall be able to provide automatic facility for the simultaneous collection of PD of PD
data at multiple points on the substation adopting UHF technique. The data storage shall
provide a historical record of the progress of PD sources and will identify the areas of maximum
activity. Local and remote facilities shall be provided for the on-line equipment with a
dedicated LAN communication link to enable remote communication with the system.
Attenuation profile should be calculated between two couplers by considering the CIGRE Step-1
test and site sensitivity test and shall be submitted for approval. The profile calculation should
include the attenuation in the coaxial cable connected between the coupler and the detector unit
as well.
It is required that the partial discharge activity is monitored throughout the site power frequency
high voltage tests.
Capacitive couplers for diagnostic monitoring of the GIS are required to be located in all phases
at the sealing ends of each cable connected circuit, at the SF6 side of each

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 30
Transformer/Reactor bushing and adjacent to the SF6/air bushings of each circuit connected to
the open terminal equipment. In addition, couplers should be located in all phases at
approximately 20m intervals between these points such that all parts of the GIS are between
two couplers and no more than approximately 20m from either of these couplers.
Couplers shall be sensitive to all frequencies in the range 0.1 Mhz to 1.5GHz and shall give an
output suitable for a spectrum analyzer. Coupler designs offering a linear response in the range
50Hz to 300MHz and a capability to make d.c. voltage measurements are preferred.
The bidder shall provide documented evidence that the offered PD monitoring system has had
at least 3 years continuous operational history on 400kV GIS.
The system may be required to be expanded to cater the extensions of the substations in the
future. The system may also be required to be expanded, by addition of appropriate hardware
and software, to monitor other parameters relevant to plant condition in the future. The system
shall be structured so as to allow for future expansion. System analysis software shall be
written in an industry standard language. The Contractor shall advise in his tender for any
limitation on the system expansion capability
The system shall run in a latest version of MS Windows type environment of selectable drop-
down menus used to access the functions of the system.
4.2.17 Protection
The GIS shall include, protective devices as applicable to the GIS equipment viz. temperature,
pressure, mechanism oil) and breaker discrepancy of poles, low pressure SF6, time operation
monitoring, etc.
The GIS system shall also include all the tripping and interlocking logics of the overall GIS, in
order to provide a complete functional control scheme in addition to the connection of all CT’s
and PT’s to the LCC to be destined to protection panels;
4.2.18 Nameplate
A nameplate shall provide as per relevant IEC’s as applicable to respective devices, however
bidder shall note that plates with following minimum information shall be fixed to each main
component of the switchgear (in English):
400 kV SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear

Manufacturer’s name or trademark
Year of manufacture
Type designation / Serial number
Purchase order N°
Rated current (busbar/derivations)
Rated frequency
Rated short-time withstand current (1 s)

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 31
Rated insulation level one-minute power frequency withstand voltage

Lightning impulse withstand voltage
Switching impulse withstand voltage
Rated auxiliary supply voltage
Rated SF6 gas pressure for operation at 20°C
Minimum SF6 gas density for insulation
Design pressure for enclosure
Each GIS subcomponent, shall also be provided with its own nameplate, with the following
data (non-limitative):
Manufacturer’s name
Electrical characteristics (current, voltage)
Insulation level,
Electrical parameters (ratio, impedance… etc).
Auxiliary power supply (a.c., d.c. etc.)
4.3 Miscellaneous Facilities
4.3.1 Maintenance and Repair
Space and facilities shall be provided to allow for easy access and maintenance of all major
components of GIS installation, as follows:
 An overhead crane shall be provided with hoists of adequate capacities and heights to allow
the installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment, covering the entire GIS floor
area. This crane shall be of sufficient capacity to handle the heaviest component to be
moved during installation, operation and maintenance. Should the Contractor envisage a
layout not requiring a crane serving the whole GIS floor area, the method of handling the
parts during erection, operation and maintenance shall be described in detail and shall be
subject to the Employer’s acceptance.
 Walkways and stairways shall be provided where necessary to facilitate inspection,
maintenance and erection. These shall comply with all the relevant safety regulations;
 Sufficient room around and above the circuit breakers shall be provided to allow changing of
contacts and other parts of the interrupter and operating mechanism without interfering with
adjacent busbar sections and without dismantling or removing of the circuit breaker
enclosure;
 Sufficient floor space shall be provided in the building to enable assembly, repair and testing
of components during erection, overhaul and routine maintenance;
 If hoisting or lifting equipment or parts in the GIS building cannot be accomplished entirely
by the envisaged main overhead crane, Contractor shall provide and install floor standing-
mobile hoists, trucks or dollies that would be required.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 32
 The GIS, shall be capable of being sectionalized and tested under normal gas pressure at
10 kVac for purpose of obtaining power factor and capacitance magnitudes of electrical
insulation. Test connection facilities shall be furnished with weatherproof covers.
4.3.2 Facilities for Future Extensions
The equipment and connectors provided in the initial design shall be so arranged to facilitate
future extension with minimum interruption time and with minimum redundant equipment.
The Contractor shall demonstrate and document how the erection and testing of future
extensions can be accomplished alongside the existing equipment.
4.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Equipment
The maintenance equipment listed in the Sub-clause 5.1.2 shall be supplied. Additional
equipment recommended by the Contractor in his tender shall be provided, as approved by the
Employer.
4.3.4 Other Requirements
4.3.4.1 Electrical Motors
All motors shall be in accordance with IEC 60034. The starting current at full voltage shall not
exceed six times the rated full load current. Motors are to be designed to operate 15% below
and 10% above nominal voltage without injuries or overheating.
4.3.4.2 Maintenance Devices
Each component shall be supplied with the necessary elements for moving and maintenance,
including but not limited to the following:
a) Base designed with metal skids for moving along the longitudinal or transversal axis
c) Eyes or anchors for suspension
d) Eyes for lifting the complete unit, eyes for lifting the tank cover and opening covers for
maintenance, hooks on the yoke allowing withdrawal of the core and windings assembly
from the tank.
The lifting capacity of each base and jack shall be of at least 50 % of the total weight of the unit.
4.3.4.3 GIS Enclosure and Structure Grounding
The SF6 switchgear enclosure shall be grounded. An effective grounding network within the
switchgear locations shall be established by providing a continuous copper ground bus
extending over the entire length of switchgear enclosure. The bus shall be adequately sized to
withstand the specified short-circuit current.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 33
The grounding connections must meet the requirements of IEEE 80. Grounding for mitigating
over-voltages during disconnect switch operation shall be provided considering the transient
increase of potential of the GIS enclosure relative to the substation ground. All support
structures shall have grounding provision.
For the interconnection of enclosures, frames, etc., fastening (e.g. bolting or welding), etc., is
acceptable for ensuring electrical continuity. The continuity of the grounding circuits shall be
ensured taking into account the thermal and electrical stresses caused by the current they may
have to carry.
Necessary terminal pads and connectors suitable for accommodating 300 mm2 stranded
copper conductors shall be provided at a number of points to effectively connect switchgear
ground bus to the substations ground mesh. The equipment earthing connection and earth mat
material to be designed and supplied in accordance with the specification of Earthing & Lighting
protection 016403-2000-47ES-4700.
All auxiliary equipment such as operating mechanism boxes, terminal boxes and control cabinet
which are not an integral part for the switchgear assembly, shall be provided with suitable
connectors for independent grounding.
Shorting straps or suitable electrical conducting parts shall be provided at all flange joints to
allow safe passage to fault-current without exceeding the permissible limits of temperature and
to reduce electro-magnetic interference.
The enclosure of the equipment and support structure of the GIS shall be grounded in such a
way that the following conditions are obtained:
 The touch voltage at any part of the enclosure is less than 65 V during normal operation;
 The touch and step voltage during a fault to ground is less than the permissible values,
according to the Standards;
 The induced current during normal operation is prevented from entering the grounding grid;
 The grounding riser conductors are capable of withstanding the specified ground fault
current for a fault duration of 0.5 seconds without exceeding 250 °C;
 The temperature of the grounding conductors shall not exceed the temperatures specified in
IEC 62271-203 during normal operation.
4.3.4.4 Colour
The function of the various components of the gas system shall be clearly identified at the
switchgear. Different gases or different conditions of the same gas shall be identified by colors.
The Contractor shall submit standards and color code to the Engineer, for approval. The
Engineer, however, reserves the right to impose different colors, however the coloring for Gas
piping shall be as per specification General Technical Requirement 016403-2000-47ES-0000

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 34
4.3.4.5 Painting and Corrosion Protection

The switchgear shall be treated and protected to withstand at least five years of operation under
the environmental conditions prevailing at site without sustained corrosion or attacks from
fungus or rodents, provided the surfaces remain mechanically undamaged.
As a minimum painting standard for all steel surfaces installed indoors, the following shall apply:
 cleaning to the bare metal by chemical degreasing and shot-blasting;

 phosphatizing or priming with at least one coat of zinc or lead based primer, or suitable
epoxy paint;
 finish painting shall consist of spray applied and oven dried two-compound polyurethane or
epoxy lacquer to a total dry-film thickness of at least 50 microns.
Gas monitoring and service piping, including all fittings shall be made of copper, brass or
stainless steel.
Machined sealing surfaces that are exposed to the atmosphere shall receive protective,
removable coating (such as Tectyle) that can be peeled or washed off during the final assembly
on site.
4.4 Transport
Besides the General Technical Requirements of this document, the Contractor must comply
with the following requirements:
a) The size of transport units shall be as large as possible so as to reduce the amount of field
installation work. Auxiliary cabinets with secondary equipment shall be transported as
completely assembled units.
b) Care shall be taken to seal off connecting flanges of the individual switchgear bays which
are not yet connected to prevent damage and ingress of contamination into the gas
compartments. Machined sealing surfaces must be suitably protected against mechanical
damage and corrosion.
c) If possible, the modules shall be prefilled with gas and the remaining insulating gas for the
initial filling of the switchgear shall be transported separately, in approved steel cylinders
marked according to international regulations. Otherwise, the entire initial filling will be
carried out at Site by the Contractor.
d) All interconnecting control cables and gas piping which are not directly mounted on the bay
shall be packed separately and suitably marked.
e) The static filters provided for the inside of gas compartments which are not prefilled shall not
be installed before transportation but separately packed in airtight sealed tin cans and
marked suitably.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 35
f) One impact indicator shall be rigidly attached to each circuit breaker, voltage transformer
and surge arrestor when packed, in order to monitor impacts suffered during transport from
factory to site.
g) Packing as per the General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
4.5 Required Data and Information
The following information shall be submitted by the Contractor with his offer.
4.5.1 General
a) Detailed specifications fully describing the features of the proposed equipment, and
drawings showing the proposed layout and arrangement of the equipment;
b) Details of the time required to install and test the switchgear, method of installation and
measures to be taken to ensure cleanliness of the system;
c) Detailed description of local control facilities in GIS building;
d) A description of the method of sampling gas for analysis, cleaning and purging the
equipment should contamination be found in the system during operation;
e) A description of the method proposed to compensate for thermal contraction and

expansion of the switchgear installation.
f) A description of the procedure to be followed for repair of damage caused by an internal

flashover to ground, or any other fault. Indicate if the manufacturer’s personnel are
required and state whether such personnel are immediately available on request.
g) A description of the gas pressure and/or density monitoring system and the type of
pressure or density sensors used. Details of any any gas reservoir with automatic backup
system to cater for events of serious loss of pressure in any gas sections
h) A description of the method of containing or relieving excessive gas pressure caused by

short circuits in the equipment. Provide graphs and explanatory notes on:
 The internal pressure generated as a function of time and fault kA for the smallest gas
section. The volume of this smallest section shall be stated.
 The burn-through characteristics of the enclosure as a function of time and fault kA for
stable arcs near the flanged joints and away from the flanged joints.
i) Curves relating the following:
 Critical flashover voltage vs. gas pressure, for lightning impulse voltages, positive and
negative polarity.
 Critical flashover voltage vs. gas pressure, for switching impulse voltages, positive and
negative polarity.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 36
j) Test data, showing results of design tests made on previous similar equipment, in
accordance with the detailed specification.
k) Information about what the Contractor’s experience in the field of seismic studies and the
method he proposes to use for a dynamic analysis to prove that the equipment will
withstand the “equipment design earthquake”.
l) Indication of the recommended maintenance frequency and extent of each such

maintenance performance.
m) Statement on how the enclosures will be bonded and grounded:
 To prevent excessive induced voltages to ground and between metallic parts and on
instrumentation.
 To keep the touch voltage below the specified value.
 To prevent excessive control cable shield currents.
 To prevent excessive temperature rises at enclosure joints.
n) Information on type of gas seal to be used to seal operating shafts against leakage and
method of changing out or sealing leakage gas seals. Have these been life tested?
o) Statement on design features being incorporated to enable:
 Site insulation measurements after complete installation of GIS.

 Change out of contacts and/or operating shafts of equipment.
p) Provisions for future expansion of GIS.
q) A detailed description of gas service cart, leak detector, moisture meter and other
maintenance equipment.
r) Documentation to prove that insulating partitions between pressurized sections withstands

all specified pressures and temperatures.
s) Manufacturer’s paint standards.
4.5.2 Circuit Breakers
a) Graph relating the interrupting capacity to the gas pressure.

b) Test data, showing results of design tests made on a previous similar circuit breaker.
c) Description of circuit breaker operating mechanism.
4.5.3 Disconnecting and Grounding Switches
a) A description of the type of mechanism for manual and power operation of the
disconnecting and grounding switches and details of external indication of position of
disconnecting and grounding switches.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 37
4.5.4 Bus Insulators
a) Detailed description of the quality control procedures to be employed in the manufacture

of the bus insulators and of the bus conductor and bus enclosure.
b) Field plots showing stress distribution for applied power frequency and impulse voltages.
c) Detailed description of the method for anchoring the bus insulators to the conductor and to
the bus enclosure.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply of GIS shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility of the Contractor to
ensure the coordination of the engineering and of the procurement, in order to guarantee
compatibility and completeness of the overall installation:
a) GIS equipment in accordance with the single-line diagram including all material and
accessories for the installation in the GIS building, installation of SF6 busducts, as per
layout drawing including the bushings, wall bushings, etc.;
b) Local Control cabinet, the local control of breakers and disconnect switches, the
interlocking, the mimic panel, the metering devices, the gas monitoring devices and the
cabling and wiring between GIS equipment, the gas monitoring devices and the Local
Control Panel with a numeric interface for SCADA;
c) Air/SF6 bushings;
d) Busducts as showed in the arrangement drawings;
e) Overhead line, cable and reactor / transformer terminals;
f) Connection to the auxiliary services, (a.c. and d.c. distribution panels);
g) SF6 for filling the apparatus plus 10 %, delivered in non-returnable bottles;
h) Support frames for the complete GIS equipment, including busducts and bushings; the
support frames, shall be suitable to be bolted on the concrete floor slab;
i) Supervision of the installation of GIS equipment by manufcturer’s specialists;
j) Testing and commissioning of all GIS equipment and their related equipment and
system;
k) Recommended spare parts and tools as described in the Section 5.1 and in the
Schedule of Prices;
5.1 Mandatory Spare Parts and Tools
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Volume1, Section 6: Schedule
of Prices.
Mobile SF6 treatment plant

One mobile SF6 treatment plant will be provided to use during installation and future
maintenance of the GIS. It shall allow the following:

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 38
- Extraction of air or SF6 gas from compartments of GIS to an absolute pressure of

approximately 150 Pa;
- Compression, air cooling, liquefaction of SF6 gas with adequate displacement;
- Drying, filtering of SF6 gas to remove arc induced decomposition products or other
impurities;
- Evaporating SF6 liquid to gas and pressurizing GIS compartments at the required
density;
- Control and instruments panel with all necessary controls, pressure gauges,
thermometers and alarms;
- Intermediate storage tank with adequate storage capability;
- Refrigeration and heating system for the storage tank;
- Other instruments that are required for complete maintenance of GIS.
- Trailer-type cart with pneumatic tires, brakes, lights, direction lights, draw bar and pintle
eye suitable to be towed by a light truck.
The cart shall be complete with piping, valves, safety relief devices, pressure and vacuum
gauges, electrical controls, outlet for connection to power supply, and pressure hose of suitable
design, quality and length for connection to compartments of GIS equipment. A relief valve
shall be permanently installed at the outlet connection beyond the last valve to protect the GIS
compartment during filling. The set point of the relief valve shall be the design pressure of the
GIS equipment.
The cart shall be constructed sturdily, with steel frame and shall have wheels or castors suitable
for use either inside or outside the building.
The liquid storage capacity and operating rates of the various functions shall be selectable to
suit the GIS equipment.
Gas Maintenance Cart
Mobile or portable SF6 maintenance shall have the following features:

- Recover SF6
- Store SF6 (80 to 100 kg SF6)
- Purify SF6
- Evacuate air and moisture from apparatus after servicing
- Refill apparatus by means of a compressor and a controlled fill pressure
- Transfer SF6 between cylinders
- Mounted on two- or four-wheel cart.
5.2 Recommended Spare Parts and Tools
The Contractor shall complete and price list of recommended spare parts in his offer (Volume 1,
Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended spare parts, as

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 39
approved by the Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of operation, under
normal operating conditions.
6 TESTS
6.1 General
Type tests and routine tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s factory in the presence of
the Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representatives (if possible), and in strict accordance with the
IEC standards listed in the Technical Data Schedules and in the Clause 3.
Acceptance by Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representatives of any equipment shall not relieve
the Contractor from his performance guarantees or from any of his obligations under the
Contract.
All equipment, apparatus, materials and supplies provided shall be subject to tests in the shop
in the presence of the Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representative (if possible), for ensuring
conformity to requirements of the specifications. The method and procedure of tests for
specified particular items, shall be submitted for review and shall be in conformity of the
applicable recognised standards.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, promptly make good all defects evidenced by the
testing. After defects have been remedied, the equipment shall be offered for retesting.
The Contractor shall submit the required number of signed copies of test reports within 30 days
of completion of test program. The test reports shall indicate the tests performed, the results
obtained, instruments used, names of test personnel and provision for witness signatures. They
shall also be numbered and dated.
Components forming part of the metal-enclosed GIS, which are covered by the standards
specified in the relevant sections of this Specification, shall comply with and be tested according
to those standards.
6.2 Factory Tests
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive program and time schedule of factory testing for
approval stating the type of tests to be performed, the sequence of tests, the duration of each
phase of the work and the initiation dates.
6.2.1 Type Tests
Type tests shall be performed for equipment for which type test reports are not submitted
before contract award. If applicable, the Contractor shall prove that the High Voltage circuit
breakers are capable of interrupting the capacitive current, by either performing the relevant
tests or by submitting the relevant type test reports plus calculations, to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
The Contractor shall guarantee the minimum number of switching operations given in his
tender.

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 40
Type tests shall be carried out on one sample of each equipment or system according to the
relevant standards and as referred to in each particular equipment specification.
Should a similar switchgear bay module have been previously subjected to special type tests
indicated below, certified test certificates of same type of equipment from official independent
laboratories instead of witnessed tests at the Contractor's works may be accepted for the type
tests. Copies of such documents shall be submitted for approval.
Required type tests are as follows:
 Lightning impulse voltage dry test;

 Switching impulse voltage tests;
 Power frequency voltage tests;
 Thermal stability test;
 Temperature rise tests;
 Short-time and peak withstand current tests on main circuits;
 Verification of making and breaking capacities;
 Internal arc tests;
 Proof tests for enclosures; each pressurized section shall be tested in accordance with the
applicable pressure vessel codes as indicated in the specification;
 Mechanical operation tests at ambient temperature;
 Gas tightness at ambient air temperature.
6.2.2 Routine Tests
All major parts of the equipment, especially those necessitating dismantling for transport and
subsequent reassembly at site, shall be proto assembled in the factory and carefully match-
marked before dismantling. At all stages of assembly, where accuracy of fit has to be assured
at site, dowel holes shall be provided with dowels to assist in reassembly.
The following routine tests shall be performed on all shipping units according to latest IEC
standards:
 Power frequency voltage dry tests of the main circuits;

 Dielectric tests of auxiliary and control circuits;
 Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit;
 Partial discharge measurement;
 Pressure tests on enclosures;
 Gas tightness tests;
 Mechanical operation tests;

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 41
 Functional tests of auxiliary electrical, hydraulic and mechanical devices including all
relays, alarm and trip circuits;
 Verification of the correct wiring against drawings and specification;
 Pressure test on all hydraulic lines and fittings.
Switchgear components forming part of the GIS, namely current and potential transformers,
surge arresters, etc., which have routine tests covered under other relevant IEC standards and
which do not form part of the tests specified below, shall have those other tests performed
before being assembled into the switchgear assemblies stated.
Other Tests (minimum)
 Pressure test of all hydraulic lines and fittings;

 Pressure test on each enclosure and gastight bushing. The test pressure for all welded
housings shall be 1.5 times and for all cast housings and gastight bushings twice the
design pressure;
 At least 10 % of all welds must be subjected to non-destructive X-ray or ultrasonic
methods (random checks, according to pressure vessel regulations);
 Partial discharge test on each insulator before installation in the switchgear. No
measurable partial discharge (less than 10 pC) shall occur on the insulator when 110 % of
rated voltage is applied. This test must be carried out on each type of insulator and
bushing used in the switchgear;
 Gas leakage test on each transport unit. A gas leakage test with a suitable accuracy must
be carried out on each transport unit before dispatch;
 Power frequency voltage dry test and partial discharge measurements on each transport
unit;
 Insulation test with 2 kV on all auxiliary circuits;
 Resistance measurement of the main circuits of each transport unit;
 Mechanical testing of the switching devices;
Each pressurized section shall be subjected to a test pressure, which is the highest of the two
following pressures:
 1.5 times design pressure;

 0.9 times the special arcing pressure defined above.
6.3 Site Commissioning Tests
The Contractor shall provide the services of GIS manufacturer’s specialists to perform site
testing and commissioning, including one month of commercial operation on energization of the
station.
Detailed Site test procedure shall be submitted for GCCIA/Engineer approval.


016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 42
7 BREAKER CONDITION MONITOR (BCM)
From medium voltage to extra-high voltage.
BGM system including CB coil monitoring /SF6 gas monitoring to be provided for all the CB’s.
Hardware Installation:
 BCM supports options to be installed inside the breaker control cabinet or mounted inside
an external weatherproof cabinet with cables routed through rodent-proof flexible conduit
 BCM offers magnetic pads to make retrofits non-invasive within steel cabinets
Hardware Key Features:
 Continuous online monitoring & analytics for electric circuit breaker with solid state design
without spinning hard drives and cooling fans
 32-bit microprocessor-based, permanently installed, IED monitoring system
 32/64/128 samples per cycle, user-configurable to optimize resolution and memory
storage needs
 Rolling data buffer to record information even before the trigger signal
 16Gbytes of standard non-volatile memory for data storage offering upto 10,000
operations record
 Field upgradeable HW to add additional channels
 Analog & event channel simultaneous Sample and Hold circuits to avoid data skew
 All digital inputs are polarity free with special pitch terminal blocks offering easy mistake
proof installation
 All the sensors can be powered directly through the BCM built-in power supply, no
additional power supply needed
 Single device solution for all three poles with all the data capture done simultaneously
 Local LEDs as well as configurable buzzer for warnings and alarms
 Device temperature tracking for auto shut-off and restart beyond specified operating
temperatures to prevent permanent damage
Software Key Functions:
 Basic acquisition data

 Auxiliary contact opening and closing
 Breaker contact re-strike detection
 Open and close coil current profiles
 Breaker Mechanism Time a.k.a., Response Time to be calculated separately from
breaker operate time
 Breaker Operate time analysis calculated separately from the breaker
mechanism/response time
 Maximum & minimum battery voltage, battery voltage drop, and battery charger
ripple at the breaker cabinet before, during, and after mechanism operation

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 43
 Individual measurement and graphical display of 3-phase fault current amplitudes

 Fault current arcing time (e.g. i2t) calculated separately for each pole during every
trip and every close mechanism operation. Accumulated I2T of Trip & Close coil I2T
values for each pole.
 AC or DC Motor Run Time monitoring
 AC or DC cabinet heater monitoring
 AC or DC anti-condensation heaters monitoring
 General purpose digital inputs for converting switch contacts status into protocols
Preset Values Capability:
 Separate pre-setting of previously accumulated estimated I2T values for phases A, B, and
C into the BCM
 Pre-setting of prior breaker operation counter number(s) into the BCM
 Pre-setting of prior Motor and Heater Run Time Operation Count Number(s) into the BCM
 Pre-setting of record number
Trip and Close breaker ‘Fingerprint’ comparisons:
 Ability to automatically record next open and close operations as fingerprints

 Warning levels for deviation from fingerprint comes pre-programmed, no user
configuration required to catch trending breaker issues between operations
 User programmable Absolute Maximum and Absolute Minimum alarm limit notifications for
all functions
 The Trip & Close "Fingerprint Profiles" will be stored in the non-volatile memory of the
breaker condition monitor.
 Fingerprint Profiles can be generated both manually and automatically
 Operations can be marked or un-marked as a fingerprint to allow graphical comparison of
any two open/close operations
 Every subsequent Trip operation shall be compared to the saved/selected
"Fingerprint Trip Profile"
 Every subsequent Close operation shall be compared to the saved/selected
"Fingerprint Close Profile"
Software Key Features:
 Web based interface requiring no additional software with capability of secure remote
software upgrades using 256bit encryption
 Automatic interface and signal list adaptation during field HW upgrade
 Built-in comtrade record viewer and capability to upload/download off-line comtrade files
 Built-in SF6 trends viewer with configurable scales and sampling rates
 Pre-configured signal names and sensor range with ability to update based on user
preference
 Configurable contact wear analysis

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 44
 Configurable event acquisition duration windows before and after smart event trigger
 Ability to clone configuration from one BCM to others for cloning or to itself for restoring to
desired state
 Smart dashboard with all critical breaker health information on the front page
 Information is color-coded on warnings and alarms
 Continuous data is indicated with animation
 Maintenance date tracking
 Data Format IEEE C37.119-1999 COMTRADE
SF6 detailed Requirements
 4-20mA SF6 Sensors / single data point

4-20mA DC Sensors: Compensated pressure or density
 SF6 Density compensated or Pressure temperature compensated

Multifunction Sensors (Modbus):
 Real time status of SF6 gas:

 Temperature
 Pressure
 Density
 Optional: dew point of SF6
 Measurement units:
 Temperature – user selectable either Degrees Centigrade or Degrees Fahrenheit
 Pressure – bars absolute, Density – g/l or Kg/m3 @ 20ºC, Dew Point
 Dewpoint in Celsius or ppm
 SF6 gas density rate of decrease in g/l/day or kg/m3/day
 Indication and reporting functions on SF6:

 Sum total of SF6 mass emission since installation.
 Forecast (days to lockout) - days until minimum allowable density is reached using
current rate of leakage.
 Display for trending temperature, pressure, density, and dew point values for a
selected time scale.
 Display past one day, week, month and year.
 Emissions reported in metric units.
 Forecast emissions on current calendar year.
 Report by calendar years (based on the data available in local log).
 Export in csv format to support Excel. Report uploads available on special request.
 Other functions
 User selectable SF6 Gas Density logging start time, i.e. the hour at which the once/day
SF6 value is to be logged

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 45
 Frequency for the number of times per sec/min/hr/day that the SF6 gas Density values
is sampled/logged
 Selectable alarm and warning on temperature, pressure, density and dew point if SF6
sensor provide information.
 Alarm and warning limits can be customer defined.
 Alarm available based on % loss of density.
 Alarm and warning status available over web interface, DNP3.0 and IEC 61850 Ed2.
I2T Calculations:
 User programmable “I2 x T x C” arcing value calculations with exponents for the current,
time, and a constant
 User programmable Trip Arcing Time Offset and individually measured Trip arcing time
values in milliseconds
 Capability to select the starting of the I2T arcing calculation for a Trip operation delayed
from:
 Trip initiation input activation (input signal traverses from zero to a positive logic level)
 Fixed time in milliseconds from the beginning of the record acquisition cycle
 Smart event trigger with first signal detection that indicates event
Operating mechanism, charging system, condition/status:
 Individual recording, measurement, run time and graphical display of spring recharging AC
or DC motor current
 Breaker timing analysis and charging system status accomplished using auxiliary contacts
connected to the Event input channels
Quadrature DC Travel Transducer:
 On-board travel transducer power supply. Externally supplied transducer power supplies
shall be not allowed.
 Direct measurement of Stroke, Travel speed (Meter/s), Overtravel, Rebound &
damping
 Average Velocity calculations based upon Aux Contact Operation time, Datum
Points Length, or Datum Points Time
 Capable of using Linear or Rotary Quadrature travel transducer
 User selectable travel transducer measurements expressed in ft/sec, meters/sec,
or degrees/sec
Optional Windows-based software package:
 Graphical display and analysis for all Analog and Event channel inputs
 Overlay and merging of breaker shot records

016403-2000-47ES-4800 01 July 2024 46
 Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence display and calculation of 3-phase currents and
voltages
 Harmonics calculation up to the 64th harmonic for the 3-phase currents and voltages
 Manual or automatic polling, logging and data retrieval from the remote BCM device
 Individual Breaker configurations that can be applied to each BCM
 The Provided BCM shall integrate with DCS system.

 In the case of an independent system, the provided system must have full accessibility
both from local substations and remote monitoring from HQ monitoring room, ECC and
ICC location.
GCCIA
INSULATORS, BUSSES AND CONNECTORS
016403-2000-47ES-4640 Rev.01
July 2024
Insulators, Busses and Connectors # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INSULATORS, BUSSES AND CONNECTORS 1

1.1 General 1
1.2 Post Insulators 1
1.3 Busbars/ Strung Bus 1
1.4 Connectors 2
4 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CRITERIA 4
5 TESTS 4

016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 1
1 INSULATORS, BUSSES AND CONNECTORS
1.1 General
This document outlines, from technical point-of-view, specific requirements applicable to the
design, manufacture, supply, install and testing of bus post insulators, busses and connectors
in switch yards to interface with Air Insulated Switchgear (AIS) or Gas Insulated Switchgear
(GIS) in 400 kV Substations under GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the Gulf
Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA)
1.2 Post Insulators
The station post insulators shall be suitable for operation at their standard ratings under service
conditions specified in General Technical requirements and other bid documents.
Manufacturer’s drawing shall show outline of the insulator with all pertinent dimensions and
applicable tolerances.
The insulators shall be solid puncture proof hollow core construction. Insulators shall be made
of good quality commercial grade homogeneous wet process porcelain free from laminations,
cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality
and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture. Entire exterior surface of
station post insulators shall be glazed and free of imperfections such as blurs, blisters or other
defects. These shall be shaped for effective natural cleaning, additionally contractor shall
provide Silicone coating over porcelain. These shall be suitable for installation in upright,
horizontal, inclined or inverted positions.
For inverted placement applications insulators made of polymers may be proposed at

contractors’ discretion subject to Authority’s approval.
Metal parts shall be made of good commercial grade malleable iron, ductile iron or steel and
galvanized according to requirements specified under General technical requirements.
1.3 Busbars/ Strung Bus
The Aluminium tubular busbar shall be extruded from 63401 grade Aluminium alloy with W.P.
range2 treatment.
The rigid tubular conductors shall be of aluminium of standard type and designed to operate
within set temperature limits and to withstand thermal and electro mechanical forces developed
due to short circuits and vibrations by wind. The material shall be clean, smooth and free from
any harmful effect.
Standard Aluminium pipes of minimum size 4" shall be used for busbars of 400KV switchyards.
During erection of new switchyard pipe to pipe joint is to be avoided as far as practicable. In
case of Al tube jointing Argon welding process is to be adopted. Usage of very small pieces of
Al tube is to be avoided as far as practicable in order to minimize no of joints.
Length of Al tube of each section between equipment to equipment and equipment to

accessories are to be mentioned in Erection key diagram.

016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 2
The surface of the Aluminium tubes shall have bright smooth finish, free from seams, cracks
and other imperfections. Busbars and other high voltage connection shall be sufficiently corona
free at maximum working voltage. The finished tubes shall be perfectly straight and cross-
section shall be uniform throughout the length
All busbar and jumper connections shall be of high conductivity aluminium alloy. They shall be
adequately supported on insulators to withstand electrical and mechanical stresses due to
specified short circuit currents
Contact surfaces at all joints shall be silver plated or properly cleaned and non-oxide grease
applied to ensure an efficient and trouble-free connection. All bolted joints shall have necessary
plain and spring washers. All connection hardware shall have high corrosion resistance.
Bimetallic connectors or any other technically proven method shall be used for aluminum to
copper connections.
The Contractor shall furnish calculation establishing adequacy of busbar sizes for the specified
continuous and short time current ratings.
1.4 Connectors
All power clamps and connectors shall conform to international standards with high electrical
and mechanical performances obtained by a design with optimized parameters.
Each part is expected to be designed with support of FEM (Finite Element Method) calculation
to obtain high strength components and manufactured with highest quality.
The items shall be designed in such manner that no transfer of torsional moment to the Post
Insulators or equipment terminal shall occur.
Necessary clamps and connectors shall be supplied for all equipment and connections. If
corona rings are required to meet these requirements they shall be considered as part of that
equipment and included in the scope of work.
Where copper to aluminum connections is required, bi-metallic clamps shall be used, which
shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the connection is kept to a
minimum and restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected to stress. All
castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and
corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal clamps for bus posts shall
be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/sliding) type connection of IPS AL tube as
required. In both the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to centre line of the tube)
should be same.
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have lowest contact resistance
(below 1μΩ). Power Clamps and connectors shall be designed to control corona as per
requirement.

016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 3
IEC 60104 Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line conductors.
IEC 60105 Recommendation for commercial purity aluminium busbar material.
IEC 60168 Test on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for
systems with normal voltages greater than 1000V
IEC 60273 Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V.
IEC 60271-1 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 1: Common specifications
for alternating current switchgear and control gear
IEC 60437 Radio interference test on high-voltage insulators
IEC 60507 Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage insulators to be used on AC

systems
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of High voltage insulators intended for use in
polluted conditions.
IEC 62641 Conductors for overhead lines - Aluminum and aluminum alloy wires for
concentric lay stranded conductors.
IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors.
ASTM B26/B26M, Standard Specification for Aluminum alloy Sand Casting
ASTM B108 Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B193 Standard Test Method for Resistivity of electrical conductor materials
ASTM B317 Standard Specification for Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Tube,
Pipe, and Structural Profiles for Electrical Purposes (Bus Conductor)
ANSI H35.2, Dimensional Tolerances for aluminium Mill products (Metric)
ANSI C119.4 Electric connectors – connectors for use between aluminum-to aluminum
or aluminum-to copper.
NEMA CC-1 Electric Power connectors for substations


016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 4
4 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CRITERIA
The Contractor shall design the outdoor busses and HV equipment connection and
derivation, according the following criteria:
- Current rating: according the load & thermal rating of switchgear/OHL whichever
higher, 1000A min.
- Service conditions: According the General Technical requirements 016403-2000-

47ES-0000.
- RIV: 2500 μV (420 kV)
- Minimum conductor size (flexible busses and derivations): 800 mm 2
- Electric field (12 kV/cm)
- Number of bundled conductors (as per electric field limitation)
- Grading ring: required
- Insulator creepage distance: 40 mm/kV
5 TESTS
All the required type, Routine and Sample tests must be performed in order to confirm that
the materials comply with these specifications.
Type tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s factory or at an independent accredited

third-party laboratory in presence of the Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representatives in
strict accordance with the standards. Type test certificates may be accepted provided that
tested articles are strictly on same design, rating, type of those offered under the project
subject to condition that the submitted type test certificates shall not be older than 10 years.
All routine tests are to be performed on every completed equipment, in accordance with the
relevant latest standards and the results of the tests are to be documented in the test
certificates which will be subject review & approval by Authority/Engineer. No material shall
be released from the factory for shipment prior to performance of routine tests.
Sample tests shall be carried out in presence of Authority /Engineer on samples of the
completed equipment or components in accordance with the specified standards. These
tests shall be performed at least on one item from each manufacturing series and exact
sampling frequency shall be in accordance with standards.
{A} Bus Post Insulators
Type tests – Post insulators as a minimum shall be subjected to following type tests

016403-2000-47ES-4640 01 July 2024 5
One-minute wet Power frequency test
Dry Lightning impulse test
Wet switching impulse tests
Corona and RIV tests
Power Arc test
Mechanical strength tests
cyclic heat run test
{B} Rigid Bus/Strung Conductors
Type test shall be performed on the Rigid tubular buses and conductors meant for strung
bus in accordance with the applicable standards.
{C} Connectors/Clamps
Type tests – The connectors and clamps shall be subjected to following type tests
Short circuit current withstand test
Mechanical strength test
Resistance to traction and Slip tests
Bolts overtightening resistance test
RIV
Dimensional checks
Chemical analysis of material
Radiography test
GCCIA
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
016403-2000-47ES-4130 Rev.01
July 2024
Instrument Transformers # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 1
1.1 General 1
4.1 Design and Manufacture HV Capacitor Voltage Transformers 2

4.1.1 General 2
4.1.2 Grounding terminal provided with a connector Base Tank 3
4.1.3 Low Voltage Terminal Box 3
4.1.4 HV Terminals and Grounding Terminals 3
4.1.5 Blocking Coil 3
4.1.6 Discharge Shunt Device 3
4.1.7 Voltage Tap Ground Blade 3
4.1.8 Series Reactor 3
4.1.9 Intermediate Transformer 4
4.1.10 Power Line Carrier 4
4.1.11 PQ Sensors 4
4.2 Design and Manufacture of HV Current Transformers 4
4.2.1 General 4
4.2.2 Base Tank or Pedestal 5
4.2.3 Low Voltage Terminal Box 5
4.2.4 HV Terminals and Grounding Terminal 5
4.2.5 Transient Performance 5
4.3 Galvanized Steel Supports 6
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 6

5.3 Nameplates 6
6 SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION 6

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 1
1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.1 General
This specification outlines, standard requirements of design, manufacture, testing and

commissioning of current and voltage transformers applicable for GCC Interconnection Project
Substations, developed by Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA):
Code Description
4131 Capacitive voltage transformer 400 kV

4132 Capacitive voltage transformer 275 kV (Not applicable for this tender)
4133 Power voltage transformer, 400 kV (Not applicable for this tender)
4135 Capacitive voltage transformer 220 kV (Not applicable for this tender)
4136 Current transformer, 400 kV, 1000/2000 A, (Not applicable for this tender)
This Technical Specification shall be read in conjunction with General Technical Requirements
016403-2000-47ES-0000.
IEC 61869 Instrument Transformers – General Requirements
IEC 61869-2 Additional Requirements of Current Transformers
IEC 61869-3 Additional Requirements of Inductive Voltage Transformers
IEC 61869-5 Instrument Transformers Part-5 – Additional requirements for Capacitor

Voltage Transformers
IEC 62271-1 Common specifications for High-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
Standards
IEC 60815 Guide for selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted conditions Selection
and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in polluted
conditions - Part 1: Definitions, information and general principles
IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear
ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development,
Production, Installation and servicing.

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 2
The instrument transformers shall be of manufacturer’s proven design based on international

codes and standards, and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this specification in all
respects. All instrument transformers shall be designed to ensure that they meet the
performance requirements for proposed application. A brief calculation determining selection
shall be submitted and subject to approval.
4.1 Design and Manufacture HV Capacitor Voltage Transformers
4.1.1 General
The capacitor voltage transformers CVT shall be single phase type enclosure designed for
outdoor installation. CVTs includes secondary windings as specified in technical data schedules
and shall be suitable for control, metering and protection relaying accuracy. The transformers
shall be designed, manufactured & tested with respect to guaranteed technical particulars and
according to international Codes and Standards.
The capacitor voltage transformer consists of a series of capacitor elements housed in high
strength porcelain shell, fabricated of low loss, high grade insulation material. The lower part of
CVT unit shall be fitted onto a metal oil filled base box which consists of intermediate
transformer, series reactor, damping resistors, protective gap or varistors, secondary terminals,
and grounding terminals.
CVTs shall be located in hermetically sealed enclosures filled with mineral oil. Secondary
winding leads shall be brought out to a weatherproof enclosure suitable for inspection & testing.
CVTs shall be formed by sections, depending on its voltage rating. Each capacitor section shall
include an expansion chamber to allow changes in fluid volume under varying temperature
conditions. There shall be provision to allow fluid to escape outside the porcelain during
excessive pressure build-up.
The CVT's shall be designed with a great transient response performance and shall include,
ferroresonance suppression features such as reactors and resistors damping circuit.
Ferroresonance features shall not produce sustained frequency oscillations or overvoltage
within 10 Hz of rated frequency. The equipment shall not amplify oscillations existing on the
primary network within 5 to 200% of rated voltage and 0 - 100% of rated burden. The CVTs
shall be provided with factory installed Power Quality Sensors to facilitate power quality
assessment including penetration of high order harmonics and wide band transients & flicker.
Protective gap device operation shall not be permitted for values less than twice the nominal
voltage. CVT shall be adequately designed to withstand insulator washing pressure without
damage and without ingress of water or moisture into the apparatus or degrade sealing.
Each capacitor voltage transformer shall contain the following accessories:
a) Oil expansion system

b) Oil level indicator
c) Provision for oil drain/sampling valve
d) Provision for oil filling

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 3
4.1.2 Grounding terminal provided with a connector Base Tank
The base enclosure shall be a weatherproof, hermetically sealed tank which shall support rigidly
the capacitor unit.
4.1.3 Low Voltage Terminal Box
Low voltage terminals box shall be weatherproof enclosure fitted with a hinged door cover. Base
plate of enclosure shall be provided with removable gland plates at the bottom for facilitating
external cable connections. Low voltage terminal box is to be equipped with the following:
a) Interface Terminals for transformer secondary leads and external cables

b) Heating element
c) Secondary protective devices as applicable to manufacturer design
d) PQ acquisition sensor unit
4.1.4 HV Terminals and Grounding Terminals
The HV terminals shall be provided with universal connectors suitable for horizontal or vertical
Conductor (as per Contractor’s design). The grounding terminal and connector shall be
adequate for the installation of required cable size as per earthing specification.
4.1.5 Blocking Coil
High impedance blocking coil at power line carrier frequencies and low impedance at
industrial/power frequency. The blocking coil shall be equipped with surge protection.
4.1.6 Discharge Shunt Device
Instrument transformer’s secondary winding shall be protected against high voltage surges with
suitable discharge shunt units.
4.1.7 Voltage Tap Ground Blade
Ground blade shall be connected between the primary of the intermediate transformer and
ground. This ground blade shall be suitable to de-energize the intermediate transformer for
maintenance purposes, without interruption of the power line carrier system if applicable. The
operating handle must be located outside the enclosure and shall have positive detents on both
open and grounded positions, and these positions shall be identified outside the CVT with
permanent markings.
4.1.8 Series Reactor
The series reactor shall be located in the base box to keep in phase the voltage of the
secondary winding with the line voltage.

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 4
4.1.9 Intermediate Transformer
Secondary winding must maintain an accuracy of ± 1% without adjustment for burden ranges
between 0 to 100%.
4.1.10 Power Line Carrier
Notwithstanding the requirement/applicability of PLCC, the following elements and accessories

are to be incorporated in the CVTs, and its supports.
a) Industrial Frequency Drain Coil
It is connected between the capacitor unit and ground and prevent attenuation of the
power line carrier signal.
b) Discharge Protection Device
It is connected in parallel with the industrial frequency draining coil to protect the coil
terminals against low frequency overvoltage. The protection level of this device shall be
coordinated with the insulation level of draining coil.
c) Drain Coil Grounding blade
Grounding blade is to be connected between the drain coil and ground for maintenance
and inspection.
d) Carrier Entrance Bushing
To connect the coaxial cable to the unit’s power line carrier device.
4.1.11 PQ Sensors
PQ sensors consist of a measuring unit, signal condition module and interconnecting cables.
Measuring unit shall be installed at CVT secondary terminal box. Signal conditioning Module
(SCM) for PQ Sensor shall be designed for mounting on CVT support structure and shall be
suitable for reliable operation at project ambient conditions. Measuring unit shall also be
equipped with a test circuit which can be used for onsite testing and calibration. The signal
condition module shall be complete with inherent arrangement to draw the requisite power
supply from nominal output of CVT. Signal Conditioning Module box shall be positioned in such
a way that necessary safety clearance is maintained with live circuits and shall be accessible
while the CVT is in service. Signal conditioning module box shall be weatherproof and shall
conform to IP66. SCM shall be located where maximum shade is available from direct sunlight
preferably with a sun shade to minimise the direct exposure to sunlight. PQ sensors shall be
calibrated at manufacturer premises itself.
4.2 Design and Manufacture of HV Current Transformers
4.2.1 General

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 5
The current transformers are to be single phase for outdoor installation. They will be provided
with various cores, with metering and relaying accuracy.
The transformers shall be designed, manufactured and tested taking into consideration of
electrical characteristics given in the Technical Data Schedules and in accordance with
international codes and Standards.
The transformers shall be hermetically sealed, filled with oil or SF6 with metallic expansion
diaphragm. The current transformer shall be composed of a sealed housing for the cores and
primary and secondary windings conductors, supported by a porcelain insulator and pedestal
along with secondary leads, insulation and low voltage connection box.
As an alternative construction, the cores housing can be located at the base of the unit.
Each current transformer shall have following accessories:
a. Expansion chamber and diaphragm.

b. Oil level indicator or manometer
c. Provision for oil drain/sampling valve or gas vent/filling
d. Low voltage terminal box
e. Grounding terminal provided with a connector to install required cable size as per
earthing specification
4.2.2 Base Tank or Pedestal
The base tank or pedestal shall be made of metal, shall be of waterproof and hermetically
sealed construction and shall support rigidly the transformer unit.
4.2.3 Low Voltage Terminal Box
This terminal box shall be weatherproof design with a hinged door and a removable plate at the
bottom for cable glands. Sufficient terminals shall be provided in each terminal box and shall be
properly identified with group markers, labels, and identification ferrules. Low voltage terminals
shall be provided with voltage limiting device.
4.2.4 HV Terminals and Grounding Terminal
The HV terminals shall be provided with universal connectors for horizontal or vertical conductor
as per envisaged requirements. The grounding terminal shall be provided with a connector for
the required cable size as per earthing specification.
4.2.5 Transient Performance
Current transformer protective cores shall meet transient performance requirements inline with
Technical Data Schedules and respective codes and standards (IEC 61869). The supplier shall
submit, drawings, and detailed calculation establishing proper sizing, characteristics of cores
and subject to approval.

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 6
4.3 Galvanized Steel Supports
The capacitor voltage transformers and current transformers shall be mounted on pillar/lattice
type supports as applicable.
Mounting details of the capacitor voltage transformers and current transformers shall be
prepared in-coordination and compatibility with planned steel supports and subject to
Employer/Engineer approval.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply of Instrument Transformers shall include the items listed below. It is imperative that
Contractor is responsible for overall design, engineering coordination, verification of
compatibility, completeness of design, installation, and overall testing and commissioning
 HV terminals and connectors
 Grounding terminals and connectors
 Necessary Interface terminal blocks & associated connections inside terminal box
 Corona Ring where applicable
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Volume1, Section 6: Schedule
of Prices.
The Contractor shall specify list of recommended spare parts along with price for each item in
his tender (Volume1, Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide
recommended spare parts, as approved by the Employer, which may be needed for a 5-year
period of operation, under normal operating conditions.
5.3 Nameplates
Each Instrument transformer shall bear a nameplate permanently fixed and legibly marked in
English and in accordance with relevant standards. Both terminal markings and nameplates
shall be included. In addition to the standard nomenclature as per standards, additional
reference indicating GCCIA contract number shall be included.
6 SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION
Factory acceptance tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable international

standards.
The lightning impulse withstand tests and partial discharge measurement shall be applied to all
Capacitor Voltage Transformers, in addition to mandatory routine tests specified in standards.

016403-2000-47ES-4130 01 July 2024 7
Winding secondary resistance, lightning impulse withstand tests and partial discharges
measurement shall be applied to all current transformers. Apart from applicable routine tests,
magnetization-curve test (V-I saturation curve) shall be performed on typical CTs of each
protection cores.
Duration of Partial discharge measurement shall be 10 minutes.
Tests shall be done to prove transient performance of instrument transformers as specified in

Technical Data Schedules. The test procedure shall be according to international standards
and subject to Engineer/Authority approval.
All design type tests prescribed as per international codes and standards shall be performed on
representative unit or on the first unit of every new design or rating to be supplied to GCCIA.
FAT shall be offered for inspection, and Employer / Engineer reserve the right to witness all or
part of routine tests.
GCCIA
HV SURGE ARRESTERS
016403-2000-47ES-4140 Rev.01
July 2024
HV Surge Arresters # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4140 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 HV SURGE ARRESTERS 1
1.1 General 1
4.1 General 1
4.2 Design and Manufacturing 1
4.3 Accessories 2
4.3.1 Pressure Relief Device 2
4.3.2 HV Terminals 2
4.3.3 Grounding Terminals 2
4.3.4 Equipment Support 2
4.3.5 Corona Ring & Grading Ring 2
4.3.6 Discharge Counter 2
4.3.7 Nameplate 3
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 3
6.1 Type tests 4
6.2 Routine tests 4
6.3 Special tests 4
016403-2000-47ES-4140 01 July 2024 1
1 HV SURGE ARRESTERS
1.1 General
The present specification outlines, from a technical point-of-view, standard requirements

applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of gapless, metal oxide HV surge arresters to
be installed outdoors as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the Gulf
Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA):
The gapless metal oxide surge arresters specified in this document are intended for the
protection of EHV/HV equipment to be installed in the substations from lightning & switching
over voltages and they will be located at the incoming and outgoing transmission lines and
beside the autotransformers and shunt reactors.
This Technical Specification shall always be read in conjunction with the General Technical
Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
IEC 60099-4 Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems
IEC 60099-5 Surge arresters – Selection and application recommendations
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high voltage insulators intended for use in
polluted conditions
ISO 9001 Quality Management systems -Requirements.
4.1 General
The surge arrester shall be of manufacturer’s proven design based on minimum ten (10) years
manufacturing and five-year operational experience in equivalent conditions as prescribed for
project and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this specification in all respects.
4.2 Design and Manufacturing
The surge arrester ratings and characteristics shall comply with the requirements indicated in
the Technical Data Schedules.
016403-2000-47ES-4140 01 July 2024 2
However, the final ratings and locations of SA shall be as per approved insulation coordination
study to be performed by the Contractor.
The HV gapless metal oxide surge arresters shall come with porcelain /polymer (Silicon)
insulation or and shall be supplied with insulating bases & discharge counter. In case of
porcelain insulation, the surface shall be with Silicon coating.
4.3 Accessories
4.3.1 Pressure Relief Device
A pressure relief device shall be provided with each surge arrester to ensure that failure of
arrester shall not cause explosive shattering of the insulator housing.
The pressure relief device shall be capable of withstanding the symmetrical fault current of the
system as specified in the Data Technical Schedules.
The pressure relief device shall be designed to ensure the safety of operation & maintenance
personnel or other equipment in its vicinity.
4.3.2 HV Terminals
The HV terminals and associated connectors shall be provided suitable for bundled conductors
as envisaged for the project.
4.3.3 Grounding Terminals
Grounding terminals shall be provided to accommodate connection of 95 - 300 mm2 stranded

copper cables and same holds good for earthing of surge counters and arrester body.
4.3.4 Equipment Support
The HV Gapless surge arresters shall be suitable for installation on Pillar type or lattice type
structural supports, except for the transformers and shunt reactors where they will be mounted
on brackets.
4.3.5 Corona Ring & Grading Ring
Arresters shall be equipped with grading rings.
4.3.6 Discharge Counter
Surge arresters shall have a surge (discharge) counter along with a built-in milliammeter to
monitor the leakage / internal current of the surge arrester continuously. Unless otherwise
agreed only analogue type surge counters shall be supplied.
The surge counter shall record the number of lightning and switching discharges of the surge
arrester automatically on a five-digit cyclometer dial. The surge counter shall be non-reset type
and shall be able to register minimum of 5 discharges per second.
016403-2000-47ES-4140 01 July 2024 3
The leakage and internal current indicator shall monitor and measure the sum of leakage
current across the external porcelain insulator plus the internal current flowing through the surge
arrester. The scale range shall be 0-50 mA peak/√2 (non-linear scale)
The surge counter and leakage / internal current indicator unit shall be maintenance-free,
weatherproof and sealed type construction.
Connection between surge arrester ground terminal and surge monitor shall be with insulated
cable. The insulation withstand of the cable shall be 5 kV minimum. By pass shunt shall be
provided to establish continuity to ground from the surge arrester ground terminal during
maintenance.
4.3.7 Nameplate
As specified in the General Technical Requirements.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
It’s the responsibility of the bidder to coordinate the engineering and the procurement, in order
to assure compatibility of the surge arresters and completeness of the overall installation:
The supply of equipment shall include the following:
a) HV terminals including connectors

b) Grounding terminals
c) Mounting hardware
d) Discharge counters with mounting hardware, connectors and insulating bases
e) One spare counter and insulating base
Contractor shall provide list of mandatory spare parts, in relevant bid schedules
Contractor shall list recommended spare parts and their price in relevant schedule of tender
and include in his bid. Contractor shall provide recommended spare parts, as ordered by the
Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of operation, under normal operating
conditions.
016403-2000-47ES-4140 01 July 2024 4
All tests shall be conducted and results submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance by
the Employer.
6.1 Type tests
Certified type test reports performed on an identical unit shall be included in bids and same
shall be submitted to the Engineer/Employer for review during the engineering stage.
6.2 Routine tests
All routine tests prescribed in the relevant IEC 60099-4 or ANSI C62.11 standard shall be
performed on all surge arresters.
6.3 Special tests
Acceptance tests per IEC 60099-4 or Conformance Tests per ANSI C62.11, as applicable, shall
be performed on at least two units.
GCCIA ‫التعاون لدول الخليج العربية‬

STRUCTURAL STEEL AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
016403-2000-43ES-3200 Rev.01
July 2024
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GGCIA) Revision
Structural Steel and Equipment Supports # Date Page
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 1

016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 1
1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
1.1 General
The specification outlines, from a technical point of view, the design, the manufacturing, the
procurement, the testing and the packing of structures used for bus and equipment supports
that will be installed in the Substations of the GCC Interconnection Project – Phase I.
The Contractor shall ensure the design of these steel structures is compatible with the electro-
mechanical equipment and any other component that will be installed on or attached to these
structures.
In cases where the steel support is included along with electromechanical equipment supplied
by a Subcontractor, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the different designs to
assure overall compatibility and integrity.
The supply covers all the elements for the structures, supports and accessories listed below but
not limited to:
 Columns
 Beams
 Equipment supports
 Bolts, washers and nuts
 Hardware
 Spare parts
The supply also includes the preparation and presentation of the documents for Engineer's
review as described later in this document.
1.2 GANTRY STRUCTURES & GIB SUPPORT STEEL STRUCTURES:
The guidelines for the design, supply and erection of Gantry Tower shall be referred from the
OHL -Tower specification.
The materials to be used on the Gantry tower, GIB support structures etc., shall be offered for
stage wise inspection (ITP shall be submitted and shall be approved by Engineer / Employer).

016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 2
Unless otherwise indicated, the materials, design and fabrication of the structural steel shall be
in accordance with the last version of the following codes and/or standards:
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
A36/A36M Standard Specification for Structural Steel
A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on

Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Pipes,
Plates, Bars and Strip
A143 Recommendation Practice for Safeguarding against Embrittlement

of Hop-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and procedure for
Detecting Embrittlement
A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
A239 Test method for locating spot in a zinc coating on iron or steel
articles by the Preece Test
A325 Standard Specification for high-strength bolts for structural steel

joints.
A384 Recommended Practice for Safeguarding against Warpage and

Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Structures
A394 Standard Specification for Steel Transmission Tower Bolts, zinc-

coated and bored.
A500 Standard Specification for Cold Formed, Welded and Seamless,

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
A 563 Carbon and alloy steel nuts
A572/A572M Standard Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Columbium

Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality
B201 Practice for Testing Chromate Coating on Zinc and Cadmium

Surfaces
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
Manual of Steel Construction.

Volume I and II
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
Design of lattice steel transmission structures

016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 3
AWS American Welding Society
Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction
ISO International Standards Organization
ISO 9001 Quality systems. Model for quality assurance in Design,

Development, Production, Installation and Servicing
ANSI American National Standards Institute
B18.22.1 Plain Washers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
B 18.21.2m Lock Washers
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Associations
SG-6 Power Switching Equipment
4.1 Materials
4.1.1 General
All the material shall conform to the specification, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The materials used in the fabrication of the structures and equipment supports shall be new and
without defects.
4.1.2 Structural Steel
Steel structure members shall be fabricated from structural grade, open-hearth steel conforming
to ASTM A36, ASTM A500 or ASTM A572 or equivalent.
4.1.3 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A394 or ASTM A325 or equivalent.
All U-bolts shall be complete with at least six nuts.
All bolts and nuts of the same diameter shall be of the same grade
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 4
4.2 Steel Structures and Equipment Supports Design
4.2.1 General
Substation structures shall be lattice or solid profile type fabricated from either rolled steel W or
C profiles or hollow structural sections.
The design of the substation structures shall conform to the requirements of the applicable
AISC "Manual of Steel Construction" or ASCE 10 or equivalent and the requirements of this
Technical Specification.
The deflection limits, load factors and load combinations given in AISC Manual and ASCE 10
shall be replaced by the values given in this section Technical Specification.
4.2.2 Design Criteria
Substation structures shall be designed so that their strength satisfies safety requirements
under any of the load conditions specified in this Technical Specification.
Structures shall be designed on the basis of loads, applied both to the structure itself and to the
attached or supported accessories and equipment, as described in the following clauses.
These loads are unfactored loads. The load factor specified in 4.2.2.1 of this section shall be
applied to them to give factored loads.
In addition, the deflection of the columns and girders when subjected to maximum design
conditions excluding overload factors (i.e. unfactored loads) shall not exceed the following
limits:
a. Girders supporting disconnect switches: 1/200 of span vertically and horizontally;

b. All other girders: 1/200 of span vertically, 1/100 of span horizontally;
c. Columns: 1/100 of the height.
4.2.2.1 Load Factor
Structures shall be designed with a load factor of not less than 1.3.
Where any member is subjected to a greater load by the omission of the load factor from any
part of the loading, that condition must be considered (e.g., dead load shall not include overload
factor in design of tower tension legs).
4.2.2.2 Short Circuit Forces
Short circuit forces shall be taken as resulting from an electrical fault. .The information regarding
the short circuit current is given in the technical data schedule of the electrical equipment.
4.2.2.3 Wind Loading
Total wind loads on structures or equipment shall be calculated by this formula:
P = SF x 6.1084 x 10-4 x v2
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 5
Where:
P= kPa
v= m/s
SF = Shape factor
The wind speed to be considered for the substation structures shall be 160 km/h (44.4 m/s).
The shape factor SF is defined as follow:
a. Lattice flat Surfaces:
For wind blowing normal to a surface: a shape factor of 2 for pressure acting in the
direction of the wind, on the projected area of surface.
For wind blowing onto a corner: a shape factor of 1,6 for pressure acting normal to both
adjacent surfaces applied simultaneously to the projected area of each surface.
b. Curved Surfaces:
For curved surfaces: a shape factor of 0,6 for pressure acting in direction of the wind, on
the projected area of surface.
c. Solid Members:
For wind blowing normal to a surface: a shape factor of 1,0 for pressure acting in
direction of wind on the projected area of the surface.
For wind blowing onto a corner: a shape factor of 0,75 for pressure acting normal to both
adjacent surfaces applied simultaneously to the projected area of each surface.
4.2.2.4 Erection and Maintenance Loading
Each member whose longitudinal axis is less than 30 degrees with the horizontal shall be
designed to withstand, without permanent set and independent of all other forces, a concentrated
forces of 135 kg applied vertically to the longitudinal axis at any point along its length.
4.2.2.5 Conductor Loading
Structures which accept conductors from the incoming and outgoing transmission lines or strain
bus shall be designed for the loads shown on the structure loading drawings.
4.2.2.6 Rigid Bus Loading
The loading applied to structures by rigid bus and its supports will be shown on construction
drawings.
4.2.2.7 Equipment Loading
Equipment loads shall be the bus connections traction, the wind on the equipment, the
earthquake induced load and any additional operating loads. The dynamic forces exercised by
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 6
the Circuit Breakers at the time of closing and breaking is a good example of an operating load
to be considered when calculating equipment loading.
The weight of the equipment is part of the dead load.
4.2.2.8 Seismic Forces
The values related to seismic requirements are given in the General Technical Requirements.
4.2.2.9 Loading Combinations
Structures shall be capable of withstanding forces resulting from the following combination of
factored loads:
a. Dead load plus normal erection and maintenance loads

b. Dead load plus wind load plus bus loading and short circuit forces
c. Dead load plus equipment operating loading plus bus loading
d. Dead load plus seismic forces
e. Dead load plus 60% seismic forces plus short-circuit forces
4.2.2.10 Design Strength
The design strength of the structures shall be calculated using the requirements of AISC (or
equivalent) "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings".
4.2.2.11 Unit Stress Capability
All structural members shall be designed in such a way that the unit stress capability, due to the
most unfavourable combined loads, multiplied by the load security factors does not go beyond
the values shown in the following paragraphs. Redundant members shall be designed to
withstand, at least, the stress originated by 2.5 % of the main member axial load.
The dimensions and the shape of members and accessories shall be chosen in a way such to
avoid damages and breaking due to vibration or fatigue.
4.2.2.12 Members in Compression
The axially loaded compressive members shall be designed in accordance with the allowable
unit stress as given in ASCE or AISC manuals (or equivalent).
The following maximum allowable slenderness l/r ratio shall not be exceeded (unsupported
design length of member/radius of gyration):
Leg and main cross arm members: 120

Other stressed members: 200
Redundant members without calculated stress: 250
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 7
4.2.2.13 Members in Tension
The calculations shall be done taking into consideration the real area of members forming the
structure.
The area of existing holes on the structure is calculated considering the real diameter of the bolt
plus three mm.
The slenderness ratio shall not exceed 350.
The real area of a simple angle connected by one leg only or a double angle connected by
means of a gusset is calculated as follows:
3 x2 + 4 xy
Net area =
3x+y
Where:
x = the net sectional area of the connected leg

y = the sectional area of the unconnected leg
Where lug angles are incorporated, the net sectional area of the whole angle member shall be
used.
For double angles or tees, placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a gusset or to
each side of part of a rolled section, the net sectional area of the pair shall be used assuming the
members are suitably connected together along their length.
In the case of a series of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zig-zag line, the net
width of the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters of
all holes in the series and adding for each gauge space in the series, the quantity Z.
S2
Z =
4g
Where:
S = longitudinal spacing (pitch in millimeters) of any two consecutive holes

g = transverse spacing (gauge, in millimeters) of the same two holes
The critical section of the part shall be obtained by considering the series which gives the least
net width. The net section, taken through a hole, shall not be more than 85% of the
corresponding gross section.
4.2.2.14 Members in Bending
The maximum primary bending stress shall be calculated by appropriate formulas. Total
bending stress, primary and secondary, on extreme fibers shall not exceed the yield stress of
steel.
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 8
The following criteria is used for members simultaneously subjected to both, axial compression
and bending stresses:
fc Fb
+ 1
Fc Fb (1-fc/Fe)
Where:
fc = Actual axial compressive stress (resultant axial force divided by effective cross
sectional area of member).
Fc = Limiting ultimate compressive stress of member.
fb = Actual bending stress, tension and compression at extreme fibers (bending moment
divided by section modulus).
Fb = Limiting ultimate bending stress of member.
Fe = 1970 x 106 kPa

(l/r)2
Slenderness ratio l/r is computed along axis of bending.
Where:
l = length of member
r = radius of gyration
4.3 Fabrication
4.3.1 General
Steel shall be free from blisters, scales, laminations, grease and other defects and suitable, in
all respects, for fabrication and hot-dip galvanizing.
All members of prefabricated frames of structure and support steelwork shall be cut with a jig
and all holes shall be drilled or punched with a jig. All parts shall be carefully cut and holes
accurately located such that when members are in position, the holes will be in alignment.
Drifting or connective reaming of holes will not be allowed. All equal members shall be
interchangeable.
4.3.2 Marking
Pieces shall be marked distinctively with erection marks. Marks shall be clearly visible after
galvanizing and correspond to those on the erection drawings. Steel stamping shall be
performed with 16 mm high characters dies. Special care shall be taken to avoid damaging the
galvanize coating, to impair member strength or to expose the marks to obliteration during transit.
4.3.3 Drilling and Punching
Drilled or punched holes are acceptable for material up to 13 mm thickness. Material over
13 mm thickness shall be drilled or sub-punched and reamed. All burrs left by the drill or punch
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 9
shall be completely removed. The punch diameter shall be at least 1.6 mm smaller than the
finished hole.
Punching of holes is not permitted when the thickness of the material exceeds the finished
diameter of the hole. Finished holes shall be clean and free from burrs.
The distance between center line of holes located at the ends of a member shall not vary by
more than 1.5 mm from the specified value. The alignment between holes of a same group
shall be within one mm from specified value.
Hole diameter shall not exceed the bolt size by more than 1,5 mm before galvanizing.
Allowance shall be made in gauge dimensions on steel members for the thickness of
subsequent galvanizing and the possible formation of spelter fillets inside the angles so as to
allow adequate erection clearance after galvanizing.
Holes shall be accurately placed so that no "drifting" shall be necessary at site to facilitate
assembly.
4.3.4 Welding
Welding of steel shall be carried out before galvanizing in accordance with AWS "Code of Arc and
Gas Welding in Building Construction" (or equivalent). A shielded arc process shall be used. No
welding shall be allowed for parts subjected to tension.
4.3.5 Bending
All bending of pieces should be done cold. However, hot bending where advisable shall be
specified on the drawings. Bending shall be done in such a manner that full section shall be
maintained and that the physical properties of steel will not be impaired. Agreement of the
Engineer shall be obtained for any bending by cutting and welding.
4.3.6 Galvanizing
All galvanizing shall be hot dip type. No alternative process can be used without GCCIA/Engineer
written approval.
The minimum amount of zinc coating shall be 550 g/m2 and 400 g/m2 for structural steel and
hardware, respectively. As compare to the design drawings for OHL Steel & Bolts the
galvanization thickness are as follows:
a. Galvanizing for structural steel products shall meet requirements of ASTM A123. The
minimum coating thickness shall be 130 microns equivalent to 915 g/sq. m. In addition,
welded assemblies, which may be particularly susceptible to cracking and/or distortion, shall
be galvanized and tested in accordance with ASTM A143. All holes in material shall be free of
excess spelter after galvanizing.
b. Galvanizing for bolt, step bolts, U-bolts, shackles, nuts, lock nuts, fillers, washers, spring
washers and similar hardware shall meet the requirements of ASTM A153.
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 10
c. Galvanized steel members shall be dipped into solution of dichromate after galvanizing for
prevention of white rust during transportation and storage.
Minimum Weight of Zinc Coating
(g/m2) of Surface
Class of Material Average of Any Individual
Specimens Tested Specimen
Class C
Bolt (over 9.52 mm in diameter) and 381 305

similar articles. Washers 4.76
to 6.35 mm thick
Class D
Washers under 4.76 mm thick 305 259
4.3.7 Chromate Treatment
A chromate treatment shall be applied to the galvanized metal. The application of this layer is
performed by dipping the galvanized metal in a solution of sodium dichromate and sulphuric acid
or by other accepted methods. The concentration of the chromate treatment shall be such that
the galvanized metal will resist a salty mist test for 48 hours. Fabrication Details
All necessary attachment holes and brackets for mounting equipment and operating
mechanisms, grounding wire, bus work, incoming and outgoing transmission line conductors and
overhead shield wires shall be included.
4.3.8 Tolerances
Allowable tolerance applicable to manufactured steel structure parts, between measured

dimensions and specified dimensions on drawings, are as follows:
On the slope of bended parts: the 1/150.

On camber of the compression member between two lateral support points: 1/1000.
On all the dimensions: 1,5 mm
4.3.9 Minimum Thickness of Material
Minimum thickness, before galvanizing of main structural legs and girder chords shall not be
less than Six millimeters (6 mm) and all other members not less than three millimeters (3 mm).
The width to thickness ratio, "b/t", of any angle leg shall in no case exceed twenty to one (20:1)
in which "b" is the longest leg measured from the end of the root fillet to the extreme fiber and
"t" is the nominal leg thickness.
Minimum thickness of gusset plates shall be 6.0 mm.

016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 11
Minimum width of a connected leg of an angle shall be based on the diameter of the bolt being
used and shall be twice the diameter plus 12.0 mm.
If more than one diameter of bolt is used on the contract, irrespective of quantity, the minimum
variation in nominal diameter shall be 3 mm.
4.3.10 Splices and Bolted Connections
All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shank shall extend completely through connected
members.
Bolt shall extend by at least two threads from the nut. All bolts shall come with a "grower" type
spring washer.
The main members splices and connections shall not be aligned vertically or horizontally.
Spacing between the connections shall be at least 1800 mm.
The spacing between two bolts shall be of twice the diameter plus 10 mm.
Members used for girders and columns shall be installed inside to avoid possible interference
with equipment attached to the structure.
The diagonal members connections shall be made in such a way to avoid eccentricity.
Use of gusset plates shall be kept to a minimum.
Where angles are lap spliced, the heel of the inside angle shall be chamfered to clear fillet of
outside angle.
Minimum edge distances measured from centre of the bolt hole to any edge shall not be less than
the following:
Bolt diameter Rolled edge Sheared Edge Plasma arc or

Flame cut edge
12mm 18 mm 18 mm 24 mm
16 mm 22 mm 24 mm 30 mm
20 mm 26 mm 30 mm 36 mm
24 mm 30 mm 36 mm 42 mm
28 mm 34 mm 42 mm 48 mm
4.3.11 Double-Angle Members
All double-angle members shall be connected at intervals between end connections by stitch
bolts. Spacing of stitch bolts shall not be more than 1.0 m for tension members. For
compression members, spacing shall be such that l/r ratio of one angle between stitch bolts shall
not be greater than l/r ratio of whole member and not more than 0.6 m. All double-angle
members shall be connected, at least, at two points between connection points. Angles with
connected legs longer than 100 mm shall be connected with 2 stitch bolts and a filler plate at
each point (one bolt on each gauge line). Angles with connected legs of 100 mm or smaller shall
be connected at each point by one bolt with a ring fill placed on the inner gauge line.
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 12
4.3.12 Long Tension Members
Tension members shall be cut shorter than the theoretical required length. Members of
three meters or less shall be three millimeters shorter. Longer members shall be three
millimeters shorter, with an additional 1,5 mm for each additional 3 m, or fraction thereof, to a
maximum of 6,0 mm.
4.4 Submittal of Documentation
The following documents shall be submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's review, as
referred to in the General Technical Requirements:
a. Structure loading diagrams

b. Outline dimensions of each structure
c. Design calculations including foundation loads and tabulation of actual and resistance
member and connection loads for each load combination
d. Resistance formula and values of resistance used
e. Specification for grades of steel used
f. Fabrication drawings which show in full detail all members, bolts, filler and fitting sizes,
dimensions, identification marks and grade of materials
g. Erection and assembly drawings showing identification mark and size for each member,
bolt size, quantity, maximum torque and grade for each connection, and location and
thickness of filler washers
h. Complete weight of galvanized steel for each applicable structure type
i. Certified test reports for steel, bolts and galvanizing for tests required by their respective
applicable standards.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The Contractor shall supply all the required structural steel and equipment supports, such as,
but not limited to:
a. Base: Foundation footings;

b. Equipment support: Base plates, including the attaching bolts, nuts and washers;
c. Lines and strain bus: Anchoring material for insulators strings and shield wires;
d. Hardware: Bolts, nuts and washers delivered in non returnable containers. Supply at
least 10 % (ten percent) more bolts, nuts, lock washers and ring fills than actually
required to compensate for normal field losses.
General
Mechanical tests on the material used in fabrication of the structures shall include ultimate
tensile strength, yield strength, Impact strength, Hardness and elongation. Mill certificates, if
available, may be supplied in lieu of these tests. All relevant chemical tests shall also be
016403-2000-43ES-3200 01 July 2024 13
considered to confirm the suitability of the material. Number of samples shall be as per the
relevant standards and subject to the approval of Engineer/ Employer.
The Employer reserves the right to obtain, at no extra cost, sample material from any lot being
fabricated, for independent testing by a laboratory approved by the society issuing the
standards and to reject any lot of material for which such tests fail to meet specification
requirements. This additional test will be debited to the Contractor.
All welds shall be tested in accordance with applicable standards to ensure satisfactory
performance in service.
All galvanized material shall be subject to tests as per the specified standards.
6.1 Tests Required
An assembly test of each type of structure shall be performed by selecting members in a

random manner. Assembly test shall prove perfect fit of the structure parts. No adjustment by
drilling or reaming and deformation shall be allowed.
The assembly test shall be executed in the presence of Employer’s and/or Engineer’s
representatives.
During manufacturing, the members shall be checked on a sample basis for conformity to
drawings and material standards. Sampling process shall be subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
For each lot of materials to be supplied, the Contractor shall test the following:
a. Dimensions
b. Welding inspection test following AWS
c. Bending inspection test
d. Uniform galvanization in accordance with ASTM A239
e. Adherence test following ASTM A123
f. Marine fog test, following ASTM B201
GCCIA
60MVAr SHUNT REACTORS
016403-2000-47ES-4200 Rev.01
July 2024
60MVAr Shunt Reactors # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 HV SHUNT REACTORS 1
1.1 General 1
2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 1

4.1.1 Load Conditions 2
4.1.2 Environment 2
4.1.3 Incoming Voltage for Auxiliary Services 2
4.1.4 Guaranteed Losses 3
4.2 Short-Circuit Voltage (Impedance) 3
4.3 Transport 3
4.4 Manufacturing Requirements 4
4.4.1 Core 4
4.4.2 Bushings 4
4.4.3 Tank 5
4.4.4 Moving and Maintenance Elements 6
4.4.5 Conservator Tank 6
4.4.6 Transformer / Reactor Oil 7
4.4.7 Cooling System 7
4.4.8 Indicators, Protection, Alarm and Tripping Devices 7
4.4.9 Control Cabinet 9
4.4.10 Grounding Connections 10
4.4.11 Shunt Reactor Auxiliary Winding 11
4.4.12 Transformer/Reactor Monitoring System 11
4.4.13 Multi-gas Transformer / Rector Monitoring System 18
4.4.14 Dissolved Gas Analysis 22

6.1 Apparatus Test 23

6.1.1 Dielectric Test (Routine/Type/Special test) 23
6.1.2 Temperature Rise Test (Type test) 24
016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 ii
6.1.3 Zero-Sequence Impedance Test (special test) 24

6.1.4 Capacitance &Tan delta Measurement for Winding & Bushing (Routine test) 24
6.1.5 Sound Level Test (Type test) 24
6.1.6 Vibration Test (Type test) 24
6.1.7 Routine tests 24
6.1.8 Type test. 25
6.1.9 Special test 25
6.2 Bushing Tests 25
6.2.1 Type Test 25
6.3 Bushing Current Transformer Test 26

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 1
1 HV SHUNT REACTORS
1.1 General
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of the following types of 400 kV Shunt
Reactors to be installed in 400 kV substations being developed by GCCIA as part of Gulf
Cooperation Council Electrical Interconnection Grid.
Code Description
4222 Shunt Reactor 60 MVAR, 400 kV, oil-SF6 bushings
2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE
IEC 60044 Instruments transformers
IEC 60076 Power transformers & Reactors
IEC 60137 Insulating bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC 60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal
voltages greater than 1000 V
IEC 60282-2 High-voltage fuses
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in polluted
conditions
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers
IEC 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications – Mineral insulating oils for electrical
equipment
IEC 60422 Mineral insulating oils in electrical equipment – Supervision and maintenance
guidance

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 2
IEC 60567 Oil-filled electrical equipment – Sampling of free gases and analysis of free and
dissolved gases in mineral oils and other insulating liquids – Guidance
IEC 60475 Method of sampling insulating liquids
IEC 60599 Mineral oil-filled electrical equipment in service – Guidance on the interpretation of
dissolved and free gases analysis
IEC 61181 Mineral oil filled electrical equipment – Application of dissolved gas analysis to
factory tests on electrical equipment.
IEEEC57.104 IEEE guide for interpretation of gases generated in mineral oil immersed
transformers
4.1.1 Load Conditions
The 400 kV shunt reactors are dedicated to main networks’ line voltage regulation. They are
switched on and off as line loading decreases or increases beyond a certain level. Provision shall
be made by the Contractor to allow for an untuning reactor to be inserted between earth and the
neutral of the shunt reactor. The tertiary winding will be used to connect with power supply for the
auxiliaries of the substation
4.1.2 Environment
The equipment and material to be supplied in accordance with the present specification shall be
designed to operate satisfactorily considering the environmental conditions indicated in the General
Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
The leakage distance shall be established on the basis of the unusual high-level of pollution in the
region and the common practice of the utilities in the Gulf region.
The capacity (power) specified in these schedules must be reached without having the temperature
rise exceeded, which means that the Contractor shall plan additional radiators and fans to
counteract the effects of site environment. To that effect, the Contractor shall submit a calculation
brief indicating the number of additional fans and radiators.
The Design maximum ambient temperature shall be considered as 55º C for all design calculations
and guarantees.
4.1.3 Incoming Voltage for Auxiliary Services
The incoming voltage for the auxiliaries is indicated in the General Technical Requirements.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 3
4.1.4 Guaranteed Losses
The no-load and load losses shall be measured when tests are performed at the manufacturer’s
plant in compliance with this specification.
If the measured values of losses are higher than the maximum guaranteed loss values including
tolerances, the equipment price will be readjusted (reduced) as follows:
a) For each equipment whose measured value of losses by excitation is higher than the
guaranteed value of the loss by excitation:
- penalty = capitalized value of no-load losses x the difference between the measured
value of losses in kW after dielectric tests less guaranteed value of losses in kW.
b) For each equipment winding whose measured load loss value is higher than the guaranteed
load loss value:
- penalty = capitalized value of on-load losses x the difference between the measured
value of losses in kW less the guaranteed value of losses in kW.
The capitalized values of on-load and no-load losses are indicated in the Technical Data Schedules
of this specification.
4.2 Short-Circuit Voltage (Impedance)
Short-circuit voltage (impedances) of the apparatus are specified in the Technical Data Schedules.
The Contractor may propose an alternative with impedance values based on Contractor’s
optimization.
4.3 Transport
Besides the General Technical Requirements of this document, the Contractor must comply with
the following requirements:
a) As the apparatus will be delivered without oil, the Contractor shall provide bottles of
compressed dry air or nitrogen and all the necessary accessories for connection to the tank
during transportation. The tank shall be airtight to maintain a positive pressure during
transport to the site.
b) In addition to the above, the Contractor must also install an impact recorder (minimum two
(2) numbers) on equipment which shall be autonomous enough to operate during the
transport period (assume 4 months). The recorder shall be returned to the manufacturer
upon receipt at final location on site. A reading of the dielectric insulation of the core to
ground shall be performed upon leaving the factory and this test shall be compared to a
similar one performed on site upon receipt of the apparatus.
c) The Contractor may propose single-phase or three phase units and design the equipment
considering the transportation limitation imposed by the road, railway or sea way to the site.
The contractor shall investigate to obtain the necessary information.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 4
4.4 Manufacturing Requirements
4.4.1 Core
The core shall be assembled with oriented grain steel, cold rolled sheet, and treated with an
insulating layer heat and oil resistant.
The core supports shall be designed to counter the effects of marine and overland transport under
poor conditions.
The shunt reactor gapped core columns shall be made of superimposed stackings with embedded
laminated steel separated by spacers, preferably made of porcelain.
The Contractor shall provide a description of construction details of the proposed core or shell
design.
The magnetic core and clamping structure shall be insulated from each other and from the tank.
4.4.2 Bushings
The bushing shall be RIP condenser type Oil-SF6(HV line bushing) and have adequate current
capacity to use the equipment to its maximum overload capacity. The neutral bushings shall have
the same current capacity as the corresponding phase bushings.
All the porcelain (Neutral and Tertiary) shall have adequate physical properties and shall be of color
specified in the General Technical Requirements, without cavities and defects and entirely glazed.
The brackets and accessories shall be made of steel or malleable iron and shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
All terminal connectors used outside of oil filled portion shall be silver/tin plated.
The bushings shall include current transformers as shown in the Technical Data Schedules.
Bushings of identical current and voltage ratings must be interchangeable.
The Contractor shall supply bushing connectors suitable for horizontal or vertical connection as
specified in the Technical Data Schedules.
The primary bushings for 115 kV class or more shall be capacitive type, supplied with capacitive
taps; bushings of lower voltages shall be porcelain solid-type.
Bushings shall be so located that the central phase (H2. X2, Y2) is at the Centre of the tank, along
the transversal or longitudinal axes. This does not apply to shunt reactor auxiliary winding bushing
that shall be located conveniently inside the fuse holder’s enclosure.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 5
4.4.3 Tank
The main tank shall be entirely welded, made of high resistivity steel plates and the design shall be
conventional with bolted cover (no deviation accepted). The tank shall be designed to withstand
full vacuum.
The flanges of the tank and cover shall be fixed with a sufficient number of bolts, equally spaced, to
ensure a uniform pressure of the gaskets.
All hard ware used for the Reactor and accessories for outdoor application shall be either hot dip
galvanized or stainless steel.
The tank shall be designed to with stand full vacuum and over pressure conditions.
It must be possible to remove any bushing without removing the tank cover.
Large openings (typically, 500 mm diameter) shall be planned to allow inspection and easy access to
bushings, bushings current transformers, winding connections, etc. The covers of these openings
shall have handles for installation and removal.
The interior part of the tank cover shall be designed in such a manner that enables the passage of the
gas bubbles towards the Buchholz relay.
The tank shall be complete, with all accessories, which shall include:
a. Oil drain valve;

b. Top and bottom filter valves;
c. Oil sample valve at the bottom and top of the tank;
d. Valve for online DGA equipment at the bottom and the top of the tank
e. Valves on each side of Buchholz relay;
f. Thermometer envelope with captive screw cap;
g. Wall ladder for access to Buchholz relay with suitable protection;
h. Facilities for handling and installation (hoisting eyes and traction rings);
i. Tank jacking pads;
j. Valves for isolation of oil circulation;
k. Plate with the location of valves.
l. Rating and connection diagram plate as per IEC and valve location plate shall be provided
on tank. Material of plates shall be stainless steel, Oil and UV resistant with sufficient
thickness
Gravity Centre plates shall be fixed on each side of the tank for transportation and service and shall
include an indication to this effect.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 6
All valves shall be provided with blank plate or plug and padlocking possibilities, in open or closed
position, and shall have indicators which shall enable to see the open or closed position.
It shall be possible to take oil samples even when the transformer is energized.
Spring loaded pressure relief valves with automatic reclosing shall also be installed and shall have a
sufficient section to permit limitation of the tank pressure. It shall have an indication flag and Trip
contact.
The tank shall have removable radiators with valves at both headers. The radiators shall have a
bleeder plug. There shall be one spare radiator (n+1) allowing operation at rated power with one
radiator out of service.
The surface of the cover shall be of antiskid type with the application of a special paint containing
abrasive particles or by other equivalent mean.
4.4.4 Moving and Maintenance Elements
Each tank shall be supplied with the necessary elements for moving and maintenance, including but
not limited to the following:
a) Skid base to permit rolling of the assembled transformer/reactor in any direction.

b) Hooks for attaching hauling equipment
from the tank.
Each tank shall have at least four jacking steps exceeding the tub which shall enable the lifting or
lowering of the complete three-phased unit, oil filled, using hydraulic or manual jacks. The lifting
capacity of each base and jack shall be of at least 50% of the total weight of the unit.
4.4.5 Conservator Tank
The equipment shall have an appropriate expansion tank allowing the oil expansion between the
maximum and minimum values of oil temperature. The conservator tank shall include a rubber
sack to avoid contamination of the oil by the humidity in the air.
Air bag rupture relay with view glass to visualize the integrity of rubber bag and to give an electrical
alarm when the bag is damaged/air got collected in the conservator.
The expansion tank’s oil capacity shall not be lower than 10% of the total oil volume of the
equipment. An oil level indicator with an alarm contact for low level, shall be installed in a accessible
location.
Openings of sufficient dimensions to allow access during inspection shall be included. The plates
used as covers for the inspection openings shall be bolted to the expansion tank and shall have
handles to facilitate the installation and removal operations.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 7
The conservator tank shall have an air vent including electrical type dehydrating breather and
designed for 100% humidity. The Breather shall include an incoming air oil-filter. This air vent shall
be at a height inferior to 1.6 m above the ground.
The conservator tank shall be provided with valves for oil filling and drainage and be complete with
oil level indictor and oil sampling drain.
4.4.6 Transformer / Reactor Oil
Sufficient oil to fill the transformer/reactor tank to the proper operating level, with ten (10%) percent
extra to allow for spillage, shall be provided. The oil shall be of such quality that it is particularly
suitable as an insulating and coolant medium for the transformers/reactors.
The oil shall be pure and refined mineral oil, clean, clear and free from moisture and acid and
completely free from solid particles.
The oil shall be treated to withstand a dielectric test prior to filling the transformer/reactor.
The Contractor shall provide his own equipment for the treatment of all oil provided and used for the
initial filling of the transformers/reactors at Site.
The oil shall be delivered in drums which should be of top quality and treated against corrosion and
painted with oil and weather-resistant paint.
4.4.7 Cooling System
Shunt reactors shall have single-stage ONAN cooling system.
Shunt reactors shall be oil-immersed, thermally upgraded insulation with conservator or external
expansion tank, complete with all required accessories and spare parts, and suitable for outdoor
operation. Except as otherwise specified herein, the reactors, accessories and spare parts shall
conform to the applicable requirements of IEC 60076.
The reactors shall be supplied complete with radiators (ONAN), controls, etc.
4.4.8 Indicators, Protection, Alarm and Tripping Devices
The following control, alarm and trip devices shall be provided wired and terminated on terminal
blocks on the control cabinet. The trip signals shall be wired through FT type test switch to facilitate
isolation during maintenance.
a. Gas Detector Relay
A two-element gas detector Buchholz-type relay shall be equipped with two floaters, two sets of
electrically separate contacts, to close for alarm on slow gas accumulation and for tripping on rapid
pressure build-up.
The relay shall be located in the main slanting conservator pipe so that it collects all gas generated
and may be inspected. The relay shall be installed with all accessories, such as sampling valve,

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 8
located at 1.6m from the ground. The relay shall be self-reset following cessation of oil flow on the
draining off of accumulated gas
A copper tube shall extend from the gas accumulation element to a suitable valve located on the
tank wall near the bottom to permit gas bleeding from ground level; a gas sampling device and a
draining device, both approximately 1.5 m above finish grade or floor level, shall be provided.
The relay shall be self-reset following cessation of oil flow or the draining off of accumulated gas.
The relay shall also trip the transformer/reactor in the event of tank rupture.
b. Oil Level Gauge
A magnetic type oil gauge with dial, readable from the ground shall be mounted on the end of the
conservator tank. Normal, minimum, maximum and 25 oC oil levels shall be shown. The gauge
shall provide two (2) sets of alarm contacts, one set of low-level contacts, and the other set of
contacts to close when the oil reaches a dangerously low level (not lower than 25 mm) above the
outlet to the main tank.
c. Oil Temperature
A dial-type oil thermometer equipped with two (2) separately adjustable sets of contacts for alarm
purposes and with a scale readable from ground and according to applicable standards shall be
provided. The temperature-sensitive element shall be installed in an oil-filled or close-fitting well,
located to measure the hottest oil as nearly as practicable.
d. Winding Temperature
The Contractor shall provide a winding temperature detector, indicating type, consisting of current
transformers/reactors, heating coil and thermocouples, responsive to the combination of top oil
temperature and winding current, calibrated to follow the hot spot temperature of the
transformer/reactor winding with necessary sets of electrically separate contacts, suitable for
operation at 125 V dc, to perform the following functions:
i) Operate a remote alarm when the temperature reaches a preset value.
ii) Trip the transformer/reactor off the system when the temperature exceeds a higher
preset value.
The alarm and trip settings shall be adjustable and shall be in accordance with applicable
standards. The current transformer/reactor connections for the winding temperature detector shall
be terminated outside the main tank for testing purposes.
The substation alarm and tripping circuits shall be fed from 110 Vdc system. The alarm and
tripping contacts rating capacity shall be able to switch and withstand the current and voltage of the
110 Vdc system.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 9
e. Pressure Relive Device
Spring loaded pressure relief valves with automatic reclosing shall also be installed and shall have a
sufficient section to permit limitation of the tank pressure. It shall have an indication flag and Trip
contact.
f. Air bag rupture relay
Air bag rupture relay with view glass to visualize the integrity of rubber bag and to give an electrical
alarm when the bag is damaged/air got collected in the conservator.
4.4.9 Control Cabinet
Each transformer/reactor shall be provided with a control cabinet of adequate size, in accordance
with the applicable standards, attached to the tank, to house all control equipment and oil pump
contactors and for terminating all control and auxiliary circuits.
Control cabinet shall be placed on the service side of the apparatus to be freely accessible and
easily visible to the operating personnel. Each equipment shall have its control cabinet containing:
Tripolar moulded case thermo-magnetic circuit breaker, with a 14 kA rms symmetric short circuit
capacity for 415 Vac system, 4 wires.
Cabinet construction IP65 (NEMA 4), 2.5 mm steel, with hinged doors, pad lockable and a mobile
plate at the bottom to enable the conduit entry (200 x 500 mm) for termination of armoured cable
glands (power and control).
The anti-condensation heating element controlled by thermostat.
Contrail cabinet, heating / lighting supply faulty alarm and indication status for Heater ON &
Door open hall be included.
Lighting with door operated switch, double outlet and a hand-held lamp with 20 m flexible cord.
Stranded cooper wiring tin-plated with polymeric fluoride insulation.
Terminal blocks mounted on asymmetrical rails (ENTRELEC or equivalent) and accessories. The
terminal block arrangement and identification shall be strictly in accordance with the drawing included
in this specification.
All the accessories shall be connected to the terminal blocks with armoured cables or cables in
metallic conduits.
The thermometers shall be located inside the control cabinet and a suitable glass window shall be
provided for reading.
Door stoppers to prevent unintended closure shall be provided.


016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 10
All components in the control cabinet and control panels shall be clearly labelled with permanently
engraved type labels.
Double compression type, weatherproof cable glands shall be provided for termination of auxiliary
cables.
The terminal blocks shall be arranged conveniently with respect to openings for cables and shall
have a minimum of twenty (20%) percent spare terminals. Current transformer/reactor secondary
windings shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks.
The wiring shall be of stranded copper not less than 2.5mm2 (4mm2 in case of current
transformer/reactor circuits) with heat and flame-resistant insulation being used for all wiring. All
wire terminations shall be made with approved pressure type terminal lugs. All cables shall be
clearly identified by means of non erasable, corrosion-resistant labels well secured around the
cable termination just above the cable glands. Connections from the control cabinet to any external
devices shall be made with armoured PVC Jacketed cable.
The control cabinet shall be not less than 1m above the concrete base. The space below the
control cabinet shall be kept free of obstructions which could interfere with the control and other
conduit connections.
The earth bus for individual earthing of circuits requiring earth points shall be provided in the control
cabinet. The bus shall include one (1) bolted type connector for 10mm2 stranded copper cable for
each earthed circuit.
A suitable pocket or holder inside the control cabinet shall be provided for holding one (1) copy of
the instruction manual.
4.4.10 Grounding Connections
Grounding leads from core and frame are to be brought out through separate bushings to facilitate
testing at site. The bushings and shorting links shall be protected by suitable enclosure.
The core must be grounded with a bushing located in a manhole on the bolted cover. Access must
be possible without lowering the oil level.
Windings must not be grounded inside the tank. The neutral bushing must be installed on the
cover.
Generally, the neutral bushing will be grounded by a copper bus of sufficient section. This bus shall
be installed down to the low part of the tank and be supported to the tank by insulators and
terminated with a connector for installation of up to two 120 mm2 -240 mm2 bare copper conductors.
The tank shall be provided with two (2) grounding terminals for connecting copper cable of 120 mm2
- 240 mm2 size. Each of those shall be located in the longitudinal face of the tank and at the
opposite side.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 11
4.4.11 Shunt Reactor Auxiliary Winding
An auxiliary winding shall be provided to supply the substation services. A series-reactor, located
inside the tank, might be necessary to restrict the short-circuit current, at bushing terminals, to the
interrupting duty of the fuses and ensure the withstand ability of the auxiliary winding for the time
specified in the Technical Data Schedules. Current-limiting fuse shall be HRC & draw out type and
installed in series with the primary.
Care shall be taken to segregate, with sufficient distance, the leads of the various phases of the
auxiliary winding from the coils output to bushing terminals.
The shunt reactor shall come with fuse disconnect holders in an outdoor enclosure located on the
main tank wall. The three poles shall be segregated with barriers to avoid phase to phase short-
circuit. The phase bushings shall penetrate inside the enclosure as close as possible to the fuse
holders. Braided flexible connectors shall be used to link the bushings and the fuse holders. The
enclosure shall come with an hinged door with pad lockable handle and three bottom removable
plates for MV cable entrance. Space provision shall be made for cable termination and connection
to the fuse holders. Enclosure shall be designed to cope with fuse operation and allow replacement
of fuses with insulated rod. Provision shall be available for draw out mechanism in MV compartment
at convenient height for ease of operation Primary protective fuse link shall be current-limiting type.
Surge arresters shall be mounted inside a metal-enclosed compartment with MV winding bushings.
4.4.12 Transformer/Reactor Monitoring System
The transformer/reactor shall be equipped with a reliable continuous online real-time system to
monitor the transformer/reactor’s status remotely and to capture the status of the
transformer/reactor. The prime objective of the system is to ensure continuity of operation (reduce
the risk of sudden failure), increase the operational performance, optimize the loading, reduce the
maintenance interventions, stimulate the probable normal/overload operating conditions and to
forecast the impact of such operating conditions, thermal modelling/estimation of winding hot spot
temperatures and maximize the asset life.
The transformer/reactor monitoring system shall include the following basic features
 Modular in Nature: The system shall consist of a chassis built to house modules which will
serve as inputs, outputs, and other functionality as outlined in this document.
 Ease of Installation: The transformer/reactor monitoring system shall have front panel
wiring for ease of install. The web-based configuration software should be available for
configuring each module and the system as a whole. The we-based configuration software
shall have a virtual map of each module to correlate which slot is being configured versus
the physical wiring on each module. A removable display screen may be mounted on the
swing panel of a transformer/reactor cabinet if so desired for ease of use by the end user for
ease of use in the field.
 Upgradeability: The monitoring system should be future upgradeable to house new
modules and system configurations depending on specification changes. Modules should
be easy to install by the end user with hot swappable capability. The web-based

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 12
configuration software should automatically recognize module configuration changes and

update accordingly.
 User Friendly: Configuration changes, upgrades, and installation should be user friendly.
End users shall be able to make changes in the web-based configuration software without a
vendor factory technician.
 Requirements:
The system shall provide a comprehensive monitoring of all key components and
parameters of the transformer/reactor as listed below:
4.4.12.1 Active components of Transformer/Reactor Main Tank
The transformer/reactor monitoring system shall be provided with necessary sensors and
data acquisition capability to measure the following key active parameters in the
transformer/reactor tanks:
 Oil Temperature: System shall support integration with temperature sensors e.g. RTD
(Resistive Temperature Device), 4-20 mA and fibre optic sensors. It shall also be flexible
to use the output from any OTI (Oil Temperature Indicator) with 4-20 mA output signals
available on the transformer/reactor.
 Oil Pressure: System shall monitor the oil pressure and also be able to detect pressure
changes inside transformer/reactor tank. It shall be able to take data from any 4-20mA
pressure transducer.
 Oil level: System shall monitor the oil level and also be able to detect oil level changes
inside transformer/reactor tank. It shall be able to take data from any 4-20mA OLI (Oil
Level Indicator).
 Moisture in Oil: System shall measure the moisture in oil and be able to use the value
in calculating moisture content in the paper insulation.
 Dissolved Gases in the Oil: System shall be able to integrate with DGA (Dissolved Gas
Analysis) monitor that provides output in IEC 61850 format. DGA monitor shall be based
on the specifications detailed in separate section below.
 Partial Discharge (PD) in the insulation: System shall be able to integrate with UHF
PD monitoring system that provides output in IEC 61850 format. PD Monitor shall be
based on the specifications detailed in separate section below.
4.4.12.2 Transformer/Reactor Load
The system shall include suitable clamp on CTs with data acquisition systems to capture
input and output currents. The voltage signals shall be taken from the secondary side of
available VT core for each phase. It shall also monitor the neutral current and core ground
current on the transformer/reactor. The measured values shall be used to calculate
transformer/reactor power e.g. Active Power (MW), Reactive power (MVAr), Apparent
Power (MVA).

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 13
4.4.12.3 Transformer / Reactor Windings
The system shall have suitable means for obtaining temperatures by conventional thermal
imaging method. The manufacturer shall provide a system of direct measurement of
temperature, obtained through fiber optic sensors installed together with the windings and
core. It shall also be flexible to use the output from any WTI (Winding Temperature
Indicator) with 4-20 mA output signals available on the transformer/reactor. The system shall
also monitor the hottest spots on the windings. Direct Winding temperature monitor (using
fiber optic) shall be based on the specifications detailed in separate section below.
4.4.12.4 Cooling System
The system shall be provided with options to alarm on excessive actuations or total run time
suggesting need for preventive maintenance. It shall determine the efficiency of the cooling
system by monitoring the below parameters:
 Differential temperature on both sides of the radiator e.g. top oil and bottom oil
temperature; System shall support integration with temperature sensors e.g. RTD
(Resistive Temperature Device), 4-20 mA and fibre optic sensors.
 Ambient temperature using RTD sensor.
 Transformer/Reactor load current
 Oil flow through the cooling system e.g. flow indicator status (Not applicable to ONAN)
The system shall be with a feature, to provide difference between actual measured value of
the top oil temperature and theoretical top oil temperature, calculated from recent history of
load and ambient temperature.
Where applicable, the system shall monitor the health of motors that operate fan banks and
pumps by measuring the motor currents. It shall also detect a jammed or broken fan of
pump motor.
4.4.12.5 OLTC Monitoring (On Load Tap Changer (Not Applicable to Reactor)
The system shall monitor the tap count band and alert from any incorrect loading, multiple
tap movements, coking of tap contacts, and defects in motor drive. It shall monitor the below
parameters on LTC for the analysis:
 Tap position
 Total tap counts
 Duration of tap change
 Motor Current
 Temperature differential between the transformer/reactor tank top oil temperature and
the OLTC top oil (diverter) temperature
 Oil level inside the LTC tank
 The model shall compute the contact wear from the recorded number of tap changer
operations and the load current during the switch (if available)

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 14
4.4.12.6 Transformer / Reactor Bushings
The monitoring system shall allow measurement of the Tan δ and Capacitance changes in
the HV transformer / reactor / bushings.
Manufacturer shall provide necessary bushing adaptors and sensors for the bushing taps.
The adaptors shall be designed to save bushing tap connections e.g. advance protection
circuit for transient voltages, redundant earth connection. The System shall provide an
indication for any earth connection failure.
The bushing monitoring system shall be able to distinguish between actual incipient faults
and environmental changes e.g. bushing temperature. It shall provide & the alert operator
for any sudden changes in Tan δ and Capacitance values but factor into the gradual
changes in Tan δ and Capacitance.
Each bushing channel should have its corresponding reference value input. The measuring
accuracy of the tan δ should be better or equal to ±0.0001 absolute value which is equal to
±0.1mrad in phase shift.
The bushing monitoring system shall be able to use voltage transformers/reactors as

reference voltage source. It shall be possible to compensate phase shift offsets. The tan δ
shall be measured as phase shift between the reference value and the leakage current.
As a minimum, the following displays shall be provided:
 Tan δ trend
 Capacitance trend
 Tan δ/ temperature gradient trend
 The bushing monitoring system should be suitable for all kind of bushings (OIP, RIP,
RBP, RIS), which are equipped with a bushing tap.
4.4.12.7 Transformer / Reactor Conservator:
The system shall also support monitoring of oil air-cell system in the conservator, including
the following parameters:
 Oil Level in conservator

 Gas accumulation relay status
 Buchholz relay status
4.4.12.8 Status of other protection units installed into Transformer / Reactor
System shall also provide flexibility to monitor the status of protection equipment installed on
the transformer/reactor that includes, but not limited to:
 PRD (Pressure Relief Device) Status
 Breather Status

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 15
4.4.12.9 Additional Requirements
In addition to above listed parameters, the system shall also provide flexibility to add more
parameters (Analog / Digital) in future if need arise.
4.4.12.10 Other Diagnostic Requirements
The system shall also enable diagnosis of transformer/reactor healthiness by calculating the
following:
1. Transformer / Reactor aging rate and life consumption

The TMS system shall automatically determine, based on the temperature of the hottest
point of the windings (windings hot-spot) and moisture content, the permissible load and
estimated useful life. The system shall compute the aging acceleration factor derived from
the winding hot spot temperature, insulation paper moisture content and oil oxygen content
through IEEE and IEC's algorithms.
2. Moisture in insulation model

The system shall be able to model, to estimate the moisture content in the insulation based
on the moisture content in the oil, oil temperature, winding temperature (hot spot) and
transformer/reactor load. The moisture sensor shall be integrated with the DGA monitoring
package if purchased.
3. Bubbling Temperature Model

The system shall have capability to calculate bubbling temperature based on total dissolved
gases in the oil, moisture in the oil and actual pressure inside the transformer/reactor tank.
4. Simulation
The system shall be provided with necessary simulation tool to investigate the
transformer/reactor healthiness and load capacity by changing the parameters e.g. ambient
temperature, load current, oil temperature, winding temperature etc. It shall also be able
provide the estimation of below parameters:
 Current continuous overload capacity of the transformer/reactor
 Emergency overloading time
 Detection of over-voltage and over current
 Life time consumption
5. Fiber Optic for direct Winding Temperature Monitoring
The manufacturer shall provide necessary Fiber optics, sensors and data acquisition
devices to measure direct hottest spot on the transformer/reactor windings. There must be
at least two sensors installed on each winding. The sensors and Fiber optics shall be inert to
mechanical and chemical impacts of the oil and shall be flexible & of suitable length so that
there will be no uncertainties captured data

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 16
Sensors shall be based on the proven zero-drift wavelength-shift GaAs technology, oil-
immersed T2 type, 200 µm all silica, PTFE Teflon jacketed, with longitudinal slit to allow
complete oil filling and bright orange colour PTFE Teflon protective spiral-wrap for improved
visibility, and shall withstand exposure to hot kerosene vapour during the
transformer/reactor insulation drying process.
The optical signal shall be brought out of the tank using a solder-glass optical feed-through
(without use of O-rings or seals), withstanding a minimum pressure of 200 psi. A Stainless-
steel feed-through wall plate accommodating up to 24 optical feed-throughs shall be
installed on the tank. The optical feed-throughs shall be assembled on Tank Wall Plate and
the assembly shall be pressure-tested by the vendor. A protective J-Box cover designed to
mate with the wall plate shall be supplied, protecting all optical feed-through and extension
cables.
The system shall meet as a minimum the following criteria:
 The data acquisition system shall be able to monitor up to 8 Fiber optics and sensors
in one module. Multiple modules may be used within the system.
 It shall have a reading range of -80 ⁰C to +250 ⁰C with a total system accuracy of ± 1
⁰C.
 It shall have user-selectable communications features: ASCII, Modbus, DNP3, IEC-
61850, IEC60870-5-101 (Serial), & IEC-60870-5-104 (Ethernet).
 All sensors shall be monitored during the heat-run test using a suitable temperature
monitoring system, the hottest sensors for each phase shall be identified, and
temperature data for all sensors recorded and reported in the test report. Hottest
sensors shall be connected to the monitor for long term monitoring purposes. The
locations for implant of sensors shall be proposed by the Manufacturer and in
agreement with Purchaser.
The system shall have the following common features:
 The system shall have the option of a local display or remote display to monitor the
current values of various parameters.
 It shall be possible to record the contemplated signals in case of any system failure,
alarm or other parameters exceeding the defined values in the database, and in
addition, it shall be possible to transmit such signals to the control room through the
closure of relay contacts or standard protocols.
 The system shall be able to be connected via a remote laptop using Ethernet link
thus enabling monitoring transformer/reactor from the control room.
 The system shall have integrated data logging, event recording and dynamic loading
analysis tools. It shall allow long term storage of measured and calculated data
within the memory of local system. Length of data storage depends on user selected
interval of logging and number of parameters chosen. It should be possible that up
to 100 parameters can be simultaneously logged at a user selectable interval.
 The system shall be able to be configured & upgraded through web-based software
application.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 17
 System shall support all industry standard communication protocols DNP3.0, IEC
61850 and Modbus
 System shall be flexible to integrate third party monitoring systems from other
vendors having Modbus or IEC 61850 output.
 Should provide full integration to SCADA, EMS and other asset management
systems
 System shall provide, with password protection, access levels to different user
groups being at least user level (only display all the information) and supervisor level
(visualization, registration of users and supervisors, system settings)
 The system will have notification (annunciation) centre where soft alarming with
colour coded criticality levels can be configured. The system will also be able to send
notifications of alarms and warnings over email.
 The system must be able to provide alarms based on Rate of Change on any signal
and not just specific threshold values.
 The system will have customizable logical expressions programming capability for
special situations. It should be able to avoid software upgrade for simple tweaks in
signals, logic or mathematical data handled by the system.
 The system will have a configurable dashboard of numerical information, with pre-
defined logical signal grouping. Signals in each group or block can be added or
deleted as needed by the customer.
The System shall comply with the following test standards:
Specification Standard (Range)
Surge Withstand Capability IEEE C37.90.1
2500 VAC Across all Terminal Blocks; 60

Dielectric Potential
Seconds to Ground
EN 55011:2009+A1:2010 / CISPR 11:2009 +

Radiated Emissions
A1:2010
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 61000-4-2:2008
Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-3:2010
Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity IEC 61000-4-4:2012
Surge Immunity IEC 61000-4-5:2005
Radio Frequency Common Mode

IEC 61000-4-6:2008
Immunity

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 18
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-8:2009
Voltage Interrupts IEC 61000-4-11:2004
Operating Temperature -40°C to +72°C
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature -60°C to +85°C
Storage Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
4.4.13 Multi-gas Transformer / Rector Monitoring System
Basic Requirements:
The monitoring system to be supplied shall comprise of following basic features
 Gas Chromatography based gas measurement system.

 Membrane based gas extraction sub system
 100% response within 1-hour to a change in gas concentration in oil
 On-board automatic calibration, traceable to national and International physical standards
 Specified measurement accuracy and repeatability
 Capable of supporting multiple DGA diagnostic tools including the Transformer/reactor Oil
Analysis and Notification (TOAN) tool
 4-year maintenance cycle for consumable items.
General design criteria:
The transformer/reactor Gas monitor must provide Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) measurements
on the 8 DGA gases (as specified elsewhere in the document), and nitrogen within the
transformer/reactor oil as well as Total Dissolved Combustible Gas (TDCG) and Total
Hydrocarbons (THC) measurements. The gas measurement quality must be US NIST-traceable
(US National Institute of Standards and Technology) and must utilize a gas chromatography system
to make the measurements. The system must offer automatic, periodic self-verification and self-
calibration of all 8 measured gases to a NIST-traceable 8 gas standard. The transformer/reactor
gas monitor shall draw transformer oil continuously from the transformer/reactor, Extract the gas
from the oil with a passive membrane system based around Method C of ASTM standard D 3612-
02 or equivalent and return the oil back into the transformer/reactor without significantly de-gassing
or otherwise altering the gas levels in the sampled oil. The gas extraction and measurement system
must respond 100% within 1-hour to a change in gas concentration in the transformer /reactor oil
sample.
In addition to the gas-in-oil measurements as above, the transformer/reactor Gas monitor shall also
be able capture oil temperature measurements, moisture-in-oil measurements and correlate all

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 19
these measurements (gas-in-oil, oil temperature, moisture-in-oil) with transformer/reactor load and
ambient temperature.
The user shall be able to create caution and alarm set points as well as Rate-of f-change (ROC)
alarm values remotely from the transformer/reactor gas monitor. The monitor shall report all data
and alarm conditions every 4 hours, at a minimum. In addition, the transformer/reactor gas monitor
must offer relay contact closures for alarm conditions and power status.
The transformer/reactor gas monitor should be able to be mounted directly on the

transformer/reactor tank wall and operate to specification without susceptibility to vibration.
The transformer/reactor monitor must be compatible with 3rd party monitoring services that provide
diagnostic and automated alarm notification capability.
Specifications
DGA method: Laboratory Grade Gas Chromatography
Gas Accuracy1 Repeatability2 Range3

Hydrogen H2 ±5% or +3 ppm < 2% 3-3,000 ppm
Oxygen O2 ±5% or +30/-0 ppm < 1% 30-25,000 ppm
Methane CH4 ±5% or +5 ppm < 1% 5-7,000 ppm
Carbon
CO ±5% or +5 ppm < 2% 5-10,000 ppm
Monoxide
Carbon Dioxide CO2 ±5% or +5 ppm < 1% 5-30,000 ppm
Ethylene C2H4 ±5% or +3 ppm < 1% 3-5,000 ppm
Ethane C2H6 ±5% or +5 ppm < 1% 5-5,000 ppm
Acetylene C2H2 ±5% or +1 ppm < 2% 1-3,000 ppm
±10% or +5,000
Nitrogen N2 <20% 5,000-100,000 ppm
ppm
Note: All specifications in above table must be independent of oil temperature and gas pressure
levels
1
Percent or PPM – whichever is greater
2
At the calibration level
3
Gas-in-Oil
Moisture-in-Oil and Oil Temperature Option
Parameter Accuracy4 Range

At least ±2% 0 to 100% RS
Moisture in Oil <10% of reading for oil temperature
≥30 °C <18% of reading for oil 0 to 80 5 ppm
temperature <30 °C
Oil Temperature ±0.1°C (typ.) -40°C to +180°C
4
Includes non-linearity and repeatability

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 20
5
Upper range limited to saturation
A. Total Dissolved Gases

B.
True Total Dissolved Combustible Gas (TDCG) output
(∑ H2, C2H2, C2H4, CO, CH4, C2H6 in PPM). Each gas is measured at 100% of detected level.
Total Hydrocarbons (THC) output

Total Hydrocarbons output (∑ CH4, C2H2, C2H4, C2H6). Each gas is measured at 100% of
detected level.
C. Gas Analysis
Oil sampling is continuous and gas analysis intervals are user-selectable from 1 hour to 12 hours
(Default: 4 hours)
All data must be date and time stamped
Up to two years of data stored in memory at 4-hour sampling interval
System must provide for automatic schedule acceleration when rate of change alarm limit exceeded
(Default: 1 hour)
System must automatically perform periodic auto-calibration to -traceable gas standard
6
US National Institute of Standards and Technology
D. Alarms
Two individually programmable relays

 50 VDC or 240 VAC @ 3 A max. (125 VDC @ 1 A max.);
 Relay contacts operate as normally open or normally closed
Supported Alarms
 As a minimum Gas Caution & Alarm for Level (ppm), Rate-of-Change (ppm/day), Power
and/or Service Event
E. External Sensor Inputs
Analog Inputs
 At least three (3) analog 4 to 20 mA inputs, ambient temperature sensor included. Optional
sensors include transformer/reactor load guide and moisture-in-oil with temperature probe
(uses 2 inputs)
F. Communications
Standard Interfaces
 RS-232, RS-485, Ethernet Fiber (100Base-FX)
G. Optional Interfaces
 Cellular modem, Ethernet Copper (10/100Base‑TX), Wireless Radio, V.92 Internal POTS
modem

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 21
H. Supported Protocols
 TCP/IP, DNP3, Modbus RTU, ASCII, OPC and IEC 61850
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature -50°C to +55°C (-60oC optional)
Cold Start Temperature -20°C
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing

Oil Inlet Pressure 0 to 45 psi (0 to 3 bar)
Storage Temperature -40°C to +75°C
Storage Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Input Power Requirements
Voltage: 100-280 VAC or 100-300 VDC

Frequency: 50/60Hz
Current: 6 A Startup Maximum / 4 A Operational Maximum
Physical Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X, IP66
Certifications/Standards
Radiated and Conducted Emissions
Specification Test Method

Radiated Emissions EN 61326-1: 2006 CISPR 11:2009 A1:2010 Class A
Conducted Emissions EN 61326-1: 2006 CISPR 11:2009 A1:2010 Class A
Current Harmonics EN 61000-3-2:2006 EN 61000-3-2:2006 A1:2009 Class A
Voltage Fluctuations EN 61000-3-3:2008 EN 61000-3-3:2008 Class A
Radiated and Conducted Immunity

ESD EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-2:2009
Radiated Immunity EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-3:2006 A2:2010

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 22
EFT EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-4:2004 A1:2010

Surge EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-5:2006
Conducted RF Immunity EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-6:2009
Magnetic Field Immunity EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-8:2010
Voltage Dips & Interrupts EN 61326-1:2006 IEC61000-4-11:2004
Safety

IEC 61010 IEC 61010-2-81
UL 61010-1 (2nd Edition) CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
4.4.14 Dissolved Gas Analysis
4.4.14.1 DGA Software Analysis
 Automatic download of DGA data from Monitor to a central database

 Unlimited DGA Monitor polling
 DGA Data Viewing, graphing and trending
 Provide advanced IEEE and IEC Diagnostics including
o Duval Triangles (Standard)
o Duval Triangles 4 & 5 for advanced diagnostics
o Rogers Ratios
 Transformer/reactor Oil Analysis and Notification (TOAN) Diagnostics
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply of Shunt Reactors shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility of the
Contractor to coordinate engineering and procurement, in order to guarantee compatibility and
completeness of the overall installation:
a) Tank bottom rollers with locking system and suitable rails.

b) Mounting plates and brackets for accessories eventually mounted on stands
c) Auxiliary terminal blocks in the control cabinet for control devices and protection
d) Terminal connectors for bushings and grounding
e) Terminal blocks for wiring interconnections
f) The loan of 2 impact recorders per equipment until the units are installed
g) Oil for filling the apparatus plus 5% of the biggest unit amount power autotransformers and
shunt reactors, delivered in 45-gallon non-returnable drums
h) Fuse holders, fuses and insulated rod with cable connectors.
j) Surge arresters.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 23
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Volume 1, Section 6: Schedule of
Prices.
The Contractor completed and priced a list of recommended spare parts in his tender (Volume 1,
Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended spare parts, as
approved by the Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of operation, under normal
operating conditions.
Routine, type and special test to be performed in accordance to IEC-60076.
Tests must be performed in accordance with the relevant standards as specified in the Technical
Specifications.
Testing of shunt reactors with HV oil-SF6 bushings shall be carried out by replacing the oil-SF6
bushing by others oil-air bushings (insulation testing).
6.1 Apparatus Test
The following prescriptions shall also apply.
6.1.1 Dielectric Test (Routine/Type/Special test)
All windings of equipment with voltage equal or higher than 10 kV must be subjected to basic
impulse withstand tests, prior to induced and applied industrial frequency voltage. The test shall
include application of chopped waves at 110% BIL value as a routine test.
Induced voltage: the routine test shall be performed as per method # 2 of IEC 60076-3 standard
with the tap changer in the position corresponding to the highest (turn to turn) voltage.
Oil samples: oil samples must be taken before and after dielectric tests to verify its content in
laboratory.
The current and no-load losses must be measured before and after tests. The losses value
measured after the dielectric tests shall be used to compare it with the Contractor-guaranteed
values.
Radio interference voltage measurement shall be performed using line connectors considering the
values indicated in the Technical Data Schedules and maximum operating voltage.
Any fault or difference while testing shall result in the repetition of the dielectric tests.

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 24
6.1.2 Temperature Rise Test (Type test)
The equipment must be subjected to temperature rise tests. These tests must be performed with
all radiators and fans except for the spare radiator and fans that will be shut off during the test. The
rise of the measured temperature shall be corrected according to the environmental conditions, in
conformity with the prescribed method in IEC 60076-2 and this value shall be lower than the limit
specified in the technical data Schedules. The temperature rise test shall be repeated as necessary to
prove that the rise of temperature of each winding in the ONAN rating does not exceed the limit
specified in the Technical Data Schedules.
6.1.3 Zero-Sequence Impedance Test (special test)
Measurement of transformer zero-sequence impedance shall be made for both short-circuit and
open circuit conditions, for different windings and up to 30% of rated voltage.
6.1.4 Capacitance &Tan delta Measurement for Winding & Bushing (Routine test)
At the end of the dielectric tests, the capacitance measurement of different windings between them
and to the tank must be made as well as the insulation (tangent delta) power factor according to
ANSI C57.12.90 Standard &IEC 60076.
6.1.5 Sound Level Test (Type test)
Test shall be performed on one unit of each series of transformer or reactor in conformity with the
prescribed method of IEC-60551 & IEC 60076-10.
6.1.6 Vibration Test (Type test)
The vibration test shall be performed as per ANSI C57.21 Standard considering the requirement of
IEC 60076.
The following tests also applicable
6.1.7 Routine tests
a. Measurement of Ratio, polarity & vector group check.
b. SFRA test.
c. Measurement of Winding resistance.
d. Measurement of reactance at rated voltage.
e. Measurement of loss at ambient temperature.
f. Measurement of insulation resistance of winding and Polarization value.


016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 25
g. Test on Core & core clamp (2.5kV test and Insulation resistance before and after 2.5kV
test).
h. Calibration of OTI & WTI and Hot spot gradient setting.
i. Low voltage reactance measurement.
j. Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss.
k. Oil leakage test.
l. Tests on control cabinet.
m. Measurement of paint thickness
n. Tests on transformer oil.
6.1.8 Type test.
Jacking test by lifting the Reactor using Jacks placed below the Jack pads with dye-penetration test
or with suitable flaw detector / penetrant to ascertain the healthiness of the weld.
6.1.9 Special test
a. Measurement of mutual reactance.
b. Measurement of harmonics of the current.
c. Determination of Linearity of reactance.
d. Measurement of loss close to reference temperature.
e. Measurement of magnetic characteristic.
f. Lightning Impulse test on Neutral.
g. Measurement of loss close to service temperature.
h. Pressure and vacuum deflection tests on completely assembled Reactor.
6.2 Bushing Tests
The following test shall be performed for the transformer bushings (as per IEC 60137):
6.2.1 Type Test
a. Basic impulse level test and basic switching surge level (when applicable) test

016403-2000-47ES-4200 01 July 2024 26
b. Wet power-frequency voltage tests

c. Dry power-frequency voltage tests
d. Dielectric losses measured before and after the preceding tests
e. Temperature rise and mechanical resistance tests
f. Short circuit current withstand ability.
6.2.2 Routine Tests
a. Dry power-frequency voltage tests

b. Dielectric losses measured
c. Capacitive tap voltage power-frequency tests
6.3 Bushing Current Transformer Test
The following tests shall be performed on the bushing’s current transformer.
a. Transformation ratio
b. Polarity
c. Magnetization current and voltage measurement (saturation curve)
d. Dielectric insulation on secondary side
e. Accuracy test
GCCIA
MV SWITCHGEAR
016403-2000-47ES-4801 Rev.01
July 2024
MV Switchgear # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 33KV SWITCHGEAR 1
4 SERVICE CONDITIONS 2
4.1.1 General 2
4.1.3 Environment 2
4.1.4 Auxiliary Services 2
4.2 Design and Manufacturing Requirements 3
4.2.1 Arrangement 3
4.2.2 Cable compartment 4
4.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment 5
4.2.4 Base Frame 5
4.2.5 Busbars 6
4.2.6 Circuit Breaker 6
4.2.7 Disconnecting and Earthing Switch 9
4.2.8 Interlocking 9
4.2.9 Auxiliary Switches and Contactors 10
4.2.10 Measuring Instruments (Digital Multifunction Meter) & Analog Meters 11
4.2.11 Current Transformers 11
4.2.12 Potential Transformers 12
4.2.13 Gas Compartment 13
4.2.14 SF6 Immersed Insulation 14
4.2.15 Gas Losses 14
4.2.16 Control Supply 14
4.2.17 Control Circuits 14
4.2.18 Control Switches 15
4.2.19 Control Fuses 15
4.2.20 Push Buttons 15
4.2.21 Indicating Lamps 16
4.2.22 Space Heaters, Illumination and Socket 16
4.2.23 Common Alarm Scheme 16
4.2.24 Wiring and Identification 17
4.2.25 Earthing 17
4.2.26 Locking Device 17
4.2.27 Gas Handling Equipment 18
4.2.28 Cable Termination 18
5 MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND EXTENSION (MRE) FACILITIES 18
5.1 Design Temperature 19
5.1.1 Thermal Expansion 19
MV Switchgear # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 ii
5.1.2 Dynamic Forces 19

6 EARTHING SWITCHES 19
7 SCADA INTERFACE 20
8 SCOPE OF WORK 20
9 NAMEPLATE 21
10 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES 22
10.1 Maintenance and Repair 22
10.2 Facilities for Future Extensions 22
10.3 Maintenance and Repair Equipment 22
10.4 Other Requirements 22
10.4.1 Electrical Motors 22
10.4.2 Maintenance Devices 22
10.4.3 Colour 23
10.4.4 Painting and Corrosion Protection 23
11 TRANSPORT 23
12 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS 24
13 TESTS 24
13.1 General 24
13.2 Factory Tests 25
13.2.1 Type Tests 25
13.3 Site Commissioning Tests 26
33KV MV Switchgear # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 1
1 33KV SWITCHGEAR
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of the MV Switchgear (33KV) to be installed
in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the Gulf
Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA).
The specification covers the design, ratings, manufacturing, testing, transport and packing of
factory assembled switchgear bays. Exact configuration requirements shall be as per Single
Line diagrams included in Tender documents.
The layout shall be generally as shown on the drawings however, subject to the provisions of
this specification and the approval of the Engineer/Authority, they may be adjusted to suit the
manufacturer's design.
GIS equipment shall be designed and tested according to the latest IEC Standards including
amendments in particular the following IEC publications, or complementary standards
mentioned in this document:
1 IEC 62271-100 Circuit Breaker

2 IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1:
Common specifications for alternating current
switchgear and controlgear
3 IEC 61869 Current Transformers
4 IEC 61869 Voltage Transformer
5 IEC 60255 Protective Relays
6 IEC Ammeter & Voltmeter
7 IEC 62271-102 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 102:
Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
8 IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection
9 IEC Arrangement of Breakers Bus bars main connection
and auxiliary wiring.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 2
4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
4.1.1 General
The switchgear shall be single busbar with bus section arrangement as specified in the scope of
works, SF6 gas insulated, three phase encapsulated suitable for accommodation within a
building and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing at the site.
Consideration to ease and cost of maintenance and repairs shall be given during the design
stage so as to provide a highly reliable equipment which will minimise operating costs. Aspects
such as simplicity of design, number of movable parts, impunity to high stresses or pressures
should be taken into account.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance work.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient space in the GIS room, including access, for GIS and
accessories.
The GIS assembly shall be designed with provision for future extension.
All necessary interlocks required for device operations and safety of the operation &
maintenance staff shall be provided. Equipment including Circuit breakers, disconnectors, VTs,
CTs, cable termination chambers, and any other chambers and components must be capable
to withstand a gas overpressure of 130% of normal operating pressure continuously. Offered
equipment shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges.
4.1.3 Environment
The equipment and material to be supplied in accordance with this specification shall be
designed to operate satisfactorily considering the environmental conditions indicated in the
General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
GIS equipment shall be installed inside the 33kV Switch gear Room, specified in the Technical
Specification 016403-3000-48FE-6000. The GIS equipment will be suitable for the extreme
weather conditions in the specified site location.
Switchgear equipment installed indoor in Airconditioned environment, however same shall

considered exposed to higher temperatures, 55°C ambient in case of non-operation of
Airconditioning as per the General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
4.1.4 Auxiliary Services
Details of incoming voltage for the auxiliaries is indicated in the General Technical

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 3
The LV AC and DC supply requirement for GIS equipment, are detailed as part of the
substation auxiliary services. No dedicated auxiliary service equipment shall be provided for
GIS.
4.2 Design and Manufacturing Requirements
4.2.1 Arrangement
The general constructional features of 33kV GIS shall incorporate the following as a minimum:
The design of the switchboard shall be such as to enable bay extensions at either end with
minimum disturbance to the installed equipment and without complete shutdown of the
switchboard. The design shall allow high voltage testing of the extended busbar section and
bays while the other busbar sections and bays are in normal operation.
The equipment offered shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges
and any equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and above what is specified, shall
be included.
The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performance of the specified site
checks and tests to be carried out. The Contractor shall state the test facilities provided and
indicate any attachments or special equipment provided for this purpose.
Circuit breakers, disconnectors, VTs, CTs, cable termination chambers, and any other
chambers and components must be capable of withstanding a gas overpressure of 130% of
normal operating pressure continuously.
All grounding system, special tools and tackles, O & M manuals etc. required for erection,
operation, testing and maintenance of GIS shall be supplied within the quoted price. The
requirements of embedded plates and channels for the GIS foundations and maintaining floor
tolerances shall be provided by GIS supplier in advance as per requirement of Client. However,
the embedded plates and channels shall be supplied and installed by the Civil Contractor.
Anchoring bolts for fixing GIS shall be supplied by the GIS supplier.
The offered equipment shall be complete in all respects necessary for their effective and
trouble-free operation when connected to the system.
Performance, testing and rating of the Switchgear shall conform to the latest edition of all
relevant IEC Publications as a minimum requirement, supplemented by other national
standards (or their functional equivalents) subject to the approval of Client.
Compliance of the Switchgear manufacturer with the provisions of this specification does not
relieve him of the responsibility of furnishing Switchgear and accessories of proper design,
electrically and mechanically tailored to meet the operating guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
All hardware used in the assembly of the Switchgear must be either of corrosion proof material,
or be hot dip galvanized. A detailed Corrosion Protection/Painting description shall be submitted
with the Bid.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 4
From all device’s alarm/trip contacts from source to the panel terminal block should be wired for
both local/remote purpose, ready for implementation during commissioning/future maintenance
use.
For all equipment, any comments/discrepancies observed/discovered during Factory
Acceptance Test (FAT) or during Site Acceptance Test (SAT), both manufacturer and
contractor should provide immediate corrective solutions for the comment and the same should
be completed before commissioning without any delay.
Prior to shipping above-mentioned GIS components, the following has to be provided:
List of all impact recorders fixed on equipment to be shipped (serial number, type, etc.)
The permissible impact / shock value shall be furnished to CLIENT.
User manual for the impact recorder.
Instructions for interpretation of recorded data
Provisions must be made to ensure that these indicators are sealed, that they will be completely
functional without interruption of indicated records during the entire period of shipment,
including loading and unloading, and to ensure that CLIENT will receive clearly indicated data
by breaking the seal.
Removal of impact recorders at site shall be done under CLIENT/ENGINEER supervision.
Any abnormalities shall be reported immediately to CLIENT/ENGINEER.
Software for the impact recorder shall be available to download the records of the impact
recorder events at Site under CLIENT/ENGINEER supervision”.
Vendor shall take necessary measures to comply internal arc classification as per IEC 62271-
200.
4.2.2 Cable compartment
This compartment shall be designed to accommodate the following equipment:

 Current Transformers.
 Voltage Transformers.
 Capacitive Voltage indicator
 Cable-end Boxes. Cable box shall be suitable for the cable sizes as mentioned in the
enclosed SLD.
The switchgear shall be so arranged that all outgoing main and auxiliary cables shall be taken
from the bottom.
All outgoing feeders including Aux. Transformer circuits shall be suitable for connecting 2 Nos.
33 kV single core 95 mm2, Cu. XLPE cable per phase with plug-in terminations. However, only
one set of cables may be connected at present for some feeders, so all sockets shall be
provided with H.V. dummy plugs within the quoted price. The incomer feeder from 400kV
Reactor’s auxiliary winding will be connected by way of 1 No. 33 kV single core 95 mm2 Cu.
XLPE cable per phase with plug-in type cable termination. The plug-in termination suitable for

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 5
the above cables, sockets, as well as dummy plugs as required shall be included in the scope
of supply. However dummy plugs shall be supplied for all feeders circuits.
The outgoing compartment dimensions shall be enough to accommodate the required number
of cable cores per phase and shall be easily accessible to allow maintenance works and/or
quick replacement of the cable.
Where required to reduce local heating when single-core cables are adopted, non- magnetic
gland plates shall be provided or alternatively, non-magnetic inserts.
Sealing ends shall be provided with all fittings including flexible connections where necessary.
Stress cones or other approved means for grading the voltage stress shall be provided for
insulating the cable within the sealing end. Glands shall be insulated from the chamber.
The insulation between cable and the switchgear enclosure shall be capable of withstanding a
dry high voltage test of 10 kV AC. for one minute and 10 kV DC for one minute.
4.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment
Each bay of 33kV GIS shall be operated from DCS and GCCIA control centers however local
and maintenance operation facility shall be considered. Necessary control relays, auxiliary
relays, indicating instruments, connections etc required for proper and complete operation of
switchgear shall be located in LV control box mounted on the upper part of GIS. LV
compartment shall be suitable enough to accommodate all control relays, interposing relays,
CT/VT connections, control switches or any other components required for complete operation
of switchgear.
Indicating instruments such as, ammeters, voltmeters etc. including relays shall be mounted on
LV front door. Auxiliary relays, fuses, CT terminals, MCB’s etc. shall be mounted inside the LV
Compartment and shall be suitable for DIN rail arrangement. Separate terminal blocks shall be
considered for “Closing signals”, Tripping Signals”, “Auxiliary Contacts”, mA Signals (if any)”
etc.
LV compartment shall be provided with switchgear mimic as per SLD and control switches shall
form part of the mimics. Sufficient indicating lamps for heater on, CB/DS/ESW close and open
status shall be provided in LV door. Indication lamps shall be of long life durable LED type.
Circuit-breaker and all associated disconnectors and earth switches together with selector
switches to prevent local, remote/supervisory controls being in operation simultaneously.
Protection and Bay controllers shall be installed in separate control and relay panels located in
control room.
4.2.4 Base Frame
Switchgears shall be provided with integral base frame which shall be bolted/welded on the
cross members provided by owner. Base channel of height 75mm shall be provided. Amply
dimensioned oblong holes shall be provided on the base frame. The base frame shall be of
standard sections, re-rolled sections will not be acceptable. Vendor shall give base frame
details in foundation drawing. Foundation on which base frame is mounted is excluded from
Vendor’s Scope of supply. Vendor shall provide the dummy panel wherever the floor beam fouls
with cable entry.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 6
4.2.5 Busbars
All busbars and their main current carrying connections shall have the same sectional area
throughout their length, Busbars shall be sized to continuously carry the rated current without
exceeding the final temperature of 95°C and the same shall be capable of withstanding the full
fault level without any deformation. The continuous current rating of busbars shall be as per
Single Line Diagram. Busbars shall be of copper with proper plating at joints. The busbars shall
be SF6 gas insulated. The busbar nos. shall be clearly marked on the end panels including the
phase markings.
Every current-carrying part of the switchgear including current transformers, disconnecting

switches, busbars, connections and joints shall be capable of carrying its specified rated normal
current continuously and in no part shall the temperature rise exceed the values specified in
relevant Standards.
Every part of the switchgear shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage the
instantaneous peak currents and rated short-time currents pertaining to the rated breaking
capacity of the circuit breaker. The primary rating of the current transformers shall not differ
from that of the associated circuit breakers unless specified otherwise.
The design of sliding type current carrying connectors and joints shall be such that they meet
the aforementioned conditions over the full permitted range of movement. Where such joints
may be made or adjusted on site, full details of alignment procedure, together with any
necessary alignment tools or gauges shall be described in the maintenance manual and
included in the scope of supply of special tools.
4.2.6 Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker shall be VCB/SF6 type & shall be triple pole arranged for motor operated spring
charged, independent closing and shunt tripping from suitable voltage from battery. The close /
trip control switch shall be interlocked to trip before close. The closing and tripping circuits shall
be self-opening on completion of their respective functions irrespective of the position of the
control switch.
Mechanical ON-OFF push actuators shall be provided. This shall be operable without the need
to open panel door.
The offered circuit breakers along with operating mechanism shall be type tested for
mechanical endurance class M2. Two (2) trip coils shall be provided.
Vacuum Circuit Breakers:
Circuit breakers employing the vacuum interruption principle shall incorporate vacuum bottles of
declared and established manufacturer. Each interrupter shall be capable of individual
adjustment for correct operation and easy removal for maintenance or replacement. Full
instructions for monitoring the state of vacuum and contact life shall be provided to the approval
of the Authority.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 7
Vacuum bottles shall not require the addition of insulation or stress shielding to achieve the
necessary dielectric strength externally and shall not be mechanically braced by components,
which may reduce the integrity of the insulation across the open gap.
SF6 Circuit Breakers:
Circuit breakers employing SF6 gas as an interrupting medium shall operate on the principle of
self-generated gas pressure or rotating arc for arc extinction. Means of confirming the existence
of adequate gas density in the circuit breakers shall be available without removing the unit from
service. The system of gas monitoring shall be temperature compensated and with sufficient
contact for alarm and lockout.
Absorption of moisture and the decomposition products of the gas shall be achieved by integral
filters.
The circuit breaker shall have facility to charge the spring manually and close the breaker in the
event of failure of motor / control supply to motor.
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism shall be power operated. Operation will normally be
from a remote or supervisory position but facilities shall be provided for operation locally by
electrical release and by direct manual release from stored energy devices. It shall be possible
to lock each local control function when circuit breaker is in the open position. Operation
counters of non-resettable type shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical tripping
pulse being applied to the circuit-breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing
to latch in the closed position, the circuit-breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be
capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.
The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanism shall not make
repeated attempts to close the circuit- breaker when the control switch is held in the CLOSE
position in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of a trip signal
being given to the circuit-breaker.
The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and solenoid
operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the
voltage at their terminals is any value within the specified auxiliary voltage range.
The circuit breaker shall be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three phases and
suitable for rated operating sequence O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional features:
a) If the circuit breaker is opened and the springs charged, the circuit breaker can be closed
and then tripped.
b) If the circuit breaker is closed and the springs charged, there shall be sufficient energy to
trip, close and then trip the circuit breaker.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 8
c) Mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. This indication
shall be clearly visible from the front of the breaker. In addition, suitable contacts shall be
provided which may be used for remote indication.
d) Motor charged mechanisms shall be provided with means for charging the springs by hand,
and also a shrouded pushbutton for mechanical tripping initiation.
e) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence
immediately and automatically upon completion of each circuit-breaker closing operation. The
time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 30 seconds. An alarm shall be initiated if
the operating spring is not recharged within a predetermined time.
f) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted with a motor charged closing
mechanism, whilst the spring is being charged. It shall be necessary for the spring to be fully
charged and the associated charging mechanism fully prepared for closing before it can be
released to close the circuit-breaker.
All operating coils for use on the D.C. supply shall be connected so that failure of insulation to
earth does not cause the coil to become energized.
Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with MCBs on each unit and shall be independent
of each other and all other circuits. The MCBs shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts for
remote / SCADA signaling.
Auxiliary switches shall be provided in circuit-breaker tripping circuits to interrupt the tripping
supply as soon as the circuit- breaker has completed the tripping operation, and to interrupt the
closing supply as soon as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation.
Approved mechanically operated indicating devices shall be provided to indicate whether a

circuit-breaker is in the open or closed, isolated or earthed position.
Locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit breaker can be prevented
from being closed when it is open. These facilities shall not require the fitting of any loose
components prior to the insertion of the single padlock required. It shall not be possible to lock
mechanically the trip mechanism so as to render inoperative for the electrical tripping. Where
earthing through the circuit breaker is adopted the method of earth position selection shall be
arranged to disconnect the trip supply in the earth position.
Mechanism shall be trip free and shall have anti-pumping facilities.
Each circuit breaker shall have necessary auxiliary contacts for indication, protection,
interlocking supervision, metering and other purposes. Minimum 6 ‘NO’ + 6 ‘NC’ shall be
provided for owner's exclusive use. All spare contacts shall be wired up to the terminal blocks.
All contacts shall be positively operated by main apparatus and all contacts shall be adequate
to make, carry and interrupt the currents in their circuits. Auxiliary relay shall be used to multiply
contacts. Service position contact of circuit breaker shall be used for the multiplying relay. The

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 9
shunt trip of the circuit breaker shall be wired through an advanced `NO' contact which shall
make before the main contact close.
Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with an operation counter and Open - close operation of
CB shall be considered as one operation.
4.2.7 Disconnecting and Earthing Switch
Disconnectors and earth switches shall have valid type test report as per IEC 62271-102
conducted in an independent test lab or witnessed by independent observers. Evidence of Type
tests as per IEC 62271-102 shall be submitted along with tender.
Disconnecting and earthing switches shall be arranged to permit safe maintenance of any
section of the equipment when the feeder is live. Disconnecting switches shall be arranged for
operation while the equipment is live, but will not be required to break current other than the
charging currents of busbars and connections.
Switch mechanisms shall be so designed that the disconnector cannot be opened by forces due
to currents passing through it and shall be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed" positions.
The mechanism shall open and close all three phases simultaneously. Local mechanical
position indicators shall be provided on all switches and shall be visible from the front side of
the panel.
For safe isolation and earthing of the busbars and feeders, high speed fault-making spring
driven disconnector/earth switches shall be provided. The contacts shall have the same fault
making capability as that of the circuit breaker.
As an alternative to the fault making earthing switches, circuit breakers may be used for the
earthing, of the outgoing feeders and busbars. In such case adequate interlocking facilities shall
be provided, subject to approval of Client. The earth switches and disconnector shall employ
motor operation mechanism. In addition, emergency hand operation shall be provided.
4.2.8 Interlocking
An interlocking scheme shall be provided which takes into account the following basic
requirements for the implemented single busbar arrangement. All interlocking shall be
submitted to Engineer/ Client approval before starting the schematic diagram.
a) To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the equipment
with other sections live.
b) To prevent incorrect switching sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to plant,
equipment and personnel.
c) To prevent earthing of live circuit.
d) To prevent closing of Bus section feeder under normal operating condition (both reactor
aux supplies available) shall be considered. Bus section shall be closed only when either one of

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 10
auxiliary supply is unavailable or when both auxiliary supply is unavailable and busbar
energized through external feeder.
The interlocking scheme shall be electrical for all operational interlocks and preferably of the
mechanical/key type for maintenance safety interlocks but shall be effective when the
equipment is being controlled locally, under emergency hand operation or from a remote
position.
Live line indicator with direct Auxiliary contacts to be selected and it shall be used as additional
interlock with the busbar earth switch. Bus section shall have the live line indicator on both
sides.
All mechanical interlocks shall be applied at the point at which hand power is used so that
stress cannot be applied to parts remote from that point.
All electrical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating supply and a system of
interlocks shall be provided which shall cover the emergency hand operation of apparatus which
is normally power operated. Failure of supply or connections to any electrical interlock shall not
produce or permit faulty operation. Electrical bolt interlocks shall be energized only when the
operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the working position. Visible indication shall
be provided to show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Means, normally padlocking,
shall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock
supplies.
Where key interlocking is employed tripping of the circuit breaker shall not occur if any attempt
is made to remove the trapped key from the mechanism. Any local emergency- tripping device
shall be kept separate and distinct from the key interlocking.
4.2.9 Auxiliary Switches and Contactors
Auxiliary switches shall be provided on all circuit breakers disconnectors and earthing switches
for local, remote & SCADA indication, control and interlocking. With each circuit-breaker,
disconnecting device, and earthing device, there shall be supplied all necessary auxiliary
switches, contactors and mechanisms for indication, protection, metering, control, interlocking,
supervisory and other services. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free
housing.
Not less than 12NO and 12NC spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with each circuit
breaker, disconnectors and earthing switches. Spare shall after complete all scheme
requirement and CT’s early make, late brake contact shall be used (Minimum 2 numbers of
early make late brake NO and NC contacts to be provided) All auxiliary switches shall be wired
up to a terminal board on the L.V panel of the switchgear whether they are in use or not in the
first instance and shall be arranged in the same sequence on all equipment.
Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the
circuit breakers directly, once the operation of the latter has been completed. All such switches
and mechanisms shall be mounted in approved accessible positions clear of the operating

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 11
mechanism and shall be adequately protected. The contacts of all auxiliary switches shall be
strong and shall have a positive wiping action when closing.
If sufficient aux. Contacts are not available, (except tripping, interlocks and SCMS) the contacts
shall be multiplied by using suitable latching relays (bistable relays) so that the failure of DC
supply shall not cause a mal-operation or undefined position of circuit breakers, disconnectors
or earth switches.
4.2.10 Measuring Instruments (Digital Multifunction Meter) & Analog Meters
All measuring and recording instruments shall be digital, flush mounting type, with
communication facility. Multifunction meter for power measurement purposes shall be provided
for each circuit LV compartment to monitor the current/voltages etc. Digital metering unit shall be
provided for incoming & outgoing feeders as per SLD. The digital metering unit shall have
provision to display the following:
 Phase and line voltage
 Phase currents
 kVA, kW, kVAR, kVARH, kVAH and kWH
 Power factor
 Frequency, Total harmonics
 Alarm output relay
Phase analogue ammeter shall be provided for feeders and voltmeters shall be provided in PT
panels, as per SLD.
All auxiliary equipment such as shunts, transducers, CT’s and PT’s that are required shall be
included in the scope of supply.
All indicating instruments and meters shall be capable of carrying continuously their full load
currents and full voltage across their voltage coils. They shall not be damaged by the passage
of fault currents or the existence of over voltage on the primary side of their instrument
transformers for the maximum permitted duration of fault conditions which may occur during
normal operation. All instruments and meters shall be back connected. Meters shall be provided
with zero adjusting devices for external operation.
Indicating instruments shall be of 96sqmm type flush mounted having 90° full scale movement.
Class of accuracy shall be 1 and 1.5 for Ammeter and Voltmeter respectively.
4.2.11 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of the toroidal core type and shall be located on the feeder side of
the circuit breaker, above cable termination and on both sides for bus section CB and shall be
part of panel assembly if applicable. CTs shall be encapsulated and protected from the adverse
effect of atmospheric conditions. In general, location of CTs shall be as per tender SLD and
subject to engineer/authority approval during detail engineering stage.
The rated short-time thermal current shall not be less than the through fault capacity of the
associated circuit breakers.
The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to Engineer/Client for approval

together with details of the protection, instrumentation and measuring equipment with which

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 12
each current transformer is to be used. Each current transformer shall be capable of providing
the necessary output to operate the related devices satisfactorily at the connected burden and
accuracy class.
Each current transformer shall have a continuous maximum rating of at least 1.5 times the
rated current.
The characteristics and capacities of current transformers used for protective gear circuits shall
be calculated by the manufacturer who shall prove by calculation the suitability of the CT’s
provided in conjunction with the relay manufacturers requirements for the relays and equipment
offered.
Where multi-ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary
terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connections required for each ratio.
These connections and the ratio in use shall also be shown on the diagram of connections. The
secondary windings shall be earthed at one point through a removable link, which shall be in the
relay panels for instrumentation the removable link shall be in respective circuit LV
compartment. All different CT ratios terminals shall be wired up to terminal block LV
compartment to facilitate easy selection. The CT ratio selection shall be possible without
disturbing CT wires and on load. The star formation of the CT’s shall be in LV compartment.
Terminal boards shall have shorting, disconnecting and injection facility to allow testing with the
circuit in service and on load.
It shall be possible to carry out primary injection testing of the CTs when the switchgear is fully
assembled, or retesting of the CTs during the service life of the switchgear without interruption
of supply to adjacent circuits.
The secondary windings of each set of current transformers shall be capable of being open
circuited for one minute with the primary winding carrying the rated current.
All current transformers shall be installed with the P1 terminals adjacent to the busbars. The
polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be clearly indicated at
the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a readily accessible position to
indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer.
The current transformer particulars as specified in IEC 61869 shall be given on an accessible
plate mounted external to the current transformer.
Where current transformers have to be supplied for mounting in apparatus provided under other
contracts, the Contractor supplying the current transformers shall be responsible for making all
necessary arrangements to ensure compatibility with the other Contractors, through the
Authority.
4.2.12 Potential Transformers
The PTs shall be epoxy cast resin type. The burden and ratio and class of accuracy shall be as
specified in SLD. Generally, PTs shall have specified accuracy class from 10% to 120% of

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 13
normal voltage. However, potential transformers shall have sufficient capacity to operate with
the burden imposed by the devices shown on the drawing with their accuracy classification.
All PTs shall be part of GIS panel assembly and connections between the busbars and PT shall
be completely shrouded.
HRC fuse protection shall be provided on primary. Secondary shall be provided with a 4 pole
MCB. Plug-in type test terminal blocks shall be provided for each PT circuit. Unless otherwise
specified for proper relaying one side of potential transformer secondary shall be grounded at
the transformer and the ground connection shall be identified and removable for testing.
The primary rated voltage shall be equal to the rated voltage Vn of the system or Vn/1.732 if the
voltage transformer is connected between phase and neutral. If not otherwise specified
secondary voltage shall be 110V or 110/ 1.732 V. Selection and sizing of PT shall be verified by
vendor based on relay make.
4.2.13 Gas Compartment
The switchgear units shall be divided into several gas-filled compartments, sealed from each
other by gastight partitions so that any leakage may be quickly localized.
Proposals for the partitioning of gas zones shall be clearly indicated on the drawings submitted
with the tender.
The equipment and connections within each compartment shall be so arranged as to allow
ready removal and replacement of any section with minimum isolation and disturbance of
adjacent pressurized sections.
This feature should also permit the erection and testing of extension units alongside equipment
already in service with the minimum of outage time (not exceeding 8 hours) being required for
final connections.
The busbars of each bay shall have separate gas compartment such that any gas leakage will
be localized to one bay only. Also, during extension degassing of complete busbars shall not be
required.
Suitable arrangements shall be provided for the thermal expansion and contraction of the
busbars and busbar chambers without detriment to the current carrying capacity or gas volume.
Special attention shall be paid to the sealing of housing joints so that leakage of SF6 gas is kept
to an absolute minimum.
Devices shall be provided for each gas compartment to allow for pressure relief to the
switchgear room. All relief devices shall be located such that operation of the devices shall not
endanger personnel working on the equipment or in the vicinity of the equipment. Where
necessary the devices shall be fitted with cowls to deflect any gases or fragmented parts away
from locations where personnel may be expected to be present.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 14
Each separate compartment or gas zone must be provided with its own device for monitoring
continuously the gas pressure. These devices shall be arranged to give individual compartment
indication in the local control units and initiation of remote alarms. Means shall also be provided
to facilitate the checking of moisture content and gas purity. All gas density monitors shall be
temperature compensated type with sufficient No. Of alarm and lockout contacts for local,
remote and SCADA indications.
Each SF6 gas-filled compartment shall be equipped with suitable static filters to absorb any
humidity that penetrates through the enclosure materials over long periods of time.
4.2.14 SF6 Immersed Insulation
Busbars and items of switchgear shall be supported in the enclosures by insulators of materials
compatible with SF6 gas and the products of gas decomposition.
Gas barrier insulators shall comply with the specified conditions for sealing of enclosures. Client
shall be advised of design pressures used and may require test evidence to substantiate
performance under extremes of differential pressure and temperature.
The insulators shall be free at all times of partial discharges at all voltage levels within the
working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges during manufacture.
4.2.15 Gas Losses
The Manufacturer should guarantee the equipment for a gas loss of not more than 0.5% and
1.0% per annum in any single gas compartment. In case of gas leaks at any time during the
warranty period, the Authority will have the right to request the contractor to replace the part of
the assembly, which causes the leakage with extended warranty of ten (10) years from the date
of provisional taking over / commissioning. All costs associated with such works shall be borne
by the contractor.
4.2.16 Control Supply
Control supply for CB shall be 110V D.C. 110V DC control supply from Battery Charger shall be
provided for tripping and closing circuits of circuit breakers and spring charging motor. 240V AC
control supply shall be provided for auxiliary power and heater circuits. Vendor shall provide
suitable control switch and MCB at the point of receiving control supply. Vendor shall be
required to loop both these supply to all the panels forming one unit. Any other intermediate
voltage required in the panel shall be derived by providing suitable control transformer.
4.2.17 Control Circuits
The equipment shall be designed in accordance with /IEC standard recommendations to

operate with an over voltage up to 10% and under voltage up to 15% except for the tripping and
closing circuits.
The tripping circuit allows an operation with 70% to 110% of rated DC Auxiliary voltage supply;
the closing circuit allows an operation with 85% to 110% of rated DC Auxiliary voltage supply.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 15
For the protection of the different circuits such as control voltage supply, charging motor, heater
etc., where applicable MCB’s shall be provided individually for each cubicle circuit.
For receiving and distributing AC and DC power for control circuit suitably rated 2 pole MCB’s to
be considered.
“MCB Off” indicating lamp to be considered in case of MCB (DC) is “OFF”
Two number control supply feeders shall be provided for each switchgear. Suitable control
supply monitoring & selection scheme shall be developed by vendor.
Two number 240V AC supply feeder shall be provided for feeding space heaters, etc. Suitable
AC control supply monitoring & selection scheme shall be developed by vendor.
4.2.18 Control Switches
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with trip-neutral-close (T-N-C) control switch and local
remote selector switch.
All circuit breaker operating switches shall be of the pistol grip type, spring return to neutral and
lockable in neutral position. They shall be arranged to close the breaker by being turned
clockwise. The trip, neutral and close positions shall be clearly indicated. The movement shall
be such that the switch cannot be operated inadvertently and that it is mechanically interlocked
to trip before close. The operating switch shall be located on the centre line at about 1.5 meters
from the floor level. Two spare ways shall be provided on these switches.
Based on operational philosophy, if required, Auto / Manual selector switch shall be provided.
4.2.19 Control Fuses
All control fuses shall be of ‘link’ type. Screw type ‘diazed’ fuses are not acceptable. Fuses shall
generally be mounted on the upper half of the panel. All fuse links shall have HRC cartridges.
Re wirable fuses are not acceptable. All fuses and links shall be provided with suitable label.
4.2.20 Push Buttons
Push button colors shall be as follows:

Stop, Open, Emergency - Red
Start-Close - Green
Alarm Reset - Yellow
Lamp Test – Black
Red push buttons shall be on the left side and green push buttons on the right side.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 16
4.2.21 Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be provided on breaker panel as per the SLD. The indicating lamps shall
be of LED type having low voltage glow protection. The covers of the lamps shall be heat
resistant.
Indicating lamps colors shall be as follows:
Spring Charged - Blue

Breaker Closed/open – Red/Green
Disconnector Closed/open – Red/Green
Earth Switch Closed/Open – Red/Green

Heater On – White
CB Service/Test position indication to be provided.
4.2.22 Space Heaters, Illumination and Socket
Panels shall be provided with 240V, 1 Phase AC supply power 2 pole MCB and shall have
compact LED light fitting for internal illuminating with door switch. 240V, 15A, Flat pin socket
outlet, complete with MCB protection shall be provided in each cubicle for hand lamp
connection. Also, door limit switch and internal lighting shall be provided for LV compartment.
The cubicles shall be provided with space heaters to prevent moisture condensation and
maintain cubicle temperature 400 C above the ambient. The space heaters shall be located at
the bottom of the switchboards and shall be controlled through a thermostat with an adjustable
setting to cut off when the cubicle internal temperature/humidity exceeds safe value, a manually
operated switch. The thermostat shall preferably be located in the metering / relay chamber.
The space heaters shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
4.2.23 Common Alarm Scheme
33kV Switchgear shall be provided with microprocessor-based annunciator unit with Audio-
visual alarm, & Test / Accept / Reset push buttons.
Min 16-way alarm annunciator with test ack and reset facility to be provided at LV compartment
for the GIS alarms. Applicable for All bays / circuits.
However, number of windows of annunciator shall be decided based on number of alarm

contacts to be wired with 20% spare windows.
Each bay of 33kV GIS LV Compartment shall have the Common alarm indication lamp with
reset Pushbutton. All the alarms shall initiate the Common alarm lamp. All the bays common
alarms shall be grouped and connected to the Station common alarms panel.
Annunciator shall have facility for repeat annunciation at remote location.


016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 17
4.2.24 Wiring and Identification
All control signaling, protection and metering wiring shall be by PVC insulated, 660/1000 Volt
grade and copper stranded conductor wires of min. 1.5 Sq.mm. For CT secondary circuit wires
of 2.5 Sq.mm copper conductor min. shall be used. Wiring shall run in enclosed channel and
shall leave at least 25% spare space for future use. Wires for connection between moving parts
shall be flexible stranded copper conductors and the same shall be soldered at the ends before
connections are made.
Terminal strips for connecting incoming control cables shall be channel mounted type of
adequate size and shall be located conveniently for easy accessibility, without danger of contact
with live part, ease of connection and shall be separated by barriers from power circuits. At
least 20% spare terminals shall be provided in each terminal strips. CT secondary lead
terminals shall be provided with shorting links. All spare contacts of auxiliary relays, timers etc.
shall be wired up to terminals block. Terminal Block shall be 600/1000V grade 10 Amps rated.
Sufficient terminals shall be provided on each terminal strip to ensure that not more than one
outgoing wire is connected per terminal. The wire shall be identified by numbered ferrules at
each end, in accordance with the connection diagram. All ferrules shall be made of non-
deteriorating materials. The ferrules shall be firmly located on each wire so that they cannot
move or turn freely on the wire.
All inter panel control wiring shall be done by the switchgear vendor. The inter- panel wiring
shall be taken through PVC sleeves or suitable rubber grommets. Multipin plug provided should
have scraping earth terminal.
Each panel shall be provided with sufficient number of test terminal blocks and test plugs for
testing relays and kWh meters if any. The control circuit shall be designed for power frequency
withstand voltage of 2kV for 1 minute.
4.2.25 Earthing
All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be earthed to the
earthing system. Any necessary terminals on any part of the equipment required for this
purpose shall be provided by the Contractor.
Earthing conductor cross section shall be in accordance with the overall substation system
calculation. However, for 33 kV GIS minimum 300 mm2 cross section copper bar shall be
employed for earthing and minimum two earthing connections between switchgear & station
earhing shall be provided.
4.2.26 Locking Device
Locking devices shall be provided for securing each control switch in the "neutral" position, each
control selector switch in all positions and for securing each disconnector and earthing switch
operating handle in either the "open" or "closed" position.
The contractor shall submit a list with all padlocks, keys and master keys intended for use on
the switchgear for the Authority/Engineer approval. Suitable wall mounted key cabinet shall be
provided.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 18
4.2.27 Gas Handling Equipment
A mobile Gas handling unit with SF6 gas shall be provided to permit emergency topping up of
gas in the switchgear in the event of leakage.
The unit shall be capable of evacuating air from the switchgear compartments and replenishing
them with gas.
All necessary pipe work, flexible hoses, couplings, valves, pressure and vacuum gauges shall
be included to enable interconnection between the switchgear compartments and gas handling
unit.
An approved portable SF6 gas leakage detector shall also be provided for each new Substation.
4.2.28 Cable Termination
4.2.28.1 MV Cable
(a) 33kV switchgear will be connected to transformers or other equipment by XLPE cables. All
power and control cables shall enter the switchgear from bottom. Sufficient space and support
arrangement shall be provided in the cubicles to accommodate cables. The number of cables
per circuit sizes and types shall be as per SLD.
.
(e) The switchgear shall be supplied complete with supports for clamping outgoing and
incoming cables.
4.2.28.2 Control Cables
Control cables will enter the switchgear from the Bottom. Adequate space shall be provided for
termination. Supporting facilities shall be provided for clamping the control cables.
5 MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND EXTENSION (MRE) FACILITIES
All the components of the Switchgear shall be easily removable for maintenance, repair and
extension without the provision of temporary structure.
The modular design of the switchgear shall offer maximum flexibility from standpoint of MRE
and shall comply with the following criteria’s:
The MRE on one busbar shall be possible with the other busbar in operation,
The MRE on one switchgear bay shall be possible with all other switchgear bays in normal
operation on one busbar,
The MRE on one bus coupler bays shall be possible with one busbar at the time in normal
operation and all switchgear bay in normal operation.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 19
5.1 Design Temperature
The design temperature is the highest enclosure wall temperature under normal service
conditions. It is defined as ambient air temperature plus temperature rise due to the rated
normal current.
An adequate margin shall exist between the dew point of the gas and the maximum ambient
temperature.
The equipment shall be suitable for operation under the environment conditions and according
the General Technical Requirements.
The temperature rise limits shall be in accordance with IEC 62271-203. The maximum
temperature rise of the external surface of enclosures shall not cause harm on touching.
Thermal rating for all current carrying parts shall be a minimum of 3 sec. at rated maximum
voltage (kVrms) for rated symmetrical short-circuit current.
5.1.1 Thermal Expansion
Adequate means shall be provided for accommodating the effects of thermal expansion of the
switchgear without undue stress on welded or bolted connections on any part of the switchgear.
Wherever necessary, bellows or other means shall be provided to absorb expansions and
contractions and relative movement between the various items of equipment.
5.1.2 Dynamic Forces
The completely assembled and installed equipment shall be designed to safely withstand the
dynamic forces due to short circuits and seismic forces.
6 EARTHING SWITCHES
The requirements of IEC 62271-102 shall apply to the specified earthing switches.
Each earthing switch shall be designed to withstand full short-circuit current in the closed
position.
The earthing switches shall be so designed such that they connect the current path, directly to
earth.
Each earthing switch shall be interlocked with its own main switch to prevent closure of the
earthing switch when the main switch are closed and vice versa. Local indication of a “safe to
operate” status shall be provided.
Provide manual crank operation for earthing switches, when the control power source fail;
whenever the crank is inserted in the drive mechanism, it shall be impossible to operate the

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 20
shaft, shall be provided on each operating mechanism to show whether the earthing switch is in
an opened or closed position. Linkage and levers are not acceptable. The related position
indicators shall be visible easily.
Each earthing switch shall be provided with auxiliary contacts wired to a plug connector in the
local control panel for customer's use (SCADA Protection panels by others).
The motor-operated earthing switches shall be interchangeable with the manual earthing
switches.
Emergency hand-operating facilities (with padlocking facilities) shall be provided for close or
open operation which shall allow the operations of the earthing switches in case of motor - or
supply failure.
Maintenance earthing switches (electrically operated and emergency manual operation facility)
shall be provided on both sides of every circuit breaker. One of the two maintenance earthing
switches shall have facility for isolation from earthing system to permit primary current injection
and circuit breaker time tests.
Locking facilities shall be provided as for the high-speed earthing switch above.
7 SCADA INTERFACE
The control cubicle shall be provided with digital interface for SCADA purposes; the
communication protocol, shall be according UCA International (IEC 61850) over Ethernet or
other protocol approved by the Engineer.
The following interface points shall be available.
8 SCOPE OF WORK
 This specification intended to cover Design, Engineering, Manufacturing, Assembly,

Painting, Inspection, Testing at manufacturer’s works, supply & Delivery to site inclusive
of packing & transportation, testing and commissioning at site of 33kV Gas insulated
switchgear as per single line diagram and enclosed in appendices.
 This specification shall be read in conjunction with Tender for Major Electrical
Equipment.
 Quantity of switchboard is as indicated in Tender for Major Electrical Equipment.
 The scope of work also includes erection, testing and commissioning of the equipment
supplied.
 All equipment supplied shall be new and best of their respective kinds and shall be of the
class most suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
 Modification of schemes/changes in components, if any suggested during
scrutiny/approval of drawings and execution of work, shall be carried out by successful
contractor at no extra cost.
 The scope of Contractor includes all associated items / sensors / interlocks required for
smooth and efficient working of system and required during installation, testing &

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 21
commissioning. All such items are deemed to have been included in the contractor’s
scope.
 Safety interlocks, necessary to ensure maintenance operation shall be provided.
9 NAMEPLATE
A nameplate shall be provided as per relevant IEC’s as applicable to respective devices,

however bidder shall note that the following minimum information shall be fixed to each main
component of the switchgear (in English):
33KV Switchgear
Manufacturer’s name or trademark
Year of manufacture
Type designation / Serial number
Purchase order N°
Rated current (busbar/derivations)
Rated frequency
Rated short-time withstand current (3 s)
Rated insulation level one-minute power frequency withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
Switching impulse withstand voltage
Rated auxiliary supply voltage
Rated SF6 gas pressure for operation at 20°C
Minimum SF6 gas density for insulation
Design pressure for enclosure
Each SWG subcomponent, shall also be provided with its own nameplate, with the following
data (non limitative):
Manufacturer’s name
Electrical characteristics (current, voltage)
Insulation level,
Electrical parameters (ratio, impedance… etc).
Auxiliary power supply (AC/DC etc.)

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 22
10 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES
10.1 Maintenance and Repair
Space and facilities shall be provided to allow for easy access and maintenance of all major
components of installation, as follows:
 Mobile step ladder shall be provided where necessary to facilitate inspection, maintenance
and erection. These shall comply with all the relevant safety regulations;
 Sufficient room around and above the circuit breakers shall be provided to allow changing of
contacts and other parts of the interrupter and operating mechanism without interfering with
adjacent busbar sections and without dismantling or removing of the circuit breaker
enclosure;
 Sufficient floor space shall be provided in the building to enable assembly, repair and testing
of components during erection, overhaul and routine maintenance;
 The GIS, shall be capable of being sectionalized and tested under normal gas pressure at
10 kVac for purpose of obtaining power factor and capacitance magnitudes of electrical
insulation. Test connection facilities shall be furnished with weatherproof covers.
10.2 Facilities for Future Extensions
The equipment and connectors provided in the initial design shall be so arranged to facilitate
future extension with minimum interruption time and with minimum redundant equipment.
The Contractor shall demonstrate and document how the erection and testing of future
extensions can be accomplished alongside the existing equipment.
10.3 Maintenance and Repair Equipment
The maintenance equipment listed if any in the Sub-clause 4 shall be supplied. Additional
equipment recommended by the Contractor in his tender shall be provided, as approved by the
Employer.
10.4 Other Requirements
10.4.1 Electrical Motors
All motors shall be in accordance with IEC 60034. The starting current at full voltage shall not
exceed six times the rated full load current. Motors are to be designed to operate 15% below
and 10% above nominal voltage without injuries or overheating.
10.4.2 Maintenance Devices
Each component shall be supplied with the necessary elements for moving and maintenance,
a) Base designed with metal skids for moving along the longitudinal or transversal axis

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 23
from the tank.
The lifting capacity of each base and jack shall be of at least 50 % of the total weight of the unit.
10.4.3 Colour
The function of the various components of the gas system shall be clearly identified at the
switchgear. Different gases or different conditions of the same gas shall be identified by colors.
The Contractor shall submit standards and color code to the Engineer, for approval. The
Engineer, however, reserves the right to impose different colors, however the coloring for Gas
piping shall be as per specification General Technical Requirement 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
10.4.4 Painting and Corrosion Protection
The switchgear shall be treated and protected to withstand at least five years of operation under
the environmental conditions prevailing at site without sustained corrosion or attacks from
fungus or rodents, provided the surfaces remain mechanically undamaged.
As a minimum painting standard for all steel surfaces installed indoors, the following shall apply:
 cleaning to the bare metal by chemical degreasing and shot-blasting;

 phosphatizing or priming with at least one coat of zinc or lead based primer, or
suitable epoxy paint;
 Finish painting shall consist of spray applied and oven dried two-compound
polyurethane or epoxy lacquer to a total dry-film thickness of at least 50 microns.
Gas monitoring and service piping, including all fittings shall be made of copper, brass or
stainless steel.
Machined sealing surfaces that are exposed to the atmosphere shall receive protective,
removable coating (such as Tectyle) that can be peeled or washed off during the final assembly
on site.
11 TRANSPORT
Besides the General Technical Requirements of this document, the Contractor must comply
with the following requirements:
a) The size of transport units shall be as large as possible so as to reduce the amount of field
installation work. Auxiliary cabinets with secondary equipment shall be transported as
completely assembled units.

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 24
b) Care shall be taken to seal off connecting flanges of the individual switchgear bays which
are not yet connected to prevent damage and ingress of contamination into the gas
compartments. Machined sealing surfaces must be suitably protected against mechanical
damage and corrosion.
c) If possible, the modules shall be prefilled with gas and the remaining insulating gas for the
initial filling of the switchgear shall be transported separately, in approved steel cylinders
marked according to international regulations. Otherwise, the entire initial filling will be
carried out at Site by the Contractor.
d) All interconnecting control cables which are not directly mounted on the bay shall be packed
separately and suitably marked.
e) One impact indicator shall be rigidly attached to each circuit breaker and voltage
transformer when packed, in order to monitor impacts suffered during transport from factory
to site.
f) Packing as per the General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000.
12 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
The Contractor completed and priced a list of recommended spare parts in his tender (Volume
1, Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended spare parts, as
13 TESTS
13.1 General
Type tests and routine tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s factory in the presence of
the Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representatives (if possible), and in strict accordance with the
IEC standards listed in the Technical Data Schedules and in the Clause 2.
Acceptance by Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representatives of any equipment shall not relieve
the Contractor from his performance guarantees or from any of his obligations under the
Contract.
All equipment, apparatus, materials and supplies provided shall be subject to tests in the shop
in the presence of the Employer’s and/or Engineer’s representative (if possible), for ensuring
conformity to requirements of the specifications. The method and procedure of tests for
specified particular items, shall be submitted for review and shall be in conformity of the
applicable recognised standards.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, promptly make good all defects evidenced by the
testing. After defects have been remedied, the equipment shall be offered for retesting.
The Contractor shall submit the required number of signed copies of test reports within 30 days
of completion of test program. The test reports shall indicate the tests performed, the results

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 25
obtained, instruments used, names of test personnel and provision for witness signatures. They
shall also be numbered and dated.
Components forming part of the metal-enclosed GIS, which are covered by the standards
specified in the relevant sections of this Specification, shall comply with and be tested according
to those standards.
13.2 Factory Tests
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive program and time schedule of factory testing for
approval stating the type of tests to be performed, the sequence of tests, the duration of each
phase of the work and the initiation dates.
13.2.1 Type Tests
Type tests shall be performed for equipment for which type test reports are not submitted
before contract award. If applicable, the Contractor shall prove that the High Voltage circuit
breakers are capable of interrupting the capacitive current, by either performing the relevant
tests or by submitting the relevant type test reports plus calculations, to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
The Contractor shall guarantee the minimum number of switching operations given in his
tender.
Type tests shall be carried out on one sample of each equipment or system according to the
relevant standards and as referred to in each particular equipment specification.
Should a similar switchgear bay module have been previously subjected to special type tests
indicated below, certified test certificates of same type of equipment from official independent
laboratories instead of witnessed tests at the Contractor's works may be accepted for the type
tests. Copies of such documents shall be submitted for approval.
Required type tests are as follows:
 Lightning impulse voltage dry test;

 Power frequency voltage tests;
 Thermal stability test;
 Temperature rise tests;
 Short-time and peak withstand current tests on main circuits;
 Verification of making and breaking capacities;
 Internal arc tests;
 Proof tests for enclosures; each pressurized section shall be tested in accordance with the
applicable pressure vessel codes as indicated in the specification;
 Mechanical operation tests at ambient temperature;

016403-2000-47ES-4801 01 July 2024 26
13.2.2 Routine Tests
All major parts of the equipment, especially those necessitating dismantling for transport and
subsequent reassembly at site, shall be proto assembled in the factory and carefully match-
marked before dismantling. At all stages of assembly, where accuracy of fit has to be assured
at site, dowel holes shall be provided with dowels to assist in reassembly.
The following routine tests shall be performed on all shipping units according to latest IEC
standards:
 Power frequency voltage dry tests of the main circuits;

 Dielectric tests of auxiliary and control circuits;
 Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit;
 Mechanical operation tests;
 Functional tests of auxiliary electrical, hydraulic and mechanical devices including all
relays, alarm and trip circuits;
 Verification of the correct wiring against drawings and specification;
Switchgear components forming part of the GIS, namely current and potential transformers,
surge arresters, etc., which have routine tests covered under other relevant IEC standards and
which do not form part of the tests specified below, shall have those other tests performed
before being assembled into the switchgear assemblies stated.
 Power frequency voltage dry test and partial discharge measurements on each
transport unit;
 Insulation test with 2 kV on all auxiliary circuits;
 Resistance measurement of the main circuits of each transport unit;
 Mechanical testing of the switching devices;
.
13.3 Site Commissioning Tests
The Contractor shall provide the services of switch gear specialists to perform site testing and
commissioning, including one month of commercial operation on energization of the station.
GCCIA
SUBSTATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER
016403-2000-47ES-4230 Rev.01
July 2024
Substation Service Transformer # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 AUXILIARY SERVICE TRANSFORMER 1
1.1 General 1

4.1.1 Load Conditions 2
4.1.2 Environment 2
4.1.3 Incoming Voltage for Auxiliary Services 2
4.2 Guaranteed Losses 2
4.3 Short-Circuit Voltage (Impedance) 3
4.4 Transport 3
4.5 Manufacturing Requirements 3
4.5.1 Core 3
4.5.2 Bushings 4
4.5.3 Tank 4
4.5.4 Moving and Maintenance Elements 5
4.5.5 Conservator Tank 6
4.5.6 Transformer Tap Changer 6
4.5.8 Indicators, Protection, Alarm and Tripping Devices 8
4.5.9 Control Cabinet 9
4.5.10 Short-Circuit Withstand 9
4.5.11 Grounding Connections 10
4.5.12 Arresters Mounting 10
4.5.13 Current Limiting Fuse 10

6.1 Apparatus Test 11

6.1.1 Dielectric Tests (Routine/Type/Special test) 11
6.1.2 Temperature Rise Test (Type test) 12
6.1.3 Zero-Sequence Impedance Test (special test) 12
6.1.4 Capacitance and Tan delta Measurement Test (Routine test) 12
6.1.5 Routine test 12
6.1.6 Type tests 13
6.1.7 Special Test. 13
6.2 Bushing Tests 13

016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 ii
6.2.1 Type Test 13

6.3 Bushing Current Transformer Test 13
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 1
1 AUXILIARY SERVICE TRANSFORMER
1.1 General
The document outlines, from technical point-of-view, the specific requirements applicable to the
design, manufacture and testing of Auxiliary Service Transformers to be installed in 400 kV
GCCIA Substations being developed as part of Gulf Cooperation Council Electrical
Interconnection Grid.
Code Description
4231 Substation Service Transformer 1500 kVA, 33/0.415 kV
The 33/0.415 kV substation service transformers shall basically be utilized for creating
necessary 415 V voltage grade AC supply to cater the substation auxiliary service loads.
Primary side voltage is drawn from Auxiliary windings of 400 kV shunt reactors or Tertiary
windings of Power Transformers as the case may be.
IEC 60044 Instruments transformers

IEC 60076 Power transformers
IEC 60076-6 Reactors, arc-suppression coils and Earthing Transformer
IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC 60214 On-load tap-changers
IEC 60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000V
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in
polluted conditions
IEC 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications – Mineral insulating oils for
electrical equipment
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 2
4.1.1 Load Conditions
The 33/0.415 kV substation service transformer (SST) is associated with shunt reactors/
power autotransformers auxiliary or tertiary winding as the case may be to draw the requisite
primary voltage and secondary low voltage will be used as the main AC supply for auxiliary
loads in new GCCIA EHV substations. The SST will be pad mounted.
Substations service transformers and the earthing reactors shall be designed to operate at
110% of the rated voltage continuously.
The transformer shall fulfill or compatible to fulfil the following requirements in respect
of 33 kV and 415 V ac networks:
- 415 V network shall be effectively grounded (X0/X1≤3)
- Unbalance currents are expected on 415 Vac distribution system
- 415 Vac shall be regulated by the means of OLTC located on the 33 kV winding
4.1.2 Environment
The equipment and materials to be supplied shall be strictly in accordance with the present
specification and shall be designed to operate satisfactorily considering the environmental
conditions indicated in the General Technical Requirements & the conditions specific to the site
of installation whichever is more severe.
The capacity (power) specified in the technical data schedules must be reached without having
the temperature rise exceeded implying that the supplier shall plan additional radiators and
fans, if required to counteract the effects of site environment. Accordingly, Supplier shall
submit a calculation brief detailing the requirement and number of additional fans and radiators,
if required.
4.1.3 Incoming Voltage for Auxiliary Services
The incoming voltages for the auxiliaries are indicated in the General Technical Requirements
016403-2000-47ES-0000.
4.2 Guaranteed Losses
The no-load and load losses shall be measured when tests are performed at the Supplier’s
plant in compliance with this specification.
If the measured values of losses are higher than the maximum guaranteed loss values
including tolerances, the equipment price will be reduced as follows:
(a) For each equipment whose measured value of losses by excitation is higher than the
guaranteed value of losses by excitation:
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 3
- Reduction = capitalized value of no-load losses x the difference between the

measured value of losses in kW after dielectric tests less guaranteed value of
losses in kW.
(b) For each equipment winding whose measured load losses value is higher than the
guaranteed load losses value:
- Reduction = capitalized value of on-load losses x the difference between the
measured value of losses in kW less the guaranteed value of losses in kW.
The capitalized values of on-load and no-load losses are indicated in the Technical Data
Schedules of this specification.
4.3 Short-Circuit Voltage (Impedance)
Short-circuit voltage (impedances) of the apparatus are specified in the Technical Data
Schedules. In the case of distribution transformers only, the Bidder may propose an alternative
with impedance values based on Bidder’s optimization.
4.4 Transport
Besides the General Requirements of this document, the Supplier must comply with the
following requirements:
 the equipment will be supplied completely assembled and filled with oil;One number
impact recorder shall be installed during Transportation of Service Transformer.
 the porcelain insulators and the bushing shall be protected appropriately with wood and
spongy material or by any superior & time-tested method.
4.5 Manufacturing Requirements
Substation service transformer, shall be pad-mounted type. The base of the transformer shall
be on skid or flat. The base shall be of rigidly welded steel-alloy frame fabricated from
structural shapes of adequate size to withstand movements & vibrations during shipping and
handling. Base structure member shall be so located that the center of gravity shall not fall
outside the points of support for a 15° tilt from the normal levelled position. The tank and cable-
boxes shall be totally enclosed.
4.5.1 Core
The core shall be assembled with oriented grain steel, cold rolled sheet, and treated with an
insulating layer of heat and oil resistant.
The core supports shall be designed to counter the effects imposed by adverse maritime and
surface transport.
The Bidder shall provide a brief description of the Construction details of the proposed core or
shell design with their offer.
The magnetic core and clamping structure shall be insulated from each other and from the tank.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 4
4.5.2 Bushings
The bushing shall be of porcelain (other material not accepted) have the adequate current
capacity to use the equipment to its maximum overload capacity. The neutral bushings shall
have the same current capacity as the corresponding phase bushings.
Porcelain utilized shall have adequate physical properties and shall be of colour specified in the
General Technical Requirements, without cavities and defects and entirely glazed.
The brackets and accessories shall be made of steel or malleable iron and shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
All terminal connectors used outside of oil filled portion shall be silver/tin plated.
The bushings shall include current transformers as indicated in Technical Data Schedules.
The bushings of identical current and voltage ratings shall be interchangeable.
The Supplier shall supply bushing connectors suitable for horizontal or vertical connection as
specified in the Technical Data Schedules and as required in project.
Bushings shall be so located that the central phase (H2. X2, Y2) is at the centre of the tank,
along the transverse or longitudinal axes.
4.5.3 Tank
This clause is applicable to earthing reactor and transformer only.
The main tank shall be entirely welded, made of high resistivity steel plates and the design shall
be conventional with bolted cover (no deviation accepted). The tank shall be designed to
support a total vacuum and over pressure.
The flanges of the tank and cover shall be fixed with a sufficient number of bolts, equally
spaced to ensure uniform pressure on the gaskets.
Openings shall be devised when necessary to allow inspection and for easy access to bushings,
bushings current transformers, winding connections, etc. The covers of these openings shall have
handles for installation and removal.
Suitable stainless steel material labels shall be provided for valves and other accessories.
It must be possible to remove the bushing without removing the tank cover.
Rating and connection diagram plate, valve location plate shall be provided. Plate material shall
be stainless steel with Oil and UV resistant properties.
All hardware used for transformers and its accessories in outdoor environment shall be either
hot dip galvanized or made of stainless-steel material.
Internal surface of transformer tank, interconnecting pipe shall be painted with oil resistant paint
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 5
When a conservator is used, the interior part of the tank cover shall be designed in such a manner
that it enables passage of gas bubbles towards the gas relay.
The tank shall be complete, with all accessories, which shall include:
a. Oil drain valve

b. Top and bottom filters valves
c. Oil sample valve at the bottom of the tank
d. Valves of gas relay (when applicable)
e. Thermometer envelope for Winding and Oil temperature
The manufacturer may propose to combine these valves for practical reasons.
Gravity centre plates shall be fixed on each side of the tank for transportation & service and
shall include an indication.
All valves shall be provided with blank plate or plug and padlocking possibilities, in open or
closed position, and shall have indicators which shall enable to see the open or closed position.
It shall be possible to take oil samples even when the transformer is energised.
Spring loaded pressure relief valves with automatic reclosing shall also be installed and shall
have a sufficient section to permit limitation of the tank pressure. It shall have an indication flag
and Trip contact.
The tank shall have removable radiators with valves at both headers. The radiators shall have
a bleeder plug. There shall be one spare radiator (n+1), allowing operation at rated power with
one radiator out of service.
4.5.4 Moving and Maintenance Elements
This clause is applicable to earthing reactor and transformer only.
Each tank shall be supplied with the necessary elements for moving and maintenance,
a. Base designed with metal skids for moving along the longitudinal or transverse axis
b. Hooks for traction movements
c. Eyes or anchors for suspension
d. Eyes for lifting the complete unit, eyes for lifting the tank cover and access opening
covers for maintenance, hooks on the yoke allowing withdrawal of the core and windings
assembly from the tank.
Each tank shall have at least four jacking steps exceeding the tub which shall enable lifting or
lowering of the complete three-phase unit, oil filled, using hydraulic or manual jacks. The lifting
capacity of each base and jack shall be of at least 50 % of the total weight of the unit.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 6
4.5.5 Conservator Tank
The equipment shall be of sealed tank type design.
As an alternative, supplier may propose equipment with appropriate expansion tank allowing the
oil expansion between the maximum and minimum values of oil temperature. The conservator
tank shall include a rubber sack to avoid contamination of the oil by the humidity in the air.
The expansion tank’s oil capacity shall not be lower than 10 % of the total oil volume of the
equipment.
Openings of sufficient dimensions to allow access during inspection shall be included. Plates
used as covers for inspection openings shall be bolted to the expansion tank and shall have
handles to facilitate installation and removal operations.
The conservator tank shall have an air vent including electrical type dehydrating breather and
designed for 100% humidity. The Breather shall include an incoming air oil-filter. This air vent shall
be at a height inferior to 1.6 m above the ground.
The conservator tank shall be provided with valves for oil filling and drainage and be complete
with oil level indictor and oil sampling drain.
4.5.6 Transformer Tap Changer
4.5.6.1 On-load Tap Changer
The on-load tap changer shall be designed to work with 1.5 times the “lowest tap” current in
maximum cooling rating.
The tap changer shall include:
a. The tap selector devices located in the transformer tank or in a separate compartment;
b. Commutation devices shall have transition resistance;
c. The control mechanism made of an alternating current servomotor, single phase 240 Vac;
this mechanism shall be placed in an airtight cabinet with hinged doors, be fixed to the
transformer, with an operation counter, position contacts at each tap for indication, two limit
switches, a position indicator and a crank for manual operation;
d. The necessary devices for indication and remote indication shall be included, in particular,
a remote position indicator (synchro-machine) having a numeric display (INCON 1250 or
equivalent), a changeover switch with insulated contacts connected to a diode matrix to
code in BCD the tap changer position, changeover switch with insulated contacts for each
tap for remote indication and two limit switch contacts.
Tap positions shall be numbered consecutively starting from numeral one in ascending order.
Tap number 1 shall correspond to highest voltage.
Equipment supplied shall include all necessary control, protection, alarm and indication devices.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 7
The remote position indicator shall be provided on a separate panel to be installed in the control
room. This equipment shall be packaged separately.
Note: The regulator switches contacts shall be guaranteed to allow a minimum of 500,000 full
charge operations without revision or replacement.
4.5.7.1 Automatic Voltage Regulating (AVR) Relay & Control
The AVR shall have the following minimum features: -
a. Microprocessor based with self-supervision.

b. Operating voltage of 110VDC.
c. Automatic control only if MV circuit breaker is closed.
d. Provision to select the operation mode as ‘Auto/Non-Auto (Manual)’ from the regulator
as well as from SCADA/ SCS (HMI).
e. In non-auto mode, shall be possible to operate the tap changer from SCMS/SCADA.
f. Capable of accepting the tap position indication signals from the Motor Drive Unit in BCD
and transmission to SCMS/SCADA in BCD format.
g. Bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1.5 and 2.5 times the
transformer taps step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the transformer tap
step percentage.
h. Regulator shall be insensitive to frequency variations between 47Hz and 51Hz.
i. Operation time lag adjustable between 10 and 120 seconds.
j. Under voltage blocking at 80% of nominal value with automatic restoration of control
when the reference voltage rises to 85% of the nominal value.
k. Over voltage blocking facility.
l. A display unit giving Line Voltage, working tap position, operation status (Auto /Non-
Auto, Independent), status of MV and LV breakers, U/V blocking, VT failure & frequency.
m. Able to communicate directly with the SCMS system offered for substation control
without any additional interface.
n. Shall be compatible/interoperable with the proposed SCMS system. The substation
automation protocol applicable shall be IEC 61850 latest edition and the network
o. Redundancy protocol shall be based on standard protocols such as RSTP/HSR/PRP
latest edition.
4.5.7.2 AVR Panel
All Automatic Voltage regulators for transformers in a station shall be mounted in a single panel
(AVR Panel) located in control room. Colour shade and size/dimension of AVR panel shall be
identical to that of nearby panels in the control room. The front door shall be transparent so that
all components inside the panel are visible without opening the door.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 8
4.5.8 Indicators, Protection, Alarm and Tripping Devices
This clause applies to earthing reactors and transformers only.
A. Indicators and Protection Devices
The indicators and protection shall include:
a. Gas over pressure relay which shall activate the alarm and tripping contacts.
b. When the equipment is supplied with a conservator, Buchholz relay, with two floaters, for
accumulation of gas and overpressure, which shall activate the alarm and the tripping
contacts, complete with all accessories, such as sampling valve, located at 1600 mm
from the ground.
c. Oil level indicator, with alarm contacts for low level and high level.
d. Oil temperature indicator with sensor under the cover with two independently adjustable
contacts.
e. Winding temperature indicator with sensor under the cover with two independently
adjustable contacts.
f. Vacuum/pressure gauze with bleeder device (not applicable to conservator type unit).
B. Alarm Devices
Alarm contacts shall be provided and wired to the control cabinet terminal blocks to indicate:
a. Oil temperature exceeding the adjusted value

b. Winding temperature exceeding the adjusted value.
c. Oil level exceeding the adjusted value
d. Oil level under the adjusted value
e. Gas in the transformer oil (Pressure or Buchholz relay)
f. MK heating / lighting supply faulty alarm
C. Tripping Devices
Tripping contacts shall be supplied for:
a. Oil temperature superior to the adjusted value

b. Winding temperature superior to the adjusted value.
c. Gas in the transformer (Buchholz relay)
d. Overpressure in the tank (Pressure relief device)
The substation alarm and tripping circuits shall be fed from 110 Vdc system. The alarm and
tripping contacts rating capacity shall be able to switch and withstand the current and voltage of
the 110 Vdc system.
All the tripping signals shall be wired though FT type test switches to facilitate the isolation
during the maintenance of transformer.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 9
D. Indication
a. MK heater ON
b. MK Door Open
c. Tap Position indication
d. TC control supply fail.
e. TC motor supply fail.
f. Extreme tap reached (shall be generated form MDU).
g. Tap change in progress.
h. Tap changer Local/Remote.
f.
4.5.9 Control Cabinet
Each equipment shall have its own control cabinet containing:
a. A 415 Vac, three pole moulded case circuit breaker with 14 kA rms symmetric short circuit
capacity Cabinet construction shall be of IP65 (NEMA 4), with hinged doors, padlock able
and a movable plate at the bottom to enable entry of conduits (200 x 500 mm).
b. Anti-condensation heating element with thermostatic control.
c. Cabinet Light with door operated switch and a convenience outlet with top
d. Stranded coper wiring preferably tin-plated with polymeric fluoride insulation.
e. Terminal blocks mounted on asymmetrical rails (preferably of ENTRELEC or equivalent)
and accessories. The terminal block arrangement and identification shall be strictly in
accordance with the drawings.
f. All the accessories shall be connected to the terminal blocks with armoured cables or non-
armoured cables in metallic conduits.
g. Door stoppers to prevent unintended closure shall be provided.
h. All components in the control cabinet and control panels shall be clearly labelled with
permanently engraved type labels.
i. Minimum 10% of terminals of each type shall be provided as spare.
j. Double compression type, weatherproof cable glands shall be provided for termination of
auxiliary cables.
k. Considering severe site ambient conditions stainless steel cable ties shall be used to
secure the external control/power cables. Sufficient number of stainless-steel ties shall be
supplied for site use.
4.5.10 Short-Circuit Withstand
The reactors and transformers shall be designed and made to withstand, without damages, the
mechanical and thermal effects of external short-circuits, under the following conditions:
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 10
a. The current in the winding under short-circuit conditions shall be limited only by the
impedance of the network based on 1 GVA short-circuit power for 33 kV;
b. The short-circuit duration shall be limited to duration specified in the Technical Data
Schedules for equipment protection;
c. Network fault current asymmetry of X/R = 17;
d. Short-circuit of one winding only is considered at a time.
e. For design purposes, Xo = X1 on HV, LV.
4.5.11 Grounding Connections
This clause applies to the earthing reactor and transformer only.
Grounding leads from core and frame are to be brought out through separate bushings to facilitate
testing at site. The bushings and shorting links shall be protected by suitable enclosure.
Windings shall not be grounded inside the tank.
Generally, the LV neutral bushing will be grounded by a copper bus of sufficient section. This bus
shall be installed down to low part of the tank and be supported to the tank by insulators and
terminated with a connector for installation of up to two 30 mm2 bare copper conductor.
The tank shall be provided with two (2) grounding terminals diagonally for connecting copper cable
of 300 mm2 size. Each of those shall be located in the longitudinal face of the tank and at
diagonally opposite.
4.5.12 Arresters Mounting
Surge arresters shall be mounted inside a metal-enclosed compartment with primary winding
bushings.
4.5.13 Current Limiting Fuse
Current-limiting fuse shall be HRC & draw out type and installed in series with the primary.
Provision shall be available for draw out mechanism in HV compartment at convenient height
for ease of operation
Primary protective fuse link shall be current-limiting type.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply shall include the items listed below. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
ensure coordination of engineering and procurement, in order to guarantee compatibility and
completeness of the overall installation:
The supply shall include the following (non limitative list):
a. Tank bottom skids

b. Auxiliary terminal blocks in the control cabinet for control devices and protection
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 11
c. Terminal connectors for bushings and grounding

d. Terminal blocks for wiring interconnections
e. Oil for filling the apparatus plus 10 %, delivered in 45-gallon non-returnable drums
f. HRC fuse withdrawable type.
g. Surge Arrester

Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Volume1, Section 6: Schedule of
Prices.

Bidder/Contractor shall complete and price the list of recommended spare parts in his offer
(Volume1,Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended spare
parts, as approved by the Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of operation,
under normal operating conditions.
All tests shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards as specified in the
6.1 Apparatus Test
Moreover, the following prescriptions shall be respected:
6.1.1 Dielectric Tests (Routine/Type/Special test)
The factory acceptance tests shall include all electrical and mechanical tests (Routine, Type
and Special tests) as listed in subsequent sections in accordance with the applicable standards.
Impulse voltage: All windings of equipment with voltage equal or higher than 10 kV must be
subjected to basic impulse withstand tests as a type test only. The test shall include application
of chopped waves at 110% BIL value as a type test.
Induced voltage: the routine test shall be performed as per IEC 76-3 standard with the tap
changer in the position corresponding to the highest (turn to turn) voltage.
Oil samples: oil samples must be taken before and after dielectric tests to verify its content in
laboratory.
The current and no-load losses must be measured before and after tests. The losses value
measured after the dielectric tests shall be used to compare it with the Supplier's guaranteed
values.
Any failures while testing shall result in the repetition of the dielectric tests.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 12
6.1.2 Temperature Rise Test (Type test)
The equipment shall be subjected to temperature rise tests as a type test. These tests shall be
performed with all radiators installed except the spare. The measured temperature rise shall be
corrected according to the environmental conditions, in conformity with the prescribed method
in IEC 60076-2 and same shall be lower than the limit specified in Technical Data Schedules.
6.1.3 Zero-Sequence Impedance Test (special test)
Measurement of transformer zero-sequence impedance shall be made for both short-circuit and
open circuit conditions, for different windings and up to 30 % of rated voltage.
6.1.4 Capacitance and Tan delta Measurement Test (Routine test)
At the end of the dielectric tests, the capacitance measurement of different windings, between
windings and to the tank shall be made in addition to insulation (tangent delta) power factor
according to ANSI C57.12.90 Standard and IEC 60076-1.
The following tests also to be carried out
6.1.5 Routine test
a. Measurement of winding resistance.

b. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement.
c. Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss.
d. Measurement of no-load loss and current.
e. Dielectric routine tests.
f. Measurement of insulation resistance and Polarization index
g. Measurement of magnetizing current (Low voltage).
h. Calibration of OTI &WTI and Hot spot gradient setting.
i. Test on control cabinet.
j. Sweep frequency response Analysis.
k. Measurement of Paint coat thickness.
l. Tests on on-load tap-changers.
m. Oil leakage test (tightness test).
n. Tan delta and capacitance measurement.
o. Check of core and frame insulation resistance for liquid immersed transformers and 2.5kV
test (insulation resistance test before and after 2.5kV).
p. Test on AVR relay.
q. Test on transformer oil.
016403-2000-47ES-4230 01 July 2024 13
6.1.6 Type tests
a. Temperature-rise type test.

b. Dielectric type tests.
c. Determination of sound level.
d. Jacking test
6.1.7 Special Test.
a. Pressure deflection and Vacuum deflection test.

b. Measurement of Harmonic in no load current.
c. Measurement of zero sequence impedance.
d. Test on transformer oil.
e. Dielectric special test.
6.2 Bushing Tests
All the tests on Bushing shall be performed as per IEC 60137.
6.2.1 Type Test
a. Basic impulse level test.

b. Wet power-frequency voltage tests
c. Dry power-frequency voltage tests
d. Dielectric loss angle measure before and after above mentioned tests
e. Temperature rise and mechanical resistance tests
f. Short circuit current withstand ability
6.2.2 Routine Tests
a. Dry power-frequency voltage tests

b. Dielectric losses measurement
6.3 Bushing Current Transformer Test
The following tests shall be performed on the bushing current transformers.
a. Transformation ratio
b. Polarity
c. Magnetisation current and voltage measurement (saturation curve)
d. Dielectric insulation on secondary side
e. Accuracy test
GCCIA
LV SUBSTATION SERVICE
SWITCHGEAR
016403-2000-47ES-4300 Rev.01
July 2024
LV Substation Service Switchgear # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 LOW VOLTAGE SUBSTATION SERVICE SWITCHGEAR 1

1.1 General 1
1.2 Type of Switchgears 1
2. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 1
2.1 Primary Busbars and Connections 2
2.2 Components and Accessories 3
2.2.1 Air Circuit Breakers 3
2.2.2 Operating Mechanism 3
2.2.3 Isolating Devices and Shutters 3
2.2.4 Circuit Breaker Mechanical Interlocking 4
2.2.5 Moulded Case and Miniature Circuit-Breakers 4
2.2.6 Anti-Condensation Heaters 4
2.2.7 Distribution Panels 4
3.0 AUTO CHANGE OVER SCHEME 5
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS 5
4.1 Type & Routine tests 5
4.2 Factory Acceptance Tests 5
5.0 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS 5
6.0 LVAC PANEL DESCRIPTIONS AND DATA 6
6.1 Non-Essential Switchgear Panel 6
6.2 Essential Switchgear Panel 7
6.3 Heating & Lighting DB Panel: 8
7 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 8
8. CODES AND STANDARDS 8
9. COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS 9
9.1 LV AC SWITCHGEAR PANEL 9
9.2 SUB DISTRIBUTION PANEL 10
9.3 PANELS MANUFACTURING 11

9.3.1 Cabinet 11
9.3.2 Components Installation 11
9.3.3 Nameplates and Mimic Diagram 11
9.3.4 Wiring 12
9.3.5 Grounding 12
9.3.6 Lighting, Outlets and Heater 12
9.4 DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR 13
9.4.1 Submittals and Time Schedule 13
9.4.2 Special Requirements for Wiring Diagram 13
10. SCOPE OF SUPPLY 14
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 ii

11. SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION 15
12. REFERENCE DRAWINGS 15

016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 1
1 LOW VOLTAGE SUBSTATION SERVICE SWITCHGEAR
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of low-voltage substation service switchgear
(LVAC), to be installed in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be
developed by the Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA).
LV switchgear will provide switching and transfer capability to feed the distribution panels and
equipment’s from the sources coming from the auxiliary-service transformers and the
emergency generator set.
The LV AC system comprises a non-essential switchgear panel, an Essential switchgear panel,

and sub-distribution boards.
The LV AC distribution panels will supply to auxiliary loads, Sub DBs, the battery chargers,
indoor and outdoor lighting and other auxiliary equipment.
This Technical Specification shall be always be read in conjunction with the General Technical
1.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works including all
materials and accessories for low voltage AC supply switchgear in this stations. General
requirement for installation, testing, commissioning, and operational & maintenance
requirements of the equipment are covered in this specification.
1.2 Type of Switchgears
The equipment shall be of air insulated, metal-enclosed and formed into complete
switchboards, which may be multi-tier design subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
LVAC switchboard shall be compartmented design with Form 4B Type 6.
2. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
The switchboards shall be built up of air circuit breakers, contactors, moulded case circuit
breakers etc. All units, when built up into a complete switchboard, shall be such that the
completed switchboard is of flush fronted design having a neat and clean appearance and is
readily extensible.
All components shall be accessibly mounted in the switchboard and shall not hinder access to
wiring or terminals. All faults occurring within any MCBs or MCCBs shall be contained within
that unit and shall not lead to Busbar fault.
Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartment within the switchboard and
access shall be possible only by means of bolted-on sheet steel covers
Busbars and busbar connections shall not be exposed when covers and doors are opened for
access to the remainder of the Switchgear. Transparent cover shall be provided to avoid
accidental contact with the live parts.
The construction of panels shall be robust and be designed to prevent the spreading of damage
due to fire, short-circuits or other causes.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 2
The degree of protection of cubicles shall be IP51. The internal and external surface shall be
painted and the minimum paint thickness shall be 70 microns and average of 90 microns, to be
proved during factory inspection of cubicles.
The internal paint colour shall be semi-gloss white and external light grey RAL 7032; however,
this colour shall be subjected to Engineers approval during detailed design stage.
The busbars shall be segregated from the incomer/outgoing MCCBs.
All wiring inside the cubicle shall be carried out with suitably rated power cable, copper
conductor, XLPE insulated, fire proof switchboard wire 0.6/1 kV with minimum cross section of
2.5 sq.mm.
Phase identification colours/insulation sleeves shall be provided for all conductors (R, Y, B and
Black). The busbars shall be suitably supported to withstand all stresses during normal
operation and fault conditions.
The internal of the cubicle shall be illuminated with suitable lamp controlled by door limit switch.
The incoming and outgoing cable entry shall be from bottom and non-magnetic gland plate shall
be supplied for main incoming supplies. Suitable incoming and outgoing terminals shall be
provided for terminating all the feeder cables.
Mimic diagram in black color with durable material for busbar (10mm thick) and out-going
feeder (8mm thick) arrangements shall be provided at front panel of switchgear. Outgoing
feeders mimic shall be in line with MCCBs on position.
An anti-condensation heater controlled by thermostat/hygrostat shall be supplied for the cubicle.
Suitable labels shall be provided internal and external to all components. All distribution boards
shall be provided with prominent, engraved identification plates, which shall clearly give the
feeder number and feeder designation.
The ratings and number of outgoings indicated in the tender drawings are minimum
requirement only and any additional feeders/higher ratings etc. required shall be supplied
without any contractual implications to GCCIA.
The LVAC manufacturer shall provide Contacts for the connection with the SCADA. All alarms
in the substation shall be according to latest scada signal list.
Facilities shall be provided for primary and secondary injection tests to be carried out for current
transformers and protective relays.
The padlocking facilities shall be considered in the switchboard.
All necessary operation instruction and warning labels shall be provided for all cubicles.
Lifting hook shall be provided for all panels.
At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided in the switchboard wherever applicable.
2.1 Primary Busbars and Connections
Primary busbars and connections between the several pieces of apparatus forming the cubicle
shall be of high conductivity copper. All busbars connecting pieces shall be tinned or silver-
plated.
Each phase conductor shall in addition to being spaced to give the necessary air clearance for
the rated voltage, each phase conductor, shall be insulated in the form of PVC sleeve to the
maximum extent practicable.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 3
Primary busbars and connections shall be clearly marked and shall be displaced for standard
phase sequence Red (R), Yellow (Y), and Blue (B), from top to bottom or left to right as viewed
from the switching device operating mechanism side. The neutral bus bar shall be of the same
size as the phase busbar. Busbars shall be readily accessible for extension.
2.2 Components and Accessories
2.2.1 Air Circuit Breakers
Primary circuit breaker units shall be of the metal-enclosed, horizontal draw-out air breaker type
and shall comply with applicable standards except where modified by this Specification.
The moving portion of each AC circuit breaker unit shall consist of a four-poles with operating
mechanism, primary and secondary disconnecting devices, auxiliary switches, position
indicators, operation counter, close coil, shunt release and the necessary control wiring all
mounted on a substantial steel framework.
Circuit breakers of the same current and voltage rating shall be fully interchangeable. Provision
shall be made for completing the auxiliary circuits when the circuit-breaker main connections
are isolated, to enable the function of the circuit breaker to be tested in test position.
ACB shall be provided for all feeders having rated current 800A or above.
Minimum two numbers maintenance trollies for ACB racking in/out shall be provided.
2.2.2 Operating Mechanism
The circuit-breaker mechanism shall be motor wound spring, operated and also manual closing
and opening facility.
Spring operated mechanism shall have the following additional measures:
a. OCO – operation shall be possible without recharging the springs.
b. Mechanical indication as well as electrical indication shall be provided to indicate the state
of the spring.
c. The limit switch shall be provided for cutting off the spring charging power supply when the
spring is fully charged.
d. Anti-pumping scheme for all circuit breakers shall be provided.
All circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be fitted with a mechanical hand tripping device
in addition to the electrical shunt trip release coil.
2.2.3 Isolating Devices and Shutters
Shutters shall be provided to completely shroud fixed isolating contacts of the circuit-breaker
busbar and cable circuits. These shutters shall be opened and closed automatically by the
movement of the circuit breaker carriage and shall prevent access to fixed isolating contacts
when the circuit breaker is withdrawn.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 4
Isolating devices shall incorporate self-aligning contacts, the fixed contacts of which shall be
such that access can be easily obtained for maintenance purposes.
2.2.4 Circuit Breaker Mechanical Interlocking
Mechanical interlocks shall be provided for circuit breakers and shall fulfil the following
conditions during operations:
a. It shall not be possible for the circuit breaker moving portion from being withdrawn from or
inserted into the isolating contacts when the circuit breaker is closed.
b. The closing of the circuit breaker shall not be possible when the circuit breaker is
intermediate position.
c. Rack-in/out of any circuit breaker should not disturb other circuit breakers, which are in
service.
2.2.5 Moulded Case and Miniature Circuit-Breakers
Circuit-breakers shall be manually operated with trip-free operating mechanism of the quick-
make, quick-break type with de-ionising type arc chutes and fitted with adjustable thermal
releases and instantaneous magnetic release. MCCBs shall comply with IEC 60947-2 and
MCBs with IEC 60898.
Circuit-breakers shall be suitable for use on a.c. or d.c. systems up to the maximum fault
current levels available on the system.
Multipole circuit-breakers shall be contained within a common moulded case of high mechanical
strength and dust-proof. All poles of such circuit-breakers shall be operated simultaneously by
a common operating lever. Clear indication shall be given on each circuit-breaker to show
whether it is in the closed, open or tripped condition. Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with
one set of alarm contacts for remote signalling. All MCCBs shall have built-in over current, short
circuit and earth leakage protection in addition to magnetic trip.
2.2.6 Anti-Condensation Heaters
Anti-condensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided inside each cubicle. They
shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
The heaters shall be thermostatically controlled and shall be arranged to cut off when the
equipment internal temperature exceeds between 30-35°C. A master heater circuit switch shall
be provided on the switchboard or panel with an indicating lamp to show whether the supply is
on or off. The heaters shall operate from a single phase a.c. supply.
2.2.7 Distribution Panels
All distribution panels shall be fitted with moulded case circuit- breakers having thermal-
magnetic overload short-circuit protection. The arrangement and rating of outgoing feeders
shall be as per approved single line diagram. The outgoing feeder cable entry shall be from
bottom and non-magnetic gland plate. Gland plates size shall be enough to accommodate
cables without any bends in the cables entry. All cable shall be ease of access and transparent
cover shall be provided to avoid accidental contact with the live parts. Suitable outgoing
terminals shall be provided for terminating all the feeder cables.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 5
3.0 AUTO CHANGE OVER SCHEME
The scheme shall be implemented in the LVAC Board as detailed in schedule of requirements.
PLC shall be used for control and interlocks schemes, all necessary software/ applications to
be installed in the laptops provided by Contractor. Also, necessary backup for software /
applications shall be supplied. All the required interlocks for the incomers, Bus coupler and DG
incomers shall be implemented in both soft logic in PLC and hardwired in the panels.
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS
4.1 Type & Routine tests
All the tests shall be performed on LVAC switchboard in accordance with applicable standards.
4.2 Factory Acceptance Tests
Factory acceptance tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer works and shall comprise all
the routine tests specified for LVAC switchboard
5.0 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS
Commissioning checks and tests shall be carried out as listed below:
1. Main Circuit Contact Resistance Test
2. Insulation Resistance Test
3. Interchangeability Test
4. CB Functional Test
5. Indications Test
6. Scheme Test
7. Heating and Lighting Test
8. Incomer Cable Test
9. Outgoing Cable Identification Test
10. Outgoing Cable Test
11. CT Test
12. Relay test

016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 6
6.0 LVAC PANEL DESCRIPTIONS AND DATA
The panel shall be suitable for three-Phase, 4Wire 415/240V AC, rated for 2500A @, 40 ˚C
50Hz and short time rating of 40kA for 3 sec. Allowed tolerances of the output voltages
between the +10% to -15% of the rated voltage.
The panel shall be indoor type, self-supported and floor standing one. All main bus bars shall
be tinned copper and colored sleeved (Red, Yellow, Blue and Black) and the earth bar shall be
tinned copper. The protection class for panel shall be IP51.The interior color for panel shall be
semi-gloss white RAL 9003and for external shall be semi-gloss light grey RAL-7032 and the
thickness of the steel plate shall be 2mm.
6.1 Non-Essential Switchgear Panel
6.1.1 Two Transformer Incomers circuits, each comprising
1. 4 pole, air break, 2500A, 40kA, stored energy, 110VDC motor operated, withdraw able,
rack mounted, PLC/mechanical Push Buttons operated ACB complete with set of CB’s
auxiliary contacts.
2. MFM shall be provided.
3. Lamp test push button
4. Electrical interlocking
5. Close/open manual control switch.
6. Semaphore for ACB, Heater ON/OFF Switch, trip isolation links, etc.
7. Indication Lamps for ACB ON/ACB OFF/ACB Service/ ACB Control Supply Faulty/ACB
Test/Heater On/Incomer Supply Available (Red, Yellow, Blue)/ Protection-Control Supply
Available/ DC Indication Supply Available.
8. Multi characteristic over-current and earth fault relay, restricted earth fault relay,
electrically reset trip relay, trip circuit and protection supply supervision relays and with
time delayed under-voltage relays.
9. Three sets of 3 phase (R,Y,B) CTs for each incomer feeders and one neutral CT at each
Station Service Transformer side.
 2500/1A Class 0.5FS CTs for statistical energy meter and multifunction meter (R,Y,
B).
 2500/1A, Class 5P20 CTs for over current & earth fault protection (R,Y,B)
 2500/1A, Class PX CTs for Restricted earth fault protection (R,Y,B)

016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 7
6.1.2 One Bus section circuits each comprising
1. One 4 pole, air break, 2500A, 40kA, stored energy, 110VDC motor operated, withdraw
able, rack mounted, PLC/mechanical Push Buttons operated ACB complete with set of
CB’s auxiliary contacts.
3. Semaphore for ACB, Lamp Test PB, Heater ON/OFF Switch.
4. Lamp test push button.
5. Electrical interlocking.
6. PLC compartment in BS panel.
7. Auto/Manual changeover switch in BS panel
8. Semaphore for ACB, Heater ON/OFF Switch, trip isolation links, etc.
9. Multifunction meters (or voltmeters scaled 0 - 500V with a selector switch) for each
section.
Available/ DC Indication Supply Available.
6.1.3 Outgoing Feeders & Accessories:
1. Two busbar 1 & 2 each with required number of TP&N MCCBs of suitable ratings, with
necessary phase splitter boxes, bolt links, outgoing terminals and cable clamps, etc. shall
be provided.
2. All outgoing loads shall be distributed equally on the three bus bars to the extent
possible. All outgoing feeders with MCCBs of sufficient numbers to supply all the loads of
the substation shall be provided.
3. The necessary number of sub-distribution boards shall be installed.
6.2 Essential Switchgear Panel
6.2.1 Two Incomers from Non-Essential panel & One DG Incomer circuits, each
comprising
1. 4 pole, air break, 1000A, 40kA, stored energy, 110VDC motor operated, withdraw able,
rack mounted, PLC/mechanical Push Buttons operated ACB complete with set of CB’s
auxiliary contacts.
2. MFM shall be provided
3. Lamp test push button
4. Electrical interlocking
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 8

6. Semaphore for ACB, Heater ON/OFF Switch, trip isolation links, etc
7. Multifunction meter (or voltmeter scaled 0 - 500V with a selector switch).
Available/ DC Indication Supply Available. Multi characteristic over-current and earth
fault relay, electrically reset trip relay, trip circuit and protection supply supervision relays
and with time delayed under-voltage relays.
9. Multi characteristic over-current and earth fault relay, restricted earth fault relay,
electrically reset trip relay, trip circuit and protection supply supervision relays and with
time delayed under-voltage relays.
10. One set of 3 phase (R,Y,B) and One set of 3 phase +neutral (R,Y,B,N) CTs for each
incomer feeders.
 1000/1A Class 0.5FS CTs for multifunction meter (R,Y,B).
 1000/1A, Class 5P20 CTs for over current & earth fault protection (R,Y,B,N)
6.2.2 Outgoing Feeders & Accessories:
1. The required number of TP&N MCCBs of suitable ratings, with necessary phase splitter
boxes, bolt links, outgoing terminals and cable clamps, etc. shall be provided.
2. All outgoing feeders with MCCBs of sufficient numbers to supply all the loads of the
substation shall be provided.
3. The necessary number of sub-distribution boards shall be installed.
6.3 Heating & Lighting DB Panel:
Heating & Lighting DB panel in the LVAC room shall be provided and shall be supplied from the
LVAC Panel.
The necessary number of sub-distribution boards shall be installed.
7 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE
8. CODES AND STANDARDS
IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60715 Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear
ISO 9001 Quality systems – Model for Quality Assurance in design, development,
production, installation and servicing.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 9
9. COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS
The LVAC and distribution panels will be used to supply the substations service loads.
In general, GCCIA requires the four incomers from Reactor 1, Reactor 2 and 33kV/13.8kV
or 11kV feeder from the electricity companies in Oman and UAE along with backup
emergency DG set incomer.
Therefore, the 33kV power supply to the 33kV switchgear from utility/electricity companies for
emergency conditions is considered in this section. LVAC system consists of Main Non-Essential
panel, Essential panel, Sub Distribution boards and Heating & Lighting Distribution boards.
The station service transformer SST-1 feeds Bus-1 loads and SST-2 feeds Bus-2 loads and bus
section will open at normal condition. In any case of failure of an incoming supply, the supply will
be restored by closing tie breaker (Bus coupler). An electrical interlock shall be provided between
the breakers and shall not possible to parallel two transformers in in both auto and manual mode.
In case of failure of both station service transformer, the DG set need to start automatically and
feed to the essential loads.
LV switchgear shall be rated to feed 100% of the entire load including the planned extension of
the Substation at the final stage.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper operation of the equipment under the specific
environmental conditions of the various sites such as altitude, temperature, humidity, etc.
The Contractor shall size the SST/Auxiliary transformer & LVAC panel rating according the total
loads installed in station including the planned extension and submit the relevant details for
Engineer's approval. The listed rating are minimum requirements which shall be correlated with
project specific requirements.
9.1 LV AC Switchgear Panel
The main function of automatic transfer system is to maintain a constant supply to the ac
distribution panel of the substation by below supply sources, which are:
 Non-Essential Switchgear Panel: Substation service transformers SST fed from the
autotransformer’s tertiary windings or shunt reactors auxiliary winding and power station
medium voltage station service switchgear.
 Essential Switchgear Panel: Two Incomers from Non-Essential panel & Emergency power
from a 400/230 V, 4 W diesel motor generator DG set.
The LVAC panel is mainly composed of incoming feeders circuit breakers and tie-breaker,
common bus bar connected directly to the adjacent ac distribution panel by means of cable (or
bus extension with wall bushings as per Technical Data Schedules) and the associated
protective, automation and control equipment. The LVAC panel shall be freestanding of metal
clad construction where separate compartments are required for:
 Each Air circuit breaker

 Primary busbars,
 Each feeder incoming cable
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 10
 Automation and control

 Outgoing feeder compartment
 Cable compartment
The neutral bus shall be insulated from the ground for direct connection to the neutral bushing
of the SST or emergency diesel generator. The neutral bus shall then be grounded at a single
point in the panel to locate the bus ground protection current sensor.
The ground protection relays shall be properly coordinated to discriminate between a ground
fault on the incoming feeder side and a fault downstream on the common bus or ac distributions
panel side. A fault on the incoming feeder shall initiate a transfer on a healthy feeder and a
lockout on the corresponding feeder breaker. A fault downstream from the feeder breaker shall
produce a trip on the active feeder.
The control and automation circuits shall be based on a programmable logic controller with the
associated auxiliary relays and dc to dc supply converters. The various circuits of the transfer
panels shall be fed from the 110V DC distribution panel to insure functional autonomy during an
outage.
The various features of the transfer control circuits are listed in the Technical Data Schedules.
Essentially, the transfer panel shall maintain a constant power supply to the ac distribution
panel by selecting one of the "live" main, backup feeder or start the emergency diesel motor
generator set feeder for restoring power.
The transfer shall be performed automatically or manually. Selection of manual or automatic

operation shall be performed locally or remotely. Local control shall produce an alarm.
The transfer panel shall initiate the motor generator set start and shutdown (on return of main or
backup feeder) when there is no active SST feeder available or for periodic exercising. The
transfer panel shall interface the generator set control panel to perform these functions, to verify
the availability of the motor generator set (no outstanding alarm) and to trip upon generator
fault. Exercising of generator set shall be periodic and no-load to the generator set for a certain
period. The details relating to periodic exercising will be coordinated by the Engineer at time of
submittal of drawings for the Engineer's review.
9.2 Sub Distribution Panel
The Sub distribution panel 415/240 VAC shall come with four insulated busses for three phases
and neutral.
The distribution panel incoming main circuit breaker will be connected to the LVAC panel. The
panel includes essentially the incoming molded case main circuit breaker, the feeders three
poles moulded case circuit breakers, the instruments, and the accessories as detailed in the
When this specification is used for construction contracts, the number of moulded circuit
breakers for distribution feeders indicated in the Technical Data Schedule is considered as the
minimum. The Contractor shall supply the number required to suit the needs of the substation.
Terminals shall be separated from busbar, according IEC 60439-1 and Technical Data
Schedules.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 11
Separate sub-distribution boards for non-essential, essential panels and heating & lighting
distribution boards shall be considered in the Control and 400kV Switchgear building.
9.3 Panels Manufacturing
9.3.1 Cabinet
Panels shall be free standing cabinet type. The panels' interior shall be accessed by a front
door. Removable plate shall be available for cable entrance and to access the cable
compartment of the transfer panel. The panels will be located over a floor cable trench or
raised floor to allow for cable entrance with access from the front or the back.
The panels must be manufactured with cold-laminated steel of 2mm minimum thickness and a
frame of welded steel profiles.
The Contractor must include expansion-type floor anchoring screws. The panels must be
provided with installation stringer over the three lateral internal sides of the panel for the
installation of components and devices (applicable to control compartment of transfer panel).
The panel door must be lockable, the key must be extracted in both locked and unlocked
position (two sets of keys shall be supplied).
9.3.2 Components Installation
All equipment installed in the panel shall be easily accessible and within convenient reach and
visibility of an average person. No device or wiring shall impede the removal of another device.
All equipment mounted on/or in panels, shall be clearly identified by labels and nameplates.
Withdrawable devices, like protection and auxiliary relays, shall carry identification on both base
and withdrawable element. Equipment mounted on/or inside the panels shall be mounted on
stringer and shall not be mounted directly on the panel sides.
In general, protection relays, molded case circuit breakers, test switches, mimic accessories,
measuring instruments, lamps and annunciators must be manufactured for flush installation on
front side of panel.
Terminal blocks, fuses, transducers and auxiliary relays, etc. shall be installed on two lateral
walls, inside of panel.
9.3.3 Nameplates and Mimic Diagram
Each cubicle and component shall be identified with a traffolyte material or white laminated
plastic plate, with letters engraved in black colour. A stainless-steel rating plate for panel
identification will be installed on the panel.
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s acceptance samples of mimic colours at the time
of the presentation of the panels outline drawings.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 12
9.3.4 Wiring
The control and protective wiring must be insulated with fluoropolymer fireproof 600/1000 V
insulation material. The minimum wire size acceptable is 2.5 mm 2 for the wiring, except for
alarm signals and other specialized instruments.
The cables associated with the power circuit shall be of size corresponding to the rated current
of the feeder and the short circuit current withstand ability. The power cable insulation shall be
of PVC flame retardant type.
The wires shall be the following colours:
 Current circuit (CT) - Red, Yellow, Blue & Black

 Voltage circuit (VT) - Red, Yellow, Blue & Black
 Control and power circuit, Gray
 Grounding yellow.
All wires shall be of 19 strands copper (minimum) type.
The Contractor shall install terminal blocks for:
 Power supply;
 External incoming cables
 Interface cables
The terminal blocks of Entrelec / Weidmuller type or equivalent shall be installed on
asymmetrical rails type Entrelec / Weidmuller or equivalent.
The terminal block arrangement and identification shall be in strict accordance with the
drawings included in this specification (see appendix).
The Contractor shall provide 20% of spare terminals for customer’s use.
The entrance of cables shall be from the bottom of the panel by means of cable glands.
9.3.5 Grounding
A grounding bus of 50 mm x 6 mm shall be installed at the bottom of the panel. The grounding
bus must be provided with screw type terminals for grounding of devices and components.
All earth connections shall be made via bolted, identified earth links, which can be unbolted to
permit routine testing.
The grounding bus shall come with connectors for conductor 4/0 AWG Cu for internal earthing
of components.
9.3.6 Lighting, Outlets and Heater
Each panel shall be provided with a convenient door-switched fluorescent lamp, a double 230
VAC single-phase outlet, and a thermostat-controlled heater and a telephone outlet.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 13
9.4 Documents to be furnished by the Contractor
9.4.1 Submittals and Time Schedule
The Contractor shall furnish a set of detailed drawings, design briefs, instructions and technical
documentation concerning the panels and its components. These documents shall include the
following:
 Single line diagrams

 Outline dimensions drawings with front, rear and internal views. All drawings must show
and clearly identify all components from the list of materials. The drawings must show
anchoring details, cable entrances, construction details, etc.
 Three-line ac and schematic control, protection, alarm dc diagrams. The schematic
diagram must show internal circuits of relays, switches, terminals and wire number
identification.
 LVAC components Details.
 Logic or ladder diagrams of controller programmed functions.
 Protective devices operation curves.
 PLC database listing, if applicable.
 Listing of PLC programming in digital file format, if applicable.
 Typical drawing will not be accepted.
 Detailed drawings of panel wiring and interconnection wiring drawings between panels.
The terminal block drawing for external connection must show the function associated to
the terminals.
 Detailed technical documentation of all components and detailed list of materials for each
panel.
 Factory test reports.
- Instruction manual for installation, commissioning operation and maintenance with a
complete list of spare parts.
As an exception to the General Technical Requirements, the documents described in the

previous paragraphs must be submitted to the Engineer for review according to the following
schedule:
 Outline drawings and bill of material within one month following the award of the Contract.
 The remaining documents within six weeks following the date that the Engineer has
returned the preceding.
 The delivery is conditioned by the acceptance of above documents.
 Factory test reports: within one month prior to material delivery.
9.4.2 Special Requirements for Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagrams shall be prepared according to the following prescriptions:

016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 14
 Each component and device must be identified with the alphanumerically code, used in
the corresponding schematic (dc and ac) diagrams.
 All components shall be identified with panel cubicle number.
 The drawing must show all terminals of the devices or components.
 The wire must be identified at the connection point by the remote address. The wires
must be identified as follow:
- The number of the unit corresponding to the location of the device to which the
remote end of wire is connected. The panel is separated in numbered units;
- Followed by device or component code to which is connected the other extremity
of the wire (ex. 50 BF);
- Followed by the terminal number of the device or component (ex. 24-50BF-1).
- The numbering of the terminal shall be increasing from top to bottom.
- Each terminal block shall be identified with suitable group mark name.
 The drawing shall show each terminal block at its physical location and connection of
incoming cables from apparatus control and distribution panels.
 All devices and components shall be shown on wiring diagram as per physical layout.
10. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility of the Contractor ensure
the coordination of the engineering and of the procurement, in order to guarantee compatibility
and completeness of the overall installation:
a. Expansion type bolts for concrete anchoring (HILTI Wej-it or equivalent);

b. The terminal blocks;
c. Digital interface ports;
d. Digital programmable devices software; and
e. The terminals for power cables and grounding conductors.
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Volume 1, Section 6: Schedule
of Prices.
016403-2000-47ES-4300 01 July 2024 15
11. SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION
In order to demonstrate functionality, the Contractor must at the factory the complete panels in
accordance with this specification and applicable standards. The test program shall be
submitted for Engineer's review and acceptance prior to testing. The program shall include all
necessary tests to prove compliance of the equipment with this specification.
The factory test shall include:
a. Visual inspection
b. operation and mechanical check
c. continuity test of all circuits;
d. insulation test of all wiring, devices and components;
e. dielectric check for primary and control circuits
f. polarity test of instrument transformers;
g. setting verification of protection relays, instruments and transducers;
h. relays tests by secondary injection; and
i. functionality test of all control circuits and automation with simulation of external circuits
and equipment.
During the design and assembling period, the manufacturer shall establish a quality control
program, with the infrastructure and the required documentation, in conformity with ISO 9001.
The Contractor shall submit a complete test report.
The Engineer reserves the right to witness the test.
12. REFERENCE DRAWINGS
Drawing title Drawing number

Single-line diagram – Substation auxiliary services ODL-31800-EPE-EDSS-ELE-0007
(Refer Volume IV of Bid documents)
GCCIA
DC SYSTEM AND UPS
016403-2000-47ES-4400 Rev.01
July 2024
DC SYSTEM AND UPS # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
I. 110V DC SYSTEM 1
1.1 General 1
1.2 110V System Arrangement 1
2. BATTERY BANK 1
2.1 Battery Switch Fuse Unit 2
2.2 Battery Mounting & Connection 3
2.3 Battery Maintenance Accessories 3
3. BATTERY CHARGERS 3
4. DC BUSCOUPLER PANEL 4
5. 110V DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 5
6. ALARMS AND INDICATIONS 6
7. TYPE AND ROUTINE TEST 6
8. TEST AT SITE 6
9. BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM 6
II. 48V DC SYSTEM 8
1.1 General 8
1.2 48V System Arrangement 8
2. BATTERY 8
2.1 Battery Switch Fuse Unit 9
2.2 Battery Mounting & Connection 9
2.3 Battery Maintenance Accessories 9
3. BATTERY CHARGERS 10
4. DC BUSCOUPLER PANEL 11
5. 48V DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 11
6. BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM 12
7. ALARMS AND INDICATIONS 13
8. TYPE AND ROUTINE TEST 13
9. TEST AT SITE 13
III. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM 14
1 General 14
2 System Description 14
3 Mode of Operation 15
4 ALARMS AND INDICATIONS 15
5 ROUTINE, TYPE AND FUNCTIONAL TESTS 16
IV. SUB DISTRIBUTION PANEL, 110 V DC AND 48V DC 16
1 General 16
V. TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES 17
VII. CODES AND STANDARDS 17
VIII. COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS 18

1.1 Nickel - Cadmium Batteries 18
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 ii
1.2 General 18
1.2.1 Battery Room 18
1.3 Additional prescriptions 19
1.4 Battery Charger 19
1.4.1 General 19
1.4.2 Additional Prescriptions 20
1.4.3 Wiring 21
IX. SCOPE OF SUPPLY 22
X. SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION 22
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 1
I. 110V DC SYSTEM
1.1 General
This document outlines the specific Technical Requirements for design, manufacturing, supply,
install, test and commission DC systems and Uninterrupted Power Supply system (UPS) in the
substations being constructed as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by
the Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA).
It is envisaged that 110V DC system will supply for protection, controls and for operation of
mechanisms of HV/MV/LV equipment, 48V DC system is envisaged to supply telecommunication
systems equipment and the UPS system shall supply 230V, 50Hz voltage for emergency
lighting, SCS/DCS system, HVAC & Fire Protection system controls in addition to CCTV.
1.2 110V System Arrangement
The required battery banks and chargers/voltage control units/distribution systems shall be
designed and organized in dual configurations (two systems), comprising:
 Four (4) numbers battery chargers (two chargers operated in parallel for each Battery
bank) and each charger shall be capable to supply 100% station loads,
 Two (2) numbers battery banks (one for each system),
 Two (2) numbers Distribution boards for distributing DC source to various loads,
 Two (2) numbers Voltage control unit (dropper diodes) for each system,
 One (1) bus-coupler panel,
 Two (2) numbers metal clad Battery switch fuse units located in battery room.
2. BATTERY BANK
Bidder/Contractor shall determine the 100% duty battery capacity to serve the station loads,
however during engineering the ampere hour capacity of batteries shall be calculated based on
standing load, spare capacity, ageing factor and temperature derating factors and eight-hour
discharge rate in line with IEEE 1115 recommendations as below:
 Standing Load: Standing load shall be calculated based on maximum load imposed by all
equipment and shall be determined considering all the equipment being supplied at
present and estimated loads in future extension of the station
 Design Margin shall be considered as 25%.
 Ageing factor shall be considered as 25%. Temperature correction factor: shall be

considered as per recommendation of battery manufacturer (Minimum temperature of
20˚C and maximum temperature of 50˚C shall be considered).
 Intermittent Load, Random load

016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 2
Each system shall be rated to feed 100% of the entire DC load including the expected loads in
planned future extension of the Substation.
For the battery design of the 110V DC system, reference is made to the tripping features. Each
battery charger, and battery bank shall at least be capable of delivering the entire load for 8
hours and at end of 8 hours shall be able to meet the requirements imposed by following
intermittent loads.
Ampere-hour capacity for the specified discharge rate should be calculated on the basis of the
following additional intermittent loading. Following sequence shall be strictly followed for
intermittent load cycle calculation as per the battery sizing work sheets of IEEE Standard 1115.
 First tripping operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery.
Wherever bus bar protection is provided, it shall be assumed that all circuit breakers in all
bus bar protection zones trip simultaneously. (For the tripping operation on 400kV / 33kV
bus bar protection, simultaneous tripping of one zone with highest number of feeders only
needs to be considered for calculation).
 First subsequent closing operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by
the battery.
 Second tripping operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery.
Wherever bus bar protection is provided, it shall be assumed that all circuit breakers in all
bus bar protection zones trip simultaneously. (For the tripping operation on 400kV / 33kV
bus bar protection, simultaneous tripping of one zone with highest number of feeders only
needs to be considered for calculation).
 Second subsequent closing operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by
the battery.
 Tripping of all OHL feeders (including future) and subsequent restoration (where specified
auto-re closing and / or bus bar changeover for all feeder isolators whichever is the
maximum load).
 Charging of D.C motor wound circuit breaker closing springs (where applicable) to enable
the closing operations to be carried out.
The battery cells shall be of Medium or High rate of discharge (M or H) type.
2.1 Battery Switch Fuse Unit
Fused switch disconnectors together with auxiliary alarm contacts for remote supervision shall
be supplied and mounted close to the battery. Fuses shall be HRC type and the rating of the
battery fuses shall at least be twice the rating of the largest DC miniature circuit breaker used in
the distribution circuits and shall be so sized that they do not fail through fatigue brought on by
normal charge/discharge conditions. The arrangement of the fused switch disconnectors shall
be in such a manner to enable disconnection of the battery without interrupting the supply from
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 3
the charger to the load and also to enable disconnection of the charger output without
interrupting the supply from the battery to the load through the voltage control unit (VCU).
It shall be possible to monitor the operation of the fused switch disconnector when
disconnecting the battery from the system either for maintenance or due to faults.
Warning labels shall be fitted on the SFUs to warn personnel of the danger of removing or
replacing a fuse whilst the load is connected and that fuses should not be removed immediately
following boost charge due to the possible ignition of hydrogen gas. Arrangements shall be
made to provide status indication for the battery isolator and battery fuse.
2.2 Battery Mounting & Connection
Battery Cells shall be placed on suitable corrosion/alkaline resistant, and insulated racks/stands
made of powder coated steel or stainless steel.
The cells shall be so arranged that each cell is readily accessible for inspection and
maintenance, and it shall be possible to remove any one-cell/cell block without disturbing the
remaining cells/cell blocks.
Connections between tiers/between end cells shall be by PVC insulated cables arranged on
suitable racking or supports.
Bolts, nuts and connectors etc. shall be effectively lead-coated to prevent corrosion.
2.3 Battery Maintenance Accessories
Each battery bank shall be provided with the following mandatory accessories to facilitate
periodic inspection and maintenance:
 Cell testing equipment
 Syringe hydrometers of suitable scale.
 Plastic filler bottle for distilled water.
 Cell bridging connector.
 Instruction card and record chart.
 Pairs of rubber hand gloves
 Safety goggles
3. BATTERY CHARGERS
Separate identical 100% duty chargers (two chargers) having boost & float facilities shall be
offered for each battery bank. The chargers shall be interlocked in a way that only one battery
bank may be boost charged at any given time. Each charger unit shall be suitable for supplying
the initial charging requirements, boost charging the battery subsequent to an emergency
discharge and supplying the maximum load whilst on float.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 4
Each charger shall be housed in a separate cubicle, which shall at least be of Protection Class
IP 51. The equipment shall satisfy the requirements of corrosion protection as per standard.
The chargers shall be provided with natural ventilation.
The rating of the charger on float/boost charge mode shall be equal to the standing DC load
including 25% as design margin plus the battery charging current numerically equivalent to 0.2
x C5 A.
Chargers shall be designed for operation from three-phase ac supply drawn from station LV
board with a nominal voltage of 400V, 50Hz. Chargers of high efficiency, short control response
time, low output ripple without battery connected shall be provided.
Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically for all dc loads between 0 and 100%
irrespective of variations in the voltage of the ac supply within the specified limits, frequency
variation of 49.5 to 50.5 Hz and Voltage variation of ±10%. Allowed tolerances of the output
voltages between the ±10% of the rated voltage.
Cubicle sizes, dimensions, color shade and accesses shall be coordinated with DC distribution
panels as all these will be installed in the same room.
The chargers shall be designed with following requirements
 The ambient temperature 50˚C.
 Possibility to adjust and set the charger output voltage and current limit values separately
for each operating mode of the charger.
 Automatically switch into the boost charging mode when the battery has discharged above
a preset value. A battery charge/discharge ampere-hour sensing device shall be provided
to control the boost mode on/off switching as well as the boost charging time.
 Alarms grouped and connected to the alarm fascia locally and to the station annunciator /
remote control panel & to SCADA system
 Operating characteristics in accordance with DIN 41772/DIN 41773 or equivalent.
 Load sharing and current limiting circuits built-in each module.
 Soft start features.
4. DC BUSCOUPLER PANEL
The automatic changeover scheme shall be adopted in DC system. Under normal operating
conditions, separate in feed to DCDB1 and DCDB2 and the bus coupler is open. In the event of
under voltage at one DC Distribution Board or One battery in feed off (other than battery fuse
failure) an automatic changeover to healthy DCDB by closing the DC bus coupler.
Separately derived supply and controls shall be incorporated in bus coupler panel (separate
cubicle) shall be provided.
The bus coupler panel shall be located adjacent to the main DCDB of each system.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 5
The bus coupler shall be closed before the respective incomer opens. Restoration is permitted
only in the manual mode.
5. 110V DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
DCDB shall be of the cubicle type complying with the general requirements for cubicle type
control panels. No equipment/devices associated with the chargers shall be installed in the
distribution board.
The panel shall be provided with a voltmeter and ammeter of the range 0 to 150%, for both
incoming circuit and load bus side.
Distribution boards shall incorporate double pole MCBs suitable for DC application for each of
the outgoing DC circuits and same shall comply with BS EN 60947-2. The MCBs in the DC
Distribution board shall be of suitable rating to ensure that the full load is supplied without trip
actuation of the MCB. The MCBs and the DC cables shall all be suitably rated for the design
fault duty of DC system.
Tripping curve 'C’ or K may be selected for MCB in DCDB, however tripping characteristics of
MCBs provided in the DC Distribution board shall be selected based on the load application for
each circuit and same is subject to the approval of Engineer.
The bus bars, cables, MCBs and isolators shall be rated for calculated load plus expected
future loads. Cables and MCBs shall be sized as per BS 7671, IEE Wiring Regulations latest
Edition.
All feeder cables shall be sized with a permissible voltage drop not exceeding 3% and for
battery bank cables permissible voltage drop shall be less than 2%.
Number of feeders connected to each DCDB shall be decided during engineering stage. 25%
Spare MCBs of each rating over and above the connected feeders shall be provided on each
DCDB.
Double-pole motorized switch disconnectors shall be provided for the incoming DC supply from
the chargers and for bus coupler.
DCDB Bus bars, incoming Cables and bus coupler terminals shall be completely covered with
insulation to prevent flashover during faults in DCDB.
Color coded (Red positive and Black negative) insulated sleeves shall be provided on all the
DC cable terminations
Armored cables shall be used where they are prone to mechanical damage. Rubber insulated
fine strand cables may be used for battery cables in the battery room. The type and rating of the
cables shall be approved by Engineer/Authority before ordering of materials.
Earth fault detection, indication and alarm circuitry shall be provided. Earth fault in one system
shall not reflect in other system. Accordingly, bus coupler control supply scheme also shall be
designed.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 6
Earth Leakage Monitor shall be incorporated in Distribution switchboards or sub distribution

boards for the following critical feeders (protection, SCS/DCS supplies etc.) individually. LED
indications and test button facility shall be provided.
6. ALARMS AND INDICATIONS
Each charger and DCDB shall have facilities for display of the indications and alarms with
proper mimic diagrams.
The alarms shall be grouped in the respective panel’s fascia and shall be extended to station
annunciator panel and to the SCS/DCS systems, exact requirements shall be finalized during
engineering stage.
7. TYPE AND ROUTINE TEST
Type test reports in compliance with IEC/IEEE standards shall be submitted for review &
approval by Engineer/ Authority. Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC/IEEE
on all battery banks, chargers and DCDBs prior to delivery of equipment.
8. TEST AT SITE
All tests shall be carried out at site in accordance with IEC on all battery banks, chargers and
DCDB. In general, the following tests/checks shall be made as part of site tests, however same
shall be agreed with Engineer /Authority during installation stage.
 Battery bank initial charging

 Battery bank capacity Test
 Battery bank re-charging
 110V& 48V Chargers Testing
 DC Chargers & Bus coupler scheme test
 DCDCB outgoing Cable checks
Any other tests found necessary by Engineer/Authority during commissioning shall be carried out
without any contractual implications.
9. BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
A Battery Monitoring System (BMS) shall be installed for each of the battery bank of the Control
& Protection 110VDC System Based on IEEE-P1491 recommendations, the BMS shall be
capable of monitoring the following;
 Resistance: Internal Ohmic value measurement capable of detecting a high impedance

and very low impedance cells.
 Voltage: Monitoring of Float voltage, Equalize/Boost voltage, individual cell voltage, open
circuit voltage and String voltage.
 Current: Monitoring of Float charge, Boost charge, String Current and Discharge
Currents.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 7
 Temperature: Monitoring of Cell temperature and ambient temperature inside the battery
room.
 Cycles: Monitoring of the number of discharge cycle, the depth-of Discharge for each
cycle.
The BMS shall be able to perform all above measurements/test automatically (without any
human intervention). All data/records gathered shall be automatically stored, with a time-stamp,
in a non-volatile storage device for trouble shooting and for future reference. It shall be capable
of different level of access for different level of security clearance.
The system shall not discharge, stress the batteries or cause an internal chemical reaction in
any form during the measurement cycle.
Measurement shall be displayed as they are made. Battery conditions shall be viewed in real
time in a graphical format for individual impedance, individual unit volts, total volts and
individual unit temperature and current. The system shall function as a data logger. The system
shall be able to trend daily or weekly parameters readings in the software. Actual measured
baselines for each cell shall be used for trend analysis. The system shall be capable of
reporting and analysing measured parameters data.
The BMS shall record the following:
 Individual Cell resistance

 Individual Cell voltage
 Individual Cell temperature
 Battery room Ambient temperature
 Battery bank voltage & Current
 Ripple current
Alarm shall be provided in case of BMS failures; this alarm shall have a local indication and
shall be grouped with the battery failure alarm.
The BMS shall have a communication interface such as TCP/IP or any other similar interface.
An industrial/substation type computer shall be provided along with the BMS. The computer
should meet the BMS Software and hardware minimum requirement. It shall not have any
moving parts (like fans) and shall utilize a solid state drive for storage. A USB port accessible
from the front panel shall also be included. It should be powered by 120/230VAC and 48-
125VDC without any external inverter.
Auxiliary supply of BMS shall be supplied through the battery charger.
Both the computer and the BMS main module shall be installed in an enclosed free standing
metallic panel (similar to the charger panel but with transparent front door) inside the battery
charger room.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 8
II. 48V DC SYSTEM

1.1 General
The DC power supply shall be provided mainly for telecommunication equipment in the
substation.
The nominal D.C. system voltage shall be 48V and the voltage measured at the distribution
switchboard shall not vary +10% to -15% of the nominal voltage under all charging conditions
when operating in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
Grounding of positive is preferred, however same will be subject to manufacturer’s specific

requirement and design of telecom equipment/system.
1.2 48V System Arrangement
The required battery banks and chargers/voltage control units/distribution systems shall be
designed and organized in dual configurations (two systems), comprising:
 Two (2) numbers battery chargers (each charger operated in parallel with each Battery
bank), and each charger shall be capable to supply 100% station loads,
 Two (2) numbers battery banks (one for each system),
 Two (2) numbers Distribution boards for distributing DC source to various loads,
 Two (2) numbers Voltage control unit (dropper diodes) for each system,
 One (1) bus-coupler panel,
 Two (2) numbers metal clad Battery switch fuse units located in battery room.
2. BATTERY
Bidder/Contractor shall determine the 100% duty battery capacity to serve the station loads,
however during engineering the ampere hour capacity of batteries shall be calculated based on
standing load, spare capacity, ageing factor and temperature derating factors and eight-hour
discharge rate in line with IEEE 1115 recommendations as below:
 Standing Load: Standing load shall be calculated based on maximum load imposed by all
equipment and shall be determined considering all the equipment being supplied at
present and estimated loads in future extension of the station
 Design Margin shall be considered as 25%.
 Ageing factor shall be considered as 25%.
 Temperature correction factor: shall be considered as per recommendation of battery

manufacturer (Minimum temperature of 20˚C and maximum temperature of 50˚C shall be
considered)
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 9
The battery cells shall be of low rate of discharge (L) type.
2.1 Battery Switch Fuse Unit
Fused switch disconnectors together with auxiliary alarm contacts for remote supervision shall
be supplied and mounted close to the battery. Fuses shall be HRC type and the rating of the
battery fuses shall at least be twice the rating of the largest DC miniature circuit breaker used in
the distribution circuits and shall be so sized that they do not fail through fatigue brought on by
normal charge/discharge conditions. The arrangement of the fused switch disconnectors shall
be in such a manner to enable disconnection of the battery without interrupting the supply from
the charger to the load and also to enable disconnection of the charger output without
interrupting the supply from the battery to the load through the voltage control unit (VCU).
It shall be possible to monitor the operation of the fused switch disconnector when
disconnecting the battery from the system either for maintenance or due to faults.
Warning labels shall be fitted on the SFUs to warn personnel of the danger of removing or
replacing a fuse whilst the load is connected and that fuses should not be removed immediately
following boost charge due to the possible ignition of hydrogen gas. Arrangements shall be
made to provide status indication for the battery isolator and battery fuse.
2.2 Battery Mounting & Connection
Battery cells shall be placed on suitable corrosion/alkaline resistant, and insulated battery
racks/stands made of powder coated steel or stainless steel.
The cells shall be so arranged so that each cell is readily accessible for inspection and
maintenance, and it shall be possible to remove any one-cell/cell block without disturbing the
remaining cells/cell blocks.
Connections between tiers/between end cells shall be by PVC insulated cables arranged on
suitable racking or supports.
The bolts, the nuts, the connectors etc. shall be effectively lead-coated to prevent corrosion.
2.3 Battery Maintenance Accessories
 Each battery bank shall be provided with the following mandatory accessories to facilitate
periodic inspection and maintenance:
 Cell testing equipment
 Syringe hydrometers, of suitable scale.
 Plastic filler bottle for distilled water.
 Cell bridging connector.
 Instruction card and record chart.
 Pairs of rubber hand gloves
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 10
 Safety goggles
3. BATTERY CHARGERS
Separate identical 100% duty charger having boost & float facilities shall be offered for each
battery bank. The chargers shall be interlocked in a way that only one battery may be boost
charged at any given time. Each charger unit shall be suitable for supplying the initial charging
requirements, boost charging the battery subsequent to an emergency discharge and supplying
the maximum load whilst on float.
Each charger shall each be housed in a separate cubicle, which shall at least be of Protection
Class IP 51. The equipment shall satisfy the requirements of corrosion protection as as per
standard. The chargers shall be provided with natural ventilation.
The rating of the charger on float/boost charge mode shall be equal to the standing dc load
including 25% as design margin plus the battery charging current numerically equivalent to 0.2
x C5A.
Chargers shall be designed for operation from three-phase ac supply drawn from station LV
board with a nominal voltage of 400V, 50Hz. Chargers of high efficiency, short control response
time, low output ripple without battery connected shall be provided.
Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically for all dc loads between 0 and 100%
irrespective of variations in the voltage of the ac supply within the specified limits, frequency
variation of 49.5 to 50.5 Hz and Voltage variation of ±10%. Allowed tolerances of the output
voltages between the ±10% of the rated voltage.
Cubicle sizes, dimensions, color shade and accesses shall be coordinated with DC distribution
panels as all these will be installed in the same room.
The chargers shall be designed with following requirements:
 For ambient temperature of 50˚C

 Soft Start features
 Possibility to adjust and set the charger output voltage and current limit values separately
for each operating mode of the charger.
 Automatically switch into the boost charging mode when the battery has discharged above
a preset value. A battery charge/discharge ampere-hour sensing device shall be provided
to control the boost mode on/off switching as well as the boost charging time.
 Alarms grouped and connected to the alarm fascia locally and to the station annunciator/
remote control panel & SCADA
 Operating characteristics in accordance with DIN 41772/DIN 41773 or equivalent.
 Load sharing and current limiting circuits built-in each module.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 11
4. DC BUSCOUPLER PANEL
Separately derived supply and controls shall be incorporated in a separate cubicle (bus coupler
panel) shall be provided for the operation of DCDB bus coupler as per the below requirement.
The bus coupler panel shall be located adjacent to the main DCDB of each system.
Under normal operating conditions, separate in feed to DCDB1 and DCDB2 and the bus
coupler is open. In the event of under voltage at one DC Distribution Board or One battery in
feed off (other than battery fuse failure) an automatic changeover to healthy DCDB by closing
the DC bus coupler.
The bus coupler shall be closed before the respective incomer opens. Restoration is permitted
only in the manual mode.
5. 48V DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
DCDB shall be of the cubicle type complying with the general requirements for cubicle type
control panels. No equipment/devices associated with the chargers shall be installed in the
distribution board.
The panel shall be provided with a voltmeter and ammeter of the range 0 to 150%, for both
incoming circuit and load bus side.
Distribution boards shall incorporate double pole MCBs suitable for DC application for each of
the outgoing DC circuits and same shall comply with BS EN 60947-2. The MCBs in the DC
Distribution board shall be of suitable rating to ensure that the full load is supplied without trip
actuation of the MCB. The MCBs and the DC cables shall all be suitably rated for the design
fault duty of DC system.
Tripping curve 'C’ or K may be selected for MCB in DCDB, however tripping characteristics of
MCBs provided in the DC Distribution board shall be selected based on the load application for
each circuit and same is subject to the approval of Engineer.
The bus bars, cables, MCBs and isolators shall be rated for calculated load plus expected
future loads. Cables and MCBs shall be sized as per BS 7671, IEE Wiring Regulations latest
Edition.
All feeder cables shall be sized with a permissible voltage drop not exceeding 3% and for
battery bank cables permissible voltage drop shall be less than 2%.
Number of feeders connected to each DCDB shall be decided during engineering stage. 25%
Spare MCBs of each rating over and above the connected feeders shall be provided on each
DCDB.
Double-pole motorized switch disconnectors shall be provided for the incoming DC supply from
the chargers and for bus coupler.
DCDB Bus bars, incoming Cables and bus coupler terminals shall be completely covered with
insulation to prevent flashover during faults in DCDB.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 12
Color coded (Red positive and Black negative) insulated sleeves shall be provided on all the
DC cable terminations
Armored cables shall be used where they are prone to mechanical damage. Rubber insulated
fine strand cables may be used for battery cables in the battery room. Type & rating of the
cables shall be approved by Engineer/Authority before ordering of materials.
6. BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
A Battery Monitoring System (BMS) shall be installed for each of the battery bank of the Control
& Protection 110VDC System. Based on IEEE-P1491 recommendations, the BMS shall be
capable of monitoring the following;
 Resistance: Internal Ohmic value measurement capable of detecting a high impedance

and very low impedance cells.
 Voltage: Monitoring of Float voltage, Equalize/Boost voltage, individual cell voltage, open
circuit voltage and String voltage.
 Current: Monitoring of Float charge, Boost charge, String Current and Discharge
Currents.
 Temperature: Monitoring of Cell temperature and ambient temperature inside the battery
room.
 Cycles: Monitoring of the number of discharge cycle, the depth-of Discharge for each
cycle.
The BMS shall be able to perform all above measurements/test automatically (without any
human intervention). All data/records gathered shall be automatically stored, with a time-stamp,
in a non-volatile storage device for trouble shooting and for future reference. It shall be capable
of different level of access for different level of security clearance.
The system shall not discharge, stress the batteries or cause an internal chemical reaction in
any form during the measurement cycle.
Measurement shall be displayed as they are made. Battery conditions shall be viewed in real
time in a graphical format for individual impedance, individual unit volts, total volts and
individual unit temperature and current. The system shall function as a data logger. The system
shall be able to trend daily or weekly parameters readings in the software. Actual measured
baselines for each cell shall be used for trend analysis. The system shall be capable of
reporting and analysing measured parameters data.
The BMS shall record the following:
 Individual Cell resistance

 Individual Cell voltage
 Individual Cell temperature
 Battery room Ambient temperature
 Battery bank voltage & Current
 Ripple current
Alarm shall be provided in case of BMS failures; this alarm shall have a local indication and
shall be grouped with the battery failure alarm.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 13
The BMS shall have a communication interface such as TCP/IP or any other similar one.
An industrial/substation type computer shall be provided along with the BMS. The computer
should meet the BMS Software and hardware minimum requirement. It shall not have any
moving parts (like fans) and shall utilize a solid-state drive for storage. A USB port accessible
from the front panel shall also be included. It should be powered by 120/230VAC and 48-
125VDC without any external inverter.
Auxiliary supply of BMS shall be supplied through the battery charger.
Both the computer and the BMS main module shall be installed in an enclosed free standing
metallic panel (similar to the charger panel but with transparent front door) inside the battery
charger room.
7. ALARMS AND INDICATIONS
Each charger and DCDB shall have facilities for display of the indications and alarms with
The alarms shall be grouped in the respective panels fascia and shall be extended to station
annunciator panel and to the SCS/DCS systems, exact requirements shall be finalized during
engineering stage.
8. TYPE AND ROUTINE TEST
Type test reports in compliance with IEC/IEEE standards shall be submitted for review &
approval by Engineer/ Authority. Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC/IEEE
on all battery banks, chargers and DCDBs prior to delivery of equipment.
9. TEST AT SITE
All tests shall be carried out at site in accordance with IEC on all battery banks, chargers and
DCDB. In general, the following tests/checks shall be made as part of site tests, however same
shall be agreed with Engineer /Authority during installation stage.
 Battery bank initial charging

 Battery bank capacity Test
 Battery bank re-charging
 110V& 48V Chargers Testing
 DC Chargers & Bus coupler scheme test
 DCDCB outgoing Cable checks
Any other tests found necessary by Engineer/Authority during commissioning shall be carried out
without any contractual implications.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 14
III. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM

1 General
The 230V UPS system shall be of Dual, Redundant, Modular, Parallel with changeover units-
based system sharing the loads as necessary for the reliable operation under all intended
operating conditions.
The UPS system shall consist of solid-state inverter(s), static transfer switch(es), manual
bypass switch(es), self-contained independent controls, instruments, annunciators. The UPS
shall provide regulated A.C. power to critical loads (from unregulated A.C. power source) under
both normal and abnormal conditions, including loss of the A.C. power. DC supplies from
battery banks will be the DC input to the Inverter module.
The design criteria for the battery bank are as detailed in relevant clauses under 110V DC
system. Contractor shall determine the 100% duty battery capacity to serve the loads. However,
during the detailed engineering stage, the ampere-hour capacity of batteries shall be calculated
based on standing load, spare capacity, ageing factor, temperature derating factors and eight-
hour discharge rate, following the guidelines set forth in IEEE 1115.
The inverter shall convert the DC power to sinusoidal A.C. power which shall be supplied to the
critical load(s). Inverter shall be the preferred source of supply and on failure of normal A.C.
power, input power for the inverters shall be automatically supplied from DC supply up to the
specified maximum time or until restoration of the normal supply. In case DC power is
exhausted to specified limit before normal A.C. power returns the inverter shall shutdown
automatically.
Rated input voltage shall be 110V DC (+/-15%) & 230V 50 Hz AC (+/-10%). Allowed tolerances
in the output voltages are ±5 % of rated value & ±1% of rated frequency.
The Inverter system shall be of industrial grade and shall have EMI/RFI protections following
EN 50091 standards.
Each inverter should be rated to handle the entire AC load of SCS/DCS system, emergency
lights, HVAC control, fire system control, and CCTV, with an additional 25% spare capacity for
future expansion. The inverters will operate in parallel with a single battery bank via protective
fuse unit.
Contractor/bidder shall submit comprehensive calculations for Engineer/Authority approval for
the capacities considering the worst loading conditions as dictated at present and those
envisaged in future planned extensions.
2 System Description
System shall consist mainly of the following:
 2x100% rated Inverter
 2x Inverter Transformer
 2x Inverter Static Switches

016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 15
 2x Static bypass switches
 By pass Isolation transformer providing galvanic isolation from the input source
 Maintenance manual bypass switch
 AC distribution board,
 Battery Bank, etc.
3 Mode of Operation
The inverter unit’s supply shall be fed from AC system with two feeders from essential board.
Backup power will fed from separate battery bank through Charger/DCDBs. Additionally, one
AC feeders is also provided from Essential LVAC board for by-pass supply.
 The inverter system shall be able to provide supply to the load under the following
conditions:
 During normal operation, both inverters run in parallel synchronized with the AC bypass
supply and share the 50% of the total load. The inverter AC output shall be switched
through the electronic bypass static switch to the AC load. The electronic bypass static
switch shall continuously monitor the AC output of the inverter and shall be synchronized
to the main-by-pass supply frequency, so that an automatic Change over does not cause
an interruption to the load.
 In case of any inverter failure, the healthy inverter shall continue to feed the load and
shall continue to be synchronized to the bypass supply. The faulty inverter electronic
bypass switch shall be OFF.
 In the event of an overload, the electronic by-pass switch shall automatically transfer the
load to the mains by-pass supply without interruption. Upon disappearance of the
overload situation, the electronic by-pass switch shall automatically switch back the load
onto the inverter without interruption.
 In the event of a failure of inverter1 and Inverter 2, the load shall be automatically
switched to the by-pass using the electronic by-pass static switch. This transfer shall not
cause an interruption to Manual Maintenance By-pass shall be available to facilitate
maintenance and repair of the inverter system. Transfer using the manual by-pass
switch, shall not cause an interruption to the load.
4 ALARMS AND INDICATIONS
The inverter system shall have facilities to provide or display the indications and alarms with
As a minimum, indications for UPS On, UPS Off, Battery circuit breaker open/close, Alternate
source available, Static transfer switch in inverter position etc. shall be provided.
The alarms shall be grouped in the respective panels and shall be extended station annunciator
panel and to the SCS/DCS. Bidder/contractor shall finalize the proposed alarms during
engineering stage and same are subject to approval of Engineer/Authority.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 16
5 ROUTINE, TYPE AND FUNCTIONAL TESTS
5.1 Type tests:
Type tests shall be performed in accordance with IEC 60146, IEEE 472 and other relevant
standards as applicable on the similar UPS system and test reports shall be provided along with
proposal, if no type test reports are available the manufacturer shall perform type tests on a
unit of same design, rating or size planned to be supplied.
5.2 Routine tests:
The routine tests shall include all electronic, electrical and mechanical tests in accordance with
the appropriate Standards. But shall cover as a minimum the following listed tests
 Dielectric test
 Current limit test
 Static voltage deviation test (Voltage Regulation)
 Efficiency measurement
 Power factor measurement
 Ripple voltage measurement
 Surge withstand capability
 Checking the coordination of protective devices
5.3 Site Tests:
The manufacturer shall submit a list of all site tests envisaged and test procedures. The
manufacturer’s representative shall be available to supervise site tests after the UPS system
has been installed.
IV. SUB DISTRIBUTION PANEL, 110 V DC AND 48V DC

1 General
The Sub distribution panels of 110V and 48 V DC shall be with insulated dual busses.
Separate 110V Sub Distribution Board shall be provided for GIS & control buildings to serve the
loads in respective rooms. The panels shall essentially include moulded case main circuit
breakers for incomers, and moulded case circuit breakers for various feeders, instruments, under
voltage relay, bus voltage transducer and other accessories.
The number of moulded circuit breakers for distribution feeders indicated in the tender drawing
shall be considered as minimum. Contractor shall supply the numbers required to suit the full
needs of the substation along with 25% Spare MCBs of each rating, however, the number of
feeders connected to each board shall be decided during engineering stage.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 17
V. TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES

VI. CODES AND STANDARDS

IEEE 1115 Sizing Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications
IEC 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid
electrolytes - Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells
IEC 60146 Semiconductor converters - General requirements and line commutated

converters
IEC 60068 Environmental Testing
IEC 60255 Electrical Relays
IEC 60896 Stationary Lead-Acid Batteries
IEC 60947 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development,
Production, Installation and Servicing
ANSI/NEM PE 5 Utility type battery chargers
ANSI/IEEE 450 Practice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of

Vented Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications
EN 50091 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)

016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 18
VII. COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS

The chargers and batteries will be used to supply the dc service loads in substation
Each battery will be connected to the main dc distribution panel busses by means of molded
circuit breakers. The chargers will feed the dc distribution panel individually by means of molded
circuit breakers.
Each battery shall be protected by a set of fuses located as close as possible to the overall
battery terminals to avoid damaging of the battery in the event of a fault in the cable. The fuses
shall be properly coordinated with the downstream circuit breakers.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper operation of the equipment under the specific
environmental conditions of the various sites, such as altitude, temperatures, humidity, etc., as
indicated in the General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000
1.1 Nickel - Cadmium Batteries
In addition to the requirements of the Technical Data Schedules, the following applies to both
110V and 48 VDC batteries:
1.2 General
The batteries shall be installed on a chassis, which allows easy access to all terminals.
The cell arrangement shall be such as to permit easy access to the cells for the inspection of the
electrolyte level, density measurement, sampling, voltage measurements and in general for
maintenance purposes.
The batteries shall be installed in temperature-controlled environment. The site indoor

temperature values, indicated in the General Technical Requirements, shall apply.
The batteries shall have 8-hour autonomy considering the worst operating scenario, which is total
blackout with various attempts to re-establish the interconnection and the service.
1.2.1 Battery Room
Safety signs such as Live electrical equipment, wear protective gear when working with battery
(safety glasses & gloves), no smoking or open flame near hydrogen gas, chemical hazards” etc.
shall be displayed inside and at each entrance of each battery room. Safety instructions
detailing the hazards for the works to be carried out shall be provided in the battery room.
Suitable floor and surface finishes shall be considered in the battery rooms.
Separate eye wash station with water splashing facility to be provided in each battery room.
Battery rooms shall be provided with properly secured wall-mounted thermometer.
Extract fans shall be provided for battery room for ventilation purpose, for specific requirements
technical specification for HVAC systems shall be referred.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 19
No equipment shall be located vertically above the batteries and, shall have a minimum horizontal
separation of one meter from the nearest cell. All equipment in the battery room shall be flame
proof as well as explosion proof.
1.3 Additional prescriptions
The terminals shall be secured to the top of the battery so as to avoid any torsion on the
battery plates during connection of conductors to the battery.
The terminals connection and jumpers shall have a current withstand and capacity so as
not to overheat and not exceed 0,02 volt drop per connection considering one minute
current discharge rate.
The terminal polarity must be clearly marked in a permanent manner. The marks must
be clearly visible at all times.
a. Each cell shall be numbered in increasing order.
b. Non-sealed type cells for electrolyte filling: the cover of cells shall permit the vapours to
escape freely and avoid splashes during charging cycle.
c. The design of the chassis shall provide adequate clearances between cell terminals.
The chassis shall be isolated from the batteries. An insulated acid proof cushion shall
be provided.
d. The Contractor shall include the following maintenance accessories with each battery
set: insulated tools for terminal connections, anti-corrosive grease, electrolyte,
thermometer, densimeter, voltmeter and protecting fuses.
e. Chassis grounding terminal to accommodate copper conductor as per earthing

specification.
f. Electrolyte level indicator on the container.
1.4 Battery Charger
In addition to the requirements of Technical Data Schedules, the following applies:
1.4.1 General
a. The cabinet shall be free standing, ventilated, of steel construction with front door. The
door shall be lockable. The keys must be extracted in both locked or unlocked position
(2 sets of keys).
b. The cabinet must be manufactured with cold laminated steel, of 2mm minimum
thickness, and with a frame of welded steel profile.
c. All equipment installed in the cabinet shall be easily accessible and within convenient
reach and visibility of the operator. No device or wiring shall impede the removal of
another device.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 20
d. All equipment mounted in the cabinet shall be clearly identified by labels or nameplates.
Removable devices shall carry identification on both base and removable element.
Equipment installed in the cabinet shall be mounted on stringer and not directly on
cabinet sides.
e. The chargers shall be interlocked so that only one battery may be boost charged any
time.
f. The cabinet shall come with expansion type anchoring bolts.

g. A copper grounding bus (50 x 6 mm) shall be provided at the bottom of the cabinet. The
bus shall come with grounding connectors suitable for connection of earthing conductor
prescribed in technical specification for Earthing and Lightning Protection systems &
Materials.
1.4.2 Additional Prescriptions
The following prescriptions are applicable:
The Contractor shall be responsible to determine the rating of the batteries and chargers (Adc) to
suit the needs of the substation.
a. The charger shall be capable to feed the total DC load and charge the batteries in
equalising mode.
b. Each individual charger shall come with two adjustable voltage outputs; namely, floating
and equalising levels.
c. Each individual charger shall come with a separate input and output moulded circuit
breaker for separate connection to the ac and dc distribution panels.
d. The maximum output current limiter shall be adjustable.
e. The automatic voltage level changeover shall occur when:
- The selector switch is in "auto" position
- The charger's output current equals the current limit for more than one minute at
which time the charger shall go to equalising mode.
- The equalising period exceeds the preset time limit at which time the charger shall
step-down to floating mode. This is also applicable when the equalising mode is
initiated manually.
- The periodic equalising timer activates the equalising mode.
f. A contact shall be provided to control the battery room fan during equalising mode.
g. The setting shall be performed by means of precise potentiometers or equivalent means
that can be locked in position.
h. The automatic transfer from main to backup charger shall occur when:
- The charger voltage output is out of normal regulating range, during one minute, by
more than 3% of preset voltage. When the charger current output it equal to the
preset limit while the voltage output is under 97% of preset voltage, no transfer
shall occur.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 21
- The periodic timer activates the transfer to exercise the backup charger and verify
its availability.
- Loss of AC supply of one charger.
- The transfer shall be blocked when one charger is faulty.
i. The charger capacity shall be sufficient to recharge the battery, to at least 80% of full
charge level within a maximum of 10 hours, while supplying the constant load to the dc
substation services.
j. Manual control shall always have priority over automatic control.
k. The rating of the chargers shall meet planned and future loads. The Bidder/Contractor
shall provide for Engineer’s approval, a comprehensive calculation for the batteries and
charger capacities considering the worst loading conditions. The contractor shall supply
chargers with sufficient capacity to suit the needs of the substation.
l. The contractor/manufacturer shall be responsible for the design, manufacture, factory

testing, packing, transport, unloading, storage, installation, site testing and
commissioning, submission of documents (i.e. drawings, manuals, test reports, etc.)
m. Complete functionality of the equipment / system shall be ensured. Accessories, tools

and services required to achieve the functionality to be provided, even if it is not
specifically mentioned in this specification.
1.4.3 Wiring
The wiring shall be fine stranded conductor type, insulated with fluoropolymer fireproof
insulation.
The minimum wire size acceptable is 2.5 mm2, for the wiring, except for alarm signals and other
special instruments.
The wires shall be of the following colors:
a. Control circuits: Gray

b. Grounding: yellow/green
All conductors shall have a minimum of 19 strands per conductor.
The terminal blocks shall be of Entrelec or Weidmuller make or equivalent and installed on
asymmetrical rails.
The Contractor shall provide 20% of free terminal blocks for customer's future use.
The terminal block arrangement and identification shall be strictly in accordance with general
technical requirements
The entry of cables shall be from bottom side of the cabinet by means of cable glands.
016403-2000-47ES-4400 01 July 2024 22
VIII. SCOPE OF SUPPLY

a. The supply shall include the following:
b. Terminals for power and ground cable connections
c. Terminal blocks for control cable connection
d. Anchor bolts
e. Chassis for battery installation
f. Specialized tools and maintenance devices for batteries
of Prices.
The Contractor shall complete and price the list of recommended spare parts and include in his
tender (Volume 1, Section 6, Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended
spare parts, as approved by the Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of
operation, under normal operating conditions.
IX. SHOP TESTING AND INSPECTION

The Contractor shall submit, for Engineer’s review, a test program developed to prove the
compliance of the equipment with specification that shall include the following (not limitative):
 Verification of technical characteristics and operation

 Continuity test of all circuits
 Dielectric test of all wiring, devices and components
 Polarity test of auxiliary transformers
 Protection devices and instruments setting verification
 Functionality test of all control circuits with simulation of external circuits and equipment
 Test to demonstrate the capacity, current and voltage discharge performance under site
environment conditions.
 Current withstand ability of battery connectors.
The Engineer reserves the right to witness all or part of the tests.
GCCIA

CONTROL, METERING AND PROTECTION
016403-3000-48ES-5100 Rev.01
July 2024
Control, Metering and Protection # Date Page
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GENERAL 1
4.1 General description 3

4.2 Control, Metering and Protection General Configuration 3
4.3 Control 4
4.3.1 Synchronism Check 4
4.3.1.1 Synchro check relays 5
4.3.1.2 System Synchronizers (Auto synchronizing Relays) 5
4.4 Metering 5
4.4.1 Revenue Metering Configuration 5
4.4.2 Meters and Instrumentation 6
4.4.3 Statistical Metering Configuration 7
4.5 Protection 7
4.5.1 Protection Configuration 7
4.5.1.1 Panels and Relays 7
4.5.1.2 Fiber Optic Teleprotection Units 8
4.5.2 Protection - General Requirements 8
4.5.2.1 Objective Fault Clearing Times 9
4.5.2.2 General HV Protection Requirements 10
4.5.2.3 Division of the Protection: 12
4.5.3 EHV Transmission Line Protection 13
4.5.3.1 General 13
4.5.3.2 Group A Protection 14
4.5.3.3 Main group B Optic Fibre Differential Protection 15
4.5.3.4 High Speed Tripping 16
4.5.3.5 Single Pole Auto Reclose Facilities 16
4.5.3.6 Three Pole Auto Reclose 17
4.5.3.7 Protection Signaling Facilities 18
4.5.3.8 Fault Recording and Sequence of Events Logging 18
4.5.3.9 Power Quality Meters 21
4.5.4 Line Application 23
4.5.4.1 EHV Aerial Lines 23
4.5.4.2 EHV Submarine Lines 23
4.5.5 Autotransformer Protection (Not Applicable for this contract) 24
4.5.5.1 High Impedance Differential Protection - Group A or B, Option 1 24
4.5.5.2 Overall Biased Differential Protection - Group B or A, Option 2 24
4.5.5.3 Fast Gas and Winding Temperature Protection - Group B 24
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 ii
4.5.5.4 Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection - Group B 25

4.5.5.5 Secondary Transformer Side Bus Protection 25
4.5.5.6 Tertiary Connection Protections - Group A 25
4.5.6 Shunt Reactor Protection 25
4.5.6.1 Differential Protection - Group A 25
4.5.6.2 Differential Protection - Group B 26
4.5.6.3 Overcurrent and Earth Fault - Group B 26
4.5.6.4 Fast Gas and Winding Temperature Protection - Group B 26
4.5.7 Converter Feeder Protection (Not Applicable for this tender) 26
4.5.8 Common Bus Protection for 1 ½ Switch Station Configuration 27
4.5.9 Feeder Bus Protection for 1 ½ Switch Station Configuration: 27
4.5.10 Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection - Group B 28
4.5.11 Breaker Fail Relaying – Group A 28
4.5.12 Circuit Breaker Remote Backup Protection 29
4.5.13 Tie-Line Under and Over Frequency and Directional Power Flow Protection
29
4.5.14 Voltage Protections 29
4.5.15 Protection Trip Circuits 29
4.5.16 Trip Circuit Supervision and Protection Supply Supervision Relaying 30
4.5.17 Test Facilities and Trip Isolation 31
4.5.18 Trip Logic 31
4.6 Communication between the Relays and the DCS/SCADA 31
4.7 General requirements for Control, Metering and Protection Panels 32
4.7.1 Electrical Equipment 32
4.7.2 Test Blocks 32
4.7.3 Power Supplies 32
4.7.4 Panels 32
4.8 Programming of electronic devices 32
4.9 Factory Testing 33
4.10 Programming Language 33
4.11 Required Spare Parts 34
5 33KV PROTECTION PANELS 34
6 REMOTE END MODIFICATIONS 35

016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 1
1 GENERAL
This specification outlines standard technical requirements applicable for design, manufacturing
and factory testing of distributed control systems (DCS), metering and protection relay panels,
including annunciation systems for new EHV substations, for extension feeders at existing EHV
substations and outdoor cable section stations developed by Gulf Cooperation Council
Interconnection Authority (GCCIA).
This Technical Specification shall be read in conjunction with General Technical Requirements
016403-2000-47ES-0000, and protection logic diagrams.
Design, material, fabrication and tests of all products supplied under this contract, must be
according to the following standards:
A) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI C39.1 Requirements for Electrical Analogue Indicating Instruments
B) INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)
IEC 60051-* Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring

Instruments and their accessories (* all applicable parts)
IEC 60073 Basic and Safety Principles for Man-Machine Interface,

Marking and Identification – Color Principles for Indicators
and Actuators
IEC 60255-* Electric Relays (* all applicable parts)
IEC 60297-* Dimensions of Mechanical Structures for Electronic

equipment (* all applicable parts)
IEC 60359 Electrical and Electronic Measurement Equipment -

Expression of Performance
IEC 60447 Man-Machine Interface (MMI) – Actuating Principles
IEC 60485 Digital Electronic D.C. Voltmeters and D.C. Electronic

Analogue to Digital Converters
IEC 62052 Electricity M- General Metering Equipment (AC)- General

Requirements, Tests and Test Conditions
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 2
IEC 62053.22 Electricity metering equipment - Particular requirements -

Part 22: Static meters for AC active energy (classes 0,1S,
0,2S and 0,5S)
IEC 62053-24 Electricity metering equipment - Particular requirements -

Part 24: Static meters for fundamental component reactive
energy (classes 0,5S, 1S, 1, 2 and 3)
IEC 60870-6 Telecontrol Application Service Element.2 (TASE.2) (part of

UCA International)
IEC 61000-* Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (* all applicable parts)
IEC 61810-* Electromechanical all-or-nothing relays (* all applicable parts)
IEC 61811-* Electromechanical Relays (* all applicable parts)
IEC 61850-* Communication networks and systems in substations (part of

UCA International)
IEC 61970-* Energy management system application program interface

(EMS-API) - ALL PARTS
IEC 62246 Reed switches - Part 1-1: Generic specification - Blank detail
specification
IEC 61131-3 Programmable controllers - Part 3: Programming languages
C) INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C37.20.1 Metal-enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

Switchgear
IEEE C37.20.2 Metal-clad Switchgear
IEEE C37.20.3 Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear
IEEE C37.90 Relays and Relay Systems associated with Electric Power
Apparatus
IEEE C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for protective

Relays and Relay Systems
IEEE C37.90.2 Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for
Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus
IEEE C37.93
Power System P Protective Relay Applications of Audio Tones Over Voice
Grade Channels
IEEE 802.2 Local Area Network: Logic Link Control

016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 3
IEEE C37.94-2017 IEEE Standard for N times 64 kbps Optical Fiber Interfaces
between Teleprotection and Multiplexer Equipment
D) INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ISA)
ISA 18.1 Annunciator Sequences and Specifications
E) INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ORGANIZATION (ISO)
ISO/IEC 8802-3 Information Technology – Telecommunications and

Information Exchange Between Systems – Local and
Metropolitan Area Networks – Specific Requirements –
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications
F) NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERES ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA AB1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and

Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded Power Cables rated 2000 V or less for the
Distribution of Electrical Energy
NEMA WC71 Non-Shielded Power Cables rated 2001-5000 V for the

Distribution of Electrical Energy
NEMA WC74 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cables for use in the Transmission
and Distribution of Electrical Energy
4.1 General description
All protection relays and schemes shall be designed to ensure performance requirements for
the proposed application and shall meet or exceed the requirements in all aspects. Feeder
arrangement shall be as per the single line diagram.
4.2 Control, Metering and Protection General Configuration
The distributed control, metering and protection systems shall mainly comprise of intelligent
electronic devices (IED) capable to communicate between themselves, with local DCS and
interconnection Control Center-ICC SCADA system.
The entire operations of new EHV GIS substations will be controlled from DCS workstations
located in substation control room and interconnection control center. To achieve this typically
four types of panels shall be envisaged:
 Bay breakers control and protection panels.

 Auxiliary control panels;
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 4
 Revenue metering panels at the interconnection points between GCCIA system and local
Utilities.
 Protection panels.
Bay breakers control and protection panel collects and processes metering data, System data
equipment status and alarms associated with all three breakers which typically consists of
circuit breaker failure overcurrent protections, Auto reclosing relays, Auto synchronizing and
synchro check relays.
Auxiliary control panel collects and processes metering data, equipment status and alarms
associated with the substation auxiliary services. Key component in auxiliary control panel will
be substation auxiliary service controller (Common BCU).
Revenue metering panels exclusively collects bidirectional energy flow data of local utility side
(inter connection grid) of interconnection transformer/OHL/Cable feeder and used for billing
purposes.
The protection panels collects and process metering data other than revenue metering, signals
and alarms associated with protection schemes of various applications. Each feeder and
common bus shall have dedicated protection panels divided into Group A and Group B as
detailed in this specification. Protection panel other than the GCCIA and member states
interconnecting feeders also contains the statistical meter for operational energy data.
Statistical Energy Meters installed at 33 KV/415 V protection panels at GCCIA substations also
collects the energy data for operational energy data.
Generally, two panels shall be allocated for each Line and Reactor protection panels for Group-
A and Group-B application. Additionally, one panel for each CB shall be provided for Bay
breaker control and protection application.
4.3 Control
DCS and SCADA are detailed under the Substation SCADA sectional specification 016403-
3000-4SES-6200.
The Contractor shall install and connect the controllers (BCUs), communication interfaces and
all communication cables in appropriate control and protection panels described in paragraph
4.2 (above).
4.3.1 Synchronism Check
Provide each breaker that connects to a common bus, and each middle breaker that connects
to OHL, Cable feeder, Transformer including any future feeder bays, with a synchronism check
equipment.
The system shall comprise below mentioned Two types of equipment:
 Synchro check relays;

 System Synchronisers (Auto synchronising relays)
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 5
4.3.1.1 Synchro check relays
Synchro check relays shall be used for breakers that are connected to non-Utility
interconnection feeders (ie, except transformer and converter feeders).
These systems are designed to connect two systems which have stable frequencies and
prevents closing operation for any significant slip (system split) across the circuit breaker.
Synchro check relays shall be provided for stable frequency closure with angle settings
appropriate to load angle of paralleling line and with “live line – live bus” , “live line - dead bus”
and “dead line - live bus” closing features.
Ensure that synchronism check equipment inhibits breaker closing during DB/DL unless in
maintenance position (associated disconnectors are open).
Synchronism check function shall enable only when close command is selected. Synchro
function shall automatically be reset after a predefined time or upon closing of the breaker.
4.3.1.2 System Synchronizers (Auto synchronizing Relays)
System synchronizers/Auto synchronizing relay is applicable for all 400 kV circuit breakers
except HVDC feeders main circuit breakers For dc/dc converter station feeds dc link
transformers will always be envisaged from ac stations and hence only voltage and
synchronizing check facilities will then be required.
An Auto synchronizing relay is used to check the synchronism of two interconnecting systems
as it allows the calculation of proper advance closure angle which considers slip frequency
between two systems and trigger synchronizer to issue a closing signal to breaker appropriately
within the setting range in order to avoid any damage to the CB during Asynchronous closing
operation.
The voltage and frequency raise and lower output commands will be used to give an indication
to operator/control engineer at interconnection control via DCS system. Voltage and frequency
difference value measured between bus and line inputs shall be sent to DCS/SCADA via LAN
(if the proposed relay supports), so that operator will have the exact values in volts and hertz.
As voltages are permanently connected to the equipment, Auto synchronizer shall be enabled
through an external closing selection command.
4.4 Metering
4.4.1 Revenue Metering Configuration
Provide dual (main and check) revenue meters at each interconnecting points with a Utility:
 For each interconnecting feeder between GCCIA and Member State utility (i.e
Transformer/OHL/Cable feeder) – (Interconnection point)
 For each HVDC converter feeder. (Interconnection point at GCCIA HVDC 60HZ side).
 Revenue class meter will be installed at GCCIA substation.

016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 6
Modern digital bidirectional (four quadrant) revenue class energy meters shall be provided and
to be integrated with DCS system. Meters should have full capability to directly report the
energy values to ICC SCADA for billing application.
Separate panels shall be considered for revenue metering.
4.4.2 Meters and Instrumentation
Bi-directional (Four Quadrant) multifunction and multi tariff class integrating meters (kWh and
KVArh) shall be used.
The meters shall be intelligent devices (IED type) with integrated display with multiple display
modes for local reading. The display shall be fully customizable by the user. Display shall at
least support simultaneous Normal, Test, Diagnostic, and Time of Use (TOU) modes. Test
Mode shall provide access to Wh (delivered and received), VARh (delivered and received), VAh
(delivered and received), and instantaneous demand. While operating in test mode the stored
readings from Normal Mode shall not be impacted or compromised. TOU mode shall provide
access to kWh and kW for each TOU register and total, kVARh and kVAR for each TOU
register and total, and kVAh for each TOU register and total.
Meters shall be digital and must be installed to measure Active Energy, Active Power, Reactive
Energy and Reactive Power at each Connection Point. This will comprise both Import and
Export metering. The Metering Data will be recorded hourly in on-site data registers and will be
collected automatically to the Authority’s Data Collection System.
The data register shall have adequate capacity to store minimum 30 calendar days of onsite
data to allow for any short time interruptions to the automatic Data Collection System. A
cumulative record of the parameters measured shall be available on the internal storage
facilities of the digital meters for a minimum of 30 calendar days, one hour energy values.
Bidirectional Meters shall have two such records available. For combined Active Energy and
Reactive Energy Meters, a separate record shall be provided for each measured quantity and
direction. The loss of auxiliary supply to the Meter shall not erase these records. These meter
registers shall be readable by the Authority’s Dispatch SCADA system.
Local access facilities to download stored data to a storage device, shall be included.
These meters are used for GCCIA-Local Utility billing purposes and shall meet local utility’s
tariff class approvals, generally 0.2S class. All energy meters shall be calibrated in
collaboration with GCCIA Engineer and respective interconnection member state Utility’s
Metering Department representative after installation.
CT shorting facilities shall be provided in case draw out type meters are used. Provide meters
with test sockets and draw out isolation facilities which disconnects the input circuits and short
current transformer circuits in order to test the meters at site.
Provide meters with dust proof removable covers with transparent windows along with facilities
to seal against tampering and digital password protection for configuration facilities.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 7
All meters shall be provided with dual communication ports and to be connected to DCS
redundant LAN through optional optical port. Pulse output contacts shall also be considered for
the Meters.
Meters shall be cyber security compliant and meet the requirements as per technical data
schedules.
4.4.3 Statistical Metering Configuration
For each 400 kV transmission line provide statistical metering equipment of same class and
accuracy as revenue class energy meters however special tariff grade calibration and sealing
are not required.
4.5 Protection
4.5.1 Protection Configuration
4.5.1.1 Panels and Relays
Protection panels for each 400 kV transmission line, EHV cable, transformer and reactor circuit,
common bus and circuit breaker failure protective systems shall be considered, according to the
bay configuration of substation (as per final approved SLD).
Panels shall be manufactured by reputed manufacturers and shall be in accordance with IEC
60529 VDE 600 and industrial processed. Anti-condensation heaters controlled by thermostat
and hygrostat shall be included. Sufficient clearance between heaters and adjacent
components shall be maintained to avoid damage due to excessive heating.
Cubicles shall be drip-proof, vermin proof, and in general Panel protection class shall be IP 51
or better. Panel enclosure thickness shall be minimum 2.5mm and mounting plates shall be
3mm thick along with 3mm thick removable gland plates. Panel doors shall be provided on both
front and rear sides with a minimum door opening angle of 120 Degree. Door handles shall be
provided with three-point locking arrangement. Front doors of the panels shall be equipped with
durable glass frame for viewing. All the base plates shall be earthed and panel door shall be
earthed via 16 sqmm braided Cu.
External surface of panels shall be painted with RAL7032 and internal shall be painted with
glossy white. Minimum paint thickness of panels shall be 70 microns with an average value of
90 microns, however contractor shall refer General technical requirements and comply. Suitable
earth bar not less than 200 sqmm shall be provided. Rear side of the panel doors shall be fitted
with A3 size drawing pocket. Panels shall be fitted with cubicle lamps which shall be operated
through door switches. Labels shall be provided at both front and rear side for all installed
components and Panel main labels. Indication lamps used within the panels shall be durable
energy saving LED type and shall be provided with lamp test facility.
Sufficient panels to accommodate all specified protection systems including fiber optic tele
protection units, data acquisition for distributed control system and associated interfaces, with a
minimum of two panels, A and B, per circuit, Breaker failure and overcurrent protections,
automatic reclosing systems and synchronism check systems shall be grouped per bay,
typically for three breakers for a 1 ½ switch 400 kV bay along with additional panel for reactor
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 8
bays (CB) where applicable. The bay panels consist of DCS “Bay Box” interface equipment
(measurement, recloser priority and common systems) for that bay.
Protection relays shall be manufactured by reputed manufacturers from Western Europe, Japan
or North America with substantial field experience. Group- A and Group B relays shall be of
different make. Fully programmable digital relays with communication facilities for connection to
redundant DCS/SAS LAN which supports real time alarm and /or sequence of event (SOE) data
access and stored event (events and oscillography) data access shall be provided. All
protection relays shall be based on IEC 61850 protocol. Relays shall be synchronized with GPS
provided at DCS/SAS system.
All interface connections including system interface cables, FO cables etc. to integrate relays
shall be included. Group-A and Group-B communication shall be installed in separate cables for
proper redundancy. Similarly dedicated control cables shall be used for each application
including CT/VT connections, different protection schemes shall not be mixed and routed on
one cable and shall be segregated properly. Static relays shall only be considered where a
particular type/field proven numerical relay is not available. Static and microprocessor-based
relays shall be tested complying with international codes and standards. Type test reports
covering these tests for all the relays shall be provided.
Ring type relay connectors are preferred for CTs and bootlace or flat type lugs can be used for
other applications based on OEM recommendation. Spring loaded type terminals with hook
type lugs are preferred in relay panels. All the offered relays and schemes are subject to CT/VT
calculation and same shall be endorsed by OEM (relay manufacturer).
It is preferable that all digital relays and IEDs shall be compliant to cyber security guidelines and
details pertaining to cyber security shall be exclusively furnished during tendering.
4.5.1.2 Fiber Optic Teleprotection Units
The teleprotection units are detailed under Teleprotection sectional specification 016403-3000-
4CES-6110. Contractor is responsible for installing teleprotection units in appropriate protection
panels and overall integration, testing and commissioning of supplied units along with end to
tests.
4.5.2 Protection - General Requirements
 2 sets of protection arranged in separate groups as Group A and Group B shall be

provided for the transmission lines, cables, transformer and reactor circuits and for the
main busses which operates independently and simultaneously;
 Protection relays for Group A and Group B application, shall be provided from two
separate protection relay manufacturer’s design and production facilities;
 Protection systems shall be designed in accordance with the approved station single line
diagram and typical protection logic drawings.
 Ensure independent and simultaneous operation of protection schemes which includes

redundant breaker trip coils, redundant 110 V DC supplies, and dedicated CT and VT
cores for each system. Metering class CT, VT cores to be used for digital metering
systems, statistical meters for main 400 kV grid and dual tariff class meters at interface
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 9
points to GCCIA member utilities. Segregate between Group A and Group B circuits from
miniature circuit breakers, terminals, CT, VT and at each battery system distribution panel.
MCB characteristics needs to be adequate and confirm with intended requirements.
 In one group, circuit breaker fail protection to directly detect the failure of circuit breaker
trip following a trip signal initiation shall be provided, breaker failure scheme shall initiate a
retrip (to same breaker) followed by time delayed back trip to all “source circuit breakers
including associated remote end breakers;
 Other group, shall be provided with back up relaying scheme in case of failure of both
main measuring schemes. Scale this protection to ensure that final tripping is within the
short-time thermal rating of associated primary equipment;
 Ensure that the protection is stable during system transients and operates accurately
during system faults within the protected zones, all ranges of fault levels, and for the fault
current dc time constants relevant to specified systems;
 Complete overall design to be provided for each protective system to include definition of
current and voltage transformer, protection relays, auxiliary relays and all wiring necessary
to fulfill the scheme, detection of fault, trip and reclose signal to the circuit breaker
including the correct functioning of circuit breaker. Coordinate the design with existing
systems and equipment provided by others wherever applicable;
 Provide an overall scheme which can be integrated into the existing protection schemes
that interconnects GCCIA utilities networks as a whole, and provide evidence of
compatibility and equivalent performance;
 Necessary send and receive interface relays to be provided for protection signaling
systems and differential protections, and for those signals which requires coordinated
operation of both line ends of protection scheme.
 Busbar protection panels shall be designed with considering space for terminals, relays
associated to future extension. Future extension shall be possible with minimum changes.
 CT/VT connections shall be derived directly from CT/VT junction box located at the
GIS/Outdoor devices to each protection and metering scheme. Connection from CT/VT to
LCC might not be required unless it is used in LCC schemes.
 Relay software required for parameterization, testing and event analysis for each type of
protection relays/IEDs (with multiple licenses) along with one set of communication cables,
convertors required for communicating the device with laptop/computer shall be supplied.
4.5.2.1 Objective Fault Clearing Times
The objective fault clearing times required are based on the supply of 60 ms (three cycle) circuit
breakers with a maximum of 20 ms for protection signaling channels. The associated maximum
intertrip /direct transfer trip (DTT) time is 30 ms. Appropriately faster times are expected for the
digital systems. The required objective clearance times are as follows:
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 10
Circuit Nature Of Fault Time (ms)
EHV line or Cable Fault close to one end of a line. Clearance of the end nearest 100
the fault.
EHV line or Cable Fault close to one end of a line. Clearance of the end remote
from the fault using protection signaling:
 single phase 115
 three phase 130
EHV line or Cable High resistance line ground faults beyond the impedance 150
measuring reach of the distance relays
EHV circuit Breaker failure trip and faults between an EHV circuit breaker
and its CT:
300
 local
330
 remote
EHV line Clearance from the remote end of an EHV line fault with a 400
protection signaling failure (zone 2)
EHV bus or bus All in zone faults, maximum 100

connections
EHV transformer All high level faults 130

or reactor
General Faults cleared by back-up protection at full fault level 1000 (1

sec)
Provide evidence that the fault clearing times are independent of system configuration and
include CT and VT response characteristics.
Faster overall clearing time is acceptable noting that direct fibre optic signalling channels will be
used, and two cycle circuit breakers may be provided in the GIS equipment, provided reliability
and security is not compromised.
4.5.2.2 General HV Protection Requirements
Provide the following minimum output contacts per protective system:
 2 breaker trip contacts. (One per circuit breaker for group A or B);
 1 contact from the same relay that provides the circuit breaker trip contacts for connection
to the distributed control system SOE I/O;
 2 protection signalling send contacts, one for each functionally specified send channel,
and one similar speed contact for connection to the distributed control system SOE I/O;
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 11
 2 intertrip/direct transfer trip (DTT) send contacts where functionally specified and one
DTT send contact for connection to the distributed control system SOE I/O;
 1 auto-reclose start contact where functionally specified;
 1 auto-reclose cancel/fail contact where functionally specified;
 1 breaker fail start contact;
 1 alarm contact for each specified operational alarm within the relay *;
 1 common alarm contact for relay system or relay power supply dc/dc converter failure*.
 Suitable facilities shall be provided on each measuring relay or system to disconnect trip
outputs, short and disconnect the current transformers and to disconnect any potential
transformer, alarm or critical dc circuit, without affecting any other device, prior to
removing or testing the relay element or IED measurement;
 Scheme shall be provided with injection test facilities, which shall be suitable for testing
measuring relay elements at site without affecting the external circuitry;
 Provide target relays or suitably identified LED indicators to indicate the operation and
stage of each protection measurement loop in each system. Provide means of resetting
these targets without removing any covers. Electrical reset relays shall be, provided with
an additional panel mounted reset push button;
 Repeat relays shall be avoided and all connection to trip, control and DCS alarms shall be
based on direct contacts from source relays and equipment.
 All relays shall be suitable for ambient temperature and other external environmental
factors where specified, including the heating effect of other equipment provided under
this or other previous contracts. Tropicalize where necessary;
 Mechanical relays which use oil dash pots or whose calibration is appreciably affected by
temperature shall not be used.
 All measuring relays complete with any required external auxiliary equipment required for
the proper operation of all systems, meeting the specified class, ratio of instrument
transformers, and performance. Include and document all special internal configurations
(program logic) required;
 All relay systems shall be immune to 110 V DC system ground faults either within the relay
panel or any lead external to the relay panel (capacitance discharge risks);
 For any case mounted static or digital relays, provide front withdrawable internal
components in switchboard type, flush/semi-flush, rectangular, dust-tight, back connected
cases. Provide these relay cases with removable covers or doors with glass windows,
along with external reset features;
 Provide rack mounted static or digital relays in 480 mm (19 inch) modular racks containing
plug-in glass-epoxy printed circuit boards located behind front security covers;
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 12
 Ensure all text display features (HMI/MMI access) are readable and accessible from
normal standing position, with the preferred location on any panel to be between 1200 and
1700 mm from the floor level with a maximum range of 800 to 1900 mm;
 For all settable protection and control systems, provide individual sealable covers and/or
password protected access buttons to secure re-setting capability while ensuring fault
indication, record data and setting displays are available for general access;
 Provide suitably protected power supply units to operate from the 110 V DC (nominal)
protection supply. Provide these units with supply failure monitor alarm circuits;
 Provide all necessary interface and barrier isolation circuits for each system to operate, in
the environment specified and to meet the IEC 60255, IEC 61000 and ANSI C37.90 SWC,
electromagnetic, electrostatic and radio interference levels and EMC Standards.
 Panel terminals and connections shall be protected using transparent shrouds to avoid
any accidental trip.
 Cables inside panel shall be neatly dressed within dedicated trough allocated for each
application.
 Phase colored wires shall be used for CT/VT application preferably 2.5 sqmm cable within
the panel. External cables shall be of 4Sqmm or 6 sqmm depending on application and
sizing calculation. Typically, 6 sqmm cable for line protection and 4 sqmm cable for
remaining protection circuits shall be used. The CT/VT neutral shall be earthed at
respective relay panel or control panel (first entering panel) via an isolation bolted link.
4.5.2.3 Division of the Protection:
 Divide the protection systems into Group A and Group B where specified, each fed from
dedicated 110 V DC supply and trips associated Group A(TC-1) or Group B(TC-2) circuit
breaker trip coil;
 Derive all power supply requirements for the protection from 110 V DC supply associated
with that relay group. The usage of small individual batteries as power supplies to the
electronic equipment is not permitted for primary functions of the systems.
 Ensure that Group A and Group B protection dc supply systems are electrically separated.
Contacts for Groups A and B fed from A and B DC supplies are not permitted within the
contact stack of same physical output relay. The coil of a Group A relay may however be
used for close or open operation of Group B system located in a separate contact stack
and vice-versa. Diode summation dual power feeds to critical loads may be permitted
provided these are barricaded and protected from the risk of losing both systems;
 Physically divide the protection schemes in panels circuit wise, generally as shown in
Protection logic diagram and subject to approval, Suitable identification labels shall be
provided for each power supply group within the panel.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 13
4.5.3 EHV Transmission Line Protection
4.5.3.1 General
 Provide primary line protection and automatic reclose systems for each end of the line,
along with protection signaling systems between ends. Provide a multi-zone,
multi-element, (equivalent) digital phase and earth (ground) fault accelerated (permissive)
distance relay scheme and directional comparison earth (ground) fault (DEF) scheme for
Group A and digital phase by phase line differential protection for Group B. The latter
system to have an internal three zone distance and current relay backup on
communication failure as a minimum. Interface each system with the appropriate
protection signaling and fibre optic interface systems;
 Above mentioned Group A and B protection relays shall communicate with remote end
station considering the following
a. Direct Relay to relay communication for both channels of Group A and Group B
relays utilizing OPGW(FO) wherever applicable
b. In case option a is not feasible due to distance limitation then both channels of
Group A and Group B relays shall be interfaced to redundant Multiplexers using
IEEE37.94/E1
 Ensure that both Group A and Group B systems supports high speed tripping over the
whole line length even when the remote end is open, for all types of faults. Ensure that
high speed tripping occurs when energizing the line for faults at all points on the line;
 Provide, within the Group A DEF scheme, a backup zone to detect low level earth faults
and high impedance faults using an inverse time direct trip feature as an adjunct to the
directional comparison scheme;
 Provide, in addition, a remote back-up protection for uncleared phase faults, using three
phase inverse time over-current protection and provide, for local back-up for the circuit
breaker failing to clear a fault, a phase-by-phase current measuring, circuit breaker fail
protection scheme suitable for use with single pole auto-reclose where applied;
 Ensure that Group A and Group B schemes together includes appropriate circuits to
detect close-in faults even with a 100% potential drop.
 Provide line relays that are suitable for 2 breakers application and can manage tripping
outputs according to recloser mode selection which may be different for breaker 1 and
breaker 2 (i.e. breaker 1 recloser mode selected for 1P and breaker 2 for 3P).
 Group A and Group B protection relays shall be provided from two separate protection
manufacturer’s design and production facilities.
The stations will be laid out to have line CTs on Switchgear bays (GIS) together with
appropriate line CVTs installed at line entry points.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 14
4.5.3.2 Group A Protection
Provide the distance protections with the following features:
 Four -zones (3 forward and 1 backward) phase and earth fault mho and quadrilateral
and/or suitably shaped characteristic, distance scheme utilizing offset mho, quadrilateral
and/or equivalent elements, in a digital multiprocessor equivalent of the non-switched
type;
 Suitable interfaces for use in a selectable acceleration (permissive under-reach

trip/Permissive Over Reach) (PUR & POR tele protection transfer trip TT) scheme;
 Impedance and time setting ranges, based on the transmission line length, together with
the operating times in seconds of:
Zone Setting Time

1 50% to 120% 0.025 s
2 125% (typical) 0.2 to 1.5 s
3 250% (typical) 0.8 to 3.0 s
 Blocking of the relay tripping in the event of loss of one or more VT supply phases without
the need for high speed MCBs at the VT and associated auxiliary contacts to block the
relay. Individual phase MCBs will be provided in the CVT junction boxes provided by
others;
 Power swing detection circuits together with site selectable blocking for “first swing only” or
for “first and subsequent swings”. Blocking to be selectable for any zones;
 Initiation, from Zone 1 phase or earth fault or from the accelerated trip of another phase
fault zone, when associated with a protection signal receipt, of three pole tripping and the
slow speed three pole auto-reclosing cycle;
 Three phase impedance or equivalent type fault detector to monitor the protection and
prevent operation when fault current is not flowing. Ensure this circuit functions correctly
with load current swings found on this system and any phase unbalance caused by faults
or phase open condition on an adjacent line;
 Differentially set forward and reverse detection earth fault directional comparison
protective scheme, utilizing a separate protection signaling channel, which will detect
single phase to ground high impedance faults;
 Detection of faults which are in the forward direction, as seen from the relay location , and,
following a short adjustable time delay, initiation of a protection signal send to the remote
line end;
 Clearance of faults which are in the forward direction, provided the remote line end detects
the fault in forward direction and signals to near end of protection signaling circuit to
release the directional earth fault relay, without any additional time delay;
 Clearance of faults which are in the forward direction but not detected by the comparison
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 15
stage following an adjustable time delay;
 Separately isolatable trip output, from a separately set instantaneous element on the
forward earth fault directional relay;
 Earth fault directional elements with separate or internal voltage polarizing fed from the
main distance relay star-connected VT winding;
 Reverse directional zone and associated circuitry so that on non-operation of this reverse
zone, any received directional comparison permissive signal is “echoed” back to the send
end circuitry. This is to ensure that, when charging a line from either end, earth faults
within the whole line length are detected without any additional time delay;
 Ensure that the reverse zone is more sensitive than the forward zone in above circuitry so
that the reverse echo block functions if remote end fault outflow is too low to operate the
forward relay at that end, plus a margin;
 Additional circuits to prevent “seal-up” or continuous sending of the permissive directional

comparison signal following fault clearance or when the circuit is isolated.
4.5.3.3 Main group B Optic Fibre Differential Protection
 Fibre optic differential protection shall be used as main group B protection, which shall be
fully phase selective and provide all features of the main protection group A including
facilities for phase selected single pole trip and single or three pole auto-reclose initiation,
as appropriate to the type of fault, suitable for communication to remote end station over
dual channels considering the following.
a. Direct Relay to relay communication for both channels of relays utilizing
OPGW/(FO)
b. In case option a is not feasible due to distance limitation then both channels relays
shall be interfaced to redundant Multiplexers using IEEE37.94/E1
 Provide a protection system which use phase by phase differential comparison over the
optic fibre link/ E1 link and suitable for self inter trip to trip both ends simultaneously for
faults in the line zone. The relay system shall be digital type and should employ modern
microprocessor technology allowing both relay and communication loop failure detection
and data logging. It shall be of modular rack construction with plug-in units and shall be
suitable for 110VDC power supply units.
 The scheme shall have maximum operating time of two cycles at 50 Hz (40 ms) including
transmission delays for all faults within the protected line over specified range of
operational fault levels.
 The scheme should be able to achieve fault detection settings that are below full load
transfer and achieve good sensitivity for high resistance earth faults. The relay shall be
phase selective to ensure operation and correct phase selection even under moderately
high-resistance faults;
 The scheme shall provide self-monitoring of data channels and dynamically update its
internal delay settings to adjust transmission delays in the communication channel from
0.5 ms to at least 5 ms;
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 16
 The scheme shall have comprehensive automatic test facilities to monitor the condition of
the relays at each end of fibre optic/64 kb link. Isolation switching and test isolation
features, current transformer injection/shorting test blocks shall be included. Isolation
features shall be provided for auto-reclose initiation and breaker fail initiation circuits;
 Provide a scheme with facilities for single pole trip and reclose and ensure phase selective
logic can be provided. Override features shall also be provided to give three pole tripping
for operations of the protection on complex faults. Provide a three zones distance element
(that may have additional phase to phase tripping features) and overcurrent facilities to
cover communication failures;
 Ensure that protection relays are suitable for dual LAN connection to DCS and supports
real time alarm reporting and transfer/download stored event and oscillograhic fault data
upon request;
 Necessary software to download/store events and oscillograhic records for long term
storage, and/or to replay fault waveforms via test sets using the Comtrade format shall be
provided. Relay communication software to download and upload protection setting data
shall be deemed included in scope of supply.
4.5.3.4 High Speed Tripping
Provide one high speed tripping circuit per circuit breaker trip coil consisting of, or providing
similar performance to, the following:
 High speed, 2 ms to 5 ms, light duty trip or electronic contacts shunted by slow speed
make/heavy duty current break type contacts;
 Making and breaking contacts capable of independently making and carrying the circuit
breaker trip circuit current;
 Heavy duty contacts which seal-in and allow the light duty contacts to reset first;
 Trip circuit reset by time delay or current monitor circuits;
 Trip outputs which release fast enough to allow the auto reclose cycle to proceed.
4.5.3.5 Single Pole Auto Reclose Facilities
 Provide within the distance protection facilities for single pole auto-reclose scheme
initiated by the distance protection earth fault relay operations and phase selected trips
from line differential protection, but acting on the bus side circuit breaker with single pole
trip only, with three pole tripping for the middle breaker in the 1 ½ switch configuration;
 Provide facilities for high-speed single shot single pole auto-reclose of the tripped circuit
breakers only and provide a single pole reclose dead time adjustment range of 0.25
second to 1.25 second;
 Inhibit auto reclose on circuit breakers that were open prior to fault and provide three pole
trip and reclose inhibition on any breaker that has insufficient stored energy to complete a
trip/close/trip cycle; (CB duty cycle).
 Interface with three pole auto-reclosing scheme and provide a combined duty selector
switch. Provide this selector switch with the following functions: Off: 3 poles; single pole
only; 1/3 pole. Ensure, for the last duty, the selective reclose initiation depends on the
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 17
number of poles tripped (1 or 3);

 Ensure reset of single pole auto-reclose logic if distance protection(s) detects fault that has
spread to more than one pole and if the breaker trips three pole for any other reason;
 A second pole trip always shall initiate full three pole trip;
 Power supply failure to auto-reclose logic, shall convert to three pole trip irrespective of
number of poles for which fault has detected.
 Provide for a cancel signal from the associated breaker fail relaying or the adjacent bus
protection zone;
 Ensure that the cancel signal immediately stops any reclose sequence that are in
progress;
 Provide a reclaim timer adjustable in the range of 2 to 200 seconds during which reclosure
is prevented if a breaker trips following manual or automatic reclosure;
 If not provided as part of circuit breaker logic, a separate pole discrepancy trip system for
each trip coil shall be provided. Provide cross blocking or coordinate the time settings
adjustable over the same range as that of single pole open time plus a margin of safety;
 The single-pole auto reclose scheme auxiliary voltage shall be fed from group A.
 AR fail in case of synch check not ok
4.5.3.6 Three Pole Auto Reclose
 Provide a three pole auto reclose scheme configure to handle one, two or three circuit
breakers within each 1 ½ circuit breaker bay dependent on the configuration or reclose
circuits. Initiate reclose by any multiphase fault causing three pole trip in distance
protection Zone 1, accelerated trip zone associated with protection signaling equipment, or
line zone of the line differential protection and block (cancel) for faults in adjacent non-
reclose circuits (cables, transformers or bus);
 Provide a slow speed single shot three pole auto reclose which is synchronized and/or
voltage checked for all close attempts for each breaker with priority selection for the three
bay circuit breakers within a 1 ½ switch bay;
 Provide separate time delayed logic to alternatively initiate the synchronism check
equipment to allow live bus - dead line charge and/or live line - dead bus charge. In
addition to synchronize check, provide externally settable facilities to disable any
combination of these features if operational conditions require such blocking;
 Provide interface to external system auto system synchronizer logic where specified;
 Ensure that the minimum reclose initiation delay is 0.25 second for synchronized close
with a separate “dead line or dead bus charge” time with a time setting range of 0.25
second to 2.25 second;
 Inhibit auto-reclose on circuit breakers that were open prior to the fault and on any breaker
that has insufficient stored energy to complete a trip/close/trip cycle.(CB duty cycle)
 Interface with the single pole auto-reclosing scheme and with the combined duty selector
switch. This selector switch has the following functions: Off: 3 pole; single pole only: 1/3
pole. For the last duty, the selective reclose initiation will depend on the number of poles
tripped (1 or 3);
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 18
 Provide transfer of initiation from single pole logic to three pole for a fault which spreads to
more phases following a single pole trip. Initiation transfer to be from the distance relay
multi-phase fault detection logic. Ensure initiation transfer will also reset any single pole
auto reclose sequences that are in progress;
 Provide for a cancel signal from the associated breaker fail relaying or from an adjacent
non-reclose protection zone (transformer, cable or bus), or for a direct transfer trip from
remote end of the line (reactor fault);
 Ensure cancel signal immediately stops any reclose sequence which is in progress;
 Provide a reclaim timer adjustable in the range of 2 seconds to 200 seconds during which
reclosure is prevented if a breaker trips following manual or automatic reclosure;
 The three-pole auto reclose scheme auxiliary voltage shall be from group A.
 AR fail in case of synch check not ok

4.5.3.7 Protection Signaling Facilities
 Provide an overall protective system design for each line based on three-channel
protection signaling system operating over dual fibre optic multiplexed links connected
through separate OPGW. Dedicated protection signaling system for both Group-A and
Group-B scheme shall be provided and installed in respective Group-A and Group-B
panels. These signaling system shall be redundant and interfaced with redundant telecom
multiplexers on IEEE 37.94/E1 as decided in design. Allocate one channel in each
protection signaling system to intertrip far end (DTT: Direct Transfer Trip) for circuit
breaker fail protection or line reactor protection operations as appropriate. Duplicate this
over the intertrip facilities provided through fibre optic line differential protection;
 Allocate second channel to give protection signaling acceleration for distance protection
(PTT: Permissive Transfer Trip) i.e. POTT & PUTT
 Allocate third channel for directional comparison ground fault protection (DEF Scheme);
 A key operated “Test/Off/Normal” isolation switch, with key released in “Normal” shall be
provided for each protection group to isolate send and receive functions for that system.
Initiate a "Teleprotection Fail" alarm when switch is in isolated position (test/off), and same
shall be connected in parallel with telecommunication equipment failure alarm. Unless
provided within the teleprotection logic, provide Intertrip (DTT), Permissive (PTT) and
Directional Comparison ground fault (DEF scheme) Send Test push buttons and Receive
Test lamps which are only active in the “Test” position, for system test purposes. Suitable
warning notification to alert operator to switch both ends to “Test before using this feature”
shall be provided.
4.5.3.8 Fault Recording and Sequence of Events Logging
DFR units shall be provided for complete substation on each feeder to monitor power system
disturbances, capture and store abnormal condition’s fault data. The DFR data storage system
shall be capable of storing a record for following parameters for a minimum of 100 faults, and
shall be transferred to the DCS servers for archiving and storage on CD ROM in IEEE (Draft
IEC) Comtrade format: Fault recorder units shall be arranged in separate cubicle similar to
protection panels.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 19
Dedicated DFR units shall be provided for each Feeder. the minimum offered configuration of
DFR shall have at least 12 analog input channel (1 set of 3-phase voltages and N, one set of 3-
phase protection current and N, 3-Phase measurement current and N) and 1/32 digital inputs.
In addition to the above, following analogue/digital signal to be considered as minimum
requirements for monitoring.
- GIS 3 ph. VT where ever is applicable.

- Individual for each CB trip coil supervision need to be provided
- Any other analogue data necessary to monitor internal relay functions.
 Status of the following signals for each feeder
- 1 breaker pole trip signals;
- 1 breaker auto-reclose start per breaker (for line feeder only);
- 1 breaker auto-reclose cancel per breaker (for line feeder only);
- 3 protection signalling receive signals.
- All possible Protection relay trip signals
These records should be held in, or be convertible to, Comtrade format.
Initiate the fault record for fault, breaker protection, trip order and breaker auto-reclose order
sequences or from the start sequence of the relay fault detector, and be configurable in the
relay setup.
Each recording shall be with and accuracy of less than or equal to 10 milliseconds, and with the
date of fault occurrence. Provide facilities to synchronize internal clock to the GPS backed
DCS control system master clock or with a dedicated GPS.
Circuit identification tag shall be included while data is stored on DCS server.
Ensure that the record contains at least five cycles of pre-fault memory and output this with the
fault record.
For digital units provide a suitable output port to download records once the data has been
transferred to memory.
Fault Recorder must be microprocessor based, Sensing, acquiring, and transmitting analogue
and event logging of critical data in real time for the newly installed system. DFR shall be based
on fully digital systems, provide data access from a portable PC/DCS engineering workstation,
loaded with suitable software, and provide access to retrieve the data remotely from the GCCIA
Engineering Centre.
Provide a sequence of events (SOE) data storage device to integrate this data into the station
control system (DCS) to provide sequence of events recording with a time stamp to 1
millisecond of critical protective systems. Provide contacts, wired to the terminal blocks on the
associated relay panel, from all critical trip relays. The monitored relays shall be those high
speed relays which send trips directly to circuit breaker from each protective system. Ensure
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 20
that the teleprotection send and receive relay operations are also available for monitoring.
Cross marking or time synchronization to the GPS clock is to be provided.
DFR units shall have line fault locator using the inputs derived from CTs/VTs. Ensure the
locator operates on the impedance to fault measuring principle and preference will be given to
schemes with the following features:
 Digital recording of the fault currents and voltages for faults within the line section only;
 Correct recording of the first and subsequent faults associated with auto-reclose cycle and
with developing or evolving faults;
 Digital processing of fault data to calculate the distance to fault;
 Selectable display in miles, km or percent of line length;
 Time synchronism from station control system GPS clock shall be provided. Each DFR
units shall have dedicated GPS card and GPS synchronization of each fault recorder unit
shall be independent from other units.
Separate PMU for each interconnecting line feeder must be provided. PMU must be integrate
with GCCIA PMU WAMS system serves installed at HQ and ECC Ghunan. If required PMU must
have capability to integrate with any MS’s control center. GCCIA available PMU severs /PDC
must be used for the required integration. PMUs shall be complete in all respect and
communicate with Both ECC/ICC Control center Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC).
PMUs shall be designed to measure the electrical parameters in the power system frequency
band of 45-55 Hz. PMUs shall compile with IEEE C37.118 latest standard.
DFR and PMUs shall have continuous self-monitoring, diagnostic feature and capable to identify
& communicate problems and shall generate alarm in case of any abnormality which shall be
displayed locally as well as shall be transferred to the PDC. Separate alarm shall be generated
for invalid data due to line outage.
For each feeder, the minimum offered configuration of PMU shall have at least 9 analog input
channel (1 set of 3-phase voltages and N, one set of 3-Phase measurement current and N) and
required digital inputs
Remote configuration facility shall be provided in PMU along with required software.
DFR shall have travelling wave fault locator (TWS) suitable for fault location with an accuracy of
minimum 100m and same shall be integrated with GCCIA master station fault location system.
TWS shall be modular type construction and shall be expandable considering the future
extensions.
TWS shall be compatible for latest windows system and shall have facility for data download,
storage, processing, device creation and configuration along with self-monitoring and diagnostic
features such as device error or communication error detection.
An industrial type computer (common server for DFR/PMU/TWS/PQM/BMS and POW) which
enables, configuration, set-up, calibration, retrieve, view records, print and with local evaluation
facility shall be provided along with required software. Printer, modems, and network interface
devices (required if any) and local storage shall be provided.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 21
Triggering features such as analog triggering, digital triggering (trip), cross triggering, manual
triggering etc shall be included.
Each fault recorder shall have sufficient memory for successful recording of all the faults and
shall transfer fault data automatically to permanent storage locations.
All connections, terminals, VT fuse/MCB, AC/DC supervision relays etc. required to fulfill the
scheme shall be included.
Each DFR units shall have minimum 12 analogue channels, 32 digital channels. Each DFR
panel shall consists of sufficient DFR units to monitor one dia. Minimum of two analogue and
digital channels per recorder shall be provided as spare. All necessary hardware and software
interfaces required for connection to master station shall be included.
Provided system must be equip with required high-end cyber security aligned to industry
standards and services like NERC CIP, AAA, Radius, RBAC, Syslog etc. If any Limitation on
cyber security must be mentioned clearly.
Power quality measurement in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30 Class A for all parameters
shall be provided for all line feeders. PQ sensors required at VTs or CVTs (if any) shall be
included. Provision for future remote connectivity for the meters shall be considered.
4.5.3.9 Power Quality Meters
PQMs shall provide continuous acquisition and analysis of all relevant power quality parameters
in GCCIA’s electrical power grid. PQMs shall process voltage and current either from standard
Current Transformers (CTs) and Voltage Transformers (VTs), or using PQ sensors to provide
high quality measurements and monitor electrical disturbances such as harmonics, unbalance,
flicker and over/under voltage conditions for compliance to international power quality standards
and user-defined grid codes. The scope related to PQ sensors is already specified elsewhere.
PQMs shall be installed in each line feeder at GCCIA new stations. The auxiliary power supply
of the PQM shall be derived from the substation 110V redundant DC system.
PQM shall be capable of performing the following functionalities:
 Detection, recording and monitoring of electrical disturbances including voltage sag, swell,
and interruption, flicker, unbalance, harmonics and transients.
 Continuous measurement of operational values and power quality parameters according
to IEC 61000-4-30 Class A with configurable recording frequency.
 Simultaneous high resolution waveform capture of all voltage and current channels
triggered manually or by alarm or event.
 Trend recording with configurable frequency, time intervals and tolerance ranges for
visualizing changes in recorded parameters.
 Recording of voltage events including voltage sag, swell, interruption and Rapid Voltage
Change (RVC) events. The meter shall store event time, duration, affected phases,
reference level, max deviation and final deviation of an RVC according to IEC61000-4- 30
Class A.
 Automatically calculate the statistical probability of the location of the disturbance source
 A sliding reference function according to IEC 61000-4-30 Class A for all medium and high
voltage measurements.
 Anti-aliasing filter according to IEC 61000-4-30.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 22
 Time-stamping of data logs, event logs, trending and sequence of events recordings.
 Recordings triggered using voltage events, alarms, digital inputs and violation of recorded
parameters limits.
 Threshold alarms with adjustable set points, time delays and user-defined priority levels.
 Configurable power quality compliance reporting in accordance with international
standards including EN50160, IEC 61000-4-30 Class A Ed.3, IEC 61000-4-7, and IEC
61000-4-15. The reports shall be available in PDF, DOC and XLS formats.
 On-board HTTPS web server providing easy, secure and quick access to real-time
measurements and basic power quality and trending information. The web server shall
have customizable pages that are HTML/XML compatible.
 Mathematical calculations, parameter scaling and programmable logic with the ability to
configure all available digital inputs and outputs.
 User-friendly tool for configuration, commissioning, performance monitoring and data
archiving.
 Data export of PQ records to CSV and PQDIF (Power Quality Data Interchange Format)
format, as well as export of waveform records to COMTRADE format.
 Provision for Automatic reporting of PQM records to the PQMS server at control center
(expected to be installed in future and not part of current project) for further analysis and
data archiving.
 The PQM shall be able to communicate with the DCS (on IEC 61850 protocol and
connected to both substation LANs.
The PQM shall be able to report the minimum, mean and maximum values of all recorded
parameters. The PQM shall also allow the option to set adjustable limits on recorded
parameters and report limit violations.
PQM shall provide pre and post fault recording capabilities. The PQM should be able to record
system under fault conditions. The recording length shall be possible to set to a fixed length (at
least 10 seconds) together with a user selectable auto stop function. Both waveform and RMS
values shall be presented. Sampling rate should be selectable starting from 64 samples per
cycle. Event parameters like depth, duration, and trigger shall be calculated and stored
separately for each event and possible to show in separate graphs. The records shall have a
20-bit resolution or higher.
The PQM shall be equipped with internal non-volatile memory for recording logs and storing
firmware and configuration settings. PQMs shall also be able to store historical trending data,
power quality data, and waveform recordings in an internal storage memory which shall be
sized accordingly. The PQM internal storage shall be sufficient to store data for one year.
PQM shall be installed in PMU panels and a common server shall be used for
DFR/PMU/TWS/PQM/BMS and POW. In case if common server option is not feasible, separate
server with monitor can be proposed for PQM subject to GCCIA approval.
PQM Analogue Channels
The PQM device shall accept sufficient independent voltage and current input channels for one
and half breaker system, at least 8 input voltage channels and 12 input current channels, and
be able to connect different system configurations such as: 3-phase 4-wire, 3-phase 3-wire
delta, and single-phase systems. The analog AC voltage and current input channels shall be
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 23
rated at 110V (phase-to-phase) and 1/5A selectable, respectively, with a frequency range of at
least 45Hz to 55Hz.
The accuracy of the current and voltage inputs shall be better than 0.1%. . It shall be possible to
modify the scaling factor for each input channel to calibrate the measurements as needed. The
Bidder/Contractor shall determine the suitable calibration for each input channel to ensure all
measurements meet the accuracy requirements, especially for circuits running at minimum
load. The determined calibration shall be validated with GCCIA at time of detailed engineering
and commissioning.
PQM also shall have a dedicated watchdog contacts and minimum of 8 digital inputs and 4
digital outputs which shall be freely configurable for any used defined functions.
The PQM should be linked with a powerful multi-user software package to configure and setup
the PQMs. The software package shall be user-friendly and shall provide engineering,
performance monitoring, and data retrieval tools. The software package shall also allow remote
configuration and firmware upgrade of the PQM. Generally, the following capabilities shall be
maintained by the software packages:
 Configure the meter for all possible circuit types.

 Retrieve recorded data automatically.
 Display online voltage, current, power and harmonic information.
The system functions shall include backup/restoration function for all the systems firmware,
licenses, databases, configuration files, in order to ensure business continuity and disaster
recovery of the PQM. All necessary software tools, license, and procedures in order to ensure
business continuity and system availability shall be included.
The offered solution shall ensure OS/firmware compatibility with all PQMS components
including PQMS servers and clients. The PQM shall have cyber security features that enable
the design of a system in compliance with industry standards for secure handling of the device,
including anti-malware, network segmentation (firewalls), system hardening, user management,
access rights, user activity logging and system event logging over Syslog to enable a system-
wide overview of system events.
4.5.4 Line Application
4.5.4.1 EHV Aerial Lines
The protection scheme and relays pertaining to Aerial lines are described under section 4.5.3
“EHV Transmission Line Relaying”.
4.5.4.2 EHV Submarine Lines
Submarine line protection shall consist of two primary protection system divided into Group A
and Group B.
Both Group A and Group B system, shall be supplied with fibre optic differential which are fully
phase selective and suitable for operating over separate dual direct fibre connections or 64 kb
multiplexed fibre similar to clause 4.5.3.3 Main group B Optic Fibre Differential Protection under
section 4.5.3 “EHV Transmission Line Relaying”.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 24
Protection relays for Group A and Group B shall be offered from different manufacturer and
production facilities.
4.5.5 Autotransformer Protection (Not Applicable for this contract)
Provide for each transformer two primary protection systems divided into Group A and Group B
as defined hereafter. Also provide the specified connections protections between the
transformers and the adjacent substations.
4.5.5.1 High Impedance Differential Protection - Group A or B, Option 1
Provide for each autotransformer a high impedance overall differential protection for each
transformer connected in a circulating current mode. Provide a phase-by-phase differential
zone to include the primary HV, the secondary LV and the tertiary delta connections of the
transformer using the HV and LV phase CT’s and the neutral connection current transformers.
Alternatively low impedance differential protection relays also can be proposed provided
performance is equivalent to High impedance protection scheme.
4.5.5.2 Overall Biased Differential Protection - Group B or A, Option 2
Provide three winding biased differential protection with harmonic restraint suitable for the
transformer connected in a differential current mode and suitable to cover the high, and tertiary
connections with internal ratio and vector correction facilities.
Provide a restricted earth fault relay integrated with the differential protection for high and low
(auto-transformer) windings and overflux protection.
Relays shall be programmable with integrated features, based on microprocessors, with fast
operating times and variable percentage restraint characteristics, suitable for 3 inputs 3
dedicated CT cores. The relays shall have appropriate harmonic filters to block operation of the
relay during magnetizing inrush of the transformer. For faults in the protected zone, the relays
shall operate before the CTs saturate severely.
Operating time of the relays for differential current higher than 2 amps shall be less than 3
cycles. The relays shall be intelligent electronic devices capable to adjust the setting values
according to CT configuration.
4.5.5.3 Fast Gas and Winding Temperature Protection - Group B
Provide a trip logic, via other digital relays and/or target repeat relays to accept contacts from
Buchholz, Diaphragm Rupture and Load Compensated Winding Temperature relays as
appropriate to the design of transformers, (provided by others). For bid submission, minimum 4
such systems shall be proposed.
Provide a similar group of alarm stage monitor channels or relays to connect necessary DCS
alarms and inputs via I/O (Bay box) and/or associated protective relays as appropriate.
Provide additional trip and alarm targets to monitor additional infeeds as provided by
transformer manufacturer. These additional features are provisionally: tap change Buchholz
and pressure diaphragm trip and oil level alarms.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 25
Provide series target relays, with suitable trip current extension time delay to ensure target
operation, for trip target relays.
4.5.5.4 Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection - Group B
Provide inverse time relays connected in the main transformer high, low and tertiary
connections and in the direct neutral connection tertiary winding zig-zag earthing transformer.
Provide relays as specified below in 4.5.10 “Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection – All circuits
– Group B”.
4.5.5.5 Secondary Transformer Side Bus Protection
This zone covers the connections between the transformer and the breaker in the existing
substation.
Depending on station configuration and interconnecting utility following may be considered.
1. Provide a dual common high impedance connections (Group A and Group B) for the
connections connected in a phase by phase circulating current mode.
2. For longer connections greater than 400 m, relay room to relay room, provide fibre optic
differential protections as per paragraph 4.5.3.3 Main group B Optic Fibre Differential
Protection of section 4.5.3 “EHV Transmission Line Protection”.
4.5.5.6 Tertiary Connection Protections - Group A
Provide an inverse time relay connected to phase current transformers of tertiary winding of the
autotransformer.
Provide an inverse time relay connected to neutral current transformer of auxiliary zig-zag
transformer connected to tertiary side of the autotransformer.
Provide relays as specified below in 4.5.10 “Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection – All circuits
– Group B”.
Provide a ground protective relay connected across broken delta voltage transformer connected
to tertiary side of the autotransformer.
4.5.6 Shunt Reactor Protection
For both the line and bus connected reactors, provide two primary protection systems
separated into Group A and Group B as defined previously and containing the following:
4.5.6.1 Differential Protection - Group A
Provide phase by phase, circulating current, high impedance protection with the zone of
protection limited to main reactor (from reactor line side CT to reactor phase CT on neutral side.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 26
4.5.6.2 Differential Protection - Group B
Provide phase by phase, circulating current, high impedance protection with the zone of
protection limited to main reactor and breakers.
Alternatively low impedance differential protection can be proposed provided performance is

equivalent to High impedance protection scheme for both Group A and Group B protection.
4.5.6.3 Overcurrent and Earth Fault - Group B
Provide instantaneous and inverse time overcurrent relays connected for phase and earth
faults. Provide dedicated trip output contacts for instantaneous and inverse time trips.
Provide relays as specified in below in 4.5.9 “Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection – All
circuits – Group B”.
4.5.6.4 Fast Gas and Winding Temperature Protection - Group B
Provide a trip logic, via other digital relays and/or target repeat relays for Buchholz, Diaphragm
Rupture and Load Compensated Winding Temperature relays as appropriate to the design of
the reactors. For bid submission, minimum 4 such systems shall be proposed.
Provide a similar group of alarm stage monitor channels or relays to provide all the necessary
DCS alarms and inputs via I/O (Bay box) and/or associated protective relays as appropriate.
Provide addition targets to monitor additional inputs as provided by the reactor manufacturer.
These additional features are provisionally: second pressure diaphragm trip and oil level alarms
and shall be coordinated with Reactor design.
Provide series target relays, with suitable trip current extension time delay to ensure target
operation for the trip target relays.
For the shunt reactors with secondary windings provide equivalent reactor and transformer-
integrated protection as described in 4.5.5 above noting that the clauses covering tertiary
protection applies to secondary winding.
4.5.7 Converter Feeder Protection (Not Applicable for this tender)
The converter feeder is an interconnecting point between GCCIA and Saudi Arabia Utility and
must then be provided with under and over frequency and directional power flow protection as
described in paragraph 4.5.13.
The feeder bus protection, cable between the GIS and the converter substation is not part of
this specification, it is covered under the Al-Fadhili Back-to-Back Converter Facility specification
016403-50BC-0400.
Provide the feeder bus protection according to paragraph 4.5.9 Feeder Bus Protection for 1 ½
Switch Station Configuration.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 27
4.5.8 Common Bus Protection for 1 ½ Switch Station Configuration
Provide for each busbar two primary protection systems divided into Group A and Group B
operating from dedicated CT cores.
For each group, provide a high impedance differential or low impedance biased differential
phase by phase measuring scheme with individual indication for faulty phase. Design the
scheme withstand through fault stability up to the circuit breaker rating while being capable of
operation under minimum bus fault current conditions specified and be appropriate for GIS
stations.
Ensure that the current transformers, provided by others if any, do not compromise the
protection's ability during CT saturation, and have a through fault stability level of up to the
circuit breaker fault rating and coordinated with the GIS manufacturer to define the necessary
CT characteristics. A unit to limit high CT secondary voltages during faults shall be provided if
a high impedance type protection is used. The protection function shall not be affected during
transients and harmonics in power system over the range of system voltage and frequency
specified.
Sufficient relays shall be provided based on proposed scheme (High impedance, low
impedance centralized or decentralized scheme). Both Check and Disc zone relays shall be
provided with CT supervision relays in case high impedance busbar scheme is offered. In/out
selector switches shall be provided for low impedance protection, and for each zone scheme for
high impedance busbar protection. Direct driven auxiliary contacts from primary device shall be
used for busbar application. For high impedance application, check zone covering all sections
of busbars and separate Disc zone relays covering each section of busbars shall be provided.
Provide sufficient trip relays and trip logic to integrate circuit breaker fail trip logic signals in
addition to the trip circuits for the bus relays.
Provide two schemes of different types or from different manufacturer and production facility.
4.5.9 Feeder Bus Protection for 1 ½ Switch Station Configuration:
 For all feeders (line, transformer, reactor, future feeder, etc.) connected to a 1 ½ breaker
switch station, provide an overall protective system design to cover the section of bus
between the bay circuit breakers and the CTs on the controlled circuits;
 Provide for each circuit two primary protection systems divided into Group A and Group B,
connected to separate CT cores
 For each group, provide a high impedance differential or low impedance biased differential
phase by phase measuring scheme with individual phase fault indications. Design the
scheme to withstand through fault stability up to the circuit breaker rating while being
capable of operation under the minimum bus fault current conditions specified and be
appropriate for GIS stations;
 Ensure that the current transformers, provided by others if any, do not compromise the
protection's ability during CT saturation, and have a through fault stability level up to the
circuit breaker fault rating and coordinated with the GIS manufacturer to define necessary
CT and VT characteristics. A unit to limit high CT secondary voltages during faults shall
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 28
be provided if a high impedance type protection is provided. The protection shall not be
affected during transients and harmonics in power system over the range of system
voltage and frequency specified;
 Provide sufficient trip relays and trip logic to integrate circuit breaker fail trip logic signals in
addition to trip circuits for the bus relays;
 Provide two schemes of different types or from different manufacturer and production
facility.
4.5.10 Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection - Group B
Provide inverse time phase and earth fault overcurrent multi characteristic numerical protection
relays as conventional system backup with proven field experience.
Provide international standard inverse time curves to IEC 60255, these characteristics to be
selectable via the setting logic. Typically, Normal Inverse to be used for the line and bus
backup protection and Very Inverse for transformer backup protection.
Provide separately settable phase instantaneous overcurrent elements and ensure the
instantaneous elements can be blocked separately for both phase and earth fault elements.
Provide dedicated trip output contacts for instantaneous and inverse time elements together
with separate indicators for stage and phase. Connect these to the lockout and non-lockout trip
circuits, respectively, for respective circuits.
Provision for re-initiation logic to avoid malfunction when changing settings on load shall be
considered. Directional features may be required for some application based on protection logic
diagram.
Thermal overload function to be used for transformers and capacitor banks
4.5.11 Breaker Fail Relaying – Group A
Provide breaker fail relaying on each of the HV circuit breakers with the following features:
 A current check and timer scheme initiated by all the protection that trips the protected
circuit breaker. Ensure the scheme monitors the current separately in each breaker pole
for the line breakers and identifies a failure to trip if the current flowing in the circuit
breakers, that received a trip initiation, does not fall to zero in the set time. Ensure that the
relay will function correctly during single pole open conditions for the line breaker or
adjacent circuit;
 A timing range of 100 ms to 500 ms and a current relay adjustable to below the minimum
fault current infeed. Ensure the current measuring system has the same continuous and
short time thermal current rating as the breaker, irrespective of setting;
 A reset speed and level to give an acceptable safety margin for detecting circuit breaker
operation, taking into account any resistor switching provided;
 A separately isolatable, “second attempt” trip output to the failed circuit breaker before the
final time-out of the full failure scheme.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 29
Provide an interconnection into busbar and adjacent circuit protection trip circuits to clear all
“source” circuit breakers on the adjacent bus for bus side circuit breakers. Centre circuit
breaker to trip adjacent circuits only.
For a line breaker, provide an intertrip (DTT) send output to the teleprotections to clear the
remote end of the transmission line together with the necessary contacts for the initiation of the
intertrip channels for that circuit. Also, for the transformer circuits, provide a trip to the other
terminal or to the dc link protections as appropriate.
Provide isolation type test blocks, per breaker fail scheme, to isolate the intertrip send, bus trip
outputs and the start input circuits.
4.5.12 Circuit Breaker Remote Backup Protection
Provide, for remote backup protection non-directional, adjustable inverse-time characteristic

and instantaneous phase overcurrent relay and inverse-time characteristic and instantaneous
ground overcurrent relay for uncleared ground faults. See section 4.5.9 “Overcurrent and Earth
Fault Protection All Circuits Group B” for detailed requirements.
4.5.13 Tie-Line Under and Over Frequency and Directional Power Flow Protection
Provide definite time under and over frequency and import and export power flow protection
relays to protect the system from off-normal frequency and excessive power flow conditions at
the interface points between the GCCIA grid the GCCIA interconnected utilities. Ensure these
relays have pick-up/drop-off ratios better than 95% with a resetting time to ensure reset
following transient frequency and power flow excursions. Provide wide settings to cover the
actual range of system conditions specified.
Ensure these relays have fast operating characteristics consistent with reliable and secure
frequency and power flow detection.
4.5.14 Voltage Protections
Provide on each line entry definite time line undervoltage and overvoltage protection relays to
protect the system from off-normal voltage conditions. Ensure these relays have
pick-up/drop-off ratios better than 95% with a resetting time to ensure fast reset following
transient voltage excursions. Provide Stage 1 and Stage 2 settings to respectively trip locally or
remotely, via the DTT intertrip logic. Also provide in these relays, or by a separate device, stage
3 contacts for DCS/PLC logic control of bus reactor switching when required.
4.5.15 Protection Trip Circuits
Provide separate Group A and Group B high speed trip circuits for A and B circuit breaker trip
coils appropriate to the bus or line connected reactors. In addition, for the line connected
reactors, provide transfer trip connections to both teleprotection systems and to the DTT input
of the line differential protection. If the high-speed relays do not have sufficient contact break
capacity provide heavy duty parallel shorting relays across the high-speed contacts.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 30
4.5.16 Trip Circuit Supervision and Protection Supply Supervision Relaying
Provide trip circuit supervision relays to monitor each trip circuits in both open and closed
position. Whole circuits shall be monitored starting from initiating contacts to the trip coil.
Ensure monitor circuit functions correctly while trip relay is in operated position. Provide
suitable inbuilt time delays within the relays (at least 400ms) to prevent spurious alarms during
breaker tripping.
Use a combination of DC supervision relays and MCB alarm contact to monitor each separately
fused or protected 110 V DC supply used for protection. DC supervision relays shall also be
delayed (at least 100ms) to avoid false alarms.
Use protection alarm contacts for any VT secondary MCB type protection units to initiate an
alarm in both manual open or tripped condition. MCB’s used for protection cores of any VT, , to
be supplied with 3 single phase elements to ensure correct operation of the distance protection
VT monitoring circuits.
Supervision Facilities:
Provide continuous and periodic built-in supervision functions within the protection system to
increase its reliability. Any defect or failure shall be monitored.
a. Ac voltage inputs to the relay shall be continuously monitored for the loss of voltage (due
to a defect in either the primary or the secondary winding of the VT or an open
secondary VT circuit). This function shall select three pole tripping and initiate an alarm.
Other methods of VT supervision may also be acceptable subject to Engineer/Authority
approval.
b. Current inputs to the relay shall also be monitored for open circuits in the CT circuits.
This function shall provide an alarm along with a setting option to block tripping where
required;
c. Provision shall also be included to monitor the continuity of the trip circuits for each trip
coil of circuit breaker;
d. Circuits shall be provided, as part of each relay terminal, to detect the failure and the
restoration of the communication circuits. The circuits shall indicate which path, either
transmit path or receive path, has been disturbed. On detection of a communication
failure the relay shall be blocked. The following alarms and indications should also be
given:
- Local indication at the relay of the failure mode;

- An external alarm by means of the closure of a set of voltage free (dry) contacts;
- When communications links are recovered/normalized, at least 10 seconds delay
shall be considered to unblock the relay.
e) The internal static protection auxiliary voltage shall be monitored continuously and loss
of voltage shall close a contact and initiate an alarm.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 31
4.5.17 Test Facilities and Trip Isolation
In addition to the test facilities provided on each relay and on the protection signalling
equipment, provide, for each CT and VT system group, one ac type test block at the locations
shown in the drawings.
Provide test facilities to enable complete isolation of the relays from instrument transformers
without affecting other devices on the same circuit. Also provide facilities to use test plugs
either to inject test supplies to relays or check actual measurements flowing in the circuit from
instrument transformers. Spare test plugs for each type per station shall be supplied as loose
items.
Equip all CT disconnection points with shorting facilities on the CT side of the disconnection
point. Provide CT earth links to earth the CT neutral on the CT side of this disconnection point.
Ensure that each CT and/or VT circuit is normally earthed at one point only. Provide this earth
at the VT for VT circuits and at entering panel in the control/relay building for CT circuits. In
differential circuits, provide facilities to temporarily earth the unearthed CT(s) if disconnected
from the normal CT earth point.
Provide “Normal/Off/Test” and “Normal/Test” switches as indicated for the main protection and
for the various Protection Signalling Channels. In addition, provide isolation links between each
trip relay to circuit breaker trip coils and circuit breaker fail start circuits. These are indicated as
“-x-” on the trip logic diagrams. Provide appropriate labels.
Provide isolation type terminal blocks to isolate the auto-reclose scheme and all external
alarms. Isolation type terminal blocks shall be provided for the DCS DPU remote control and
indication interface connections.
4.5.18 Trip Logic
Provide trip logic systems to trip the respective circuit breakers and initiate automatic reclose as
appropriate.
In general, design of tripping scheme shall be in line with the protection logic diagram. Any
additional connections required during engineering stage shall be implemented and subject to
Engineer/Authority approval.
4.6 Communication between the Relays and the DCS/SCADA
Relays designed with IEC 61850 Protocol shall be suitable for connection to the redundant fiber
optic LAN for interface with SCMS/DCS/SAS”
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 32
4.7 General requirements for Control, Metering and Protection Panels
4.7.1 Electrical Equipment
All the applicable clauses of general technical requirements shall be applied.
4.7.2 Test Blocks
For the connection of CT and VT secondary current and voltage test cables, provide the panels
with meter test blocks of the blade type with CT shorting equivalent to ABB FT-1 devices.
Isolation facilities for VTs, DC connections to be considered and shorting and isolation provision
for CT connections to be considered.
In rear access of panels, provide the devices with the appropriate extended rear terminal
(ABB FT-1X) to facilitate the connections at the rear.
The type of test blocks used in scheme is subject to approval of local Utilities and may differ
between the custodian of interconnection stations.
4.7.3 Power Supplies
Direct control and main control circuits of the interposing relay control schemes, from the
synchronism check relays, from the trip and reclose circuits of the respective protection panels,
shall be at 110 V dc.
4.7.4 Panels
Each control, metering and protection panel shall be designed for the connection of no more
than 40 cables and limited to 500 external connections. For the control panels, Contractor shall
provide for the connections of 50 conductors for each breaker including control and alarms.
Base layout of the cubicles shall be arranged similar to single line diagram with all the
protection of one primary equipment located together. All arrangements are subject to approval
during detail engineering stage.
Provide, on a circuit-by-circuit basis interface between switchyard, protective systems,

protection signalling systems and control equipment either control or protection panels as
appropriate. Interposing CTs/VTs and repeat relays shall be avoided.
Provide space between the rows of panels such that safe access to operate test equipment,
add or remove relays, systems for complete panels is available. Rack mounted relay systems
with front and rear access shall be provided, swing frame panels are acceptable.
4.8 Programming of electronic devices
The Contractor is responsible for the programming, setting and configuration of all the
equipment supplied under the contract. This includes provisional start-up settings required for
factory test and/or site initial or final testing as appropriate.
For the internal logic and relay configuration, provide the principle logic diagrams for approval
along with dc scheme logics for approval.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 33
Contractor is responsible to advise recommended settings and setting principles to be adopted

for each system within his scope of supply. Contractor is also responsible to program all the
protection relays in accordance with the parameters as per final setting protection report. Relay
setting and final test shall be performed by OEM under witness of Engineer/Authority.
4.9 Factory Testing
Perform all type, routine and acceptance tests in accordance with ANSI and IEC Publications
and as specified in this specification and provide appropriate test reports and/or certified type
test statements prior to witness tests.
Provide type test reports for each relay system to ensure that the clearing times stated in this
Specification can be met. Where type test results are not available, make conjunctive short
circuit tests with appropriate CTs and/or VTs, or appropriately simulated or recorded CT and VT
signals, to confirm relay performance.
Functional tests to be carried out on each full scheme of protection, auto-reclose and trip logic
as a total system. The tests shall include temporary connection of sufficient equipment to
simulate the functioning of total scheme including relay models, circuit breakers together with
associated auxiliary contacts (two position latched relays) and disconnects where appropriate.
Include teleprotection systems, remote end panels and appropriate fibre optic interconnections.
Take timing charts of critical operations.
Functionally test the control panels to all output and input contacts. Where feasible, cross wire
to the relay panels as a combination functional test.
4.10 Programming Language
The application programs shall be written in a high-level function block language with graphic
representation. The language shall be specially developed for process control and shall easily
be understood by persons familiar with the process. Each function element shall be
represented as a building block with inputs and outputs.
A comprehensive library of tested and well documented function blocks shall be available for
use by the Engineer/Authority for modification and expansion of application programs. Blocks
with simple functions, such as a logic AND, as well as blocks with more advanced functions,
such as loop control, shall be available.
Application programming shall be performed by connecting inputs and outputs of a function

block to other function blocks or to process I/O. It shall be possible to print out graphic
documentation of the application programs on a printer connected to the programming unit.
The structure of the Contractor’s furnished application programs shall be based on the
functional structure of the EHV Substation. Each part of the station shall be allocated its own
program modules. It shall be possible to give different program modules in one controller
different cycle times and priorities.
The Engineer/Authority shall be able to modify and add application programs with the high-level
function block language and the definition of database parameters.
A system utilizing only ladder diagrams for the application programming is not acceptable.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 34
4.11 Required Spare Parts
Contractor shall provide a spare unit for each type of relay and equipment used in scheme and
not limited to protective relays, tripping relays, auxiliary relays, reclosers, synchronism check
relays, system synchronizers, revenue energy meters, test switch, etc. List of spare units along
with the price for each item shall be submitted along with the tender and subject to GCCIA
approval.
5 33KV PROTECTION PANELS
33kV control protection panel consist of Protection relays and BCU respectively for each feeder.
All protection relays and bay controllers (BCU) shall be provided in line with protection logic
diagram. Typically, four types of panels are considered specifically for Reactor Tertiary winding,
Auxiliary Transformer, Bus section and Cable feeder Protection Panels.
Panels design, appearance, arrangement and general particulars shall be similar to 400kV
panels and shall conform to clause 4.5.1.1. All remote operations including DCS/SCMS/SAS
shall be performed through Bay Controller Units located in each 33kV protection panels.
Protection relays, trip relays, auxiliary relays, terminals and associated connections including
CT, VT connections for a 33 kV circuit shall be arranged in one panel. All relays and controllers
shall be based on IEC 61850 standards and support dual connection to DCS LAN. Setting
/Parameterisation shall be possible from DCS workstations.
Protection panel shall consist of an alarm annunciator with minimum 16nos. of LED type
windows for alarms connections from 33kV GIS and Protection schemes. Alarm annunciator
shall be manufactured by reputed manufacturers and shall be provided with acknowledge, reset
and inbuilt lamp test features. Control switches used for local operation of the devices shall be
part of GIS cubicle and shall be in accordance with 33kV GIS specification.
All Alarms/Events except protection enabled functions from 33kV Switchgear shall be reported
to DCS/SAS through BCU. Protection alarms shall be directly reported to DCS from protection
IEDs. BCUs shall be suitable for control, metering and alarm reporting. Control mimic diagrams
shall be part of BCU display. Whether specifically mentioned or not a complete set of auxiliary
relays, control relays, interposing relays, terminals, wiring, test blocks etc. as necessary for safe
and reliable operation of the device and protection functions shall be deemed included in scope
of supply.
 33kV auxiliary winding feeder consists of one overcurrent relay for tertiary winding and
one ground protective relay across delta broken PT as detailed in section -4.5
 33/0.4 kV Auxiliary transformer feeder shall be provided with 4-pole, multi-characteristics,

over current and earth fault relay with high-set instantaneous elements as detailed in
section 4.5 along with energy meters. LV (415V) side protection shall be as detailed in
LVAC specification and located in LVAC panels.
 33 kV Cable feeder protection shall comprise of a pilot wire/fibre optic type, energy meter
current differential relay as main protection and numeric directional over current earth fault
relay as the back-up protection with thermal overload protection feature. Directional
features shall be included. Cable feeder protection shall be in line with the applicable
clauses in section 4.5, additionally local utility requirements also shall be considered.
016403-3000 48ES-5100 01 July 2024 35
 Bay controller with four current, three voltage channels along with control functions shall
be provided for each panels including bus section bay.
 33kV busbar protection based on low impedance or high impedance protection scheme
capable of detecting fault under all system and plant condition shall be provided. Overall
busbar protection scheme with two zones Busbar protection relays, trip relays, in/out
switches and components shall be accommodated in one panel. Operating time of busbar
protection relays shall not exceed 25ms at five times of setting current for high impedance
and less than 1.5 cycles for low impedance scheme. Suitable over voltage limiting devices
and stabilizing resistors shall be provided as necessary for high impedance scheme. Fault
check shall be performed using Incoming circuits over current relays in case of high
impedance protection scheme. CTs used for busbar protection application shall be
suitably designed and shall be confirm to international standards.
6 REMOTE END MODIFICATIONS
The remote end work includes modification of protection panels, removal or replacement of
panels (if required), supply and installation of protection relays or any other works associated to
scope of works. It is the responsibility of contractor whether specifically mentioned or not
installed protection meets the performance requirements in all aspects as per international
codes and standards.
All interface connections required as per proposed design including DCS, telecom, busbar
protection, digital fault recorder/SOE, annunciator, fibre optic distribution panels, telecom etc
shall be included in scope of supply. Adequacy calculation for remote end CT/VT shall be
submitted. New CTs shall be supplied if the rating of remote end CTs are insufficient to meet
requirements of the protection scheme and same shall be deemed included in overall quoted
price. Alternately Contractor may propose an alternate suitable protection scheme that can be
applied with the existing CT. Remote end works shall be coordinated with Primary circuit outage
and shall be carried out with minimum outage duration.
Works includes replacement of labels on associated panels, circuits, GIS or any other interface
panels. If the remote end station is under construction or carried out by others, proper
coordination between two parties shall be ensured to avoid any mismatch in selection of relays
or any associated works. Works shall also include up gradation of existing relays to meet the
connection to new station or replace the existing relay with new one if upgrade is not possible. It
is the responsibility of Contractor to ensure that the Main protection relays are correctly
matched at both ends where applicable.
Always follow lock out safety procedures while doing remote end works. The remote end
method statement and associated drawings shall be submitted for Engineer/Authority approval.
In addition to GCCIA specification, applicable specification of interconnection utilities may be
applied wherever inter grid connections are required. Where additional relay equipment is to be
installed in an existing station, it is the responsibility of the Bidder/Contractor to ensure that the
existing batteries and chargers have sufficient capacity to meet the additional load requirements
of the new equipment.
If these capacities are not sufficient, the Bidder/Contractor shall extend the dc system with a
new set of redundant chargers and batteries with the required capacity. This work shall also
cover the extension of the dc distribution system with additional MCBs. Same applies for
requirements of AC supplies.
GCCIA
EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR SET
016403-2000-47ES-4360 Rev.01
July 2024
Emergency Diesel Generator Set # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR SET 1

1.1 General 1
1.2 Operational Requirements 1
4.1 General 2
4.1.1 Altitude and Other ambient Conditions 3
4.1.2 Operating Conditions 3
4.2 Design and Manufacture 4
4.2.1 Engine 4
4.2.2 Alternator 4
4.2.3 Control Panel 5
4.2.4 Battery and Battery Charger 7
4.3 Grounding 8
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 8
6.1 Engine 9
6.2 Alternator 9
6.3 Complete Assembled Set 9
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 1
1 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR SET
1.1 General
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of emergency diesel generator set to be
installed in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA)
Emergency diesel generator will operate as standby power supply to feed the essential loads of
the substation’s auxiliary services.
The rating shall not less than 300kW. However, the Contractor shall size the Emergency
Generator Set according the total essential loads installed in station including the planned
extension of the Substation at the final stage and same subject to Engineer approval.
The diesel generator room shall be adequately ventilated to ensure that efficient cooling of the
diesel generator set takes place under all full load and ambient conditions. A separate room
shall be built in a suitable location near the switchgear building for the Diesel Generator set.
1.2 Operational Requirements
The changeover to the emergency generator shall be achieved automatically on the failure of
the mains supply.
The diesel generator set shall start automatically upon loss of main supply or under voltage and
automatically change over to feed the substation essential bus of LVAC supply board.
The diesel generator set shall shut down automatically and supply shall transfer back to the
mains when the mains supply has been restored and maintained for a minimum period of 15
minutes.
No paralleling of LV supplies (from Diesel generator set and from station service/auxiliary
transformers) shall occur.
Quick and continuously acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the
generator line-to-line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator
voltage within the acceptable limits.

016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 2
ASTM D396 Standard Specification for fuel oils
IEC60034 Rotating electrical machines
IEEE 1115 Sizing Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications
IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
ISO 9001 Quality Systems Model for Quality Assurance in Final design development,
production, installation and servicing.
4.1 General
The diesel generator sets will be used as emergency standby and backup power supply for the
substation’s auxiliary services.
The diesel generator set shall come with a diesel engine directly coupled to an alternator
mounted on a steel frame structure with skids and necessary dampers and floor anchors.
The Contractor shall include all the equipment and components necessary to complete the set
as a fully operational unit namely control cabinet, electric starter, battery, charger exhaust
system, fuel day tank, cables, piping, etc.
All mechanical and electrical accessories shall be mounted on the generator set except for the
control cabinet and charger that should be located in the enclosure beside the generator set.
The day fuel tank will be preferably installed inside at the bottom of the enclosure.
The exhaust pipe and muffler shall extend outside the enclosure through convenient wall
openings.
The set shall be complete with all ancillary plant such as fuel, cooling and exhaust systems,
control and alarm panels, mains failure detection and automatic changeover panel, switchgear,
automatic changeover equipment’s, interconnecting wiring and cabling from Generator to LVAC
and all other equipment required for the operation of the set whether or not referred to in this
Specification.
The Gen set shall be capable to overload of 10% in excess of this output for one hour in any
period of 6 hours of consecutive running.
The capacity of fuel tank shall not be less than the daily service requirements for the engine
(8 hours run at full load) as part of generator set. Contractor is responsible for design and
testing of fuel tank as per latest code of practice.
The manufacturer shall provide Contacts for the connection with the SCMS. All alarms in the
substation shall be according to latest scada signal list attached with the specification and
should be initiated as per the Signal list.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 3
The fire detection system shall cut off the fuel supply from the main tank to the service tank in
the event of fire and it shall also shut down the ventilation system of the diesel generator house.
Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit, and all set-
mounted ancillary apparatus
The Contractor shall size the DG Set rating according the total essential loads installed in station
including the planned extension and submit the relevant details for Engineer's approval. The
listed rating are minimum requirements which shall be correlated with project specific
requirements.
The DG controller shall be provided with communication protocol to transfer data to substation
SCADA system.
4.1.1 Altitude and Other ambient Conditions
The diesel generator set shall be designed to operate normally at specified voltage and power
under the climatic and ambient conditions prevailing at the corresponding substation which
means that the diesel generator set shall supply power at rated capacity, altitude, temperature,
humidity and other specified substation environmental conditions.
4.1.2 Operating Conditions
The generator's electric output circuit breaker will be connected directly to an automatic transfer
switching panel (supplied by others).
The generator will not operate in parallel with the network.
The diesel generator unit must automatically start upon reception of a starting signal from the
transfer panel, within a maximum delay of 60 seconds.
During a power failure of the main network the control, protection, start-up system and auxiliary
devices of the diesel generator unit shall be completely autonomous and be powered only by
the diesel generator set battery.
The all-essential loads to be supplied by the generator set such as:
a. Substation battery chargers

b. Outdoor lighting
c. Transformers fan motors
d. Domestic loads: lighting, pumps, heating and air conditioning
e. UPS for computer and control systems, etc.
A certain number of loads are single phase loads for which the generator set will be exposed to
neutral current.
The generator set shall be designed in such a manner that the speed and voltage is maintained
within the specified ranges, (refer to Technical Data Schedule). When the generator pick-up in
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 4
a single step, 50% of nameplate kW at power factor of 0.8 and assuming the full load within 10
seconds of start-up.
4.2 Design and Manufacture
4.2.1 Engine
The type of diesel engine shall comply with the latest edition of the International Standard
Specification No. ISO 3046 and shall be of the four-stroke, multi-cylinder, water-cooled, cold
start, direct fuel injection, compression ignition, turbo-charged type.
The engine shall be equipped with a day tank and all the necessary devices for its autonomous
operation and personnel security. These are: fan, radiator and pump, exhaust, guard for
moving parts, oil pump, day tank, speed regulator, electric starter, filters, etc. The engine shall
be drip-proof and dust-proof. The engine shall be provided with block heater to insure starting.
The diesel generator set shall be placed such that the hot air of the radiator is directed out of
the enclosure through a wall louvered opening. The air shall flow from the cooling fan through
the radiator and outdoor. The supply includes all the necessary accessories for the air outlet of
the enclosure wall.
The air inlet for combustion and cooling will come from enclosure louvered wall openings.
All parts and accessories for exhaust pipe installation including flexible couplings, wall thimble
and supports must be supplied with the set
4.2.2 Alternator
The a.c. generator shall be mounted on a common high bedplate and directly coupled to diesel
engine.
The generator shall be designed for operation of 10% engine overload at any power factor
between unity. The generator shall be complete with all necessary cooling fans, excitation and
voltage regulating equipment.
The generator shall be star connected. All windings shall have Class F insulation and tropical
impregnation. Winding temperature rises shall correspond to requirements for Class B
insulation.
The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the
generator in matching the required loading conditions.
The alternator shall be of the synchronous type, brushless, self-excited with rotating diodes and
inductor. Electrical insulation shall be of the non-water non-hygroscopic type and tropicalised.
The alternator housing shall be designed as drip-proof and dust-proof.
The neutral winding of alternator shall be isolated and grounded in the LV switchgear only. The
grounding circuit shall be supervised by the means of a neutral-to-ground fault relay. Provisions
for heating element and an adjustable thermostat shall be included to prevent condensation.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 5
4.2.3 Control Panel
A sheet steel, dustproof control cubicle to IP55 complete with all electrical connections to the
generator, engine protective devices, speed control and engine start/stop controls shall be
provided.
The cubicle shall be fitted with the following equipment: -
1. Alarm for indication of voltage, current and engine trouble
2. Indication of generator frequency, power, currents and voltages, battery charging

current and voltage
3. Four-pole generator circuit breaker
4. Alarm lamps and lamp test push button
5. Oil Pressure gauge
6. Engine start/stop control switch with key
7. Engine speed controls
8. OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO switch
9. Emergency stop push button
Following electrical and mechanical protections shall be provided:
1. Generator overload protection
2. Over current and earth fault
3. High stator temperature
4. Over voltage
5. High Water Temperature
6. Loss of or Low Oil Pressure
7. Over speed
8. High Lubricating Oil Temperature
4.2.3.1 Generator Breaker
Generator shall be provided with suitable air break circuit breaker of appropriate rating.
Interlocks shall be provided between the Generator breaker and the LVAC incoming breakers to
avoid inadvertent operation of both.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 6
4.2.3.2 Components and Accessories
Associated accessories with Diesel Engine - Generator set mainly comprising of:
 Air intake
 Exhaust System
 Cooling Water System
 Fuel Oil System
 Lubricating Oil System
4.2.3.3 Construction
The control panels must be manufactured with cold-laminated steel of 2.5mm thickness and a
frame of welded steel profiles. The panels must be provided with installation plates over the
lateral internal sides of the panel for the installation of components and devices.
The panel front door must be lockable, the key must be extracted in both locked and unlocked
position (two sets of keys shall be supplied).
The Contractor shall provide a removable metal for installation of gland connectors.
4.2.3.4 Components Installation
All equipment installed in the panel shall be easily accessible and within convenient reach and
visibility of an average person (1 - 2 m). No device or wiring shall impede the removal of
another device.
All equipment mounted on/or in the panel, shall be clearly identified by labels and nameplates.
Withdrawable devices shall carry identification on both base and withdrawable element.
Equipment mounted on/or inside the panels shall be mounted on stringer and shall not be
mounted directly on the panel sides.
In general, HMI, relays, switches, mimic accessories, measuring instruments, lamps and
annunciators must be manufactured for flush installation on front side of panel. Blank plates will
be installed to cover unused space provided for future device installation.
Terminal blocks, circuit breakers, auxiliary transformers, transducers and auxiliary relays shall
be installed on two lateral walls, inside of panel.
4.2.3.5 Nameplates
Each panel component shall be identified with a traffolyte material or white laminated plastic
plate, with letters engraved in black colour. A stainless-steel rating plate shall be installed on
the panel.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 7
4.2.3.6 Wiring
The control and protective wiring must be insulated with fluoropolymer fireproof 600/1000V
insulation material. The minimum wire size acceptable is 2.5 mm 2 for the wiring, except for
alarm signals and other specialized instruments.
The wires shall be the following colours:
 Current circuit (CT) RYB;

 Voltage circuit (VT) RYB;
 Control circuits - Gray;
 Grounding Y/G.
All wires shall be of 19 strands copper (minimum) type.
The Contractor shall install terminal blocks for:
 Power supply;
 External incoming cables.
The terminal blocks of type Entrelec / Weidmuller or equivalent shall be installed on

asymmetrical rails.
The terminal block arrangement and identification shall be strictly in accordance with the
drawings included in this specification (see appendix).
The Contractor shall provide 20% of spare terminals for customer’s use.
The entrance of cables shall be from the bottom of the panel by means of cable glands.
4.2.3.7 Grounding
A grounding bus shall be installed at the bottom of the panel. The grounding bus must be
provided with screw type terminals for grounding of devices and components.
All earth connections shall be made via bolted identified earth links, which can be unbolted to
permit routine testing.
4.2.3.8 Lighting, outlets and heater
Each panel shall be provided with a convenient door-switched lamp, a double 240 Vac single-
phase outlet, and a thermostat-controlled heater.
4.2.4 Battery and Battery Charger
The battery shall come with a stand located on the generating set skid. The connection cables
between the battery, control panel, starter and battery charger shall be included in the supply.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 8
The main function of the battery is to start the generating unit and to feed its control circuits.
The capacity of the battery shall allow for 10 consecutive starts of the engine during an average
of 20 second each. During this period of time (200 seconds) the battery shall maintain sufficient
voltage to ensure the operation of the control circuits.
The battery charger shall be designed for wall mounting with thyristors, electronic voltage
regulator and a two-winding transformer. The dc output current of the charger shall be equal to
the charging current of the battery during a 10-hour period, plus the constant load current of the
generator control, metering and protective circuit (excluding engine starter) engine starters.
The Contractor shall provide a battery and battery charger calculation brief for the
Engineer's review at time of drawings submittal.
4.3 Grounding
The frame of the generating set enclosure must be provided with two grounding connectors for
300 mm2 stranded copper cables on each side of the frame.
The charger must also be equipped with a grounding bus with connectors.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility of the Contractor ensure
the coordination of the engineering and of the procurement, in order to guarantee compatibility
and completeness of the overall installation:
a. The frame of the generating set enclosure, complete with anchor bolts and dampers;
b. The exhaust piping system, complete with all supports, accessories and wall thimble
The fuel tanks shall be complete with filler cap, contents gauge and electric fuel transfer pump,
combined overflow and vent pipe and sludge valve and complete with the piping between the
tank and the generating set
Terminal blocks of the control cabinet and main output circuit breaker
Armored cables to be included in the supply: cables between the generator set components
such as battery, charger, control cabinet, generator instruments and switches…
Remote control interface with digital cable and computer software.
Specialised slings or devices for handling the generator enclosure.
of Prices.
016403-2000-47ES-4360 01 July 2024 9
The Contractor must submit, for the Engineer's acceptance, a test program developed to prove
compliance of the equipment with the characteristics indicated in the Technical Data Schedules
on the basis of the standards indicated in the Technical Data Schedules that include the
following (not limitative):
The Engineer reserves the right to witness all or part of the tests.
6.1 Engine
a. Vibration
b. Lubrication
c. Carburation
d. Speed regulation
e. Shut-off at maximum speed
f. Temperature
g. Pressure
6.2 Alternator
a. No-load test
b. Loading test (15 minutes)
c. Overspeed test
d. Dielectric test
e. Insulation measurement
f. Control of voltage, current, kilowatts, power factor, kVA, excitation voltage and field
current
6.3 Complete Assembled Set
a. Full load test

b. Over load test
c. Check on all Alarms and Trips.
d. Demonstration of automatic start-up
e. Demonstration of manual start-up
f. Demonstration of voltage regulation
g. Demonstration of automatic shut-off in case of fault
h. Demonstration of speed regulation
i. Demonstration of over speed trip.
GCCIA
MV XLPE POWER CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
016403-2000-47ES-5280 Rev.01
July 2024
MV XLPE Power Cables & Accessories # Date Page

16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 MV XLPE POWER CABLES AND ACCESSORIES 1
1.1 General 1
3 STANDARDS 1
4 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS FOR XLPE CABLE 2
4.1 Design Criteria 2

4.2 Materials 3
4.2.1 Conductor 3
4.2.2 Conductor Shield 3
4.2.3 Insulation 3
4.2.4 Insulation Shield 3
4.2.5 Insulation Metallic Screen 3
4.2.6 Moisture Impervious Layers 3
4.2.7 Jacket 4
4.2.8 Conductive Layer 4
4.3 Fabrication 4
4.4 Tests 4
4.5 Packing and shipping 5
4.6 Cable Marking 5
4.7 Drum Markings 6
5 INSTALLATION AND MAINTANANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
5.1 Installation 6
5.2 Asset Protection Measures: 7
6 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS FOR XLPE CABLE ACCESSORIES7
6.1 Design Criteria 7

6.2 Joints 8
6.3 Terminations (Conventional) 8
6.4 Terminations (Plug in) 9
6.5 Type and Routine Tests 9
6.6 Packaging and Storage 9
6.7 Installation 9
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 1
1 MV XLPE POWER CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
1.1 General
This document outlines, from a technical point-of-view, the applicable minimum requirements
for design, manufacture and testing of MV Power Cables and Accessories to be installed in
the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Projects
Requirements 016403-2000-47ES-0000
MV cables, predominantly of 33 kV voltage grade unless otherwise specified will be used in

general for any one or more of the following interconnections in proposed substations. Bidder
shall ascertain from Bid drawings, the specific interconnection requirements and propose the
size of cables and appropriate accessories of requisite voltage grade.
 Connect the substation services transformers to the tertiary winding of power

autotransformers and to the auxiliary winding of earthing transformer
 Connect the substation services transformers to the auxiliary winding of 400 kV Shunt
Reactors
It is Contractor’s responsibility to determine the cable conductor cross sectional area required
and appropriate accessories considering the following:
 Current rating capacity at maximum permissible operating temperature

 Emergency overloading capability as specified in the Technical Data Schedules
 Short-circuit withstand capability
 Voltage stresses in conductor screen & insulation.
3 STANDARDS
ASTM B8 Standard specification for concentric-lay-stranded copper conductor, hard,

medium-hard or soft.
ASTM B33 Standard specification for tin coated soft or annealed copper wire for electrical
purposes.
AEIC CS8 Specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV
IEC 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC 60229 Tests on extruded over sheaths with a special protective function
IEC 60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 2
IEC 60287 Electric Cables -Calculation of the current rating

IEC-60332 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire conditions
IEC 60502-2 Part 2- Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36
kV)
IEC 60502-4 Part 4—Test requirements on accessories for cables with rated voltages from 6 kV
(Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60811-1 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables and
optical cables
IEC 60885-3 Electrical test methods for electric cables
IEC 60986 Guide to the short circuit temperature limits of electric cables with a rated voltage
from 1.8/3 (3.6) kV to 18/30 (36) kV.
IEC 60949 Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents, taking into account of
non-adiabatic heating effect
IEEE 404 Standards for cable joints for use with extruded dielectric cables rated 5000V to
46000V
IEEE 386 IEEE Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems Rated 2.5 kV through 35 kV
IEEE 48 Standards for test procedures for AC high voltage cable terminations.
IEC 61442 Electric cables –Test methods for power cable accessories of rated voltage from
6kV to 36kV.
IEC 60238 Mechanical connectors for power cables of Aluminium or copper
EN 50181 Plug in type Bushings above 1Kv up to 52 kV and from 250 A to 2.5 kA for liquid
filled Transformers
ENA-TS-09-13 Performance Specifications for High Voltage Heat Shrinkable Components for
usage with High voltage Solid type Cables up to 33000V
4 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS FOR XLPE CABLE
4.1 Design Criteria

The MV power cables shall be designed for ambient conditions specified in the Specification
“General Technical Requirements – 016403-2000-47ES-0000
The cables shall be designed to withstand a conductor temperature of 130°C without any
detrimental effects on any of its components. However, the sizing shall be based on a
maximum continuous operating temperature of 90°C and emergency loading temperature of
115°C.
The ratings and dimensions of 33 kV power cables shall be sized by bidder in relation to
requirements under project scope.
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 3
4.2 Materials
4.2.1 Conductor
The conductor shall be round, compacted, shaped or circular stranded copper class 2 per IEC
60228. For cables with conductor cross sections of >1100 mm2 it shall be segmental and for
cross sections of ≤ 1100 mm2 shall be non-segmental. The conductor shall be longitudinally
water blocked by applying suitable materials between conductor strands
4.2.2 Conductor Shield
The conductor shield of cable, shall consist of an extruded black thermosetting semi-conducting
material compatible with the conductor and the XLPE insulation.
The outer surface of the conductor shield shall be smooth and shall be firmly bonded to the
overlying insulation and shall have allowable operating temperature equal or higher than
insulation. The extruded shield shall be easily removable from the conductor.
4.2.3 Insulation
The insulation shall be super clean cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) applied by dry curing
process. The thickness of the insulation shall be as specified in standards and shall meet the
minimum nominal insulation thickness according to IEC 60502-2.
4.2.4 Insulation Shield
The insulation shield shall consist of strippable extruded black thermosetting semi-conducting
material compatible with the XLPE insulation. The inner surface of the insulation shield shall
adhere continuously to the outer surface of the insulation and shall have no tendency to
separate from the insulation due to the effect of bending during installation, load cycling and
short circuits under service conditions.
4.2.5 Insulation Metallic Screen
The metallic screen shall consist of annealed copper tape with suitable overlay or alternatively
shall consist of a layer of annealed bare copper wires with equalizing copper tapes.
The total effective cross-sectional area of the metallic screens shall be suitable for withstanding
an earth fault current and duration as per system requirements.
4.2.6 Moisture Impervious Layers
The moisture impervious layers shall consist of the following:
a) First Layer (longitudinal water barrier) - a layer of semi- conductive water blocking
tape between insulation shield and the metallic sheath. The thickness of this first
moisture impervious layer shall be independent of that of the extruded insulation
shield and same shall be compatible with adjacent layer in contact with.
b) Second Layer (longitudinal water barrier) - a layer of semi-conductive water

blocking tape between the metallic sheath and the jacket.
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 4
c) Designs with additional radial water sealing comprising polymer laminated

aluminum tapes below the jacket is preferred.
4.2.7 Jacket
The jacket material shall be black linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) or linear medium
density polyethylene (LMDPE). The LLDPE or LMDPE jacket shall be ultra violet ray resistant.
The nominal thickness at any point of the jacket shall be as per IEC 60502-2. The jacket
insulation shall withstand 10 kV voltage during post commissioning periodic integrity tests.
4.2.8 Conductive Layer
A conductive layer shall be applied over the jacket to serve as an electrode for testing the
integrity of the jacket.
4.3 Fabrication
The conductor shield, cross-linked polyethylene insulation and insulation shield shall be
extruded by the triple extrusion method to assure homogeneity between the insulation and the
semi-conducting shields. The insulation shield shall be bonded firmly and continuously to the
insulation. The cross-linking process shall be by the dry cure dry cooling method.
Power cables shall be free of material and manufacturing defects which would prevent them
from meeting the requirements of this Specification.
4.4 Tests
All test reports shall be provided for review and acceptance by the Engineer.
A. Type Tests
Type tests shall be performed on proposed MV cables in accordance with applicable standards
and specification requirements.
Repetition of Type tests is not required if earlier conducted type tests fulfil the above conditions.
Type test reports are acceptable if the tests were performed at an approved independent third-
party laboratory or at Manufacturer’s facility witnessed by approved third party inspector.
B. Routine and Sample Tests
Routine and sample tests shall be conducted as per IEC 60502-2 and test results shall be
submitted for review and acceptance by Engineer.
C. Factory Witness Tests
Factory Acceptance tests comprising Electrical and non-electrical tests shall be conducted on
10% of selected drums. As a minimum the following tests shall be carried out under witness of
client /engineer
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 5
a) Electrical Tests:
1. Measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors
2. Measurement of resistance of metallic screen
3. Partial discharge test
4. Voltage test
5. DC voltage test on over-sheath according to IEC 60229
b) Non - Electrical Tests
1. Conductor examination.
2. Check for construction and dimensions
3. Hot set test for XLPE insulation.
4. Strip ability test for insulation non-metallic screen.
5. Amber, Contaminant, Void & Protrusion test as per AEIC CS8 (one sample in each type)
c) Physical inspection of cable, drum and packing.
4.5 Packing and shipping

In addition to the applicable items as detailed in General Technical Requirements 016403-2000-
47ES-0000, packing and shipping of the cable shall conform to the following:
The cable ends shall be sealed with a waterproof, heat shrinkable plastic or elastomeric end
caps with adhesive sealing compound. Cable ends shall be brought out & secured to the drum.
Cables shall be delivered without splices, on standard sized non-returnable steel drums of
sturdy construction properly packed and lagged externally to prevent possible damage to the
cable during transportation. Wood lagging of minimum 50mm thickness shall be used and the
wood lagging shall also be secured with steel straps to provide physical protection for the
cables during transit, storage and handling operations.
The arbor hole for wooden drum (if utilized) shall be reinforced with galvanized steel plates. The
minimum diameter of the drum shall be not less than the minimum bending diameter of the
concerned power cable.
4.6 Cable Marking

The jacket for all cables shall be marked by embossing in English at intervals not exceeding
one meter with the following minimum information:
a) Voltage
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 6
b) Type of insulation
c) Conductor cross sectional area, mm 2 and material
d) The manufacturer's name or trademark
e) Year of manufacture
f) Cumulative length marking at each one-meter interval with the highest marked numeral
on the outer end of the cable
4.7 Drum Markings

Cable drums shall be marked in legible and indelible letters giving the following particulars on
both sides of the drum in addition to suggestive pulling directional arrow:
a) Cable voltage and conductor size

b) Type of cable
c) Length and weight of cable on drum
d) Gross weight
e) Dimensions of drum
f) Manufacturer's name and country of origin
g) Purchase Order number
I) Serial number of drum
5 INSTALLATION AND MAINTANANCE REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Installation
The cables will be installed in strict observance of manufacturer’s instructions especially with
regards to handling and pulling tension to avoid damaging the cables. Each cable shall be run in
one continuous length between terminal equipment without joints. Metallic screens of MV
cables shall be connected to earth on any one terminal end. All cables shall be contained &
supported by suitable means and no cable shall be left unsupported or hanging.
The cables shall be segregated on the basis of their group and of their use MV cables and other
cables such as DC, Data signals, LV power, telecommunication etc. by utilizing different routes
or by providing sufficient separation space to nullify inter dependent impacts.
Contractor shall supply and install all required cable management systems with associated
supports, metal work etc. Design calculations for strength adequacy of the cable supports shall
be submitted for approval of Authority. No cable shall be laid directly on the floor.
Cable ladders, trays, supports and trunks shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel as per General
Technical Requirements Specification 016403-2000-47ES-0000
MV Power cables shall be laid on ladders, whereas FO cables are to be laid on perforated trays
with cover. Tray or ladder with Minimum width of 450/600mm shall be provided for MV Cables.
Cables shall not come in contact with sharp edges or abrasive surfaces during installation and
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 7
adequate protection shall be provided. Bending radius shall not be less than 15 times the cable
diameter.
If routed through ducts, the ducts shall be cleaned prior to cable pulling and ducts lubricated
with cable pulling compound. Where required, pulleys and rollers shall be utilized to guide the
cables along the path and to limit the pulling tension and side wall pressure. The cables on
trays/ladders shall be bound by suitable cleats. Cable trays/ladders shall have enough spare
room for future use.
Cables run on trays and ladders shall be neatly dressed and secured by cleats. Ends of the
cables shall be capped during installation till the time prior to final connection. Every cable shall
be supported at a point not more than 500 mm from its termination.
Cables shall also be drawn into pipes or ducts or laid in formed trenches or troughs or on racks
or supported in trays with suitable fixing arrangement as required by GCCIA. Where cables are
laid in formed trenches, the installation shall include for the removal and replacement of the
trench covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on the trenches where they
cross access ways. Cable trays/ladders shall be heavy-duty and galvanized in accordance with
BS EN ISO 146.
Contractor shall supply and install all components and accessories required to secure the
cables on the supports, without risk or damage, in a neat and orderly manner. The spacing shall
be approved by GCCIA.
The design of cable support for cables installed in air in cable basements, trenches, shall
consist of vertical steel members spaced at approved intervals and secured to the walls, floors
and ceilings as necessary by means of bolts either cemented in position or expanded into cored
holes. The design and construction of all supporting arrangements and cable fixing
arrangement shall suit the cable system design.
5.2 Asset Protection Measures:
MV cables contained in basements, trenches and if stipulated by local Civil Defense Authority at
other areas shall be provided with coat of fire-retardant paint. The fire-retardant material shall
be compatible with the cable jacket material. The material and paint applicator (execution
agency) shall be of compliant with norms of local civil defense Authority.
6 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS FOR XLPE CABLE ACCESSORIES
6.1 Design Criteria
The joints and terminations shall be suitable for installation at indoors and outdoors in GCC
Countries in salt laden dusty atmosphere where the maximum humidity of 100% and maximum
ambient temperature of 50º C can be experienced. The terminations and joints shall be
suitable for XLPE insulated single core or three core MV cables in 3 phase, 50Hz system
usually with highest system voltages of 12kV & 36kV.
The assembled joints and terminations along with interface components forming part of the
supply system shall meet or exceed the performance of respective cables. Full drawings of the
joints or terminations out lining all parts together with pertinent dimensions & tolerances shall be
submitted for Engineer/Employer review.
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 8
Shelf life of cable accessories shall be minimum three years from the date of supply.
6.2 Joints
The joints shall meet all requirements of ENA – TS- 09-13 and shall be designed such that no
insulating or semiconducting tapes shall be required, except void filler tape & sealing mastic
tapes.
The joints shall be suitable for connecting two XLPE insulated cables of same size or dissimilar
sizes or for Transition between XLPE insulated & Paper insulated cables. The ferrules shall be
suitable for AL/CU or CU/AL connections. Heat shrinkable components shall be irradiated and
heat stabilized and free from pin holes, cracks, incisions & other visible defects.
Electric stress control for the cable insulation screen shall be achieved by heat shrinkable
tubing. This tubing shall be of anti track, flame retardant material with defined impedance
characteristic, volume resistivity and dielectric constant. The diameter of heat shrinkable
materials shall reduce to predetermined size upon application of heat in excess of 120 ºC
yielding a minimum shrink ratio of 3 to 1 and a maximum longitudinal shrinkage of 5%.
Sealing of the interfaces between heat shrinkable materials and/or cable surfaces shall be
achieved by using a track resistant sealant or a hot melt adhesive. Where necessary this
sealant/ adhesive shall be precoated inside the heat shrinkable components and activated by
the heat applied to shrink the components. The adhesive shall have a softening temperature of
not less than 90º C in accordance with ASTM E28, be compatible with other components of
joints & cables, and after curing shall not flow at temperatures of normal service.
A galvanized steel joint case/ shell made of two interlockable halves shall be provided for
mechanical protection of the joints.
6.3 Terminations (Conventional)
Terminations shall be of Straight type and/or angle type boot for indoor/outdoor use for
termination of XLPE insulated cables in air insulated cable boxes of transformers and
switchgears.
The cable accessories design shall be based on the use of pre-engineered heat-shrinkable/cold
shrinkable tubing/pre-molded parts to provide for the functions of adequate insulation, electrical
stress control, electrical screening, sealing against water ingress and environmental protection
as necessary. The insulation tubing shall be suitable for indoor & outdoor installation, ultra violet
and chemical resistant and preferably with out adhesive coatings. The tail lengths of kits/core
insulation shall not be less than 450mm for Transformer and switch gear terminations
Each termination kit shall be complete in all respects including cable lugs, materials for core
cleaning, crotch sealing, and earthing kit along with product catalogs, material data sheets,
assembly instructions and drawings. Each outdoor terminating kit (Pole type) shall be complete
in all respects including crimping type cable lugs (Cu / Al, if required), mechanism to prevent
flexing of terminated cores, solder less earthing system, with spring type molded rain sheds,
sealing sleeves, insulation tubes etc. The tail length of the kit / core insulation length shall not
be less than 900mm. If specified and where applicable the over head line insulators and
necessary galvanized steel support system (T-brackets) shall be included as per project scope.
16403-2000-47ES-5280 01 July 2024 9
Copper sockets (lugs) for connecting the power cable copper conductors to copper terminal of
the equipment (e.g. Transformer/ Switchgear, etc.) shall be made from electrolytic copper and
shall be tin plated. Crimping type sockets shall be of tubular type with a barrel and straight
terminal palm and conforms to Class A as per IEC 61238-1-3. Suitable hole(s) for the bolt shall
be provided on the palm.
6.4 Terminations (Plug in)
The Plug-in cable terminations shall be designed to consist of suitable separable connectors,
bushing and an outer metallic body suitable for single core XLPE cables of sizes ranging from
95 sqmm to 630 sqmm or as specified in project scope of work.
The tenderer shall obtain all pertinent details of the Switchgear/Reactor/Transformer or other
equipment and guaranteed minimum technical particulars of respective cables and ascertain
suitability of proposed terminations to the switchgear or other equipment and cables. The plug-
in terminations shall be type tested to the requirements of DIN VDE 0278 – 629.
The separable connector shall be designed for plug in to the bushing & mechanically bolted to
it. The bushing shall be dimensioned and designed to meet the requirements of DIN EN 50180
& DIN EN 50181or any other equivalent international standard. The outer metallic body shall be
The plug-in terminations kits shall include all components /accessories comprising one piece
insulating body made of silicon rubber or EPDM, conductor clamp with contact pin, metal
enclosure, fixing elements, cable lugs for earthing connections, braided copper tape, heat
shrinkable tubing etc. Each kit shall contain the complete drawing, assembly & installation
instructions etc.
6.5 Type and Routine Tests
All applicable tests shall be performed on MV cable accessories in accordance with the latest
version of the relevant International Standards. Certified copies of the type test reports shall be
provided for Engineer/Employer review. Routine test reports shall be submitted prior to dispatch
of accessories.
6.6 Packaging and Storage
Components shall normally be supplied in a package as a complete joint or termination, which

shall be clearly marked with the supplier's name, reference number, batch references, voltage,
application and cable size. Packaging shall be designed to protect against ingress of moisture
and mechanical damage.
Components shall be capable of being stored without deterioration within the temperature range
of – 10 ºC to + 50 ºC
6.7 Installation
Accessories shall be installed only by experienced Jointers / Terminators who are assessed and
certified by respective manufacturers or local utilities.
GCCIA
LV CONTROL AND POWER CABLES
016403-2000-47ES-5200 Rev.01
July 2024
LV Power and Control Cables # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 LOW VOLTAGE POWER AND CONTROL CABLES 1

1.1 General 1
2.1 Standards 1
3.1 Design and Construction 2
3.1.1 Conductors 2
3.1.2 Insulation 2
3.1.3 Core Identification 2
3.1.4 Armour 2
3.1.5 Jacket 3
3.1.6 Wire Identification 3
3.1.7 Cable Marking and Identification 3
3.1.8 Sealing and Drumming 3
3.1.9 Packing and Shipping 4
4 CABLE GLANDS 4
5 INSTALLATION AND MAINTANANCE REQUIREMENTS 4
5.1 Installation 4
5.2 Termination of Cables 5
5.3 Labelling 5
6 TESTS AND COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 5
6.1 Type Tests 5
6.2 Routine and Sample Tests 6
6.3 After installation Commissioning tests 6
7 TECHNICAL INFORMATION 6
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 1
1 LOW VOLTAGE POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
1.1 General
This document outlines, from technical point-of-view, specific requirements applicable to the
design, manufacture, install and testing of Low Voltage Power and Control Cables to be
installed in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Projects.
The low voltage power cables will be used to extend, supply or interconnect single phase or
three phase AC power to ancillary/auxiliary systems in the substation or the equipment within.
Control cables will be used to initiate, send or receive protection and control commands from
relevant panels usually located either in substation buildings or switchyard.
3 STANDARDS
IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltage up to and including
450/750 V.
IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1:
Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)
BS 5467 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for voltages of
600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables.
IEEE C37.122 IEEE Standard for High Voltage Gas-Insulated Substations Rated Above
52 kV
ASTM B8 Standard specification for concentric-lay-stranded copper conductor, hard,
medium-hard or soft.
ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B33 Standard Specification for Tin coated Soft or annealed copper wire for
electrical purposes.
ICEA S73-532 Standard for Control, Thermocouple, Extension and Instrumentation
Cables
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 2
4.1 Design and Construction
Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 60502-1 and IEC 60227-1 as applicable
and in all aspects meet or exceed the requirements of this specification.
Cables shall be designed for use in LV control and power supply systems, installed in cable
trays, underground conduits or directly buried.
For GIS applications, the control cable shall be properly shielded over the assembled cores per
IEEE C37.122.1 in the 1 – 30 MHz frequency range.
Rating and technical particulars of the LV power and control cables shall be as per the schedule
of requirements given technical data schedule.
Current carrying capacity of the proposed feeder cables after considering all applicable de-
rating factors is adequate for full load current of the circuit as per the applicable standards.
The percentage voltage drop for operation conditions shall be less than the 5%.
LV power cables shall be single core or multicore cables with stranded copper conductors,
XLPE insulated, wire armoured and PVC sheathed.
Control cables shall be multicore cables with stranded copper conductors, PVC insulated, wire
armoured and PVC sheathed.
The minimum size of the cable for CT and VT circuits (external) shall not be less than 6 sqmm
and 4 sqmm respectively.
4.1.1 Conductors
Conductors shall be stranded and not less than 2.5mm2 in cross section and it shall be plain
stranded annealed copper wires as per the applicable standards.
4.1.2 Insulation
The insulation shall be of XLPE for power cables. All other cables shall be PVC insulated.
4.1.3 Core Identification
Cores of power cables shall be identified by colours and in case of control cables, numerals
shall be printed in black on the white core insulation at intervals as per the applicable standards
for multicore control cables.
4.1.4 Armour
Armour shall be a PVC jacketed, close-fitting, flexible, corrugated impervious aluminum or

galvanized steel interlocked sheath.
The armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel / aluminum wires (for multi core
cables) and aluminum wires (for single core cables) complying with the requirements of the
applicable standards
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 3
4.1.5 Jacket
The jacket shall be black, ST2 type, extruded PVC as per IEC 60502-1 with heat, moisture, oil,
sunlight, acid, alkali and flame-resistant properties.
4.1.6 Wire Identification
Cores of multi conductor control cables shall be identified in accordance with section 4 of IEC
60227-1 or part 5 of ICEA S-73-532 (NEMA WC 57), section E.3.1, method I.
On multi conductor power cable, each phase shall be permanently identified with different solid
color; preferably with solid colored insulation.
The colors of equipment wiring shall be as follow:
a) DC circuits: .......................................... Grey

b) CT circuits ............................................ Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
c) PT circuits ............................................ Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
d) Alarm circuits ....................................... Blue
e) Grounding ............................................ Green with Yellow stripes
f) 3-phase, 4W power circuits .................. Red, Yellow, Blue, Black (neutral)
g) 1-phase, 2W AC power circuits ............ Red, Black (neutral)
4.1.7 Cable Marking and Identification
The over-sheath shall be embossed in English along two lines equally spaced around
circumference of the cable with “GCCIA ELECTRIC CABLE 600/1000 VOLTS” (as an example)
followed by:
 Name of manufacturer
 Year of manufacturing
 Type of insulation (XLPE/PVC)
 Number of cores
 Conductor size
 Conductor material
 Standard of construction (IEC/BS)
4.1.8 Sealing and Drumming
The sealing and drumming of these cables shall be in accordance with the requirements for
Power Cables and Accessories and as detailed in General Technical requirements.
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 4
4.1.9 Packing and Shipping
The provisions of the General Technical Requirements N° 016403-2000-47ES-0000 shall apply.
4 CABLE GLANDS
Unless otherwise stated Cable glands shall be made of brass and suitable to the proposed
cable type & sizes. All cable glands shall be double compression type. Shrouds shall be
included for the cable glands used outside the panels.
All Cable glands and adaptor shall conform to the applicable standards and shall be fitted with
soft sealing nylon washers or integrated nitrile washers.
5 INSTALLATION AND MAINTANANCE REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Installation
The cables will be installed in strict observance of manufacturer’s instructions especially with
regards to handling and pulling tension to avoid damaging the cables. Each cable shall be run
in one continuous length between terminal equipment without joints. All cables shall be
contained & supported by suitable means and no cable shall be left unsupported or hanging.
The cables shall be segregated on the basis of their group and of their use, DC, AC, Data
signals, LV power, telecommunication etc. by utilizing different routes or by providing sufficient
separation space to nullify inter dependent impacts.
be submitted for approval of Authority. No cable shall be laid directly on the floor.
Cable ladders, trays, supports and trunks shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel as per General
Technical Requirements Specification.
LV and Control cables shall be laid on ladders, whereas FO cables are to be laid on perforated
trays with cover. Tray with Minimum width of 300mm to be provided for FO cables. Cables shall
not come in contact with sharp edges or abrasive surfaces during installation and adequate
protection shall be provided. Bending radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable diameter.
If routed through ducts, the ducts shall be cleaned prior to cable pulling and ducts lubricated
with cable pulling compound. Where required, pulleys and rollers shall be utilized to guide the
cables along the path and to limit the pulling tension and side wall pressure. Cable trays shall
be with raised edges to retain the cables and shall incorporate an interlocking feature so as to
prevent movement between supports. Cable trays/ladders shall have enough spare room for
future use.
Cables run on trays and ladders shall be neatly dressed and secured. Ends of the cables shall
be capped during installation till the time prior to final connection. Every cable shall be
supported at a point not more than 500 mm from its termination.
Cables shall also be drawn into pipes or ducts or laid in formed trenches or troughs or on racks
or supported in trays with suitable fixing arrangement as required by GCCIA. Where cables are
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 5
laid in formed trenches, the installation shall include for the removal and replacement of the
trench covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on the trenches where they
cross access ways Cable trays shall be of perforated steel with a heavy-duty flange galvanized
in accordance with BS EN ISO 146.
The Contractor shall supply and install all components and accessories required to secure the
cables on the supports, without risk or damage, in a neat and orderly manner. The spacing shall
be approved by GCCIA.
holes. The design and construction of all supporting arrangements and cable fixing
arrangement shall suit the cable system design.
5.2 Termination of Cables
The ends of each cable shall be terminated in brass, compression type cable glands of suitable
size, which shall secure the cable inner sheath and ensure effective electrical continuity
between the cable armouring wires and the metal enclosures on to which the cable is
terminated. Cable glands fitted on outdoor equipment shall also incorporate suitable
compression seals to secure the outer sheath and shall be so designed and fitted that water
cannot enter the cable or the equipment through the cable termination. Where required, a
barrier shall be incorporated to prevent ingress of moisture via the interstitial spaces in the
cable. At all rising terminations, the cable inner sheath shall pass through the gland to
terminate approximately 6 mm above the gland. Gland Shroud should be provided for the cable
gland used outside the panels. Insulated glands shall be supplied complete with close fitting
insulating shrouds.
5.3 Labelling
All cables shall be identified below the termination at each end and at approved positions by
means of identification plates engraved with the cable number, feeder/circuit name, size of
cable, number of cores, phase colour etc., or such lettering as the Authority/Engineer may
require.
6 TESTS AND COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
All test reports as applicable shall be provided for review and acceptance. After installation tests
(refer clause 6.3) as detailed below shall be made by the contractor.
6.1 Type Tests
All Type Tests prescribed in the IEC 60502-1 or ICEA T-27-581 (NEMA WC 53) shall be
performed on a representative unit or on the first unit of every new design or rating to be
supplied.
In lieu of the actual type tests, certified test reports of type test performed on an identical unit
may be submitted for review and approval.
016403-2000-47ES-5200 01 July 2024 6
6.2 Routine and Sample Tests
All Routine Tests prescribed in the IEC 60502-1 or ICEA T-27-581 (NEMA WC 53) shall be
performed on a representative unit or on the first unit of every new design or rating to be
supplied.
6.3 After installation Commissioning tests
LV control cables insulation shall be checked by applying between the conductors to earth, a
test voltage not exceeding 750 Vac for 1 minute. Insulation resistance shall be not less than 10
MΩ.
LV power cables shall be subjected to AC voltage withstand test with a voltage not exceeding 2
kV.
7 TECHNICAL INFORMATION
The Contractor has to submit with his tender detailed technical information for each type and
size of cable with the information as per Technical Data schedules included in this specification.
GCCIA
EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
AND MATERIALS
016403-2000-47ES-4700 Rev.01
July 2024
Earthing & Lightning Protection Systems and Materials # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1

1.1 General 1
1.2 Soil Survey 1
2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 2
2.1 Earthing/Grounding System 2
2.1.1 Design Assumptions 2
2.1.2 Buried Mesh system 2
2.1.3 Interconnected Rods 2
2.1.4 Main Earth bar 2
2.1.5 Connections to Equipment 2
2.2 Lightning Protection System 3
2.2.1 Design Assumptions 3
2.2.2 Air Terminals 4
2.2.3 Down Conductors 4
2.2.4 Connections 4
3 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES 4
6.1 Grounding Grid 5
6.2 Grounding of Equipment 6
7 COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS AND TESTS 6
8 ROUTINE TESTS 6
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 1
1 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
1.1 General
Earthing system generally in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 80 and BS 7430 shall be
designed, supplied, installed and tested at each new site and for any extension/modification
works at existing sites under the project scope.
This document outlines, from technical point-of-view, the standard requirements applicable to the
design of earthing & lightning protection systems and manufacture of Grounding & Lightning
protection Material to be installed in new substations or extensions in existing substations as part
of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the Gulf Cooperation Council
Interconnection Authority (GCCIA)
The earthing system shall cover all the areas and premises viz. GIS including the adjacent areas
as outdoor switchyard, controls buildings, equipment located inside GIS and control building,
storage area and future-expansion areas.
Earthing Systems shall perform satisfactorily for the expected life time of the substation and/or
switching yard without deterioration due to corrosion and should continually maintain a low
resistance to the ground, satisfy thermal stability and be capable of carrying maximum anticipated
full fault currents.
Lightning Systems shall be designed to perform exceeding the minimum specified parametric
data such as isokeraunic Level (lightning strokes) and lightning.
Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for full and reliable operation of the grounding
and lightning protection installations in the substations.
1.2 Soil Survey
Contractor shall carry out Soil resistivity measurements for the substation plot in presence of
Engineer. Procedure for such measurement shall be subject to approval of Engineer/Authority.
Contractor shall apply earth resistivity values obtained by usage of two-layer model in his design.
Soil resistivity measurements shall cover at least a minimum of six (6) locations across the
substation plot area. Weather conditions during the resistivity measurement shall be recorded in
the report. Site measurements shall be taken during dry weather conditions. Computer programs
shall be used for analysis Design of earth system shall take into account the characteristics
especially corrosiveness of the soil as determined from soil investigations and applicable
standards.
Detailed design based on the results of the above tests along with calculations shall be submitted
for approval. The selection of earthing & lightning protection materials shall be based on soil
investigation studies and local climatic conditions.
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 2
2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Earthing/Grounding System
2.1.1 Design Assumptions
The total resistance of the substation earth electrode system shall not exceed a value of 1 ohm.
In cases where total resistance of 1 ohm is not easily obtainable owing to extremely high resistive
nature of soils contractor may propose artificial means for reducing the resistance using well
proven, lasting and stable methods.
Step, touch and mesh potentials shall be within the limits calculated in accordance with the
standards IEEE80 and BS7430 as applicable for the proposed surface layer.
The achieved step potential beyond the substation periphery shall be within the limit. The
achieved touch potential shall also be ensured for over a meter away from station plot limit
(perimeter fence).
2.1.2 Buried Mesh system
The mesh system shall be designed in accordance with design calculations to limit touch and
step potentials taking into account the combined length of the mesh conductors, other buried
conductors and rods but excluding any buried conductors outside the perimeter fence.
2.1.3 Interconnected Rods
If the design calculations suggest that mesh alone is unable to limit the potentials to the required
values, then mesh shall be supplemented by use of interconnected earthing rods driven into the
ground or installed in bored holes. Bored holes shall be filled with bentonite or other approved
material prior to inserting the rod.
2.1.4 Main Earth bar
The main earth bar shall be in the form of a ring or rings of bare conductors surrounding or
interspersed within an area in which equipment to be earthed are located. Each main earth bar
shall be connected by at least two widely separated conductors to the earth electrode system.
2.1.5 Connections to Equipment
The auxiliary earth mat shall be in the form of a ring or rings of bare tape/conductors surrounding
or interspersed within an area in which equipment to be earthed are located. Connections
between equipment and the earth bars shall be provided as per below earth riser table.
Bimetallic washers/strips shall be provided when the copper earthing conductor is connected to
the other metals like GIS and other structures.
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 3
Sl. Description Minimum size of riser from equipment to

No. Earth mat
1 400 kV GIS and EHV equipment 300 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
copper conductor
2 33kV Switchgear (GIS) 300 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
copper conductor
3 Reactors / Transformers 300 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
copper conductor
4 DG Set 300 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
copper conductor
5 Main LVAC Board 300 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
copper conductor
6 LCC/ Control & Relay panels, DC 185 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
panels, Sub DBs, AC & Ventilation copper conductor
roof top equipment, pump/motor,
cable supports and trays, etc.
7 Any other equipment as per site 185 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
layout copper conductor
8 Fence, HVAC duct, hand rails, 70 sq.mm stranded, PVC insulated Y/G
sprinkler, foot bridges, door, rebar, copper conductor
etc.
2.2 Lightning Protection System
2.2.1 Design Assumptions
Design, installation and materials for the lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with
the applicable standards and this specification. Lightning protection shall be provided for all new
substation buildings and extensions. At outdoor Switchyards suitable lightning masts (or gantry
structures with attachment provisions) & shield wires shall be incorporated. The protection angle
shall be taken as 70° from the vertical plane. The adequacy of lightning protection shall be
attained by installing air terminals.
Any of the following methods shall be used in design of Lightning Protection System (LPS):
a) Protection angle method
b) Rolling sphere method
c) Mesh method
In order to avoid/minimize damages due to lightning that may occur in buildings, structures, tanks,
equipment etc. the Bidder/Contractor shall provide adequate protection system comprising roof
lightning catching rods (Air terminals), down conductors of adequate sizes with sufficient spacing
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 4
and fixing material all connected to main earthing system to form a complete safe & reliable
system.
Alternatively, bidder may propose and adopt ESE type lightning protection system subject to
acceptance by employer (Authority)
2.2.2 Air Terminals
A complete air termination network shall be installed on the surfaces of the roofs of all buildings.
No part of the roofs shall be more than 10 m away from the nearest horizontal protective
conductor. Air terminations shall be made of copper.
2.2.3 Down Conductors
Down conductors shall be distributed on the surface of the outside walls of the buildings with a
spacing distance of not more than 20 metres and all main metal parts near the down conductors
shall be connected thereto. The down conductors shall be made of copper or tinned copper and
shall be securely fixed to the support structures at intervals not exceeding 2 meters. No bends
less than 90 degrees shall be made. Each down lead conductor shall be directly connected to
the pit. Separate pits are required for earthing and lightning protection applications.
2.2.4 Connections
All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped,
screwed, riveted or welded) in order to suit the local climatic conditions. All supports and
connections shall be made of best suitable materials. Connection with earth rods or main earthing
system shall be made through dis-connectable links placed in a position that results in easy
testing.
3 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
Conductors shall be of high conductivity copper in the form of circular conductors or solid rods or
bars in accordance to the applicable standards. All risers shall be PVC insulated yellow green
colored in accordance with applicable standards.
Earth rods shall be of hard-drawn high conductivity copper with a diameter of not less than 19
mm with hardened steel driving caps and tips. The rods should be as long as possible but
couplers may be used to obtain the required overall depth of driving.
All conductor fittings shall be manufactured from high strength copper alloys with phosphor
bronze nuts, bolts, washers and screws. Bi-metallic connectors shall be used between
conductors of dissimilar materials and insulating material shall be interposed between metallic
fittings and structures of dissimilar materials to prevent corrosion.
Permanent joints shall be made by brazing, exothermic welding or by crimping. Detachable joints
shall be bolted and stranded conductors at bolted joints shall be terminated in exothermically
welded lugs or a crimped cable socket. The diameter of any holes drilled on strip conductors shall
not be greater than half the width of the strip.
Where earthing conductors are prone to mechanical damage, steel guards shall be provided to
protect them.
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 5
Each riser shall be connected to the mesh via disconnecting links. Disconnecting links shall
comprise of high conductivity copper link supported on two insulators mounted on a galvanized
steel base for bolting to the supporting structure/wall surface.
ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Cooper Conductors, Hard &

Medium
ASTM B33 Standard Specification for Tin coated soft or annealed Cooper wire for electrical
Purposes
ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems – Requirements
IEEE 837 Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding
IEEE 80 IEEE guide for safety in AC substation grounding
IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface
BS 7430 Code of practice for Earthing
BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning
IEC 62305 Protection against lightning
IEC 61024 Protection of structures against lightning
The fusion connections must have an equal or greater current carrying capacity than that of the
conductor.
All underground grounding system connections shall be made with fusion type connections.
Above ground surface connections shall be made with mechanical connectors or fusion
connectors.
6.1 Grounding Grid
Conductor for grounding grid shall be minimum 300 mm2, however final size is subject to the
sizing calculation and same shall withstand a short circuit of 63 kA for 1s. Where multiple parallel
paths are available each conductor path shall be capable of withstanding 80% of above fault
current for same specified time.
Maximum allowable temperature of bare conductor shall be 250˚C and Y/G cable is 160˚C
considered for design calculations.
Distance between adjacent mesh conductors shall be maximum 10 meters. The conductors shall
be laid at a depth of below 2 meters in the ground, except for underground power cables or
016403-2000-47ES-4700 01 July 2024 6
trenches (with a minimum depth of 1 meter). Conductors shall also be buried below the raft /
road-base of buildings.
All Reactors/transformers/DG neutral shall be directly earthed through an earthing pit.
6.2 Grounding of Equipment
Main equipment (HV&MV equipment, power transformers, line reactors, Auxiliary Transformers,
DG Set, Surge Arresters etc.) shall be connected at least at two different points to the grounding
grid with same size of grounding grid conductor. GIS grounding shall be in accordance with Cigre
and GIS manufacturer’s recommendation.
Earth riser shall be of high-quality stranded copper conductor, yellow-green colored PVC
insulated. All earth risers not limited to earth risers within the substation shall be provided as per
table.
The number of connections required for each equipment shall be determined in order to
guarantee a safe and reliable connection to ground with redundancy.
7 COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS AND TESTS
The resistance of the complete earth system shall be measured before installation of outgoing
cables by the Contractor and with OHL termination towers disconnected from the earth mat with
an approved form of earth resistance tester. The measured value shall be submitted for approval
and shall not exceed the value indicated in the design data sheet when measured between the
earth system and the surrounding earth.
On completion of the measurement of resistance of earth system, step and touch potentials shall
be measured in accordance with the approved test procedure & standards.
8 ROUTINE TESTS
Applicable Routine tests shall be performed on all the components of earthing and lightning
protection systems in accordance with the relevant standards
GCCIA
400KV OMAN DIRECT LINK PROJECT

LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER WORKS
016403-2000-47FE-2000A Rev.01
July 2024
Lighting and Small power Works No. Date Page
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GENERAL 1
1.1 Object 1
1.2 Scope of Works 1
1.3 Standards and Codes 1
2 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AREA LIGHTING 2
2.1 General 2
2.2 Design Data 2
2.3 Particular Requirements 3
2.3.1 GIS Buildings 3
2.3.2 Switchyards 4
2.3.3 Roadways 4
2.3.4 Complementary Lighting Near Transformers 4
2.3.5 Perimeter Lighting 5
2.4 Emergency Lighting 5
2.5 Design 5
2.5.1 General 5
2.5.2 Normal Lighting 5
2.5.3 Emergency Lighting 5
2.6 Lamp Fixture Description 6
2.7 Distribution Boards 8
2.8 Testing 8
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 1
1 GENERAL
1.1 Object
This document outlines in technical point of view, the specific requirements for design, supply,
install, test and commission of Lighting and Small Power system in 400 kV Transmission
Substations under GCC Interconnection Project being developed by GCC Interconnection
Authority.
1.2 Scope of Works
Contractor shall design, procure, supply, install, test, commission and maintain during warranty
period for the entire lighting and small power system. In general, the system shall comprise
 LED luminaires for indoor and outdoor areas.

 Power sockets at indoor and outdoor areas.
 PVC / GI conduits, Wire trunks, cable trays routing in coordination with other
services.
 Routing of wires & cables and termination to various components.
 Cable/wire dressing and termination in Distribution Boards.
1.3 Standards and Codes
 BS EN 60598 Luminaries
 BS 1363-4 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units. -

Specification for 13 A fused connection units switched and
unswitched
 BS 7629 Electric cables - Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant,

screened, fixed installation cables having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire - Multicore
cables
 BS EN 62444 Cable gland for electrical installation
 BS 6004 Electric cables PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cables for
voltages up to and including 300/500 V, for electric power
and lighting
 BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations. IET Wiring

Regulations
 IEC 60309 Plugs, fixed or portable socket-outlets and appliance inlets

for industrial purposes
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 2
 The Electricity Wiring Regulations (2020)/ Department of Energy/ Abu Dhabi
 UAE Fire and Safety code of practice (As applicable)
 Buildings Fire Prevention and Protection requirements/ Directorate General of

Civil Defense/ Royal Oman Police (As applicable)
 Applicable local laws and Authorities requirements
2 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AREA LIGHTING
2.1 General
This clause specifies the requirements for design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and
maintain during warranty period the normal and emergency lighting at indoor & outdoor areas
and other small power facilities in substation. All the materials and component items shall be
designed & adequately rated for their worst duty and specified climatic conditions.
Requirements of type, rating for lighting luminaires, convenience socket outlets and power
outlets along with illumination levels for luminaires are detailed below. Requirements specified
are bare minimum and contractor is expected to provide exceeding the same. Lighting & Power
outlets as applicable shall cover
 Various rooms / Areas as per layout

 Equipment lighting within switchyard as per layout;
 Switchyard /Gantry Area
 Access Roads.
 Station perimeter and entry/exits
2.2 Design Data
Minimum in-service illumination level:
The following are the minimum requirements:
Area / Room Type of luminaries

Required Lighting control Small power
Lux
(Average)
Office, Interface room, LED – 1, LED- 400 Switch & Passive S1 or S2 – 2
Telecom rooms-1&2, 1/E4 & LED -1 / InfraRed Sensor for each room
LVAC/DC room, E5 E1 & E2 S4-1 for control
control & relay panel and protection
room, 33kV SWGR room
room, Corridor.
Staircase, Clean LED-2, LED-2/E4 200 Switch S3 and S7 for
agent /FM200 room, & LED -2/ E5 E1 & pantry and
Pantry, Toilet E2 toilet
400 kV GIS Rooms H1 – LED and 300 Switch & Passive S1 or S2 – 4
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 3
LED-2, LED-2/E4 InfraRed Sensor S5-3

& LED -2 /E5 S6-3
E1 E2 (minimum
three)
Basement, Battery LED-3, LED-3/E4 200 Switch & Passive S3
Room & LED -3 / E5 InfraRed Sensor
E1& E2 for Basement
Reactors, SST, Fire LED-3, LED-3/E4 250 Switch S3 – 2 for each
pump room, DG & LED -3 / E5 room
Room, Warehouse E1 except SST S8-3 for
Reactors
S9-1 for SST
Roof LED- 4 100 Switch S3
Outdoor area LED-5, & LED-3 / 25 Push button
E4
Emergency lighting 30
Note: All the rooms as per layout are to be considered. All the outdoor fittings shall be IP65
rating.
 Lighting uniformity factor (maximum to 1.5

minimum) less than
 Utilization factor not less than 0.8 for air-conditioned
spaces at top of
building, 0.7 for
basement & stairs and
0.6 for Reactor,
transformer, outdoor
open areas
 Reflectance factor 0.7 for ceiling, 0.5 for

wall, 0.3 for Floor
 Operation ac voltage (single phase) 240 V rms.
 Operation voltage for emergency lighting UPS
2.3 Particular Requirements
2.3.1 GIS Buildings
Minimum maintained in-service illumination level on all horizontal and vertical surfaces of the
GIS equipment, control cubicles and panels shall be maintained as detailed in above table. The
minimum in-service illumination level on all platforms and on floor shall be 150 lux.
All the gauges and indicators of the GIS shall be easily readable from the nearby platforms.
Proper and easy adequate access shall be provided for the high bay lights fitted at ceiling or
walls of the building.
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 4
All conduits and fittings used shall be rigid, hot dip galvanized steel for surface routing and high
impact rigid PVC conduits for concealments in wall / slab / floor.
Heavy duty galvanized cable tray/ trunking and accessories shall be with a minimum thickness
of 1.2mm.
Socket outlets shall be outdoor type, watertight & corrosion proof and inside the buildings
installed at 120 cm above floor level in numbers as per table:
 240 V, 13 A, 50Hz, single phase socket outlets and 415 V, 32 A, three phase socket
outlets, both installed evenly spaced around the inside wall of building
 415 V, 63 A, 50Hz, three phase socket outlets evenly distributed in the building for
portable welding machines, SF6 gas handling plant or other appliances.
 415 V, 200 A, 50Hz, three phase industrial metal enclosed switch socket outlets on
each firewall between Reactors/Transformers to cater the requirements for mobile
Oil treatment & Circulation plant.
All above mentioned socket outlets shall be provided with provisions of frame leakage trip,
interlocked isolating switch and fuse. Aluminum or plastic socket outlets shall not be used.
2.3.2 Switchyards
In addition to the wall / pole mounted exterior lighting fixtures, suitable numbers of LED lighting
fixtures shall be provided, installed in the switchyard with suitable supports, for the flood lighting
of outdoor yard (Gantry Area)
The flood lighting fixtures shall be mounted on brackets with provisions for horizontal and
vertical adjustment.
Mounting of lighting fixture and ballast on the same structure
Mounting height:
 Lighting fixture 4.5 / 6 m from finished ground level

(approx.)
 Ballast integrated along with the fixture
2.3.3 Roadways
 Lighting fixture mounting on pole top
 Mounting height 4.5 or 6 m from finished road level

(approx.)
2.3.4 Complementary Lighting Near Transformers
 Type of lamp, lighting fixture mounting same as roadway lighting

016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 5
2.3.5 Perimeter Lighting
 Mounting height 4.5 or 6 m from finished ground level
 Pole to pole spacing less than 40 m (approx.)
2.4 Emergency Lighting
Emergency lighting shall be arranged to illuminate all stairways, exits, entrances, rooms,
external areas and designated operational areas. Emergency power supply to the luminaires
shall be directly from source without any control through switches. Exit lights shall be provided
in an emergency exit to illuminate on the exit routes. Each emergency light shall have phase
sensing wire connection to identify the loss of AC supply and illuminate the luminaire through
emergency power source (UPS) and emergency light fixture with self-contained / Self sustained
batteries. Self contained battery charging period shall not exceed 24 hours.
2.5 Design
2.5.1 General
Lighting calculations shall be submitted to the approval of Engineer/Owner.
The outdoor area lighting to cover all the outdoor area and required illumination for the CCTV
footage requirements shall be finalized in consultation with Engineer/ Owner during design and
installation. Any changes required by the Engineer/Owner to ensure satisfactory coverage and
compliance with these specifications shall be incorporated without any additional costs.
2.5.2 Normal Lighting
General area lighting shall be designed to permit movement and to carryout operation tasks by
personnel safely at night without usage of any portable lamps.
Three independent circuits shall be provided to feed the lighting in the switchyard. One of these
circuits shall be arranged to feed a limited number of luminaires to be used as lead lighting and
shall be controlled by photo cells and electronic timer. The level of illumination shall be
approximately 25% of the normal level specified. One way / two way / intermediate switches
shall be provided in all the entrances based on the room layout for each room and Passive
infrared movement sensor (Ceiling/Wall mounted) shall be provided and 50% of luminaires
shall be controlled through these PIRs. Switches shall be rated 20A. Plug in type ceiling rose (3
pin & 4 pin) shall be used for normal and emergency luminaire.
The remaining two circuits in the switchyard and roadway, shall be controlled by push button-
controlled contactors. These push-button control stations shall be installed at Guard house.
2.5.3 Emergency Lighting
The emergency lighting shall be designed to provide a minimum illumination level equal to 25
percent of the normal specified levels.
Sufficient number of emergency light fixtures shall be installed to allow safe egress from the
building by sufficiently illuminating all passageways, platforms, stairways and exits to the
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 6
exterior. Emergency power supply for the emergency light fixtures shall be supplied from UPS
system and self-contained battery.
The design shall be such that on loss of ac power a minimum number of lamps shall be
automatically switched on. The location and number of lamps shall be such as to permit entry
to or exit from switchyard.
The remaining lamps shall be controlled by pushbuttons clearly marked “Emergency Lighting”
and located inside the entrance to the switchyard. The pushbutton shall be clearly visible when
only the emergency lamps as per above paragraph are on.
2.6 Lamp Fixture Description
Each luminaire shall be complete with housing, driver, control gear, inverter, internal wiring
connection, external wiring termination. Light fixtures shall be of the following types:
LED -1: LED 600x600 mm Recessed panel luminaire with LED driver, minimum of
CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
LED -1 / E4 : LED 600x600 mm Recessed panel luminaire with steel body, prismatic
diffuser, LED driver, control gear / integral AC inverter, minimum of CCT
4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
LED -1 / E5 : LED 600x600 mm Recessed panel luminaire with steel body, prismatic
diffuser, LED driver, self-contained & self-sustained battery with control
gear , AC inverter, minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
LED – 2 : 1500mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with steel

body, reflector, LED chips, minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life
hours.
LED – 2 / E4: 1500mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with steel

body, reflector, LED chips, control gear / integral AC inverter, minimum of
CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
LED – 2 / E5 :1500mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with steel

body, reflector, LED chips, self -contained & self-sustained battery with
control gear , AC inverter, minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life
hours.
LED-3: 1500mm mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with

IP65 high impact and corrosion resistant polycarbonate body and diffuser,
minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
LED-3 / E4: 1500mm mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with

control gear / integral inverter, minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000
life hours.
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 7
LED-3 / E5: 1500mm mm LED luminaire Surface/Wall/Ceiling/Bracket mounted with

self-contained & self-sustained battery with control gear / integral inverter,
LED - 4: LED luminaire surface/wall/bracket mounted with IP66 high grade diecast
aluminum body and optical cover suitable for outdoor application,
LED – 5: LED luminaire Pole /surface/wall/bracket mounted with IP66 high grade
diecast aluminum body and optical cover suitable for outdoor application,
H1-LED: LED High Bay luminaire with IP66 high grade diecast aluminum body,
cover, minimum of CCT 4000K, CRI80 and 50000 life hours.
E1-Exit : Single or double sided, self-sustained non-maintained emergency light

with pictogram or with EXIT in English & Arabic as per local authority
requirement, minimum 3 hrs battery backup.
E2: Surface / wall mounted self-sustained luminaire with two LED spot light,
driver module, optical cover, inbuilt batteries, charger, control gear, test
button, on/off button, power & charge indication LED lights. Battery
duration shall be minimum 3 hours and charging period shall not exceed
24 hours.
S1: Single phase 13A,3 pin single gang flush mounted switched socket outlet
S2: Single phase 13A,3 pin single gang surface mounted switched metal clad socket
outlet
S3: Single phase 13A,3 pin single gang weather proof switched socket outlet.
S4: Three phase 16A,4 wire surface mounted switched socket outlet with matching
plug.
S5: Three phase 32A, 4 wire surface mounted switched socket outlet with matching
plug.
S6: Three phase 63A, 4 wire surface mounted switched socket outlet with matching
plug.
S7: Single phase 13A, weather proof surface mounted metal clad fused spur outlet.
S8: Three phase, 400V, 50Hz, 300/315 A TPN & E, 5 pin heavy duty socket with
metal enclosed switch socket with minimum IP 55.
S9: Three phase, 400V, 50Hz, 200 A TPN & E, 5 pin heavy duty socket with metal
enclosed switch socket with minimum IP 55.
The minimum size of conductor for lighting circuits shall not be less than 2.5 mm2 copper. The
minimum size of conductors for socket outlet circuits shall not be less than 4.0 mm2 copper.
Heat resistance cable shall be used for the connection between ceiling rose to the luminaire.
End to end cable termination shall be provided without any joints. Fire resistant cable (approved
by local authority, if applicable) shall be provided for emergency luminaires and exit lights.
Engraved labels of phenolic plastic (traffolyte) shall be provided for the internal luminaries,
sockets and engraved stainless steel labels shall be provided for the external luminaries &
016403-2000-47FE-2000A 01 July 2024 8
sockets. Identification label shall include the circuit reference number, DB reference number,
Switch / PIR reference number etc.,
Power supply for the luminaires in each room shall be distributed equally from essential and
non-essential DB.
Note: The cables shall not be buried directly in the ground for the lightings. it shall be through
either cable trenches or duct banks from DB to Poles and between poles also.
2.7 Distribution Boards
Separate Essential and Non – essential Distribution boards for each building shall be provided.
Distribution board shall include incoming isolator / breaker, breaker / ELCB (RCCB) for outgoing
supply, contactors, relays, earthing & neutral terminal, time switch, photoelectric cell, push
button etc., Minimum 25% spare capacity of breakers and space for future addition shall be
considered.
2.8 Testing
After completion of the installation, Contractor shall test all luminaires and all receptacles to
ensure normal operation. Contractor shall measure the actual illumination levels after
installation and thereafter at the end of warranty period to verify conformance with the
Specifications. The illumination levels shall be measured at floor level in the night.
GCCIA
JUNCTION BOXES AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
016403-2000-47ES-4500 Rev.01
July 2024
Junction Boxes and Lighting Fixtures # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-4500 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 JUNCTION BOXES AND LIGHTING FIXTURES 1
4.1 Junction Boxes and Accessories 1

4.2 Lighting Fixtures 2
4.3 Lighting Poles 2
4.4 Lighting Control 2
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 3


016403-2000-47ES-4500 01 July 2024 1
1 JUNCTION BOXES AND LIGHTING FIXTURES
applicable to the design and manufacture of junction and marshalling boxes and lighting fixtures
to be installed in the substations as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, developed by the
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA)
IEC 60598 Fixed general-purpose luminaries
ISO 9001 Quality Systems Model for Quality Assurance in Final design,
development, production, installation and servicing
4.1 Junction Boxes and Accessories
The junction boxes shall be compliant the following requirements:
a. The terminal blocks will be installed on asymmetric rails (Entrelec or equivalent) for the
connection of the incoming, out coming and derivation circuit;
b. the entrance of the cables shall be located in the bottom of the enclosures;
c. a ground bar shall be provided with screw type terminals;
d. thermostat controlled heating element shall be provided for VT and CT junction box;
e. suitable cable glands shall be provided for incoming and outgoing cables;
f. a 240 V receptacle outlet shall be provided for lighting junction box.
The design of the interior of the box, shall allow sufficient access to the rear terminal of all
devices, for removal and repaired if required.
All wiring within the panels shall be heat and flame retardant, rated 90°C maximum operating
temperature and listed ANSI/NFPA 70 or approved equivalent, rated 600V/1000V with insulated
tinned stranded annealed copper conductor, and shall not be smaller than 2.5 mm2. All CT
secondary related circuits shall not be smaller than 4 mm2.
All wiring shall be made without splices. The control wires shall be multi stranded flexible and
shall be terminated with terminals.

016403-2000-47ES-4500 01 July 2024 2
Groups of terminal blocks shall be identified using engraved labels.
Not less than ten percent (10%) spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block.
All AC and DC power circuits shall be protected by internally rail mounted MCB with an auxiliary
contact for control purposes
Lighting junction boxes

Each lighting fixture shall have a junction box or and accessible compartment lockable with
keys and shall be fully protected and sealed against ingress of water or vermin.
Each derivation circuit shall be protected by the means a miniature circuit breaker of required
current and voltage rating and short-circuit capability with Residual Current Circuit Breaker.
4.2 Lighting Fixtures
See the Technical Specification 016403-2000-47FE-2000A – Lighting and Small Power
4.3 Lighting Poles

The poles shall be of hot dipped galvanized seamless steel or hot dipped galvanized seamless
aluminium, round tapered, cylindrical and continuously welded from the base to the pole top
end. Steel poles are to be hot dip galvanized. Poles shall include a reinforced handhole with
removable cover and grounding lug. Bracket arms shall be included and be of the same
material as the pole shaft.
The height of the poles shall be determined by the contractor according the design criteria
indicated in the technical specification.
The design shall comprise electrical (voltage drop) lighting (level of illumination) and mechanical
(pole strength and height).
The location of lighting poles shall not interfere with duct banks, overhead lines, substation
equipment and movement of vehicles and heavy equipment.
4.4 Lighting Control

Control of yard lighting shall be accomplished with electrical contractors and controlled by photo
cells and PLC timer, with auto and manual changeover facility for manual control, connected to
a continuously energized circuit. Also, continuously energized outdoor convenience
outlets/receptacles for supplemental portable maintenance or repair-work lighting shall be
furnished on the lighting poles without requiring separate circuits.
Photo cells shall be mounted at a high level in a position free from shadows and not facing any
lighting fixtures directly, but accessible for maintenance.

016403-2000-47ES-4500 01 July 2024 3
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Supplier shall be liable to include all material required to obtain a functional installation.
The shop tests should comply to the standards indicated in

GCCIA

SUBSTATION CIVIL WORKS
016403-2000-47FE-2000 Rev.01
July 2024
Substation Civil Works # Date Page

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GENERAL 1
2 SITE FACILITIES AND PRELIMINARY WORKS 6
3 LOCATION OF LAND 12
4 FOUNDATIONS AND CONCRETE WORKS 19
5 ROADS AND PAVED AREAS 32
6 BUILDINGS 40
7 FENCES AND GATES 55
8 FIRE PROTECTION WALLS 59
9 TRANSFORMER/REACTOR FOUNDATIONS 60
10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS / GUIDELINES 60


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 1
1 GENERAL
1.1 Objective
This specification outlines the Standard Technical Requirements for the construction of civil
works and buildings for 400 kV Transmission and Sub-transmission Substations of the GCC
Interconnection Project – Phase I.
1.2 Scope of Works
The Contractor shall design and build all works necessary for the construction of the substation.
The electrical layout drawings enclosed within the specifications shall be used as a reference to
identify all the civil works needed to provide a completely functional installation. Namely (not
limitative):
 Earth works to make the substation land suitable for installation of supporting structures
and equipment; for erection of the main control building and other ancillary buildings, with
drainage to evacuate water in all conditions and of sufficient size to allow access to
maintenance equipment, and leveling, filling and gravelling the switchyard area.
 Pre cast Boundary wall of 3 m high along the Perimeter of the Substation.
 Foundations for equipment pedestals, bus supports and gantry structures for incoming lines
and strain busses.
 Cable concrete trenches and embedded ducts with pulling stations and cable pits.
 Access road (Construction of temporary access road to the substation and its maintenance
till the Completion of the Project) for a length of 25.0m, construction of External Permanent
Asphalt Access road 8 m wide from the substation to the nearest road.
 Also, a 3-meter-wide asphalt security road shall be constructed all around the substation
precast boundary wall; both roadside protection & water drainage system shall be
maintained & included.
 Drainage network, including perimeter trenches, switchyard internal sub soil drainage
trenches and pipes.
 Power transformers and reactors’ oil containment basins, with oil/water separator.
 Main control building and other ancillary buildings; office and accommodation facilities for
Employer and/or Engineer (where specified).
 Other related works to make a complete installation.
In addition to the previously mentioned permanent installation, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary provisional facilities to perform his works such as storage areas, water and electricity
supply, communications, site office, accommodation facilities for his personnel, workshops, etc.
When there is no availability of power or water, the Contractor shall provide a diesel generator
with fuel and transport water for use by his personnel and for construction purpose.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 2
The ACI and ASTM standards latest release are given as reference for constructions or for the
quality of material.
The Contractor may propose to the Engineer equivalent standards from recognised
international organizations.
In case of any conflict with the referred standards and codes, the following order of priority shall
be observed:
a) Contract clauses;
b) Construction code or regulation of country;
c) Standard ACI;
d) Standard ASTM.
1.4 Program of Works
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a program of the works in compliance with Sub-Clause
8.3 of the Conditions of Contract. The program shall be updated and kept current throughout
the duration of the Contract, and will be used by the Engineer to monitor the progress, identify
deviations and determine corrective action in conjunction with the Contractor.
1.5 Safety Measures
The Contractor shall implement a safety program for his personnel in accordance to safety
regulations applicable in the Country and meeting sound construction industry standards.
The Contractor shall comply with Sub-Clause 6.7 of the Conditions of Contract. In particular,
the Contractor shall designate an officer in charge of safety who has the training and
experience, as well as the necessary equipment, to meet emergency situations. This officer will
have the authority to stop the work at any time, if he judges that safety of personnel is
compromised, or the method or equipment employed to perform the work is risk prone, and
stop any individual who does not comply with safety rules.
1.5.1 Safety Plan
Within two months from the contract award, the Contractor shall present a safety plan for the
Engineer’ s review and acceptance; among other, the plan shall cover the following aspects:
 Name of safety officer and proof of adequate training;

 Safety rules for Contractor’s personnel and visitors;
 Means for fast transportation of injured personnel;
 Hygiene on site of works (potable water supply, clean facilities, etc.)
 Prevention measures against accidental electrical shock;

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 3
 First aid measures on site;

 Accessibility to nearby hospital and clinic at any time with arrangement for standby
medical personnel;
 Supply to personnel of security hats, boots and glasses.
1.5.2 Prevention of Accidents
All Contractor’s personnel shall properly be identified to control their access to the work sites.
Unauthorized persons shall be prevented to enter the premises. Identification tags shall also be
issued to the Engineer and his representatives.
Among others, the following measures shall be implemented:
 At least one out of every 30 workers must be trained to impart first aid and have,
readily available, a suitable first-aid kit;
 Any worker responsible for operating electrical equipment shall be trained to cut
power and attend to any worker jolted by electric current;
 No worker shall be allowed to manually handle loads exceeding 25 kg;
 All tools shall be provided with hardwood handle, devoid of loose parts or cutting
edges;
 Cutting tools shall come with an adequate handle, safety lock and storing case;
 Wrenches shall have a lever of convenient length to avoid the use of tube extension;
 Handling conductors or metallic cables close to energized lines or substation bus
shall be avoided;
 Ladders shall be safe, preferably metallic.
1.5.3 Work in Energized Area
When the work involves modifying or extending an existing substation, where the workers will
access energized areas of the switchyard, the Contractor shall present to the Engineer a
detailed work plan where the Contractor explains the method he will be using to perform each
operation. The Engineer will coordinate with the substation operator to obtain the permit for the
Contractor to access the area and, when necessary, to put the corresponding section of the
switchyard out of service. Work on energized parts is strictly prohibited.
The Contractor will be responsible to implement safety measures when operating in energized
surroundings. Such measures may include use of temporary barriers with padlocks, warning
signs, grounding tools, colored tape to limit the zone, etc.
These measures shall be agreed with the Engineer and the operator of the substation.
The detailed work plan shall also address, at least, the following issues:
 Safety rules:
- Identification of each electrical isolating point in the area
- Request for temporary shutdown of the equipment

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 4
- Setting out of protected zone

- Shutting down the equipment (with installation of barriers, padlocks, signs, etc.
- Issue work permits to authorized personnel
- Definition of work safe zone (apprise all involved of safety measures,
identification of dangerous points, etc.)
- Instructions to personnel
- Ensure continual presence of person in charge of works
- Instructions for interrupting the work, if necessary
- Test on completion of the work in protected zone
- End of work and leaving work zone
- Dismantling the protection measures
- End of work notification
 Work rules (authorizations, self-protection, interface with operator)
 Training of personnel
 Control of safety equipment
1.6 Materials
All material used for the work shall be new, of first quality and compliant with this specification.
The material stored in containers, boxes or barrels shall come to the site of work in their original
packing and sealed.
The Engineer may reject any material that, in his opinion, is not of good quality or not compliant
with the specification.
1.7 Engineering
The Contractor shall perform all required site surveys investigations necessary for the design
and construction of the Works. This shall include (but not be limited to):
 Topographical surveys;
 Geotechnical soil investigations;
 Soil resistivity analyses.
The Contractor shall provide engineering and detailed design of the Works. This shall include (but
not be limited to):
 Analyses, studies, reports;
 General location drawings, with coordinates, bench marks and elevations, including
immediate surrounding areas;
 General layout drawings;
 Excavation drawings;
 Drainage system with construction details;
 Access road drawings;
 Foundation layout drawings with detailed design of each foundation, including steel
reinforcement, bar schedules and calculation briefs;

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 5
 Cable trenches layout and details;

 Boundary wall and access gate;
 Structural drawings with re-bar schedules and calculation briefs;
 Architectural drawings of each main and ancillary building, showing layouts, plans
and front views, finish material, list of main components, sanitary accessories,
joinery, etc.;
 Electrical distribution diagrams;
 Detailed electrical plans, cable runs, cable trays, with bill of materials;
 Sewage system with piping, septic tank, filtration pit, drainage, etc.;
 Water supply system with piping, water tank, pump, well or connection to local water
supply, treatment devices, etc.;
 Air conditioning and ventilation system;

 Any other, as required.
All these are subject to the Engineer’s approval prior to proceed with any work. If the
Contractor has started the work without the Engineer’s consent or approval, the Contractor will
have to perform any corrective work which might result from Engineer’s review and will not be
entitled to any claim or compensation thereof.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit “as-built” drawings, at the end of construction, for all
civil, electrical and mechanical works.
1.8 Quality Control During Performances of Work
The Contractor shall implement a quality control program for the performance of the work. This
program shall be based on the principles of ISO 9001 standard.
The program, to be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to work
commencement, shall address, among others, the following issues:
 Q.A. organisation chart;

 Level of authority and competence of quality control personnel;
 Control of materials;
 Test facilities, tools and instruments;
 Follow-up and inspection of each piece of work in accordance with the drawings;
 Nonconformance report and corrective measures;
 Q.A. log book;
 Control of documentation at site.
The Contractor shall maintain the following Q.A. records at Site (as a minimum requirement)
which can be reviewed by the Engineer at any time:
 Files with verification forms and test results for the materials used for the Works.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 6
The various steps of compulsory inspection, defined for each element of work, shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
 Non-conformance report (NCR) report files: These reports will be kept current until
satisfactory corrective measures have been implemented. A periodic review of NCR
reports shall be performed with the Engineer to appraise the degree of quality of the
work performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep a rigorous follow-up of
all NCR reports.
 “As-built” drawings: the Contractor shall keep at Site an updated, “as-built”, marked-
up copy of each, available for inspection by the Engineer. Any substantial deviation
from the original construction drawings shall be documented by generating an NCR
for which the Contractor shall be asked to provide explanation and justification.
 The marked-up drawings will then be used by the Contractor to prepare the final “as-
built” drawings that will be handed to the Engineer on completion.
 The resident Contractor’s representative shall be responsible for the implementation
of the quality assurance program at site and for keeping the corresponding records.
2 SITE FACILITIES AND PRELIMINARY WORKS
2.1 Office and Storage
The Contractor shall provide, among others, the following facilities at Site:
 Contractor’s site office with, with adequate facilities for joint meetings with the
Employer and the Engineer. Minimum 3 rooms for Engineers and 1 room for
employer” and One conference room with 15 members seating capacity shall be
considered”. Conference room shall have provisions for overhead projector, Printer
and Xerox facilities.
 Sufficient number of Covered car parking facilities.
 The site establishment shall be subject to the approval of Engineer/Employer during
the Engineering stage.
 Accommodation for Contractor’s personnel
 Storage sheds for Permanent Works (materials and equipment). Where required,
air conditioning and ventilation shall be provided
 Storage sheds for Contractor’s equipment and materials
 Electrical and mechanical workshops
 Material control laboratory, fully equipped
 Canteen facilities for site personnel
 First-aid facilities
 Provision, servicing and maintenance of site facilities for Employer’s/Engineer’s
personnel, as specified
 Open areas for storage
 Security fence

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 7
 Water and power supply

 Temporary sewage and disposal system
 Firefighting equipment
 Others, as required.
Contractor’s facilities may include mobile units. Use of empty containers will be allowed,
provided these are suitably adapted for the intended purposes.
The Engineer may refuse the facilities of the Contractor if he judges they are not convenient
and not acceptable.
2.2 Surveying and Land Marking
The Contractor shall perform, prior to proceed with the work, a land survey. He will mark on the
ground, with pegs, the perimeter of the substation along with all significant reference axis and
reference points. Reference axis and points shall be clearly marked with metal plates bearing
identification and reference coordinates.
Once the marking is complete, the Engineer will perform a site review and authorize the
Contractor to proceed.
2.3 Mobilizing and Demobilizing
The Contractor shall be responsible to transport and install all site facilities, Temporary Works
and Contractor’s equipment, as required for the Works. Upon completion of the Works, the
Contractor shall remove the same and leave the Site clean and unencumbered, to the
Engineer’s approval.
2.4 Sign Board
The Contractor shall install a project sign board. Wording, size and location of the sign board
shall be as approved by the Employer.
2.5 Soil Investigation
The Contractor shall carry out soil investigations as a prerequisite condition for undertaking the
foundation design. Soil investigation shall be performed by personnel with pertinent
qualifications, training and experience. The minimum number of BH shall be 9 and depth of BH
shall be minimum 30 m.
2.5.1 Methods of Exploration
The methods of investigation shall be proposed by the Contractor but shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer prior to their implementation.
a) Soundings and Probings
Where sounding or probing methods of investigation are used (e.g., cone penetration
test), the log of each exploration shall be provided. On this log, the penetration
resistance at various elevations shall be shown.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 8
b) Boring
The proposed number, size and depth of exploratory holes to be drilled shall be as per
the relevant code requirements and subject to the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall select the appropriate method of obtaining samples (e.g., the use of solid
or split tube samplers, drive samplers, Shellby tube, etc.), but such methods shall be standard
and shall be documented in the report. Exploratory holes shall be stabilized where necessary to
prevent caving of the sides. Required number of Piezometers shall be installed to monitor the
ground water table.
Holes extending below groundwater shall be stabilized by lining with drive pipe, or casing, or by
means of drilling fluid, or by grouting. Open boreholes shall be backfilled when they are no
longer in use.
a) Excavation
Sizes of tests pits, test trenches shall be agreed with the Engineer. Where the
excavation is deep, the Contractor ensure, and be responsible for, the stability of the
excavation faces.
b) Groundwater Investigation
Where groundwater is at such a depth as to have an effect on the foundations, its location shall
be determined as accurately as possible within the probable construction zones.
Required number of Piezometers shall be installed to monitor the ground water table. Where
required, depth of water level in a borehole will be measured for a suitable length of time
depending on the nature and type of soil.
2.5.2 Number and Spacing of Exploration Holes
The number and spacing of exploration holes shall be such as to establish in reasonable details
the following: Minimum 9 number of Boreholes shall be considered and subject to Engineer’s
approval .
i) Stratigraphy of the soil which will be affected by or will have an effect on the new
structure.
ii) Engineering properties of the soil.
iii) Location of ground water.
The number and spacing of exploration holes will depend on the type of soil, the extent of the
work area and the degree of complexity of the subsurface conditions.
2.5.3 Depth of Exploration Holes
Depth of exploration holes shall depend on the magnitude of the load to be imposed on the
structure, the distribution of the load and the nature of the subsurface. Generally, exploratory
holes should extend to a depth where the increase in pressure is about ten percent (10 %) of

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 9
the contact pressure. This normally occurs at a depth of about 1.5 – 2.5 times the least
dimension of the structure. Minimum depth of BH shall be 30 m.
Exploratory holes should be deep enough to reveal the nature of the materials which could be
significantly affected by the loads imposed by the structure and which by settlement and or
shear failure could affect the integrity of the structure.
2.5.4 Sampling
a) Disturbed Samples
Disturbed samples shall be representative and shall be used in tests for soil identification
purposes such as water content test, mechanical analysis, Atterberg limits tests, specific
gravity tests and compaction tests.
The method of investigation and type of sampling equipment used to obtain disturbed
samples shall be documented in the report.
b) Undisturbed Samples
Samplers and sampling techniques designed to exert a pressure as close as possible to

the natural pressure of the in-situ material shall be used to obtain undisturbed samples.
Description of such samplers and sampling techniques shall be provided in the report.
Undisturbed samples shall be used for tests to determine engineering properties of the
soil such as compressibility, shear strength, permeability and consolidation. They may
also be used for the tests for which disturbed samples are required, as described above.
2.5.5 Preservation, Storage and Labelling of Samples
Samples, both disturbed and undisturbed, shall be carefully preserved and packed before
shipment to the laboratory.
Samples shall be placed in airtight containers such as glass jars.
The size of the containers shall be such that they are filled as much as possible with sampling
material. This will prevent loss of moisture from the samples through evaporation and
subsequent condensation on the walls of container.
Samples shall be placed in these containers as soon as they are retrieved and the containers
should be immediately capped. Undisturbed samples however shall be preserved in the
sample tubes used to retrieve them.
Every sample shall be clearly labelled so as to leave no doubt to the exact source of the
sample. All markings for the labels shall be weatherproof and wear-proof.
2.5.6 Testing
All field and laboratory tests shall be performed in accordance with the standards.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 10
All laboratory tests shall be carried out in an approved laboratory. American or British
Standards shall be used.
2.5.7 Field Tests
The following field tests shall be required:
a) For buildings and equipment support foundations:
i) Subsoil strata by means of boring
ii) Standard penetration test
iii) Dutch cone penetrometer test and/or shear vane test
iv) Plate bearing test
b) For roads:
i) In-situ density of sub-grade
ii) Plate bearing test of sub-grade
2.5.8 Laboratory Test
The following laboratory tests are required:
a) For buildings:
i) Particle size distribution test
ii) Consolidation tests to determine parameters of settlement analysis.
iii) Triaxial test, unconfined compression
b) For roads:
i) Dry density/moisture content determination on sub-grade and borrowed pit

materials
ii) California Bearing Ratio tests on sub-grade and borrowed pit materials
iii) Particle size distribution tests on sub-grade and borrowed pit materials
iv) Miscellaneous tests as specified by the Engineer
c) For equipment support foundations:
The same as for building.
It is Contractor’s responsibility to visit the site of the Works and familiarise himself with the
extent of the soil investigation program.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 11
2.5.9 Report of Soil Investigation
For each Substation site, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a soil investigation report
describing the methods used, the maximum allowable bearing pressure, unit weight and other
design parameters like type of recommended Foundation, Soil modulus etc.
In any case where the Contractor and/or the Engineer consider that the result of the soil
investigation is not sufficient to identify the soils in place and/or to select the appropriate design
parameters, the Contractor will have to conduct the required supplementary investigations to
complete the report with the corresponding results and conclusions.
2.6 Engineer’s Accommodation
Whenever specific reference is made in the schedule of prices for Engineer’s accommodation
the following shall apply.
2.6.1 Site Office
The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use of the Engineer one Portacabin office at each
site. They shall be located according to the engineer’s request and shall be available upon
arrival of the Contractor’s staff at site. The office shall be fully equipped and shall comprise at
least:
1. Air-conditioner;
2. Toilet, shower, hand wash basin with at least cold-water supply;
3. Adequate office furniture, i.e. 1 lockable desk, 1 chair, 1 filling cabinet, lighting;
4. Electricity supply on a 24-hour basis;
5. Fire extinguishers and other safety devises.
The offices shall be cleaned daily (if necessary) by the Contractor and kept in good condition.
The Contractor shall also provide in the Engineer’s site office one set of personal computer
(Intel Pentium 3.0 GHz MMX 512 MB RAM, CD-ROM with CD-Writer 32 speed/full multimedia,
1.44 FD, 160 HDD, VC MATROX G450, plasma 17” monitor; all to be compatibles), HP Deskjet
1220 C printer and 650 VA UPS, APC make. The PC shall be fully equipped with all
peripherals. A scanner and photocopying machine with an automatic document feeder (Sharp,
Minolta and Rank Xerox make them) shall also be available.
The Engineer’s office shall be equipped with radio communication facilities operating on
Contractor’s frequency range.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 12
3 LOCATION OF LAND
The contractor is entirely responsible for the accuracy of the data obtained by his surveying
team. The contractor shall inquire with the engineer for the exact location and dimensions of
the land acquired by the employer to avoid any possible conflict with neighbors. The contractor
will also be liable to verify with the local authority about possible right-of-way or co-ownership by
a third party and advise the engineer prior to commencement of any work. The contractor will
be responsible for errors in positioning the substation on ground.
3.1.1 General
Earthwork consists of all measures required to clear and prepare substation sites and access
roads as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Work consists of the following:
 Clear, grub and remove vegetation and debris

 Strip and remove top soil
 Grade site to elevations shown on drawings
 Supply, place and compact common fill
 Supply, place and compact other types of fill
 Supply and spread 300 mm layer of crushed stone
 Excavate and shape ditches.
3.1.1 Codes and Standards
Publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent specified in this sections:
A760/A760M Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic – Coated for
Sewers and Drains.
C117 Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75 m (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
C136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
D698 Standards Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
D4254 Standard Test method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils
and Calculations of Relative Density.
The Contractor may propose equivalent standards from recognized international organizations.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 13
3.1.2 Submittals
Submit details of the sources and types of all borrowed materials used in this section.
Submit results of test required to show compliance of material with the specification.
Submit results of field compaction tests, on common and other type of fill.
3.1.3 Special Care
a) Soil report
The Contractor is responsible for making the necessary soil investigation. The
Contractor shall inquire with the Employer for any available information especially when
the project consists in extending an existing facility.
b) Regulations
Shore and brace excavations, protect slopes and banks, and perform all work in
accordance with local regulations in the Country where is located the job site.
Blasting will be allowed only with the approval of the Employer, the Engineer and all
appropriate authorities, and shall be in strict accordance with government regulations.
Maximum precautions shall be taken for protection of personnel and property. The
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals and permits.
Permission to blast shall not be assumed to be automatic and, where approval and
permits are not granted, no claims will be considered for additional costs or delays.
The Contractor shall assign an experienced blasting specialist to supervise all blasting
operations. The blasting specialist shall be experienced in the use of explosives for
foundation excavations. His qualifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance.
c) Tests and Inspections
Testing of materials, compaction of backfill and fill will be carried out by testing
laboratory designated by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Do not begin backfilling or filling operations until the materials have been approved for
use by the Engineer.
Not later than 48 hours before backfilling or filling with approved material, notify Engineer
so that compaction tests can be witnessed.
Before commencing work, conduct surveys on conditions of existing buildings, trees and
other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks and paving, survey bench
marks and monuments which may be affected by work.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 14
d) Buried Services
Before commencing work, establish the location of all buried services on and adjacent to
the Site.
Arrange with the appropriate authority for relocation of buried services that interfere with
the execution of the work. Pay costs of relocating services.
Remove obsolete buried services within two (2) meters of foundations. Cap cut-offs.
e) Protection
Keep excavations clean, free of standing water and loose soil.
Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content,
cover and protect, as per Engineer’s approval.
Protect natural and man-made features required to remain undisturbed. Unless

otherwise indicated or located in an area to be occupied by new construction, protect
existing trees from damage.
Protect buried services that are required to remain undisturbed.
3.1.4 Materials
a) Common Fill
Selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by the Engineer for use
intended, free from rocks larger than compacted layer thickness, cinders, ashes, organic
inclusions such as leaves, wood, loam or other deleterious material and capable of being
compacted as specified in this section.
b) Other Type of Fill
Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand consisting of hard durable particles
free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material and other deleterious material.
Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117.
Sieve Designation % Passing

150 100
26.5 50 – 100
4.75 20 –55
1.18 10 – 40
0.3 5 – 25
0.075 0 – 10

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 15
c) Crushed Stone
Crushed or screened stone, consisting of hand durable particles free from organic or
other deleterious materials.
Gradations to be within the limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and C117.
Sieve Designation % Passing

19 100
16 0–5
d) Culverts
Corrugated Steel Pipe, Type 1, Zinc-coated, conforming to ASTM A760/A760M with

68mm x 13mm corrugations, complete with coupling bands. The Contractor may
propose equivalent armoured concrete pipes.
3.2 Preparation of Surface
3.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Remove trees, stumps, logs, brush, shrubs, bushes, vines, undergrowth, rotten wood, dead
plant material, exposed boulders and debris within areas designated to be graded.
Remove stumps and tree roots below footings, slabs, paving and to one (1.0) m below finished
grade elsewhere.
Dispose of cleared and grubbed material off site to disposal areas acceptable to the Engineer
and the authority having jurisdiction.
3.2.2 Stripping
Strip topsoil over areas to be covered by new construction and over areas where grade changes
are required so that excavated material may be stockpiled without covering topsoil. Dispose of
topsoil off site as per Engineer’s instructions and in accordance with local authority’s
regulations.
3.2.3 Preparation of Sub-Grade
Prior to placing any fill, remove all organic matter or debris from sub-grade and remove by
surface grading all ruts, hummocks and other uneven surfaces.
Where sub-grade has been softened or washed out by water, remove all damaged material and
replace with undamaged fill of the same class and compact as specified in clause below.
3.3 Earth Movement
3.3.1 Excavation
Excavate to grades as required to accommodate the works.


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 16
Unsuitable materials including organic matter and debris below grade or foundation elevation
shall be removed from the site and disposed of at location acceptable to all regulating agencies.
The acquisition of off-site disposal areas shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Excavated material suitable for common fill shall be stockpiled for future use.
Ensure that all sides of open excavations are maintained in a safe and stable condition by
shoring or adequate side slopes.
3.3.2 Dewatering
Ensure that all work areas and exactions are kept free of water during construction. Dewatering
shall be carried out to retain the water table 1 m below the Founding level and Dewatering shall
not be stopped without the approval of Engineer and subject to the relevant adequacy
calculation ensuring the safety of the structure.
3.3.3 Fill and compaction
a) Filling
After sub-grade preparation has been approved, spread approved fill material in layers
not exceeding 150 mm in uncompacted thickness. Do not place, spread or roll and fill
material when moisture content is unsuitable for compaction. The Fill material shall
comply with the requirements of Soil investigation agency on the approved soil report
and subject to the approval of Client /Engineer.
b) Moisture conditioning
Water or aerate the fill material as necessary and thoroughly mix to obtain a moisture
content which will permit proper compaction.
c) Compaction
Compact each soil layer to at least the minimum density specified. Repeat compaction
process until grade is attained.
d) Minimum density
Fill 98% maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 or 70% relative density as
determined by ASTM D4254.
e) Field Quality Control
Perform compacting test on fill.
Perform at least one density test for each 50 m3 or portion of each classification of fill
placed and not less than two tests during one shift.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 17
3.4 Grading
Perform all rough and finish grading required to accommodate the works. The finished
surfaces shall have a slight slope for the water to flow naturally towards the drains.
Use all means necessary to prevent erosion of graded areas during construction.
3.5 Over - Excavation
Fill any over-excavations with other approved fills in layers not exceeding 100 mm before
compaction to bring the excavation to the required elevation. Compact to 98% maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D698”
Backfilling materials shall be chosen & tests with in approved third party & fill materials
classification to be A-1-b.
3.6 Culvert Installation
Install culverts as per Contractor’s design approved by the Engineer. Ensure backfill is placed
under pipe haunches and compacted as specified. Material for pipe bedding must not contain
any rocks greater than 75 mm diameter.
3.7 Crushed Stone Cover
Spread an even layer of Crushed Stone 300 mm thick over the entire substation area plus 1.0
m outside the fence. Do not start this work until installation of equipment and underground
work is completed and site surface is leveled. Obtain Engineer’s approval before crushed stone
is levelled. Do not compact crushed stone. The stones shall be of natural Crushed stone and
shall not be of recycled stone.
3.8 Protection Against Erosion
1. Slopes of filling areas shall not exceed a height/length ratio of 1:2 inclination. Slopes of
cutting area shall not exceed 1:1 inclination in suitable material (otherwise 1:2).
2. Slopes shall be stabilized by grass seeding. Unstable slopes and all slopes with a height
of more than 2 m shall be protected by grass sod or by stone layers placed in mortar or
by lean concrete.
3. All surface water gutters shall be protected by stone layers placed in mortar or by lean
concrete.
4. External trenches shall be executed in U-shape reinforced concrete structure of V-shape
with RC bottom and RC base slopes; up-going slopes with stone layers in mortar.
All damages caused by erosion shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor during erection
and maintenance period.
3.9 Site Drainage
Adequate site drainage system shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain
rainfall data and design the storm water drainage system, (culverts, ditches, drains, etc.) to

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 18
accommodate the most intense rainfall that is likely to occur over the catchment area in a one
hour period on an average of once per ten years. The surfaces of the site shall be sloped to
prevent the stagnation of water.
The maximum velocity for pipe drains and open drains shall be limited to 2.4 m/sec and 1.8
m/sec respectively. However, minimum velocity for self-cleansing of 0.6 m/sec shall be
ensured. Longitudinal bed slope not milder than 1 in 1000 shall be provided.
Reinforced concrete pipes shall be precast and manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM C14M.
Adequate protection shall be given to site surfaces, roads, ditches, culverts, etc., to prevent
erosion of material by wind and water.
The drainage system shall be adequate without the use of cable/pipe trenches.
All pipes shall be clearly marked as to class and shall be of the class required for the depth of
backfill and surcharge loading. Manholes shall be provided at every 15 m interval, at
connection points and at every change of alignment.
For open trapezoidal drains, if provided, cast-in-situ PCC lining of minimum C40 grade on sides
and bottom shall be provided. The thickness of lining shall be minimum 100 mm or as per
design considerations whichever is higher.
In general, all plant effluent drainage shall be through buried concrete pipes and all storm water
drainage shall be through open drains/pipe drains. Open storm water drains shall be provided
on both sides of the roads and shall be designed to drain the road surface as well as all the free
and covered areas, etc.
Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes at an interval of max. 30 m . Plant effluents
shall be suitably treated by the Supplier to meet all the prevalent statutory requirements and
local pollution control norms.
Invert level of the drainage pipe shall be decided in such a way that the water can easily be
discharged above the High Flood Level (HFL) outside plant boundary at suitable location and
approved by the Owner. Pumping of drainage water (if required) shall be provided by
Contractor.
Rainwater drainage and foul sewerage system shall be kept completely separate. No foul
drainage must be led into the rainwater system under any circumstances and rainwater where it
is collected shall not be piped into the foul sewers.
All internal site drainage system, including the final connection/disposal to Owner acceptance
points shall be part of Contractor’s scope including all required civil work, mechanical and
electrical systems. The Contractor shall connect his drain(s) at one or more points.
The precast manholes shall be preferred against cast-in-situ type. The drainage scheme may
either employ open drain system or underground pipe system or a combination of both. A
manhole shall be provided at every turn, corner in case of underground type in addition to the
normal requirement.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 19
Suitable pumping arrangement shall be provided by the Supplier to pump out the water from
sump to the open channel; automatic float valve type pump shall be provided and installed by
the Supplier.
4 FOUNDATIONS AND CONCRETE WORKS
4.1 General
The Design of Foundation and superstructure shall be subject to the approval of Engineer
/Employer and authority.
The Gate level shall be finalized with the guideline of maintaining minimum 1 m high from the
nearest road level and subject to approval of authority /Client. Accordingly Suitable drainage
arrangement shall be included to ensure no flooding on the substation plot.
Substation foundations shall mean foundations for substation structures, electrical equipment,
fence and include cable trenches and covers.
Work of this section consists of all measures and materials required to design, supply, detail,
test and install substation foundations as specified herein and includes the following:
 Geotechnical investigation
 Foundations for substation steel structures and buildings
 Foundations for substation electrical equipment
 Foundations for substation fences
 Substation cable trenches and covers
No materials will be supplied by the Employer for inclusion in the work.
Publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent specified in this section:
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. Specification for Structural Concrete
2. Hot Weather Concreting
3. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary
A36/A36M Standard Specification for carbon structural steel
A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and steel hardware
A185 Standard Specification for welded wire fabric, plain, for concrete reinforcement
A615/A615M Standard Specification for deformed and plain billet steel bars for concrete
reinforcement

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 20
C33 Standard Specification for concrete aggregates
C39 Standard Test method for compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens
C260 Standard Specification for Air-entraining admixture for concrete
C494 Standard specification for chemical admixtures for concrete
D698 Standards Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).
D2103 Standard Specification for Polyethylene film and sheeting
D4254 Standard Test methods for minimum index density and Unit Weight of soils and
calculation of relative density
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
IEEE 980 Guide for containment and control of oil spills in substations.
The Contractor may propose to the Engineer equivalent standards from a recognized
international organization.
4.1.2 Submittals
Submit the following:
Submit items a and b prior to the final design of foundations.
a) Proposed geotechnical investigation program
A full description of the Contractor’s proposed soil investigation program and tests to be
carried out.
The equipment to be used and procedures to be adopted for the soil investigation.
b) Geotechnical report
A complete geotechnical report for the substation sites that shall compare the design
parameters specified herein with parameters based on the results of the investigations
undertaken by the Contractor.
Recommendations for foundation types and design parameters if the foundations

designed to the parameters specified herein are inadequate.
c) Design calculations
Final detail design calculations which shall clearly show the calculations and design
method for all proposed foundations and concrete structures and all ground conditions.
Include with the design the applied loads, actual and allowable stresses, overload
factors, soil parameter and any other pertinent information.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 21
d) Drawings
Construction drawings, complete in all respects.
e) Test certificates
Certified test certificates showing compliance of materials to references listed in 5.1.1.
f) Reinforcing steel
Specification for grades of steel used.
g) Material tests
Source and description of material to be used as common fill.
Source and gradation of materials to be used as other types of fill.
h) Concrete
Concrete mix design and trial mix results.
Test results of samples of water and aggregate from each source used.
i) Concrete field test
Reports on all tests carried out on concrete test specimens taken in the field during
construction. These shall include, but not be limited to, compression tests, slump tests
and air content tests.
j) Field compaction tests
Result of tests on compaction of fill.
4.1.3 Special Care
a) Soil report
The Contractor is responsible for making the necessary soil investigation.
The Contractor shall inquire with the Employer for any available information, especially
when the project consists in extending an existing facility.
b) Source Quality Control
Materials supplied by manufacturer’s name and classification shall be so identified by

the manufacturer.
Bar reinforcement procured for works shall be separated and tagged according to mill
test identification numbers.
c) Allowable tolerances

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 22
 Foundations
- Foundation centre lines within 25 mm from theoretical centre lines shown on the
drawings.
- Top of foundations  10mm from elevations shown on drawings.
 Anchor Bolts
- 3 mm centre-to-centre of any two bolts within an anchor bolt group where an
anchor bolt group is defined as the set of anchor bolts which receives a single
fabricated steel-shipping piece.
- 6 mm centre-to-centre of adjacent anchor bolt groups.
- Maximum accumulation of 6 mm per 30 m along the established column line of
multiple anchor bolt groups but not to exceed a total of 25 mm. The established
column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as-
built anchor bolt groups along a line of columns.
- 6 mm from the centre of any anchor bolt group to the established column line
through that group.
d) Product delivery and handling of concrete products
Portland cement, concrete aggregate and concrete admixtures shall be handled and
stored in accordance with the applicable standards of ACI 301.
e) Hot weather requirements for concrete work
Hot weather requirements shall apply when daily mean ambient temperature is 27C or
above. Procedures shall be adhered to as outlined in ACI 305. Concrete mix
temperatures shall not exceed 32C at time of placing.
f) Sulphates and chlorides
At locations where the concentration of chlorides or sulphates in soil exceeds 0.1% or in

ground water exceeds 150 ppm, apply to the full concrete surfaces in contact with soil
one of the following treatments:
 Two coats of emulsified asphalt

 Two layers of 4 mm thick bituminous water proofing membrane
The system of water proofing shall be subject to the approval of Client / Engineer only.
In addition, provide at the base of footings a layer of unreinforced concrete with a

minimum thickness of 75 mm.
4.1.4 Materials
a) Concrete
Materials for concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301, Specification
for Structural Concrete, except as modified by the following supplemental requirements:
The minimum grade of Concrete to be used shall be C40

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 23
 The following admixtures may be used:

- Air entraining admixtures to ASTM C260;
- Concrete shall conform to ASTM C450:
Type I cement with tricalcium aluminate (C3A) content between 6% to 8% or;
Type II cement.
- Chloride and sulphate content of aggregates shall be limited to 0.2% by dry
weight;
- Fine and coarse aggregates shall be normal weight and from sources
agreed by the Engineer, capable of delivering supplies of consistent quality
in accordance with ASTM C33;
- Water used in mixing concrete and water used for curing shall be clear and
free from chlorides, organic matters and other impurities not suitable for
concrete as specified in ACI 301.
The use of all admixtures will be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
 Plain bars are not permitted for reinforcement.

 Proprietary materials for repair of surface defects will only be permitted if the use of
the proposed materials is agreed to by the Engineer.
 Damp-proofing shall be installed below control building slabs and shall consist of
0.20 mm minimum thickness polyethylene to ASTM D2103 or 20 kg (45 lb) roll
roofing.
 Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 40 MPa at 28 days unless
shown otherwise in the drawings.
b) Reinforcement
Bar reinforcement, deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615/A615M grade 400.

Reinforcing fabric conforming to ASTM A185. The reinforcement shall ensure minimum
yield strength of 420 Mpa
c) Grout
Pre-mixed cement based, non-ferrous, non-shrink.
d) Anchor bolts
Steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M.
e) Grating
Standards galvanized steel bar grating with bearing bars at 30 mm c/c cross bars at 100
mm c/c.
f) Miscellaneous steel
Miscellaneous and embedded steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M.


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 24
g) Joint filler
Oil resistant closed cell PVC foam, rigid grade.
h) Joint sealant
Oil resistant pourable polyurethane.
i) Backfill
Common fill as specified in clause (a) under item 3.1.4. Backfill from any source shall
be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
j) Other type of fill
Other type of fill as specified in clause (b) under item 3.1.4
4.1.5 Design
a) General
Foundations may be reinforced concrete rafts, spread footings or augured caissons, as

recommended by the Soil investigation agency and subject to the approval of the
Engineer /authority The type of Foundation shall be Raft in case of shallow Foundation
and in case of deep Foundation it shall be of Pile Foundation. In case of Pile Foundation
required Type tests (Minimum 2 piles of each type of pile to be tested for 250 % of
working load 1 % of each type of Pile to be tested as working pile for 150 % of working
load and integrity test to be conducted on all working piles).
Design reinforced concrete in accordance with ACI 318 except as otherwise specified.
Clauses forming this specification and related clauses contained in ACI 318 shall be
read together.
Dimensions of all foundations shall be determined from the most critical combination of
foundation down thrust, uplift overturning moments and horizontal shears in both
transverse and longitudinal directions.
For spread type foundation design, all overturning moments, vertical and horizontal
loads shall be resisted by vertical bearing pressures and no passive lateral resistance of
the soil shall be considered.
The height of the water table shall be taken into account when designing foundations.
Ensure total settlement under any long-term loading condition does not exceed 25 mm
and differential settlement not exceeding 15mm / Equipment manufacturer’s
recommendation whichever is least
The catch basin shall be covered with galvanized steel grating & 50MM natural crushed
stone shall be laid on top of it
b) Soil parameters

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 25
The design shall be based on the results of geotechnical investigation performed by the
Contractor and accepted by the Engineer.
As a matter of example only, the following are typical design parameters:
 Allowable bearing pressure on soil 100 – 400 kN/m2

 Allowable bearing pressure on rock 2500 kN/m2
 Allowable bearing pressure on other type of fill 500 kN/m2
 Dry density of soil 1500 – 2000 kg/m3
 Submerged density of soil 1000 – 1050 kg/m3
 Inverted cone angle for resistance to uplift or
overturning 5 – 25 degrees
 Water table below finished grade 0.5 – 1.5 m
For rock foundations, they shall extend to the rock surface and if necessary make use of
rock anchors. In the case of lightly loaded foundations, other type of fill may be placed
between the base of the foundation and the rock surface.
All foundations are to extend at least 1.0 m below sub grade and are to be placed on a
300 mm layer of other type of fill.
c) Loading
 Wind loading:
Wind loading shall be the same as for the metal structure technical specification
(refer to document 016403-2000-43ES-3200).
 Steel structure loading:
Load transmitted to foundations by the steel structures shall be determined by the
Contractor from calculations performed for design of the steel structures (refer to
document 016403-2000-43ES-3200).
 Equipment loading:
Refer to document 016403-2000-43ES-3200. The Intensity of live load shall be as
below: for Floor Slab 10 kPa and for Roof Slab 5 kPa or Equipment load
whichever is greater.
 Loading combinations:
Refer to document 016403-2000-43ES-3200.
 Factors of safety
The factors of safety below shall be applied to the specified loads to factored
loads:
Condition Factor of Safety

Overturning or uplift 1.5
Foundation concrete and reinforcing design 1.3

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 26
Soil bearing pressures 1.0*

*The factor of safety is included in the allowable bearing pressures.
 Seismic loading (Refer to document 016403-2000-43ES-0000)
d) Oil containment basin and separator
Capacity of oil containment basin around transformer foundations to be 110 % of volume

of oil in transformer and conservator. Containment shall extend at least 1500 mm past
oil containing parts of transformers. The basin shall be filled with fire extinguishing
crushed stone. The oil capacity of the basin shall be calculated by subtracting the
volume occupied by the crushed stone.
An oil/water separator tank shall be provided and connected to each containment basin
of the substation. The tank size shall be such as to hold 110% of total volume of oil
contained in the largest transformer or reactor.
There shall be one common separator tank for all power autotransformers and shunt
reactors. There shall be a valve at the water outlet of the separator tank with buried pipe
leading to a drainage point.
The design of the oil containment basin and separator tank shall be compliant with the
IEEE 980 Standard.
In case of small apparatus (such as earthling reactors) containing less than 5000 l of oil,
the basin can be connected to any separator tank used for large apparatus provided it is
located within reasonable reach.
e) Cable trenches
Cable trenches shall be designed for multilevel cable arrangement to separate the LV
power cables from the LV control cables and between segregated redundant circuit
cables. The trenches shall be provided with suitable wall mounted supports for cables to
lay on spacing between supports shall not exceed 300 mm. No cable shall be allowed to
lay directly on the bottom of the trenches such that water can flow freely to the drainage
points.
Adequate drainage shall be provided to prevent water from accumulating in the trenches
at any time. The size of the trenches shall be calculated such as to include the amount
of cables for the ultimate substation arrangement plus 20% spare capacity as a
maximum.
The cables trenches network shall include cable pits located in strategic points to allow
grouping and routing of cables from different sectors of the substations.
The size of the pits shall be sufficient to allow entry of personnel and proper
arrangement of cables. The pit shall be provided with convenient cable trays and water
drainage.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 27
Cable trenches and pits shall be with steel reinforced concrete cover pieces capable to
support the weight of a maintenance vehicle. The cover pieces weight shall be limited to
allow handling by one man.
The MV cables will be routed through buried ducts imbedded in concrete. Proper access
boxes shall be given to allow pulling the cables inside the ducts. The boxes shall be
located in such locations as to avoid excessive pulling tension on the cables. There
shall not be more than one bent between two boxes or more than 100 m length of duct.
4.1.6 Fabrication and Manufacture
 Reinforcing steel
Make bends in reinforcement to shapes shown on the drawings and bar schedule. Make
bends around mandrels to achieve the specified bending radii. Report to Engineer any
tendency of the bends to crack. Discard bars with cracks or splits.
 Anchor bolts
Galvanize anchor bolts to ASTM A153 for at least the projection plus 150 mm.
Supply anchor bolts with levelling nuts and lock nuts. Nuts shall run freely on threads.
4.2 Geotechnical Investigation
Perform geotechnical investigation (also refer to Section 2.5) consisting of at least one shell and
auger bore hole for each change in surface soil condition with a minimum of three bore holes at
each site together with visual examination, identification, in situ sampling and testing, and
laboratory tests. In-situ testing shall consist of standard penetration test, static cone
penetration test or additional types of tests as appropriate to the ground conditions. The
geotechnical investigations shall be sufficiently detailed to determine acceptable foundation
design parameters.
4.3 Construction
a) Templates
Use rigid steel templates for accurately positioning and maintain anchor bolts to the
specified dimensional tolerances during installation, backfilling and concrete setting
periods.
b) Excavation
Perform all excavations and dewatering required to construct the foundations.
Set the base of the foundations within the specified allowable tolerances to the depth
shown on the construction drawings or as specified by the Engineer.
c) Backfill
Do not begin backfilling until material has been approved by the Engineer. Do not
backfill without agreement of Engineer.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 28
Backfill foundations using common fill in 150 mm layers before compaction.
Compact to 98% maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698 or 70% of relative
density as determined by ASTM D4254.
Backfill shall be placed only in dry excavated holes or in holes kept dry by dewatering.
Under no circumstances shall backfill be placed in an excavation where water is present.
d) Concrete
 Anchor bolts position

Inspect installation of anchor bolts before and immediately after placing concrete and
correct immediately where these have been inadvertently cast out of true position.
 Execution
Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301, Specifications for Structural
Concrete, except as modified by the supplemental requirements below:
- The use of earth cuts for forms will be permitted provided adequate cover is
maintained for reinforcement.
- Provide a 25 mm x 25 mm chamfer on external corners and edges of concrete
exposed to view. Do not chamfer interior edge of cable trench walls.
- Testing will be carried out as specified in Section 5.4 Field Quality Control.
- Do not disturb formwork until concrete has hardened adequately.
- Welding of reinforcement will not be permitted.
- Placement of concrete under water will not be permitted.
- Damp-proofing below control building slabs shall be lapped no less than 200 mm
at joints.
e) Concrete Formwork
All formwork shall be of approved design, rigidly constructed of approved materials,

adapted in all respects to the several structures, to the required finishes, and shall be of
sufficient strength to withstand the pressure of the wet concrete without distortion.
The formwork (roof, beams, etc) shall be constructed with cambers, as is necessary to
produce the finished structures to the correct levels and profiles.
Timber for formwork to surfaces of concrete which will be exposed to view in the finished
work shall be sound, well seasoned, wrought and free from loose knots and shall be
maintained so that such concrete surface are smooth, true and free from blemishes.
Well-seasoned, rough timber or other suitable material may be used for unexposed
surfaces of concrete.
Bolts or other internal spaces intended to be recovered shall be fixed so they can be
easily removed when the formwork is stripped and the hole remaining after concreting
shall be filled with fine concrete or plastic stubs. No part of any metal tie or spacer
remaining permanently embedded in the concrete shall be closer than 20 mm from the
finished surface of the concrete.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 29
All pipes, bolts, steelwork and other fixings that are required to be built in or through any
concrete element shall be firmly fixed in the formwork, which shall be neatly cut and
fitted to suit, joints being caulked where necessary to prevent the escape of grout.
Likewise, cores and other devices used for forming openings, holes, pockets, chases,
etc., shall be fixed to the formwork prior to the wet concrete reaching their level.
The inner surfaces of the formwork shall be treated with a coat of approved material by
the Engineer. The use of motor oil is prohibited. Before pouring the concrete, all
formwork shall be cleaned to remove dirt, shavings, and sawdust and must be inspected
and approved by the Engineer.
No formwork shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer but such approval
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual responsibilities.
The removal of the formwork shall be carried out carefully so as to avoid damaging the
concrete. No overloading nor any earth, water or other weight or pressure shall be
applied to any part of a structure until permission is given by the Engineer.
Striping times for all formwork shall be agreed the Engineer from time to time and shall
take into consideration the nature of the work and the current climatic conditions.
Typical stripping times of formwork:
Foundations: 1 day
Columns: 7 days
Beams: 7 days (side: 3days) subject to achieving required design strength
Beams greater than 8 m span and of cantilever beams: slab shall be back propped 50%
after formwork removal for 7 more days.
Slabs: 14-20days
The contractor shall ensure that the above striking duration shall not result in
unacceptable deflection and damages to elements.
4.4 Field Quality Control
4.4.1 Concrete
a) General
Obtain Engineer’s agreement of all work to be covered by concrete before placing

concrete and all equipment to be used during concrete work. Give to the Engineer 24
hours’ notice of intention to place concrete for each placement.
b) Trial concrete mix
A minimum of 30 days prior to the commencement of concreting operations, the

Contractor shall prepare a trial concrete mix consisting of the mixing water, aggregates,
cement and batching procedure to be used during construction. The materials shall be
mixed according to the Contractor’s design; compressive strength tests and durability
tests shall be carried out by the Contractor on the concrete in accordance with ASTM

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 30
C39. A sufficient number of concrete specimens shall be tested to give an accurate

statistical indication of the sufficiency of the mix design and batching process.
A trial concrete mix shall be required for each change in mix design.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer a minimum of seven (7) days prior to the date
of the trial mix. The trial mix and the compression tests must be witnessed by the
Engineer. Results of the concrete compression tests shall be made available to the
Engineer immediately upon completion of the tests.
c) Sampling and testing
The Contractor shall perform all testing in accordance with ACI 301 Chapter 16, Testing.
The Engineer may require that not more than 5% of all testing be carried out by an
independent local testing laboratory appointed by the Engineer.
Where required by the Engineer, cores at least 50 mm in diameter shall be obtained and
tested.
The Contractor shall perform one slump test and one air content test on each specimen
of concrete taken for compression tests.
At least one compression test shall be performed for each 50 m3 by taking 6 cylindrical
samples to be tested at 7 & 28 days for each portion of concrete placed in any one day,
but not less than one specimen per footing. Reinforcement
4.4.2 Reinforcement
Notify Engineer on completion of reinforcement installation. Obtain agreement of

reinforcement installation before covering up work with formwork or concrete.
4.4.3 Formwork
Notify Engineer on completion of formwork erection and fixing of the items specified
herein. Obtain agreement before placing concrete.
4.4.4 Protective Coatings
Notify Engineer on completion applying protective coatings. Obtain agreement before

backfilling.
4.4.5 Backfill
Perform compaction tests on common fill and other type of fill. Perform at least one test
per foundation and per each classification of material.
4.4.6 Grouting
Grout under structure base plates after structures are plumbed and levelled.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 31
Mix and place grout in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
4.5 Adjust and clean
4.5.1 Cleaning
On completion of works, leave concrete surfaces exposed to view as clean as when first
finished.
4.5.2 Backfill
Check that no backfill has settled below general ground level. Fill depressions over
excavation and holes.
4.5.3 Protection of Concrete in Contact with Soil
The type of cement to be used shall be determined by the pH value of the soil and by the
concentration of sulphates as follows:
 Ordinary Portland Cement pH > 6

 Sulphate Resisting Cement pH > 5
 Super-sulphated Cement pH > 3.5
Sulphate-resisting or super-sulphated cement shall be used in all foundations where the

concentration of sulphates (expressed as S03) exceeds 0.5% in the soil or exceeds 120
parts per 100 000 in the ground water.
Where the concentration of sulphates exceeds 2.0% weight in the soil or exceeds 500
parts per 100 000 in the ground water, sulphate-resisting or super-sulphated cement
shall be used and, in addition, an impermeable protective barrier as outlined in a) and b)
hereafter shall be inserted between concrete and soil.
The onus will be on the Contractor to satisfy the Client that either or both of the above
protective measures may be omitted at any site location.
a) A continuous layer of Visqueen or other approved material shall be interposed between

the soil and the concrete, and adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that this
layer is not torn or punctured while concrete is being placed.
Concrete blinding to all foundations shall be placed in two 50 mm layers of lean

concrete. A layer of “Visqueen 1000” polythene sheeting shall be placed under the
blinding and the two layers of blinding shall be separated by a further layer of polythene.
Two layers of approved bitumastic material approximately 4.0 mm thick shall be placed
on top of the blinding under the structural concrete and shall be carried up the sides of
all foundations to a level of 300 mm above ground level. The polythene shall be lapped
with the membrane on all vertical faces.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 32
Backfill material shall be to the approval of the owner and a 4 mm layer of inert material
such as “Cork Pak” or Protection board shall be used to protect the vertical impervious
layer if there are large or sharp particles in the backfill material
b) For pile foundation, concrete blinding to all pile caps shall be place in two 50 mm layers
of lean concrete. A layer of “Visqueen 1000” polythene sheeting shall be placed under
the blinding.
Two layers of approved bitumastic material approximately 4.0 mm thick shall be placed
between the two layers of blinding and shall be carried up the sides of all pile caps,
bases, beam walls, etc. to a level of 300 mm above ground level. The membrane shall
be lapped on all vertical faces. The membrane shall also be lapped onto the sacrifical
mild steel casing to maintain full continuity of the groundworks protection. Water proofing
system at Pile Cut off level shall be proposed as per manufacturer recommendation for
approval of Client /Engineer and approved system shall be used.
Back fill material shall be to the approval of the Owner and a 4mm layer of inert material
such as Protection board shall be used to protect the vertical impervious layer if there
are large or sharp particles in the backfill material.
5 ROADS AND PAVED AREAS
5.1.1 General
Road geometry shall be in accordance with American Association of State Highways and
Transportation Officials (ASHTO) or equivalent.
The Contractor shall design and construct Routes including parking areas and turning
bays with asphaltic concrete surfacing for roads between the highway and the
substation, roads within and surrounding the substation and the parking areas.
As far as is practicable excavated material shall be used in the construction of road

embankments, or for refill of road excavation below formation.
Surplus material not required for the Works shall be disposed of in approved disposal
areas.
Internal Road / External Road shall be 10m / 8 m width respectively and length of
permanent External Road shall be made from Substation Boundary to the nearest main
road”.
Asphalt concrete road layers shall be:
The following layer thickness is the minimum.
Asphalt wearing course = 50mm.
Asphalt bearing course = 80mm.
Aggregate base course = 250 to 300 mm.


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 33
General fill (sub grade) = as per site condition (200mm minimum).
The CONTRACTOR shall construct flexible pavement confirm AASHTO and MOT codes
for 15 years durability. The prime & track coats shall confirm AASHTO standard.
5.1.2 Embankment
After stripping, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of not less than
200 mm. Benching will be required on slopes greater than one vertical to four horizontal.
Benches shall be 3 m wide with 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical side slopes. After scarifying
the area shall be compacted to the requirements of the following clause.
Suitable embankment material, approved by the Owner, shall be placed in approximately

horizontal layers for the full width of the embankment to a thickness of not more than
300 mm after compaction. Each layer shall be compacted for its full width until the dry
density is in excess of ninety (90) percent of the maximum dry density obtained from the
compaction test carried out in accordance with ASTM D698 and in the moisture range of
optimum to two (2) percent dry of optimum. The Contractor shall carry out testing at a
rate of not less than one for every 1 000 m3 of material placed at the locations
determined by the Owner for control of the embankment. The material in the top
450 mm of the embankment shall be compacted in three layers of equal thickness to not
less than ninety-five (95) percent of its maximum dry density and trimmed to the
specified approved slopes or slopes shown on the approved Drawings. It is the
responsibility of Contractor to prove the stability of the Embankment to the satisfaction of
Client /Engineer.
5.1.3 Preparation of Subgrades
Immediately prior to the construction of the road sub-base, the Contractor shall ensure
that the formation is shaped to the approved lines and grades as shown on the Drawings
and the entire surface of the formation is compacted to the density specified.
Spray watering or drying out by harrowing and respreading, as the case may be, may be
required to improve compaction characteristics.
Soft and yielding material which will not dry out readily or compact satisfactorily shall be
removed and the material replaced with approved material compacted as above. Any
holes or depressions shall also be filled with approved material.
After compaction and leveling, the Contractor shall carry out such maintenance as is
necessary to preserve and keep the surface of the subgrade in its approved condition
until the sub-base is placed.
5.1.4 Road Base and Sub-Base Construction
Preparation of Formation
The preparation of formation shall be carried out only after completion of all subgrade drainage,
piped drains, services and ducts or any other drainage work that might affect the pavement

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 34
works, and such preparation shall be carried out immediately prior to the laying of the sub-base,
or the road base where no sub-base is required.
The surface of the formation shall be substantially uniform in density throughout its entire width
and shall conform to the density requirements for compaction. It shall be trimmed to conform to
the lines, cambers, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the approved Drawings. Where
ruts or other objectionable irregularities occur as a result of construction traffic or other causes,
the Contractor shall reshape and recompact the formation to the required density before the
sub-base or base is placed.
The surface of the subgrade before the construction of the sub-base shall be within 20 mm of
the correct levels.
Base and Sub-base
The thickness of the base and sub-base shall be determined by the Contractor from subgrade
strength tests and submitted to the Owner for approval.
Base and sub-base materials shall be approved on the basis of strength tests and shall comply
with the following conditions:
 The base shall have:

- a minimum thickness of 150 mm;
- a minimum four day-soaked California Bearing Ratio Test value of eighty
(80) percent at a density of ninety-five (95) percent of the maximum dry
density as defined in ASTM D1557 with moisture content not greater than
ninety (90) percent of optimum moisture content (4.5 kg rammer method);
- a maximum plasticity index of 6;
- a liquid limit not greater than 25;
- a maximum lineal shrinkage of 4 for material passing 0.475 mm ASTM
sieve.
 Base material shall be well graded and in accordance with Table 3 of Road Note 31,
37.5 mm nominal size natural gravel or Table 4 for all-in crushed stone base
material with one hundred (100) percent material passing the 37.5 mm BS sieve.
 The sub-base shall have:
 a minimum four day-soaked California Bearing Ratio Test value of twenty-five (25)
percent; and
 a maximum plasticity index of 12.
Base and sub-base construction may be of in-situ or imported material as proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Owner. Imported material shall be spread evenly over the
whole width of the formation required prior to construction.
Construction of base and sub-base layers shall comprise sufficient scarifying, pulverising, even
mixing with water, shaping and compacting to produce a dry density of the treated material for
the total depth of the layer not less than ninety-five (95) percent of the maximum dry density as
defined in ASTM D1557 with moisture content not greater than ninety (90) percent of optimum

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 35
moisture content. If the moisture content is too low for satisfactory compaction, moisture shall
be added.
Unless otherwise approved, base and sub-base construction shall be carried out in layers not
exceeding 150 mm each in compacted depth. All material shall be placed and spread evenly to
the full width of the roadbed. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density before the
next layer is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent segregation of the material into the coarse
and fine fractions. Segregated surface areas of a base constructed or base material
contaminated to such an extent that it no longer complies with the requirements of this
Technical Specification shall be removed and replaced with well graded and satisfactory
material.
The surface of the base and sub-base shall be well drained at all times.
Compaction shall be completed as soon as possible after each layer has been spread and
shaped satisfactorily. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with suitable compaction
equipment.
The finished base and sub-base surface shall be even, free from irregularities, loose material or
fines and true to cross-section, line and level. The finished base surface shall not show any
departure from the true surface of more than 12 mm in any length of 3 m in either the
longitudinal or transverse direction. Correction shall be by loosening, adding or removing
material, reshaping and re-compaction.
5.1.5 Checking of Pavement Layers
The Contractor shall test the compaction of the base and sub-base where directed by the
Owner. The frequency of such testing shall be not less than two (2) tests in any 100 m length
of road for each layer of sub-base and base material. In addition, the Contractor shall check
the thickness of the base and sub-base with not less than five measurements make in any
100 m length of road. The average thickness of the sub-base shall not be less than the
required thickness and no single measurement shall be less than ninety (90) percent thereof.
The Contractor shall rectify any area of the work where tests fail to meet the requirements of
the Technical Specification and shall re-test where, directed by the Owner.
5.1.6 Asphaltic Concrete Surfacing
General
The Contractor shall prime, tack coat and apply asphaltic concrete surfacing on the Works
Routes specified to be sealed with asphaltic concrete, as approved.
Such surfacing work shall consist of the production, transport and placement of a pavement
surfacing comprising one course of dense graded asphaltic concrete to be constructed on the
prepared binder course. The asphaltic concrete course shall be construction to the approved
design lines, levels, grades, dimensions, respective thicknesses and cross sections as shown
on the approved Drawings.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 36
Work to be undertaken prior to the placement of asphaltic concrete surfacing shall comprise the
application of an asphaltic prime coat to pavement base course prepared and approved by the
Owner and the application of an asphaltic tack coat to the prepared primed base course.
Materials
Prime coat and Tack Coat: Cut back asphalt shall for prime and tack coats conform to the
requirements of MC-70 designated in ASTM D2027. Primer protection material shall be clean
dry sand from a source approved by the Owner and it shall be free of clay, silt and organic
matter.
Asphaltic Concrete: The asphaltic concrete shall consist of crushed aggregate, mineral filler
and asphalt. The quality of aggregate shall conform to the requirements for concrete aggregate
in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C33. Mineral filler shall consist of limestone dust,
dolomite dust, or similar rock dust, Portland cement, hydrated lime or other non-plastic mineral
matter approved by the Owner. It shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps. Asphalt shall
conform to the requirements given in AASHTO Standard Specification for Asphalt Cement,
designation M20-70, and its penetration value shall be 60-70. No additives shall be included in
the asphalt.
Design of Asphaltic Concrete Mixes
The design of asphaltic concrete mixtures shall be undertaken by the Contractor. The design of
the mixtures shall be carried out in a materials testing laboratory approved by the Owner. The
design of the asphaltic concrete mixtures shall be undertaken on the basis of trial mixtures
prepared and tested according to standard Marshall methods.
The mixture parameters:
 percentage and grading of coarse aggregate,

 percentage and grading of fine aggregate,
 filler content, and
 asphalt content as a weight percentage of the total mix,
shall be chosen within the limits and to yield mixture characteristics acceptable to the Owner. In
selecting the asphalt content of the respective final mixtures, due regard shall be given to
optimizing the bulk density of the compacted mix.
The submission of the job mixture or mixtures for the approval of the Owner shall follow the
carrying out of mixture design as specified in this Clause.
The manufacture and testing of trial mixtures as well as the testing of individual mixture
components will be carried out in the presence of the Owner. All testing undertaken in the
course of mixture design shall follow current ASTM test procedures including:
ASTM C128 Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate
ASTM C127 Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 37
ASTM D4469 Asphalt absorption by aggregate
Construction Methods:
Prime Coat
The prime coat shall be applied only to a dry surface of base course which has been thoroughly
swept to the satisfaction of the Owner using mechanical brooms. The prime coat shall be
applied only when the road surface temperature is at least 24 °C and no rain is threatening.
The application rate shall be between 1.2 and 1.5 litres/m 2 and the temperature of application
for the prime coat shall be as approved by the Owner. The use of primer protection sand shall
be limited to areas designated by the Owner, elsewhere the prime coat shall be left uncovered
to penetrate and to cure completely.
Tack Coat
Application of a tack coat shall be carried out as a preliminary operation on the day when a
placement of asphaltic concrete is scheduled. Mechanical brooming to thoroughly clean the
surface of the prime coat, to the satisfaction of the Owner, shall in all cases form part of the
surface preparation.
The application rate and the temperature of application for the tack coat shall be as approved.
The asphaltic material for tack coat shall be applied at a rate in the range of 0.2 litres/m2 to 0.5
litres/m2, and the asphalt distributing equipment shall be capable of spreading at these rates.
Asphaltic Concrete
Asphaltic concrete surfacing shall be placed in one course which shall comprise asphaltic
concrete having a maximum aggregate size of 20 mm placed to a compacted thickness of not
less than 50 mm.
The delivery temperature of the mixture shall be within the absolute limits of 140 °C and 163 °C.
Breakdown compaction of the mat shall commence as soon as working clearance exists
behind the paver for the breakdown roller. Materials deposited on the road behind the paver
and not in the course of being compacted by the roller, may be rejected should its temperature
be less than 120 °C.
Asphaltic concrete surfacing shall be placed using self-propelled temper/spreader paving

machines, approved by the Owner. Each paving machine used shall work in conjunction with
two road rollers, a steel drummed roller for breakdown rolling and a multi-tyred roller for finish
rolling. The steel drummed roller shall have a mass of at least eight (8) tonne. The multi-tyred
roller shall have a mass of at least ten (10) tonne and shall have at least nine (9) tyres each
capable of inflation to a pressure of 830 kPa (8.0 kG/cm2). Each roller shall incorporate a
means of keeping the drums (tyres) wet during operation to prevent picking up of the asphaltic
concrete mat. Only experienced operators shall be used on the rollers. Sharp turns and
sudden reversals of traveling direction will not be permitted on the asphaltic concrete surface.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 38
Placement of asphaltic concrete shall be continuous. In the event of an interruption of

placement due to the weather or plant failure or any other cause, the Contractor shall form a
construction joint the mat before placement resumes.
Control testing shall be undertaken by the Contractor on days when asphaltic concrete is being
placed. All control testing shall be in accordance with ASTM procedures.
Tests on Asphaltic Concrete Surface
Tests for conformity with the specified crown, grade and width shall be made by the Contractor
Immediately after initial compaction. Any deviation shall be corrected by removal or addition of
materials and continuous rolling.
After completion of final rolling. the smoothness of the course shall again be tested along the
whole distance. Humps or depressions that exceed the specified tolerances or that retain water
on the surface shall be immediately corrected by removing defective work and replacing with
new asphaltic concrete.
Finished surfaces shall not vary from the design elevations by more than 2.5 mm when tested
with a crown template and a 3 m straight-edge furnished by the Contractor. Tests shall be
performed at 25 m intervals along the road centerline or as approved.
The width shall not be less than 25 mm of the design section measured at 50 m intervals.
The total thickness of the asphaltic concrete shall be determined by core tests conducted by the
Contractor taken at places designated by the Owner. At least one core test is required for every
1 000 m2 of area paved with a minimum of one core test for each day’s production. The
thickness shall not be greater than 5 mm less than the designed depth for any one test and not
greater than 2.5 mm less for an average of 10 consecutive tests.
When deficiencies in either elevation or thickness exceeds the specified tolerance, the
Contractor shall carry out additional testing to verify the extent of the deficiency and remove and
replace the asphaltic concrete surfacing with new material to the Owner’s approval.
5.1.7 Carparks and Other Areas
Car parks shall generally be surfaced with base, road base and asphalt concrete pavement.
The pavement shall be designed for an average number of standard axles per day of 50 for a
design life of 25 years using an internationally accepted method of design.
Remaining areas to be surfaced which are not to be subjected to traffic loading shall be covered
with the minimum thickness of surfacing. Sub-base and road base requirements in these areas
shall be designed on the basis of the intended area usage.
5.1.8 Interlocking Paving Blocks
Road to be paved with interlocking concrete blocks shall be excavated and replaced with
300 mm depth of compacted material at the exact levels and falls required for the finished work.
If parts of the base are found to be unstable the Contractor shall excavate further to a firm bed
and fill with layers of fine crushed rock or aggregate, thoroughly compacted. The upper surface

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 39
of the base shall reflect the exact profile, fall or contour of the final paving as irregularities shall
not be compensated for by varying the depth of sand bedding.
A stable edge shall be provided to retain the paving units and sand bedding by means of
precast concrete edging unit or kerbs set in-situ concrete.
The sand bedding shall be a fine, well graded sand in a dry to moist condition and laid to an
uncompacted thickness of 500 mm.
Samples of the paving blocks are to be submitted to the Owner for his approval. No orders
shall be placed with the manufacturers until the Owner approval has been given.
The width of Internal roads shall be 10 m with sufficient turning radii shall be considered.
Thickness of Interlock tiles shall be 80 mm for Road path and 60 mm for walkways.
The paving blocks shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall be
compacted at completion of each day's work.
5.1.9 Concrete Paving Slabs
Areas to be paved with concrete paving slabs shall be excavated and replaced with 300 mm
depth of compacted material at the exact levels and falls required for the finished work. If parts
of the base are found to be unsuitable, the Contractor shall excavate further to a firm bed and
fill with layers of fine crushed rock or aggregate, thoroughly compacted. The upper surface of
the base shall reflect the exact profile, fall or contour of the final paving as irregularities shall not
be compensated for by varying the depth of sand bedding.
Samples of the paving slabs are to be submitted to the Owner for his approval. No orders shall
be placed with the manufacturers until the Owner approval has been given.
The paving slabs shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5.1.10 Pre-cast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edging and Quadrants
All kerbs, channels edging and quadrants shall be made of precast concrete, and shall comply
with the requirements of BS 7263. Color, finish and sections shall be agreed on site with the
Owner and samples provided for approval.
Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shall be laid and bedded in layer of
1 to 3 cements/sand mortar, not less than 10 mm and not more than 40 mm thick on to
concrete or road base. Kerbs shall be backed with lean mix concrete. In general circulation
areas, kerbs shall be placed on top of the surfacing, and pinned in position using steel pins to
delineate roadways.
For radius of 12 m or less, kerbs of appropriate radius shall be used. Any unit of kerb, channel,
edging or quadrant deviating more than 3 mm on 3 m, from line and level shall be made good
by lifting and relaying.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 40
5.1.11 Carriageway Markings
The material for markings shall be hot applied "Sprayplastic" complying with the requirements
of BS 3262, as manufactured by Prismo Universal Limited, or similar approved for use in the
prevailing environment.
Carriageway markings shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and dry. Where owing
to the action of traffic or otherwise, the pavement has become polished before the application of
road markings, at the direction of the Owner a tack coat compatible with the marking material
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Markings shall be free from
raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and free from streaks.
"Ballotini" is to be incorporated at 18% to 22% by weight of total mix and also to be applied to
the surface of the markings at the rate of 400 to 500 g/m2.
The laid thickness of the markings shall be 1.5 ± 0.5 mm measured in accordance with
Appendix H of BS 3262.
The Contractor shall state the maximum safe heating temperature, the temperature range of
the apparatus and the method of laying to be used.
6 BUILDINGS
6.1 General
Whenever specific reference is made in the schedule of prices, the Contractor shall build the
following buildings and houses:
 Substation control building and other buildings as Indicated on the Tender drawing.
 Substation storage and maintenance workshop
 Substation gateman house
 Substation staff quarters (if applicable)
Building and houses can be described as follow:
a) Control building
A control building to house all indoor substation equipment shall be built at the
substation. The following rooms shall be provided in the control building:
 Control/Relay room
 Auxiliary service room
 Redundant 110 V and 48 V Battery room
 Telecommunication room / Laboratory
 Mechanical room
 Storage

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 41
 Personnel office (2)

 Toilet/Bathroom
 Kitchen
Corridor/passageways shall not be less than 2.1m wide. Aluminium or steel doors and
window frames shall be fitted in the control building.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities required to make the control building
fully functional. No aluminum doors acceptable for the main buildings.
A typical layout of the building is shown on the enclosed reference drawings. The
Contractor shall design the building considering the minimum dimensions shown on
these drawings in order to provide sufficient space for all equipment considering the
ultimate configuration of the substation.
b) Gateman House
In addition to the civil works related to electrical equipment, such as equipment

foundations, trenches, control buildings, etc., a gateman house measuring 2.5 x 2 m and
2.5 m height shall be erected in the substation to serve as the gateman’s shelter. The
arrangement and sizes shall be in line with the Tender lay out as minimum and subject
to the approval during the Engineering stage.
c) Storage and maintenance workshop
A separate building shall be available for storage and maintenance workshop. Typical
layout of the building is shown on the enclosed reference drawings.
In general, publications listed under 4.1.1 are also applicable to the construction of buildings,
houses and shelters.
The Contractor shall also design and build the facilities in compliance with the local standards
and regulations of the Country.
6.1.2 Architecture
Buildings interior and exterior architecture, taking into account local customs, traditions and
architectural features and details, shall be submitted to the Owner for approval.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 42
6.1.3 Design
The main frame of out structure could be steel structure or reinforced concrete structure.
a) The buildings shall be designed:
 to the requirements of the uniform Building Code (UBC), International conference

of Building officials,
 for the specified climatic and loading conditions, including seismic forces,
prescribed in applicable standards,
 to adequately suit the requirements of the equipment and apparatus contained in
the buildings and in all respects to be compatible with the intended use and
occupancy,
 with a functional and economical space arrangement,
 for a life expectancy of structure, systems and components not less than that of the
equipment which are contained in the buildings, provided regular maintenance is
carried out,
 to be aesthetically pleasing. Different buildings shall show a uniformity and
consistency in architectural design,
 to allow for easy access to equipment and maintenance of the equipment,
 with, whenever required, fire retarding materials for walls, ceilings and doors, which
would prevent supporting or spreading of fire and complying with local authority
requirements
 with material preventing dust accumulation.
b) Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in the longitudinal direction wherever
necessary with provision of twin columns.
c) Individual members of the buildings frame shall be designed for the worst combination of
forces such as bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion.
6.1.4 Design Loads
Building structures shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead loads, super-
imposed loads, equipment loads, crane loads, wind loads, seismic loads, short circuit loads and
temperature loads. In addition, loads and forces developed due to differential settlement shall
also be considered.
Dead loads shall include the weight of structures complete with finishes, fixtures and partitions.
Super-imposed loads in different areas shall include live loads, minor equipment loads, cable
trays, small pipe racks/hangers and erection, operation and maintenance loads. Equipment
loads shall constitute, if applicable, all load of equipments to be supported on the building
frame.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 43
The wind loads and seismic forces shall be computed based on as specified in 016423-2000-
43ES-3200 and applicable standards. Response spectrum method shall be used for the seismic
analysis using at least first five modes of vibration.
For temperature loading, the total temperature variation shall be considered as 2/3 of the
average maximum annual variation in temperature. The average maximum annual variation in
temperature for the purpose shall be taken as the difference between the mean of the daily
minimum temperature during the coldest month of the year and mean of daily maximum
temperature during the hottest month of the year. The structure shall be designed to withstand
stresses due to 50% of the total temperature variation.
Wind and seismic forces shall not be considered to act simultaneously.
Floors/slabs shall be designed to carry loads imposed by equipment, cables, piping, travel of
maintenance, trucks, equipment and other loads associated with the building. In addition,
beams shall be designed for incidental point loads of 20 kN to be applied at any point along the
beams. The floor loads shall be subject to Owner’s approval.
6.1.5 Submittals
The same information listed in 4.1.2 shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer.
In addition, the Contractor shall present for the Engineer’s approval detailed information on the
material used for the finishing of the building and provide samples at Engineer’s request.
6.2 Construction
6.2.1 Masonry Works
Pre-cast and solid blocks
Pre-cast concrete blocks shall be hollow blocks. Where described or otherwise ordered, solid
blocks shall be used. All blocks must have a compressive strength not less than 5 N/mm 2. The
average of 3 tests shall exceed 6 N/mm 2 (referred to product of total length and width).
Surfaces of blocks that are not to be rendered or plastered shall be smooth; otherwise, surfaces
shall be such as to provide a good base for the application of the finish specified.
After casting, blocks shall be cured in approved manner. The blocks, being thoroughly dry,
shall be laid in true and regular course to a fair finished surface on a full bed of 1:3 cement-lime
mortar of 10 mm, average thickness.
Standard size blocks shall be used whenever possible, and every care shall be taken to ensure
that the perpendiculars are truly plumbed to ensure vertical alignment, in alternate course.
Walls and partitions of the same thickness shall be bonded to one another (angles and
junctions). Partitions at junctions with walls of greater thickness or concrete columns shall be
tied to those walls with mild steel bars of the appropriate sizes and shapes.
Jointing of concrete block walls shall be carried out as the work proceed and fair surfaces work
shall be flush pointed with mortar of the consistency herein specified. Joints on surfaces of
block walls which are to be rendered, plastered or tiled, shall be raked out at a depth of 5 mm.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 44
For tests procedure and test equipment, refer to Clause 5.4 above.
The required masonry works metal accessories shall be submitted as a package for approval.
The accessories for internal can be with GI but for external it shall be of SS.
The vertical steel bar shall be used in vertical direction inside the masonry walls in each
opening & all blocks shall be filled with concrete.
The masonry works shall not start without the Engineer’s written approval.
6.2.2 Plastering Works
Rendering – External and Internal
Surfaces that are to be rendered shall be brushed down to remove any loose material and dust;
joints of block work shall be raked out to a depth of 5 mm. A spatter-dash coat of 1:3 cement
mortar, mixed with sufficient water to give the consistency of a thick slurry, shall then be dashed
on to the previously damped surface (inside and outside) to provide a thin rough coating, which
shall be allowed to harden before the rendering is applied.
External plastering shall be applied in two coats. The first or straightening coat of 1:3 cement-
mortar shall be supplied to a thickness of 15 mm, and when it has commenced to dry and
harden, it shall be combed to provide a key. The final coat shall be 8 mm thick and shall be
rubbed down to as smooth surface. The complete thickness of the external plaster shall be not
less than 23 mm.
Internal plastering shall also be applied in two coats. The first or straightening coat of 1:3 out of
lime plaster with 15% cement content shall be applied to a thickness of 12 mm. The final coat
out of pure lime plaster shall be 3 mm thick and shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface.
The complete thickness of the plaster shall not be less than 15 mm.
All plaster edges of doors shall be protected by cover angles.
The required plastering metal accessories between block wall & beam / columns shall be used
& approved prior to start plastering work.
6.2.3 Roofing Works
Materials and structural parts to be supplied and built by the Contractor shall not have been
used before and must be of good quality. Before starting works, the Contractor must take exact
measurement of the structures.
Parts made of different metals shall not be in contact with each other if this may lead to
corrosion or any other unfavorable condition.
Should no other protection measures be applicable, fixing parts must be galvanized.
The connections and fixings must be executed so as to allow, under thermal changes, the
expansion, contraction and displacement of parts of the structure without causing leakages.
Appropriate measures must be taken against lifting and damages caused by wind gusts. In

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 45
case of rainfall, all roofing works may only continue after complete drying of all layers
concerned.
The roofing felt layers are joined by bituminous bonding compound so that no cavities shall
remain between the individual layers. All roofing felt layers must be executed with overlap
seams of at least 100 mm.
Insulation of roof shall be provided in order to protect the construction from thermal expansion.
Samples of all materials to be used for the execution of the roofing, have to be submitted to the
Engineer with the indication of their designation and their manufacturer.
The Contractor shall use platforms and scaffolding for works.
Roofs shall be constructed as follows:
a) The roof slab shall be of watertight concrete, with aggregates having a suitable grain
size distribution curve, adequate water-cement ratio and concrete additives.
b) If necessary, the roof slab shall be overlaid with a screed of 1.5% slope to all rainwater
inlets and fall pipes. No pan formation of surface will be accepted.
c) The screed shall be treated by prime coating bonding adhesive.
d) Bituminous roofing felt adhesive.
e) Vapour seal (asphalt roofing felt) vented.
f) Heat insulation, 60mm felt covered polyurethane foam panels, specific weight at least
30 kg/m3. The heat insulating property must exceed 1.0 m 2 h C/kcal.
g) Bituminous bonding compound B 85/25, 2 kgf/m 2, hot mix.
h) Asphalt roofing felt.
i) Preference will be given to prefabricated composite material for the layers (f) to (h).
j) Bituminous bonding compound B 85/25, 2 kgf/m 2, hot mix, placed by surface heating of
the lower prefabricated composite felt.
Classified asphalt roofing felt 200 gr/m 2.
The complete roof insulating shall be covered with gravel 6-12 mm, 40 mm thick.
The flat roof gullies with sleeves shall be duly sealed with the roofing felt layers.
The Roof water Proofing system shall be as below:
4MM THK two layers and one additional granules type layer waterproofing as a final layer for
the exposed parts of the structures. Full layers will be terminated with Aluminum flashing and
sealant

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 46
Thermal insulation board shall be provided.
Cement tiles (400mmX400mm) shall be installed in double lines along with roof perimeter.
The warranty for water proofing system shall be issued for 10 years.
Flood test shall be Conducted on the roof as per standards and shall be monitored for 72 hours
with the water head of 50 mm minimum.
Monorail required to lift the required equipment / 3T capacity whichever is maximum to be

considered on Fire pump room and for lifting Equipment to roof if required.
6.2.4 Mechanic, Joiner and Locksmith Works
a) Doors
Steel doors shall be supplied for all rooms except for the toilet, the store and the office.
Type of construction: double-wall execution made of galvanized steel plates of smooth
surface inside and outside with intermediate L, Z or U-shaped reinforcements and slag
wool filling. All frames shall be of galvanized steel profiles. For Toilet, Store and office
Metal doors shall be considered.
After mounting, the threshold profile shall be immediately inserted in screed. The double
wing door of the control room and the entrance door to the passage shall have glass
panels of laminated safety glass above parapet level.
All doors shall be fully equipped with:
i) Universal locks: heavy mortice locks, double-throw locking action with 8 mm

follower; brass latch bolt; completely enclosed case; to suit a profile cylinder with
transmission bar.
ii) Master key system for the entire substation on the basis of profile cylinders with
two complete sets of keys.
iii) Latches, log aluminium plates, pin hinges 160 mm, fixing bolts, door stoppers,
etc.
The door of the battery room shall be equipped with a splash water-proof louver grid on
the lowered part of the door.
Concrete canopies shall be added for all external doors of all main buildings.
 All doors’ accessories shall be submitted as a package & fixed on sample board
for approval.
 Door stopper shall be sufficient to support the small doors & the external doors
(external one must be heavy & big size type).
 All dust proof accessories like rubber bar & the bottom rubber strip shall be added
in the package.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 47
The doors for entry of GIS shall be of Fire rated (3 hours) Over head doors of dust proof
and shall have provisions of serving under both automatic and mechanical. The required
motos and other accessories shall be considered. The door operation shall be
demonstrated with required tests in the presence of Client /Engineer and shall be
approved upon successful test requirements.
All plastered edges of door reveals shall be protected by plastered in cover angles.
b) Emergency locks
All rooms shall be equipped with panic locks in such a way that all door wings can be
opened from inside without key even if locked or bolted. The panic locks shall be of
approved type and shall be equivalent to panic locks manufacture for instance by the
following manufacturers: FSB, FUHR, GBS.
c) Windows
Window frames shall be preferably of aluminium or mild steel.
All frames shall be made rustproof by hot-dip galvanizing followed by the application of
one coat of calcium plumbate primer. Site painting of frames shall be as specified under
7.2.5 “Paints and Painting”.
Louvers (fixed and adjustable) and sun-blades shall be mild steel and galvanized.
The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Engineer details and sketches of his
proposals for windows, louvers, sun-blades, gearing and fixing before placing any order.
Lever boards shall be provided for all windows except those in window rows below the
roof beam.
Normal parapet height for all windows except those in window rows shall be 900 mm
above finished floor level.
Mosquito screens shall be provided for all sections of windows to be opened and for all
fans.
For daylight illumination of the passageways, the passage walls adjacent to the toilet,
telecommunications, room, store, battery room and offices shall be equipped with glass
brick window strips above the level of lintel beams.
d) Galvanizing
All visible structural parts and fixing materials made of steel shall be hot-dip galvanized.
6.2.5 Paints and Painting
All paints shall be of approved makes and colors and suitable for the prevailing climate at the
site.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 48
Special purpose paint shall be of a make with a proven record of resistance to the particular
conditions at site.
All paints shall be applied to dry surfaces, to metal and timber surfaces, and shall be applied by
brush and well worked into the material. Other methods of application will be considered for
painting plastered or concrete surfaces and the like.
a) Painting Steelwork (ungalvanized) on Site
Structural steelwork shall, before delivery and erection, be treated as specified in the
drawings approved by the Engineer. After erection, at a time to be agreed with the
Engineer, steelwork not encased in concrete shall be cleaned, including the complete
removal of any rust which may have developed, the shop coat of red lead made good,
and the steelwork immediately given a second coat of red lead paint. Painting shall
consist of two undercoats and one finishing gloss coat, all of oil-based paints. Steelwork
surfaces to be encased or covered with concrete shall be free from all loose rust and
reasonably clean when the concrete is poured or placed. During site erection of
steelwork, surfaces that are in contact shall receive their second coat of red lead paint
immediately before erection so that the surfaces are brought together wet. All surfaces
of steelwork which will be finally accessible for painting (e.g. stanchion surfaces adjacent
to walls) shall be given tow coats of approved bituminous paint in lieu of the treatment
specified above.
b) Painting Rainwater Pipes
These shall be delivered coated internally and externally as specified. Thereafter, they
shall be given externally two undercoats and one gloss finishing coat, all of oil based
paints.
c) Painting Concrete
Where required concrete surfaces shall be cleaned down, prime one coat, then given
one undercoat and one finishing coat of plastic paint (inside). Outside surface shall be
with mineral paint only, which achieves silication effect between paint and mineral base.
Coating systems shall be approved by the Engineer. Repair paint, however, shall be of
the same type as existing.
d) Painting Plastered Surfaces
These shall be cleaned down, sized or sealed and then primed and given two coats of
washable oil or emulsion paint.
e) Painting Plaster – board and Ceiling boards
If required, these shall be cleaned down, sealed and painted in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
f) Painting Battery Room


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 49
All painting works inside the battery room (including door and window) shall be executed with
acid resistant paint.
All components of painting system shall be obtained from GCCIA/Engineer approved

manufacturer who shall certify that the paint is suitable for the intended purpose.
All paints and coatings wet-applied on site/factory must meet the applicable volatile organic
compound (VOC) limits of local authority.
RAL Color of all paintings shall be approved by the GCCIA/Engineer in accordance to the
accepted color scheme for the project.
Samples of all coating systems including the surfaces preparation, texture and color shall be
provided and approved by GCCIA/Engineer for further reference.
The shades and colors shall be in general as per Annexure-1 of this specification.
6.2.6 Glazing Works
Glass shall be of the type, quality and substances specified hereinafter.
Glazing to external window frames shall be in ordinary quality sheet glass.
The glass shall be secured in accordance with the window frame manufacturer’s
recommendations relative to the local climatic conditions. Polished wired glass 6 mm thick shall
be used for louver blades, except for those in the offices, where 6 mm translucent sheet glass
shall be provided.
Glazing to internal window frames and partitions shall be in ordinary quality sheet glass and 6
mm thick. Ordinary quality translucent sheet glass shall be used for glazed panels in internal
doors other than those for doors leading to toilets, in which 6 mm translucent glass of approved
pattern shall be fixed.
Glazing to metal frames shall be carried out with metallic putty and fixed with spring clips. In all
cases, the glass shall be well bedded on strips of wash leather and back puttied. All surplus
putty or mastic shall be cleaned off on completion of glazing.
For main buildings windows glass shall be fire rated & certified from the supplier.
For glazing for doors, see the section on doors.
6.2.7 Water and Sewage Installation Works
The Contractor shall prospect by suitable methods for underground sources of water within the
substation perimeter.
If required, local regulations for connections to public pipelines must be observed. When
bedding pipes, the pipe manufacturer’s embedding specifications must be observed.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 50
When embedding pipes, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to find out whether soil conditions
(i.e., aggressive soil, mobile soil) may have detrimental influence on the pipes to be embedded.
After the pipe trench has been approved, the pipes may be embedded. When socket pipes
with rubber sealings and similar types are used, especially at bending and steep slopes, the
Contractor has to protect the pipes against gliding apart (when testing pressure and during
operation) by support or abutments.
After testing and acceptance of pipeline, the pipe trench has to be immediately backfilled. All
cross points with other pipes or lines, in particular with electric lines, have to be protected
against damage and detrimental effects due to the types of line or pipe crossed.
The Contractor shall work out the operation instructions required for the fault-free and safe
operation of the total plant or of the individual parts of it. Such operation instructions, together
with the final position drawings, schematic presentations and description of the installation built
in, must be submitted to the Engineer when handing over the plant.
The entire water supply system shall stand up to pressure tests executed in the presence of the
Engineer. Backfilling of pipe trenches shall not start without written notice that the pressure test
satisfied the Engineer. The pressure test equipment shall be included in the scope of supply.
The scope of work comprises the supply, installation of the entire water supply and sewage
installation, including:
 water pressure rising system

 water pump system, pipes and valves, if required
 intermediate tank, 5 m3, earth buried
 electrical hot water supply
 water meter, if required
 pipes and valves (PVC pipes for sewage, galvanized steel pipes for water supply)
 floor drain (made of grey cast iron with odour seal, of square shape, grid and
housing to be enameled inside
 wash basin, (approx. 600 x 400 mm, square-shaped, made of white-glazed sanitary
porcelain, with soap dish, overflow, stand pipe valve and chrome plated mixer unit)
 water closet (including floor drain, with radial flush system, made of white-glazed
sanitary porcelain, with duro-plastic seat)
 urinal made of white-glazed sanitary porcelain
 shower tray (900 x 900 mm), including floor drain made of cast iron, porcelain
enamel inside and along rim, to be stably walled in by mason, with chrome-plated
drainage sieve, and overflow and drainage valve at stand-pipe.
 one shower mixer taps (all visible parts chrome-plated, fixed showerhead)
 one soap holder
 one curtain for shower cubicle
 toilet-brush, including wall-mounted holder

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 51
 toilet paper holder (chrome-plated)

 two towel holders beside the wash basin and beside the shower cubicle
 one porcelain shelf above the water basin
 one hinged board wall-mounted opposite the shower cubicle
 three coat hooks above the hinged board
 one crystal glass mirror (of rectangular shape, size: 600 x 400 mm)
The scope of work includes the provision of a potable water bore-hole complete with all facilities
including installation of submersible pump, 10,000 l ground tank, 5,000 l overhead tank etc., for
all buildings like GIS building roof with suitable water valve points for the HVAC units cleaning
process; same shall be for other main buildings and control & telecom buildings also.
An electric pump motor of adequate rating shall be provided for the transfer of water from the
ground tank to the overhead tank.
All electric switches, auxiliary switches, over-flow switches, etc., shall be provided and installed
by the Contractor.
The scope shall also include provision of water treatment.
All piping works necessary for the full installation of the water supply system shall be provided.
6.2.8 Floor finish and Floor covering works
Grating shall be of the type described of a thickness according to static requirements and shall
be galvanized.
Checkered plates shall be of the thickness and sections described, shall comply with static
requirements, and shall be galvanized. Each panel shall be complete with lifting holes, and
holding down screws shall be provided where required. Two sets of lifting keys shall be handed
over to the Engineer when an appropriate “Certificate of completion” is issued.
Protection angles shall be galvanized, shall be fixed with sufficient number of fixing claws and
shall be duly cast in.
The floors shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Self-leveling screed of low viscosity, with a compressive strength of 30 N/mm 2, bending

tension strength of 5 N/mm 2
b) Bonding adhesive
c) Coating with two-components plastic material, subject to approval by the Engineer.
Epoxy floor dust proofer & hardener flooring (Anti - skid) (3MM THK minimum).
The coating will be accepted only if all cavities of screed are completely filled and the screed
texture is not visible any longer.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 52
The rooms for which Raised floor are indicated same shall be of 1 m high with suitable
supporting system and capable of withstanding adequate live load / other loads.
The rooms wherein False Ceiling is indicated, same shall be with suitable material and shall
ensure required Fire rating (3 hours) and shall be appealing aesthetically to cover all lighting
fixtures etc. It shall be coordinated with all interdisciplinary services.
6.2.9 Cable Trenches
Indoor cable Trenches
The low-voltage AC and DC cables, along with the control cable, shall be laid in trenches
separate from those for high-voltage cables.
Cables trenches should be covered by means of gratings or checkered plates, as approved by

the Engineer.
All cable entries to the substation building are to be waterproof. Cable entry sealing works shall
be executed with lightweight concrete and/or non-combustible sealing foam. This detail and the
choice of sealing materials will, in any case, be subject to approval. For future extensions, the
building shall be equipped with empty entries closed by waterproof lockings. The number and
the position of these entries shall be determined in coordination with the Engineer. All Cable
Sealing shall have Fire resistant on internal and on external it shall be water resistant and Fire
resistant. Mechanical /Modular sealing shall be considered for all Cable entries.
The number of the additional entries will be sufficient to allow for expansion to substation’s
ultimate configuration.
Covered inspection manholes shall be provided for outside accessibility.
The work shall include all fixtures and necessary materials for the installation of the switchgear
and control panels and other auxiliary equipment.
Cables of different voltage levels shall be installed on separate cable trays.
All cables traces for control cables, which are placed inside HV cable trenches, shall be
executed in fire-protected way by use of mineral-fibre armed panels of non-organic material.
Use of asbestos materials will not be accepted. The panels shall have a thickness of 200 mm
and shall be resistant against humidity, water and rotting (promatect-panels or equivalent).
6.2.10 Septic Tank and Soakage pit System
The sewage treatment of the substations shall function in the following manner:
Wastewater shall be discharged through suitable plastic (ABS or equivalent) pipes or concrete
pipes, into a septic tank designed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, but not less
than 6 m3. The tank may be of precast concrete or constructed in-situ. The inside of the tank
has a two-chamber system with ventilation through the roof slab. The clarified wastewater will
be led out of the septic tank into a cylindrical soakage pit. The pit may be made of precast
concrete hollow blocks held together with steel armoured rods. The diameter of the soakage pit

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 53
shall be not less than 2.5 m, 2.5m deep. About half of the pit and about 1.5 m underneath the
pit shall be filled with gravel 25-50 mm thick.
If the nature of the soil does not allow for use of a soakage pit (i.e., the soil has a poor
percolation coefficient and does not allow dissipation of wastewater), a sand filter (on surface or
slightly underground) may be used, whereby the wastewater enters a perforated parallel pipe
network located over a layer of 800 mm of sand and comes out “filtered” by means of another
parallel pipe perforated network located below the sand layer to be evacuated toward a suitable
drainage trench. The incoming and outgoing pipe networks shall be embedded in a 300 mm
layer of gravel (size 15 – 60 mm).
The surface of the filter shall be at least 230 m 2.
If the natural slope of the land does not permit natural flow of wastewater from the septic tank to
the soakage pit or sand filter, the Contractor shall provide an electric sump pump, with an
automatic level switch, located outside the septic tank.
6.3 Potable Water Supply
The scope of work includes:
 supply and installation of pumping facilities

 a water treatment plant
 ground level and elevated water storage tanks
 Minimum 3000 imperial gallon ground water tank and transfer pump (1 duty & 1
standby) with control panel shall be provided.
 Minimum 600 imperial gallon roof water tank & booster pump (1 duty & 1 standby)
with control panel shall be provided for each building.
 Tank and pump shall be installed in the covered shelter.
 Roof installed HVAC equipment shall be covered appropriately.
 Intermediated tank with booster pump (1 duty & 1 standby) shall be provided as fire
water infilling tank.
 Distribution piping from the storage tanks to designated points, and
 associated electrical and civil works.
6.3.1 Pumping Facilities
Two electric motor centrifugal pumps shall be supplied and installed between the ground level
and elevated storage tanks. They are to be connected in parallel so that either can be on
standby for maintenance purposes.
Electric motor pumps of various capacities shall be supplied and installed between any two of
the processing tanks as required.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 54
6.3.2 Storage Tanks
Potable water shall be stored in a 12 m3 steel tank at ground level and a 25 m3 steel tank on
adequately elevated position. Raw water, before treatment shall be stored in a 10 m3 ground
level steel tank.
The tanks shall be of pressed steel plates. Fabricated tanks of commercial production shall be
subject to Engineer’s approval. Both ground level and elevated tanks shall be painted
internally with non-toxic black bitumen paint and externally with aluminium gloss. The tanks
shall be equipped with fittings suitable for 75 mm and 50 mm diameter G.I. piping for filling,
emptying and overflow. The tanks shall be provided with pressed steel covers with manholes
and cowl ventilator. The roof covers shall be painted internally with non-toxic black bitumen
paint and externally with two coats of red oxide paint and one finishing coat of aluminium gloss
paint. One (1) water level indicator shall also be supplied and installed on each tank.
6.3.3 Tank Supports and Foundations
The ground tank shall be supported on reinforced concrete pedestals about 1.0 m high from
the finished ground level and spaced in such a way as to minimize deflection of the base plates
of the tank when it is full of water and minimize or prevent settlement under the tank.
The elevated tank shall be supported on a structural steel framed tower made up of members
having adequate sections and stiffness to ensure a rigid structure that can bear the vertical
loads and resist overturning and swaying in a windstorm. The tower shall be provided with a
ladder from the ground level, past the catwalk and up the roof, rest platforms, peripheral
walkway and a valve operating platform located about 3 m below the bottom of the tank
complete, with hand railing. The entire structural steel work shall be given two (2) coats of red
oxide paint and a finishing coat of aluminium gloss paint.
Reinforced concrete foundations shall be designed to resist overturning and other forces on
the superstructure and to safely distribute the loads on the foundation in such a way that the
soil is not overstressed and settlements are prevented or minimized.
6.3.4 Flow Line Diagram
A flow line diagram of the entire works from borehole through the treatment plant, and to the
storage tanks, showing pumps and accessories, shall be submitted, together with the
necessary calculations.
6.3.5 Boundary wall:
Boundary wall shall be of 3 meters height precast boundary wall with 3 strands barbed wire on
top (including on the top of the main metal gate). The height of Boundary wall shall be 3 m
from the highest paving level inside the substation. The Founding level shall be at minimum 1
m from the lowest natural ground level.
GCCIA LOGO shall be added at certain agreed panels from outside surface.
The precast panels, columns & beams must match with substation buildings external color.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 55
6.3.6 Power Requirement
An underground electric cable shall be laid from the substation AC Distribution Board to a
distribution board in the enclosure. Employer’s standards of underground installation must be
observed. All necessary power distribution accessories shall be supplied and installed.
6.3.7 Availability, Servicing and Ruggedness
All equipment, machinery and their components must be available and serviceable in the
Country. All exposed equipment and machinery shall be weather proof. All the pumps,
including the submersible pump, shall be WORTHINGTON/SIMPSON/JACUZZI brand or
approved equivalent, sold and serviceable by a reputable company in the Country.
6.4 Thermal Insulation
Air-conditioned buildings and/or rooms shall be thermally insulated. Tenderers shall propose
the insulation materials and methods according local codes and rules, if any, or recognized
international standards.
7 FENCES AND GATES
Gates consist of tubular steel-braced frames covered with woven fabric and surmounted by
three strands of barbed wire.
For the purpose of this specification, the following terminology applies:
 Terminal post means gate, end or corner post.

 Corner post means any post at which the direction of the fence changes.
 Line post means any intermediate post between terminal posts.
7.1 Codes and Standards
Publications listed below from part of this specification to the extent specified in this section:
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, steel, black and hot dipped, zinc-coated, welded
and seamless.
A90 Standard Test method for weight (Mass) of coating on Iron and Steel articles with
zinc or zinc-alloy coatings.
A153 Standard Specification for zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel hardware.
A653 Standard Specification for Steel sheet, zinc-coated (galvanized) or zinc-iron alloy-
coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip process.
A824 Standard Specification for metallic-coated steel, marcelled tension wire for use
with chain link fence.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 56
A585 Standard Specification for Aluminium – coated steel barbed wire
F626 Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.
F1183 Standard Specification for aluminium alloy chain link fence fabric.
The Contractor may propose equivalent standards from recognized international organizations.
7.2 Submittals
Submit shop drawings to indicate details of, gates, braces and turnbuckles.
7.3 Materials
a) Concrete mixes and materials as per previous Section 5 Foundations and Concrete
Works.
 Nominal coarse aggregate size – 20 mm.

 Compressive strength –40 MPa minimum at 28 days.
b) Chain link fence fabric – aluminium alloy to ASTM F1183.
 Top selvage – twisted and barbed

 Bottom selvage – knuckled
 Wire diameter – 3.76 mm (9 gauge)
 Mesh size – 50 mm
 Height of fabric – 2.2 m
c) Posts, braces and rails to ASTM A53, butt welded, schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe.
Dimensions as indicated below.
 Terminal posts – 90 mm (or 3 ½”) OD

 Line posts – 60 mm (or 2 –3/8”) OD
 Top rail – 40 mm (or 1-11/16”) OD
 Braces – 40 mm (or 1-11/16”) OD
d) Bottom tension wire to ASTM A 824, single strand, aluminium-coated steel wire, 4.5 mm
diameter.
e) Tie wire fasteners, aluminium alloy wire, single strand.
f) Tension bar to ASTM A653, 5 x 20 mm minimum galvanized steel.

connect all fence concrete cylinder foundations with concrete beam (sill) with depth
400mmX width 150mm & reinforcement 2X3 Dia 10mm/250mm.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 57
g) Gate frames to ASTM A53, galvanized steel pipe, standard weight, 50 mm

(1-29/32 inch) outside diameter pipe for outside frame, 40 mm (or 1-11/16”) outside
diameter for interior bracing.
 Fabricate gates as indicated with electrically welded joints and hot dip galvanized
after welding.
 Fasten fence fabric to gate with twisted selvage at top.
 Furnish gates with galvanized malleable iron hinges, latch and latch catch with
provision for padlock attached and operated from either side of installed gate.
 Furnish double gates with chain hook to hold gates open and centre rest with drop
bolt for closed position.
h) Fittings and hardware to ASTM F626, cast aluminium alloy, galvanized steel or
malleable or ductile cast iron. Tension bar bands 3 x 20 mm minimum galvanized steel
or 5 x 20 mm minimum aluminium. Post caps to provide waterproof fit, to fasten
securely over posts and to carry top rail. Overhang tops to provide waterproof fit, to hold
top rails and an outward projection to hold barbed wire overhang. Provide projection
with clips or recesses to hold three strands of barbed wire space 100 mm apart.
Projection, approximately 300 mm long, to project from fence at 45 degrees above
horizontal. Turnbuckles to be drop forged.
i) Organic zinc-rich coating, “Galvicon” or equal approved.
j) Barbed wire, 2.50 mm diameter, aluminium-coated steel wire to ASTM A585, for-points
barbs, 125 mm spacing.
7.4 Finishes
a) Galvanizing
 For pipe – 610 g/m2 minimum to ASTM A90

 For other ferrous fittings – 610 g/ m2 minimum to ASTM A153.
b) Aluminium coating for barbed wire to ASTM A585.
7.5 Grading
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth, uniform
gradient between posts. Provide clearance between bottom of fence and crushed stone cover
of 30 mm to 50 mm.
7.6 Erection of Fence
a) Erect fence along lines as indicated on construction drawings.
b) Excavate line-post holes 1000 mm deep x 300 mm diameter. Excavate terminal-post

holes 1100 mm deep x 400 mm diameter. Use excavation methods approved by
Engineer.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 58
c) Space line posts 3m apart measured parallel to ground surface.
d) Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 10 degrees.
e) Install end posts at end of fence and at buildings. Install gate posts on both sides of
gate openings.
f) Form top 300mm of post holes. Place concrete in post holes, then embed posts into
concrete to minimum 900mm depth. Extend concrete 50 mm above crushed stone
cover and slope to drain away from posts. Brace to hold posts in plumb position and
true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set.
g) Do not install fence fabric until concrete has cured a minimum of five days.
hi) Brace terminal posts with pipe compression braces between the terminal and closest
line post, located midway between the top rail and the ground surface, and a tension
brace consisting of a steel rod and turnbuckle from the end of the compression brace at
the line post to the bottom of the terminal post. Brace corner posts in both directions.
i) Install overhang tops and caps with overhang on outside of substation.
j) Install top rail between posts and fasten securely to posts and secure waterproof caps
and overhang tops.
k) Install bottom tension wire, stretch tightly and fasten securely to end, corner, gate and
straining posts with turnbuckles and tension bar bands.
l) Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and
fasten to end, corner, gate and straining posts with tension bar secured to post with
tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Knuckled selvage at bottom; twisted
selvage at top.
m) Install fabric on outside of line posts. Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom
tension wire with tie wires at 450 mm intervals. Give tie wires minimum two twists.
n) Install barbed wire strands and clip securely to lugs of each projection.
o) Install grounding as per specification (016403-2000-47FE-4000).
p) Fill all depressions to maintain specified clearance between bottom of fence and crushed
stone cover. Ensure no gaps are greater than 50 mm.
7.7 Installation of Gates
a) Install gates in locations as indicated on site grading drawings.
b) Level ground between gate posts and set gate bottom approximately 40 mm above
ground surface.
c) Determine position of centre gate rest for double gate. Cast gate rest in concrete as
directed. Dome concrete above ground level to shed water.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 59
7.8 Touch-up
Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush, removing loose and cracked coatings. Apply two
coats of organic zinc-rich paint to damaged areas. Pre-treat damaged surfaces according to
manufacturers’ instructions for zinc-rich paint.
7.9 Cleaning
Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material as directed by
Engineer.
8 FIRE PROTECTION WALLS
8.1.1 Application Criteria
If the free distance between building, and the transformers is less than 10 m, a fire wall shall be
erected between the building and the equipment, or otherwise the building walls shall be fire
resistant. Also fire reinforced concrete walls shall be provided between power transformers to
prevent the adjacent transformers in case of fire on the transformer.
8.1.2 Fire Resistance
The firewall shall have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. The fire walls shall be designed in
order to protect against the effects of radiant heat and flying debris from an adjacent fire.
The external finishing and color shall be same as that of main substation building
8.1.3 Mechanical Resistance
The fire wall shall have the mechanical resistance to withstand local atmospheric conditions. If
this wall shall serve as a support for equipment such as insulators etc., it’s mechanical rigidity
must then be increased.
Connecting the walls by steel or other structures which may produce a reversing torque if
overheated shall be avoided.
8.1.4 Dimensions
The fire wall shall extend at least 1 m on each side of the transformers and reactors and at least
600 mm above the conservator tank or safety vent. These dimensions might be reduced in
special cases, where there is lack of space. A minimum of 2 meters clearance shall be provided
between the equipment e.g. transformers/reactors and fire walls.
The building walls which act as fire walls shall extend at least 1 m above the roof in order to
protect it.
8.1.5 Materials
The fire wall shall be made of reinforced concrete (M-20 grade).


016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 60
9 TRANSFORMER/REACTOR FOUNDATIONS
Transformer/Reactor foundations shall be constructed in reinforced concrete and piled if

necessary. An oil drainage pit filled with 25 to 50 mm crushed stones shall be provided around
each transformer from which oil shall be drained to a common tank (the oil recovery pit), which
shall be equipped with an oil separator. The oil catchment basin dimension shall be large
enough to ensure oil drop within it.
Oil pits and oil recovery pit shall be constructed as reinforced concrete tanks and shall be
adequately sealed to prevent oil from seeping into the sub-strata. They shall be painted with an
oil-resistant paint. The pits shall, in all respects, conform with the requirements of NFPA 329 or
equivalent standards.
Concrete ducts fitted with removable covers and pipe ducts as required shall be provided for
cables to the transformer. These shall be adequately sealed to prevent ingress and escape of
oil or water.
The catch basin area shall be covered with galvanized steel grating with proper size to
accommodate the natural crushed stone size 50mm.
10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS / GUIDELINES
The following guidelines shall also be considered along with the requirements specified in Civil
Specification
1. Barriers for lightning protection terminal/pole considered near road area (if required).
2. EOT Crane Girder (of required capacity as per Electrical requirements) with run way
beams shall be designed /Erected /tested fulfilling all technical requirements.
3. Duct banks protection & marking system - Warning tape system shall be considered.
4. Hollow metal doors - Fire rated for 3 hours and All doors shall be fitted with UL
listed/labeled (Hollow metal door fire rating certificate shall be provided from the
supplier).
5. Fire exit hardware as per NFPA-80 and NFPA-101.
6. All door accessories shall be a heavy duty with door closer system.
7. The external big and double leave doors shall be supported with heavy duty door stopper
& hook.
8. All other small doors can be provided with different type suitable for their location inside
the buildings.
9. GIS building tunnel area - Sump pit system with sump pumps to discharge water through
discharge pipe shall be positioned to ensure water does not cause flooding, nuisance or
erosion of surrounding property. The end of the pipe shall be provided with a wire mesh.
10. S/S yard area - Drainage system - To be connected to external drain system.
11. HVAC Units - Water drain system to be connected to ground condensate pits and shall
be disposed off separately as technically required.
12. Rung ladders system shall be arranged for proper access to Shunt reactor / auxiliary
transformers catch basin area; MH’s; underground tanks for different usages (oil,water,
sewar system etc).
13. Canopies shall be constructed above all building’s external doors with proper roof drain
& shall be provided with two layers of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing
membrane. The minimum projection of canopy shall be 1 meter.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 61
14. Fire pipe - Barrier – (crash barrier) shall be considered on the Road side area to protect
the Fire pipes from damage.
15. Battery room – drainage shall be connected to Chemical pits (Neutralization pit) prior to
the disposal of the same into soak away /drainage system (if required).
16. Finishing of the Full yard shall be with asphalt and no gravel to be considered.
17. All metal covers for different substation facilities shall be indicated with service engraved
names in both languages (Arabic& English).
18. Below grade construction; expansion and control joints in concrete structures shall be
provided with 200mm wide PVC water stops.
19. All embedded PVC sleeves within building walls & manholes on the cable entrance side
shall be bell-end type.
20. Access cage ladder with platform shall be considered for all the buildings and to access
terrace of all buildings and stairs required. The design requirements /regulations shall
comply with the relevant Codes /standards and subject to approval of employer
/Engineer.

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 62
Annexure-1
Number Dry Film Thickness

Paint System Properties of Paint of Coats for each Coat
Concrete and Plastered Walls Outdoor
Acrylic Emulsion primer with excellent 1 coat 30 m
adhesion and alkaline resistance.
Prime Coat (Solids by volume min. 30)
Emulsion based texture with weather 1 coat 250-500 m

and rain protection.
Filler Coat (Solids by volume min. 60)
Two-component polyurethane with 2 coats 40 m
excellent ate resistance and U.V
Top Coat resistance. (Matt finish).
(Solids by volume min. 48)
Concrete and Un-Plastered Walls Indoor (Above 1500mm from Finish Floor Level)
Emulsion primer with excellent 1 coat 30 m
adhesion and alkaline resistance.
Washable Emulsion paint with 2 coats 50 m
excellent adhesion and alkaline
Top Coat resistance. The paint shall have anti-
fungal and anti-bacterial additives
(Matt Finish).
Concrete and Un-Plastered Walls Indoor (Up to 1500mm from Finish Floor Level)
Primer shall have excellent adhesion 1 coat 30 m
and alkaline resistance.
Alkyd / Oil based / Special paint with 2 coats 50 m
excellent adhesion, water resistance
Top Coat and stain resistance. (Matt finish).
Un plastered Concrete Ceiling
Emulsion primer with excellent 1Coat 30 m
Prime Coat adhesion and alkaline resistance.
(Solids by Volume min. 30)
Washable Emulsion paint with 2 coats 50 m
excellent adhesion and alkaline
resistance. The paint shall have anti-
Top Coat fungal and anti-bacterial additives
(Matt Finish)
(Solids by Volume min.40)
Concrete Floor and Walls (Covered by Raised Floor)
Top Coat Solvent free Epoxy based hardener 2 Coat N/A

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 63
Concrete walls and un-Plastered Ceiling (Covered by False Ceiling)

Top Coat Moisture resistant bitumen-based 2 Coat N/A
coating
Concrete Floor Out Door
Primer Solvent free epoxy resin primer 1 Coat N/A
Multi component system of solvent 1 Coat 5mm.
free epoxy resin, hardener and
mineral aggregates with UV and
Epoxy Screed Bed abrasion resistance (Compressive
strength min. 60
N/mm2)
Polyurethane UV resistant traffic 2 Coat 45 m
Top Coat coating having resistance to
abrasion.
Concrete Floor Indoor
Multi component system of solvent 1 Coat 5mm.
free epoxy resin, hardener and
Epoxy Screed Bed mineral aggregates with abrasion
resistance (Compressive strength
min. 60 N/mm2)
Two – pack Solvent free epoxy resin- 2 Coats 45 m
Top Coat based coating having resistance to
abrasion.
Concrete Floor and Walls in Contact with Oil
Two – pack Solvent free epoxy resin 2 Coats 200 m
Top Coat coating for high temperature of
transformer oil at peak hours with
resistance to oils.
Concrete Floor and Wall behind eye wash and sink in Contact with Chemicals
(Battery room)
Multi component system of epoxy 1 Coat 5mm.
Epoxy Screed Bed free resin, hardener and mineral
aggregates with excellent chemical
and abrasion resistance
(Compressive strength min. 60
N/mm2)
Two – pack Solvent free epoxy resin 2 Coats 200 m
Top Coat coating for excellent resistance to
alkalis and chemicals.
Trenches (FPS) and Manholes (Storm Water, Condensate Water, Cable Water
Supply etc..)

016403-2000-47FE-2000 01 July 2024 64
Two – pack Solvent free epoxy resin 2 Coats

Top Coat coating. 45 m
Sewage Network
Coal tar epoxy coating with sewage 2 Coats
Top Coat and biological resistance. 150 m
(Solids by Volume min.70)
GCCIA
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
016403-2000-47ES-7000 Rev.01
July 2024
Fire Protection System (FPS) # Date Page

016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1
2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES ................................................................................................... 2
3 CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................................ 3
4 COMPLEMENTARY PRESCRIPTIONS .......................................................................................... 4
4.1 Fire Protection and Detection Systems......................................................................................... 4

4.1.1 Materials.................................................................................................................................... 4
4.1.2 Discharge Devices (sprinkler heads, nozzles, etc.) and Thermal Detectors ............................... 5
4.1.3 Valve Monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 5
4.1.4 Water Spray Fixed Systems ...................................................................................................... 5
4.1.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................................. 5
4.1.4.2 Design Criteria........................................................................................................................ 5
4.1.4.3 Fire Detectors ......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1.4.4 Alarm and Control Devices ..................................................................................................... 6
4.1.4.5 Pressure Gauges ................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.4.6 Piping ..................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.4.7 Deluge Valves ........................................................................................................................ 6
4.1.4.8 Isolating Valves for Deluge System ........................................................................................ 7
4.1.5 Switchyard and Wet Riser Fire Protection Systems ................................................................... 7
4.1.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................................. 7
4.1.5.2 Design Criteria........................................................................................................................ 7
4.1.6 Wet Type Water Sprinkler Systems ........................................................................................... 8
4.1.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................................. 8
4.1.6.2 Design Criteria........................................................................................................................ 8
4.1.6.3 Alarm and Control Devices ..................................................................................................... 8
4.1.6.4 Pressure Gauges ................................................................................................................... 9
4.1.6.5 Piping ..................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1.7 Foam-water Spray Systems ...................................................................................................... 9
4.1.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................................. 9
4.1.7.2 Design Criteria........................................................................................................................ 9
4.1.7.3 Fire Detectors ......................................................................................................................... 9
4.1.7.4 Alarm and Control Devices ................................................................................................... 10
4.1.7.5 Pressure Gauges ................................................................................................................. 10
4.1.7.6 Flow Tests ............................................................................................................................ 10
4.1.7.7 Deluge Valves ...................................................................................................................... 10
4.1.7.8 Isolating Valves for Deluge System ...................................................................................... 10
4.1.8 Water Supply and Pumping Systems ...................................................................................... 10
4.1.8.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 10
4.1.8.2 Design Criteria...................................................................................................................... 11
4.1.8.3 Booster Pumps ..................................................................................................................... 11
4.1.8.4 Jockey Pumps ...................................................................................................................... 12
4.1.8.5 Control Panels ...................................................................................................................... 12
4.1.8.6 Flow Test Connection ........................................................................................................... 13

016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 ii
4.1.8.7 Isolating and Non-Return Valves .......................................................................................... 13

4.1.9 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems ................................................................................. 13
4.1.9.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 13
4.1.9.2 Design Criteria...................................................................................................................... 13
4.1.10 Portable fire extinguishers ..................................................................................................... 14
4.1.10.1 Description ......................................................................................................................... 14
4.1.10.2 Design criteria .................................................................................................................... 14
4.1.11 Building General Fire Detection and Annunciation System .................................................... 14
4.1.11.1 Description ......................................................................................................................... 14
4.1.11.2 General .............................................................................................................................. 15
4.1.11.3 Linear Heat Sensing Cables ............................................................................................... 16
4.1.11.4 Heat / Smoke / Beam Detectors ......................................................................................... 16
4.1.11.5 Outdoor Heat Detectors ...................................................................................................... 16
4.1.11.6 Enclosure Panels................................................................................................................ 17
4.1.11.7 Extinguishing Control Panel for Clean Agent fire suppression system ................................ 17
4.1.11.8 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.11.9 Secondary power supply. ................................................................................................... 18
4.1.11.10 Battery Modules................................................................................................................ 18
4.1.11.11 Alarm Devices .................................................................................................................. 18
4.1.11.12 Conduits ........................................................................................................................... 19
4.1.11.13 Shutdown and Operation of HVAC Equipment ................................................................. 19
4.1.11.14 Connection to SCADA System ......................................................................................... 19
4.1.11.15 Connection to Access Control System .............................................................................. 19
4.1.12 Survey of Fire Protection Systems to be installed .................................................................. 20
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY..................................................................................................................... 21
5.1 Mandatory Spare Parts and Tools .............................................................................................. 21

5.2 Recommended Spare Parts and Tools ....................................................................................... 21
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 1
1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
1.1 Introduction
applicable to the design, manufacture and testing of mechanical to be installed in the substations
as part of the GCC Interconnection Project, to be developed by the Gulf Cooperation Council
Interconnection Authority (GCCIA):
 Fire Protection and Detection;

016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 2

016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 3
Unless otherwise indicated in these Specifications, the latest edition of the following codes and
Standards shall govern, inasmuch as they apply, the design, selection, installation, testing and
commissioning of the mechanical auxiliary services:
 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems
NFPA 15 Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and of
Foam-Water Spray Systems
NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
NFPA 22 Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 850 Recommended practice for Fire Protection for Electric Generating
Plants and High Voltage Direct Current Converter Stations
NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
 Civil Defence Local Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice

 American Petroleum Institute (API)
 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
 American Welding Society (AWS)
 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
 International Standards Organization (ISO)
 International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
 National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA)
 Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA)
 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 4
Where a particular standard or code is referred to, that standard or code shall, unless otherwise
stated, be the edition in effect 30 days prior to the closing date for submission of tenders.
All Fire Protection System, equipment and components of the Fire Protection System shall be
approved by Local Civil Defense and in accordance with Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice.
4.1 Fire Protection and Detection Systems
The following shall be considered as part of the system:
 all piping connecting water supply systems to pumping systems as well as all piping
connecting pumping systems to main distribution pipes which supply all the fire protection
systems;
 all the outside piping above ground for the water piping systems; the road crossings shall
be in trench.
 all needed passive fire protection means such as curbed areas or pits around transformers
and shunt reactors, oil separators or interceptors, drainage trenches, fire-walls, fire
dampers, etc., in accordance with the NFPA 850 requirements;
 Smoke and heat venting in accordance with the NFPA 850 requirements.
4.1.1 Materials
Use Types
Piping Fittings
Below grade, water piping Galvanized Carbon steel
seamless pipe inside pipe
trench
Exposed, normally water filled Galvanized carbon steel
piping seamless pipe
Exposed, normally dry piping Galvanized carbon steel flanges or roll-grooved fittings
(Water Spray Fixed Systems) seamless pipe such as “Victaulic” couplings or
approved equivalent
Exposed, normally dry piping Shall be of a material

(Foam-Water Spray Systems) compatible with the particular
foam-water solution. No
rubber-gasket fittings shall be
permitted
Exposed, clean agent piping Galvanized carbon Steel
seamless pipe or copper
tubing or stainless steel pipe
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 5
Use piping grade suitable for minimum working pressure of 10 bar and test pressure of 16 bar for
water and foam-water piping systems. Use material compatible fittings with suitable gasket type
and material. Allowance shall be made for the corrosive nature of the subsoil.
4.1.2 Discharge Devices (sprinkler heads, nozzles, etc.) and Thermal Detectors
Design size, orientation, distribution pattern, number and spacing of the discharge devices
according to the appropriate NFPA requirements and recommendations.
In order to avoid false heat alarm, the temperature rating for closed sprinkler heads and thermal
detectors shall be chosen by considering an average ambient temperature of 33° C and a
maximum ambient temperature of 55° C.
4.1.3 Valve Monitoring
Each normally open isolation valve on connections to water supplies and each sectional control
valve, including post-indicating ones, shall be electrically monitored by means of a position
detection device. An alarm will be transmitted as soon as the position of any valve is modified to
the control room main panel. Exceptions, as per NFPA standards for each system may apply,
upon Owner’s approval.
4.1.4 Water Spray Fixed Systems
4.1.4.1 Description
Power transformers and shunt reactors shall be protected by water spray fixed systems
consisting of a complete, fully automatic protection/detection system, Automatic system actuation
valves for spray systems should be actuated hydraulically by wet pilot system.
The normally water filled piping and the deluge valve of each system shall be installed inside the
buildings or in an outside enclosure.
4.1.4.2 Design Criteria
The design and installation of each system shall be based on standard NFPA 15 and on the
following criteria:
 Minimum protection design density shall not be less than 0.17 L/s·m2 (10.2 (L/min)/m2) of
projected area of rectangular prism envelope. The Contractor shall consider any other
particular condition affecting the needed density and add it to the minimum requirements.
 The type and location of nozzles shall be designed to extinguish any fire started in the
vicinity of the protected apparatus.
 Complete systems shall be provided with all components required for automatic operation,
normally released via release sprinklers in water detection lines around the protected
equipment.
4.1.4.3 Fire Detectors
Minimum number of wet pilot ring in power transformer and reactor rooms shall be two and the
sprinkler spacing shall be as per applicable standards.
A sufficient number of fire detection devices actuated electrically shall instantly detect the fire.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 6
The fire detection devices shall be a combination of rate compensated and fixed temperature
type with operating contacts normally open. A fusible link shall provide the fixed temperature
detection and a vented air expansion chamber with diaphragm and contacts shall provide the rate
of rise detection. Each unit shall be made of corrosion resistant material enclosed in a
weatherproof cover and shall be suitably compensated for full proof outdoor operation regardless
of weather conditions or changes.
4.1.4.4 Alarm and Control Devices
Provision shall be made for testing the operation of each water spray release initiation control
device.
Transformer cooling fan shut down should be activated by operation of deluge valve
A water pump motor alarm shall be provided to operate when water flows.
A shut-off valve shall be provided to isolate these alarms for maintenance purposes.
Water flow alarm shall be provided for each deluge system.
Manual release by means of release valves in break glass boxes shall be provided for water
spray system next to each protected transformer.
Manual release devices box type shall also be provided at each deluge valve station.
Shutdown of the system shall only occur on manual closure of the deluge valve water supply stop
valve.
The system drain Valve need to be provided in the lowest portion of the pipe line with lockable
valve in order to drain after system testing.
Pressure gauges shall be provided on both sides of each deluge valve and at locations as per
NFPA 15 requirements.
4.1.4.6 Piping
Piping shall be in removable sections, so that the transformer and related equipment can be lifted
or moved.
4.1.4.7 Deluge Valves
Deluge valve stations shall be housed in a suitable enclosure with sufficient ventilation louvers to
be protected from direct sun radiation or installed indoors.
Deluge valves shall be of clapper type actuated by a pressure loss in wet pilot line. The valves
shall remain closed under the design conditions specified, unless there is a fire at a transformer
or shunt reactor. The valve shall be provided with removable cover which allows inspection and
cleaning of the internal parts of the valve. The clapper facing and seat shall be renewable. Drain
valves and piping shall be provided to drain water remaining above the closed clapper. The
deluge valve shall be equipped with a manually operated release lever to open the valve and a
reset device.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 7
System components shall be rated for the maximum working pressure to which they are exposed,
but not less than 12.1 bar (175 psi).
All piping shall be traffic red color.
4.1.4.8 Isolating Valves for Deluge System
Shut-off valves shall be provided before each deluge valve to isolate the system for testing and
maintenance purposes. Valves shall be outside screw and yoke gate type.
Fire pump test return line is to be connected to both the tanks, each branch shall be provided
with OS&Y gate valve. Globe valve at the fire pump set return line at the downstream of flow
meter shall be provided.
4.1.5 Switchyard and Wet Riser Fire Protection Systems
4.1.5.1 Description
Each switchyard fire protection system shall comprise a complete above ground water distribution
loop piping system surrounding the whole substation, connecting hydrants and hoses.
The system shall include a water flow detection device that shall initiate a fire alarm in case of
system operation. These alarms shall be transmitted to the control room main panel.
Pressure discharge device shall be installed in regular interval to release over pressure due to
atmospheric conditions.
following criteria:
 The fire water service main shall be routed above ground laid on the concrete pedestals
with supports, except for road crossings, where it shall be laid in trenches.
 Outdoor hydrants shall be of the barrel type with two (2) upper outlets DN 65 (2 1/2") for
hose connections and designed for working pressure of 10 bar and test pressure of 16 bar.
 Each hoses set shall be provided with a weatherproof enclosure located over the equipment.
Such enclosure shall incorporate shelves and firefighting accessories as per NFPA 24
recommendations;
 One fire department connection complete with the required piping and accessories shall be
provided for each building in which inside and/or outside adjacent water fire protection
systems are to be installed;
 Indicator gate-valves shall be provided in order to sectionalise the various parts of the main
and supply ring in case of repair works, as per NFPA 24 requirements. Each fire department,
hydrant and hose connection shall adapt exactly to the type of fittings used by the Owner;
 The distribution loop piping needed flow for each system shall be not less than 31,5 L/s (500
gpm) and the minimum pipe size shall be 150 mm;
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 8
 Number and location of hydrants, water main pipe sizing, etc., shall be made in accordance
with NFPA 24 requirements. A minimum of three (3) hydrants shall be considered for each
system.
 The fire pump shall start when delivery line pressure sensor sense pressure drop.
 The wet riser and hose systems shall be designed, installed and tested as Class III systems
in accordance with as per applicable standard.
 The wet riser systems shall be of the wet pipe type, connected to the external fire main ring
from at least two feeders.
 Each indoor hose reels shall be enclosed in a metallic, mild steel wall mounted surface
cabinet.
 Each cabinet shall be painted red and consist of one (1) swiveling hose reel with a 30 m
length, 25mm dia. non-collapsible fire hose with jet/spray nozzle and tail piece readily
attached along with lock shield valve, pressure reducing valve (if system pressure exceeds
12.1bar) and pressure gauge and 65mm diameter for the landing valve taping.
4.1.6 Wet Type Water Sprinkler Systems
4.1.6.1 Description
Pump houses and shall be protected by complete fully automatic wet type water sprinkler
systems.
The system shall include a water flow detection device that shall initiate a fire alarm in case of
system operation. These alarms shall be transmitted to the control room main panel.
Diesel generator room shall be protected with Foam system.
The design and installation of each system shall be based on the NFPA 13 standard and on the
following criteria:
 Minimum protection density shall not be less than 0.17 L/s·m2 (10.2 mm/min) over the
entire area.
 The water demand for each system shall be calculated by using the area/density method
as prescribed in NFPA 13;
 Sprinkler head orifice shall be standard response, upright, thread size 12.7 mm (½ “”) size,
with ½” nominal orifice. Sprinkler heads shall be natural finish bronze.
Each system shall incorporate a water flow switch with one (2) auxiliary switch contact, to close
when at least one sprinkler head is opened. This action shall actuate a remote alarm at the main
fire detection panel.
The fire pump shall start when delivery line pressure sensor activated by pressure drop.
A water pump motor alarm shall be provided to operate when water flows.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 9
A shut-off valve shall be provided to isolate these alarms for maintenance purposes.
Diesel Generator fuel line shutoff valve shall be closed in case of sprinkler system activation. And
alarm shall be provided to Main fire alarm panel
A pressure gauge shall be installed on each sprinkler system supply piping and at locations as
per NFPA 13 requirements.
4.1.6.5 Piping
Provision shall be made for testing the operation of each flow switch device without wetting of the
protected area, as per NFPA 13 requirements.
4.1.7 Foam-water Spray Systems
4.1.7.1 Description
Diesel engine fire pump diesel tanks and emergency generator and its diesel tanks shall be
protected by foam-water spray systems consisting of a complete, fully automatic
protection/detection packaged system, controlled by dedicated control panel. Fault and fire alarm
signals shall be available from the control panel and shall be transmitted to the control room main
fire detection panel. Upon fire detection, the associated deluge valve of the specialized system
shall open letting the foam-water solution discharge from the open nozzles over the protected
apparatus/area.
following criteria:
 Supply of foam concentrate shall be provided for each substation. Local supplier shall be
identified by the Contractor;
 The foam concentrate proportioning means shall be through a diaphragm actuated pressure
tank for each system;
 The design discharge density shall be in accordance with the applicable occupancy
standard for foam-water systems, but shall in no case be less than 0,108 L/s·m2. The foam
concentration shall be not less than 3% and the duty foam volume shall be 8 L minimum,
with an equal amount of reserve.
4.1.7.3 Fire Detectors
Basic requirements are the same as for the water spray fixed systems (refer to section 4.1.4.3).
. Rate Compensated Heat Detectors should be installed for outdoor diesel engine fuel tanks and
inside diesel generator room.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 10
Basic requirements are the same as for the water spray fixed systems (refer to section 4.1.4.4).
Water Foam System fault and Water -foam flow alarm shall be provided to control panel and Main
fire alarm panel.
No provision is needed for a remote manual release push button.
Pressure gauges shall be provided on both sides of each deluge valve and at locations as per
NFPA 16.
4.1.7.6 Flow Tests
Means shall be provided to perform water only flow tests on a regular basis, without wetting of
the protected tank and with no foam discharge.
4.1.7.7 Deluge Valves
Basic requirements are the same as for the water spray fixed system (refer to section 4.1.4.7),
except that the deluge valves shall conform to NFPA 16.
4.1.7.8 Isolating Valves for Deluge System
Shut-off valves shall be provided before each deluge valve to isolate the system for testing and
maintenance purposes. Valves shall be outside screw and yoke gate type.
4.1.8 Water Supply and Pumping Systems
4.1.8.1 General
Each water supply system shall include a complete, fully automatic fire protection water pumping
system controlled by fire pump control panels. The system shall comprise booster pumps (main:
electrical motor driven; standby: diesel motor driven) and jockey pumps (electrical motor driven).
For the diesel driven fire pumps, the Contractor shall provide the chimney and silencer required
for the proper operation of the engine and to meet Owner surrounding noise criteria. Chimneys
and cylinders shall be insulated with a high temperature insulation selected for personnel
protection and covered with an thermal insulation aluminum jacket.
A water pressure sensing device ahead of the fire pumps shall start the main pump(s) in case of
low pressure in the piping, which means that one of the fire protection systems has operated. In
addition, in case of the electrical main pump(s) failure, the stand-by diesel driven pump(s) shall
automatically start. The water piping system shall be pressurized by means of the main jockey
pump(s), to avoid false alarms. The latter shall be put on and off by a water pressure sensing
device with a set point slightly higher than the one of the booster pumps. In case of main jockey
pump(s) failure, stand-by jockey pump(s) shall automatically start.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 11
Water supply systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with standard NFPA 22 and
shall be designed considering the largest water based single system operating for one hour along
with simultaneous operation of one external hydrant (with two hoses) with a design flow rate of
not less than 1890 liters/minute (500 gpm).
Pumping systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with standard NFPA 20.
The following criteria shall also be used:
 Each tank shall be Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic or steel gravity type complete with all the
needed openings, fittings, manholes, etc. The fire water tank shall be Civil Defense listed
and approved. Fire water tank shall have two internal equal compartments connected with
isolation valves for tank cleaning and maintenance purpose without compromising whole
water reserve.
 Each pumping unit shall be mounted on a common steel base. The discharge pressure
shall meet the highest pressure demand among all the supplied systems. Minimum pump
pressure shall be 10 bar or as approved by local Civil Defence Authority.
 The fire pumps shall be located in a pump house;
 Each booster pump shall be centrifugal, horizontal shaft, double suction, simple stage, with
cast iron body, stainless steel shaft and removable upper section;
 Each jockey pump shall be vertical multistage centrifugal and shall have a minimum capacity
of not less than any normal leakage rate or 1 gpm (3.8 l/min) whichever is larger and
maximum capacity less than a single fire sprinkler. Minimum pump pressure shall be not
less than nominal pressure of fire pumps.
 The booster pump diesel engine diesel tank shall be sized and installed according to NFPA
20 and API requirements.
 Fuel tank shall be single wall enclosed with a dike sufficient to hold entire tank capacity plus
40% for sand filling.
 The diesel tank shall be provided with continuous monitoring and low level indication at fire
protection panel.
Low level alarm shall be connected to main fire alarm panel.
Diesel tank shall be located outside the pump room.
Bund wall shall constructed around the tank to contain the diesel spillage.
4.1.8.3 Booster Pumps
Each pump shall comprise:
 replaceable wearing rings;

 drainage plug;
 fittings for air vent device, pressure relief valve and manometers;
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 12
 air vent device;

 pressure relief valve for diesel pump and casing pressure releasing valve for electric pump;
 bronze, closed type, double inlet impellers;
 stainless steel shaft protected by stainless steel sleeve and ball-bearing mounted with
greasing and purging plugs;
 compression flushing packing rings with stuffing box;
 inlet and outlet manometers.
4.1.8.4 Jockey Pumps
Each pump shall comprise:
 cast iron body;

 bronze impellers;
 stainless steel shaft;
 mechanical seal;
 fitting for pressure relief valve and manometers;
 pressure relief valve;
 Inlet and outlet manometers.
4.1.8.5 Control Panels
The booster pumps control panel shall be dual full service type for main and stand-by pumps,
with only one electrical connecting point in accordance with NFPA 20 requirements for
electric/diesel motor driven pumps controllers and shall incorporate pressure transducer for each
pump. The cut in pressure shall start the associated pump and initiate a remote alarm in the
control room main fire detection panel to warn that the fire pump has started.
The panel shall also include all the supervisory devices and status as well as alarm lights as per
NFPA 20 requirements. These alarms shall be remotely transmitted to the main fire detection
panel.
The jockey pump control panel shall be dual full service type for main and stand-by pumps, with
only one electrical connecting point and shall incorporate two (2) pressure transducers for each
pump for the start and stop control. The panel shall also comprise:
 motor starters;
 disconnect means;
 manual / off/ auto switches;
 warning lights for each pump status as following:
- pump on;
- auto switch position;
- manual /off position.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 13
4.1.8.6 Flow Test Connection
Each pumping system shall be provided with a flow test connection complete with the required
piping and accessories.
4.1.8.7 Isolating and Non-Return Valves
Each pump shall be provided with an isolating valve on each side and delivery line with additional
silent type non-return valve. Isolating valves shall be outside screw and yoke gate type.
4.1.9 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
4.1.9.1 General
Control and protection, auxiliary service and telecommunication rooms, MV switchgear

room shall be protected by one total flooding clean agent fire extinguishing system
consisting of a complete, fully automatic protection/detection packaged system, controlled
by a control panel. Fault and fire alarm, discharge signals shall be available from the
panels and shall be transmitted to the control room main fire detection panel. Upon fire
detection, the system shall initiate an alarm, shut down the ventilation systems, close the
openings and initiate a time delay to let the occupants get out of the protected area. The
clean agent shall then discharge from the nozzles.
following criteria:
 The extinguishing agent shall flood the whole room volume including the one under the false
floor and the one over the suspended ceiling, if any, through a sufficient number of nozzles;
 The extinguishing agent shall be an internationally acceptable gas alternative to
hydrofluorocarbon and subject to Owner approval. The selection of the accepted
extinguishing agent shall be based on the following criteria:
- availability of the extinguishing agent and cylinder capacity from local contractors
located in the local market;
- number of cylinders and their occupied area and volume;
- design concentration and discharge time;
- degree of hazard of the extinguishing agent on the occupants and subsequent
recommended safety requirements;
- potential environmental effect;
- compatibility with other extinguishing agents;
- storability and storage life of the agent;
- quality of the agent as compared with the NFPA 2001 requirements;
- the listed temperature range and conditions of service of the agent;
- cylinder charging pressure;
- number of nozzles;
 Complete coverage of the protected areas shall be provided by the fire detectors;
 The smoke detectors shall be capable of detection the presence of vapours and shall be
photoelectric types. Automatic release of the extinguishing agent shall require the operation
of any two detectors within the same protected area;
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 14
 Manual initiation facilities for release of the extinguishing agent shall be provided in each
protected area through a manual cylinder lever release and manual stations;
 The equipment shall comprise one bank of cylinders for each protected area. The cylinders
shall be of a type readily available from a contractor located in the local market and shall be
suitable for refilling by local contractors. Such local facilities shall be identified by the
Contractor;
 Prior to the clean agent discharge, an alarm shall be generated to warn the occupants
through klaxon and bell. Two (2) sets of one (1) auxiliary contact shall be provided to actuate
remote alarms (fire alarm and fault) at the main fire detection panel. Release of the
extinguishing agent shall be permitted only after this warning and at the end of an adjustable
time delay, which shall be set according to the NFPA 2001 recommendations;
 The cylinder release units shall be suitable for automatic electrical operation. The manual
releasing mechanism shall be with locking pins so that release of the extinguishing agent
can be positively prevented for maintenance purposes;
 The control panel shall be installed adjacent to the associated cylinder banks;
 Prior to the clean agent discharge, the system shall shut down the ventilating systems and
other equipment that could contribute to fire propagation and shall automatically close all
openings which could adversely affect the fire extinguishing efficiency of the system.
The cylinder shall be provided with Digital meter to monitor the pressure, volume and others.
4.1.10 Portable fire extinguishers
4.1.10.1 Description
The portable fire extinguishers shall be of dry powder and carbon dioxide types.
4.1.10.2 Design criteria
The portable fire extinguishers shall be designed and installed in accordance with the NFPA 10
standard and with the following criteria:
 One unit of each type of extinguisher shall be supplied for spares per building;
 Dry powder units shall be 10 kg complete with spray nozzle and pressure gauge ;
 Carbon dioxide units shall be 5 kg complete with spray nozzle;
 Wheel mounted carbon dioxide units shall be 30 kg complete with spray nozzle;
 Local facilities for recharging the equipment shall be identified by the Contractor.
4.1.11 Building General Fire Detection and Annunciation System
4.1.11.1 Description
Each substation shall be supervised by a building general fire detection and annunciation system.
fire detection system shall be controlled by the control room addressable main fire detection panel
and shall consist of minimum two loop cards for detectors and one loop card for internal modules
as applicable, sounder supervision modules, relay cards etc. All the interface relay modules shall
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 15
be installed separate cabinet in modular configuration. All field interface modules are to be located
in nearby air conditioned area.
Generally the buildings within the substations shall be zoned for each room/area/unit for the
software programming purpose.
Any interface to the external services shall be routed through the main fire alarm control panel.
All outgoing wiring from the FACP to plant shutdown (transformer cooling fan shutdown, A/C
ventilation trip) should have linkable terminals.
FACP detector loops shall not comprise of control and releasing modules. The control and
releasing modules shall be connected to a dedicated loop card.
Generally FACP should have spare capacity to add 20% more detectors with additional wiring
and interface modules without adding additional circuit boards (modules) to upgrade, to enable
alterations and up gradation to the facility.All main rooms, including those covered by the
specialized fire protection systems shall be supervised by fire detectors that shall give an alarm
to the control room main panel in case of fire.
Also, air conditioning and ventilation ducts shall be supervised by fire detectors that shall give an
alarm to the control room main panel and shall shut down the concerned air conditioning or
ventilation systems in case of fire.
Mimic and repeater panels shall be provided, minimum one set at substation main entry and at
each substation building. Along with Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), a PC graphic monitoring
software package, including necessary interface cards and accessories should be provided for
simple management and maintenance at remote control center location.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a fire emergency plan in accordance with the current
specification as well as requirements of NFPA 850, for approval.
4.1.11.2 General
Each general fire detection and annunciation system shall consist of the following equipment:
 Linear Heat Sensing Cables

 Heat, Photoelectric and Beam detectors;
 Outdoor Heat detectors;
 Ventilation duct smoke detectors;
 Main fire alarm panel;
 Remote annunciator panels;
 Bells;
 Power supply modules;
 Battery charger and transfer modules;
 Supports, brackets and sleeves;
 System test equipment;
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 16
 Equipment earthing;
The fire detection system shall provide automatic detection of excessive heat and/or
accumulation of smoke and combustible gases within the various covered areas and shall
activate an warning fire alarm. The fire detection system shall also provide automatic detection
of smoke in outlets of ventilation and the consequent automatic shutdown of the concerned
ventilation and air conditioning systems. All indoor detectors shall be of the addressable type.
The appropriate location and type of detectors shall be determined by the Contractor and shall
comply with the relevant codes and standards. A mimic and repeater panel shall be installed at
the entrance of the control building.
All equipment shall be supplied as a complete system with comparable manufactured by a single
Contractor.
4.1.11.3 Linear Heat Sensing Cables
Heat Sensor Cables are to be provided for all medium and high voltage Power Cables on the
floor, cable trays and cable risers. Control and LVAC cables.
Linear heat sensing (LHS) cables shall be installed in a zigzag fashion above all cable trays and
cable risers to cover the full width and length of the trays.
Distance between the supports at one side of the tray of LHS shall not exceed 1500 mm.
LHS for floor-mounted cables are to be provided in spiral fashion. In all cases turn-to-turn distance
shall be a maximum of 500mm.
All power cables are to be painted with flame retardant non-intumescent (ablative type) paint.
4.1.11.4 Heat / Smoke / Beam Detectors
The design and selection of detectors shall be in accordance with the environmental conditions
and likely combustion products which can reasonably be anticipated.
Where detectors are installed in hidden voids, independent remote Indicator lamps shall be
provided for each void detector.
Beam Smoke Detector shall have adjustable sensitivity settings and have an integral sensitivity
test feature of a filter attached inside the detector optics.
4.1.11.5 Outdoor Heat Detectors
For conventional rate-Anticipation/Rod type Heat Detectors used in Main Transformer, Earthing
Transformers and Reactors, zone monitor modules are to be used for interacting the same with
the Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm System. 2 Nos. interface module shall be
provided to connect probe heat detector with fire alarm system in each IDT/ET, Reactor.
End of line (EOL) resistor for such detectors shall be installed at an accessible height (1.2M)
within weatherproof G.I boxes of IP (65). All the probe type heat detectors shall be mounted on
industrial boxes of IP65 rating. All the probe type heat detectors shall be accessible or provide
permanent arrangement for maintenance and operation.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 17
4.1.11.6 Enclosure Panels
Each enclosure panel shall consist of one or more modular type control panels with power supply
and all pre-wired modules to accomplish the individual functions necessary for a complete,
operable system.
The enclosure shall be rugged steel construction furnished in scratch-resistant, baked wrinkle red
enamel, suitable for surface mounting, complete with all mounting brackets, supports and
anchors.
Double enclosure panel shall be provided.
4.1.11.7 Extinguishing Control Panel for Clean Agent fire suppression system
Addressable Fire Extinguishing Control Panel (FECP) shall be provided for supervision,
interfacing and releasing signals for all clean agent protected rooms.
Each panel shall provide power and necessary components for the operation of a two loop
supervised detector circuits, separate circuit for manual release and supervised audible signal
circuits utilizing 24 V DC devices.
The detector circuit shall accommodate, photoelectric, thermal detectors and manual stations as
well as test contact devices intermixed on the same circuit.
FECP shall include lamps for system power, alarm, and trouble as well as LED indicators for
zone alarm, zone trouble and audible signal trouble.
Momentary contact switches shall be provided for RESET-LAMP TEST and TROUBLE SILENCE
which shall silence the internal trouble signal sounding device.
The basic power supply shall be capable of supplying power to the detectors and signal circuits.
Each control panel shall have one set of normally open and manually closed alarm operated relay
contacts and one set of normally open, normally closed trouble operated relay contacts.
FECP shall be interfaced such that each information from FECP will be transferred to FACP and
all interlock signals to other systems shall be wired to FACP.
Generally FECP should have spare capacity to add 20% more detectors with additional wiring
and interface modules without adding additional circuit boards (modules) to upgrade, to enable
alterations and up gradation to the facility.
4.1.11.8 Installation
Installation shall include holes in ventilation ducts, walls, ceiling and floors necessary for putting
into place conduit runs and detectors.
All Fire Detection System wiring shall be with enhanced fire resistant cables (FRC) of rating not
less than two (2) hours.
Gland / clips for FRC should be used as recommended by Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) of FRC to secure the cable & termination with appropriate apparatus.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 18
The maximum number of cores per cable shall be two, minimum cable size shall be 1.5 Sq.mm.
All outdoor cables shall be covered with weather proof GI cable tray/G.I conduit.
All wiring shall be checked and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
to ensure that the system is free of grounds, shorts and open circuits.
4.1.11.9 Secondary power supply.
The secondary power supply capacity for supervising station facilities and equipment shall be
capable of supporting operations for a minimum of 24 hours and then shall be capable of
operating the system during a fire or other emergency condition for a period of 30 minutes at
maximum connected load.
4.1.11.10 Battery Modules
A battery module of adequate capacity shall be provided in a separate cabinet and it shall consist
of sealed set of 2 x 12V rechargeable batteries.
4.1.11.11 Alarm Devices
Both audible and visual alarm devices shall be provided. Device connections shall be made to
produce a general alarm condition.
Audible devices shall be of the vibrating polarized type for operation on 24 V dc audible circuit
supply.
a) Notification Devices (Bells, Sounders)
A minimum sound level of 75 dB shall be produced by the sounders at any point in a building.
The total sound pressure level produced by combining the ambient sound pressure level with all
audible notification appliances operating shall not exceed 110 dBA at the minimum hearing
distance.
If ceiling heights allow, wall-mounted notification devices shall have their tops above the finished
floors at heights of not less than 2.29 m and below the finished ceilings at distances of not less
than 150 mm.
b) Alarm Flashers
An outside warning flasher shall be installed and activated simultaneously with the alarm bell.
The flashing light shall be red and visible enough to be noticed even during day time for quick
identification by the maintenance crew.
Wall-mounted devices shall be mounted such that the entire lens is not less than 2 m and not
greater than 2.44 m above the finished floor.
c) Manual Fire Alarm Stations
A manual fire alarm stations shall be located on the natural paths of exit. Each station shall be
of the “Pull Station” type on which the words “Fire Alarm” shall be written in both English and
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 19
Arabic. The color of these alarm stations shall be red. Manual alarm stations for a particular
area shall in one zone with the detector provided for the same area.
4.1.11.12 Conduits
All wiring for the fire detection system shall be with fire resistant cable run in rigid conduits. The
conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Pull boxes shall be provided for all conduit runs in
excess of 15 m long. Malleable iron straps shall be provided to support the conduits at intervals
not more than 3 m apart, and the joints in the conduit. All fire conduit shall be traffic red color.
4.1.11.13 Shutdown and Operation of HVAC Equipment
Shutdown of HVAC system shall be made automatically upon receipt of fire alarm. Upon
restoration of panel to normal condition, HVAC systems shall be automatically restarted.
4.1.11.14 Connection to SCADA System
The following fire detection and fire protection systems shall be connected to the SCADA System:
 Water Spray Fixed Systems

 Wet Type Water Sprinkler Systems
 Foam-water Spray Systems
 Fire Water Tank low level
 Fire Pump Running, fault & trip
 Fire Pump Controller Fault
 Clean agent fire extinguishing systems
 Building General Fire Detection and Annunciation Systems
 Diesel tank low level
Separate fire and fault signals shall be transmitted to the interconnection Control Center (ICC)
through the SCADA System.
4.1.11.15 Connection to Access Control System
In case of fire alarm, Fire Alarm System should deactivate door holders controlled by Access
Control System as per cause effect matrix provided.
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 20
4.1.12 Survey of Fire Protection Systems to be installed
The location mentioned in the below table is applicable for all buildings in the substation.
Location Fire Detection System Fire Fighting System

Rate compensated heat
1. Transformer Deluge System
detector
Smoke detector, Beam
2. HV Switchgear no requirements
detector
3. MV room Smoke detector Clean Agent System
4. LV room Smoke detector Clean Agent System
Smoke detector, Deluge System
5. Cable basement
Linear heat sensing cable Wet Riser System Class III
6. MV and HV cable trench Linear heat sensing cable Fire retardant coating
7. LV and Control cable riser Linear heat sensing cable Fire retardant coating
Control room
Battery charger room
8. Smoke detector Clean Agent System
Telecom rooms in telecom building
other Electrical room
9. Capacitor bank room Smoke detector Clean Agent System
Ex. Proof Heat detector
10. Battery room Ex. Proof H2 detector no requirement
Ex. Proof Flame Detector
Sprinkler System
11. Corridor Smoke detector
Wet Riser System Class III
Office room
Workshop room
12. Smoke detector Sprinkler System
Store room
Mechanical room
13. Fire pump room Heat Detector Sprinkler System
14. Diesel generator room Heat Detector Foam System
15. Diesel fuel tank room Heat Detector Foam System
16. Diesel fire pump fuel tank Heat Detector Foam System
17. Toilet / Bathroom Heat / Smoke Detector no requirement
18. Kitchen Heat / Smoke Detector Sprinkler System
19. HVAC supply and return air ducts Duct Smoke Detector no requirement
If oil content above 500
20. AUX. TRAFO Heat Detector
Gallons, Deluge System
21. Substation yard no requirement Yard Fire Hydrants
Smoke Detector Sprinkler System
22. Warehouse
Beam Detector Wet Riser System Class III
016403-2000-47ES-7000 01 July 2024 21
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply of mechanical equipment, shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility
of the Contractor ensure the coordination of the engineering and of the procurement, in order to
guarantee compatibility and completeness of the overall installation:
 Fire Protection and Detection;
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spare parts, as listed in Section 6: Schedule of Prices.
The Contractor completed and priced a list of recommended spare parts in his tender (Section 6,
Schedules of Prices). The Contractor shall provide recommended spare parts, as approved by
the Employer, which may be needed during a 5-year period of operation, under normal operating
conditions.
The Contractor shall hand over to the Owner all special and large tools used for the initial erection
of the Work and necessary for its dismantling, adjustment and maintenance.
(GCCIA)
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIRCONDITIONING
(HVAC)
016403-2000-47ES-7000A – Rev.01
July 2024
Heating, Ventilation & Airconditioning (HVAC) # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 HVAC SYSTEM 1
1.1 Introduction 1
4 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 2
4.1.1 Design Conditions 2

4.1.2 Design Criteria 4
4.1.2.1 Basement Extract Fans for Normal Ventilation: 4
4.1.2.2 Basement Extract Fans for Smoke Ventilation: 4
4.1.2.3 Battery room ventilation: 4
4.1.2.4 Fire pump room, DG room and clean agent protected room’s ventilation: 4
4.1.2.5 Staircase Pressurisation: 4
4.1.3 Fans and Blowers 4
4.1.3.1 General 4
4.1.3.2 Centrifugal Wall Exhausts 5
4.1.4 Air Conditioning Units 6
4.1.4.1 Air Cooled Package Unit 6
4.1.4.2 Unit Performance 7
4.1.4.3 Unit Details 7
4.1.5 Electric Duct Heaters 9
4.1.6 Ductwork and Accessories 9
4.1.6.1 Standard Requirements 9
4.1.6.2 Ductwork Design 10
4.1.6.3 Elbows, Bends and Offsets 10
4.1.6.4 Duct Supports 10
4.1.6.5 Joints 11
4.1.6.6 Turning and Guide Vanes 11
4.1.6.7 Flexible Connectors 12
4.1.6.8 Test Holes 12
4.1.6.9 Motorized Fire Dampers 12
4.1.6.10 Non-Return Relief Dampers 13
4.1.6.11 Motorized Dampers 13
4.1.6.12 Access Doors 13
4.1.6.13 Sound Attenuators 13
4.1.6.14 Supply Air Grilles 14
4.1.6.15 Ceiling Diffusers 14
4.1.6.16 Return Air Grilles 14
4.1.6.17 Louvers 14
4.1.6.18 Birdscreens 15
4.1.6.19 Filters 15
4.1.6.20 Vibration Isolators 15
Heating, Ventilation & Airconditioning (HVAC) # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 ii
4.1.7 Thermal Insulation 16

4.1.8 Equipment Identification 16
4.1.9 Testing and Air Balancing 16
4.1.10 Control System 16

Heating, Ventilation & Airconditioning # Date Page
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 1
1 HVAC SYSTEM
1.1 Introduction
The present document outlines in technical point of view, the specific requirements applicable to
the design, manufacture, install, test & commission of Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Systems in 400kV Transmission Substations under GCC Interconnection Project, to be
developed by the Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA):
Unless otherwise indicated in these Specifications, the latest edition of the following codes and
Standards shall govern, inasmuch as they apply in the design, selection, installation, testing and
commissioning of the HVAC Systems:
 British Standards and Codes of Practice (BSCP)

BSEN 14825 Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages and heat pumps, with electrically
driven compressors, for space heating and cooling, commercial and
process cooling. Testing and rating at part load conditions and calculation of
seasonal performance
BSEN 13215 Condensing units for refrigeration. Rating conditions, tolerances and
presentation of manufacturer's performance data
BSEN 13053 Ventilation for buildings. Air handling units. Rating and performance for
units, components and sections.
BSEN 13142 Ventilation for buildings. Components/products for residential ventilation.

Required and optional performance characteristics
 Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA)

 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Recommended Practices
 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
 Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA)
 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
 UAE Fire and Safety code of practice (As applicable).
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 2
 Buildings Fire Prevention and Protection requirements/ Directorate General of Civil

Defense/ Royal Oman Police (As applicable).
 Applicable local laws and Authorities requirements.
4 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
4.1.1 Design Conditions
Following requirements shall be considered as criteria for design of the ventilation and air
conditioning systems. These requirements shall be considered as bare minimum. Under no
circumstances shall outside air flow be less than the 10% of most demanding total air handled
by the air-cooled package units or air flow required to maintain the desired conditions in the
building at a slight positive pressure.
Area / Room Summer DB Winter DB Relative Noise Unit

Temperature temperature Humidity Level Capacity
% db A
Control Building - Control 20 ± 2 deg C 20 ± 2 deg C 50 ± 10 40 ± 5 3x 50%

& Relay panel room, -LV
AC / DC panel room, 2 RUN+1
Meeting Room, Corridor, Standby
office rooms, Battery
Room, Store, Pantry,
Toilet, Service, Staircase.
Telecom Building - 20 deg C 20 deg C 50 + 10 40 + 5 3x 50%

Telecommunication room
2 RUN+1
Standby
GIS Room 21 + 2 deg C 21 + 2 deg C 50 + 10 40 + 5 3 x 50 %
2 RUN+1
Standby
(Two system-
to cover one
system per
half bldg.)
Security Room, Pantry, 21 + 2 deg C 1x100% for

Wash & Toilet, office each room.
room, metering room
Warehouse office room

016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 3
Warehouse 21 + 2 deg C 3 x 50%
2 RUN+1
Standby
PACU unit
Fire Pump Room, 21 + 2 deg C 3 x 50%
Note: Indoor temperature of Telecom building shall not exceed 20 deg C and for other
buildings, the indoor temperature shall not exceed 23 deg C.
Decorative wall mounted type for the auxiliary buildings such as Security room, warehouse
office room and Industrial type split units for Fire Pump room shall be provided. Decorative split
& Industrial type split units shall be selected based on the room/building dimensions and
expected outdoor ambient conditions in summer months.
Ventilation measures as stipulated shall be provided for the respective areas as detailed below:
Normal extract ventilation for cable basement : 4 Air Changes per hour (ACH)
Normal extract ventilation for Store/OHL Gantry accessories: 4 Air Changes per hour
Smoke Extract ventilation for cable basement : 10 ACH
Toilet : 10 ACH
Pantry : 5ACH
Battery Rooms : As recommended by respective

manufacturers
Fire pump Room : As recommended by manufacturer of

Diesel pump
Clean agent protected (As per approved FPS) : 4 ACH
The following enlisted are the outside ambient conditions and the figures are rounded off,
however the Contractor shall use the exact design conditions specified in ASHRAE Hand book
(Fundamentals Volume) as applicable for the project location.
Condition Temperature
Outside Air Design Conditions:

(Winter):
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 4
• Dry bulb 1º C
• Relative Humidity 100%
Cooling (summer):
• Dry bulb 50º C
• Wet bulb 32º C
4.1.2 Design Criteria
The HVAC systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with ASHRAE Standards and
all design calculations shall be based on these standards. All internal gains including future
loads in each area shall allow for occupancy and heat dissipation from equipment contained
within including future envisaged together with solar and transmission gains and losses. A
safety factor of 10% shall be considered on latent and sensible heat loads. Cooling load
calculations shall be carried out on Carrier – HAP program.
4.1.2.1 Basement Extract Fans for Normal Ventilation:
Extract fan shall be cased axial or centrifugal type with 2x100% redundancy and fresh air shall
be supplied through louvers with filters and sand trap louvers etc.,
4.1.2.2 Basement Extract Fans for Smoke Ventilation:
Extract fan shall be of long cased axial or centrifugal type with a rating of 400 deg C for 2
hours, with anticorrosive finish and IP 54 protection.
4.1.2.3 Battery room ventilation:
Extract fan shall be of long cased axial type with 2x100% suitable for usage in explosive
atmosphere.
4.1.2.4 Fire pump room, DG room and clean agent protected room’s ventilation:
Extract fan shall be of centrifugal roof mounted type with 1x100% redundancy with a rating of
400 deg C for 2 hours.
Fire pump room extract fan operation shall be interlocked with the Diesel pump run status.
4.1.2.5 Staircase Pressurisation:
Extract fan shall be of long cased axial flow type with 1x100% redundancy.
4.1.3 Fans and Blowers
4.1.3.1 General
Fans and blowers shall meet the specified performance when tested in accordance with AMCA
standard 210. Fans and blowers capable of delivering the required air flow through the system
without overloading shall be provided and shall be selected for a minimum of 60% static
efficiency.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 5
Resistance to airflow shall be calculated and accounted for.
Each fan and blower shall be capable of continuous operation, having the capacity as required
for the purpose when running at the rated speed against the friction in the system.
Duty & Standby fans with automatic changeover shall be provided on all essential systems.
Each fan and blower shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested after being
installed on a properly sized shaft. The final reading shall not exceed 2,5 mm/s at the fan shaft
speed.
Shafts shall be made of AISI C-1045 grade hot rolled steel turned, ground and polished. The
unit shall not pass through its first critical speed as it comes up to rated speed. The shaft’s first
speed shall be at least 142% of the fan’s maximum operating speed. This critical speed shall
refer to the top of the speed range for the fan’s AMCA class.
Motors shall be suitable for 220 or 415 V 50Hz, single or three-phase system, they shall be
sized accounting the drive losses in addition to a minimum service factor of 1.15, with TEFC
enclosure. These shall be high efficiency motors built according to NEMA Standard Code G,
for continuous duty.
All HVAC motorized apparatus shall be provided with requisite combination magnetic starters
complete with electrical protections, auxiliary relays and NEMA 12 (indoor) or NEMA 4 (outdoor)
enclosures.
Bearings shall be totally enclosed, heavy duty type, self-aligning ball or roller, and shall be
selected for an average life of 400000 hours, based on ABMA L-10. Suitable grease fittings
shall be installed for bearing lubrication with grease copper tubes extending to a central location
on the Package unit’s exterior panel.
Apart from wall exhausters, each fan and blower shall be mounted on or suspended from
vibration isolators.
Belt drive train shall be designed with a 1,5-safety factor.
Contractor shall provide sound power ratings in eight octave bands, in dB, reference to base on
AMCA Standard.
4.1.3.2 Centrifugal Wall Exhausts
Centrifugal wall exhausters shall be direct driven type. They shall be UL listed (Standard 705).
Impeller shall be non-overloading with die-stamped and die-formed front plates and backwardly
inclined blades, constructed of aluminum to spark resistance (AMCA Type “B”). It shall be
statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 Standard, ANSI S2.19, ISO level G6.3, with a
maximum overall runout of less than 0,8 mm.
The housing shall be constructed of one-piece die-formed heavy gauge aluminum without
welding. It shall be weatherproof and include a perimeter drip ring to prevent unsightly
contaminants from running down the wall. Exterior wind bands shall create a high velocity
discharge.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 6
The support brackets shall transmit the weight of the motor and impeller directly to the housing
to prevent orifice distortion.
Sealed ball bearing TEFC motor shall be mounted out of the air stream. The motor
compartment shall be forced cooled with breather tubes to access outside air.
Heavy gauge expanded aluminum bird screens shall be provided with minimum 85% free area.
A conduit post shall be provided through the wall plate/orifice to the motor compartment for
ease of electrical wiring.
A disconnect safety switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to the motor
compartment.
Solid-state speed control shall be installed within the fan motor dome to permit reliable and
precise system balancing (from full to 50% of capacity) without any possibility for unauthorized
tampering of the setting and air flow.
Thermal overload protection shall be provided as standard for these single speed motors.
4.1.4 Air Conditioning Units
4.1.4.1 Air Cooled Package Unit
Each unit shall be single package, air cooled DX (direct expansion) mechanical cooling system,
electric heating, roof mounted type completely factory assembled and tested, piped, internally
wired, fully charged with refrigerant and shipped in one piece, complete with all the relevant
appurtenances including:
 Compressors with pressure gauges:

 Cooling coil;
 Condenser;
 Evaporator coil;
 Evaporator Fans;
 Casing;
 Refrigeration accessories;
 Filters;
 Controls including electric isolation & overload protection for Blower motor, compressors,
condenser fan motors and undervoltage & earth leakage protection Power supply fail
alarm, No flow, filter dirty,
 Insulation.
 Bulk head light
Units shall comply with energy efficiency norms stipulated by local authorities
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 7
4.1.4.2 Unit Performance
Each unit shall meet the following performance:
 Coil face velocity: 2,5 m/s (maximum);

 Evaporator leaving air temperature in cooling mode shall be considered as per calculation:
4.1.4.3 Unit Details
a) Refrigeration system
Environment friendly refrigerant such as R 407C/R 134a / R410A shall be used. The
refrigeration system shall have minimum two independent circuits. Each factory sealed
refrigerant circuit shall connect its own compressor, condenser and shall include suction and
liquid line filter/dryers and gauges, service valves, high and low pressure switches, a loss of
charge switch, Sight glass, and a thermometer well.
b) Compressor
Each compressor unit shall be complete, including a hermetically sealed compressor with direct
electric motor drive, suction cooled, force-feed lubrication. Five years warranty for the
compressors shall be provided. Each compressor shall have an internal pressure relief valve
and shall be protected from excessive current and temperature. The unit shall be assembled
on vibration isolators.
An oil sight glass shall be provided.
The lubrication system shall include strainer and sump magnets.
Each compressor shall have a crankcase heater.
Each compressor shall have a HP & LP pressure switch and pressure gauges.
c) Cooling Coils
Cooling coils shall be made of seamless copper tubing and copper plate fins. Anti corrosion
coating shall be provided at factory. Condenser coil protection guard shall be provided.
A heavy gauge stainless steel drain pan shall be provided under the coil section. The drain pan
shall be insulated and fitted with drain connections on both sides.
Cooling coils shall be split in line with the refrigeration circuits.
d) Supply Blower
Each centrifugal supply blower shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and an
adjustable belt drive. Motor mount shall permit quick and simple motor changeover, belt
tension adjustment or belt changing. Adjustable motor pulley shall be provided with a minimum
±10% adjustment of the blower rpm.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 8
The blower wheel shall be heavy duty, with airfoil blades and double inlet and shall be statically
and dynamically balanced.
e) Condenser
Each refrigeration circuit shall have its own condenser.
The condenser shall be of flat or V-shaped air-cooled condenser coils.
f) Condenser Fans
Fans shall be direct driven, propeller type, statically & dynamically balanced and with
permanent lubricated ball bearings. Fans shall be weatherproof for outdoor use and shall have
a safety guard. Motors shall be equipped with suitable starters and inherently protections.
g) Casing
Casing framework (cage) shall be with minimum 6 mm thick galvanized angle iron. Skinned
panels shall be of steel sheets of 1,5 mm minimum thickness, zinc coated, cross-braced for
rigidity and painted with a powder enamel electrostatically bounded to the metal.
Removable panels shall be provided throughout for easy access to all internal parts.
The unit shall be arranged to accept either horizontal or top supply and return air duct
connections.
h) Filters
High velocity filters complete with filter pressure drop gauges in line with requirements shall be
included.
All filters shall be of washable type.
i) Connections
Ductwork connections to units shall be made with fireproof flexible material according to the
prescriptions of this specification. Supply, return and outdoor air ductwork and mixing sections
along with motorized dampers, and damper bypass arrangements shall be shop fabricated.
j) Controls
Each unit shall be capable of being controlled from local control panel and remotely from the
DDC control panel
Weatherproof local control panel (or maintenance controller) shall be installed in the casing of
the unit and wired complete with necessary magnetic starters, unfused disconnecting switches,
high- and low-pressure cutouts, earth leakage protection, low ambient pressure control, under
voltage monitoring, on / off switch, short cycling protection for compressor and motor winding
protectors. The maintenance controller shall be capable of checking out all phases of unit
operation.
All conduit runs and wiring between controls and operating units shall be provided by the
Contractor and shall furnish cable schedules and wiring drawings to Engineer/Employer.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 9
k) Insulation
Panels shall be insulated with 25/50 mm odorless and vermin proof, injected foam insulation.
Compressor compartment and bottom panel shall be acoustically insulated with 12 kg/m 3
density fiberglass.
4.1.5 Electric Duct Heaters
Flanged type Electric Duct heaters shall be provided with removable heater sections, manual &
automatic thermal cut-outs, air flow switches, temperature & humidity sensors, stage
contactors, step controllers, fuses and disconnecting switches etc.,
The casing shall be fabricated from galvanized steel & shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
Electric duct heater shall contain equally sized multiple heating element stages.
4.1.6 Ductwork and Accessories
4.1.6.1 Standard Requirements
These clauses details out the specific requirements for materials and construction in respect of
ducting, diffusers, grilles and other accessories to be used. All ductwork shall be properly
supported and anchored to the building structure in an approved manner using steel hangers,
anchors, brackets and supports. These shall be fixed to the building structures by means of
inserts on expansion shields of suitable size and numbers to support the imposed loads.
Where ducts pass through floors or walls, motorized Fire dampers shall be provided and any
free space or voids shall be adequately caulked with suitable fire-resistant material and
aesthetically looking sheet metal angle flanges shall be arranged to cover the free space.
All ductwork shall be fabricated from prime quality galvanized sheet metal. The ductwork and
associated fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with the ASHRAE/SMACNA recommended
practices unless specified otherwise.
The thickness of sheet metal, type of joints and bracings shall be constructed in accordance
with the most demanding recommendations of SMACNA and sheet steel thickness shall not be
less than 0.8mm.
Manual dampers, splitter dampers, turning vanes and duct bracings shall be of 1,3 mm thick
galvanized steel. Damper bearings shall be nylon or lubricated bronze. Damper rods, bearing
pins and hardware shall be of stainless steel.
All grilles, diffusers and openings shall be located as required for the purpose and same is
subject to approval of Engineer/ Owner.
Contractor shall be responsible for measurements throughout the work and shall arrange his
ductwork and apparatus to conform to the architectural and structural details in a thorough, neat
and workmanlike manner.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 10
Any alterations necessary in the arrangement of apparatus, ducts etc. in order to align them to
within the finished lines of walls, floors, structural steel, ceilings or to mitigate fouling with
installation of other equipment or ducts, shall be done by the contractor without any additional
cost to the Owner. Similarly, any alterations necessary in installation of other equipment owing
to any such fouling shall be done at Contractor’s expense.
Splitters, deflectors, baffles, dampers, duct-turns shall be provided where required. When
ducts are connecting to masonry or concrete openings, walls and floors etc., they shall be
provided with angles which shall be bolted and made air tight by applying approved caulking
compound on the angles before they are tightened. The ducts at these locations shall be bolted
to the angle.
Prior to installation, duct openings shall be protected to prevent entry of debris, dust and dirt.
No duct with dirt/grime on internal and external surfaces will be accepted, however at
discretion of the Engineer/Owner dirty ductwork may be permitted to be reinstalled after
satisfactory without any additional costs.
The inner surfaces of all components of the duct systems shall be smooth and free of
obstructions in order to minimize the resistance to air flow. Within the limits of good
workmanship, entire system shall be air tight. Ducts shall be of rigid construction, free from
vibration, breathing, sagging or distortion.
4.1.6.2 Ductwork Design
All ductwork shall be machine bent and be free from buckles or waves. Transitions shall be
made with sides pitched not exceeding 20° (or 40° included angle) for diverging air flow. Ducts
may be constructed around obstructions at beams etc., provided that duct construction practice
conforms to ASHRAE recommendations and overall air flow performance is not affected.
All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45° angle from the axis of the main duct and
fitted with folded metal splitter dampers fixed in position with rod and clamps.
Any changes in section of ductwork are to be implemented by tapering the ducts with an aspect
ratio not greater than 1:4. In normal cases, an aspect ratio of less than 1:4 shall be used.
4.1.6.3 Elbows, Bends and Offsets
On all curved elbows, bends and offsets, the center line radii shall not be less than one and
one-half times the width of duct.
Where right-angled bends are used, double thickness turning vanes shall be incorporated.
4.1.6.4 Duct Supports
All ductwork shall be supported rigidly at center to prevent sagging and vibration on custom
made hangers, supports and cantilever brackets.
All duct supports shall be hot dipped galvanized after the fabrication.
Each length of duct shall be supported separately at centers not greater than 2 m. Duct
supports shall consist of galvanized steel angle / channel iron of similar size to that used for
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 11
bracing that section of ductwork with galvanized steel rods not less than 10 mm diameter.
Where pre-cast type floors or ceilings are encountered the Contractor shall include for
extending the width of all horizontal members of the supports as necessary and additional
supports shall be provided where necessary for sound insulation.
All ducts shall be permanently and rigidly supported with all horizontal runs in level and all
vertical runs plumb.
Horizontal runs of ductwork shall be supported by threaded rods and angles as listed below.
Threaded nuts shall be used to support angles.
Longest Duct Size Angle Rod Diameter Hanger Spacing (min.)

(mm) (mm) (mm) (m)
- Up to 600 32 x 32 x 3 8 2,0
- 600 to 900 32 x 32 x 3 10 1,8
- 900 to 1500 38 x 38 x 3 10 1,2
- Over 1500 38 x 38 x 3 10 1,2
Hangers shall be fastened to structural steel by means of beam clamps, clips or additional steel
strung between the building steel as approved by the Engineer/Owner. Where duct need to be
supported from concrete or masonry, expansion shields shall be used.
4.1.6.5 Joints
Joints shall be made substantially air tight, and no duct marks from air leaks shall show at duct
joints or connections to grilles and diffusers. Longitudinal joints of ductwork shall be made at
corners only with “Pittsburgh” or other approved equal seams. Transverse joints whether shop-
made or field-made shall be flanged on ducts 800 mm and above with matching angles bolted
together.
Angles shall be of size not less than 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm and shall be riveted to ducts.
Angles shall be coated with approved non-setting compound before bolting up. No joints,
bends or fittings shall be permitted within the thickness of the walls, floor or ceiling structures.
Lap at joints shall be made in the direction of air flow. Button punch or bolt connections in
standing seams shall be spaced at fixed centers not greater than 150 mm.
4.1.6.6 Turning and Guide Vanes
Turning or guide vanes shall be installed in all duct bends where the radius for the bend is less
than 1,5 times the width of the duct, and on all right-angle bends. Trailing edges shall be
extended by 75 mm and the vanes shall be of the hollow duct turn type.
Single thickness vanes shall be fitted elsewhere in the ducts as necessary. The leading edge of
the vanes shall be of the turned-over type with internal wire or small diameter rod bearing.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 12
4.1.6.7 Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors shall be provided at the inlet and discharge of all fan and blower
connections to ductwork and internals to AHUs and extract fans. They shall be of the full cross-
sectional area of the mating fan inlet and outlet of the duct section. The ends of the ducts and
the fan connections shall be in line. When installed, the width of the joints from metal edge to
metal edge shall be not less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm.
The flexible connector fabric shall be of the glass fiber type, coated on both sides with
“Hypalon”, having a mass no less than 814 g/m 2, a thickness no less than 0,61 mm, a tensile
strength not less than 1780 N, a rupture resistance no less than 3450 kPa and a temperature
range of -40° C to 120° C. It shall be self-extinguishing according to NFPA 90A and UL 214
and resistant to abrasion, sun, weather and ozone.
All flexible connectors other than fan inlet connections shall be between flanged ends. The
flexible material flange shall be backed by an angle or flat iron flange and the flexible
connection shall be securely held between the metal flanges. Flat iron bends used with fan
inlets shall be not less than 5 mm thick.
Flexible connectors shall be pre-assembled 0,7 mm thick galvanized steel to 150 mm wide
exposed fabric to steel, clenched by means of a double lock seam. Assembly dimensions shall
be 75 mm metal/150 mm fabric/75 mm metal.
Flat copper braids of AWG. 2/0 shall be used at all flexible connectors to ensure electrical
continuity of the ductwork for grounding purposes. Each end of the braid shall be provided with
a lug which shall be bolted to the machine and to the duct or AHU/ACCU casing. Self-tapping
screws shall not be used.
4.1.6.8 Test Holes
On the discharge from all fans and on main branch ducts as agreed with the Engineer/Owner,
provision shall be made for testing air flow consisting of a series of holes arranged in
accordance with ASHRAE recommendations.
Holes shall be cut in the shop and all burrs and rough edges removed. Purpose made rubber
sealing plugs shall be provided to close the holes.
4.1.6.9 Motorized Fire Dampers
Motorized fire dampers shall be installed wherever duct passes through the walls, partitions,
and floor slabs.
Casing of the motorized fire damper shall be galvanized sheet steel; blade axle shall be
stainless steel and blade shall be from asbestos free insulating material.
Actuators capacity of motorized fire dampers shall be considered based on the size of the MFD
& closing time as required by the Fire protection system. Actuators shall have suitable
protection based on indoor and outdoor installation.
Motorized Fire dampers shall be supplied and fitted within the thickness of the various fire break
walls, partitions and floor slabs. The motorized fire dampers shall comply in all respects with
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 13
the requirements of the specifications and, local authorities and shall have not less than “2-hour
fire resistance”.
4.1.6.10 Non-Return Relief Dampers
All non-return relief dampers shall be of sturdy construction.
The frame shall be 1,6 mm thick galvanized steel and the blades shall be 6063-T5 extruded
aluminum alloy, 1,3 mm thick with double stiffening brakes.
Axles shall be minimum 12,7 mm in diameter, full length cadmium plated steel rod, turning in
heavy duty bronze bushings.
Linkage shall be stainless steel.
Non-return relief dampers shall be provided on the exhaust or relief side of each system.
4.1.6.11 Motorized Dampers
Motorized Dampers shall be provided on supply and return side of AHU.
Dampers shall be of the single blade or multileaf opposed blade dampers with blades not more
than 200 mm wide.
Frame shall be made from 2 mm thick galvanized steel channel, 200 x 50 mm.
Multi-leaf dampers shall be of the parallel blade type and shall consist of heavy gauge (1,6 mm)
damper blades of aerofoil section mounted on solid full length 12,7 mm cadmium plated steel
interconnected externally by stainless steel linkage. Each damper blade shall be tipped with
PVC seals to ensure silent operation and proper sealing.
4.1.6.12 Access Doors
Air tight access doors with rubber linings shall be provided on all ducts, at changes in direction
and ductwork connections on the suction side of fans, all dampers, fire dampers, filters, coils,
instruments and any component requiring inspection, cleaning and maintenance.
The openings in the ductwork shall be properly stiffened at the edges with iron frames riveted,
the door being similarly stiffened at the edges and cross-braced, with rubber sealing joint
mounted to each door. Doors shall be hinged to the ductwork framing and secured in the
closed position to enable the door to make an airtight joint when closed.
4.1.6.13 Sound Attenuators
Sound attenuators shall be provided as necessary to limit the transmission of noise through
ductwork so that it does not exceed Noise criterion curve NC40 anywhere in the office/control
room area.
Sound attenuators shall generally be constructed with galvanized mild steel casings. Sound
absorbent materials shall be contained within skims or perforated steel splitter sections to
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 14
prevent disintegration and entrainment of fibers into the air stream. Attenuating materials shall
be inert, vermin-proof, non-hygroscopic and non-combustible.
4.1.6.14 Supply Air Grilles
Fresh air grilles shall be manufactured from extruded aluminum. They shall be complete with
rear set of horizontal, and front set of vertical aero foil section full length blades securely fixed
and with externally adjustable integral opposed blade damper with combined linkage. All air
guide blades shall be individually adjustable using purpose made external adjuster key, and set
at maximum divergence. They shall have a baked enamel finish.
Supply air grilles shall be sized so that the maximum noise level within 1 m of the outlet does
not exceed Noise Criterion Curve NC 30 as specified in the latest editions of the ASHRAE
Guide and Data Books.
Fixing shall be by means of corrosion resistant finish countersunk head flush fitting screws
(alternative spring clip internal fixing may also be considered) through chamfered equispaced
holes drilled in the grilled flange. Grille flanges shall be approximately 30 mm wide with turned-
over edges and soft felt gaskets all around. Vertical mullions may be introduced as necessary
to prevent the sagging of horizontal blades and in all such cases velocity of air leaving the grille
and noise level shall be adjusted to conform with requirements stated earlier.
All sizes quoted shall be nominal neck sizes. The size of the approach spigot pieces of
ductwork shall be adjusted to suit the grille neck size.
4.1.6.15 Ceiling Diffusers
Supply and return air ceiling diffusers shall be positioned to suit the ceiling panel arrangements.
They shall have minimum protrusion below the false ceiling line and flanges specially chosen to
suit the particular type of ceiling involved. Ceiling diffusers shall be sized so that the maximum
noise levels within 1 m of the outlet shall not exceed Noise Criterion Curve NC 25 as given in
the latest editions of the ASHRAE Guide and Data Books. They shall be manufactured
complete with externally operated volume and directional control. Diffusers shall be
manufactured from aluminium, with baked enamel finish. Guide vanes shall be provided as
necessary at the entry to diffusers to give the uniform air distribution desired at the diffuser
neck.
Where diffusers are fitted directly into the air ducts their frames shall be specially chosen to suit
the ducts and give minimum protrusion below the ductwork.
4.1.6.16 Return Air Grilles
Return air grilles shall be manufactured from extruded aluminum frame and blades. They shall
be provided with fixed single deflection 45° inclined blades.
Fixing and selection shall be done based on the criteria specified for the supply grilles.
4.1.6.17 Louvers
The sizes of fresh air louvers shall be determined by the Contractor and submitted for the
approval of the Engineer/Owner. They shall be of the sand proof design.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 15
Frames and blades shall be 2 mm thick stainless steel to resist abrasion from sand.
Blades shall be 35° drainable type, spaced at 89 mm centers. Jambs shall be constructed with
integral downspouts for carrying water from the blades to the sill.
The frames shall be 150 mm deep and shall have a face angle for flush surface mounting
(flange).
Insect screens of the corrosion resistant type shall be provided and fixed behind all intakes and
discharge louvers, grilles and openings wherever these are located at outside of the building.
The screens shall be fixed for easy removal and for periodic cleaning or replacement.
4.1.6.18 Birdscreens
Bird screens shall be of 15 mm opening, 2,7 mm thick galvanized steel wire.
4.1.6.19 Filters
Filters shall be provided on all mechanical ventilation and fresh air intake air systems. The type
and efficiency of the filters shall be suitable for its intended application. The filter media shall be
vermin-proof, non-hygroscopic and flame-retardant (UL class II).
Primary filtration equipment shall be selected with particular emphasis on large dust holding
capacity. The media shall be pleated non-woven cotton fabric type with an average filtration
efficiency of 30% based on ASHRAE test standard 52-76. It shall have an average arrestance
of 92% in accordance with that standard. The effective filter media shall not be less than 7
times the filter face area. The media support shall be a welded wire grid.
The enclosing frame shall be rigid, heavy-duty, high wet-strength beverage board with diagonal
support members on both sides.
Holding frames shall be factory fabricated of 1,6 mm thick galvanized steel and shall be
equipped with gaskets and four spring type positive sealing fasteners that can be operated
without tools. A differential pressure sensor, set at the stated dirty filter pressure drop shall be
provided on each filter and shall initiate an alarm on the associated control panel when that
value is reached. That sensor shall be used to indicate filter pressure drop on a continuous
basis.
4.1.6.20 Vibration Isolators
Each fan and blower shall be provided with appropriate vibration isolators to reduce vibrations
resulting from unit operation.
Unless specified otherwise in this specification, in case of free-standing units, the vibration
isolators shall be double deflection spring type isolator having a minimum static deflection as
per unit manufacturers recommendation, mounted on a steel base with rubber pad.
Suspended units shall be provided with spring hangers, each containing a steel spring and 8
mm deflection rubber or neoprene element and shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing
that passes through the hanger box.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 16
4.1.7 Thermal Insulation
All air conditioning ductwork, located outdoors or indoors, shall be insulated with rigid panel
fiberglass insulation, having a density of 48 kg/m 3.
For outdoors, final insulation thickness shall be 50 mm, with all joints tightly butt and scattered.
All the insulated supply and return air ducts shall be wrapped with canvas cloth with weather
protection and two coats of vapor barrier.
All the exposed insulated ducts shall have cladding of 0.8mm thick aluminum sheet.
4.1.8 Equipment Identification
Contractor shall supply and install appropriate permanent engraved identification labels on all
equipment supplied including for air flow direction indication flow (supply, return and exhaust)
on ducts. Labels for equipment located outdoors shall be of stainless steel engraved.
4.1.9 Testing and Air Balancing
On completion of installation, Contractor shall operate the equipment and set all registers,
diffusers, dampers, drives etc. so as to provide proper air flows and other conditions required
for the purpose and shall make all necessary tests and adjustments to the satisfaction of the
Engineer/Owner and shall leave the systems functional in perfect operating condition, all in
accordance with ASHRAE recommendations.
A balancing report in triplicate tabulating the final readings of air flows through all fans,
dampers, louvers, grilles and diffusers for all systems shall be provided by the Contractor on
completion of tests & adjustments. The report shall include for each location, air static
pressure, fan RPM, motor current draw, room temperatures, supply and return duct
temperatures, mixed air and outside air temperatures, humidity conditions etc. Contractor shall
submit for engineer/owner’s review and approval, the procedure for testing and balancing which
shall be based on ASHRAE recommendations.
4.1.10 Control System
All the supplied equipment shall be complete with the required power, control and monitoring for
standalone operation and with all requisite compatibility to interface with the distributed control
system (DCS) or station SCADA system.
HVAC power panel and control panel for each building shall include breaker for dual incoming
feeders with ammeter & voltmeter and indications for power supply,
MCCB’s/MCB’s/Contactors/Relays as required for various components such as Package
units/Fans/MFD/Sensors etc., Under Voltage relays, DDC controller, operator terminal. Control
panel shall include all control relays, modules, controllers etc.,
Building Management system by connection of all the HVAC panels shall be provided with
central workstation and interface panel. Workstation shall include 32” LED monitor, central
processor unit, keyboard, mouse and printer for continuous alarm and graphics, Graphics
based operation of the HVAC system, trend viewer, scheduling, alarm management, log viewer
etc., Workstation shall have all the operations in the various HVAC panels.
016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 17
Power and control wiring inside the panel shall be with copper conductor, PVC insulated, heat
resistant cables upto 105 deg C, 0.6/1 KV with minimum cross section of 4 sq.mm and 1.5
sq.mm respectively.
HVAC system shall be fully automatic in operation to achieve the desired room conditions, duty
unit changeover to standby and periodic changeover to standby units to maintain equal run
hours for all the units. Controller shall be capable to monitor, control and display of various
temperature & humidity. The control system shall be of microprocessor based DDC controls
with BACnet. 10% spare installation space and IO modules of both analogue & digital shall be
provided. The DDC controller shall be equipped with a battery-backed real-time clock. Startup
of Package units and control panel shall be carried out by the manufacturer’s representatives.
Each DDC controller shall have as minimum of the following operations:
a. Each duty and standby unit including compressor, fans start & stop command.
b. Automatic changeover to the standby unit during fault in the duty unit.
c. Cyclic changeover to standby unit.
d. Each breaker and other electrical components trip monitoring.
e. Monitoring of equal run hours for each unit.
f. Monitoring of various system temperatures and room temperature / humidity.
g. Volt free contacts for interface with fire alarm system.
h. 4-20 mA for the various room temperature / humidity for remote monitoring.
i. Volt free contacts for air conditioning faulty (Grouping of various air conditioning alarms
together) and ventilation faulty (Grouping of various ventilation alarms together) for
remote monitoring.
HVAC Control panel fascia shall have as minimum of the following listed indications
a. Incoming power supply (R, Y, B),
b. Run / Off / Trip indication for various compressors, blower motors, condenser fans
and all other fans.
c. Air flow fail for each blower and fans.
d. Open & close indication for MD & MFD.
e. Common fault for each system.
f. Compressor HP/LP alarm.
g. Air flow fail and Fire alarm.
h. Control supply / DDC fail.

016403-2000-47ES-7000A 01 July 2024 18
i. Filter dirty
j. Unit power failure
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply of mechanical equipment, shall include the items listed below. It’s the responsibility
of the Contractor ensure the coordination of the engineering and of the procurement, testing &
commissioning including reliability test, maintenance during warranty period in order to
guarantee compatibility and completeness of the overall installation.
The Contractor shall provide mandatory spares, as listed in Volume 1, Section 6: Schedule of
Prices.
Bidder shall include completed and priced list of all recommended spares with bid. (Volume 1,
Section 6, Schedules of Prices). Contractor shall supply recommended spares which may be
needed during a 5-year period of operation, under normal operating conditions, if instructed by
the Employer.
Contractor shall hand over to the Employer all special and large tools used for initial erection of
the work and which are necessary for its dismantling, adjustment and maintenance.
GCCIA

SUBSTATION SCADA
016403-3000-4SES-6200 Rev.01
July 2024
SUBSTATION SCADA # Date Page
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 2
LIST OF CONTENT FOR SUBSTATION CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (DCS/SCADA)

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
1 SUPERVISORY, CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM ............................... 4
1.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................... 4
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 5
2 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULES ................................................................................. 6
3 DCS/SCADA DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 6
3.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................. 6
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 6
3.3 DCS/SCADA ARCHITECTURE ..................................................................................... 7
3.4 DESIGN CONSEDERATION AND PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 8
3.5 IEC 61850 REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 9
3.6 SECURITY DESIGN CONSIDERATION ..................................................................... 11
4 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 12
4.1 DCS/SCADA FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 12
4.2 BAY CONTROL AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS ..................................................... 13
4.3 INTERLOCKING .......................................................................................................... 14
5 EQUIPMENT HARDWARE & FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................... 14
5.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 14
5.2 STATION LEVEL EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 15
5.2.1 Station Computers..................................................................................................... 15
5.2.2 Operator or HMI Workstations .................................................................................. 16
5.2.3 Gateway...................................................................................................................... 16
5.2.4 Laptop Workstation ................................................................................................... 17
5.2.5 Engineering Workstation: ......................................................................................... 17
5.2.6 Redundant Station LAN............................................................................................. 18
5.2.7 Router/Firewall ........................................................................................................... 18
5.2.8 GPS Clock System..................................................................................................... 18
5.2.9 Dual Field LAN ........................................................................................................... 18
5.2.10 Network Storage Device ............................................................................................ 19
5.2.11 Color LaserJet Printer ............................................................................................... 19
5.2.12 Other Equipment ....................................................................................................... 19
5.3 BAY LEVEL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................... 19
5.3.1 Bay Control Unit – General ....................................................................................... 20
5.3.2 BCU Design ................................................................................................................ 20
5.3.3 Input/output Facilities: .............................................................................................. 20
5.3.4 Analogue Inputs ........................................................................................................ 21
5.3.5 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................. 21
5.3.6 Pulse Counter Signal Inputs ..................................................................................... 22
5.3.7 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................... 22
5.3.8 Dummy Control .......................................................................................................... 22
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 3
5.4 FURNITURE ................................................................................................................ 22

5.4.1 Workstation Desk ...................................................................................................... 22
5.4.2 Chairs ......................................................................................................................... 23
5.4.3 Storage Cabinets ....................................................................................................... 23
6 DCS/SCADA SOFTWARE & HMI SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 23
6.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 23
6.2 REAL TIME DATABASE............................................................................................. 24
6.3 INTEGRATED DATABASE MANAGEMENT .............................................................. 24
6.4 CONTROLS & COMMAND EXECUTION ................................................................... 25
6.5 ANALOG MEASUREMENT HANDLING ..................................................................... 25
6.6 EVENT PROCESSING & EVENT LIST ....................................................................... 26
6.7 ALARM PROCESSING & ALARM LIST ..................................................................... 26
6.8 ENGINEERING FACILITIES ....................................................................................... 27
6.9 VDU & HMI DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 28
6.9.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 28
6.9.2 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................... 29
6.9.3 Graphical SLD Station Diagram and Station Control .............................................. 29
6.9.4 DCS/SCADA Equipment Monitoring & Display ........................................................ 29
6.9.5 Real Time Trends ....................................................................................................... 30
6.10 HAND DRESSING & SAFETY TAGGING ................................................................... 30
6.11 Historical Data Storage & Retrieval .......................................................................... 31
7 SYSTEM SIZING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 31
8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND AVAILABILITY ....................................................... 32
8.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 32
8.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ......................................................................................... 32
8.2.1 Test Conditions ......................................................................................................... 32
8.2.2 Normal Activity .......................................................................................................... 32
8.2.3 High Activity............................................................................................................... 33
8.2.4 Crisis .......................................................................................................................... 33
8.3 TIMES FOR DATA ACQUISITION AND MAN MACHINE INTERFACE ...................... 34
8.3.1 Data Acquisition and Control.................................................................................... 34
8.3.2 Human Machine Interface ......................................................................................... 34
8.4 DCS/SCADA OPERATING TIMES ............................................................................. 34
8.5 HARDWARE RESOURCE CAPACITY/UTILIZATION ................................................ 34
8.6 SYSTEM AVAILABILITY ............................................................................................ 35
9 INSPECTION AND TESTING ...................................................................................... 35
9.1 Type Test .................................................................................................................... 35
9.2 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) ................................................................................ 35
9.3 Site Acceptance Test (SAT) ...................................................................................... 36
10 Commissioning.......................................................................................................... 36
11 WARRANTY................................................................................................................ 37
12 MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE & LOCAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS ........... 37
13 DOCUMENTATION/DRAWINGS ................................................................................ 38
14 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS FURNISHED WITH TENDER ............................ 38
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 4
1 SUPERVISORY, CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
1.1 General
This section applies to the distributed control systems (DCS)/SCADA and Cyber Security
systems, required for new GIS substations developed by Gulf Cooperation Council
Interconnection Authority (GCCIA).
This Technical Specification provides requirements for the design, manufacture, testing, delivery,
erection, commissioning and warranty of the complete DCS system within the requirements as
described herewith. While the details of scope of supply of DCS/SCADA works are specified
separately in scope of works, the supplier is bound to provide complete works, even if all the
necessary equipment or services to meet the requirements of the specification are not mentioned
specifically in details of works.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
ADC Analog Digital Converter
BCD Binary coded Decimal
BCU Bay Control Unit
CB Circuit Breaker
CCITT International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
CFC Continuous Function Chart
CIP Critical Infrastructure Protection
CPU Central Processing Unit
CT Current Transformer
DCS Distributed Control System
DDE Dynamic Data Exchange
GCCIA Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnecting Authority
DMZ Demilitarized Zone
EMF Electro Magnetic Field
EMI Electro Magnetic Interference
EMS Energy Management System
eRSTP Enhanced RSTP
FAT Factory Acceptance Tests
FDS Functional Description of System
FE Fast Ethernet
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Events
GPS Global Positioning System
HMI Human Machine Interface
HV High Voltage
ICD IED Capability Description
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
ISO International Standards Organization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union- Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 5
L/R Local/Remote
LAN Local Area Network
LCC Local Control Cubicle
LV Low Voltage
MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR Mean Time to Restore
NAS Network Access Storage
NERC North American Electric Reliability Corporation
NTP Network Time Protocol
ODBC Open Database Connectivity
OPC OLE (Object Linking & Embedding) For Process control
OSI Open System Interconnections
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnection
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol
PSL Profile Scripting Language
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SAT System Acceptance Tests
SBO Select Before Operate
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCD Substation Configuration Description File
SFTP Screened Foiled Twisted pair
SLD Single Line Diagram
SOE Sequence of Events
TCP/IP Transmission Control protocol/ Internet Protocol
TOC Taking Over Certificate
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
VDU Visual Display Unit
VT Voltage Transformer
WAN Wide Area Network
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

The details of various standards listed in this document are as specified in brief
IEC 60068 Environmental testing
IEC 60255 Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC 60870 Tele-control equipment and systems
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61131 Programmable controllers
IEC 61850 Communication networks and systems in substations
IEC 61968 Application integration at electric utilities
IEC 61970 Energy management system application program interface
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 6
IEC 62351 Power systems management and associated information exchange -

Data and communication security
IEC 81346 Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial
products Structuring principles and reference designations
ISO 9001 Requirements of a Quality Management System
ISO 27002 Code of Practice for Information Security Management
CIP Standards Critical Infrastructure Protection-Cyber Security
3 DCS/SCADA DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The DCS/SCADA equipment/components will be installed in high voltage electricity substations

which are subject to rise in earth potential at times of system faults. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage occurring to equipment/components.
All metal parts, metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth as per
GCCIA standard requirements.
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The DCS/SCADA System shall meet the following general requirements:
The DCS system shall be designed as a common integrated system enabling complete substation
control and monitoring. This shall include the common services within the substation viz DC,
LVAC, HVAC, telecom, fire protection etc. as well as redundant interfaces to telecom system for
connectivity to GCCIA control centers/ Control centers of other utilities, if required.
The DCS system shall provide complete substation monitoring and control by means of modern
HMI facility.
The DCS system shall integrate with the substation Bay control, protection, Point on wave
controllers and metering systems IEDs in all voltage levels and additionally any other network
enabled auxiliary smart systems/common IEDs within the substation over LAN. All configuration,
maintenance, configuration file upload, download and diagnostics of all devices connected to LAN
shall be carried out from the engineering workstation. All software shall be licensed and preferably
perpetual.
System level redundancy criteria of N-1 shall consider in general, failure of any single system or
component, connection or DC supply shall not impact redundant system and vice versa. The
following fault tolerance design concepts shall be maintained: Failure of any single system or
component shall not cause interruption to the DCS system either from Station Level or from
Control Centre thereby no loss of data.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 7
i. Failure or removal of any single component of the DCS shall not lead to degradation of any
of the safety and security relevant functions of the system.
ii. Failure or removal of any single component of the DCS shall not lead to mal-operation of
the DCS or any other component of the DCS.
iii. Redundant equipment shall not be installed in the same cubicle and independently powered
by DC 1 and DC 2 system in order to avoid common mode of failure.
iv. No manual procedure shall be necessary to synchronize between the redundant computers
during restoration of the failed computer
Given the critical nature of the DCS/SCADA it is essential that its architecture provide a well-
engineered and sound basis for operation, maintenance and future expansion of the substation.
Therefore, it shall be possible to alter, extend or upgrade any element of the substation by the
simple addition of hardware at bay level and through software configuration of database at station
level without degrading performance. The design and performance shall include necessary
provisions for signal allocation, switches, ports, licenses, display mimic etc. for future expansion.
The DCS/SCADA System shall be designed as Distributed Control system and design shall take
into account the requirements of control, metering without interface transducers, hard wired
interlocking, monitoring, voltage regulation etc. as detailed in the specifications.
The offered DCS/SCADA system shall be fully capable to handle all patches /upgrades released
by the manufacturer in future till the life time of equipment. Further, installation of any patches
shall not affect reliability/availability or degrade performance of equipment at any instance. In
general lifetime of the system shall be twenty years or more.
Other requirements identified during the detailed engineering stage to achieve with the
DCS/SCADA system objectives and functions for GCCIA HV substation shall be considered.
3.3 DCS/SCADA ARCHITECTURE
The DCS/SCADA system shall be designed as fully integrated system to integrate independently
controlled operation subsystems viz. BCUs, Point on wave controllers, Protection Relays,
metering,
Servers/HMI, gateways etc. The DCS/SCADA system shall be based on internationally accepted
distributed functional architecture based on IEC 61850 Ed. 2 PRP communication. While, Bidders
are encouraged to offer architecture designed to enhance redundancy and performance of the
complete system, GCCIA reserves the right to choose the architecture based on their
requirements.
The DCS/SCADA Architecture shall be designed as Distributed computer-based Control System,

consisting of four largely independent functional entities/Subsystems: Station Level Subsystem,
Bay Level Subsystem, SCADA Level Subsystem, and DMZ subsystem. All four shall be
independent but interconnected via redundant data communication network(s) to form unique
integrated control system.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 8
The switchgear system deployed in field utilizes one and a half breaker scheme. Hence, the Bay
Level Subsystem shall consist of microprocessor-based numerical Bay Control Units (BCUs)
dedicated for each CB of a substation dia and connected to redundant Field LAN network (Inter-
Bay Bus) and a set of common BCUs. In addition, BCUs and Protection relays installed for each
bay/branch/dia shall also constitute part of bay level subsystem. The BCUs, from functional point
of view shall be used as the I/O terminal units for both Station Level and SCADA Level
Subsystems.
The Station Level Subsystem in principle shall consist of redundant dedicated Front-end Servers
(Station Controllers) and /or two HMI workstations (Operator workstation), engineering
workstation) with associated peripheral equipment such as GPS System, hardcopy printer,
network storage system etc., all interconnected via redundant Ethernet based Station LAN
Network. This subsystem shall provide the real-time Control and Monitoring of the entire
Substation. The Station Level subsystem shall be interconnected to Bay Level Subsystem via
redundant Field Communication Network, which, from station point of view represents I/O
terminal units in respect to substation plant equipment.
The SCADA Level Subsystem shall consist of redundant Gateways connected from one side to
redundant Station LAN and from other side to redundant data communication links to GCCIA
SCADA Control and other control centers as required via external telecommunication network. It
shall be possible to control and monitor the substation from Control Centers even when both
station Front-end servers are shut down or failed.
There shall be separate redundant Ethernet network comprising of Station LANs, Field LANs &
DMZ. The redundant Field LAN comprising of bay level subsystem connecting both field LAN
network on fiber optic. The redundant Station LAN comprises of station level equipment. The
connection of IEDs and station devices to switches shall be 100/1000Mbps FX (electrical
connections are acceptable provided the switches and devices are in same or adjacent panel).
The Station LANs and Field LANs shall be interconnected on 1Gbps FX network. The redundant
DMZ LAN shall comprise of Cyber security equipment which shall be connected to station LAN.
Please refer conceptual DCS architecture enclosed with tender documents for more details.
The network redundancy protocol deployed shall be compliant to latest edition of PRP with rings
of Field/ station/ DMZ LAN switches in self-healing RSTP network. Usage of any propriety
protocol is not acceptable. The number of IEDs connected to each switch and the number of
switches shall be optimized to have minimum latency in real time data transmission for time
critical applications and also to achieve zero loss of data with zero recovery time in case of
node/link failure.
3.4 DESIGN CONSEDERATION AND PRECAUTIONS
The DCS/SCADA system design shall consider the following design requirements:
The DCS/SCADA shall provide complete Control and Monitoring of substation by means of
modern HMI facilities, replacing fully conventional station level and voltage level control
boards/panels, with exception of local controls installed in switchgear or LCC (Local Control
Cubicles) panels.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 9
The DCS/SCADA from the Control / Monitoring Structure point of view shall be implemented in 4
levels of control structure as multi-level control system as below:
A. Local Control from Local Control Cubicle - Level 0

B. Bay Control Level from local HMI in the Bay Control Units (BCU) - Level 1
C. Station Control Level from Operator HMI Workstations - Level 2
D. Supervisory Control Level from remote SCADA Control Centers - Level 3
The IEDs monitoring functions shall be integrated within the unique DCS/SCADA system. In
principle, it shall be possible to monitor the real time operation of protection relays and BCUs.
In order to provide immunity against Electrical/Magnetic interference in High Voltage Substation

environment for both Station and Field communication networks, fiber optic cabling should be
used. Exceptionally, for Station network, connecting devices within the same Control Room
environment, a SFTP Cat 6 cabling shall be accepted provided the EMI standard requirements
are complied.
The communication protocol for protection relays and other IEDs integration shall be industrial
Ethernet based IEC 61850 protocol of latest edition. The alarms from protection relays shall be
subject to GCCIA approval for each substation during the engineering stage.
Time Synchronization of all DCS/SCADA Equipment/IEDs shall be achieved using IEC 61850
NTP protocol standard using GPS satellite radio clocks as Stratum-1 Time Servers to achieve a
time accuracy of 1ms between the synchronized devices. In case of failure of GPS Clock systems,
Stratum-2 timeserver shall be available.
Configuration, maintenance and diagnostics of the complete DCS/SCADA system equipment

shall be carried out from either of the two HMI and /or Engineering Workstations and portable
maintenance Laptop PC. All necessary diagnostic/configuration software from OEM with
licenses, with remote login facility from either of the Workstations to all system equipment over
the network (such as BCUs, IEDs Servers, Gateways, managed Network Switches, GPS
Receivers, Print Server etc.) shall be provided. It shall be possible also to monitor the internal
operational temperature of components using the software provided by the vendor.
In the DCS system where duplication of equipment is required, main and duplicate equipment
shall be housed in different cubicle and clearly labeled. They shall be powered from different
sources to ensure the avoidance of common mode failure. It shall be possible to allow either main
or duplicate equipment to be set up and tested independently of the other to ensure that
equipment are in working order.
It shall not be possible for failure of any bay unit, communications channel or peripheral
equipment to jeopardize the continued working of the rest of the system.
3.5 IEC 61850 REQUIREMENTS
The definition of the IEC 61850 communication profile shall assure that the offered solution
complies to the minimum requirements specified in the latest edition of standard and also shall
ensures that the offered architecture can be realized with the offered products and their
implemented services. The data modeling is not specifically listed but the manufacturer shall
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 10
comply fully with the logical nodes described in the standard for the devices where they are
required. As a minimum all the mandatory data of the used logical nodes must be supported.
The substation automation system shall be fully compliant to IEC 61850 ed. 2 meaning all
equipment like protection, computers, gateways, IEDs etc; has to be compliant to the IEC 61850.
Type test certificates from ISO accredited 3rd Part laboratory shall be submitted for both Client
and Server..
It shall be possible to integrate any 3rd party IEDs from any manufacturer compliant to IEC 61850
standard in the DCS/SCADA system. The DCS/SCADA supplier in such a case shall be
responsible for the complete integration, testing and commissioning to the satisfaction of GCCIA.
The communication services in IEC 61850 substation communication model shall provide
following services as a minimum:
a. Basis exchange services including redundancy handling

b. Dataset with cyclic, time integrated and spontaneous trigger options
c. Unbuffered/Buffered Reporting
d. SBO control with enhanced security
e. Time synchronization
All control and protection units shall contain an optical-fibre Ethernet interface for connection to
the IEC 61850 PRP communication network.
Ethernet network for the IEC 61850 has to be build using external switches to ensure
independency of bay level devices and Switches integrated into the control or protection device
to make them PRP compatible are not acceptable.
Ethernet switches that fulfill the hardened requirements concerning temperature, EMC and
redundant power supply (110 V DC from the station battery) suitable to be Substation
environment proof shall be provided. They shall comply to IEC 61850-3 and the use of Ethernet
Hubs is not permitted The Ethernet switches shall be of managed type and support priority
tagging, VLAN.
The network shall be designed keeping the latency for time critical applications to a minimum. It
is necessary to have physically separated networks for high and low voltage sections. The offered
solution shall support multiple IEC 61850 bus configurations.
All different equipment of the DCS/SCADA shall share a common database in order to ensure
data integrity with possibility to configure and distribute the database from either of the
HMI/Engineering workstation using Integrated Engineering Tool supporting IEC 61850 standard
configuration files such as SCD, ICD.
Numerical relays shall be integrated using IEC 61850 protocol standard latest edition for real-time
monitoring. Any deviations from this requirement shall be stated in the offer. The real-time
protection signals for monitoring in DCS/SCADA shall be finalized at the engineering stage and
shall supplement the hard-wired signals if applicable in the BCUs. Data sharing between control
and protection shall be limited to non-critical measuring or event recording functions, but functions
otherwise is completely independent.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 11
Time synchronization: SNTP shall be directly connected to IEC 61850 bus with time accuracy of
1ms. IEDs must be able to get time synchronization from at least two independent SNTP time
servers to support a redundant architecture of the time synchronization
Reporting: Buffered reports. After loss of communication between station and bay level device -
transfer of buffered events from bay to station level, therefore requirement for event buffers to
store at least 1000events.
At least 6 clients running at the same time shall be supported by the bay level IEDs.
3.6 SECURITY DESIGN CONSIDERATION
While, the offered DCS/SCADA system shall be designed in consideration with Latest Cyber
security edition of NERC/CIP/ISO 27002/IEC 62351/ISA99 standards without compromising
performance or reliability of the equipment and the following requirements shall also be
considered while designing:
DCS/SCADA system shall be designed into multiple security zones with each level or network
divided into different security zones.
All components of the system shall harden according to well-known tools and best-practice
guides. For example, unused services and unused ports shall be closed. The products shall be
tested using state-of-the-art commercial and open-source security robustness testing tools.
The substation automation system perimeter shall be protected by Firewalls. Firewalls shall be
placed on network boundaries and interaction between DCS/SCADA system in substation and
outside world shall be limited to DMZ level.
All latest security patches, service packs and upgrades shall be installed semi automatically from
dedicated equipment duly protected by firewalls. System shall allow patching of all system
components during normal system operation with no or little impact on availability of system.
The equipment shall permit access to network drives only upon confirmation that the contents are
“clean”. Unnecessary user accounts, default users, programs, network protocols and services
shall be verifiably removed before system goes productive. Latest patches at the time of
energization shall be installed. Also, it shall be contractor responsibility to fix critical vulnerabilities
till the substation handing over period.
All sensitive data shall be stored or transmitted in encrypted form only. System shall be able to
perform integrity checks for all applications, files, executables and configuration
All products in DCS/SCADA system shall have possibility to log all security-relevant user activity
such as user log-in, log-out, change of parameters or configurations, and updates to software or
firmware. For each event, date and time, user, event ID, outcome and source of event shall be
logged.
Security Event shall be collected on the central place it should be possible to analyse all the
security events and a report shall be generated.
Verified Anti-virus or other malicious software prevention tools shall detect, prevent, deter, and
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 12
mitigate the introduction, exposure, and propagation of malware.
The system shall allow user authentication and authorization on an individual user level. A
dedicated authentication server that facilitates authentication of an entity that attempts to access
the network within or outside the substation shall be provided. All authorized as well as
unauthorized log in/ log out attempts in the system shall be evented, routed through authentication
server and multiple failed login attempts shall be alarmed The provided authentication server can
reside on a computer, network switch or any other network server. A back up authentication
server shall also be provided to take over the duties in an event of failure of main authentication
server.
User accounts shall be managed freely, allowing creating, editing and deleting user accounts,
and defining usernames and passwords according to the policies.
It is essential that all servers with access to external network shall be located in separate part
using DMZ. The DMZ shall be redundantly connected to the DCS/SCADA station LAN via
Firewalls. Dedicated authentication servers shall be located within DMZ LAN for access from
GCCIA networks through web services (recommended IEC 62351 standards) in order to facilitate
plant monitoring (view mode only), file transfer, configuration of DCS/SCADA system including
IEDs and system diagnostic purposes.
Password management control preferably using LDAP shall be done for all IEDs and other
devices connected in DCS System
Further, compliance to IEC62351 standard for handling the security of TC 57 series of protocols
including IEC 60870-5 series, IEC 61850 series, IEC 61970 series, IEC 61968 & ISO 27002 series
shall be complied. The different security objectives include authentication of data transfer through
digital signatures, ensuring only authenticated access, prevention of eavesdropping, prevention
of playback and spoofing, and intrusion detection.
Licenses are preferred to be perpetual type but in exceptional cases if not available, min 3 years
licensing shall be offered.
Subscription and support shall be offered for the DCS equipment till the issuance of final taking
over of the substation by GCCIA
Please also refer cyber security guidelines given in GCCIA Cyber Security Language Rev01. Pdf
document enclosed with the tender.
4 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 DCS/SCADA FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The DCS/SCADA system based on real time operating system, shall have functions, which
include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Switching control and status monitoring functions

b. Display of overall SLD & individual bay level SLD.
c. Measurements monitoring and alarming.
d. Network and system Alarms monitoring/logging
e. Event monitoring/logging
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 13
f. Interlocking functions for switchgear operations

g. Synch-check functions for both synchronous & asynchronous CB closing
h. Transformer tap changer functions via AVR relays (if applicable)
i. Sequence of events (SOE) recording
j. Manual-dressing of states and measurements
k. Operational Safety tagging of HV devices
l. Archiving of Process & System data such as Events, Measurements, Energy Values,
System messages to historical database and retrieval using customized reports and using
3rd party spreadsheet applications such as Excel or other ODBC/OPC/DDE compliant
applications.
m. Trending of Real-time and historical process values
n. Hand dressing /substitute of statuses/measurements values in real-time & historical
database
o. Bay blocking, tele control block
p. Maintenance mode
q. Test mode
r. Condition Monitoring of equipment for asset management
s. IEDs operation & monitoring functions
t. Disturbance/Fault Record Analysis from IEDs
u. Diagnostics, real-time data simulation and maintenance functions
v. Topology processing for Energized, Grounded, De-energized states of buses
w. Remote supervisory control and monitoring from the SCADA Control Centers
x. Reporting function to create daily, weekly monthly & yearly reports
y. All other functions as specified in the subsequent sections of Specifications enclosed with
tender documents
In principle, all the DCS/SCADA functionalities required for reliable and safe control and
monitoring of the complete substation from the Station Level as the main control point shall be
provided. The control and monitoring capabilities from the SCADA Control Centers shall be
limited to the scope and requirements of the application functions implemented in those control
centers for the complete network.
The control capabilities from BCUs (Bay Control Level) shall be limited to the functionalities
related to the particular CB and Dia only.
4.2 BAY CONTROL AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS
Bay control and monitoring functions shall include as a minimum the following:
a. Bay level control

b. Data acquisition
c. Bay level interlocking using PSL & PLC programs compliant to IEC61131 standard
d. Bay level supervision
e. Station wide interlocking between BCUs
f. Alarm/Event logging/Buffering of data
g. Time stamping of real-time signals
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 14
h. Protection functions as specified
4.3 INTERLOCKING
The operational interlocking function shall provide for opening/closing operation of circuit
breakers and disconnectors only when certain conditions are fulfilled. The software interlocking
function shall be implemented on all control Levels – local BCU HMI and DCS/SCADA workstation
HMI. The interlocking logic, in addition to the status of relevant switching and reset devices,
should consider the valid position of relevant selector switches (L/R, BCU/DCS/SCADA) as well
as quality status due to failure of components or communication links to devices.
All interlocking function shall include all hardwired interlock conditions as a minimum. Further, the
interlocking system is to be designed in such a way that testing is possible during normal
operation. It should be noted that implementation of software interlocking does not exclude in any
way a hardwired interlocking scheme associated with switchgear equipment.
The operational interlocking conditions shall be dynamic and checked by the BCUs. The operator
can only execute the remote command (BCU/HMI/CC) if the device is not blocked and no
interlocking conditions are violated. After command execution, the operator shall receive a
message, either about the new switching position or about the refused switching.
Interlock logic shall be provided within the BCUs in series with the hard wired logic scheme as
per the final approved interlock logic diagram.
Service interlocks shall be provided for remote operations and maintenance interlocks shall be
provided for local operations in LCC. However, the service/maintenance switching interlock
conditions shall comply with the requirements from the GIS switchgear manufacturer/GCCIA
operation and details submitted during engineering stage for approval.
Interlock conditions inhibiting control of a plant item shall be clearly indicated and advised to the
operator. Relevant inter-lock information shall be readily selectable on the HMI for analysis.
5 EQUIPMENT HARDWARE & FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 GENERAL
The design of all system components shall be such, as to ensure satisfactory operation in an
electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations.
All equipment shall be provided with built in fail-safe function such that in case of any failure,
equipment can reach safe mode without affecting other components/equipment in network.
All DCS/SCADA equipment and their components offered shall be of hardened industrial grade
from GCCIA approved manufacturer with reliable service record in similar applications compliant
to substation environmental conditions with satisfactory operating temperature up to min 60°C.
All DCS/SCADA equipment proposed in the bid offer are subject to technical evaluation and
approval by GCCIA during the design stage after contract award.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 15
5.2 STATION LEVEL EQUIPMENT
The station level equipment mainly comprises of:

a. Redundant Station computers (Front-end Servers)
b. Redundant Operator HMI
c. Engineering workstation
d. Redundant Gateways
e. Redundant Station level LAN and Inter- Bay LAN
f. Redundant DMZ LAN
g. Redundant Firewalls with DPI for IEC 104 links to GCCIA control center
h. Redundant Firewalls with DPI for Cyber security operation centre links from DMZ LAN
i. A set of PCS with VMs installed for CS services Viz. Jump Server, Patch Management,
Syslog, Antivirus, Whitelisting, Read Write Domain controller, Intrusion detection, NMS,
Image backup and Restoration (Centralized backup for all PCs)
j. Network equipment such as switches, Red boxes as required.
k. GPS Clock System
l. Hardcopy/Report Printer
The hardware specification of resources of all computers offered should be of the latest available
at the time of offer as validated by the DCS/SCADA manufacturer and subject to approval by
GCCIA. The resources such as processor type/speed, memory type, number of USB ports,
PCI/EISA slots, network ports, serial/parallel ports etc. in general, shall be consistent in all
computers to minimize the maintenance level of spares, with exception of physical memory size,
disk capacity, which shall be based on the system size (IEDs / IOs) with future bay extension as
specified in SLDs and to achieve performance requirements.
One set of rack console having one 17” Flat LED monitor with KVM controller for Keyboard &
Optical scroll Mouse with all required cables /accessories shall be provided and installed in CS
panels for the purpose of maintenance/diagnostics/administration of any of the Station and
Gateway computing platforms.
DCS/SCADA system integrated configuration (source) database shall be common to all the
operator client workstations stored in redundant servers or on external NAS disk arrays.
All operator actions such as data entry, alarm acknowledgement/erasing, safety tagging, controls
etc. at any of the two operator HMI workstations shall be automatically updated in redundant
server database and updated on all workstations.
5.2.1 Station Computers
The Station Computers shall be able to perform the following functions as a minimum:
a. Acquisition of all the real time status /Value management

b. Communication with 61850 Master
c. Analogue Value Calculation
d. Event/Analog value recording
e. Self-Diagnosis
f. Coordinated control functions
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 16
Redundant Station controller’s subsystem shall control the DCS/SCADA system and drive the
workstations and peripherals. One of the station computers shall operate the system in the “on
line/Hot” state, while the other as a “redundant standby” state. The standby computer shall be
continuously updated and shall immediately take over the DCS/SCADA duties without interruption
or transfer mechanism should the on-line one fails. No manual procedure shall be necessary to
synchronize between the redundant computers while restoration of the failed computer. The
bidder should clearly state in their offer for which applications that the redundant station
computers will be configured in “Hot-Hot” mode.
Please refer scope of works for replacement of servers as gateways in case of emergency.
5.2.2 Operator or HMI Workstations
The operator workstation computers provide the human machine interface (HMI) between the
operators and the DCS/SCADA system. Redundant operator workstations shall be provided.
Each operator workstation shall be independent of the other workstation and failure of one
operator workstation shall not impact the second workstation. Either of the workstations shall be
available for operation and control of the plant, and it shall be possible to operate simultaneously
from both workstations.
The HMI Workstation shall be able to perform following functions as a minimum:
a. Human Machine Interface

b. Self-Diagnosis
c. Database Maintenance (Generation, Editing, download)
d. Archiving & Data storage
Each workstation shall be equipped with two high-definition visual display units of minimum 24-
inch, alphanumeric keyboard and optical scroll mouse.
5.2.3 Gateway
Redundant gateways shall be provided for communication between DCS/SCADA System and
GCCIA control centre /DCS. In general, each gateway shall be able to perform the following
minimum requirements:
a. Acquisition of all the real time status /Value management,

b. Communication with 61850 Master i.e communication with IEDs,
c. Communication with Control centers (Supporting Master/Slave mode),
d. Communication with DCS Gateways (if Applicable),
e. Self-Diagnosis.
In addition, as per project requirements, gateways shall also support redundant communication
on IEC 60870-5-104 protocol with any other utility control centre wherever applicable. Gateways
shall be capable to communicate both in master mode as well as in Slave mode. Gateway shall
support minimum 4 control center on redundant links.
From the hardware requirements, Gateways shall be of the same model and specification as
Station controllers specified in 5.2.1 above and as per requirements specified in technical
schedules.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 17
5.2.4 Laptop Workstation
The laptop workstation offered shall be of the latest model/specification at the time of delivery
and subject to approval. They shall be equipped with a suitable dual ethernet interfaces, VGA,
HDMI source input, modem/adapter interface for remote login and shall be supplied before
starting any commissioning activities
The offered Laptop shall be provided with all tools and software required to achieve the following
minimum requirements:
a. IEC104 simulation software (latest version) to run under Windows platform to simulate as
RTU or master station
b. IEC 61850 based equipment simulator and Process Simulator from OEM for on-line
simulation of an IED
c. Network/protocol analyzer with facility to capture network messages and analyze /measure
bandwidth/performance with facility to print the results
d. Downloading and uploading configuration of the system
e. Dressing points in the system manually
f. Two dongles (if applicable) are to be supplied with the maintenance unit
g. Program entry
h. Substation Data monitoring
i. Program testing
j. Fault tracing
k. Program amendment
l. Graphical program documentation
m. Loading and dumping of programs
n. Commissioning
o. Reading of values in the data base/study of substation parameters
p. Changing peripheral parameters
q. Any other service/diagnostic tools required for the maintenance/trouble shooting of the
offered DCS/SCADA system/equipment available with the manufacturer and used during
testing & commissioning
r. As another operator HMI/engineering workstation
s. Other subject depending on the requirements during engineering stage.
A dedicated Ethernet interface port shall be assigned in the DCS/SCADA network to connect the
laptop workstation locally.
5.2.5 Engineering Workstation:
The Engineering workstation shall be provided with all functionalities required for configuration all
IEDs/BCUs for programming and diagnostics. Built in simulation software and diagnostic tools
also be installed into this Engineering PC to test all signals without shutting down the bays.
Facilities shall be provided for upload/download settings into all IEDs/BCUs from this Engineering
PC as well as for downloading fault recorder data. The Engineering workstation shall be provided
with dedicated Monitor installed at the control desk. From Hardware perspective, Engineering
workstation shall be identical to remaining PCs and refer technical schedule provided elsewhere
in this document.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 18
5.2.6 Redundant Station LAN
Redundant LAN shall be based on 100/1000Mbps Fast Ethernet communication protocol. Due to
redundancy requirements, the network shall be configured as dual LAN network with centralized
redundant switches, with all devices being dual ported.
While the field LAN shall be Fiber optic-based network, the station LAN inside the substation
control room can be CAT-6e SFTP provided the length of cable does not exceed 50 meters, else
Fiber optic-based network shall be provided.
All network equipment such as Switches shall be of modular, managed, rugged industrial strength
with dual power supply & with built in functions suitable for such applications and compliant to
IEC 61850-3 standard requirements. The switches shall have integrated diagnostic and
monitoring software to report any faults to the DCS/SCADA system using suitable network
protocol such as SNMP. Each port in the switches/routers shall be monitored and alarmed at the
DCS/SCADA system. The routing configuration shall be to the maximum extent automatic (self-
learning) for changes in network topology using routing protocol standards such as RSTP or
eRSTP..
The switches shall be 19-inch rack mount type with adequate FE and GE ports having preferably
ST/SC fiber optic interfaces and RJ45 ports for connection to field devices. All software/diagnostic
tools from the OEM shall be supplied and installed in both Engineering WS and maintenance
laptop. There shall be provision to configure the switches using web interface over the station
LAN in addition to using the device port.
5.2.7 Router/Firewall
Router with built-in firewall having DPI capabilities with necessary Ethernet ports shall be
provided for communication with unsecure zones. The equipment shall be of industrial grade,
preferably rack mount type powered by station 110V DC supply. All required security software
(Firewall), licenses should be provided.
5.2.8 GPS Clock System
Master Clock system provided shall be based on satellite radio-controlled GPS receiver. GPS
receiver shall act as Stratum-1 NTP Time Server with all necessary interfaces for connection to
the different LAN network in the DCS/SCADA system. The master clocks shall provide UTC time
information to synchronize all the DCS/SCADA equipment, protection IEDs and other IEDs
connected on the network using NTP/IEC 61850 network time synchronization service.
The Antenna for the GPS receiver shall be mounted on a high-unobstructed elevation close to
the converter. Receiver shall be equipped with protection against lightning / high voltage surges.
The GPS shall be provided in line with requirements specified in technical schedules.
5.2.9 Dual Field LAN
Separate redundant LANs per voltage level shall be provided for Field level equipment.
Redundant and independent network shall be maintained for BCUs in LCC, , Protection Relays
& BCUs in protection panel, metering and other device. From the Hardware aspect, switches
shall be same as described in section 5.2.6 above
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 19
The field LAN interconnecting the equipment such as Bay computers, Protection IEDs, etc. at
field level shall operate in real time and meet the following requirements:
a. Network bandwidth capacity of 1Gbps as a minimum
b. Be completely predictable in operational behavior
c. Achieve network time synchronization accuracy of 4 to 5ms in all devices on the LAN
5.2.10 Network Storage Device
A RAID 5 storage drive attached to both the networks in DMZ LAN of adequate capacity shall be
provided for historical data archiving, retrieval, configuration source database and system
backup/restore. Historical data from HMIs shall be automatically archived/ backed up and stored
in this device at regular intervals. Further, performance of system shall not be affected while
carrying out any of the activities.
5.2.11 Color LaserJet Printer
Printers shall be of high-performance reliable type and of robust construction, suitable for
continuous duty with stand/two trays. Printers shall meet the requirements specified in technical
Schedule.
5.2.12 Other Equipment

a. Visual Display Units
The specific requirements related to VDU are listed in technical schedule attached with this
specification. The VDUs in general, provided for text and diagrams shall have flicker-free, legible
displays that can be observed for long periods without Operator fatigue. The VDU shall be fitted
with high quality 24-inch TFT LED to ensure clarity of information on all areas of screen. Further,
applicable set of software shall also be supplied with each VDU. The visual display monitor shall
be designed for continuous operation and shall not be damaged through the failure or absence
of input signals.
b. Keyboards
Standard Full QWERTY format USB keyboards shall be supplied as per the information given in
technical schedule. The keyboard shall be suitable for freestanding use on the desktop and shall
include a tilt adjustment.
c. Mouse
All mice provided as pointing devices shall be of robust design and ergonomically compatible to
meet the requirements specified in technical Schedules.
5.3 BAY LEVEL EQUIPMENT
The Bay level equipment shall typically consist of the following:
a. Bay control units (BCU) for each individual circuit/bay with a local LCD display and user
interface for control and monitoring of the circuit/bay.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 20
b. IEDs as protection relays, BCUs installed in LCC/protection/protection & control Panel.

Metering system, CB Arc measuring devices.
c. The station Common Bay control Units (BCU) for monitoring of the station common services
such as LVAC, DC system, HVAC, Fire Protection and for the control and monitoring of the
Dummy circuit breaker.
d. Common BCUs or I/O Units in each voltage level for common alarms from busbar protection
panels
5.3.1 Bay Control Unit – General
The BCU shall be integrated with the DCS/SCADA and connected to field redundant LAN for
controlling and monitoring from the control room as well as from the remote SCADA system. BCU
shall be programmed for the required control and monitoring function.
BCUs shall be provided as specified in the schedules, equipped with adequate input/output
interfaces to the plant including spare I/Os.
Each BCU shall be equipped with Local HMI facilities, enabling optional local control of particular
bay devices at worst situation in case of unavailability or failure of operations from operator
workstations. The Local HMI shall meet the features specified in technical Schedules
5.3.2 BCU Design
BCUs offered shall be of state-of-the-art microprocessor-based architecture, modular type and

employ digital numerical technology.
The BCU shall be capable of storing fleeting digital inputs that occur between transmission of
data to the station computer, details of the storage available, and during periods of
communications failure. BCUs shall support buffer events. Control messages from any control
level shall be capable of being initiated at any time to control the plant and shall have priority over
all other message transmissions.
Following power interruption and/or communications failure, the BCU shall be arranged to restart
automatically to the complete operation state prior to supply interruption.
BCUs shall be capable of broadcasting any information pertaining to hardwired protection alarms
where applicable on top priority over other real-time data.
Sequence of event storage at bay level in case of a failure of the communication to the central
point shall be 1000 events. Upon return of communication, the missing events shall be
automatically updated in the SCADA event log. The IED event Log memory shall be maintained
for one week without power supply.
5.3.3 Input/output Facilities:
In general, all devices (IEDs) supporting 61850 shall be connected to DCS system over field LAN
using IEC 61850, however field equipment and IEDs can be hardwired to BCU IO modules in
exceptional cases and same shall be subject to acceptance of GCCIA on case-to-case basis.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 21
Remote External I/O modules as extension to the BCUs using internal I/O bus shall not be
acceptable. To a maximum extent, each BCU shall be equipped with adequate I/O modules to
avoid requirement for external remote I/O modules.
Modification of parameter from front screen of BCU shall only be possible using password. It is
also preferred to view SLD screen, alarm, event lists without requirement to enter password.
The substation Plant and the BCUs shall be connected via terminals as follows:
a. Cabling from CTs shall terminate on isolating links of the shorting disconnect type with current
injection plugs for testing
b. Cabling from VTs shall terminate on fused isolating links
c. All other terminals for I/Os shall include disconnecting lever type (the means of isolation shall
be captive).
d. All the terminal blocks shall be DIN rail mounted, disconnecting type and suitably identified
with individual terminal numbered
5.3.4 Analogue Inputs
The analogue inputs shall be capable of processing standard voltage and milliamp current inputs
continuously. The resolution of digitized inputs shall be stated in the tender.
Transducer less inputs with direct connection to plant CTs and VTs for the measurement of
frequency, voltage, current, phase angle, Watts, VARs and VA for both single and three phase
power circuits shall be employed. The Analog Accuracy for all direct input measurements shall
be 0.25% of Full-scale deflection (except for frequency measurements where an accuracy of
0.1% shall be provided)
Where DC analogue measurement inputs are required, they shall be capable of accepting uni-
polar and bipolar current of range 0-10/4-20mA and -10 to +10mA selected on channel basis,
with over/under range detection. The accuracy of the ADC conversion shall be 0.1% or better of
full scale. All components used in measuring circuits that affect accuracy shall be of high stability
and low temperature coefficient.
5.3.5 Digital Inputs
Plant alarms and indications will be derived from volt free contacts. Equipment with two normal
states, e.g. circuit breakers, isolators and earth switches shall be represented by two source
contacts to provide a positive indication of state.
Plant contacts shall change state to register the specified status change or alarm, and each input
shall be configurable to register a positive input from either a closed or open contact, i.e. input
signals may be either a normally open or a normally closed contact. Alarm contacts may be either
fleeting or sustained inputs.
Potential free opto-coupler inputs without connected common shall be available to facilitate wiring
from different alarm/indication supply.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 22
5.3.6 Pulse Counter Signal Inputs
The pulse counting inputs shall acquire and count impulses produced by “volt free” contacts,
which can be either, normally open or normally closed. Pulse counting inputs shall be provided
as either a separate input module or using digital inputs. Self-freezing functionality of accumulated
pulse values on configurable time basis to be provided.
Accumulator inputs shall meet the same requirements specified for digital inputs, additionally they
shall be able to cater for pulse rates up to 20 per second.
5.3.7 Digital Outputs
The command outputs shall be designed to provide select and execute outputs. The select output
shall energize the control relays for open and close command.
The period of the command pulse shall be configurable between 0.5 second and 15 seconds on
point basis. The command pulses shall reset immediately after the command is executed.
Controls transmitted between the operator workstation and the BCU shall comprise a select,
check-back, execute sequence with enhanced security (SBO). On receipt of a select message
the BCU shall prepare to operate the output relay, and then return confirmation of correct
selection of the output relay to the control centre. On receipt of the execute command the output
relay shall operate and confirmation of execution shall be returned to the operator workstation.
Not more than one digital output shall be possible at a time. Selection of two or more contacts
simultaneously or in quick succession without one having been completed, shall result in
cancellation of both requests and return an alarm to the master station
5.3.8 Dummy Control
To provide test facilities a station dummy control shall be provided. The dummy controls and
associated status indications shall be allocated discrete addresses and operate as if they are real
plant equipment in the common BCU panel.
5.4 FURNITURE
5.4.1 Workstation Desk
Each workstation shall be supplied with a desk as follows:
a. Sectional frame, suitably clad with material to the approval of the engineer.
b. Desk tops of a durable, scratch resistant, non-reflecting finish of suitable thickness.
c. Adequate space shall be available on the desk top for a writing area, to accommodate the
operator workstation, telephone console, and other miscellaneous items.
d. Drawers, shelves and fittings to the approval of the engineer.
Support for VDUs shall be provided on the desk.
Access shall be available for maintenance to equipment mounted on or in the desk. Doors or
removable panels shall be provided for this purpose. Ventilation grills with louvers to provide
natural ventilation for cooling equipment shall be provided.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 23
Attention shall also be given to providing suitable lighting over the workstation desk. This shall
not cause reflections on the VDU screen. Window blinds shall also be provided if required.
5.4.2 Chairs
Two operator chairs shall be provided for use at operator workstations. The chairs shall be high-
back type, with arm/head rests and covered in durable antistatic fabric upholstery. The chairs
shall be of good quality and ergonomically designed, suitable for continuous use without
discomfort, with a minimum durability of 25,000 hours.
The workstation chairs shall incorporate swivel and non-tilting caster actions. Seat height and
back angle adjustments shall be provided with easy adjustment.
5.4.3 Storage Cabinets
Steel Cabinets with lockable doors shall be provided for storage of all DCS/SCADA system
documentation and software CDs.
6 DCS/SCADA SOFTWARE & HMI SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 GENERAL
This section covers the requirements related to DCS/SCADA System software and HMI screens.
The operating system for DCS/SCADA shall be based on proven Windows based OS and shall
not be modified by the DCS/SCADA Manufacturer.
The latest application software released by the DCS/SCADA supplier shall be provided and tested
at FAT. Consideration to updating the software package shall be given before expiry of warranty.
For any special software that has to be developed to meet the requirements of this specification,
the supplier shall detail the scope of works and time necessary for development and subject to
approval by GCCIA.
Manufacturer shall provide latest proven firmware and shall ensure that all the functions specified
in DCS/SCADA are supported by the provided firmware. Any non-supportive function shall be
highlighted by bidder in tendering stage itself.
DCS/SCADA system shall be supplied with all Software & diagnostic tools with license from OEM
for debugging, configuration, runtime, simulation of each equipment including 3rd party
equipment such as GPS System, Printers, and Network Switches/Routers etc. Further, other
utility software required for data compression/decompression, system back-up/restore, data
storage/restoration, view/change BCU/ Relay Settings including programmable software logics,
view /analyze Fault/Disturbance Records of IEDs, etc. shall also be provided with licenses.
All configuration and diagnostic software shall comprehensive menu-driven and user-friendly
easy to use in English. The diagnostic software shall also include simulation of any equipment for
trouble shooting without the need for hardware simulation.
All software shall be provided with fail safe mode to roll over in safe mode in case of any error or
incomplete/partial execution of instructions.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 24
A reliable asset management database, in line with latest edition of ISO 19770 shall also be
provided, updated and maintained by the DCS/SCADA manufacturer till handing over the system
to GCCIA after final Taking over certificate. The provided database shall record and log all
DCS/SCADA related hardware and software assets installed in the substation.
From the hardware perspective, the data base shall maintain all the details of all the DCS/SCADA
hardware including physical components and their serial number with year of manufacturing,
model number, ordering codes and manufacture details.
From software details shall cover the above hardware requirement as applicable along with
license details, firmware, patches, updates, manufacturer support contact details etc.
An invalid entry shall be detected by the software, ignored and an explanatory message displayed
on the VDU. It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry.
The system shall support built in help facilities. The help screens shall be easily customized to
suit the owner’s needs.
6.2 REAL TIME DATABASE
A real-time database shall be maintained within the system. A general check shall be initiated at
intervals, of all items reported by exception from the remote I/O to ensure validity of database
entries. This interval shall be configurable.
The real-time database shall be based on open standard database with provision as OPC server
and the data dictionary published to OPC client applications in HMI workstations and other user
applications using one of the standard protocols such as OPC, DDE, and ODBC.
The archive and configuration source databases shall support the import/export of data using
standard SQL/ODBC compliant external applications.
6.3 INTEGRATED DATABASE MANAGEMENT
The DCS/SCADA database shall be based on relational database compliant to Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC)/OPC standards for data exchange. A single and integrated database tool
shall be deployed, including operator HMI interfaces, database, and logic functions, remote
SCADA communication database etc. It shall be possible to view, filter, sort and export etc. the
database contents with commercially available tools compliant with ODBC/OPC.
A Plant Asset management database shall be provided and below mentioned details shall be
filled in as minimum:
a. Plant Name & Circuit connectivity Details
b. Date of Manufacturer/Commissioning
c. Voltage level, rating, Impedance, CT & VT ratios.
d. Rated Impedance
e. Short Circuit fault current breaking capacity
f. Manufacturer Plant/Equipment’s data
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 25
In addition to above, Centralized monitoring and management of all the components of the system
shall be provided. A faulty component in the system is to be identified discreetly and should be
alarmed locally and to SCADA control centers. The system monitoring and management display
should be user configurable so as to enable an addition or deletion of component. Provision of
starting, switch-over or shutdowns of the various components of the system are to be provided in
the HMI display based on user access rights.
6.4 CONTROLS & COMMAND EXECUTION
Control of substation plant shall be effected from the individual bay single line diagrams. The
method of man machine dialogue shall be a multi-stage “select-check-execute” procedure with
software and hardware verification at each stage to ensure security of control. Verification of
control selection shall be included before a control is allowed to proceed. All HV device Control
commands shall be configured as secured double pole command &controls from HMI shall be in
accordance with SBO requirements specified in IEC 61850.
It shall not be possible to make two control selections simultaneously and the selected control
can be issued only from one workstation (or the Load Dispatch Centre) at a time for same voltage
level. The selected control selected shall only be executed from the workstation where selection
has been made.
The control operation shall be capable of being cancelled at any stage before the execute
command is given. A “Cancel” key for cancelling operation at any stage shall be provided in the
HMI. Control mode shall time out after a 30 sec time out if an operator fails to respond at a given
stage.
The passing of switching controls & inadvertent operations shall be subject of software
interlocking (implemented both on station and bay level). The control execute key/Cancel key to
be provide in all control actions
Both the control execution and the associated change of state shall raise an event and logged
with operator ID with details of control executed from which level..
Operation count of CB, Disconnectors and earth Switches shall be recorded. For CB, operations
that are associated with circuit trip shall be separately recorded. A reset facility for operation
counters recorded for each device and date of reset shall also be provided.
To ensure a high degree of security against unwanted operation, a special operation procedure
“select before execution” with enhanced security shall be provided from any of the three control
levels. After “selection” of a device, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device
on the screen and all other switching devices shall be blocked in the entire substation.
6.5 ANALOG MEASUREMENT HANDLING
Analogue quantities shall be reported to the DCS/SCADA master system periodically or by

exception, i.e. whenever the analogue value deviates from its last known value by a
predetermined threshold (periodicity and/or threshold shall be database selectable). New values
shall be stored in the real time database and any limit value violations shall be passed to the
alarm handling routines.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 26
Each measured value shall have two high and two low alarm limits available for supervising the
value. It shall be possible to set each limit independently in HMI and to define whether it is enabled
or disabled. Each limit shall also have a dead-band setting and a time delay of filter setting.
The storage of measured values shall be configurable and Bidder shall provide their
recommended preference for storage of averages of all measured values.
Measured values comprising circuit loading (A, MW, MVAr) voltages (kV), energy values (counter
values) and available for display in list format. It shall be possible to select the bay for which the
values are to be presented. The report shall display periodic average values (user configurable
periods of average) with facility to display daily, weekly and monthly average, minimum and
maximum values.
Mimic diagram shall display volts, amps, frequency, power factor, active and reactive power, etc.
High/low limit excursions of measurands shall be alarmed and programmable.
6.6 EVENT PROCESSING & EVENT LIST
All events shall have a date and time tag appended, to a resolution of 1 (one) ms. All time tagging
shall be applied at the source BCU, whilst other operator action events (e.g. controls, safety tags,
acknowledgements) shall be affixed by the HOT DCS/SCADA station computer/HMI server.
Events shall be recorded for both a 0-1 and a 1-0 transition of plant contacts. Events shall be
displayed in chronological order with latest at the top of the list.
The transition condition (i.e. 00/11) which may arise during a status indication change of state
(i.e. 01 to 10) shall not generate an event, unless a time delay for the transition is exceeded.
The format and text for the event list shall generally follow the list that is used for alarms. However,
it shall be possible to format the list with any required fields form the real-time event-log database.
Selection of the event list shall be possible on either of the monitor and shall result in the latest
page being displayed in chronological order, with new events added to the top of the list. An event
list on display shall be automatically updated with new events as they occur.
A sort with filter facility shall be available to produce a reduced list based on the selection criteria
i.e. for substation events, DCS/SCADA System events, an individual bay/equipment, voltage level
and/or other criteria such as date/time etc. In general, it shall be possible to apply filter on any of
the fields in the event list. The list shall be frozen while scrolling for analysis. Facility to print or
save the complete or filtered event list to standard spreadsheet format such as Excel and PDF
(with licenses) should be available.
The use of color for event processing shall be subject to the approval of the GCCIA.
Events shall be immediately stored to disk as they occur. The on-line event list shall display at
least 10,000 latest entries with cyclic FIFO log. Events shall be exported to archives/files on daily
basis with facility to manage the event archives to display in the event list. A system alarm shall
be raised when archives storage is approaching full (say at 80%).
6.7 ALARM PROCESSING & ALARM LIST
Selection of the alarm list shall result in the latest page being displayed (in chronological order),
with latest alarms added to the top of the list. An alarm list shall be selectable on either monitor
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 27
by operator and on display shall automatically be updated with new alarms on top in chorological
order as they occur. A filter facility shall be available to produce a reduced list based on selection
criteria on alarm priority, voltage level, bay level, equipment etc. other than standard filter criteria
in such applications.
The alarm list shall comprise a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall
be reported on one line containing:
a. The alarm date and time (up to millisecond resolution)

b. A mnemonic of the circuit designation
c. The plant voltage level
d. The plant number (where applicable)
e. Device or another identifier
f. A descriptive text
g. The state of the alarm or status
h. Alarm Priority
The alarm processing should be time stamped from source with a resolution of 1 millisecond.
Alarm acknowledgement shall be provided on an individual alarm basis, also on a page basis.
The color scheme for alarm processing and priority shall be as finalized in engineering stage.
The alarm list file shall contain at least 5,000 latest entries. A system alarm shall be raised as the
alarm list file is approaching full capacity.
6.8 ENGINEERING FACILITIES
A simple system for completing database and format modifications shall be provided. This is to
enable the GCCIA staff to readily modify the system, including the addition of new BCUs/IEDs in
accordance with the station plant developments.
Configuration tools shall be object oriented in line with IEC 61850 standard requirements (i.e. it
shall be possible to specify particular plant objects, after validation they shall be reused as part
of the configuration). Facilities such as paste and cut shall also be included.
On-line modification tool shall be available to facilitate limited modifications on the run-time
configuration database with limited functions such as analog alarm limit changes, suppressing of
alarms/logging etc.
Routine system tasks such as regular archiving shall be able to be completed by the Employer’s
staff, generally by the “System manager”.
There shall be a Centralized Engineering/Configuration tool in the system to create, generate and
modify/ update the configuration & Graphic database of station computers/HMI servers, gateways
to SCADA, bay units or other IEDs on the network. The tool shall be fully compliant to the
requirement outlined in IEC 61850 part 6 standards related to SCD, ICD, CID, SCL files. It shall
be possible to integrate any 3rd party IEC 61850 compliant IEDs in the system using the standard
ICD file of that device. The tool shall generate the complete substation SCD and device ICD files.
The design specification of the offered tool shall be included in the system FDS document during
the detailed engineering stage subject to approval.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 28
6.9 VDU & HMI DISPLAY
6.9.1 General
The DCS/SCADA system shall be equipped with HMI facilities enabling the following capabilities
as a minimum:
a. Station diagrams showing the status of primary bay devices on SLDs, Bay detailed views,
SF6 zonal views, DCS/SCADA System view to display dynamic equipment status of all
equipment/IEDs, Substation Services Views
b. Substation overall alarm list
c. Section/filtered alarm lists
d. DCS/SCADA System internal alarm list
e. System status list
f. Substation overall event list
g. Section/filtered event list
h. Event and alarm log
i. Condition monitoring
j. Dynamic bay-wise interlock views
k. Dynamic Bus Bar Display
l. Printer access from HMI
m. Sign in/Sign out duly evented in event list
n. Memo and sticky note
o. HELP Views with legends as required for system and electrical views
p. Trend views
The format of all displays shall contain a system window area/bar, used for communications
between the operator and the DCS/SCADA system. This window shall in general not be resized,
moved or minimized.
The cursor shall move from one operator VDU to the second VDU without separate selection of
VDU in use and both monitors considered as extended desktop.
Displays may consist of more than one page, in which case it shall be possible to carry out paging
by on screen selection for page forward, page back.
The workstation shall provide multiple window interactive display facilities. Multiple picture
windows shall be capable of display on the screen at the same time. Generally with the exception
of alarm/event and menu windows (which are anticipated to be full screen size), other windows
shall be size selectable and movable. Windows shall be capable of being minimized to icons.
Facilities shall be provided to acquire printouts & Print screens of all the displays including events,
alarms. All printouts shall be imprinted with Date & time stamp.
The system shall provide facilities for the display of the entire sub-station single line diagram.
a. Pan, zoom, de-cluttering and windowing facilities shall be provided to allow the
operator to navigate through the displays.
b. All user actions shall be indicated and acknowledged by messages on the VDU.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 29
The System Window Area shall include the following:
a. The menu bar: - this bar shall contain pull down menus for miscellaneous local and
external functions e.g. perform picture selection, create a new window etc.
b. The alarm icon: – this field shall indicate any unacknowledged alarms in the system,
and shall also be typically used for calling up the alarm window. The icon shall always
be present on the screen when there is an unacknowledged alarm in the DCS/SCADA
system.
c. The system clock: – the date and time shall be presented in the format DD-MM-YY,
HH-MM-SS on all views.
d. The dynamic function keys field: – this field shall display the dynamic function keys
applicable to the picture currently on display.
e. Overall, Station control -Local /Remote button
All displays shall preferably have a black or other dark background. Proposals for the use of color
on all displays may be considered (for improved visibility, printing, etc.) and shall be finalized
during the implementation phase of the project.
6.9.2 Modes of Operation

The system software shall be capable of supporting as a minimum four different access levels –
Viewer, Operator, Engineer and Administrator. The maximum number of users supported in each
level shall be stated and shall comply with the requirement by the employer. Additionally, Super
and Guest User shall be optionally available with no possibility of deleting this account.
The level of authority/rights for each user shall be configurable, allowing the user’s area of
responsibility to be well defined subject to approval by the GCCIA.
6.9.3 Graphical SLD Station Diagram and Station Control

Single line diagram graphical displays of the substation and interconnections using symbols for
circuit breakers, disconnector switches etc. shall be provided. The Single line Diagram and its
components shall be monitored so as to display energized/de energized state of arrangement as
per Line/Bus conditions. One display shall able to show a single line diagram with all relevant
data. Layouts of the displays, graphic/static symbols, animation colors, status acronyms shall be
customized to the requirement of GCCIA.
In Addition to above, display of station single line diagram and individual feeder mimic diagrams
with status indication and coordinated system hardware and process supervision shall be
provided. The colors of the display shall be freely selectable, SLD naming and symbols shall meet
GCCIA standard representation and in line with approved SLD nomenclature.
6.9.4 DCS/SCADA Equipment Monitoring & Display

This display shall inform the operator of the DCS/SCADA equipment status. It shall include, but
not be limited to:
a. Status of the DCS/SCADA components, including peripherals, i.e. whether on-line,

redundant standby, in service, faulty etc.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 30
b. Status of redundant Station LANs and Field LAN network devices to the port level
and the communication links
c. Status of the communications links to each Equipment/IEDs in the substation and
to Scada Control Centers
d. Status of the BCUs and all other IEDs integrated in the DCS/SCADA system
e. Status of the LVAC, 110V DC and 48V DC and power supply systems
f. Record Ambient Temperature Humidity Measurements as installed in Substation.
g. Monitoring & alarming the failure of communication routes to SCADA.
Alarms and events generated internally in the DCS/SCADA system and its peripherals concerning
status changes in any of the above shall appear in the alarm and event lists.
6.9.5 Real Time Trends

The system shall be capable of displaying any analogue value in graphical form to show the trend
of the value over a selected time period. The trend display shall have adjustable x and y-axis,
indicate up to 10 values and operate either using real-time or historical data from the database.
The sampling rate shall be operator selectable, with a minimum period of 1 second.
It shall also be possible to display similarly any of the stored cyclic average values (5 min, 15 min,
hourly and daily) in the system, also the stored integrated values or calculated values with
MIN/MAX values.
6.10 HAND DRESSING & SAFETY TAGGING
The single line diagram may contain variable elements, some of which are updated automatically
by the application and some which are hand-dressed by the operators. It shall be possible by
operator to manually select any measurement, status or indication for purpose of performing hand
dressing. Hand dressing symbol shall be clearly distinguishable on all applicable screens and
automatically synchronized with all database.
On manual restoration of the elements back into service, the readings shall again be recorded in
the database, returned to their normal presentation and hence, regularly updated on the VDUs.
Hand-dressing operations as described above, shall be suitably tagged for logging purposes.
The system must recognize an attempt by the operator to make an invalid hand dressing
Operation and this should be blocked with a suitable error message being displayed on the
screen.
Safety tagging symbols shall be finalized during the implementation phase of the project. Where
required these shall be consistent with the GCCIA’s standard practices. Examples of typical
safety tags are:
A. Permit to work
B. Sanction for test
C. Limitation of access
A simple safety tag “notebook” facility shall also be provided, for operators to write in full details
of time/date and other details of the tags affixed.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 31
6.11 Historical Data Storage & Retrieval
The system shall provide a historical data collection facility that allow users to define points to be
sampled, sample frequency and how long to retain the sample data. The system shall be capable
of sampling at intervals as low as 1 second. There shall be no upper limit on the duration of
samples within each dataset and thus no limit on the amount of historical data that can be stored
other than the limitation by disk space. All analog points shall be archived and stored for at least
5 years.
Historical data shall be automatically archived/backed up and stored in hard disks, at easily
retrievable locations within the system, at regular intervals so that active areas are not consumed
leading to slowdown in the system performance. A network storage device with hot swappable
RAID-5 disk arrays of adequate capacity shall be offered for historical data archiving/retrieval,
configuration source database and system back-up/restoration purposes.
The system shall allow users to define recording of statistics in the sample records which shall
include averages, minimums and maximums and times of occurrence of Min & Max.
Facilities shall be provided to periodically store historical data on NAS disk for long-term storage.
This means of storage shall be capable of being reloaded back into the system as required.
7 SYSTEM SIZING REQUIREMENTS
The design of DCS/SCADA Systems and its components as far as sizing, Capacity and expansion
is concern, shall meet the following requirements:
a. It shall be designed, delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for
performing the requirements of this specification.
b. The design shall allow expansion, modification and testing with the minimum of
disruption and without affecting performance requirements specified elsewhere in
this specification.
c. The maximum number of IEDs connected to each switch shall be limited to meet
the reliability, redundancy and performance requirements mentioned in other
section of this document.
d. All resources in the system shall be sized and designed to accommodate min.
number of IEDs required as per approved Single line diagram comprising of Dia
and circuit breakers plus additional 50% as spare.
e. The entire central and common units, input/output, analogue modules etc. in BCUs
/ shall be provided with 20% wired spare capacity after completing the scope of
works in accordance with specification.
f. All terminal blocks shall be provided with min. 20% spare terminal blocks.
g. The Station LANs & Field LAN shall be complete with all necessary Switches,
Routers, etc., required for complete substation including future bays. Each network
switch shall be equipped with at least 20% spare ports of each type as on-line
spares.
h. The physical memory in each computer shall have at least 50% spare capacity over
and above the system requirement under normal conditions. Expansion by the
addition of plug-in modules shall be possible to double the memory size provided.
i. Memory & hard disk sizing for each computer shall ensure that there is 100% spare
capacity over and above the requirement taking also the future bays into
consideration in sizing calculation.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 32
j. The system database shall be configured for the complete system including future
bays.
k. All licenses /dongles etc. shall be provided considering all Future capacity
utilizations.
The system software shall be designed to meet the requirements of the complete capacity without
further program development. Future bay units shall be added by defining their parameters
interactively with the system generation software. Licenses, dongles etc. shall consider
requirements for complete substation including future bays.
In General, the design is required to provide all the functional requirements specified and to
manage the I/O in a dependable manner. The system is required to be capable of expansion to
the ultimate system size specified in the detailed requirements, without any degradation of
performance.
8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND AVAILABILITY
8.1 GENERAL
The performance of the DCS/SCADA system is determined by the speed of data acquisition,
processing and display during normal and adverse operating conditions on the power network.
The nature of power systems is such that fault conditions can result in high activity simultaneously
at a number of the substation bays and system performance becomes critical during these
periods, although longer response times can be tolerated. Performance figures are therefore
defined under normal, high and crisis system activity scenarios.
High Availability of individual items and the overall system is paramount. The equipment life shall
be a minimum of 20 years. The equipment shall be designed to operate safely, reliably and
efficiently over the design life.
8.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The DCS/SCADA shall meet the following performance requirements which are to be verified
during FAT and SAT system tests.
8.2.1 Test Conditions
Controlled test conditions can be most effectively achieved in the factory environment. Site
performance tests with the DCS/SCADA system connected to the substation plant are required
to be indicative checks only. The system shall be fully configured with the complete master station
equipment in service (and all software running); all bay units shall also be in service (or
simulated). The system performance under all conditions occurring on the network shall be such
that no loss of data occurs and the computer system shall not “Crash” or failover.
8.2.2 Normal Activity
This represents the state where only occasional alarms and events are occurring on the
substation plant, with analogues reporting as load demand changes. This is defined as the
following conditions occurring within each one-minute period:
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 33
a. Changes in 7 alarms
b. Changes in 2 status indications
c. Analogues exceeding their reporting threshold
d. 15 analogues exceeding alarm limit values
e. Remote controls issued to 2 plant items.
f. Individual alarm accepts of all alarms generated
The above shall be widely distributed between the bay units I/O data.
8.2.3 High Activity
This represents the state equivalent to a significant network fault occurring, resulting in a large
number of alarms and events occurring at the substation, with analogues reporting as load
demand changes. This is defined as the following conditions occurring within each one-minute
period:
a. Changes in 70 alarms
b. Changes in 20 status indications
c. 35 analogues exceeding their reporting threshold
d. 25 of the 35 analogues exceeding alarm limit values
e. Remote controls issued to 5 plant items
f. Page alarm accept of all alarms generated
The above shall be widely distributed between the bay units I/O data.
8.2.4 Crisis
This represents a major network disturbance resulting in a large number of alarms, status
changes and analogue changes occurring at the substation. This is defined as the following
conditions occurring within a 20 second period:
a. 60% of the equipped system alarm/event change
b. 60% of the equipped system status change
c. 60% of the equipped system analogues exceeding their reporting threshold
d. 30% of the equipped system analogues exceeding alarm limit value
e. page alarm accept in hand of alarms generated
Immediately following the above 20sec period, verification of access to remote control functions
shall be confirmed. Control software shall be given the highest priority for action by the software.
Justification shall be provided that no data will be lost under these conditions, also of the time for
the DCS/SCADA system to process this data.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 34
8.3 TIMES FOR DATA ACQUISITION AND MAN MACHINE INTERFACE
8.3.1 Data Acquisition and Control
The system shall acquire process, enter into the database and update the relevant displays etc.
within the following time periods:
Normal High Crisis

Parameter Activity Activity Condition
(s) (s) (s)
Change of alarm/event/status 1 2 4
Change of analogue 1.5 3 6
Control from “Execute in HMI” to output from 1 2 4
bay unit
Manual entry of information from “Execution” 2 4 4.8
to display
Selection of display (first data) 1.5 2.5 4
8.3.2 Human Machine Interface
The system shall provide for simultaneous and independent use of all workstations or workplaces.
The elapsed time between selecting a display and the full display appearing on the screen
(including dynamic data), shall be not greater than 2, 3& 4 seconds for the normal, high and crisis
activity scenarios respectively.
8.4 DCS/SCADA OPERATING TIMES
The time requirements for the DCS/SCADA system shall be as follows:
System Operation Maximum Time
Automatic Start after shutdown due to sudden 10 minutes

power supply interruptions
Time for redundant station computer/Gateways to Less than 10 s
assume on line duties
Full updating of information (after redundant Less than 1 min
computer assumes online duties)
Confirmation that DCS/SCADA redundant Bidder to advise
computer database is continuously in step with the
online machine (any difference in time for
databases to be updated to be advised)
8.5 HARDWARE RESOURCE CAPACITY/UTILIZATION
The following capacities shall apply to all computers offered in the tender, based on the ultimate
system sizing specified in the schedules.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 35
The system shall comply with the following:
Item Normal High

Activity Activity
Average CPU utilization (10-minute period) 45% 80%
Spare Hard Disk Capacity 50% 50%
8.6 SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
The calculated System Kernel Availability shall be at least 99.98%, assuring a 6-hour MTTR
which shall be proved during the 2 months reliability run before TOC.
Theoretical and practical figures shall be included in the Offer for the reliability of each individual
unit of the system in terms of MTBF.
9 INSPECTION AND TESTING
The DCS shall be tested at manufacturers works (FAT) by simulation for the compliance with the
specified scope. The tenderer shall submit FAT, SAT procedures before starting the tests for
GCCIA approval.
9.1 Type Test
A type test shall be carried out for any newly developed product for each applicable standard.
The DCS Contractor shall maintain records for each product type test. These records shall be
made available for GCCIA review during FAT.
Note that IEC61850 compliance certificates both for Servers (IED) and Clients (station
computers/gateways) from a third-party ISO accredited (level-A) test lab for certification of IEC
61850 compliance along with a list of all non-conformities shall be submitted along with the offer
for GCCIA review. Any non-conformity in the test report shall be subject to acceptance by GCCIA.
9.2 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
The FAT test shall be conducted on the complete DCS system to demonstrate that it meets
requirements listed in this document. This shall include tests in which the DCS interoperates with
typical IEDs, Metering protection relays etc. and SCADA system functions (as may be simulated).
FAT shall include but shall not be limited to:

1. Visual inspection and dimension checks
2. Verification that the part numbers are in accordance with a hardware device list
3. Confirmation that all hardware has been updated with the latest version
4. Measurement of insulation resistance, dielectric test, and wiring check
5. Hardware test (sequence and diagnostic tests)
6. Diagnostic test for each piece of hardware including simulating inputs and outputs
of the Data Acquisition and Control panel
7. Demonstration of Integrated Engineering Tool compliance to IEC61850-6
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 36
8. Functional tests both at the DCS and process level

9. Time Synchronization test to prove time accuracy between IEDs and equipment in
Station and bay level subsystems
10. System Performance test as specified above.
11. System reliability run for 48 hours with real-time simulation of normal scenario
conditions mentioned above
12. Verification of windows license and activation keys.
13. Other cyber security tests
14. Any other tests deemed necessary by GCCIA.
GCCIA engineers shall inspect and witness the Factory Acceptance Tests of the complete DCS
system at the OEM facility before dispatching to site.
9.3 Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
The purpose of site test and inspection is to verify that the commissioned DCS system is
completely operational in accordance with the approved documents.
After installation, start-up testing and inspection shall be performed in presence of GCCIA
engineers to verify the overall performance.
When any faults are discovered during site testing or inspection, the DCS Contractor shall replace
the faulty parts/components. The results of the site test shall be provided for GCCIA approval.
The integrated DCS, including the interfaces to the SCADA control centers, the bay level system,
and IEDs, shall be tested at site. These tests shall include
1. Visual inspection and dimensional check

2. Measurement of insulation resistance, dielectric test, and wiring check
3. Complete Functional tests to be carried out with the complete system including
connection with the SCADA Control Centers, Station Level and Bay Level system
4. Interface checks with other systems to verify that the interface between the SCADA
Master and the DCS systems comply with the approved test procedures.
5. Redundancy tests
6. Cyber security tests
10 Commissioning
Commissioning time of the DCS shall be coordinated with the other electrical activities of
substation and shall be conducted at the same time as substation commissioning. Expertise from
OEM (manufacturer specialist) shall be available at site during the testing and commissioning of
the substation.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 37
Protection alarms and other functions shall be tested at site during protection relay final setting
activities undertaken by the substation Main contractor as well as during point-to- point testing
(level-2 tests) with SCADA in the presence of the DCS Engineer.
Handover of all SCMS Red markup/as built documents, system backups, licenses, keys, dongle,
software list, hardware list etc. along with setup files for all software and OS shall be done by
contractor to GCCIA after commissioning the system and prior to energization.
11 WARRANTY
With the completion of the site test and successful commissioning of the system, two months of
reliability run will start for the complete system. All failures or mal-operations shall be logged
during this period. The reliability run will restart in case of major interruptions/failures are observed
during the reliability run, at the discretion of the employer. After two months of successful trial
run, Taking-Over Certificate (TOC) will be issued by GCCIA.
The warranty period for the complete hardware and software functions of the DCS/SCADA
system shall be for min. 24 months for the Main contractor but Warranty of equipment &
DCS/SCADA components shall be as per OEM warranty period( if warranty offered is more than
2 years). Further, Main Contractor shall submit all the certificates in original to GCCIA regarding
Warranty of all the components.
Warranty period begins after taking over certificate issued by GCCIA. During the Warranty period
(Defect Liability Period), the Contractor shall be responsible for rectifying any defects. All
maintenance or repair works should be done in presence of GCCIA engineers with an objective
of imparting necessary skills /familiarization of the system.
Contractor will provide all necessary spares for replacement of faulty components during the two
years Defect Liability Period
During the warranty period, the system will be put into operation for the intended purpose by
GCCIA and utilized by GCCIA, including any database modification/system configuration
changes, if required. However, in the event of any failure in system, the contractor must offer
maintenance services on-call basis.
12 MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE & LOCAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Only experienced and technically capable manufacturer of control and protection systems for
electricity transmission applications will be accepted. Preferred manufactures will be those who
have robust experience in the supply of full-scale substation automation systems and services.
This experience has to be substantiated by means of reference installations in actual service
under similar environmental conditions for at least 3 years.
Further, new manufacturer in GCCIA network shall be subject to prequalification as per GCCIA
Standards. Also, bidder shall provide a guarantee against obsoleteness of any DCS/SCADA
components within the completion of Defect Liability period. In case of any obsoleteness of any
DCS/SCADA components, within this period, GCCIA reserves the right to penalize the contractor
or for complete replacement of system at contractor’s cost.
016403-3000-4SES-6200 01 July 2024 38
13 DOCUMENTATION/DRAWINGS
Sets of documentation (both hardcopy & softcopy) for the DCS/SCADA system as per
Document/Drawing list guidelines from GCCIA shall be submitted. The documentation shall
include the complete functional specification of all hardware and software and complete
maintenance and user manuals for both hardware and software. The documents shall be as per
approved document list of the project and as a minimum it shall comprise of Architecture,
Hardware and software, GA/Schematics diagram of panels. TDS, Functional design, FAT, SAT
protocols, signal lists, I/O termination list, application pictures and Interlock logic diagrams etc.
All system hard and software documentation and the application hard and software
documentation shall be written in English language.
14 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS FURNISHED WITH TENDER
The following documents shall be furnished with the tender:
a. Block and functional diagram showing the proposed control scheme

b. Technical specification and description of systems, catalogues of equipment and
devices to be used
c. Duly Filled Technical Schedules.
d. Brochures and references of manufacturer supplying the control system
e. Reference list of identical system in service at similar sized HV electrical
substations
f. IEC6180 compliance test certificate for both Server (IED) and Client (Station
Computers, Gateways) from a third-party ISO accredited (level-A) IEC 61850 test
lab. All non-conformities shall be clearly stated in the type test report subject to
acceptance by GCCIA.
g. Recommended list of spares for 10 years with unit price for each item shall be
provided in the offer under optional price schedule.
(GCCIA)

SDH FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
016403-3000-47ES-6700 Rev.01
May 2024
SDH Fiber Optic Communications System # Date Page

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 SDH FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 1

1.1 General 1
4.1 Equipment Technical Particularities 2
4.1.1 SDH Multiplexer 2
4.1.2 Access multiplexer 6
4.1.3 Network Management System 7
4.1.4 Interface Distribution Frame 9
4.1.5 Fiber Optic Cable 9
4.1.6 Optical Distribution Frame 11
4.1.7 Cabinet 11
4.1.8 Power Distribution Panel 11
4.2 Engineering Services 12
4.3 Interface with Other Equipment 12
4.4 Spare Parts and Maintenance Facilities 13
4.5 Commissioning 14
4.6 4.6 Documentation 14
7 WARRANTY 16
Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority(GCCIA) Revision

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 1
1 SDH FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
1.1 General
The present specification outlines the standard technical specifications applicable to the design,
procurement, manufacturing, testing, installation and commissioning of the Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH) fiber optic system that will provide communications facilities to the GCCI power
network.
The HV transmission lines are to be provided by others with an optical fiber overhead ground wire
(OPGW) for purpose of communication between the various SDH terminals.
The network architecture to be implemented shall be of a ring topology type with adequate
transmission and synchronization protection scheme to achieve to operational requirements.
The SDH network shall support the services related to the telephony, SCADA, tele protection and
administrative data exchange required to operate and manage the GCCIA power network.
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION

ITU-T G.700 series: Hierarchical digital interfaces related recommendations.
ITU-T G.800 and
G.900 series: Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) applicable recommendations.
ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunications management network
ITU-T M2101 Performance limits for bringing-into-service and maintenance of
international multi-operator SDH paths and multiplex sections
ITU-T V11: Electrical characteristics for balanced double-current interchange
circuits operating at data signaling rates nominally up to 10 kbit/s
ITU-T V24: List of the definitions for interchange circuits between Data
Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment
ITU-T V28: Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-circuit interchange
circuits.
ITU-T V35: Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60 – 108 kHz
group band circuits.
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ORGANIZATION
ISO 90001 Quality systems-model for quality assurance in design,
development production, installation and servicing.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 2
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION

EIA-RS 232C Standards for electrical characteristics or generators and receiver
for use in digital systems.
EIA 485 Standards for electrical characteristics or generators and receivers
for use in balanced digital multipoint systems.
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEER
IEEE 802.X Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks
IEEE C37.94 Standards for communication of protection relays with
communication equipment inside a substation using optical fibers
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
C37.90.2-1995 IEEE Standard for Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers.
4.1 Equipment Technical Particularities
This section provides the equipment technical particularities for the design and supply of
the SDH fiber optic system and other fiber optic links requirements.
4.1.1 SDH Multiplexer
The SDH add and drop multiplexer (ADM) provided shall support a STM-64 (10G)
aggregate rate and shall use the most up-to-date technologies optimizing the physical
dimensions, power consumption and reliability. The ADM shall be of a flexible and modular
structure type. Compact unit design and flexible shelf architecture shall allow for housing of
various units, from STM-64 aggregate units down to the 2 Mbps E1 tributary units, on the
same shelf. The equipment shall provide reliable and space-efficient dropping of various
applications. The configuration shall be done by inserting the appropriate interface cards.
Any future expansion or upgrading of the equipment shall be allowable with an optimized
part reuse.
The equipment shall be fully integrated product and will provide the fibre optic interface,
channel and specialty interfaces and also an encompassing Network Management System
(NMS). All alarms, performance monitoring and configuration setting about the equipment
status shall be available through a local PC or through a central Network Management
System.
The ADM shall respect the ITU-T G.707 recommendation.

The ADM supplied shall provide the following facilities:
1. 2 (E1), 34 (E3), 45 (T3), 140, 155 (STM-1) Mbps tributaries.
2. Common parts protection.
3. Ring self-healing protection.
4. High order tributary cross connect.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 3
5. Lower order virtual container (VC) cross connect.

6. Access to overhead channels;
7. Monitoring through the network management system.
8. High modular commonality with other SDH equipment.
Each circuit availability and reliability shall be the key elements in the system design. The
power units will be redundant and paralleled on the same shelf. Route diversity shall be
achieved considering collapsed ring configuration and also by assigning both a priority and
back-up path. This shall ensure that if a common unit such as a STM-64 aggregate or a
fiber is lost, traffic is still maintained between the drop sites with extremely fast switching
time (< 3 ms) between route diversity fiber paths.
Since the SDH multiplexer equipment shall be of a highly modular design, the Contractor
shall configure and provide each of them with the modules that will satisfy the applications
as described in the Scope of Work of Section 4, Part I. The equipment shall be 19” rack
mountable and shall include, as a minimum, dual power units, dual STM-64 aggregate units,
a redundant central processing unit, the required tributary units and an order wire unit.
All interface units shall be interchangeable during operation and maintenance without the
need to shut down the equipment. The transmission rates shall be upgradeable by simply
changing aggregate cards and/or SFP’s without further involvement of any further works.
Complete SDH shall automatically restart in case of restoration of power after power failure
and all services /traffic shall be capable to restore automatically without any manual
intervention. No requirement of external cooling (i.e. fans) shall be required and equipment
shelves can be mounted directly on top of each other.
a) Aggregate Subsystem
The STM-64 aggregate unit shall provide the STM-64 (10G) transmit and receive optical
interface between a node and adjacent node in the ring. In each node dual STM-64
aggregate units shall be provided to form an overall collapsed ring topology.
All assignments and time slot interchange settings shall be performed through the Network
Management System either locally or remotely.
Optical receive level, laser current, PLL Voltage, status of the STM-64 signal, unit
temperature, and node type shall be minimum parameters monitored displayed on the
Network Management System.
The following shall be monitored or configured:
 Code Violation Statistics in “errored” seconds and severely “errored” seconds for
Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section and Higher Order (VC-4) Path.
 Synchronization Screen which shall allow the user to set up the synchronization relevant
parameters such as Node Type and Sync Priority and also to monitor the status of SSM
(Sync Status Message) parameters in both receive and transmit STM-64 signals.
The STM-64 aggregate unit shall occupy one shelf slot position in the equipment shelf.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 4
The STM-64 aggregate units to be supplied shall support long haul 1550 nm optical
transmitter unit.
b) Tributary Subsystem
The ADM shall support electrical tributaries at 2, 34, 45, 140, 155 Mbps, 10BASE-
T/100BASE- TX electrical tributaries and STM-1 electrical tributary. The Contractor shall
supply and terminate a minimum of 32 E1, 10 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and 2 x STM-1
tributaries.
The electrical tributaries shall respect the ITU-T G.703 recommendation for physical
interface. The external connections to the drop equipment shall be made through either 120
ν balanced or 75 ν unbalanced (BNC) connectors.
The Ethernet unit shall provide a bridging function between two or more Ethernet 10BASE-
T/100BASE-TX LANs that are physically separate. The unit shall act as an intelligent bridge
between the LANs, exchanging only those frames that are not locally addressed.
The Ethernet unit shall be software programmable to allocate various virtual channels for
inter- bridge data transport depending on the Ethernet traffic. This shall provide the user
with the capability to allocate bandwidth on demand.
The Ethernet unit shall provide the means of establishing logic sets of bridged LANs. This
shall allow LANs within the same set, on the same fiber ring to be bridged while preventing
bridging between LANs that are not in the same set. All LANs that are bridged together shall
share the same LAN identification. The Ethernet unit shall dynamically determine the
location of all sites on the ring. No user intervention will be required to establish connectivity
between the sites.
Front panel LEDs shall be provided for indication of the received signal quality.
Loop back features shall also be available through software, which shall allow loop back on
the line side as well as the drop side of the unit.
The STM-1 tributary units shall also support long and short haul 1300 nm as well as long
haul 1550 nm optical transmitter unit.
c) Automatic Protection Subsystem
In order to ensure high availability, the ADM equipment shall be configured for the
line protection. The protection management shall be perform by the central controller units.
d) Synchronization Subsystem
The ADM synchronization function unit shall be monitoring the integrity of the
synchronization sources in compliance with the ITU-T G.813 recommendation.
The synchronization shall be performed by any of the following sources:
1 2 Mbps G.703 synchronization input.


016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 5
2 STM-64 aggregate clock.

3 STM-1 tributary clock.
4 A selected 2 Mbps tributary.
e) Control Subsystem
The ADM control subsystem shall support the real time management functions such as
traffic, protection switching and performance data acquisition. The control system shall be
invariably implemented by software.
The processing unit shall monitor alarms from individual units providing major and minor
alarm status. The unit shall be equipped with alarm indicators, which will summarize the
incoming alarms.
The control software shall be well protected against power failure. Any software upgrades
shall be downloaded both by a local terminal PC or remotely.
The control subsystem shall support interfaces with network management system. The
software shall be based on MS-Windows.
f) Orderwire Facility
The order wire unit shall provide the multipoint voice communications between any two or
more sites in the system using one of the order wire bytes in the STM-64 Section Overhead.
The order wire unit shall have facility to connect a telephone set or a headset which shall
be provided with order wire.
The user shall have facility to configure both the local unit address as well as the remote
unit address (00-99) for DTMF tones. The remote address setting shall determine what is
the remote order wire unit that will answer when a local call is initiated. It shall also be
possible to initiate a broadcast call.
A protection mechanism shall exist to prevent indefinite circulation of order wire tones in the
ring. The order wire service shall remain operational in the event of a ring break.
g) Power Subsystem
The power supply needed for the ADM shall be protected as 1+1 redundant, with one unit
able to power a fully equipped shelf and another power unit in stand-by. The removal of any
power supply unit shall not affect any system operation. Each power unit shall be fuse
protected as a standard feature. An alarm relay and front panel LED shall provide indication
of abnormal power unit operation.
Each terminal shall be powered by a 110 Vdc uninterruptible power supply source. The use
of redundant 110 Vdc to 48 Vdc converters is acceptable if the SDH multiplexer can only
be powered by –48 Vdc power supply. In case of availability of redundant 48V system in
the substation, all telecom equipment shall be directly powered with 48V DC chargers,

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 6
4.1.2 Access multiplexer
The access multiplexers provided shall support up to STM-1 aggregate channels and shall
use the most up-to-date technologies optimizing the physical dimensions, power
consumption and reliability. The equipment shall give access to low rate telecommunication
data and voice services as tributary rate. The equipment shall be of a highly modular design.
The configuration shall be done by inserting the appropriate interface cards. Any future
expansion or upgrading of the equipment shall be allowable with an optimized part reuse.
The access multiplexer shall be compliant with the ITU-T G.732 recommendation.
a) Equipment Configuration
Since the access multiplexer shall be of a highly modular design, the Contractor shall
configure and provide each one with the modules that will satisfy the applications as
described in the Scope of Work of Section 4, Part I.
b) Aggregate Subsystem
The aggregate electrical interface port rate shall be of 155 Mbps (STM-1) and be compliant
with the ITU-T G.703 recommendation. The port impedance shall be of 75 or 120 ohms.
Optical interfaces shall also be supported by the equipment.
c) Tributary Subsystem
The tributary units shall provide the voice and data interfaces.
The voice interface shall be of a 2-wire FXS and 2/4 wire E&M signalling types. These
interfaces shall respect the ITU-T G.711 recommendation.
The data interface shall be of a RS-232, V.35 and G.703 co-directional type supporting
synchronous as well as asynchronous transmission with a rate capacity from 1,2 to n x 60
kbps for serial data. For IEC 104 traffic and remote management data, Two Layer 2 modules
with minimum 8 ports each (FE and GE), all equipped with SFPs based on latest version
shall be provided.
d) Control Subsystem
The control subsystem shall support the real time management functions such as traffic,
protection switching and performance data acquisition. The control system shall be
invariably implemented by software.
The control software shall be well protected against power failure. Any software upgrades
shall be downloaded both by a local terminal PC or remotely.
The control subsystem shall support interfaces with network management system. The
software shall be based on MS-Windows.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 7
e) Power Subsystem
The power supply needed for the multiplexer shall be protected as 1+1 redundant, with one
unit able to power a fully equipped shelf and another power unit in stand-by. The removal
of any power supply unit shall not affect any system operation. Each terminal shall be
powered by a 110 Vdc uninterruptible power supply source. The use of redundant 110 Vdc
to 48 Vdc converters is acceptable if the SDH multiplexer can only be powered by –48 Vdc
power supply. In case of availability of redundant 48V system in the substation, all telecom
equipment shall be directly powered with 48V DC chargers,
Tele protection: Suitable interfaces (both optical and electrical) shall be considered and
provided to interface to the tele-protection requirement of the OHL. Redundancy shall be
considered and failure of any single component or module shall not affect the function of
the teleprotection equipment. Optical interface module for differential protection relays
connection shall be compliant to IEEE C37.94 and E1
4.1.3 Network Management System
The Contractor shall supply a Network Management System (NMS) located at the GCCI
Control Center. The NMS shall manage and supervise the SDH multiplexers as well as the
access multiplexers and shall consist in a workstation computer running a system
management software providing the following features:
1. real-time alarm surveillance and capture;

2. system performance (BER);
3. system configuration;
4. fault and maintenance management.
The Network Management System software shall allow the user to monitor and configure a
system from any node through the use of a portable PC terminal. Visibility of nodes shall
be down to the 64 kb/s level, which shall include monitoring, configuration and alarm
reporting. Manual path switching shall also be available.
Communication to different network elements in the system will be performed by sending

encoded operation messages using bit-oriented channels. For NMS transport, a user shall
have two options. The first shall be to select DCC bytes in the STM-64 Section Overhead
(SOH)
i.e. the bytes recommended by the ITU-T Recommendation G.707 for this purpose. Another
option shall be to select unused bytes of any TU-12 carrying no E1 traffic (i.e. a TU-12 that
is either unused or carrying traffic originated at a TU-11 level unit).
All NMS features and functions will be handled by a central processing unit at the GCCI
Control Center. The central processing unit shall monitor alarms from individual units and
provides major and minor office alarm relays. An “Alarm Engine” in the NMS software shall
also be tasked with handling all incoming alarms while displaying helpful information to the
user for assistance in maintenance and troubleshooting procedures.
A network management interface shall allow the user access to a series of powerful, menu
driven, industry standard (MS Windows) screens, which will provide the user complete
monitoring information and configuration control of the system.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 8
The network management program will run on a workstation running Latest operating
system
The NMS shall allow for remote monitoring, testing, path switching and reconfiguration of
any node from any other node in the system.
The NMS shall provide for simultaneous monitoring and configuration from more than one
node. The NMS shall allow multiple user access for maintenance personnel to have real
time network information for testing and troubleshooting as well as the potential of back up
control centers.
An industry standard graphical user interface (Microsoft Windows) for displaying the desired
level of detail shall be provided. A “drilling” scheme shall be incorporated to provide the user
access to all levels of the network including a seamless integration of NMS communications
right down to the 64 kb/s channel unit level. This shall allow displays of information all the
way from the STM-64 optical receive levels, to the state of the activity on the data channel
interface units.
Automatic protection against path failure should also be provided.
Upon loading the NMS software, connection to the central processing unit shall be made
and the NMS will display the System View window for the network. This shall comprise one
icon for each node with lines illustrating the fiber interconnects.
This screen shall provide the user the following capabilities:
 Facilities to sketch and design the network layout;

 On-line monitoring of STM-64 aggregate unit and channel unit alarms;
 Ability to rename nodes and modify system layout;
 Group the nodes (useful for multiple ring systems);
 Creation of a fiber information field for recording splice locations, OTDR readings etc.
 Ability to select a node and “drill” down to the Node View.
If more details of a node are required, the user may select the node (mouse click) thereby
opening up a Node view. This screen will provide the user with the following capabilities:
 Optical status information;

 Configuration and traffic information;
 Unit information;
 Test information (i.e. Local or Line loop back);
 BER and diagnostic information;
 SDH processor information;
 Alarm and status information.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 9
The next layer in the “drilling” scheme for the NMS shall provide the user with the following
capabilities:
 Monitoring and configuration information for the selected level unit;

 Displays inventory list for the 64 kb/s channels at each node;
 Reflects status of the 64 kb/s channel unit.
Through the NMS, the user shall be capable of manually force a system node to switch to
the back-up path (Test field) to ensure that in case of failure the service would still be
maintained.
The NMS Alarm Engine will provide the user with the following capabilities:
 On-line alarm and status information display;

 Alarm logging and date and time stamping;
 Alarm acknowledgement;
 Maintenance of an alarm history file;
 Export of an alarm history file to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet for analysis;
 Ability to connect to a printer (one line per alarm).
The user shall have the option, through software, to distinguish what events will activate the
PC beeper.
Each alarm history event shall be saved to either a files or shall be sent to a printer.
In case offered SDH/PDH are compatible with existing redundant NMS at GCCIA, then
integration of all new nodes in existing GCCIA NMS including upgrading of licenses and
software as required shall be considered and new NMS is not foreseen.
4.1.4 Interface Distribution Frame
At each site, an interface distribution frame (IDF) shall be installed within the SDH panel.
The IDF shall permit an easy access to all channel interfaces of the SDH and E1 Primary
multiplexers providing an efficient cabling management. The Contractor shall install all
permanent cabling between the multiplexers and the IDF. IDF shall be equipped with all
Krones, cabling, lighting protectors etc. to cater 50% future expansion
4.1.5 Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber optic cables shall be supplied, laid in ducts/cable trays, spliced and tested from OPGW
joint box in Gantry to ODFs in the substation.
Control Center up to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) from the outdoor Optical Ground
Wire (OPGW) junction point. All cables shall be protected into buried duct raceways.
The fiber optic contained into the cable shall be of a single mode type. The construction of
the cable shall be of an all-dielectric loose tube type and shall count96 fiber.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 10
4.1.5 A: Number of Fibers and Color Coding

The original color coding system shall be clearly visible throughout the life of the fiber cable.
The fiber color coding shall be repeated for each loose tube. Fiber Color Coding for 96 fibers
shall follow the color convention as specified below:
1. Red
2. Blue
3. Green
4. White
5. Yellow
6. Grey
7. Orange
8. Brown
9. Violet
10. Black
11. Rose
12. Aqua
4.1.5 B: Loose Tube Color Coding details

Each loose tube for 96 fibers shall follow the color convention as specified below:
1. Red
2. Blue
3. Green
4. White
5. Yellow
6. Grey
7. Orange
8. Brown
The Contractor shall perform field splices at the OPGW junction point only. The fusion
splicing method shall be performed and all splices shall be housed into appropriate
weatherproof closure devices.
The fiber optic cable shall be terminated at the ODF with an appropriate fan-out kit, pigtails
and SC type connector type

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 11
4.1.5 C: FO Cable Typical Cross section details
Cross section details of Fiber Optic cables is as specified below for reference
4.1.6 Optical Distribution Frame
The Contractor shall supply optical distribution frames (ODFs) sized to provide termination
to the SDH multiplexers optical interfaces and the incoming fiber optic cable. The panels
shall be of a rack-mount type and accommodate 96 fibers with all accessories (Pigtail,
Splice protector and splicing cassette etc.). All optical adapters provided within the ODFs
shall be of SC type.
4.1.7 Cabinet
The SDH multiplexers, access multiplexers, interface distribution frames and optical
distribution frames shall be housed in metallic free standing modular cabinets IP 51 (IEC
60297) with proper ventilation to avoid overheating. Cabinet shall come with all wiring and
terminal to allow connection between modules and terminal blocks for external cables.
The terminal blocks strips shall be of metallic rails mounted terminal plate type. Exterior
cables will enter from bottom plate of cabinet by means of cable glands.
The cabinet will carry an nameplate indicating the specific equipment identification provided
by the Owner and SDH link destination. Cabinet shall include hinged doors for convenient
access to all modules and terminal blocks. Multiplexer Cabinet shall be equipped with alarm
LEDs on the top to show presence of Major/Minor Alarms in the equipment, if any.
4.1.8 Power Distribution Panel
The power supply system shall include a dc distribution panel with redundant 125 Vdc to
48 Vdc converters, if required, that shall be housed in a power supply cabinet equipped with

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 12
circuit breakers and output terminals suitable for the loads and including spares outputs for
future uses. This power supply facility shall provide power to the SDH and access
multiplexers and to all telecommunications facilities requiring uninterruptible dc power
supply. In case of availability of redundant 48V system in the substation, all telecom
equipment shall be directly powered with 48V DC chargers,
4.2 Engineering Services
The Contractor is responsible for the design and engineering activities leading to the proper
supply, installation and commissioning of a SDH Optical Fiber Communications System that
will satisfy acceptable functionality and operability criteria. The particularities of operation
and network configuration of this system is defined with more details in the description of
the Scope of Work of Section 4, Part I. The proposed SDH/PDH shall be designed such
that at any stage, single point failure shall not jeopardize the complete traffic/equipment.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review to the Employer the analysis, calculation
and equipment configuration necessary to ensure that the design meets the performance
objectives for each link and of the overall SDH network. The Contractor shall be available
to participate to design review meetings at the Employer’s facilities.
The following performance criteria shall be considered in the design calculations:
 maximum bit-error-rate (BER) of 10-6 for the STM-64 links and the data interfaces;
 self-healing protection of no more than 3 ms.
The engineering documents to be delivered by the Contractor shall include, in addition to
the general documents, the following specific SDH Optical Fiber Communications System
documents:
 SDH links performance calculations;

 SDH channel plan.
The Contractor shall insure full compatibility of proposed equipment with existing network
facilities and with others proposed by the Contractor to allow full integration of the new
facilities.
4.3 Interface with Other Equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure proper interface of the SDH Optical
Fiber Communications System with the following facilities:
 The required redundant 125 Vdc power supply circuits for telecommunications facilities
at the 125 V d.c. main distribution panel. The 125 V d.c. main distribution panel is to be
supplied by others;
 The junction of the fiber optic cable to the outdoor OPGW cable. The OPGW cable is to
be supplied by others;
 The voice and data circuits to the SDH system supporting the telephony, SCADA, tele
protection and LAN networks at the interface distribution frames. The Contractor shall
be responsible to implement the telephony, SCADA and tele protection networks as

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 13
specified in the Scope of Works, Volume II, Section 1, Part I of tender documents.
4.4 Spare Parts and Maintenance Facilities
The spare parts and maintenance facilities required for the proper continuous operation and
maintenance of the SDH Optical Fiber Communications System shall be provided by the
Contractor. The maintenance facilities shall allow the following:
 Communications test equipment to verify the communications performance during the

operation or in such a way to avoid interfering with normal course of operation;
 maintenance accessories specific to the supplied equipment: extension card, jumpers,
jacks;
 software any specialized interface or cable as required to access /maintain equipment.
All equipment shall include adequate supervision and tests facilities to allow preventive and
corrective maintenance. Typically the following shall be provided:
 Visual Indication;
 Power supply;
 Input/output modules;
 Loss of signal;
 Synchronization loss;
 Transmitter/receiver failure;
 Test points;
 Digital port for connection of terminal or portable computer for diagnostic;
 Power, voltage, current in and out of equipment;
 All input/output signals of equipment interconnected with other equipment.
The description of the maintenance procedures to apply for the SDH fiber optic system shall
be detailed in a Maintenance Manual to be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall supply the following mandatory spare parts for the SDH fiber optic
system:
 One (1) SDH multiplexer chassis with two (2) module cards of each type supplied within
the installed system;
 One (1) access multiplexer chassis with two (2) module cards of each type supplied
within the installed system;
 100 meters of fiber optic cable with a set of twenty (20) SC connectors;
 One Laptop equipped with all software , licenses, cables as required for accessing and
maintenance and troubleshooting of telecom equipment
In addition to the mandatory spare parts, the Tenderer shall propose a list of recommended
spare parts. The Tenderer shall submit with is proposal a detailed and clear list of both
mandatory and recommended spare parts.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 14
4.5 Commissioning
The Contractor shall establish and perform the commissioning activities with the objective
of demonstrating the proper operation of the SDH Optical Fiber Communications System.
As a minimum, the commissioning activities shall include the following:
 Visual inspection of the installed equipment and verification of wiring, termination &
earthing;
 testing of each SDH link with recording of the data link performance;
 testing of each application channels with recording of the circuit’s performance (voice,
data and tele protection circuits).
 Testing of all module and traffic redundancy
 Integration with Network Management System
4.6 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide the documentation related to the SDH Optical Fiber
Communications System. As a minimum, this documentation shall include the following:
a) Instructions:
 Installation procedures;
 cabinet and chassis wiring and cabling;
 general cabling diagrams between SDH cabinets, other substation and outdoor
equipment;
 bill of material for each cabinet;
 drawing showing location of equipment in each substation;
 outline and assembly drawing of each cabinet showing the different modules and
terminals, wireways, switches, lamps, etc.
b) Maintenance and operation:
 Principles of operation and commissioning;

 preventive maintenance program, visual inspection, tests, adjustment and periodic
calibration;
 trouble shooting guide: procedure to locate fault by means of visual inspection and
specific tests;
 repair and replacement of modules and its components;
 technical description and schematic diagrams, detailed description of each module with
circuit diagrams, list of components with their characteristics.

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 15
c) Software:
 Programming and setting locally or remotely;

 trouble-shooting and on-line monitoring;
 compatible to standard PC with Microsoft Windows latest version of Windows 2000 and
NT 4.0.
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The supply shall include all necessary services and goods required to realize a SDH Fiber
Optic Communication System to support the CGGI Control Center and its substation
telecommunications requirements as follows:
For supply:
• Supply of the SDH and access multiplexers forming the terminal nodes of the fiber
optic network. These nodes shall fully and securely integrate and support the various
application networks (telephony, SCADA, tele protection and LANs) with appropriate
channel add and drop configuration and network protection;
• Supply of fiber optic cable and cableway accessories together with the necessary fiber
optic termination equipment;
• Supply of a permanent and central Network Management System with man machine
interface station computer and peripherals at GCCI Control Center.
For services:
• All engineering services such as engineering criteria and studies, supply

documentation and testing program;
• Field erection, testing and commissioning.
Others:
• All spare parts and instruments specifically identified by the Contractor and approved
by the Employer;
• Training at the Employer’s facility.
As a general rule, the final tests shall be carried out in accordance with the test program
previously submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Employer. The program for shop
and final field tests has to be presented for approval, at least one month before shop tests.
Failure to comply with this requirement will delay the tests. The test program shall contain
listing of tests and description of typical test form with reference values and sketches of test

016403-3000-47ES-6700 01 July 2024 16
set-ups. During the execution of tests, a test shall be repeated or extended at the Employer's
request, in case of doubt or abnormal situations.
The Contractor shall advise the Employer at least 30 days prior to final tests. Final test and
shop and field tests will be attended by the Employer's client and own representatives without
extra charge. It is expected that presence at shop final tests will last 20 days approximately.
All testing equipment will be provided by the Contractor without extra charge. The final field
commissioning shall be followed by a 30-day continuous operation of the whole system
preceded by an initial operation of seven days that can be interrupted twice for a maximum
of 36 hours after a 72-hour continuous operation. Failure to comply with these requirements
shall vanish all accumulated operation time and shall lead to resuming the whole operation
period. Upon completion of a 30-day continuous operation with all test results being
satisfactory accepted by the Employer and all repair done, the reception certificate will be
issued to the Contractor.
As an addition to the preceding, the following applies:
a. Test program shall be in accordance with standards mentioned in this document.
b. Test program shall comprise tests which measured values can be compared
with guaranteed values in Technical Schedules.
7 WARRANTY
With the completion of the site tests, and successful commissioning of the system, two
months of reliability run will start for the complete system. All failures or mal-operations shall
be logged during this period. The reliability run will restart in case of major
interruptions/failures are observed during the reliability run, at the discretion of the employer.
After two months of successful trial run, Taking-Over Certificate (TOC) will be issued by
GCCIA.
The warranty period for the complete telecommunication equipment shall be for minimum 24
months for the Main contractor but Warranty of telecommunication equipment & it’s
components shall be as per OEM warranty period (if warranty offered is more than 2 years).
Further, Main Contractor shall submit all the certificates in original to GCCIA regarding
Warranty of all the components.
Warranty period begins after taking over certificate issued by GCCIA. During the Warranty
period (Defect Liability Period), the Contractor shall be responsible for making good any
defects. All maintenance or repair works should be done in presence of GCCIA engineers
with an objective of imparting necessary skills /familiarization of the system. Contractor will
provide all necessary spares for replacement of faulty components during the two years
Defect Liability Period. During the warranty period, the system will be put into operation for
the intended purpose by GCCIA and utilized by GCCIA, including any system configuration
changes, if required. However, in the event of any failure in system, the contractor must offer
maintenance services on-call basis.
GCCIA
TELEPROTECTION SIGNALING SYSTEM
016403-3000-4CES-6110 Rev.01
July 2024
Tele protection Signaling System # Date Page

016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING SYSTEM 1
1.1 General 1
4.1 Equipment Technical Particulars 2

4.2 Tele protection Signalling Equipment 2
4.3 Engineering Services 2
4.4 Interface with other Equipment 3
4.5 Spare Parts and Maintenance Facilities 3
4.6 Commissioning 4
4.7 Documentation 4
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 5

016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 1
1 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING SYSTEM
1.1 General
This specification outlines technical requirements applicable to the design, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of tele protection links. The tele protection system in general consist
Stand-alone tele protection signaling equipment
The tele protection units shall be used to link distant substation protection relays to protect the
line bays from transmission line faults. The protection scheme can be based on direct,
permissive and blocking tripping.
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION:
IEC 60255 Electrical relays
IEC 60834 Performance and testing of teleprotection equipment of power

systems
IEC 60870 Part 2: Operating conditions Section1: Power supply and

electromagnetic compatibility. Section 2: Environmental
conditions (climatic, mechanical and other non-electrical
influences)
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION:
ITU-R G.703 Physical/Electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ORGANIZATION:
ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design,

Development, Production, Installation and Servicing
IEEE C37.94 Standard for N times 64 kbps Optical Fiber Interfaces between
Tele protection and Multiplexer Equipment
016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 2
4.1 Equipment Technical Particulars
This section provides equipment technical particulars applicable for the design and supply of
tele protection signaling system.
4.2 Tele protection Signalling Equipment
Contractor shall provide protection signaling terminals to meet the protection requirements in
accordance with Telecommunication block diagram.
The protection signaling equipment shall consist of transmitter/receiver line interface, input and
output relays and send/receive trip counters. It shall comply with the following technical
requirements:
 Solid state, modular design;

 Specific design for protection signaling applications over digital links;
 Properly interfaced with associated protective relay systems and SDH multiplexer
(digital link);
 Minimum 8 independent commands for digital interfaces;
 Equipped with facilities for testing each channel on an individual basis while the
equipment remains in service. Test facilities shall include local tests of transmitters
, receivers, end to end link tests and link loop tests;
 Equipped with manually resettable trip send and receive counters of each channel
located on, or adjacent to, the protection signaling equipment;
 Located at the same cubicle of associated relay panels;
 Equipped with a comprehensive set of alarms reporting, not limited to listed below:
- Power supply failure;
- Transmitter failure;
- Receiver failure;
- Transmission path failure.
 Power supplied from 110 VDC source;
 Transmission signaling time within 20 ms;
 Line interface of digital E1 unframed 2 Mbps / type for direct interface with the
SDH/PDH multiplexer;
 Integrated event recorder facility;
 Support management facility through PC terminal and Ethernet LAN interface
4.3 Engineering Services
Contractor is responsible for the design supply, installation, testing and commissioning of tele
protection signaling system which satisfies overall functionality and operation criteria. The
particulars of operation and network configuration of tele protection signaling system is more
detailed in Scope of Works- Volume II, Section 1, Part I of Tender documents.
016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 3
Contractor shall prepare and submit for Engineer/Authority review analysis, calculation and
equipment configuration necessary to prove the design and performance objectives for each
tele protection link. The Contractor shall be available to participate to design review meetings at
the Employer’s facilities.
The engineering documents to be delivered by the Contractor shall include, following specific
tele protection signaling system documents in addition to the general documents:
 SDH channel assignment for tele protection links;

 Tele protection transmission time criteria.
 Overall Tele protection Block diagram
4.4 Interface with other Equipment
Contractor shall ensure full compatibility of proposed equipment with existing Employer’s
network facilities and with others proposed by the Contractor to allow full integration of the new
facilities.
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure proper interface of the tele protection signaling
system with following facilities:
 The required 110 Vdc power circuit connection to tele protection signaling
equipment from protection panel power supply. Tele protection signaling
equipment shall be installed in appropriate protection panels;
 Connection interface with protection input/output relays to tele protection
signaling equipment. Contractor is responsible overall functioning of protection
relay system.
4.5 Spare Parts and Maintenance Facilities
Spare parts and maintenance facilities required for proper continuous operation and
maintenance of tele protection signaling equipment system shall be provided by the Contractor.
The maintenance facilities shall allow the following:
 Test and metering of the terminals to verify the proper operation in such a way to avoid
interfering with normal course of operation or causing a failure;
 Maintenance accessories specific to the supplied equipment: extension card, jumpers,
jacks;
 Tele protection unit loop testing by a single operator;
 Maintenance and setup through portable PC along with any specialized interface or
cable.
Maintenance procedures shall be detailed in Operation and Maintenance Manual to be
provided by the Contractor.
Contractor shall supply following mandatory spare parts:

016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 4
 One (1) tele protection signalling equipment chassis with two (2) module cards of each
type supplied within the installed system.
In addition to mandatory spare parts, Tenderer shall propose a list of recommended spare
parts. Tenderer shall submit with his proposal a detailed and clear list of both mandatory
and recommended spare parts.
4.6 Commissioning
Contractor shall establish and perform the commissioning activities with the objective of
demonstrating proper operation of tele protection signaling system. As a minimum,
commissioning activities shall include the following:
 Visual inspection of the installed equipment;

 Testing of each tele protection link with recording of the data link performance;
 End to End testing of each tele protection commands with recording of their performance
results.
4.7 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide complete documentation related to the tele protection signaling
system. As a minimum, this documentation shall include the following:
a) Instructions:
- Installation procedures;
- Cabinet and chassis wiring and cabling;
- Bill of material for each cabinet;
- Drawing showing location of equipment in each substation;
- Outline and assembly drawing of each cabinet showing the different
modules and terminals, wireways, switches, lamps, etc.
b) Maintenance and operation:
- Principles of operation and commissioning;
- Preventive maintenance program, visual inspection, tests, adjustment and
periodic calibration;
- Trouble shooting guide: procedure to locate fault by means of visual
inspection and specific tests;
- Repair and replacement of modules and its components;
- Technical description and schematic diagrams, detailed description of each
module with circuit diagrams, list of components with their characteristics.
c) Software:
- Programming and setting locally or remotely;
- Trouble-shooting and on-line monitoring;
- Compatible to standard PC with Microsoft Windows latest version of
Windows.
016403-3000-4CES-6110 01 July 2024 5
5 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
As a general rule, the Contractor is liable to include all materials and components for complete
and satisfactory operation of the tele protection signaling system including:
 Tele protection signalling stand- equipment installed in line protection relay cabinets;
 Interface cabling and wiring to tele protection signalling equipment enabling full operational
power transmission lines tele protection links;
 Software and interface for PC programming and setting.
Test programs shall prove compliance to specified standards, suppliers design and functionality
of proposed system.
Test program shall include as a minimum:
 List and identification of equipment under test;

 Environment tests to ensure proper operation at specified environmental conditions;
 Operation test to verify compliance to functional requirements;
 Metering of Contractors guaranteed characteristics.
GCCIA
SUBSTATION
ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS
016403-2000-47FE-4000 Rev.01
July 2024
Substations Electromechanical Works # Date Page

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
SUBSTATION i
ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS i
1 GENERAL 1
1.1 Object 1
1.2 Scope of Works 1
1.3 Standards and Codes 4
1.4 Program of Works 4
1.5 Safety Measures 4
1.5.1 HSE Plan 5
1.5.2 Prevention of Accidents 5
1.5.3 Work in Energized Area 6
1.6 Engineering 6
1.6.1 Equipment Layout 8
1.6.2 Grounding Grid 10
1.6.3 Electrical Distribution 11
1.6.4 Cabling 12
1.7 Quality Control During Performance of Works 13
1.8 Material and Equipment (Not Applicable in Current Project) 14
1.8.1 Reception of Equipment on Site 14
1.8.2 Storage and Security 14
1.9 Tools, Instruments and Machinery 15
1.10 Engineer’s Accommodation 15
1.10.1 Engineer’s Accommodation at Site 15
1.10.2 Site Office 15
2 SITE FACILITIES 16
2.1 Office and Storage 16

2.2 Mobilizing and Demobilizing 16
2.3 Identification Board 17
3 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF AIS AND GIS EQUIPMENT 17
3.1 Erection Procedures 17

3.2 GIS equipment 18
3.2.1 Manufacturers Drawings and Instructions Manual 18
3.2.2 Reception of Equipment 18
3.2.3 Erection and Installation 18
3.2.4 Special Care 18
3.3 Shunt Reactors 19
3.3.5 Specialized Tools and Materials 21
3.4 Circuit Breakers 22

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 ii
3.4.1 Manufacturers drawings and instructions 22

3.4.5 Specialized Tools and Material 23
3.5 Erection of Disconnect Switches 23
3.6 Surge Arresters 25
3.7 Instrument Transformers 26
3.8 Emergency Diesel Generator 27
3.9 Earthing Reactor and Substation Service Transformer 29
3.10 Strain Buses and Overhead Ground wires (Not applicable) 30
3.11 Rigid Busses 33
3.12 Grounding Grid 35

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 iii

3.13 Outdoor Lighting 37
3.13.5 Specialized tools and Materials 38
4 ELECTROMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUBSTATION BUILDING 39
4.1 Installation of panels, chargers and batteries 39

4.2 Batteries 42
4.2.4 Special Cares 43
4.2.5 Specialized Tolls and Material 43
4.3 Insulated Cables 44
4.3.3 Laying and Installing Cables 45
5 IINSPECTION, TEST AND SITE COMMISSIONING 50
5.1 General 50
5.2 Inspection, Tests on Completion 50
5.3 Scope of Commissioning 51
5.4 Organization 53
5.4.1 Commissioning Committee 53
5.4.2 Commissioning Manager 54
5.4.3 Commissioning Supervisor 54
5.4.4 Manufacturer Representative 54
5.4.5 Contractor Responsibility 55
5.4.6 Engineer’s Representative 56
5.5 Individual Equipment 56
5.6 Energization Program 57
5.6.1 Procedure for Preliminary Operation 57
5.6.2 Procedure for Commercial Operation 58
5.6.3 Energization Checks 59

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 iv
5.6.4 Energization 59
5.6.5 Post-Energization Checks 59
5.7 Summary of Commissioning Tests and Checks 59
5.7.1 List of Equipment to be Tested (non-limitative) 59
5.7.2 Electromechanical Equipment Inspection and Tests 60
5.8 On-Site Operation Training and Supervision 70
5.8.1 Training 70
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 1
1 GENERAL
1.1 Object
This document outlines few specific technical requirements to realize engineering, procurement,
installation, testing and commissioning of New 400 kV substations in United Arab Emirates
(UAE) & Sultanate of Oman as part of 400 kV Oman direct Link project of Gulf Cooperation
Council Interconnection Authority.
It is intended that this specification together with the applicable Technical Specifications,
drawings, Instruction to Tenderers, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of
Contract and Tender Forms shall form the Tender Documents which will ultimately become a
part of the Contract between the Authority and the Contractor for the project.
1.2 Scope of Works
The Contractor shall engineer, design, supply, manufacture, factory test, supply, deliver, sort at
site, install, test, commission and put into efficient and trouble-free commercial operation on
lumpsum turnkey basis above said New Substations and associated modification works. The
electrical layout drawings enclosed within the bidding documents shall be used as a reference
to identify all works needed to provide a completely functional installation namely (not
limitative):
New 400 kV Substations
LOT 1
 New 400 kV Madinat Zayed Substation near Madina Sheikh Zayed District in Abu Dhabi
Emirate of UAE
 Remote end modification works (2 Bays) at existing GCCIA 400 kV SILA Substation in Abu
Dhabi Emirate of UAE to facilitate connection of the proposed 400 kV Double Circuit OHL
between Existing 400 kV SILA S/S to New 400 kV Madinat Zayed S/S.
LOT 2
 New 400 kV Substation at IBRI in Ibri Wilayat in Al Dhahira Governorate of Sultanate of

Oman
 Remote end modification works at OETC 400 kV IBRI substation (2 Bays) and
interconnection work between GCCIA IBRI Substation & OETC IBRI Substation.
General Requirements:
 Transportation and installation only of equipment and material supplied by the Employer;
 Supply and installation of all other equipment and material to complete the installation;
 Erection of substation gantry structure and equipment;
 Erection of isolator strings and strain busses (with OPGW) and connection to transmission
lines;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 2
 Installation of buried grounding grid and connection to equipment;

 Installation of GIS equipment, including main components (circuit breakers, disconnect
switches, earthing switches, instrument transformers, surge arresters), bus bars, busducts,
SF6-air bushings, SF6-oil (reactors) terminals, SF6-cable terminals, Local Control Cabinet
(LCC) and their related installations (SF6 instrumentation, complete wiring between GIS
equipment, and LCC, steel supports, grounding, etc.
 Erection of MV switchgear, instrument transformers, insulators and surge arresters on
pedestal supports along with rigid busses;
 Erection of oil filled equipment: reactors and Auxiliary transformers;
 Erection of MV equipment;
 Connection of equipment with busses;
 Installation of power and control cables in trenches and in control building;
 Installation of junction boxes;
 Installation of lighting fixtures on substation structures and on poles;
 Installation of protection and control panels AC/DC transfer and distribution panels,
chargers and batteries and fault recorder panels;
 Installation of emergency diesel generator;
 Connection of all power and control cables between:
o GIS equipment and its Local Control Centres (LCC),
o Between LCC’s (interlocking),
o a.c. and d.c. distribution panels to GIS and LCC equipment,
o a.c. auxiliary supply for outdoor lighting,
o a.c. and d.c. auxiliary supply for indoor lighting (civil works)
 Installation of DC Systems
 Installation of DCS & SCADA system
 Installation of Tele protection panels
 Installation of Fiber-optic digital communication multiplexer equipment
 Grounding grid (civil works);
 Grounding connection of electromechanical equipment to the grounding grid;
 Tests and commissioning of all electromechanical equipment.
 Above list is non-exhaustive and bidder shall refer relevant sections in bid documents for
complete Technical Specifications.
Interface with Over Head Lines:
The successful tenderers shall cooperate & coordinate as necessary with OHL contractors
concerned to facilitate landing & termination of proposed Overhead lines and associated
communication links at respective station ends as detailed below.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 3
At SILA S/S – To facilitate Double Circuit OHL between SILA and Madinat Zayed (Lot 1)
Madinat Zayed Substation –To facilitate Double Circuit OHLs SILA- Madinat Zayed & Madinat
Zayed -IBRI (Lot 1)
IBRI S/S -To facilitate Double circuit OHL between Madinat Zayed and IBRI (Lot 2)
Further the successful contractors for Madinat Zayed Substation & IBRI Substation, if awarded
separately shall be responsible to coordinate among themselves as required for protection,
communication, SCADA, telecom & tele-protection works connected with the proposed double
circuit OHL between these two stations.
Related Works:
The layout drawings included within the bid documents shall be considered as conceptual and
shall be used as reference. The contractor shall rearrange the design, as required, based on
the approved plot and final OHL routing without any contractual implication to GCCIA. The size
of substation buildings shown in the conceptual drawings are the minimum requirements to
achieve the specified clearances and shall be considered only as guidance. The room sizes
shall be increased, if required, to achieve the minimum clearance as specified, based on the
size of equipment finally approved, without any contractual implication to GCCIA.
Briefly, the works shall include:
 Obtain all requisite statutory permits for allocated substation plot and take possession of
same. Obtain all necessary permits & NOCs for construction of substation from all
statutory Authorities concerned.
 Coordinate, obtain necessary access & work permits, safety outages, sanctions for tests
etc. for existing substations from local transmission utilities and GCCIA as required.
 Carryout theodolite/LIDOR survey of site and soil investigations as necessary
 Design & Build foundations, station buildings, outdoor yard and other structures as
required based on soil investigations and other pertinent requirements
 Design, manufacture, factory test, ship, deliver and store required 420 kV GIS, Shunt
Reactors, Auxiliary Transformers, MV Switchgear, LV Switchgear & boards, MV, LV,
Control & Communication Cables, Protection, SCADA, Telecom, Neutral Grounding and
Station Grounding Systems.
 Supply and install all other equipment and material to complete the installation.
 Install, test, commission and put to commercial operation of all above equipment &
systems
 Design, procure, install and commission all associated Electrical & mechanical systems,
Fire Alarm & Protection systems, Illumination system & other requisite auxiliary systems.
Further explanation about the Scope of Works is described in the Volume II, Section 1, Part I of
Tender documents.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 4
In addition to above mentioned permanent installation, the Contractor shall provide at his own
cost all necessary provisional facilities to perform his work such as storage area, water and
electricity supply, site office facilities, lodging facilities for his personnel when necessary.
When there is no availability of power or water at site, the Contractor shall provide diesel
generator of suitable capacity with fuel and transport water for use by his personnel and for
construction purpose.
The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) standards are given as reference for
construction or for the quality of material. In addition to aforesaid, reference is also made to
ANSI (American National Standard Institute), ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials),
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers), ECIA (Electronic Components Industry
Association) and other standards from recognized international organizations for which
Contractor may propose to the Engineer for usage of such equivalent standards.
In case of any conflict with the referred standards and codes, the following order of priority shall
be observed:
a) Contract clauses.
b) Electricity safety code or regulation of the related countries.
c) IEC standards.
d) ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, ECIA and other standards.
1.4 Program of Works
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a work program along with planned milestones for
approval of Authority/Engineer. The program shall contain:
 The order in which the Contractor proposes to carry out the Works (including design,
manufacture, delivery to Site, construction, erection, testing and commissioning);
 The times by which submission and approval of the Contractor's Drawings are required;
 The times by which the Contractor requires the Authority to provide access to various sites
and outages etc.,
In preparing the program, the Contractor shall ensure that any activities, which require an
outage of existing plant will only be accorded during the months of November to April inclusive
in any year. The agreed program will be used by the Authority/Engineer to monitor the progress
of work.
1.5 Safety Measures
The Contractor shall implement comprehensive safety measures for his personnel and site
activities in accordance with safety regulation applicable in the country where the works are
being executed.
The Contractor shall designate an HSE officer in charge for each work location who has
necessary statutory training. This officer will have the authority to stop the work at any time, if
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 5
he judges that safety of personnel is compromised or the method or equipment or machinery /

plant employed to perform the work is not in compliance with the norms & requirements.
Further the officer shall be given right to expel any individual who does not comply with
stipulated safety rules.
1.5.1 HSE Plan
Within one month from the contract signature, the Contractor shall present a HSE plan for the
Engineer’ s review and acceptance. The plan shall cover essentially the following aspects:
 Name of HSE officer and proof of adequate training;

 Safety rules for Contractor personnel and visitors;
 Means for fast transportation of injured personnel;
 Hygiene on site of works (Potable water supply, closets);
 Security against environmental conditions, animals and burglars;
 Safety against electrical shock;
 First aid measures on site;
 Accessibility to nearby hospital and clinic at any time with arrangement for standby medical
personnel;
 Supply of requisite PPE to work personnel and visitors
1.5.2 Prevention of Accidents
All Contractor’s personnel shall be provided with properly identification to control their access to
the site of works. Unauthorized persons shall be prevented from entering the premises.
Identification shall also be granted to the Engineer and his representatives for inspection of the
works.
As a matter, the following minimum measures shall be implemented:
 There shall be at least two individuals for every 30 workmen who are trained in
administration of first aid and readily available first aid kits;
 Workmen responsible for manoeuvring or operation of electrical equipment in the works
shall be trained to switch off / disconnect supply and attend any worker who has been
electrocuted inadvertently;
 Equipment of 40 kg or less shall be handled by a minimum of two workmen. Equipment
weighing more than shall always be handled using, crane or hoist;
 All tools shall be provided invariably with hard wood handles with no loose parts or sharp
edges;
 Cutting tools shall be with proper handle length, security lock and custom storae case;
 Spanners shall be with requisite lever lengths and use of external extensions shall be
avoided;
 Handling of conductors or metallic cables close to energized lines or substation bus shall
not be permitted;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 6
 No work shall be performed unless same is by a minimum of two workmen;

 Metallic ladders / Scaffolds shall be used for works at height.
1.5.3 Work in Energized Area
When the works are involve modifying or extending an existing substation where workmen need
access in to energized area of the switchyard, the Contractor shall present to the Engineer, a
detailed work plan explaining the methodology to accomplish each task along with Risk
Assessment for review and approval. The Engineer will coordinate with the substation operator
to obtain the requisite permit for the Contractor personal to access the area. Work on live or
energized portion or equipment is strictly prohibited.
The Contractor shall be responsible to implement all safety measures for work in energized
area by usage of padlocks, temporary fences, caution signs, grounding tools, colored tape to
limit the zone etc. to the acceptance of Engineer and operator of the substation.
The contractor shall consider and familiarize himself with following key aspects:
 Procedure for applying safety rules:

- Identification of electrical zone isolating points
- Request for removing an equipment from service
- Setting equipment out of service (padlocks, signs, grounding, etc…)
 Work permit
- Definition of work safe zone (Planning of safety measures, identification of dangerous
points, application of safety measures, etc.…)
- Limit of work safe zone
- Instruction to personnel
- Presence of person in charge of works
- Interrupting the works
 Test
- End of work and leaving work zone
- Take away of the protected zone
 End of work advice
 Work ruling (authorization, self-protection, agreement, holding by operator, etc.…);
 Training of personnel;
 Control of safety equipment.
1.6 Engineering
The drawings showing the standard arrangement of the HV substations are enclosed herein.
Conceptual layouts and scheme drawings along with the standard diagrams included in bid
documents are typical and indicative only. Contractor is responsible to engineer, design and
prepare actual arrangement/layouts, setting out plans & scheme drawings as required.
In order to ease the identification of equipment and material during the project a four-digit
number shall be assigned to each item. The numbering system is based on the following
assignation:
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 7
3XXX Substation structures

41XX Switching equipment
42XX Transformers and reactors
43XX AC Substation service equipment
44XX DC substation service equipment
45XX Junction boxes and lighting
46XX Insulators, busses, conductors and connectors
47XX Grounding Grid Material
49XX Electromechanical equipment Test instruments and tools
51XX Control, metering and protection panels and equipment
52XX Power and control panels cables
59XX Test instruments and tools
68XX GCCIA control center SCADA equipment
611X Tele protection panels and equipment
62XX Substation SCADA equipment
66XX Telephone private branch exchange and public address system equipment
67XX Fiber-optic digital communication multiplexer equipment
Spares identification shall be identified referring to the corresponding main equipment code
under which the spare belongs to followed by letter “R” and a sequential digit.
The format and number of copies of documents to be submitted is elaborated in specification

General Technical requirement 016403-3000-47ES-0000.
The Contractor shall perform all engineering design and site measurement necessary for the
construction of the electromechanical works namely (not limitative):
 Measurement of soil resistivity (Wenner Method);

 Design and calculation of the buried grounding grid (As per IEEE 80);
 Detailed single line diagram and switchyard layout drawings with equipment installation
and connection drawings;
 Design and calculation of strain busses tension and sag;
 Design and calculation (load tree) of substation gantry structures and pedestals for
equipment;
 Design and calculation of rigid busses;
 Bill of material for main equipment and miscellaneous material;
 Batteries and chargers sizing calculations;
 Emergency diesel generator sizing calculations;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 8
 Substation service load calculations, including the loads required for Control, Protection,
SCADA and Telecommunication equipment (by others);
 Equipment connection diagram with calculation of voltage drops for ac power cables and
dc supply to switching equipment;
 Schedule of control and power cables;
 Programming, configuration and settings of all software activated digital devices.
All these are subject to Engineer’s approval prior to proceed with any work. If the Contractor
deem to start the work without the Engineer’s consent or approval, the Contractor will have to
perform any corrective work that may result from Engineer’s review and will not be entitled to
any claim or compensation for such work.
The Contractor shall deliver an “As-built” version of all drawings and calculation briefs at the end
of construction works.
In addition to the previous, the Contractor shall provide complete sets of operation manuals that
includes detailed instructions of on each equipment and commissioning test results.
The format and quantity of documents is defined in the enclosed General Technical
Requirement (016403-2000-47ES-0000).
1.6.1 Equipment Layout
The layout drawings included in Section 4, Part III within the bid documents shall be considered
as conceptual and shall be used as reference. The contractor shall rearrange the design, as
required, based on the approved plot and final OHL routing without any contractual implication
to GCCIA. The size of substation buildings shown in the conceptual drawings are the minimum
requirements to achieve the specified clearances and shall be considered only as guidance.
The room sizes shall be increased, if required, to achieve the minimum clearance as specified,
based on the size of equipment finally approved, without any contractual implication to GCCIA.
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed substation electrical design
comprising:
a) Single line diagram with main apparatus characteristics.
b) AIS and GIS overview and side views to scale showing equipment arrangement and
dimensions, bill of material numbers (as connection details, lighting fixture, control
building outlines, fences, circulating roads, electrical clearances, sag and tension, table
for strained busses, insulators strings details, etc.
c) Control building overview and details to scale showing equipment arrangement and
dimensions, bill of material numbers, connections details, etc.
d) Bill of material: a complete bill of material where identification of equipment conforms to

specified numbering system for this project. Equipment number is used as a general
reference for the project on drawings, packaging, billing, customs documents, etc. Major
equipment has been identified by the Engineer in this specification. In the case of minor
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 9
equipment to be defined by the Contractor, the Engineer will assign a range of numbers
for proper coordination.
The equipment layout shall be based on the following criteria:
a) Electrical clearances: Distances between live parts and to grounded structure shall be
based on BIL, electrode configuration and environmental conditions. Distance to earth
shall be sufficient to ensure safety of personnel or vehicle circulating in the substation:
distance is calculated as the sum of object height plus clearance established previously
(refer to IEC 60071 and CIGRÉ Committee 23 papers).
b) Circulation within substation: Layout shall allow access to all apparatus with vehicle
equipped with necessary facilities (crane ...) for easy maintenance or retrieval.
c) Expansion: Design shall allow for future expansion with additional line feeders and
transformer/reactor bays.
d) Personnel access to live parts: Where live part of an equipment could be accessed by
personnel, a structure or a pedestal shall be provided to insure that a minimum safety
distance (based on electrical clearance) be maintained between a person and the live
parts with an arm fully extended in any direction. For reference purpose, personnel
height with fully extended arm is 2.5 m minimum.
e) Short-circuit withstand: Equipment and busses shall withstand the dynamic and thermal
constraints of specified short-circuit currents.
f) Busses: The Contractor shall include all material to complete the bus arrangement. In
addition to ampacity and short-circuit current capability, the bus shall be designed in
consideration with mechanical constraints such as wind forces, seismic reactions,
vertical deflections and thermal expansion (refer to ANSI/IEEE 605). Connections shall
be made by using flexible braided connectors or conductors with corresponding
hardware. Rigid connection to main equipment is not allowed. Means shall be provided
to avoid corona discharge using adequate hardware for connection, joints, termination
shield, etc.
All connections shall be mechanical. On site welding is prohibited.
g) Structure load tree: Drawing with the isometric representation of the substation
structures showing the forces resulting from strain busses, incoming lines, short circuit
forces and equipment weight, rigid busses, seismic efforts, etc…
This will be used by the substation structure manufacturer to make the detailed design of the
structures.
h) Lighting: The lighting fixtures shall be installed on self-standing poles and columns of
the various structures to ease circulation in the switchyard and illuminate specific control
cabinet areas (circuit breakers, switches, transformers, etc.).
The recommended lighting levels are as follows:
 Power transformer 25 Lux (min.);

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 10
 Switchyard "General": 25 Lux (min.);

 Access roads: 25 Lux (min.);
i) Spacing for maintenance: Equipment shall be accessible for safe maintenance. As

basic guidelines, maintenance zone of an equipment is defined as being 4.3 m vertically
and 3.3 m horizontally with a minimum distance from live part of 2.5 m plus the
corresponding insulating distance (IEC 60071).
1.6.2 Grounding Grid
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed grounding grid design
comprising:
a) Overview of substation grounding grid.
b) Equipment grounding connections details.
c) Bill of material where the various items are identified as per numbering system specified
by the Engineer.
d) Calculation brief: Table of measurements on site with resistance versus distance

curves, calculation of first- and second-layer resistivity with curves of resistivity as a
function of distance, calculations of grid resistance, step and touch voltages (refer to
IEEE 80 and BS7430 design guide).
The grid design shall be based on the following criteria:
a) Measurements shall be carried out at site by using the Wenner 4 electrodes method
along longitudinal, transversal and diagonal axis in both directions. Measurements will
be validated by comparing results plotted as measured resistance versus distance
curves where closed match shall be obtained between the curves along the same axis
and relative match between curves of different axis. Otherwise a new set of
measurements shall be obtained using the same method. Typical values of resistivity
are shown in appendix.
b) Single phase to ground fault current used for purpose of grid design shall be the highest
obtained from any fault occurring at the boundary of substation considering the ultimate
configuration of substation. Reduction of earth current by line shield wire shall also be
considered.
c) The resistance of the grid shall be lower than the lowest short-circuit direct sequence
impedance (at any voltage level) to ensure that all circuit remain effectively grounded.
Voltage rise shall be limited to 5 kV maximum with the substation ultimate equipment
configuration.
d) Buried grid conductor shall be of 300 mm2 tinned/Bare copper minimum size with
thermo-welded type connectors. Jumpers from grounding grid to surface equipment
shall be 300 mm2 tinned/bare copper. Grounding rods shall be used to take benefit of
lower resistivity from second layer. Smaller 70 mm2 shall be used for Fence, HVAC
duct, hand rails, sprinkler, foot bridges, door, rebar, etc. panels and junction boxes.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 11
e) All surface equipment and metal support or structures shall be properly grounded by
means of jumpers and mechanical connectors.
f) Surge arresters’ counters shall be connected directly to grounding grid with
1000 V PVC insulated conductor (300 mm2 Cu). Connection from arrester to counter
shall be made with accessories supplied by the arrester manufacturers.
g) HV switch mechanism shall be grounded to the metal structure by means of a slip ring
and braided jumper. For safety of operator, a grounding pad shall be provided at ground
surface located by the switch steering wheel or handle.
h) Transformer and reactors neutral point shall be directly connected to grounding grid.
i) Ground bus located in equipment cabinet or panels shall be connected to grid by using a
conductor.
j) A grounding conductor shall be laid along with power cables set and connected to cable
shield and to ground at both extremes.
k) Control building: The grid shall be extended to the control building by laying in the cable
trenches a grounding conductor connected to equipment or panel grounding busses. A
grounding bus (6 x 50 mm Cu minimum) shall be installed at the bottom of main control
room and equipment room walls and connected to grid conductor located in cable
trenches. Telecommunication equipment will be interconnected radially by using an
insulated (1000 V) cable (185 mm 2 Cu) with a single connection point to grid to avoid
circulating currents.
l) Substation fence: Steel meshed fence shall be connected to grid at each pole. Doors
shall be linked to pivot by using a flexible conductor.
m) Grid shall be extended outside substation fence perimeter for protection of individuals
touching the fence.
n) Incoming telephone cables will have their shield open circuited and wires connected to
HV optocoupling isolator to access substation exchange.
1.6.3 Electrical Distribution
The Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval of electrical design distribution as follows
(non limitative):
a) AC distribution system three lines diagrams.

b) DC distribution system two lines diagrams.
c) Distribution system connection diagrams for main AC and DC distribution panels.
d) Detailed AC load schedule with confirmation of station service transformer power rating.
e) Detailed DC load schedule with calculation brief of battery and charger capacity.
The design shall be based on the followings (non limitative):
a) Redundancy: Independent redundant Supplies shall be segregated from one another to

ensure availability of supplies: redundant station service transformers with individual
cabling to transfer panel, standby diesel generator with independent control supply,
redundant battery chargers with individual AC inputs from AC distribution panel and DC
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 12
incoming feeders to DC distribution panel with separate moulded circuit breakers,

segregated DC supplies for main and backup protection panels, etc.
b) Continuity of service: Loads shall be assigned to distribution circuits in such a way that
upon failure of one circuit, service is not lost completely in one sector of substation yard
or control building: adjacent outlet or lighting fixtures, HV switch mechanism shall be fed
by different circuits.
c) Voltage regulation: Circuit shall be designed for ± 5 % voltage regulation at AC load

terminals and maximum/minimum DC operating voltage for supplied DC equipment.
d) Short-circuit interrupting capacity: The short-circuit interrupting duty of protective

devices shall be as specified in general prescriptions. Related circuit components shall
be able to withstand the short-circuit current until fault is cleared.
e) DC supply capacity and autonomy: Contractor shall establish the capacity of station
batteries and chargers on the basis of 8 hours autonomy and recharging time of 10
hours while supplying DC station loads. During the autonomy period, batteries shall
sustain loads from control, protective and telecommunication equipment. In the case of
control and protective DC supply, battery shall be capable of manoeuvring all substation
switchgear during one minute at the beginning and the end of 8 hours period. The
capacities indicated in the technical specifications are minimum values.
1.6.4 Cabling
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a detailed cabling design comprising
(non-limitative):
a) Cable routing diagrams showing path of cables from control building to the various
apparatus and between apparatus.
b) List of cables showing cable number, origin and destination, type of cable, estimated
length and nature of signals transmitted.
c) Cable bill of material: Total length of cable with safety margin for each type of cable
The design shall be based on the followings (non-limitative):
a) Cable circuit segregation: A single cable shall not carry signals from redundant circuits,
from AC and DC supplies at the same time, from distinct DC supplies, with AC power
purposes, with instruments transformers current or voltage.
b) Current transformer cables shall only carry current from this current transformer set.
The size of conductor shall be 6 mm 2 Cu minimum. All terminals of individual cores
shall be connected to the incoming terminal strip. Jumpers are used to close the three
phase circuit and link to the outgoing terminal strip which is connected to the cable
departing for control building.
c) Voltage transformers cables shall only carry voltage from this voltage transformers set.
The size of conductor shall be 4 mm 2 Cu minimum. Three poles mini moulded circuit
breaker shall be used for the incoming voltage signal and each individual feeder
departing for the control building panels.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 13
d) Spare wires: Contractor shall make provision for spare wires in such a way that there is
at least 10 % spare wires available in the cables linking two equipments or junction
boxes.
e) Cable laying: Cables shall be laid separately by voltage level. The AC power cables
shall be located preferably at bottom level of cable trenches and DC cables at higher
level.
1.7 Quality Control During Performance of Works
The Contractor shall implement a quality control program for the performance of the work. This
program shall be based on the principles of ISO 9001 standard.
The program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to work
commencement. The Engineer will be verifying various aspects of the quality control program
(namely):
 Q.A organization chart;

 Level of authority and competence of quality control personnel;
 Control of material;
 Test facilities, tools and instruments;
 Follow-up and inspection of each piece of work in accordance with the drawings;
 Non-conformance report and corrective measures;
 Q.A log book;
 Control of documentation at site;
The Contractor’s inspector shall maintain the following Q.A. records at site (as minimum) that
can be reviewed by the Engineer at any time:
 File with verification forms of each piece of work and test results for the material used for
that piece of work. The various steps of compulsory inspection will be defined within the
quality program as approved by the Engineer for each piece of work.
 Non-conformance report NCR file. The reports will stay open until satisfactory corrective
measures have been implemented. A periodic review of NCR reports shall be performed
with the Engineer to appraise the relative quality of works performed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall make a rigorous follow-up of all NCR reports.
 As built drawings: the Contractor shall keep an “As Built” mark-up copy of all drawings for
reference by the Engineer. Any substantial deviation from the original construction
drawings shall be documented by generating an NCR for which the Contractor’ s
engineering design team shall be asked to answer and solve the issue.
 The mark-up drawings will then be used by the Contractor to prepare the final “As built”
drawings that will be handed to the Engineer.
 The resident Contractor’s inspector is responsible for the application of the quality
assurance program at site and for keeping the corresponding records.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 14
1.8 Material and Equipment (Not Applicable in Current Project)
The Engineer will coordinate in advance with the Contractor the time and point of delivery of all
equipment and material supplied by the Employer.
The Contractor will advise the Engineer of the schedule of transportation and delivery of all
equipment and material that is included in his scope of supply.
1.8.1 Reception of Equipment on Site
The Contractor is responsible for the reception of equipment and material at site:
a) Visual Inspection:
 Any damage to equipment packing or container shall be recorded in detail;

 Any leak of liquid or gas shall be recorded.
Special attention shall be given to fragile equipment such as porcelain insulators and control
and protection panels.
b) Packing List
An inventory of all shipment shall be made of each single item shown on the packing list.
Any sign of packing unauthorized opening or violation shall require a detailed inventory of the
content of the packing to record any missing or stolen part.
The equipment and material packing shall not be opened until the Contractor is ready to
proceed with the installation.
Damage reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. In case that the damaged equipment
comes from the Employer, the Engineer will take necessary measures for repairs or
replacement. Otherwise, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to seek for repair or
replacement.
Once ready for assembly and erection of equipment, a detailed inventory of each packing will
be made to insure completeness and integrity. Care shall be taken to avoid mixing parts from
identical equipment with different serial number.
c) Log Book and Report
A log book shall be kept by the Contractor for all equipment and material received at site.
Log book shall include a copy of packing list and damage report.
The log book shall include all relevant inspection data such as special test made to a
transformer (Megger of core and dew point reading).
1.8.2 Storage and Security
The log book shall be the basis for the inventory of equipment and material stored at site.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 15
Once the equipment and material has be received at site, the Contractor is liable for any
damage, loss or robbery of a components or a part until the provisional take-over by the
Employer.
All equipment and material, that will be used inside a building of the substation, shall be stored
to prevent exposure to “outdoor” climatic environment.
As for equipment that will be used in the switchyard, a convenient area shall be provided where
there is not water flooding and sufficient space for the lifting and handling machinery to
manoeuvre.
Once the work has been completed, the Contractor will hand over to the Engineer all remaining
unused material and equipment along with the spare parts, instruments and tools included in
the supply. Completeness and integrity of these components will be one of the criteria to
deliver the provisional take-over certificate by the Engineer.
1.9 Tools, Instruments and Machinery
The Contractor shall provide all tools, instruments, plants and machinery for erection,
installation, connection, adjustment and testing to obtain a completely functional installation.
1.10 Engineer’s Accommodation
Whenever specific reference is made in the price schedule, the following shall apply.
1.10.1 Engineer’s Accommodation at Site
Inside the substation control building (Office room 1 & 2), a Employer’s staff quarter will be built
by the contractor and have to be completed in advance of commencement of works of the
substation.
The offices shall be fully equipped and shall comprise of at least:
1) Air-conditioner.
2) Folding bed, blankets.
During the construction period of the substation the housing area shall form part of the
Contractor’s camp. The station supervisor’s unit fully equipped with facilities and furniture shall,
however, be reserved for the exclusive use of the Engineer or his representatives only.
1.10.2 Site Office
The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use of the Engineer one Porta-cabin office at
each site. They shall be located according to the engineer’s request and shall be available
upon the arrival of the Contractor’s staff at site. The offices shall be fully equipped and shall
comprise of at least:
1) Air-conditioner.
2) Toilet, shower, hand wash basin with at least cold-water supply.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 16
3) Adequate office furniture, i.e. 1 lockable desk, 1 chair, 1 filling cabinet, lighting.
4) Electricity supply on a 24-hour basis.
5) Folding bed, blankets.
The offices shall be cleaned daily (if necessary) by the Contractor and kept in good condition.
The Contractor shall also provide in the Engineer’s site office one set of personal computers
(Intel Pentium 4, 16 MB RAM, CD-RW, DVD-RW, full multimedia, 500 HDD, 17” LCD monitor;
HP LaserJet printer and 650 VA UPS and full computer peripherals. A photocopying machine
(Sharp, Minolta or Rank Xerox make).
The Engineer’s office shall be equipped with radio communication facilities on contractor’s
frequency range.
The above-mentioned details are indicative only, for specific requirement, Contractor shall refer
to the Scope of Works.
2 SITE FACILITIES
2.1 Office and Storage
Office and Laydown area in the vicinity of substation for the site establishment and material/
equipment storage is in the scope of Contractor. Any approvals/permits /NOC’s etc from
relevant authorities’ /Property/ Plot Owners shall be Contractor’s responsibility. All deposits and
fees for such facilities shall be borne by the Contractor without any implications to the Authority.
The Contractor shall provide the following facilities at site:
 Office with all facilities for Contractor’s administration and control. Furnished rooms shall
be made available for the Engineer’s use. The office shall include a suitable room to be
used for first aid administration to injured workmen;
 Storage is for construction materials, tools and construction equipment;
 Round the clock Security service;
 Fire extinguishing material.
The Contractor may use transportable facilities for his office (Portacabin) and storage
(containers) during the construction period provided same are of suitable size and convenient.
The Contractor is responsible for the supply of requisite water and power to these facilities and
for regular housekeeping & hygiene of facilities with suitable sewage disposal system.
Building Temporary Road from existing roads to the Lay down area and from Lay down area up
to the substation premises including any temporary road required for transportation of
equipment/materials to the substation is in the scope of Contractor.
The Engineer shall reserve right to refuse the facilities proposed by the Contractor if the same
are deemed not convenient and are of unacceptable standards.
2.2 Mobilizing and Demobilizing

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 17
The Contractor is entirely responsible to transport and install all local facilities, tools, plants and
machinery to perform the work as well as for removing them once the works are completed.
2.3 Identification Board
The Contractor shall install a project identification board measuring 2.4 x 3.6 m conveniently
located. The layout and wording shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF AIS AND GIS EQUIPMENT
3.1 Erection Procedures
3.1.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Engineer a detailed erection procedures and
schedules, which shall describe the sequence of operations and methods to be used for
erection, the tolerances on alignment, headroom or clearance requirements with respect to floor
space and room sizes, other dimensions and details wherever these are applicable and/or
critical.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval erection procedures for all equipment
of substations.
The Engineer’s approval of the erection procedures shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities.
The erection of the various components of the equipment shall be done in accordance with the
approved erection procedure and to the approved erection schedule.
Any bracings that may be required to maintain the shape of the component members during
shipment and erection shall be provided by the Contractor.
3.1.2 Cleaning and Care of Site During and After Erection
The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the
equipment from being damaged or contaminated.
Pipes cut and threaded in the field or any pipes with rough cut ends shall be reamed to a
smooth finish and cleaned free of grease and metal particles before being installed. Field
welded joints shall be wire brushed internally to remove all heat scale and weld spatter. Sealing
compound for threaded pipes shall be applied carefully and in such a manner that it does not
contaminate the inside of the piping system.
Extreme care shall be taken to keep the interior of the piping, coolers, etc., perfectly clean and
all openings and pipes shall be closed with temporary metal or wooden plates or plugs to
prevent foreign matter entering during erection.
Before any piping system is closed, it shall be carefully checked to ensure that all dirt or foreign
particles and extraneous matter, such as rags, tools, bolts and the like have been removed.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 18
All necessary precautions shall also be taken to keep the work area clean and tidy during and
after erection.
3.2 GIS equipment
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer, the GIS-manufacturer’s instruction manuals.
These manuals shall provide customized instructions to the installation of GIS equipment,
according the local conditions of the GIS location.
The Contractor shall guarantee the coordination, during the design and construction, between
the GIS building and GIS supplied in order to ensure a total compatibility for the access, the
installation, the maintenance and the future addition of GIS and other related equipment.
3.2.1 Manufacturers Drawings and Instructions Manual
Various copies of Manufacturer’s documentation will come into the equipment packing. The
Contractor shall keep one copy to perform his work and store it into a centralized
documentation room of this office and hand over to the Engineer the other copies.
3.2.2 Reception of Equipment
In addition to the requirements of clause 1.8.1, the following shall be performed:
a) Impact Recorder
Access to the impact recorders shall be restricted to Contractor’s designated Engineer

wherever applicable. Opening of the recorders and examination of the chart shall be performed
only in the presence of the Engineer.
3.2.3 Erection and Installation
The erection and installation shall be supervised by the manufacturers specialists employed by
the Contractor and performed in compliance with the instruction manuals.
The Contractor shall use convenient equipment, machinery and method to move the equipment
from the truck / GIS offloading platform to the inside GIS foundation safely and securely.
The erection shall be performed by the Contractor entirely including inside the GIS building
specified in the Technical Specification 016403-3000-48FE-6000.
3.2.4 Special Care
Special care shall be given during erection to the following:
a) Exposure to the environment of the internal part of the equipment shall be protected
limited to the minimum. The Contractor shall install a protective tilt or tent over the
equipment opening to prevent any dust or other contaminant to enter the GIS.
b) A strict control of parts or tools shall be performed when the GIS enclosure is open to
avoid any of these from falling in.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 19
3.3 Shunt Reactors
The Shunt Reactors are:
 Shunt Reactor 60 MVAR, 400 kV
a) Impact Recorder
Access to the impact recorders shall be restricted to Contractor’s designated Engineer.

Opening of the recorders and examination of the chart shall be performed only in the presence
of the Engineer.
The recorders shall be returned afterwards to the manufacturers. The recorders will not be
removed until the transformer / reactor is placed on its foundation.
b) Core Insulation Measurement
The core insulation measurement will be performed by using a 1000 V (minimum) Megger. The
reading shall be compared with the one made at time of delivery at manufacturers premises.
Measurement shall be made each time the equipment is handled.
c) Gas Pressure
Dry air or nitrogen gas pressure shall be checked to ensure no leak has occurred and infiltration
of humid or contaminated air. This shall be performed periodically during transportation and
storage until the equipment is finally erected.
d) Dew Point Reading
Dew point reading shall be performed at time of arrival at site and at time of erection until the
equipment is ready for filling of oil.
The dew point reading shall be compared with the one obtained upon delivery at manufacturers
premises.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 20
from the truck platform to the foundation safely and securely.
The erection shall be performed by the Contractor entirely including the following:
a) Internal visual inspection through man holes to ensure that there is no internal damage,
loose or broken parts or displacement of the active part.
b) Check for all connection to the tap changer (transformer only) for any loose connection
and no crack in the molded insulated pieces.
c) Erection of components (not limitative):
 Bushings and connection to windings;
 Conservator with support;
 Surge arresters’ brackets;
 Radiators, valves and fans;
 Oil pipes, valves and filters;
 Relays and instruments;
 Neutral ground bus and miscellaneous.
d) Internal winding connection tight and in accordance to nameplate.
e) Dew point measurement prior to oil filling.
f) Tank vacuum applied without conservator.
g) Test, filtering and filling with oil up to cover & under vacuum. Oil samples shall be taken
and tested from each individual container to ensure that oil is suitable prior to filling.
h) Instruments and relays tests.
i) Installation of surge arresters.
j) Connection to grounding grid.
k) Connection of bushings to the busses.
l) Connection of control cables to control cabinet terminal blocks.,
m) Pressure test at 35 kPa on completely assembled transformer.
n) Touch-up of any damage paint area.
3.3.4 Special Care
Special care shall be given during erection to the following:
a) Exposure to the environment of the internal part of the equipment shall be limited to the
minimum. The Contractor shall install a protective tilt or tent over the equipment
opening to prevent any rain, dust or other contaminant to enter the tank. A positive dry
air pressure shall be maintained in the tank throughout the erection.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 21
b) A strict control of parts or tools shall be performed when the tank is open to avoid any of
these from falling in. A rope shall be used to tie the parts and tools or similar means
such as a net below the working area.
All tools used for work inside the tank shall be listed prior to tank opening and inventoried
afterward.
c) Fragile and porcelain component shall be handled carefully with protective hood and
textiles slings to avoid cracking or chipping. Any damage shall be reported to the
Engineer.
d) Care shall be taken not to expose the conservator rubber sack to vacuum and to fill the
conservator as per manufacturers instruction.
e) The tertiary winding of the autotransformer will be connected by means of MV insulated

cables that will enter the MV junction box by means of suitable cable connectors.
f) The short circuit bridges connected across the bushing current transformers terminal
blocks shall remain until the connection of the control cables going to the control building
is performed.
g) Unless the Contractor has a more suitable method (crane, specialized rollers), the
equipment shall be unloaded by building up from ground a bridge structure between the
truck platform, using wood beams (10 by 10 inches) and the foundation and by
introducing and sliding the equipment on greased metal plates (5 – 15 mm thick). The
equipment will be pulled into position by using winches from at least two trucks located
diagonally.
The Contractor shall identify the center of gravity marks on the tank and plan the operation
without risk to stability of equipment during manoeuvre.
h) In the case of shunt reactors, any piece used to avoid movement of the core during
transportation shall be removed as per manufacturers instruction. Specific attention
shall be given to any piece used to compress the coil or secure the active part that may
have loosen during transportation.
3.3.5 Specialized Tools and Materials
Typical tools and materials are:
 Material and tools for equipment unloading;

 Crane (50 T min) with proper slings;
 Oil treatment plant with vacuum pump, heaters with suitable capacity and accessories;
 Dielectric oil test (IEC 60156) and dew point instruments;
 Tank or sack (2000 litres) for storage of oil;
 Dry air or nitrogen pressurized bottles or dry air machine;
 Megger test instrument;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 22
 Other material to complete the installation.
3.4 Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers will be of live or dead tank design with SF6 or vacuum (MV only)
interrupting medium, mechanical spring-loaded mechanism for each phase or for the three
phases. When there are three single phase mechanisms, a central control cabinet shall be
installed on the middle phase pedestal support of the circuit breaker.
3.4.1 Manufacturers drawings and instructions
documentation room of his office and hand over to the engineer the other copies.
In addition to the requirements of clause 1.8.1 the following shall be performed:
 Meticulous examination of the porcelain pieces, movement within the packing enclosure or
loosening between the flanges and the porcelain;
 Availability of SF6 gas bottles without leaks and with sufficient capacity for filling the
equipment.
the Contractor (at least to train the Contractor team on each type of equipment) and performed
in accordance with the instruction manuals.
The Contractor shall use convenient equipment, machinery and method to handle the
components of the circuit breakers. The erection shall be performed entirely by the Contractor
including the following:
a) Assembly, mounting and levelling of pedestals of each pole.

b) The distance between centre lines of each pole pedestal shall be carefully adjusted.
c) Lifting with nylon slings of porcelain element and assembly on the pedestals.
d) Installation of mechanisms and central control cabinet.
e) Filling with SF6 gas and verification for leaks with detection instrument.
f) Connection to substation busses making sure that no excessive traction is applied on
terminals.
g) Connection to grounding grid.
h) Connection of control cables to each mechanism and central control cabinet.
i) Adjustment of linkage and mechanism to insure proper operation.
j) Functional tests with local/remote control devices, interlocks, remote signalling and
alarms
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 23
k) Verification of reserve capacity of mechanism to perform a complete cycle of the 3 poles

operation.
l) Verification that SF6 pressure remains constant with time.
3.4.4 Special Care
Special care shall be given during the erection to the following:
 SF6 leaks shall be verified around the flanges, tube couplings, instruments, pressure
switches, etc;
 Hollow porcelain parts are vulnerable to excessive efforts or tightening and bad handling;
 The linkage activating the various poles with a single mechanism shall be adjusted
carefully and precisely. In case the components cannot be assembled easily and properly,
the manufacturers supervisors shall be involved to avoid damaging the mechanism;
 Interlocks shall be checked for secure operation;
 The control remote open/close commands shall be blocked by the local/remote selector.
The protection trip signal shall proceed without interference;
 Terminal blocks related to current transformers (dead tank) shall remained short-circuited
until the control cables are connected;
 The cover protecting against intrusion of foreign particles shall be removed at the very last
moment when the assembly is performed with the other component. In case the
environmental conditions are not suitable for assembly (dusty wind, rain, etc…), the
erection shall be interrupted until conditions are acceptable or the area can be covered by
tilt or tent.
3.4.5 Specialized Tools and Material
Typical tools and material are:
 Crane of 5 Tm (minimum) with suitable slings;

 SF6 gas filling cart with gas bottle and leak detector instrument;
 Manufacturers specialized tools.
3.5 Erection of Disconnect Switches
The disconnect switches will be provided with or without grounding blade with manual/electric
operation or manual operation only.

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 24
 Meticulous examination of the insulators;

 The insulator associated with the mechanism driving shaft of pantographs is of special
design and cannot be replaced with standard post insulators. Close examination of this
insulator shall be performed;
 The insulators shall not be mixed with the bus bar station post insulators.
the Contractor (at least to train the Contractor team on each type of equipment) and performed
in accordance with the instruction manuals.
The Contractor shall use convenient equipment, machinery and method to handle the
components of the switches. The erection shall be performed entirely by the Contractor
including the following:
a) Assembly, installation and levelling of pedestals and structure support.

b) The center line of disconnect-switch pedestals, using a single mechanism for all three
poles shall be carefully checked and position adjusted to insure easy installation of
linkage.
c) Installation of mechanisms.
d) Lifting and positioning of insulators with nylon slings.
e) Lifting and installation of active parts and linkage.
f) Adjustment of linkage and active parts for perfect fit at closure and simultaneous three
poles operation. The center break switch arms shall be perfectly aligned.
g) Connection of terminals to the bus. Effort imposed by the connection shall not be
excessive to damage or prevent the movement of the rotating contact and bearing.
h) Connection to grounding grid.
i) Connection of control cables.
j) When there are three mechanisms, a central control cabinet shall be installed.
k) Careful adjustment of the limit switches shall be performed to avoid the mechanism from
pushing the arms of the switch beyond the desired mechanical position. Repeated
manoeuvres shall be performed to ensure that the position of the switches remains
constant.
l) Test of interlocks, local/remote control and remote alarm and signalling shall be
performed.
3.5.4 Special Care

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 25
 Interlocks with the corresponding circuit breakers shall be checked;

Any excessive force on the switches or improper assembly will damage the mechanisms and
the linkages.
 Crane of 5 Tm (minimum) and appropriate slings;

 Manufacturers specialized tools.
3.6 Surge Arresters
Surge arrester will be mounted on incoming HV lines feeder pedestals, on power transformers
or shunt reactors supports.
 Integrity of porcelain housing against crack or broken part;

 Displacement of porcelain with respect to flanges;
 Accessories such as shielding rings, base insulators, discharge counters and connection
material.
The Contractor shall perform the erection entirely in accordance with the instruction manuals
using convenient equipment, machinery and method to handle the components including the
following:
 The pedestals shall be assembled, lifted, placed on foundations and levelled except where
the surge arrested are mounted on equipment supports or gantries;
 Lift the arresters with nylon slings with prior installation of insulating base;
 Connection to HV busses conductors. The traction applied to the arrester terminal shall be
at minimum;
 Mounting of surge counters at a level no exceeding 1.5 m from foundation base and
connection of counters to the arrester bottom terminal with insulated busses or cables as
per manufacturer’s instructions. Connection of counters opposite terminals shall be to the
grounding grid with insulated cables of suitable size (300 mm2 minimum 1 kV insulation).
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 26
3.6.4 Special Care
 Proper assembly of shielding ring shall be performed to avoid possible failure of arresters;
 The distance between the bus connecting the surge counter to any grounded part shall be
at least equal to the height of the base arrestor insulators.
The following are typical:
 Crane of 5 Tm (minimum) capacity with suitable lings.
3.7 Instrument Transformers
In case of live tank circuit breakers, the current transformers will be mounted side by side from
the circuit breaker while the voltage transformers will be connected directly to the line feeders,
feeders bus or to the main substation busses. The line feeders capacitive voltage transformers
are suitable for installation of line traps and connection of power line carrier equipment.

 Verification for Oil or SF6 gas leaks.
following:
 The pedestals shall be assembled, lifted, placed on foundations and levelled;

 Lift the instrument transformer with nylon slings with prior installation of insulating base;
 Connection to HV busses conductors. The traction applied to the terminals shall be at
minimum;
 Mounting of the junction box on the pedestal of the center pole;
 The current transformers terminals shall remain short-circuited until the control cable is
connected;
 Connection of control cables between the poles and the junction box and to the control
building;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 27
 Connection to the grounding grid;

 Verification of winding continuity by measuring the resistance from the junction boxes;
3.7.4 Special Care
 Verify that the oil expansion bellow operates normally and that there is no oil leak;
 The low voltage terminal shall remain short-circuited until the cable leading to the
protection panels is connected properly to the test switches;
 The primary connection of the current transformers shall be checked to ensure that proper
ratio has been selected;
 The grounding switches for the power line carrier PLC output of the CVTs shall be locked
in closed position. The neutral end of the CVTs shall be properly secured to a ground
cable coming from the grounding grid.

 Oil dielectric test instruments (in case of doubt);
 SF6 gas leak detector instrument (for SF6 current transformers).
3.8 Emergency Diesel Generator
The emergency diesel generator will come as a standalone unit completely assembled with
outdoor shelter, day tank, control panel, motor generator set, muffler and piping, louvers,
cooling system etc., ready to be installed on the foundation close to the control building as
shown on construction drawings.

 Verify that the shelter has not been bumped and that structure of the shelter has no been
deformed by vibration during transportation and no internal component has loosen;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 28
 Verify that there is no leak from the engine lubrication or cooling system;
 Verify that there has been no intrusion or robbery of internal component;
 Specialized handling device shall come along with the generator.
from the truck platform to the foundation with safely and securely.
The erection is limited to the installation on the foundation of the diesel generator DG and
secure it by the anchor bolts imbedded in the foundation.
Openings for cable at bottom of DG shelter shall coincide with the cable ducts of the foundation.
The power and control cables are then connected to the main circuit breaker and to the control
cabinet terminal blocks as per construction drawings.
The digital controller remote interface will be located conveniently in the SCADA panel located
in the control building and the cable will be routed accordingly.
3.8.4 Special Care
 The fuel used by the DG is light diesel oil not gasoline;

 The level of lubricant and cooling liquid shall be checked;
 The DG set is not to operate in parallel with the main electrical network;
 The DG set shall not lie during a long period of time without operating. It shall be started at
least every two weeks and load bank apply to its terminal during one hour;
 The DG set shall not be used to supply the Contractor’s facilities during the performance of
works. The Contractor shall supply his own generator for his own needs;
 Programming of diesel generator controller shall not be altered or modified by the
Contractor’s personnel unless the manufacturers specialists perform this operation;
 The shelter doors shall remain closed and locked at all time except when maintenance is
needed.

 Megger for insulation testing of generator;
 Specialized tools and instrument for engine and starting battery;
 Digital terminal to access the controller.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 29
3.9 Earthing Reactor and Substation Service Transformer
The reactor 33 kV winding neutral will be solidly grounded or with neutral grounding reactor if
required.
Shunt Reactor’s 33 kV (Auxiliary winding) will be used to supply the substation services of the
substation via 33kV GIS and Station Service Transformer.
 Integrity of porcelain housing against crack or broken parts;

 These units will come completely filled with oil. Verification for any oil leak shall be
performed;
 Verify that the tank is perfectly sealed and there is no sign of possible entry of air by loose
coupling, open valve, bad seal or joint and faulty pressure/vacuum device;
 Porcelain insulators, shall come with protective hood;
 Verify that neutral ground bus material of earthing reactors and transformers is included;
 Check for nameplate to ensure that there is no mistake on destination of equipment
 Measure insulation resistance of winding and compare with manufacturers data;
 Measure continuity of windings with ohmmeter;
 The shunt reactor shall come with fuse disconnect holders in an outdoor enclosure located on
the main tank wall.
following.
These units come fully assembled and filled or oil.
In order to avoid hazardous contact with energized part of the equipment, a fence will be
erected around the equipment to restrict access to authorized personnel once the associated
bus is de-energized and switchgear is locked out.
The 33kV GIS shall be connected to the 33 kV tertiary winding of the Shunt Reactors by means
of insulated MV cables.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 30
There shall not be any protective or isolating devices between the 33kV GIS and the Shunt
Reactor tertiary winding terminals.
The neutral point of the 33 kV winding shall be extended to ground level with a copper bus by
means of wall mounted insulators and shall be connected directly to the grounding grid
separately from the tank grounding pad.
The LV terminals of the Substation Service Transformers shall be connected to the power
cables leading to the transfer panel (LVAC) located in the control building.
The neutral point of the LV winding of the Substation Service Transformers shall be grounded
at the remote end inside the transfer panel. The neutral shall therefore be connected with an
insulated cable.
Control cables shall be connected to the terminal blocks of the control cabinet.
The 33 kV substation service transformer will be mounted on a concrete slab including Cable
basement and covered concrete room.
3.9.4 Special Care
 Ensure that insulation distance between the live connection of the substation service
transformers and the fuse holders and any grounded structure part is sufficient;
 The 33 kV neutral of earthing transformers shall be connected directly to the substation
grounding grid;
 The LV neutral shall not be grounded at equipment end and brought to the transfer panel
with insulated neutral cable;
 Tap changer shall be adjusted for rated winding voltage of main power transformer;
 Check for excessive traction on porcelain bushing and insulators.
 Crane of 10 Tm (minimum) with appropriate slings;

 Megger insulation resistance tester;
 Dielectric oil withstands test instrument.
3.10 Strain Buses and Overhead Ground wires (Not applicable)
The strain busses will be installed across the beams of the substation gantry structures in one
or two levels of installation.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 31
The 400 kV busses will be using two conductors per phase with spacers. All connections made
to the equipment shall be with two conductors unless indicated otherwise on construction
drawings.
The overhead ground wire will be linking the upper end of the substation structure for proper
coverage of the switchyard against direct lightning strokes.
The Contractor shall supply all hardware and material needed to complete the installation of the
strain busses and the connection to the equipment.
 Verify damage to the insulators;

 Verify that the components are the one needed for the assembly of suspension and
tension strings required for the substation;
 Verify that accessories for overhead ground wire are the one to be used with standard
galvanized steel ground wire;
 Verify the availability of compressed dead-end joint that match the conductor size and type
and that proper die has been provided with the compression tool.
The Contractor shall perform the erection in accordance with the construction drawings using
convenient equipment, machinery and method to handle the components including the
following:
 Insulators strings shall be assembled as per manufacturers drawings. The type of string
and the number of insulators shall be as per construction drawings. Special care shall be
given to the shielding rings to avoid damaging the surface. Any spike on the surface shall
be carefully eliminated by using fine sand paper;
 The conductor length is then cut to the length specified and compressed fittings applied to
the ends. The insulators string and turnbuckles are added to the conductors lengths and
pulled up to the gantry structures anchoring points. The sag of each conductor is then
adjusted by using the turnbuckles as per table available from the construction drawings at
corresponding site temperature. The sag can be measured by means of a theodolite or
any other means acceptable to the Engineer. The conductors shall be carefully inspected
for any imperfection or spikes, bent, loose or protruding strands, etc… The conductor shall
not lie directly on the ground and shall be protected against any damage to the surface.
Spacers shall be installed on double conductors busses prior to hoisting;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 32
 The vertical connection from the bus to equipment or lower bus level shall be performed
with a certain slack to avoid applying excessive traction when the sag varies with
temperature. As a matter of example, the conductor shall start to rise from the lower
terminal at an horizontal distance of 300 – 500 mm with a bending radius of 450 mm as a
minimum. Consideration shall be given to the temperature at time of installation;
 The sag of the bus conductors will be adjusted to the specified value when all vertical
connections are done;
 The horizontal connection between equipment terminals or between the bus and the
equipment terminals shall be done with a small sag equivalent to normal curve of the
conductor for very short connection and 5 % of span for longer connections. The traction
applied to the equipment terminals shall not exceed the corresponding equipment
manufacturers specification;
 The compressed joints shall be performed with proper tools and the dies needed
specifically for each joint (steel core and over all conductor). The surface of the joint shall
be carefully cleaned from any spike, burr or sharp-edges produced during the compression
process by using fine sand paper. The joint shall be carefully examined for any cracks,
looseness, non-uniform compression;
 The connection shall be carefully prepared by removing any oil or grease with a suitable
cleaning agent from the surface. The conductor end shall be strapped prior to cutting.
The surface is then brushed (stainless steel brush) thou roughly and a specialized
compound, such a Penetrox A-13 (Burndy), is applied to the surface. A small coat of
compound is also applied to the connectors prior to assembly. This is valid for
connections to stranded aluminium conductors, aluminium tubes, pad terminals, threaded
terminals, etc.;
 Tools and material used for copper bus assembly shall never be used for aluminium and
vice versa.
3.10.4 Special Care
 Surface condition of the conductors is very important to avoid excessive corona. The
conductors shall not be in contact with hard surfaces or natural ground surface;
 Insulation distances shall be verified in accordance with construction drawings;
 Torque on connectors bolts shall be as per section 3.10;
 The pantograph switches suspended contact shall be adjusted when the final sag of the
bus is set.
 Compression tools with dies for the specified conductors;

 Torque wrench;
 Hoist and winches to pull up the bus;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 33
 Theodolite or other sag measuring instrument;

 Thermometer;
 Special connection compound (Penetrox A-13 from Burndy) and stainless-steel brushes.
3.11 Rigid Busses
The rigid busses will be used to link the switchyard equipment at lower level.
The busses will essentially be made of aluminium rigid tubes supported by station post
insulators.
Some portion of the bus will be made with stranded conductors essentially to connect with the
equipment terminals. All connections will be made by using bolted connectors to avoid the
need for aluminium welding.
 All material shall be checked for proper type and model. Some connectors and fittings
dimensions shall be checked at random against the manufacturer’s drawings;
 The tubes shall be of right size and schedules. Measurement of diameter and thickness
shall be performed at random against standard values;
 The post type insulators shall be checked for porcelain integrity and dimensions against
the standards values. These insulators shall not be interchanged or mixed with apparatus
insulators.
following:
 Assemble on ground, lift and install and level insulators pedestals. Connect to grounding
grid. The insulators pedestals shall have a perfect alignment between them;
 Lift and install the insulators on the pedestal. They shall be levelled and aligned between
them;
 Mount the bus support flanges on the insulators without tightening them;
 Cut, remove the burrs and insert the tubes in the bus support as per construction
drawings;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 34
 Clean to remove oil and grease on the end of the bus tube and joint the busses with sleeve
couplers;
 The bus support can then be tightened. Verify that tube will not be subject to excessive
force. The bus support shall be installed properly as per construction drawings which is to
be either fixed or sliding;
 There shall be at least 250 mm free length of bus from the insulator centre line to allow for
connection to an equipment (as per construction drawings);
 The tubes surface shall not come in contact with ground surface or hard material that could
produce spikes, sharp edges, etc… Small imperfections can be corrected with sand paper;
 The free ends of the bus tubes shall be terminated with caps. A length of stranded
conductor shall be inserted in long tube length to avoid mechanical resonance to happen
as wind blows;
 The bus shall be completely installed and adjusted prior to make vertical or horizontal
connections;
 The shielding ring shall be carefully verified for spikes or sharp edges prior to installation;
 Installation of connectors requires cleaning, brushing and use of compound as explained in
section 3.9.3. The tube is then inserted in the bottom half of the connector and the upper
half is then applied. The bolts are inserted and tighten progressively in a specific
sequence as shown on the following sketches:
- When the connectors are provided with pads, the pads shall be tighten
progressively by following this sequence:
 The bolts are normally supplied with the connectors. In case of missing bolts, stainless
steel bolts and nuts shall be used.
The torque value to be applied on bolts shall be as per manufacturers recommendations. The
following are typical values:
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 35
Diameter Aluminium Stainless Steel Bronze
Mm Inches N.m Lb.ft N.m Lb.ft N.m Lb.ft

10 3/8 21 16 37 28 25 19
12 ½ 36 27 60 45 54 41
14 - 55 41 80 60 65 50
16 5/8 110 82 120 90 100 74
20 3/4 180 133 180 133 180 133
-
For bus supports, the following are typical:
Diameter Stainless Steel

Mm Inches N.m Pound feet
12 ½ 21 16
16 5/8 44 33
-
3.11.4 Special Care
 Surface condition of the conductors is very important to avoid excessive corona. The
conductors shall not be in contact with hard surfaces or natural ground surface;
 Insulation distances shall be verified in accordance with construction drawings;
 Torque on connectors bolts shall be as per section 3.10;
 The pantograph switches suspended contact shall be adjusted when the bus is set;
 Special treatment shall be given to connection to copper terminals to avoid chemical
reaction and hot spot during operation.
 Crane of 3.5 Tm (minimum) with nylon slings;

 Torque wrench;
 Theodolite for alignment;
 Connector compound (Penetrox A-3 from Burndy) and stainless steel brushes;
 Industrial ladders or hydraulic lift and platform with remote control.
3.12 Grounding Grid

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 36
The grounding grid is made of tinned copper / bare copper conductors placed along longitudinal
and transversal axis of the substation.
Distance between adjacent mesh conductors shall be maximum 10 meters. The conductors
shall be laid at a depth of below 2 meters in the ground, except for underground power cables
or trenches (with a minimum depth of 1 meter). Conductors shall also be buried below the raft /
road-base of buildings.
The conductors are welded at each crossing point with thermo-welded connections. The grid is
connected to the switchyard equipment and structure by means of tinned / bare copper
conductors welded to the grid and terminated with mechanical connectors on the equipment.
 All material shall be checked for proper type and model;

 Quantity of moulds and fusion material shall be checked to insure to perform the work
without interruption. The fusion material packing shall be sealed and not show any sign of
deterioration by humidity.
following:
 The conductors are placed at the bottom of trenches and welded at crossing junctions;
 Tap conductor shall be welded to the grid as well as ground rods;
 Tap conductors shall be used to connect all switchyard equipment and structure;
 Disconnect switches operating handle or wheel shall be properly grounded;
 Cable metal trays and conduits shall be grounded at various points along the way;
 The fence post shall be connected to the grounding grid as per construction drawings;
 The incoming transmission lines counterpoise shall be connected to the grounding grid;
 The substation gate shall be connected to the grounding grid;
 The grounding grid will be extended inside the control building to connect the various
panels grounding bus;
 The telecommunication equipment will be grounded with insulated conductors to a
common point to avoid circulating current;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 37
 The trenches can be filled with earth once the Engineers has approved the work.
3.12.4 Special Care
 Special attention shall be given to the tap lead that are likely to carry current constantly
such as for the neutral of transformers, shunt reactors, earthing reactors or transformers,
grounding blades, surge arresters, overhead ground wire and line counterpoise. The
resistance for any of these leads to a remote point of the grounding grid shall be measured
to ascertain the quality of the connection;
 A test shall be performed to measure from a remote point the overall resistance of the grid.
If the measured value is not sufficiently low, the Contractor shall propose to the Engineer
corrective measures and, upon acceptance, proceed with the work until the measured
value becomes acceptable;
 Because of the hazardous nature of the fusion powder, handling and storage of powder
shall be performed to avoid accident.
 Moulds in sufficient quantity to make the various connections;

 Ground resistance meter;
 Micro-ohmmeter to test the connections resistance.
3.13 Outdoor Lighting
These are two types of outdoor lighting:
 Pole mounted lighting fixture for perimeter lighting, gate, parking area, switchyard and
building surrounding.
Special junction boxes will be used in conjunction with lighting fixtures to terminate the lighting
circuit cables and to feed the fixture luminaries.
The lighting circuit will start in the ac distribution panel located in the control building.
There are two distinct lighting circuits controlled by separate contactors. The contactors can be
operated manually or automatically by a photo-cell located conveniently outside the control
building.

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 38
 Verify all fragile luminary parts and bulbs;

 Each luminary shall be complete without any missing part;
 The junction box shall be checked for any missing stolen component. The outlet shall be
according local standards.
following:
 The poles shall be lifted mounted on their foundation and level to vertical position;
 The orientation of the perimeter fixtures shall allow coverage of all the boundary area,
incoming gate, building surrounding and parking area;
 The junction boxes shall be mounted to the poles and the substation structure. The boxes
are of different type;
 The lighting circuit cables are connected to the junction boxes terminal blocks such to
balance the luminary load between the three phases. One cable is dedicated to the outlet
of the switchyard junction boxes and shall not be mixed with lighting circuit cables.
The junction boxes shall be connected to ground.
The illumination level shall be (as a minimum):
 Switchyard: 25 lux;
 Transformer area: 25 lux;
 Perimeter: 25 lux.
3.13.4 Special Care
 The junction box shall be perfectly sealed against introduction of dust, rain or insect;
 Balance of load between phases shall be checked and connection of loads performed
accordingly;
 The loads shall be distributed alternatively between the two lighting circuits such that loss
of one circuit will not result in a total blackout in a complete sector of the substation;
 Measurement of illumination level shall be performed along the main axis of the switchyard
and along the perimeter, gate, building area to ensure proper level is achieved. Corrective
action shall be undertaken otherwise.
3.13.5 Specialized tools and Materials

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 39
Typical specialized tools and material are:
 Illumination level meter;

 Industrial ladders, hydraulic lift and platform with remote control;
 Crane for light loads mounted on truck.
4 ELECTROMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUBSTATION BUILDING
4.1 Installation of panels, chargers and batteries
The equipment is:
 AC transfer panel 415 Vac (Essential & ;

 AC distribution panels 415/240 Vac;
 DC distribution panels 110 and 48 Vdc;
 Batteries 110 and 48 Vcc;
 Redundant battery chargers 110 and 48 Vdc;
Control, Metering and Protection Panels
The installation shall be as per construction drawings approved by the Engineer.
Control, metering and protection panels are made of individual standalone cabinets of
approximately 800 wide by 800 mm deep by 2200 mm high with rear access door.
The Contractor shall unpack the panels and install them in the substation relay or control room
where indicated on the approved Contractor drawings. The panels shall be levelled with shims.
Tele protection Units
The tele protection units shall be provided as per Tele protection Signaling Equipment
specification 016403-3000-4CES-6110. These units to be installed in the line protection panels
as mentioned in the Control, Metering and Protection specification 016403-3000-48ES-5100.
Substation SCADA Equipment
The substation SCADA equipment shall be provided as per Supervisory, Control and Data
Acquisition (SCADA) specification 016403-3000-4SES-6200. The SCADA is mainly made of
computers used as workstations, communication gateways, controllers and of local area
networks (LAN).
The controllers to be installed in the appropriate control and protection panels as mentioned in
the Control, Metering and Protection specification 016403-3000-48ES-5100.
The communication gateways to be installed in the appropriate SDH Fiber Optic System
panels. This panel is part of the SDH Fiber Optic System specification 016403-3000-47ES-
6700. The panel shall be properly connected to the grounding grid.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 40
The Contractor shall unpack the workstations and install it in the substation control room where
indicated on the approved Contractor drawings.
The Contractor shall unpack the equipment and install it in the substation control room where
indicated on the approved Contractor drawings.
The Contractor shall install and connect all the cables and connectors required by the SCADA
supplier for the LAN (whether copper pairs, coaxial or fibre optic cables. The appropriate
connectors are part of the Supervisory, Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) specification
016403-3000-47ES-6200. The installation and connections shall be made according to the
manufacturer’s requirements.
Telephone Private Branch Exchange Equipment
The Contractor shall unpack the equipment The telephone private branch exchange equipment
shall be as per Telephone Private Branch Exchange specification 016403-3000-4CES-6600.
The equipment is mainly made of a telephone branch exchange board and telephone sets.
The Contractor shall install and connect all the cables and connectors required for the
telephone system. The appropriate connectors are part of the Telephone Private Branch
Exchange specification 016403-3000-4CES-6600. The installation and connections shall be
made according to the manufacturer’s requirements.
Fiber Optic Digital Communication Multiplexer Panels
The fiber optic digital communication multiplexer panels ha be as per SDH Fiber Optic
Communications System specification 016403-3000-47ES-6700.
The Contractor shall unpack the panels and install them in the telecommunication, where
indicated on the approved Contractor drawings. The panels shall be level with shims. The
panels shall be properly connected to the grounding grid.
Fiber Optic and Telephone Communication Distribution Panel
At each new substation there is a communication distribution panel to be installed.
The Contractor shall unpack the panel and install it in the telecommunication were indicated on
the approved Contractor drawings and manufacturer’s requirements. The panel shall be level
with shims. The panel shall be properly connected to the grounding grid.

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 41
 Verify that no internal components have moved during the transportation and that the
frame of the panels or cabinets have not been deformed;
 In order to avoid excessive efforts produced by attached components during
transportation, some components (such as relays, instruments) are removed and packed
individually. The list of these components shall be checked to insure none is missing;
 The pressure of water, humidity, condensation, dust shall be reported to assess the impact
on the equipment and proceed with corrective action if need.
following:
 The cabinets and panels for substation auxiliary services are first entered to the
corresponding room;
 The panels will lie over the floor cables trenches;
 The panels shall be in line and levelled;
 The panels shall be anchored to the floor by means of expansion type studs (HILTI or
equivalent). The Contractor shall supply the anchor studs;
 In some cases, as indicated on construction drawings, the panels will be installed on a
cable duct opening of the floor;
 The components that were removed and packed separately will be installed in their chassis
in the panels. Wiring of these components shall be performed as per manufacturers
drawings;
 Modification may be needed in the panels of an existing substation. This shall be
performed in accordance with the construction drawings approved by the Engineer. The
work shall be carefully planned and coordinated with the substation operator to remove the
equipment from service in the time frame agreed with the operator;
 The cables will enter from the bottom plate of the panels or cabinets by means of cable
glands. The position of the incoming hole and of the cables shall be carefully planned to
obtain an organized deployment of the leads to the terminal blocks.
4.1.4 Special Care
 Dielectric insulation instrument (Megger) shall be used with care since some electronic
equipment of the panels cannot withstand without damage the test voltage of these
instruments such as Programmable Logic Controller, SCADA equipment interconnected
with the control and protection panels, telephone and multiplexer equipment;
 It is recommendable to bring the panels into the building upon reception at site and keep
the packing to avoid exposing the panels to outdoor conditions. Opening of doors and
windows shall be restricted to the minimum to avoid exposure to dust, rain etc.;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 42
 It is Contractor’s responsibility to secure the panels in order to avoid robbery and damage.
Some components may need months for replacement. The panel shall normally remain
locked. A set of keys shall be given to the Engineer and the second set shall be kept by
designated Contractor responsible for security;
 Openings of panels, other than for ventilation purpose, shall be carefully sealed at the end
of the work;
 Voltage shall not be applied to the panels until the installation is completed and ready for
commissioning.
 Drill for concrete and steel;

 Transportation buggies or lift truck for moving panels within the building;
 Dielectric test meter;
 Anchor studs (Kwik Bolt II from HILTI or equivalent).
4.2 Batteries
In each substation, there are:
 Two (2) numbers battery banks at 110 Vdc for electromechanical equipment, control and
protection panels;
 One (1) number battery bank at 110 Vdc for UPS system;
 Two (2) numbers battery banks at 48 Vdc for telecommunication equipment.
The batteries will be located in the room specially dedicated to this application. Entrance to this
room will be from the common corridor and there shall be not opening between this room and
any adjacent room of the building.
 Casing of each cell shall be carefully examined for cracks, loose pole or leaks;
 The battery cell type shall be verified against the construction documents to insure that it
belongs effectively to this substation and was not mixed with battery for another substation;
 All connection material shall be inventoried for completeness such as bridges, connectors,
etc.;
 The battery fuse disconnect box shall be found in the packing;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 43
 The acid will normally come in separate containers as a concentrate to which water shall
be added or for immediate use. The quantity of acid shall be sufficient for all cells.
following:
 The supporting, frame shall be assembled and anchored to the floor (HILTI KWIK BOLT);
 The cells will be placed side by side in the frame in one or various steps as per
manufacturer’s instructions;
 Connectors and bridges will be installed between cells terminals;
 The cells will be filled with acid as per manufacturer’s instructions;
 The fuse disconnect box will be installed on the wall as close as possible to the end cells
terminals as possible and then connected by means of cables.
4.2.4 Special Cares
 Handling and preparation of acid shall be carefully performed as per manufacturer’s

instructions and by wearing safety gloves, suit and glasses. Access to the battery room
shall be restricted during handling of acid. These shall be a mean (such as shower),
readily available, to wash off any acid from the skin or clothes. Distilled water shall be
used for topping up the cell or mixing with acid as per manufacturers instruction. Tap
water shall never be used for that purpose. In case there is a Ni-Cad battery in the same
room or substation, the containers shall be clearly marked to avoid mixing acid with
hydroxide and eventually damaging the batteries and injuring personnel;
 The connectors and bridges shall be installed with care by hand. Use of hammer and
lever is prohibited or any tool to hit or pull out the connectors or bridges will result in
loosening the terminals in the insulating case and make permanent damage to the cell.
No excessive traction shall be applied to the cell’s terminals;
 The surface of the cells shall be cleaned to avoid leakage current;
 There shall be an acid proof cushion between the cells and the supporting frame;
 No metallic tools are allowed around the battery cells when they are filled with acid and
charged in order to avoid short-circuit and injury;
 The charging of the batteries shall be performed as per manufacturer’s instructions;
 The specialized tools and instruments supplied with the batteries shall be handed to the
Engineer;
 The opening for the cable leading to the distribution panel shall be properly sealed.
4.2.5 Specialized Tolls and Material

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 44
 Drill for concrete and steel;

 Transportation means (cart) in battery room;
 Distilled water;
 Security devices for personnel (glasses, clothes, gloves, shower for eyes and body);
 Anchor bolts (HILTI KWIK BOLT II).
4.3 Insulated Cables
The LV power and control cables are provided with an armour of interlaced aluminium or
galvanized steel ribbon or strands. The packet is made of PVC and the insulation is made of
cross-linked polyethylene XLPE or PVC.
The control cables conductors are tinned to avoid any corrosion that may cause malfunction of
sensitive low voltage data signals.
The LV multiconductor control cables are terminated on terminal blocks of control and
protection panels or by means of a lug or plug as per manufacturers instructions.
The MV cables will come with a termination kit including insulating sleeve with sheds for outdoor
use. The MV cables are used to connect the tertiary of the autotransformers to the earthing
transformers and for MV line feeders.
All cables entry into a metallic enclosure will be made using proper cable gland to secure the
armour to the enclosure, provide armour grounding and seal the entry point.
 The cables insulation shall be checked on the reel by applying between the conductor a
test voltage not exceeding 750 Vac for 1 minute insulation resistance shall be not less than
10 MΩ. In case of bad reading, the Engineer will decide whether to reject the whole reel or
use it by checking each length of cable as it is being used;
 The characteristics of cables and size of conductors shall be checked against the delivery
documents;
 The telecommunication cables will come on reels. No dielectric test instrument voltage
shall be applied to the cable a simple test with mustimeter will suffice;
 Number & size of cable connectors shall be checked against the construction drawings;
 LV power cables shall be subjected to AC voltage withstand test with voltage not
exceeding 2 kV.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 45
 The MV cables termination accessories and kits shall be inventoried and stored for
convenience.
4.3.3 Laying and Installing Cables
The cables will be installed in strict observance of manufacturers instructions especially with
regards to handling and pulling tension to avoid damaging the cables.
Install all the cables according to the cable Schedule lists. The Contractor is responsible to
prepare the cable list according to the control, metering and protection schemes appropriate to
each substation.
be submitted for approval of Authority.
No cable shall be laid directly on the floor.
a) Segregation
The cables shall be segregated on the basis of their group and of their use for DC, AC, Data
signals, LV power, telecommunication, MV power circuits by utilizing different routes or
providing sufficient separation space to nullify inter dependent impacts. (strong, power, weak
and telecommunication signals cables). The control cables carrying redundant protection
signals shall also be physically separated with different routes if possible.
Separation will be achieved by using the various levels of the trenches supports.
b) Construction Documents
The cables are listed in the schedule of cables and connection is shown on the connection
diagrams corresponding to each equipment these are part of construction documents approved
by the Engineer.
c) Access to equipment
The access of cables to the equipment from the trenches will be made with the use of conduits
or protecting means since cables are armoured. The cables will be fastened to the structure by
means of stainless steel or galvanized steel bands to the support in parallel and in organized
manner. In case these is no supporting means, and when the distance from the trench to the
incoming entry point of the equipment exceeds 0.5 meter, the Contractor shall supply a suitable
metallic galvanized (stainless steel acceptable) support (cable tray…) between the trench and
the equipment to secure the cables.
Where there is a large number of cables, the support shall be a Unistrut channel / ladder type
cable tray and cables laid in parallel in organized fashion.
Trays shall be of suitable size to meet segregation criteria and provide spare room for future
use. The trays shall be approved by the Engineer.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 46
The cables shall enter the equipment enclosure as close as possible to the corresponding
terminal blocks.
d) Laying and Pulling Cables
All cables shall be verified for any apparent damage to the surface along the whole length of
cable to be installed. The cable shall not come in contact with metallic sharp edges or abrasive
surfaces during the installation. Adequate protection shall be provided. Bending radius shall
not be less than 10 times the cable diameter. The ends of the cables shall be capped during
the installation from the moment it is cut from the reel to the time of final connection.
Cables run on trays and ladders shall be neatly dressed and secured. Ends of the cables shall
be capped during installation till the time prior to final connection. Every cable shall be
supported at a point not more than 500 mm from its termination.
The ducts shall be cleaned prior to cable pulling and lubricated with a product similar to the type
J or WJ from Polywater Co. Pulleys and Rollers shall be used to guide the cables along the
route and meet limit of pulling force and bending radius.
Pulling force is specified for each cable by the manufacturer. Typical values are:
-control cable 4c 2.5 mm2 410 N
-control cable 4c 4 mm2 650 N
-power cable 4c 10 mm2 1650 N
When there are cable ducts, the lower ducts shall be used first.
The cable will be installed between two termination points in a single length without splice.
Openings of ducts that are terminating outdoor shall be properly sealed with Fire Rated Foam.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 47
The cables shall be placed in the trenches on the supports of the various levels in parallel
without overlapping other than needed to leave the trench toward an equipment, another trench
or a duct.
There shall be at least half a diameter between power cables and the adjacent cables.
Where cables are laid in formed trenches, the installation shall include for the removal and
replacement of the trench covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on the
trenches where they cross access ways Cable trays shall be of perforated steel with a heavy-
duty flange galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO 146.
The cables will access the equipment from the trenches by making an opening, to be sealed
after cable installation, on the wall of the trenches and installing a duct of by direct burial (short
distance).
holes.
All cables shall be properly secured to the supports along the route with metallic straps
(stainless steel or galvanized).
e) Cable Pit
The cable pit will be used as a junction point for trenches and ducts. Cables shall be
supported and routed from entry point to departing point. The cable routing shall be carefully
planned to meet the segregation criteria, to achieve an organized arrangement of cables and to
avoid unnecessary change of level, overlapping, crossing, etc… this planning shall be
presented to the Engineer for approval.
f) Cable Identification
All cables shall be identified below the termination at each end and at approved positions by
means of identification plates engraved with the cable number, feeder/circuit name, size of
cable, number of cores, phase colour etc., or such lettering as the Authority/Engineer may
require. These will be properly tied to the cable by means of stainless steel or nylon bands.
Cores of power cables shall be identified by colors and in case of control cables, numerals shall
be printed in black on the white core insulation at intervals as per the applicable standards for
multicore control cables.
Also, the over-sheath shall be embossed in English along two lines equally spaced around
circumference of the cable with “GCCIA ELECTRIC CABLE 600/1000 VOLTS” (as an example)
followed by:
 Name of manufacturer
 Year of manufacturing
 Type of insulation (XLPE/PVC)

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 48
 Number of cores
 Conductor size
 Conductor material
 Standard of construction (IEC/BS)
g) Termination of MV Cables
Termination will be made by using a specialized kit (3M, RAYCHEM or equivalent) including
insulation sleeves and sheds. Sheds shall always be used even inside junction boxes. The
shield and armour shall be grounded with the accessories included in the kit. Proper lug or
connector shall be provided for the conductor.
Cable Termination types (conventional & plug in) and requirements shall be provided as per the
details mentioned in MV XLPE Power Cables and Accessories specification-016403-2000-
47ES-5280.
h) LV cable termination
The cables shall be of sufficient length to avoid traction on the terminal blocks and allow proper
organization and shaping of the leads. Splicing of leads is prohibited.
The leads shall be connected in numeric sequence from top to bottom, except otherwise shown
on the construction drawings. Removal of the external jacket and armour shall be performed
with proper tools to avoid damaging the insulations of the conductors.
The lead end shall be skinned such that only 3 mm of conductor are exposed once the
connection is done. Normally the leads are introduced in the terminal blocks.
Exceptionally, lugs will be used of adequate size to avoid cutting strands.
These lugs shall be secured by using lock washer.
The ends of each cable shall be terminated in brass, compression type cable glands of suitable
size, which shall secure the cable inner sheath and ensure effective electrical continuity
between the cable armouring wires and the metal enclosures on to which the cable is
terminated. Cable glands fitted on outdoor equipment shall also incorporate suitable
compression seals to secure the outer sheath and shall be so designed and fitted that water
cannot enter the cable or the equipment through the cable termination. Where required, a
barrier shall be incorporated to prevent ingress of moisture via the interstitial spaces in the
cable. At all rising terminations, the cable inner sheath shall pass through the gland to
terminate approximately 6 mm above the gland. Gland Shroud should be provided for the cable
gland used outside the panels. Insulated glands shall be supplied complete with close fitting
insulating shrouds.
i) Wiring
In some cases, wiring is necessary to complete the installation. Wiring shall be performed with
stranded conductor insulated with non flammable material (such as fluoropolymer insulation)
rated at 750 V. Spare wiring reels should normally be supplied by the equipment
manufacturers.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 49
Color of wire insulation shall be the some as for the other equipment for the same application or
circuit.
Cores of multi conductor control cables shall be identified in accordance with section 4 of IEC
60227-1 or part 5 of ICEA S-73-532 (NEMA WC 57), section E.3.1, method I.
On multi conductor power cable, each phase shall be permanently identified with different solid
color; preferably with solid colored insulation.
The colors of equipment wiring shall be as follow:

a) DC circuits: .......................................... Grey
b) CT circuits ............................................ Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
c) PT circuits ............................................ Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
d) Alarm circuits ....................................... Blue
e) Grounding ............................................ Green with Yellow stripes
f) 3-phase, 4W power circuits .................. Red, Yellow, Blue, Black (neutral)
g) 1-phase, 2W AC power circuits ............ Red, Black (neutral)
j) Fiber Optic Connections
The Contractor must use qualified persons for all works concerning the splicing and the
connection of the optic fibers. The Contractor shall submit the qualification certificate of the
selected persons to the Engineer for approval.
FO cables are to be laid on perforated trays with cover. Tray with Minimum width of 300mm to
be provided for FO cables.
4.3.4 Special Care
 Measurement of pulling tension shall be performed carefully;

 Unused opening made in equipment by the Contractor shall be provided with permanent
cap and sealed;
 Planning of cables shall be performed carefully to meet the segregation criteria and
achieve an organized layout of cables. This shall be presented to the Engineer for
approval;
 Proper tightening of cable connection shall be performed to avoid hot spots (power cables)
or loss of signals (control, data cables).
 Insulation resistance meter;

 Pulleys and roller (straight, angle, vertical);
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 50
 Pulling equipment (winch, truck) and pulling cable;

 Material to fasten cables to support;
 Galvanized metal trays;
 Cable tags and tag printer;
 Lubricant compound;
 Cable glands.
5 IINSPECTION, TEST AND SITE COMMISSIONING
5.1 General
This specification of procedures has been produced to provide an orderly means of carrying out
all inspection, testing and commissioning activities leading to the release for commercial
operation of the substations
The managing of commissioning and start-up operation of substations of the mentioned project
will be carried by the Contractor.
The lead organization shall be the Contractor’s Commissioning Manager, who define the limits
of each Contractor Commissioning Supervisor.
Prior to commissioning, the procedures outlines must be reviewed, discussed and agreed by
the Engineer and the Contractor.
5.2 Inspection, Tests on Completion
5.2.1 General Specifications
 Testing and commissioning of all Work at Site will be in accordance with detailed
programs and procedures prepared by the Contractor and the substation / switchyard
equipment supplier and approved by the Engineer. Such programs and procedures
shall include all tests specified in these Specifications. Wherever equipment supplied
under this Contracts is tested together as a unit, the Engineer will coordinate the
preparation of test programs and procedures, and the execution of the tests among
the respective Contractors.
 Testing and commissioning at site shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to the
acceptance of the Work or part of the Work. The Engineer shall witness all tests.
 The Contractor shall provide, at Site, the required test personnel together with the
required test, equipment, instruments, wiring, etc. required to carry out the tests and
record their results in a satisfactory manner. The Contractor shall calibrate all
necessary test instruments and equipment, and include calibration records in the
respective test reports.
 In cases where doubt exists regarding the results of any tests, the Engineer may request
repetition of those tests.
 The Engineer reserves the right to witness any tests both at factory and at site. The
Contractor shall advise the Engineer at least 30 working days prior to the start of such
tests.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 51
5.2.2 Tests on Materials
 The materials, parts and assemblies shall be tested to comply with the ASTM Standards
or other standards specified and shall be in accordance with the best commercial
methods applicable to the relevant type and class of work. The tests and trials shall be
recorded and certified by the Contractor.
 The test records for materials shall identify the component parts in which the materials
are to be used and the certificate shall be prepared in such a way that it can be easily
determined if the applicable Specifications or standards have been complied with.
 All radiographs, test specimens and test records shall become the property of the
Engineer.
 DC 110V charger with temporary battery bank back up is required to proceed with
commissioning activities. No temporary DC supply package shall be accepted.
5.2.3 Test Reports
 All Equipment, such as 400 & 33kV GIS, Reactor, Telecom SCADA, protective relays
used as part of the specified protective system, etc., shall have been type tested and
witnessed by competent authorities to IEC standards or equivalent.
 Test reports shall provide and shall indicate the tests performed, instruments used,
names of test personnel and provide for witnesses’ signatures. All test reports shall
also be numbered and dated.
 The Contractor shall compile records of and reports on each and every test specified
under this Contract and bind such test documents in the same manner as the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
 If type tests are not available with three months of contract award the associated
equipment shall be deemed non-compliant until such type tests are repeated. These
tests shall be done at no additional cost and shall not delay delivery of the specified
systems
5.3 Scope of Commissioning
The scope of the work includes the installation and/or the testing of the systems provided under
this specification at any or all of the locations where the system will be installed.
The testing will include, in conjunction with the substation system supplier, the testing of the
interfaces to adjacent protective systems and primary plant in particular the CT's, VT's and
circuit breakers. Co-operation with this overall testing will be required.
The testing also includes GIS, Reactor, Telecom, Scada, all indicating meters, relays, control
DCS, dispatch center, protection signaling, PLCC equipment, fiber optic communications and
similar functions associated with the primary plant, including the necessary interface with
existing installation or equipment supplied by others.
Testing of the interface with equipment installed by other Contractors jointly with the other
Contractors as required.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 52
Any component found to be defective during commissioning test should remain in the panel
existing component location itself with proper tagging (indicating status & nature of defect) until
a replacement component is arranged.
The commissioning shall be effected in order to verify the following:
 The equipment has been properly installed;

 The equipment has been installed at the right location;
 The equipment has not been affected by transport or installation;
 The overall installation has been properly carried out;
 the overall installation can be safely energized and put in commercial operation.
These activities will be carried out during two phases as follows:
a) Pre-commissioning: equipment and systems inspection and testing leading to

acceptance of individual items for first energization and preliminary operation.
b) Commissioning: equipment and systems inspection, operational and performance

testing in energized state during the preliminary operation, leading to acceptance of
systems for trial operation and commercial operation.
Objectives
1. The objectives of commissioning work, prior to the successful energization of Plant at

full voltage and connection to the system shall include the following:
 Confirm the integrity (correctness) of the installation, including the related

 communications links;
 Confirm the integrity of insulation, connections and phasing;
 Ensure proof of equipment characteristics;
 Review workmanship;
 Confirm the correct implementation of the design;
 Check equipment ratings;
 Make final field checks.
2. Energization measurement and on-load checks are required to meet these objectives
during and following equipment energization and connection to the system.
3. The following shall also be included:
 Check the performance of the various major equipment such as GIS, Relevant HV
equipment at outdoors, Reactor, Cable, AC and DC, etc.
 Check the performance of the various manual and automatic features
 Check settings and operation of protective relays
 Check the performance of the communications system links;
 Assess the ability of the system to accommodate scheduled or unscheduled
connection and disconnection of Plant without undue disturbance;
 Make loading and performance tests of all components (including verification of losses
in some cases);
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 53
 Check the earthing/lightning systems;

 Conduct integrated system performance tests including the relay system performance
when substation disconnects are opened or closed.
Responsibilities
 To ensure that the test jurisdiction and transfer of responsibilities is regulated by strict
safety and hand over procedures, the interface between the Contractor and the Engineer
will be agreed in advance.
 The Engineer will retain full jurisdiction over all commissioning activities, that may affect
the operation of the existing system. In these circumstances and when so requested,
technical advice and assistance shall be given.
 The Engineer will be responsible for technical guidance and assistance to the Employer.
Safety Procedures
 The Employer will have responsibility for the safety procedures effecting his equipment.
These shall be detailed in his bid documents and shall be coordinated with primary
system safety procedures for other Contractor's systems.
 It will be necessary to work within the work permit and tagging system and associated
safety procedures for all equipment, systems and areas covered by the Employer’s safety
procedures.
 The Employer will assume responsibility for the establishment and implementation of
tagging, safety and work permit procedures for the protection of personnel and
equipment, as soon as equipment and systems are connected to or are energizeable
from the existing system.
5.4 Organization
The commissioning is organized in work groups and directed by one Manager who will
coordinate with the Engineer. The commissioning groups activities will be carried out in parallel.
Special coordination shall be taken to make sure that the Manufacturer representatives and
test equipment are not needed at two different commissioning sites at the same time, where
coordinated tests are required (In case the contract involves more than one substation).
5.4.1 Commissioning Committee
The main purpose of the commissioning committee lies in the development of common
procedures to integrate the commissioning parties.
This committee would be composed by a Commissioning Manager, commissioning teams,

each one composed by a Commissioning Supervisor, Manufacturer representative and
Employer’s operator representative.
Is essential that the commissioning committee be informed with sufficient lead time concerning:
 The preliminary operation schedule for each equipment and/or system;

 The requirement for commissioning and operating personnel.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 54
Every effort shall be made at the commissioning committee level to ensure man power
allocation at the proper time, to avoid unnecessary repetition of test activities and to facilitate
smooth transition from construction to preliminary operation and to commercial operation.
5.4.2 Commissioning Manager
The Commissioning Manager tasks are:
 Prepare of commissioning program including testing and sequential energization;

 Prepare the commissioning schedule;
 Coordinate with major equipment manufacturers;
 Coordinate with construction of substation and lines (by other contractors);
 Coordinate with commissioning groups for specialists and equipments interchanges;
 Inform Engineer of commissioning activities;
 Obtain from Engineer approval for partial and total energization;
 Coordinate with contractors’ construction to solve installation problems;
 Prepare in coordination with Engineer the operation procedures for each substation.
 The number of commissioning personnel, required shall be detailed on a list with names,
experience and proposed duration of their presence on Site.
 Commissioning staff shall have authorization, and the competence, to undertake minor
repairs or to make temporary redesigns and to reconnect systems to meet the specified
system performance to preclude delays in energization and putting into commercial service
of any part of the works.
5.4.3 Commissioning Supervisor
For commissioning purposes there shall be a Commissioning Supervisors for the management
of each commissioning team. Commissioning Supervisor will report and coordinate to the
Commissioning Manager.
Their tasks are:
 Supervision commissioning activities of his group;

 Coordinate the communication between Employer, Contractors construction staff and
Manufacturers;
 Represent the Commissioning Manager in site;
 Inform Employer of any changes in commissioning program;
 Complete the Commissioning forms including approval signatures of Engineer;
 Management of commissioning progress and planning of commissioning activities;
 Call commissioning participants for coordination meetings.
5.4.4 Manufacturer Representative

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 55
The Contractor shall appoint the Manufacturer representative to assist his personnel during the
commissioning in the case of specialized equipment (such as circuit breakers, Reactors etc...).
Their tasks are:
 Supervise the installation of their equipment;

 Elaborate and submit commissioning program for approval;
 Verify the correct installation of their equipment;
 Test the equipment, according commissioning forms;
 Respond to Engineer and Commissioning Teams questions;
 Justify to Engineer and Commissioning Team the tests results;
 Explain to Engineer and Commissioning Team the test methodology and progress;
 Prepare and submit to Commissioning Manager the commissioning report;
 Manufacturer must provide a necessary assistance and cooperation for testing and
commissioning where they are directly responsible.
5.4.5 Contractor Responsibility
It is Contractor's responsibility to deliver a fully functional installation by which the Contractor

shall performs all commissioning tasks including one month operation test period.
All positions of commissioning committee shall be filled by Contractors personnel that will:
 Supply the logistic support for commissioning: transportation of commission committee,

equipment, tools, materials, etc.;
 Supply an adequate communication system between substations and radio-based system
(walkie-talkies) for local communications;
 Supply technicians and workers for correctives electromechanical and civil works;
 Establish and implement its own safety procedures (subject to the review by the Engineer)
on all equipment, system and areas as well as for the tagging of all equipment released to
indicate that they are under preliminary operation.
The Employer will be responsible for establish and implement its own tagging, safety and work
permit procedures for the protection of equipment and personnel as soon as equipment and/or
system are energized from the existing system.
 All instruments, tools and other equipment required for testing and commissioning must be
made available on site by the Contractor. The test equipment shall be of satisfactory
quality and condition and where necessary, is calibrated by an approved authority or to an
approved standard.
 Arrangements shall be made for the provision of power supplies for testing with the
necessary vector configuration, voltage and current rating.
 The Contractor shall identify, in terms of the commissioning requirements of the offered
systems, any items of test equipment that need to be changed or supplemented.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 56
 The Engineer will advise the Contractor on any specific item of specialized equipment,
which is available at existing sites. The Engineer may then waive the requirement to
provide specific test equipment if the available equipment is approved as equivalent. Any
or all of the equipment included in the test equipment provided for under the contract may
be used for commissioning. In such circumstances, the equipment must be handed over to
the employer, in good condition, following final handover.
5.4.6 Engineer’s Representative
The Engineer’s representatives will have the following responsibilities:
 Witness the commissioning activities;

 Participate in the establishment and in the review of the energization procedures;
 Acceptance and taking over of the items handed over for commercial operation after
provisional acceptance.
5.5 Individual Equipment
Two months prior to the beginning of commissioning, the Contractor must submit for approval a
commissioning program including organization, Gantt chart, manufacturer representation, and a
sample of commissioning forms for each type of equipment.
These forms must include the following information:
 Presentation page with general description of equipment and reserved spaces for the
signature of Engineer, Contractor and Manufacturer representative;
 Installation checklist, tests and check according section (non limitating);
 A copy of nameplate of equipment or other relevant drawings;
 Reserved spaces for comments;
 Ambient temperature and humidity records.
One commissioning form must be destined to each equipment or system.
At the end of the commissioning day, the Contractor must submit to the Engineer, to discuss
the test program of the following day in terms of activities to be performed, inspection and test
procedures, safety procedures, work permit and switching procedures, personnel to be engaged
in and be witness of the activities, etc.
During the commissioning activities the Engineer reserves the right to refuse or stop any
inspection or a test which may represent a hazard to personnel and/or equipment.
On completion of the tests, each Commissioning Supervisor will submit the inspection and test
results for acceptance by the Commissioning Manager and the Engineer.
These results will be recorded on agreed forms and forming a dossier entitled "Commissioning
Test Report". This dossier containing all test results and remaining deficiencies shall be
attached to the application for release for commercial operation.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 57
5.6 Energization Program
A commissioning program shall be prepared for approval and for incorporation into the Project
construction program. The time required to permit full commissioning of all components at each
site shall be identified.
All testing shall be during normal working hours as far as is practicable. Tests, which involve
existing apparatus and system outages, may need to be carried out outside normal working
hours.
5.6.1 Procedure for Preliminary Operation
a) Definitions
 This procedure covers the activities leading to the release of the equipment or systems
considered for first energization and eventual preliminary operation;
 First energization is defined as first application of voltage on the main terminals of the
equipment from a main power source (400 kV to 415 VAC, 110 VDC and 48 VDC);
 Preliminary operation means operation of the equipment or system under expected
operating conditions to check behaviour of the components, correct if necessary;
 Besides main equipment or systems, this procedure will also apply for the first energization
of all auxiliary systems in the substations such as batteries, lighting and air conditioning
systems, etc.;
 One month (trial operation) satisfactory operation prior to take-over. The trial operation will
be satisfactory if there are no more than 5 interruptions of operation during the period with
a total accumulated downtime of less than 48 hours during the period.
b) Procedures
 At any appropriate time after successful completion and acceptance of the inspection and
tests, the Contractor may request the release of a piece of equipment or of a system for
first energization and preliminary operation;
 On receipt of request, the Commissioning Supervisor will review the status of the items
considered and fill in a release form "for preliminary operation", listing the items to be
energized and the auxiliary and control circuits involved. This partially completed form will
be reviewed by the Commissioning Supervisor to include outstanding items, and will be
signed by the Engineer to indicate his approval. One copy of the relevant test reports
should be attached to each copy of the releases;
 Following this, the Commissioning Supervisor will establish an agreed energization
procedure based on the conditions prevailing at the time. For energization involving the
existing system, the Engineer will participate in these discussions and approve the
proposed procedure of energization;
 The Contractor will then carry out pre-energization inspections and checks, jointly with the
Engineer, to ensure that the equipment can be safety energized. At this time the
Contractor will tag all equipment listed in the release form to indicate the change of status;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 58
 On successful completion of the above, the Commissioning Supervisor will approve and
recommend acceptance of the release to the Employer for "Preliminary Operation".
Distribution of copies of the release will be handled by the Commissioning Supervisor as
indicated on the Form;
 The energization and switching operations which may affect the existing operating system
will be handled by the Employer's operational personnel in accordance with existing
operating procedures;
 In these cases, the Commissioning Supervisor will provide assistance to the Employer and
will direct operations which are within its responsibility. For other cases, not affecting the
operation of the existing system, the Commissioning Supervisor may direct and perform
any energization or switching operation;
 Inspection and testing after energization will be conducted by the Commissioning
Supervisor.
5.6.2 Procedure for Commercial Operation
a) Definitions
 This procedure covers the activities leading to the handover of the equipment and systems
considered for commercial operation by the Employer;
 Commercial operation means safe and continuous operation by the Employer, of these
properly tested equipment and systems, as an additions to the existing operating Power
System.
b) Procedure
 At any appropriate time after successful completion and acceptance of the inspection and
tests carried out during preliminary operation, the Contractor may request the release of a
piece of equipment or of a system for commercial operation;
 On receipt of the request, the Engineer will review the status of the item considered and fill
in a "Release for Commercial Operation" form, listing the items released and the auxiliary
and control circuits involved;
 This partially completed form will be reviewed by the Commissioning Manager to include
outstanding items and will be signed by the Engineer to indicate its approval. One copy of
the relevant test reports should be issued and attached to each copy of the release;
 Following this, the Commissioning Manager will initiate a joint inspection of the installation
with the Engineer;
 On successful completion of the above, the Commissioning Manager will approve and
recommend the acceptance of the release by the Engineer.
Upon advice of the Engineer, the Employer will accept the release for commercial operation as
noted, and jointly with the Contractor proceed with the transfer of the tags to indicate the new
status of the equipment.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 59
This transfer of responsibility will not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation.
5.6.3 Energization Checks
Perform all pre-energization checks required to ensure that all test have been completed and
that the installation has been returned to operating conditions and can be safely energized.
(DC control switches, CT's shorting switches positions, removal of temporary grounds and
connections, protection really and equipment status, etc.).
Release equipment to be energized in accordance with the method agreed with Engineer,
Contractor and Employer’s operators.
Review the schedule of energization, base on the conditions prevailing at the time of
energization and confirm agreement to Commissioning Supervisor.
5.6.4 Energization
Participate during energization, in accordance with the agreed energization procedures as

defined by Contractors, Engineer and Employer’s operators.
5.6.5 Post-Energization Checks
Perform post-energization checks and tests to ensure that the installation is operating properly
(AVR, transformer paralleling, etc.).
Discuss with the Engineer and advise Employer’s operation personnel regarding performance
of system operation checks after energization, which may affect the system operation.
5.7 Summary of Commissioning Tests and Checks
5.7.1 List of Equipment to be Tested (non-limitative)
Electromechanical equipment (including GIS):
 Grounding grid;
 Strained and rigid busses and shielding;
 HV and MV disconnect switches;
 Ground switches;
 HV and MV circuit breakers;
 Reactors;
 Current Transformers;
 Voltage Transformers;
 Surge arresters;
 Shunt capacitors banks;
 MV and LV power cables;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 60
 Station service transformers;

 Emergency generator sets;
 automatic transfer switches;
 AC/DC distribution panels;
 Batteries;
 Battery chargers;
 Structures;
 Junction boxes;
 Lighting;
 Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning system (HVAC);
 Fire Protection System;
 Overhead Travelling crane;
 Teleprotection System;
 Substation SCADA
5.7.2 Electromechanical Equipment Inspection and Tests
The following is given as basic guidelines for the Contractor to prepare his detailed test
commissioning program. The Contractor shall use, as reference, the Canadian Electrical
Association Commissioning Guide British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice to the
entire satisfaction of the GCCIA/Engineer approval or similar document
5.7.2.1 Grounding Grid
Grid resistance measuring must be carried under typical environmental conditions

(temperature, earth moisture, etc.).
a) General Check List
 Grid dimensions, cable runs and layout as per drawings;

 Check gravel thickness and dimensions as per specifications;
 Connector types according to drawings;
 Verify by sampling, mechanical and welded connections;
 Communication system grounding;
 Number of electrodes according to drawings.
The resistance of substation grounding grid must be measured in order to verify the compliance
with calculated values.
If measured values of resistance of grid is higher than specified values, the Contractor must
take actions to reduce this resistance to specified or calculated values.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 61
The following parameters must be calculated and measured:
 Grid resistance;
 Touch voltage;
 Step voltage;
 Mesh voltage;
 Transferred voltage.
400kV Switchgear;
 Visual inspection
 GIS Main circuit contact resistance test
 GIS GDM calibration and contact operational test
 GIS SF6 gas quality and leak test
 GIS CB, DS/ES & FMES Mechanical Tests
 GIS PD Tests
 a. GIS PD coupler identification and coaxial cable test
 b. GIS PDMS test.
 c. GIS UHF PD coupler sensitivity test
 d. GIS HV and PD test
 GIS & LCC

 a. Annunciator local alarm test
 b. BCU local alarm test
 c. Local interlock test
 c. LCC heating and lighting test
 d. Local synchronization and DC control circuit Test
 e. GIS HMI level test
 f. Master station level test
 GIS VT & IVT test
 GIS Surge arrester test
c) HV and MV Disconnect Switches
 Check installation grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate, drawings and
specifications;
 Check HV terminals and tightening;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 62
 Check operation, contact alignment, contact pressure, mechanical over-travel (Functional

test, Timing test, Local interlock test) etc.;
 Set motorized operation and test operation (locally);
 Set and test auxiliary devices (heating, lighting, interlocks, etc.);
 Measure resistance of main contacts;
 Test insulation with hi-pot or insulation power factor test;
 Other tests as per Manufacturer's instructions.
d) HV and MV Ground Switches and Fault Thrower Switches
 Check installation, grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate, drawings and
specifications;
 Check operation, contact alignment, contact pressure, mechanical over-travel (Functional
test, Timing test, Local interlock test), etc.;
 Set and test interlock device;
e) HV and MV Circuit Breakers and Interrupters
 Carry out check during erection and mechanical adjustments as per manufacturer
instructions;
 Check installation and grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate and drawings and
specifications;
 Check operation (Functional test, Timing test, Local interlock test), main contacts timing,
and synchronization, anti-pumping protections, etc.;
 Set and test auxiliary devices (heating, lighting, etc.);
 Measure the resistance of main contacts;
 Other tests as per manufacturer's instructions;
f) Reactors
specifications;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 63
 Check during erection, internal inspections, oil tests, tap changer operation, core insulation
to ground, etc., as per manufacturer instructions;
 Record vacuum drying and oil tests during filling;
 Checking of MOLG reading (verification of oil level) with actual site temperature and
validate operation of MOLG minimum alarm.
 Test on insulating oil before filling in to the Reactor (BDV, water content, Tan delta & PCB
content).
 Tests on core and core clamping structure at 2500VDC. Insulation resistance test before
and after 2.5kV DC test.
 Insulation Resistance measurement of Reactor Winding at 5 kV.
 Magnetizing current and Reactance measurement.
 Measurement of Tan delta and Capacitance of Winding and Bushings.
 Sweep Frequency Response Analysis (SFRA).
 Winding Resistance measurement.
 Calibration checks of oil/winding temperature devices and Gradient setting test.
 Ratio check of WTI CT.
 Insulation resistance check of devices.
 MK and Protective device wiring check.
 Test on Protective devices like Buchholz relay, pressure relief device, oil level gauge etc.
 Inspection of cable boxes before and after High Voltage test of Cables.
 Oil leak test for 24 hrs.
 Water ingress test during fire deluge system operation.
 Dissolved gas analysis test before energization as per applicable standards.
 Tests on reactor oil.
 Test of Alarms/Trips from HMI/SCADA
 Check external conditions, grounding, oil level, valves position and tightening;
 Recheck oil sample;
 Check, set and test accessories (temperature and oil level indicators, hot-spot, Bucholz
relay, etc.);
 Set and test auxiliaries and their controls (fans, heaters, lighting, etc.);
 Complete other tests as recommended by Reactor/transformer and major components
Manufacturers (bushings, tap changer, etc.).
g) Current Transformers
 Check installation, grounding type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate, drawings and
specifications;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 64
 Check conditions and tightening of primary terminals;

 Check connections, short circuit of spare windings, etc.;
 Check oil level;
 Test insulation (primary and secondary);
 Test ratio and polarity;
 Test magnetization curves (of all CT's);
h) Voltage Transformers
specifications;
 Check conditions and tightening of primary terminals;
 Check oil level;
 Test insulation (primary and secondary);
 Test ratio and polarity (check polarity of HV terminals);
 Set and test auxiliary devices (heating, lighting, etc.);
 Other tests as per Manufacturer's instructions;
 Test power line carrier devices.
i) Surge Arresters
 Check installation and grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate, drawings and
specifications;
 Check conditions and tightening, position of explosion vents;
 Test external insulation with hi-pot or insulation power factor test;
 High Voltage test & verification of leakage current
k) MV and LV Power Cables
 Check installation, grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per drawings and specifications;
 Check termination (stress cones, groundings, etc.);
 Measure resistance, inductance and capacitance;
 Test cable insulation with hi-pot or insulation power factor test.
l) Station Service Transformers

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 65
 As per Reactor checks and tests as applicable in addition to Ratio checks and OLTC
operational checks.
m) Emergency Generator Sets
Emergency generator set must include tests of motor and generator protection system and
manual and automatic control.
 Check installation (level, anchoring, antivibration system, cooling system, exhaust, fuel
system, etc.);
 Speed/frequency at no-load and full load charge;
 Voltage regulation at no-load and full load charge;
 Electrical protection tests (overcurrent, differential, frequency, etc.);
 Mechanical protection tests (overspeed, temperature, oil low pressure, vibration, etc.);
 Record at no-load frequency, voltage, oil pressure, temperature;
 Check alarm signalling (local and remote);
 Check local and remote control;
 Check manual and automatic control (automatic starting and stopping devices);
 Insulation test of generator and generator field;
 Battery and charger.
n) Automatic Transfer Panel
 Check installation, type, ratings, etc., as per nameplate, drawings and specifications;
 Check terminals and tightening;
 Check phasing and polarity;
 Check the automatic and manual transfer from normal to emergency supply and vice
versa;
o) AC/DC Distribution Panels
 Check installation, type, ratings, size, grounding, etc., as per drawings and specifications;
 Check identification (panel, wiring, components, distribution circuits, etc.);
 Check individual components for type and suitability as per drawings and specifications;
 Check conditions, tightening, and cleanness;
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 66
 Check for missing or broken components;

 Individual test of metering instruments and transducers as per control panels tests;
 Check phasing and polarity of main and distribution breakers;
 Check capacity of main and distribution breakers;
 Check cabling as per drawings;
 Other checks as per Manufacturer's instructions.
p) Batteries
 Check installation, type, ratings, size, grounding of supports, etc., as per drawings and
specifications;
 Check condition, tightening, intercell polarity, etc., check and record voltage and specific
gravity of each cell-establish pilot cell;
 Test of Ah capacity, a sampling battery must be fully tested to demonstrate their Ah
capacity. An Ah-vs-time chart must be recorded;
 Check electrolyte level;
 Check battery room ventilation and air extracting device;
q) Battery Chargers
 Check installation, type, ratings, size, grounding, etc., as per drawings and specifications;
 Check the automatic and manual transfer from normal to backup charger and vice versa;
 Check the automatic and manual transfer from equalizing to floating charging rating and
vice versa;
 Record the setting values of voltage ratings and current limiter;
 Test all alarms outputs by faults simulation;
r) Power and Control Cables
All cables shall be tested.
 Check installation, type, size, etc., as per specifications;

 Check continuity;
 Check terminals;
 Check conductor connection tightening;
 Check cable glands;
 Insulation test with megger;
 Check conductors’ identification (number or colour code);
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 67
 Measure resistance including shield;

 Check clearances of terminals.
s) Structures
 Check for damages during installation;

 Check installation (level, warping, member missing, bolts, washers, tightening and
torquing, anchoring, shimming, galvanizing, joint, etc.) and compliance with the drawings.
t) Junction Boxes
 Check installation, type, size, grounding, etc., as per drawings and specifications;
 Check identification (panel, wiring, components, terminals, etc.);
 Check individual components for type and suitability as per drawings and specifications;
 Check for missing or breaking components;
 Check conditions, tightening and cleaners;
 Check cabling as per drawings;
u) Lighting
 Check installation, grounding, type, ratings, etc., as per drawings;

 Check illumination levels as per specifications.
Commissioning checks and tests shall be carried out as listed below for Protection,
Control, Alarms, Measurement and Indication Equipment as applicable:
1. Wiring
a) Insulation resistance tests shall be made with a 1000 V dc megger test voltage
for one minute, on all IEC Class III ac and dc protection, control, alarm and
indication circuits to ensure that wiring is in satisfactory condition.
b) Disconnect and ground the terminals of lower-class equipment which may be
damaged by the application of the 1000 V test voltages for this test.
c) A visual inspection shall be made of all cable glands, cable joints, fuse or circuit
breaker ratings and small panel items such as indicating lamps.
d) All inter-relay, inter-unit and cubicle wiring carried out at Site shall be checked
against the appropriate circuit and/or wiring diagram. This may be done by using
bells or buzzers, dc supplied from the station battery may also be used. Do not
use sound powered telephones to ring out cables. Where it is found necessary
during pre- commissioning work to effect Site modifications to the secondary
wiring, agree the changes with the Engineer and mark up the Site copies of the
appropriate schematic and wiring diagrams.
e) CT and VT cable resistance (burden) shall be measured. Note all readings in the
test records.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 68
2. Mechanical Inspection
All relays shall be examined to ensure that they are in proper working condition, correctly
adjusted, and correctly labelled and that the relay case, cover, glass and gaskets are in
good order and fit properly.
3. Secondary Injection
a) Secondary injection tests shall be performed on each relay and each panel to
prove the integrity of the instrument transformer secondary wiring through the
various meters, relays and control devices.
b) Secondary injection on all ac measuring relays shall be carried out using voltage
and current of sinusoidal wave form and rated power frequency to prove their
characteristics and their settings. On completion of all tests, inform the Engineer
so that relays can be sealed as per their practice.
4. Current and Voltage Transformer Tests in Conjunction with the Switchyard Supplier
a) The magnetization characteristics of all current transformers shall be checked at

a minimum of five points to identify the current transformers and to confirm that
the CT class is suitable for its intended duty and operation. If the design curves
are available, it is not normally necessary to check the characteristics up to any
knee-points which are above 1000 volts.
b) The CT cores must be fully demagnetized before commencing the tests, and
after completing the tests.
c) All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity, phasing and, where
practicable, for secondary output.
5. Primary Injection in Conjunction with the Switchyard Supplier
a) Primary current injection tests shall be made using injection methods suitable for each
particular installation are as agreed and are generally as follows:
 Inject a relatively low voltage sufficient to circulate a measurable current into the various
protective equipment zones, with temporary short circuits applied where necessary, to
simulate faults at different locations within each zone. Both stable and operate modes
shall be identified with measurable currents in the relay circuits.
b) Either three-phase injection methods with phase angle measurements or single-phase

injection may be with phase-to-phase balance injections to identify correct system
phasing and CT connection.
 Inject (as high as practical with the facilities available) a voltage to prove potential
transformers.
c) The objects of the above tests are to confirm the following:

016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 69
 That the connection, phasing, ratio and polarity tests which were carried out on an
individual basis on the various power transformer, instrument transformers, relays,
meters and other components are correct as a total system.
 That the integrity of the primary and secondary connections is complete.
 That the interconnections between current and potential transformer groups and the
associated relays are correct for correct system performance (proper current, voltage
and phase angle).
 That the main equipment characteristics, e.g., transformer ratio and reactor
impedance, are correct.
 That the secondary injection tests carried out on the panel wiring are correct as a total
system.
d) To meet the above objectives the secondary circuit measuring points shall be on the
relay or instrument side of the injection points used for secondary injection tests. This
test must effectively check all CT and VT wiring.
e) The integration of the Recorder and other equipment into the instrument transformer
circuits shall be checked for polarity, direction and calibration, including any interposing
transformers or transducers.
f) The fault and event recorders and other systems shall be checked for recording or
printing operation as appropriate. The recording operation shall be checked from each
event record by initiating device operation.
g) All alarm outputs shall be similarly checked.
6. Functional Operation Tests
a) The correctness of all dc polarities, the minimum operating levels of dc relays and the
correct functioning of dc relay schemes, selection and control switching, indication and
alarms, and data gathering systems shall be tested using negative and positive logic
methods.
b) The use dummy (relay model) breakers for initial testing of trip and reclose circuits is
required to avoid multiple breaker operation. The final trip and operation tests shall be
made to circuit breakers and disconnects to confirm correct operation.
7. On Load Tests
a) On load tests shall be made to confirm functional system performance and as a final
design check.
b) To ensure overall safety standards are met, the tests shall be carried out under the
direct supervision of the Engineer.
c) Both operation (in zone) and stability (through fault) checks shall be made during on-load
tests. Use both the normal and the reversed connection of the CT's or VTs, as
appropriate, to prove the characteristics.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 70
d) A final on load secondary current and voltage check shall be made after the protective
gear has been placed in service to ensure that all connections and test links have been
replaced and test leads removed and confirm the integrity of the current and voltage
transformer circuits.
e) Where necessary, take voltage and/or current readings at the terminals of each relay to
ensure that loop connections between relays are complete. Special attention shall be
taken for broken delta voltages and residual current circuits where zero voltage or
current respectively may not be proof of the completeness of the circuit.
5.8 On-Site Operation Training and Supervision
In order to ensure a comprehensive introduction to the operation of the new facilities and an
easy take over by Employer’s personnel, the Contractor shall provide the services of operation
training during one month prior to operation and supervision for a period of six (6) months
following the provisional acceptance. Essentially the services shall comprise the following
activities (non-limitative).
Initial training shall be provided during the testing of the major equipment, GIS, Reactor, relays,
protection systems and DCS equipment at site.
Employer staff will participate either continuously or on a regularly recurring basis, in the
commissioning work.
Employer staff should be allowed to become familiar with the operating and maintenance
aspects of the new equipment.
Advice shall be given to the Employer on the precautions required in, or possible consequences
of, initial energization of the equipment.
5.8.1 Training
5.8.1.1 Equipment Features
The Contractor shall prepare a formal presentation of equipment features to the Employers’
operating personnel:
 Basics on circuit breakers and HV switches manoeuvres, alarms, interlocks, etc.;

 Basics on Reactor instruments, alarms and trip devices;
 Basics on tap changer mechanism operation, paralleling, voltage regulation and alarms;
 Basics on AC station services: distribution panels, transfer switch, diesel generator, etc.;
 Basics on DC station services: distribution panels, redundant chargers, batteries, etc.;

5.8.1.2 Operation Principles
The Contractor must prepare a formal presentation of operation principles and exercise the
Employer’s personnel in accordance with Employer’s operating procedures. The various topics
to be covered by the presentation are (non limitative):
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 71
 Voltage control;
 Line manoeuvring sequence;
 Transformer manoeuvring sequence;
 Transformer overload;
 Power restoration sequence following a general blackout;
 System parameters and equipment status monitoring;
 Coordination with SCADA main dispatch center;
 AC station service operation: voltage monitoring, consumption, transfer panel operation,
diesel generator exercising and instruments readings, fuel supply, transformer taps,
transformer instruments reading, etc.;
 DC station service operation: voltage monitoring, floating/equalizing of battery, main to
redundant chargers’ transfer, etc.;
 Line fault procedure: reading protective relay alarm and trip signals, isolating faulty circuit
and apparatus mechanical/electrical interlocking, troubleshooting and repair, supervision of
maintenance staff, service restoration and incident report.
 Substation transformer fault procedure: reading protective relay alarm and trip signals,
isolating faulty transformer and apparatus mechanical/electrical interlocks, service
restoration with redundant transformers, troubleshooting and repair, supervision of
maintenance staff, transformer service restoration and incident report;
 Substation bus fault: same as for line fault;
 AC station service failure: reading device alarm and trip signals, isolating faulty circuit and
mechanical interlocks, service restoration with redundant supply (transformer or diesel
generator set) or provisional measures, troubleshooting and repair, supervision of
maintenance staff, main supply restoration and incident report;
 DC station service failure: reading device alarm and trip signals, isolating faulty circuit and
mechanical interlocks, service restoration by redundant chargers or provisional measures,
troubleshooting and repair, supervision of maintenance staff, main supply restoration and
incident report;
 Operation of programmable logic controller equipment: using man-machine interface,
monitoring terminal indication, troubleshooting, etc.;
 Operation of fault recorder system from MAS: data retrieval, analysis, fault location,
troubleshooting, etc.;
 Maintenance follow-up: scheduling of periodic maintenance and outage forced
maintenance, record of maintenance works, available spares and defective components to
be repaired;
 Security of personnel: mechanical/electrical interlock of apparatus, isolating maintenance
zone, maintenance authorization, etc.;
 Environmental protection: handing of oil or fuel, detection of oil or fuel leaks, recuperation
and disposal of oil or fuel wastes, etc.
016403-2000-47FE-4000 01 July 2024 72
5.8.1.3 Operation Supervision
The Contractor shall provide services of a specialist for the operation supervision for a minimum
of six (6) months following provisional acceptance of installation by the Employer. The
Specialist shall supervise on a day-to-day basis the operating personnel of the Employer the
substations: everyday routine works, preparation of periodic reports, log book maintenance,
exceptional events assistance, troubleshooting, etc. The presence of the specialist in
Employer’s substations shall be based on regular working hours with availability on a standby
basis outside normal working hours. The Contractor shall provide the specialist with all required
facilities to carry over his assignment and cover all cost such as convenient vehicle with radio
telecommunication, lodging, salary, overtime, travelling and living expenses, etc.
5.8.1.4 Program and Approval of Candidates
The Contractor shall provide a description of the methodology and main topics of proposed
program along with the resume of possible candidates for this assignment.
The Contractor shall present a detailed program and the names of proposed candidates for this
assignment for the approval by the Engineer at least six (6) months prior to the scheduled date
for operation.
(GCCIA)

CCTV AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
016403-2200-47ES-4140 Rev.01
May 2024
CCTV & Access Control System # Date Page

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 CCTV AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 2

1.1 GENERAL 2
2 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) 2
2.1 Subcontractor /Manufacturer/Equipment requirements 2
2.2 General System Requirements 2
2.6.1 CCTV Control Desk 7
2.6.2 Monitoring and Remote Control Facilities 7
2.6.3 Motion detection Alarm 8
2.7 Video Recording 8
2.8 Operational Protocol 8
2.9 Signage Requirement 9
2.10 Spares 9
2.11 Documentation 9
3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 10
3.1 Subcontractor /Manufacturer requirements 10
3.2 General Technical Requirements 10
3.3 Spares 12

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 2
1 CCTV AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
1.1 General
The present specification outlines, from technical point-of-view, the standard requirements
applicable to the CCTV and Access Control system for New 400kV Substations being
developed by the Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority (GCCIA) as part of
the GCC Interconnection Project
Section 1 CCTV System
Section 2 Access Control System
2 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV)
This section briefs the specification and works required to be carried out for commissioning an
integrated CCTV system in the substation. The CCTV surveillance system shall be designed to
ensure no intruder can enter/leave the building or plot premises without detection. Apart from
CCTV cameras, this specification also covers guidelines required for providing local recording
system, switching units, network switches for CCTV system at each new substation,
communication equipment and integration of substation CCTV system with existing Genetec
Federation server (5.11) located at GCCIA headquarters through set of OTN Switches network
available in existing GCCIA Substations. It may also be noted that existing CCTV system in
GCCIA networks are Genetec-Omnicast 4.7.
2.1 Subcontractor /Manufacturer/Equipment requirements
The Manufacturer/Subcontractor carrying out the works must be engaged in this business for
min 5 years and must possess license from relevant authority of that country. All personal from
Manufacturer /subcontractor utilized for this project shall be experience and must possess
training certificate in installation, Testing and commissioning of such systems. A complete
company portfolio along with CVs shall be submitted for approval as part of prequalification. All
the offered equipment and accessories shall be of industrial type and well proven to be used in
similar atmosphere.
2.2 General System Requirements
The Contractor shall deliver, install, configure, commission and integrate a closed-circuit
television system which shall consist but not limited to the following:
 Two screens installed on dedicated CCTV control desk in Control room and / or Guard
room) specifically designed for surveillance purpose and connected to recording servers.
 One system with dual monitors installed in Guard room to access feeds from recorder
servers

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 3
 Fixed and PTZ indoor cameras and outdoor cameras in designated areas’
 Fully remotely controlled cameras, with zoom, tilt and pan controls (PTZ), in designated
areas,
 Automatic pan of remotely controlled cameras,
 Automatic monitor screen switching between cameras,
 Continuous elapsed time recording of the cameras as they are switched to the
monitor,
 Real time recording of the cameras.
 Operator enabled motion detectors on all cameras irrespective of whether they are
switched to the monitor screen.
 The number of cameras, lenses, Camera bracket, Accessories, cables and quantity
shall be based on site requirements, once layout is finalized.
 A recording system for 24x365 days CCTV recording of all cameras with minimum
HD resolution.
 A set of accessories for CCTV System mainly mounting kit, poles, power supply
units, conduits separate for power and separate for network cables, Network and
power sockets, signboards etc. as required for completion of works,
 All components including camera, server, switch etc. shall be suitable for area it is
being installed i.e high operating temp. range, high humidity and dust protection.
 Each Camera shall be supplied with local memory cards to of sufficient size to
provide storage of min 1 month duration.
 The CCTV system shall be provided with latest software/firmware along with all
required licenses.
 The existing Genetec Federation server (5.11) located at GCCIA HQ shall be
upgraded with licenses as required.
All CCTV equipment shall be of Industrial type (no domestic-type equipment is acceptable) and
shall have relevant references of being specifically designed and manufactured for use in 100%
duty cycle surveillance systems.
2.3 Technical Requirements
Cameras shall meet the following specific requirements
Parameter Outdoor type PTZ camera Indoor PTZ camera

Minimum resolution 2MP 2MP/SVAG Day & Night
Video Stream H.264 / H.265 etc. H.264 / H.265 etc.
IP Camera Yes Yes
Power supply PoE Preferred PoE Preferred

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 4
Housing IP66 rated (external enclosure is also Tamper proof/IP53

acceptable)
Filter UV removable type or better UV removable type or
better
Audio Support Yes Yes
Sun Shield Yes No
PTZ Yes Yes
Day/Night Vision with Yes Yes
auto removable
infrared cut filter
Color vision Yes Yes
Internal built in Yes Yes
Memory
Auto Iris Yes Yes
Mounting Yes Yes
Pan Yes: 360 degrees Yes: 360 degrees
Tilt Yes: 180 degrees Yes: 180 degrees
Zoom Yes Yes
Wide Dynamic Yes Yes
IR lighting Yes Yes
Sensitivity 0.05 Lux 0.05 Lux
Intrusion Yes Yes
Detection/loss of
signal detection
The cameras shall operate from a common time base or approved alternative system, to ensure
synchronization of all cameras. Fixed cameras shall be fitted with limited zoom facilities to
permit minor manual adjustment of the angle of surveillance cover. Remotely controlled
cameras shall be capable of being placed into automatic scan of programmed areas which are
under surveillance. The motion detectors shall be inoperative during automatic scanning
Recorder System
The recorder system with high operational specs, shall be able to perform live viewing,
recording and playback functions simultaneously without impairing performance of any other
function. The video shall display Camera node, location, date & time. The hard disk of the
system shall be adequately sized to ensure min. one year data before overwriting the same and
around 20% for future expansion. System shall be able to generate disk full warning or alarm
in case of failure in storage disk.
The servers with all accessories shall be stored in adequately sized, well ventilated and secured
cabinet. The video recording system shall be based on Phased alternate Line (PAL) 625 line
techniques and 1080p with aspect ratio of 4:3 or 16: 9 in accordance with CCITT
recommendations. All required licenses along with min 20% spare shall be provided. The
system shall be powered with UPS provided in the station.

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 5
The Recorder system shall follow the below guidelines
Video Recorder System Requirement

Server Type Industrial Rugged PC
Mounting 19’’ Rack mounted
PC configuration Windows based latest configuration. Subject to approval
External storage device Min 2TB, Rack mounted, RAID 1 drive, Expandable &
hot swap.
Built in Network adaptors Dual
RAM Min. 32GB
Power supply AC
Recording Format Standard format/Playable in windows without any
conversion or plugin
Software and licenses As required
Selection of Displays Yes
Cyclic display of camera views Yes
PTZ + focus control for all camera Yes
Configuration and settings for Yes
camera (Password protected)
Configuration of Predefined Yes
snapshots
Archiving and Transfer Yes
Alarming capability Yes
Adjustable Fps size, image size, Yes
resolution etc.
Network Switch: An Industrial grade managed network switch with PoE capabilities shall be
installed, tested and configured after integrating all the cameras. The switch shall have following
minimum features
Switch Parameter Requirement

Switch Type Industrial Modular type
Managed/Unmanaged Managed
19 inch Rack Mounted Yes
Power supply Redundant (AC from UPS)
Fan Optional
Max operating Temp >60 deg
PoE enabled Yes
Layer 3 Functionality Yes
Multicast Yes
Port types Electrical/Optical SFP based with min 20% spare port of
each type
Licenses, if any Yes

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 6
Cabling: UTP outdoor type cable shall be used and routed through conduits and/or cable trays
specifically used for this purpose. Each cable shall be start topology to central cabling location/
switch and structured cabling practice of industrial standard shall be followed while laying the
cables. Cables shall be clearly labelled. For distances more that 80m, path cords with spare
cores shall be utilized. SFPs in switches shall be selected appropriately for such connections.
2.4 Camera Mountings
All fixed cameras shall be securely mounted in position, and shall be equipped with secure
power and video plugs and sockets to facilitate maintenance and/or replacement.
Remotely controlled cameras in outside areas shall be capable of being panned over 360°.
Tilting of the camera shall be restricted to the areas which are to be monitored and shall
generally be limited in vertical travel to avoid lighting and direct sunshine.
Camera poles and mounting shall have following features:
 The fixed cameras shall be enclosed in an environmentally sealed housing, passively

cooled housing utilizing no moving parts for passive cooling, and rated for NEMA 4 x or
IP 66. This requirement ensures that the camera operates well within its temperature and
humidity ranges.
 Material of the housing cover: corrosion-resistant aluminum
 Material of the sun shield: anti-reflecting polymer (ABS)
 Material of front and end caps: polycarbonate
 Integrated heater to prevent condensation on the pane
 Space-efficient integration of power supply units
 Simple installation of a twisted pair transmitter
 IP66 with the use of the metric screwed cable glands provided
2.5 Location of cameras
The contractor shall nominate in the design the proposed location and height of cameras The
design shall include details of;
 The angle of cover and extend of the surveillance area for fixed cameras,
 The extend of the camera surveillance area provided by remotely controlled cameras at
maximum zoom and wide-angle operation.
Cameras shall be installed so as to avoid operation directly into ceiling or wall mounted
luminaries.
As a philosophy, cameras are required to monitor entry /exit points of all rooms. Hence, the
minimum provisional locations of cameras shall be as indicated below:

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 7
 Substation control room

 GIS building, inside hall, LVAC, Battery Room etc.
 Telecom Building
 Entrance gate.
 Warehouse Area if any
 Switchyard and perimeter
 Any other location as deemed necessary for surveillance
2.6 Surveillance Monitoring Facilities
2.6.1 CCTV Control Desk
An operator console desk along with chairs shall be provided for mounting the two number of
Monitors. The control desk shall be sufficient space for keeping the monitor, Keyboard and
mouse of the video server on top of desk. Provision shall also be provided in Guard room to
access the CCTV Feeds.
The CCTV System shall also be supplied with an ergonomically aesthetic set of furniture (to be
installed in control room) comprising of operator console desk for housing monitors. Each
workstation desk shall comprise of the following
- Durable, scratch resistant, non-reflecting desktop made of laminated material of

sufficient thickness,
- Set of removable Horizontal and vertical Cable trays fitted in the console desk for easy
accessibility
- Drawers, shelves and fittings and provision for housing power supply sockets,
- Support for Monitors.
Console desk shall be supplied with durable antistatic chairs of High Back type.
2.6.2 Monitoring and Remote-Control Facilities
One monitor “A”, shall be operator selectable to any camera.
The second monitor, “B”, shall be automatically switched between all cameras in sequence and
shall display the video from each camera for a period of five (5) seconds to thirty seconds. The
switching interval shall be operator controlled using a continuously variable, calibrated switch
or by pushbutton in 5 second increments from 5 to 30.
The remotely controlled cameras shall each be fitted with a control panel for:
- Zoom
- Pan
- Tilt
- Focus correction (if required)
- Automatic pan (on demand)

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 8
All control functions shall be monitored on monitor screen “A” without interference to the
switched monitoring of screen “B”.
The remotely controlled cameras shall be capable of being placed in automatic pan mode
during which the camera shall pan between preset limits and at a manually adjusted azimuth
and focal length. During the automatic panning operation, the motion detector shall be
automatically disabled.
2.6.3 Motion detection Alarm
Each camera shall be equipped with a motion detector on/off control. When activated the motion
detector shall immediately raise a visual lamp alarm and an input to the overall DCS. The alarm
shall be initiated if motion is detected during intervals in camera scanning where the video is
not displayed on monitor screen “B”.
When the motion detector alarm is enabled on any or all cameras, the initiation of a motion
alarm shall cause the automatic switching of the alarm originating camera to monitor screen “A”
and the activation of the associated video recorder in real time recording mode.
2.7 Video Recording
The video input to monitor screen “B” shall be continuously switched between all cameras. The
monitor screen “B” video shall be recorded in time lapse mode, ie every fifth frame of video.
The video recorder shall insert on all frames, in the top right hand corner, the identification of
the camera and the date and time (hour, minutes and seconds) in every 24 hour notation. The
time and date shall be derived from the facility master clock.
The detection of motion on any camera enabled in the alarm mode shall switch the video to
monitor screen “A” and initiate real-time video recording if the camera output.
During periods of real time recording of any camera video output the elapsed time recording of
all camera outputs shall continue in sequence.
In the event of a second motion detector alarm being initiated, the video shall be directed to
monitor screen “B” and interrupt the sequential scanning of cameras and commence the real-
time recording of the event. The second motion detector alarm may be restored to normal by
cancellation of the alarm mode of the respective camera.
2.8 Operational Protocol
The design of the CCTV system shall be directed towards the monitoring of the substation. All
cameras shall be recorded at the programmed intervals in time lapse, and the recording of this
surveillance shall not be interrupted. Selected or alarm-initiated events shall be recorded as
required in real time.
During normal operation and periods of high activity by operation and maintenance personnel,
monitoring shall proceed as follows:

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 9
 Monitor “A” to any camera

 Monitor “B” to sequential scan of all cameras at programmed intervals
 Recorder “A” – standby
 Recorder “B” – recording screen “B”, time-lapse of all cameras
 Motion alarms - inactive
At night and during periods of low activity by operation and maintenance personnel, monitoring
shall proceed as follows:
 Motion detectors enabled on cameras in non-occupied areas.

 Monitor screen “B” and associated recorder continuous operation in time-lapse
mode.
 Motion detector alarm automatically switched alarm camera to video monitor and
recorder “A” for real-time recording.
2.9 Signage Requirement
The CCTV system installed inside substation premise shall be provide with appropriate size
signs, placed at suitable place so that personnel entering area remain aware of CCTV Camera
in operation. There should eb signage at every 30 meters in the perimeter and at each entry
exit of substation. Details of notification/caution to be displayed on signage shall be subject to
approval of GCCIA.
2.10 Spares
The tenderer shall propose list of detailed mandatory and recommended spare parts which
needs to be maintained during the lifetime of the equipment.
2.11 Documentation
As a minimum, the following documents shall be submitted by tenderer
- Pre qualification document providing details of company, reference list, CVs of personnel
etc.
- CCTV network drawing,
- Bill of Quantity,
- Datasheet and manual for all equipment.
- Camera location layout.

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 10
3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
This section details out the general description, functional requirements, characteristics and
criteria for the Access Control and badging system.
The Access Control system shall include all computer hardware and software, including
database servers (if required), door controllers, card readers, alarm concentrator devices,
power supplies, conduit, raceways, enclosures, mounting hardware and all other equipment as
specified herein.
3.1 Subcontractor /Manufacturer requirements
All material shall be the manufacturer’s standard catalogue products and options. The
Manufacturer/Subcontractor carrying out the works must be engaged in this specialized
business for min 5. A complete company portfolio, experience references and details of local
agent and service personnel shall be submitted for approval as part of prequalification.
All material shall be the manufacturer’s standard catalogue products and options. All the offered
equipment and accessories shall be of industrial type and well proven to have been used in
atmosphere as that of project sites.
3.2 General Technical Requirements
The Access control system at each 400 KV substation shall comprise of necessary door
contacts, door controller, tamper switch, card readers, electromagnetic lock, axis I/O. All
devices installed and connected to Control room.
Door Controller:
• The door controller shall control either any one (1) assigned door set or complete access
control door sets including all door furniture viz. magnetic locks, third Party card read
heads, request to exit buttons, door sense & lock sense contact inputs.
• The door controller shall support card swipe verification and permission at read head
location and able to store card information in an internal database in addition to ability
to pass swipe information to and receive card information from central data base.
• Further it shall be able to transmit and receive alarms and status information from central
server.
• The door controller shall be capable of operating independent of Central Database
Server should the communications between the two is lost. All transaction information
shall be held on file in the door controller for onward transmission to Central Database
Server once communications is re-established and shall be able to retrieve any system
updates of Central Database Server during the offline operation.
• Door Controllers which have features of ability for remote configuration and diagnosis
from any workstation are preferable.

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 11
Door Contacts:
These shall be of standard industry practice, with standard size of magnet. The gap shall be
21mm and with operating temperature from -40º C to +60º C. Unless otherwise specified the
contacts shall be ‘Normally Open’ and shall have minimum power rating of 10W, 0.5 A
Magnetic Lock:
The magnetic lock shall be heavy duty capable of holding 1200 lbs force with anti-residual
magnetism function and suitable brackets for fixing. Shall be operable on 12 V /24 V with battery
back up of 6 hours in temperature range of -10ºC to 55º C. The lock shall have in built sensor
for lock status and surge/spike protection measures.
Card Reader:
The card readers shall be of ‘Touch and Go’ smart type, made of 13.56 MHz Contactless
(proximity) technology type complying with ISO 14443, with operating voltage of 5 to16V DC,
powered by controller. Reading range shall be minimum 9 cm
Push to Exit Button:
It shall be in standard dimensions as per industry practice in stainless steel finish, suitable for
flush or surface installation. The Push button shall be of IP 66 designed for operations
exceeding one (1) million and shall be provided with double pole NO/NC contact. The contact
shall be rated to a minimum power rating of 10W, 0.5A
Emergency Break Glass Unit
Dimensions shall be as per standard industry practice, suitable for surface installation. The
switch shall be double pole, double throw rated for 5A at 110/230V AC
Input Output Controller:
• Input Output Controller should provide at least 16 analogue inputs and at least 8 digital
outputs. There should be provision for cross mapping of the 16 analogue inputs to one
or many of the outputs upon activation/deactivation.
• The 8 digital outputs shall be a combination of 4 Normally Open/Normally Closed relay
contacts rated for 24V, 1.5A each and other 4 will be open collector switch type rated for
24V, 1.5A each.
• Additionally, the 16 analogue inputs in conjunction with the access control software shall
permit activation/deactivation of output(s) on different Input Output Controllers or other
devices within the system.
Other Accessories:
A set of accessories for ACS comprising power supply units, power and network cables,
conduits for power and network cables, dedicated power DB, Network and power sockets,
Nodes, Network switches, signboards etc. along with software and licences as required for
completion of works.

016403-2200-47ES-4140 01 May 2024 12
System shall be designed to operate on 230V AC supply from substation LVAC boards with
backup supply from station UPS supply distribution board.
3.3 Spares
The tenderer shall propose list of detailed mandatory and recommended spares which are
required to be maintained for the lifetime of the equipment
GULF COOPERATION COUNCIL
INTERCONNECTION AUTHORITY
HSE & Security Manual
GCCIA Procedure No;

GCCIA-HSE-PRO-001, Issue-1
Tuesday, May 29, 2018
Important Note:
All documents are “CONTROLLED” when viewed on GCCIA intranet. When downloaded and printed, this
document shall be termed “UNCONTROLLED”. User(s) should check the GCCIA intranet to ensure that they are
in possession of the updated version.
Document: Procedure No:
HSE & Security Manual GCCIA-HSE-PRO-001, Issue-1
APPROVAL RECORD
Designation Signature Date
Prepared by: HSE, Head
Legal Advisor
Reviewed by:
CEO
Approved by:
Tuesday, May 29, 2018 Page 1 of 49

AMENDMENT SHEET
Section Reviewed by Approved by
Date Revision Amendment Detail
Affected (Design. / Sign) (Design. / Sign)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPROVAL RECORD .............................................................................................................................1

AMENDMENT SHEET ............................................................................................................................2
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..........................................................................................................................2
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 4
2. PURPOSE ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................... 4
4. DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................ 4
5. RESPONSIBILITIES & AUTHORITIES ........................................................................................................ 4
5.1. MANAGERS RESPONSIBILITIES: (ALL THE DEPARTMENTS) ....................................................................... 5
5.2. HEAD OF HSE & SECURITY DEPARTMENT: ....................................................................................................... 5
5.3. SAFETY OFFICER RESPONSIBILITY: .................................................................................................................. 5
5.4. EMPLOYEES RIGHT TO REFUSE WORK AND STOP THE WORK OF OTHERS ............................................................ 6
5.5. AUTHORITIES: ............................................................................................................................................ 7
6. POLICY ......................................................................................................................................................... 8
6.1. HSE POLICY STATEMENT: ............................................................................................................................... 8
7. PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................................. 9
7.1. HSE TRAINING PROGRAM: ........................................................................................................................ 9
7.2. SAFETY ORIENTATION: ........................................................................................................................... 11
7.3. SITE SAFETY INCENTIVES / DISCIPLINARY PLAN ............................................................................... 16
7.4. SAFETY MEETING: .................................................................................................................................... 16
7.5. SAFETY INSPECTION: .............................................................................................................................. 17
7.6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 23
7.7. EMERGENCY EVACUATION PROCEDURE: ............................................................................................. 28
7.8. TRAFFIC CONTROL, VEHICLE SAFETY AND ANSPORTATION: ........................................................... 33
7.9. PREVENT AND PROTECT AGAINST FIRES AT SITES:........................................................................... 39
7.10. EVALUATING AND PREVENTING HEAT-RELATED ILLNESSES AT WORK LOCATION: ................. 42
8. ANNEXURE................................................................................................................................................. 48
8.1. LIST OF RELATED SOPS ................................................................................................................................ 48
8.2. LIST OF RELATED FORMS/ CHARTS / CHECKLIST ............................................................................................ 48

1. INTRODUCTION
As outlined in the HSE Policy, the GCCIA management accepts responsibility for the
effective implementation of HSE Policy and will provide systems, training,
supervision and visible support to ensure a safe work environment. Through active
leadership, will strive to achieve that goal. However, the responsibility for a safe
work place is not GCCIA's alone but is shared by senior management, managers,
supervisors, Employees and Other Personnel.
2. PURPOSE
The purpose of this manual is to outline the safety responsibilities which will benefit
through minimum workplace injuries and illnesses, reduced stress, and higher
morale. Productivity, profits, and competitiveness will increase as costs per unit,
turnover, and workers compensation rates lower.
3. SCOPE
All GCCIA Sites including Head Office premises are included in scope.
4. DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS
Term Description
GCCIA Gulf Cooperation Council Interconnection Authority.
CEO GCCIA Chief Executive Officer.
Department Any of GCCIA departments.
Department Head Department Head, equivalent or above
GCCIA Headquarters , substations and all assets

GCCIA Properties
owned by GCCIA in GCC Countries.
Head of HSE & Security
GCCIA Head of HSE & Security Department.
Department
HSE & Security
GCCIA HSE & Security Department.
Department
Non-Staff any who is not an employee of GCCIA.
5. RESPONSIBILITIES & AUTHORITIES

As outlined in the Policy, the GCCIA management accepts responsibility for the
effective implementation of Policy and will provide systems, training, supervision
and visible support to ensure a safe work environment. Through active leadership,
will strive to achieve that goal. However, the responsibility for a safe work place is
not GCCIA's alone but is shared by senior management, managers, supervisors,
Employees and Other Personnel.
5.1. MANAGERS RESPONSIBILITIES: (All the Departments)

The management role at all levels is to insist on performance and behavior that
meets the standards of the GCCIA Safety program. To do this the following must be
adhered to.
5.1.1. Encourage Employees involvement in safety by demonstrating management's
commitment to safety.
5.1.2. Provide adequately trained supervision at all GCCIA work sites (“Sites).
5.1.3. Ensure accidents and incidents are reported and investigated and that corrective
actions are taken.
5.1.4. Provide appropriate safety PPE and adequate training for Employee as well as
ensure Employees is qualified to perform their work.
5.2. Head of HSE & Security Department:

Head of HSE & Security Department have primary responsibility for following and
enforcing the Policy and procedures and programs with the workers they control.
5.2.1. Responsible for identification of hazards
5.2.2. Safety education and training
5.2.3. Accident and incident investigation
5.2.4. Safety Recognition & Incentive Program
5.2.5. Sites safety audit and recommendation
5.2.6. Review and update of Policy and Procedure
5.3. Safety Officer Responsibility:

One of the keys to any successful program is the role of the Safety officer or lead
hand in bridging the gap between management and Employees.
5.3.1. Know GCCIA Policies and practices included in GCCIA Safety Manual and regularly
use them when teaching job methods or when indoctrinating new Employees to
safe job practices.
5.3.2. Be alert to unsafe conditions and acts and take immediate and appropriate
corrective action.

5.3.3. Always set a good example in the areas of safety and ensure that his actions are
consistent with GCCIA requirements. This consistency will maintain the worker's
interest in safety. This interest shall be fostered by arranging for regular safety
meetings.
5.3.4. Ensure that material data sheets are available to Employees and Other Personnel,
including the concerned Security Staff and contractors/consultants.
5.3.5. Ensure that copy of Policy and the procedures is available on every location on
Sites.
5.4. Employees Right to Refuse Work and stop the work of

others
Under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Employees may refuse to carry out
any work, if, on reasonable and probable grounds he believes that there exists an
imminent danger to the health or safety, and stop the work of others due to unsafe
condition and acts that exists an imminent danger to the health or safety and
security.
a. The legal advisor of GCCIA shall be responsible for ensuring that all contracts,
standards and documents relating to contract satisfy the legal requirements
that might affect the legal or contractual relations of the Authority with third
parties. Below are summary of the tasks of the legal advisor with respect to
contracts.
b. Standard Contracts: The legal advisor shall participate in preparing appropriate
contracts for utilization by GCCIA. All contracts must be reviewed by the legal
advisor to ensure that, before utilization, that they meet the legal
requirements.
c. The legal advisor shall participate/ assist in reviewing special conditions for
contracts appropriate for use in special circumstances.
d. The legal advisor shall take responsibility for reviewing contracts as well as
reviewing contracts drafts including amendments to contracts before use of
the same or concluding them with contractors.
e. The legal advisor shall review letters of intent before issuing the same to
contractors.
f. The role of the legal advisor with respect to functional review is to render
legal opinion concerning contracts drafts and drafts to contracts amendments.
g. To deal with current legal conditions, the legal advisor will lay down new and
updated policies and procedures for the Contracts Manual whenever such is
necessary or appropriate.

h. The legal advisor shall be responsible for rendering legal opinion on the terms
and conditions of all subcontracts arising from contracts and all contractual
amendments to such subcontracts.
i. The legal advisor shall provide advice to the senior executives and the
department responsible for the policies and procedures for contracts, claims,
laws, contracts administration and all relevant departments with respect to
matters concerning rights and obligations of the Authority with third parties
ensuing from any contracts.
j. The legal advisor shall provide advice to the senior executives and the
department responsible for the policies and procedures for contracts, claims,
laws, contracts administration and all relevant departments with respect to the
legal position of the Authority with respect to all matters pertaining to claims
and disputes against the Authority.
k. The legal advisor will liaise with external lawyers with respect to representing
GCCIA before the competent judicial and administrative bodies regarding the
lawsuits to which the Authority is a party. All notices, submittals and other
documents, including correspondence relating to judicial matters to which the
Authority is or is likely to be a party will be referred to the legal advisor,
without any delay, to take the necessary action.
l. The legal advisor shall update the department responsible for the policies and
procedures of the contracts, claims and laws of any changes to governmental
policies and laws that might affect the activities of the Authority and its
contracts, rights and obligations.
5.5. AUTHORITIES:
5.5.1. GCCIA limits apply to individual transactions and are indicated in GCCIA’s authority
matrix.
5.5.2. The authorized individuals have to exercise sound discretion and good business
judgment and accept responsibility for such actions. Approval indicates knowledge
of the transaction or item being approved for action or payment and that insofar as
they apply, items or services have been received, prices are in order and GCCIA's
interests are protected.
5.5.3. Approval authority is delegated to positions rather than individuals. Incumbents of
the positions listed, or those officially acting in such capacities, are authorized to
approve, within the scope of delegated authority all transactions that fall within their
area of responsibility.
5.5.4. Delegation of authorities should conform with the principles of internal control
relating to the segregation of duties.
5.5.5. A delegated authority cannot be further delegated, unless approved by the original
authority holder.

5.5.6. In case of an authority holder absence, the higher rank will assume his authorities.
Authority holder can delegate some of his routine authorities to one or more of his
employees. The absence may be defined as absence of more than one day, due to
annual leave, business travel, sickness, compassionate leave, etc.
6. POLICY
6.1. HSE Policy Statement:
6.1.1. GCCIA is committed to ensuring a safe and healthy work environment is provided
and maintained for all GCCIA employees, contractors, consultants, and visitors
(“Other Personnel”). Safety shall be given equal priority with all other business
objectives.
6.1.2. GCCIA management accepts responsibility for the effective implementation of this
Safety Policy Statement (“Policy”) and will provide systems, training, supervision
and visible support to ensure a safe work environment.
6.1.3. Employees and Other Personnel will abide by GCCIA Safety requirements.
6.1.4. Departments Heads shall be responsible for their safety performance and must
accept that all injuries are preventable and continually aspire towards this.
6.1.5. All Employees have the responsibility to perform their duties in a manner which
ensures their own safety or through their actions, does not put at risk the health,
safety and welfare of others.
To achieve this GCCIA is determined to:
1. Provide Employees with appropriate work methods, work areas, premises and
plant that are safe and meet all regulative authority standards, thereby
reducing the risk of injuries, accidents and damage.
2. Give due consideration to issues of health and safety in all stages of planning,
design and construction to incorporate systems to eliminate or control
hazards.
3. Ensure Employees and contractors/consultants` personnel are competent and
suitably skilled to undertake the duties for which they are employed in a
productive and safe manner.
4. Continue to develop continuous programs of education and training to
enhance skills and increase safety awareness.
5. Promptly and completely investigate, correct and report all accidents, incidents
and hazardous situation or conditions.Ensure all management levels and the
work force understand and accept their health and safety responsibilities and
are held accountable for those matters within their control.
6. Collectively support and participate in the promotion of pro-active safety
management systems involving Employees and Other Personnel and strive for

continual improvement through audit and evaluation programs.

7. Only engage competent sub-contractors/consultants who can demonstrate
safety management systems, which complement GCCIA own high standards.
8. To provide appropriate emergency response systems, equipment and
appropriate first aid facilities and training.
7. PROCEDURES
7.1. HSE TRAINING PROGRAM:
7.1.1. INTRODUCTION
Training is one of the most important components within GCCIA safety management
system. It gives Employees an opportunity to learn their jobs properly, bring new
ideas into the workplace, reinforce existing ideas and practices, and it helps to put
GCCIA Safety and Health Program into action.
Everyone in GCCIA will benefit from safety and health training through fewer
workplace injuries and illnesses, reduced stress, and higher morale. Productivity,
profits, and competitiveness will increase as production costs per unit, turnover, and
workers compensation rates lower.
7.1.2. MANAGEMENT COMMITMENT
We will provide the necessary funds and scheduling time to ensure effective safety
and health training is provided. This commitment will include paid work time for
training and training in the language that the worker understands. Both
management and Employees will be involved in developing the program.
To most effectively carry out their safety responsibilities, Employees must
understand
1. (Their role in the program,
2. The hazards and potential hazards that need to be prevented or controlled,
3. The ways to protect themselves and others.
We will achieve these goals by:
 Educating everyone on the natural and system consequences of their actions;
 Educating all managers, supervisors and Employees on their safety
management system responsibilities;
 Educating Employees about the specific hazards and control measures in their
workplace;
 Training Employees on hazard identification, analysis, reporting and
control procedures; and
 Training Employees on safe work procedures and practices.

GCCIA training program will focus on health and safety concerns that determine the
best way to deal with a particular hazard. When a hazard is identified, we will first
try to remove it entirely. If that is not feasible, we will then train workers to protect
themselves, if necessary, against the remaining hazard. Once we have decided
that a safety or health problem can best be addressed by training (or by another
method combined with training), we will follow up by developing specific training
goals based on those particular needs.
7.1.3. EMPLOYEES
At a minimum, Employees must know the general safety and health rules of Sites,
specific Sites hazards and the safe work practices needed to help control exposure,
and the individual's role in all types of emergency situations. We will ensure
Employees understand the hazards to which they may be exposed and how to
prevent harm to themselves and others from exposure to these hazards.
We will commit available resources to ensure Employees receive safety and health
training during the circumstances below.
7.1.3.1. Whenever a person is hired --general safety orientation including an overview of
GCCIA safety rules, and why those rules must be followed.
7.1.3.2. Whenever an employee is given a new job assignment --during formal classroom
training, and again, when the supervisor provides specific task training. It’s
extremely important that supervisors emphasize safety during initial task
assignment.
7.1.3.3. Whenever new work procedures are begun --during formal classroom training and
supervisor on-the-job training.
7.1.3.4. Whenever new equipment is installed --if new hazards are introduced.
7.1.3.5. Whenever new substances are used --hazard communication program may apply.
Employees must know they are responsible for complying with all GCCIA safety
rules, and that most accidents will be prevented by their safe work practices. They
must be very familiar with any personal protective equipment required for their
jobs. They must know what to do in case of emergencies.
Each employee needs to understand that they are not expected to start working a
new assignment until they have been properly trained. If a job appears to be
unsafe, they will report the situation to their supervisor.
7.1.4. SAFETY AND HEALTH TRAINING PROGRAM EVALUATION
An evaluation of the effectiveness of the training program will be conducted
periodically. Safety manager will interview managers, supervisors and Employees on
Sites to determine the effectiveness of the training.
Evaluation will help determine whether the training provided has achieved its goal
of improving employee safety and performance.

Safety Manager will evaluate training through the following methods:

 observing employee skills;
 surveys and interviews to determine employee knowledge and attitudes on
job;
 reviewing the training plan ;
 comparing training conducted with hazards in the workplace;
 reviewing training documents; and
 Comparing pre-and post-training injury and accident rates.
 If evaluation determines program improvement is necessary, the safety officer
will develop recommendations.
7.2. SAFETY ORIENTATION:

7.2.1. BASIC SAFETY RULES
7.2.1.1. REPORT INCIDENTS:
Immediately report all work related injuries/illnesses or vehicle collisions, no matter
how slight, to your supervisor.
Immediately report all fires, spills, and releases, no matter how small, to your
supervisor.
Immediately report any unsafe condition, practice, near miss, or incident to your
supervisor.
7.2.1.2. FOLLOW SAFE PRACTICES :
Operators of vehicles shall comply with all traffic requirements, particularly speed
limits.
All persons in vehicles shall wear seat belts at all times.
When ascending or descending stairways, use the handrail and take only one step
at a time.
Erect barricades/flagging around hazardous work areas, such as holes in decking
and floor surfaces, trenches, road crossings, and overhead hazardous work.
Use only proper tools and equipment maintained in a safe working condition.
Homemade tools are prohibited.
Maintain good housekeeping in your work area at all times.
Smoking is permitted in designated areas only. Matches and lighters are
prohibited in restricted areas.
Eating or resting is permitted in designated areas only. Use proper manual lifting
techniques, or obtain assistance or mechanical lifting aids when lifting loads.
All operating machinery and electrical switchgear shall have all safety guards,

switches, and alarms in place and functional.

Whenever a safety device is removed from service and/or defeated, the appropriate
supervisor and affected parties shall be notified, the device tagged, and the action
properly documented.
All block valves on pressure relief systems in service shall be chain-locked or car-
sealed open.
All fire extinguishers and other emergency equipment shall be in good condition,
inspected regularly, and kept clear of any obstruction.
All chemical or hazardous material containers shall be properly labeled and stored.
Drums shall be stored in secondary containment areas or on drum containment
pallets.
7.2.1.3. AVOID UNSAFE ACTIVITIES:
Climbing or standing on equipment, piping, valves, or unstable surfaces (e.g., chairs
or barrels) to perform work is prohibited.
Approved fall protection measures (e.g., safety harnesses or scaffolding) shall be
used if the working height is greater than 1.8 m (6 ft.) from floor or platform level.
Running in work areas is prohibited, except during emergencies.
Finger rings, wristwatches, jewelry, loose clothing, unsecured long hair, and other
loose accessories shall not be worn within an arm’s reach of rotating equipment or
electrical switchgear.
Do not apply compressed air or other gases to yourself or others.
Operating equipment having a “DANGER, DO NOT OPERATE” (hold) tag is
prohibited.
No work shall be started in any area or on any equipment without consent of the
client’s person-in-charge.
Non-approved electrical/electronic devices (e.g., cellular phones, pagers, and
instruments) shall not be used in classified areas unless properly permitted.
Horseplay or fighting on clients premises is prohibited.
7.2.1.4. PROTECT YOURSELF:
Approved hard hats without defects shall be worn in designated areas. Metallic hard
hats are prohibited.
Approved safety footwear shall be worn in field operations, process areas, and other
designated areas.
Approved safety eyewear with side protection shall be worn where designated.
Approved additional hazard-specific eye/face protection (e.g., goggles and/or a face
shield) shall be worn where foreign objects may injure the eye or face (e.g.,
grinding, welding, drilling, or scraping).

7.2.1.5. BASIC SAFETY RULES:

Proper personal protective equipment (PPE) prescribed by the Chemical Hazard
Bulletin (CHB) or Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) shall be worn when foot
patrolling and the designated area and during fire and non-fire related emergencies
in the designated areas
Approved hearing protection shall be worn in high noise areas (i.e., 85 decibels [dB]
or higher).
Proper hand protection (e.g., gloves) shall be worn when performing tasks that may
present a hand injury risk.
7.2.1.6. UNSAFE ACT:
Performance of a task or other activity that is conducted in a manner that may
threaten the health and/or safety of workers.
UNSAFE ACTS:
 Operating equipment without qualification or authorization
 Lack of/or improper use of PPE
 Operation equipment at unsafe speeds
 Failure to warn others
 Bypass or removal of safety devices
 Using defective equipment
 Horseplay or fighting
7.2.1.7. UNSAFE CONDITION:
A condition in the work place that is likely to cause property damage or injury.
UNSAFE CONDITIONS
 Defective tools, equipment or supplies
 Inadequate supports or guards
 Congestion in the workplace
 Inadequate warning systems
 Fire and explosion hazards
 Poor housekeeping
 Hazardous atmospheric conditions
7.2.1.8. ERGONOMICS
Ergonomics is concerned with "the problem and processes involved in designing
things for effective human use, and creating environments that are suitable for
human living and work. It recognizes that work methods, equipment, facilities, and
tool design all influence the worker's motivation, fatigue, and likelihood of

sustaining an occupational injury or illness, and productivity."

An ergonomic workplace can:
1. Reduce occupational injury and illness
2. Reduce workers' compensation and sickness and accident costs
3. Reduce medical visits
4. Reduce absenteeism
5. Improve productivity
6. Improve quality and reduce scrap
7. Improve worker comfort on the job
7.2.1.9. EMPLOYEES
As the group most directly impacted by musculoskeletal disorders and their related
discomfort and potentially disabling effects, Employees are to:
1. Report early signs and symptoms of musculoskeletal disorders,
 Follow work practice procedures related to their jobs that are intended to
reduce ergonomic risks, and
 Actively participate in the recognition, analysis, and abatement of ergonomic
risks.
2. Break and Micro break Suggestions
 Avoid extended periods of continuous tasks (such as typing or standing for
long period of time) by taking short breaks (~2 min) or performing other
tasks (maximum of 30 minutes continuous computer use/ standing for long
period of time task at any time).
 Take micro breaks (approximately 30 seconds to 1 minute) every 20 minutes
to rest the upper and lower extremities, back, neck, and eyes.
3. Ideas for taking breaks:
 Move your printer to an area that requires you to stand up and walk to get
your printout.
 Stand up for phone calls.
 Go to the restroom or get a cup of coffee/water.
 Alter your tasks (break up continuous computer time with checking phone
messages, reading reports, etc.).
4. Exercises and Stretches
CAUTION: If you have an injury or any type of reoccurring discomforts, you should
immediately report your injury/ symptoms and obtain a medical evaluation.

These stretching exercises are not provided to cure any existing problems but may
help in preventing any future ones. Exercises and stretches can help decrease
exposure to the risk of developing an ergonomic injury.

7.3. SITE SAFETY INCENTIVES / DISCIPLINARY PLAN

7.3.1. Safety incentives
The goal of these Safety incentives will be to have zero lost work time accidents
during the designated award period. In order to maintain some incentive for
reducing accidents
100% of the award will be disbursed only if this goal is met or exceeded.
An incremental goal may is set with a percentage of the award being disbursed for
a lower percentage reduction in lost work time accidents from the established
baseline (for example, 50% of the award for a reduction of 10% in lost work time
accidents below the baseline).
Baselines will be set with consideration of prior performance, the desire for
Continuous improvement and the philosophy of stretched but achievable goals.
Who gets the award?
Employees who did not have a lost work time accident during the award period will
be eligible for an award. Managers and supervisors may be included or excluded
from eligibility depending upon their performances.
Awards will be disbursed by randomly selecting eligible employee names (for
example, names in a hat, and employee numbers in a pail).
Individual awards will be awarded with financial incentive and/or increment in the
basic salaries
Any GCCIA personal performs and acts beyond and above the call of duty will be
awarded an appreciation certificate and or financial award.
Additional, recommendation from the Safety Officer will be considered during
appraisal of the award.
7.4. SAFETY MEETING:

7.4.1. PURPOSE:
To provide Employees opportunities to formally meet with the facility leader on a
planned basis, to discuss potential unsafe acts or conditions and what action can be
taken to control such acts or conditions, and to reinforce safe procedures and
practices.
7.4.2. POLICY:
A minimum of one formal safety meeting, with all hourly Employees, will be held
each month. This formal safety meeting will be conducted by the Site Manager and
Safety Manager. And weekly meeting will be conducted in every shift. In addition to
weekly and monthly safety meetings, the Supervisor is to conduct a Daily Safety
and Work Plan meeting with the crew at the beginning of each shift.
7.4.3. RESPONSIBILITIES:

7.4.3.1. It is the responsibility of the Site Manager to ensure compliance with this procedure
in its entirety.
7.4.3.2. It is the responsibility of the Supervisor to conduct a monthly safety meeting.
7.4.3.3. It is the responsibility of Employee to attend the monthly safety meeting and ask
questions if something is not understood.
7.4.4. PROCEDURE:
7.4.4.1. The monthly safety meeting shall be conducted by the supervisor and documented
(see attached Monthly Safety Meeting Report), in such a manner as to permit
Employees to contribute their experience and knowledge of the hazards involved on
the job and the action required to control such hazards.
7.4.4.2. The monthly safety meeting shall include the following items:
a. Review of open action items from previous month’s meeting.
b. Safety Committee report on monthly safety and housekeeping inspection.
c. Review of accidents, injuries and near misses
d. Topic to be presented by the facility leader.
e. Open safety discussion.
f. Listing of action items and their status
7.4.4.3. Names of Employees attending the safety meeting shall be recorded by having the
employee print and sign an attendance roster (see attached).
7.4.4.4. Each facility will maintain a file of weakly/monthly safety meetings held.
7.4.4.5. Each supervisor is required to conduct a monthly safety meeting. This monthly
meeting is in addition to the weekly safety meetings and shall not replace a weekly
safety meeting.
7.4.4.6. Employees failing to comply with this procedure will be disciplined in accordance
with normal progressive disciplinary procedures for the facility.
7.4.4.7. Daily Safety and Work Plan meeting with the crew at the beginning of each shift.
Utilizing the Daily Safety and Work Plan Form provided in this procedure. All Daily
Safety and Work Plan forms are to be collected at the end of each month and kept
on site until project ends and then forwarded to the safety manager.
7.5. SAFETY INSPECTION:

7.5.1. INTRODUCTION:
7.5.1.1. Accidents involving personal injuries, including Employees Other Personnel and
visitors etc. and/or property damage may occur. Such accidents/incidents should be
reported promptly to the 24-hour manned GCCIA Security Control Center.
7.5.1.2. When serious injury occurs, the initial action taken is sometimes critical in

determining the difference between further injuries, or in some cases life or death.
Appropriate action shall be taken by all concerned parties to ensure that the injured
person can receive prompt medical attention and to prevent the situation from
worsening.
7.5.1.3. From the viewpoint of prevention, the purpose of accident/incident reporting and
investigation is to determine the causes and to recommend corrective action to
prevent future recurrence.
7.5.1.4. This procedure outlines the actions to be taken in the event of an accident occurring
and the accident/incident reporting and investigation procedures to be followed.
7.5.2. TERMINOLOGY:
7.5.2.1. Accident includes any undesired circumstances which give rise to ill health or injury;
damage to property, plant, products or the environment; production losses, or
increased liabilities.
7.5.2.2. Incident includes all undesired circumstances and near misses which have the
potential to cause accidents, or have a potentially significant environmental impact.
7.5.2.3. Note: Examples of events which may have significant environmental impacts are
spillage of hazardous substances (such as chemicals, microbiological agents and
radio-isotopes) into any drain or surface water, uncontrolled discharge of hazardous
substances into the atmosphere, and inappropriate disposal of hazardous wastes.
7.5.2.4. Ill health includes acute and chronic ill health caused by physical, chemical or
biological agents as well as adverse effects on mental health.
7.5.3. IN CASE OF ACCIDENT
7.5.3.1. When an accident occurs, assistance should be immediately summoned by calling
the 24-hour manned emergency contact number "4444".
7.5.3.2. In case of fire, sound the fire alarm by activating the break glass alarm switch in the
corridor.
7.5.3.3. If medical assistance is required during office hours, call Security Control Center
"4444" for advice. If the condition is serious, dial 911 for help at the same time to
avoid delay in treatment.
7.5.3.4. As a general guidance, when summoning assistance through telephone, the caller
must keep calm, avoid panic and clearly state the following information :
 Location of the accident
 Nature and severity of the accident e.g. how many persons are injured, the
seriousness of the injured, any fire or hazardous chemical spillage etc.
 Nature of the injuries, e.g. bleeding, bone fracture etc.
 Name, Department, telephone number of the caller.
7.5.3.5. The injured person should not be moved unless his location exposes him to further

risk of injury. The general approach to a seriously injured person is to render

comfort, and only treatment that is necessary to preserve life until trained medical
help arrives.
7.5.3.6. The Security Staff on-duty at GCCIA Control Centre will obtain details of the
accident and at the same time dispatch a team to the scene.
7.5.3.7. The attending team, upon arrival at the scene, will decide on the actions required
which may include calling of Police/Fire Services/Ambulance and/or assistance from
other Department such as the Health, Safety and Environment Office, clinic or
evacuating Employees and Other Personnel from the affected areas.
7.5.3.8. Depending on the nature (e.g. spillage of hazardous chemicals, fire) and
seriousness (e.g. fatalities or major injuries) of the accident, the Employees on-duty
at GCCIA inform Safety Officer of HSE & Security Department.
7.5.3.9. After the incident, details should be given to the attending civil emergency services
personnel in order to assist them for follow-up action. Relevant information should
be logged by Security Staff.
7.5.4. REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS AND INCIDENTS:
7.5.4.1. All accidents and incidents must be reported and accident/incident investigations
carried out to determine the causes and recommend corrective actions to prevent
future recurrence.
7.5.4.2. After an incident, the supervisor of the injured person or the Employee responsible
for the area in which the accident/incident took place should complete an
Accident/Incident Report and send to Head of HSE & Security Department and
Safety Officer.
7.5.4.3. Employees are encouraged to report near-miss incidents so that potential hazards
can be identified and eliminated before a more serious accident occurs.
7.5.5. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION:
7.5.5.1. The purpose of an accident investigation is to determine the causes and
recommend corrective action(s) to eliminate or minimize such events. An accident
investigation s h o u l d be thorough and attempt to identify underlying/basic
causes. Placing the blame on an employee’s “carelessness” should be avoided. It
should be aimed at identifying the problem area(s) and recommending remedial
action rather than finding faults or allocating individual blame.
7.5.5.2. An accident investigation shall be initiated by the safety officer. Investigation
reports shall be forwarded to the Head of HSE & Security Department for
appropriate follow-up action. In case of fire incidents, investigation reports shall
also be forwarded to HSE & Security Department Office
7.5.5.3. Accidents which result in, or which have the potential to inflict serious injuries or
death require a formal investigation. In such cases, Site manager along with Safety
officer shall carry out a joint investigation.

7.5.5.4. Where possible, the investigator should be free of the operational control of the
supervisor(s) concerned, in order that he/she may be objective. Personally interview
everyone involved,I.e. the injured person(s), nearby Employees, and Other
Personnel who may provide clues to the causes of the accident.
7.5.5.5. With the basic causes being identified, remedial action can be recommended
accordingly. Some actions reduce the likelihood of the incident occurring. Others
reduce the potential severity of the injury or damage.
7.5.6. CAUSES OF ACCIDENT
1. IMMEDIATE CAUSES:
The “immediate causes” of accidents are the circumstances that immediately precede
the event. They usually can be seen or sensed. Frequently they are called “unsafe
acts” (behaviors which could permit the occurrence of an accident) and “unsafe
conditions” (circumstances which could permit the occurrence of an accident).
Unsafe acts (also known as substandard practices) are usually seen in one or more of
the following forms:
 Operating equipment without authority
 Failure to warn
 Failure to secure
 Operating at improper speed
 Making safety device inoperable
 Removing safety devices
 Using defective equipment
 Using equipment improperly
 Failing to use personal protective equipment properly
 Improper loading
 Improper placemen
 Improper lifting
 Improper position for task
 Servicing equipment in operation
 Horseplay
 Under influence of alcohol and/or other drug
Unsafe conditions (also known as substandard conditions) are usually seen in one or
more of the following forms:
 Inadequate guards or barriers

 Inadequate or improper protective equipment

 Defective tools, equipment or materials
 Congestion or restricted action
 Inadequate warning systems
 Fire and explosion hazards
 Poor housekeeping; disorderly workplace
 Hazardous environmental conditions; gases, dusts, smokes, fumes,
vapors
 Noise exposures
 Radiation exposures
 High or low temperature exposures
 Inadequate or excessive illumination
 Inadequate ventilation
2. Basic causes
“Basic causes” are the real causes behind the symptoms; the reasons why the
unsafe acts and conditions occurred; the factors that, when identified, permit
meaningful management control. Often, these are referred to as root causes, real
causes, indirect causes, underlying or contributing causes. Basic causes help explain
why people perform substandard practices. They also help explain why substandard
conditions exist. Just as it is helpful to consider two major categories of immediate
causes, so is it helpful to think of basic causes in two major categories
3. Personal factors
 Inadequate capability (Physical/Physiological & Mental/Psychological)
 Lack of knowledge
 Lack of skill
 Stress (Physical/Physiological & Mental/Psychological)
 Improper motivation
Job factors (Work environment)
 Inadequate leadership and/or supervision
 Inadequate engineering
 Inadequate purchasing
 Inadequate maintenance
 Inadequate tools, equipment, materials

 Inadequate work standards

 Wear and tear
 Abuse or misuse
7.5.7. RECOMMENDED REMEDIAL ACTION
According to the causes being identified, some remedial action for preventing
recurrence can be suggested. The most commonly recommended remedial action
can be one or a combination of the following:
1. Replacing/Repairing the unsafe condition

2. Focused observations and/or planned inspections to identify potential hazards
3. Designing or engineering a new process to prevent recurrence
4. Training/Re-training of Employees
5. Transferring the injured worker to a type of work that is commensurate with
his/her ability to perform the work
6. Drafting a new safety procedure

7. Coaching and/or undertaking disciplinary action, if necessary
An action plan for implementing the recommended actions with priorities should be
indicated.

7.6. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

The purpose of personal protective equipment (PPE) is to provide an effective
barrier between a GCCIA personal and potentially dangerous objects, substances,
and processes.
7.6.1. BASIC PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
At a minimum, basic PPE includes:
 Hard hat;
 Safety Glasses;
 High Visibility vests;
 Gloves (applicable to task); and
 Safety footwear.
7.6.2. INSPECTION DEFECTIVE/DAMAGED PPE
GCCIA personal must inspect PPE prior to use to verify it is fit for use. Defective or
damaged PPE must be immediately removed from use. All PPE removed from
service will be tagged as out of service.
7.6.3. SELECTING PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
PPE will be selected based on the following information:
 Hazard assessments;
 Material safety data sheet (MSDS);
 Customer/client requirements; and
 Legislative jurisdictional requirements
1. HEAD PROTECTION
GCCIA personal shall wear hard hats that are in good condition and meet
requirements and standards as required by the Job / task assigned.
Employees and Other Personnel must wear hard hats with their employer`s logo
and name clearly displayed on the hard hat.
Hard hats shall be worn in the manner prescribed by the manufacturer.
GCCIA personal are only allowed to wear Hardhats issued/approved by the their
companies.
2. EYE AND FACE PROTECTION
Employees must wear properly fitting eye and face protection commensurate on
active Sites.
Face and eye protection shall be kept clean and in good condition. Black - Safety
glasses should be always worn in the sunlight

Clear (white) – Safety glasses should be in evening and night. And also day time
during sand storm.
If a GCCIA personal cannot wear safety glasses, as documented by a physician’s
note, alternate arrangements must be made to verify the individual’s face and eyes
are protected.
 All components of prescription glasses that are being used for eye
protection must meet approved applicable standards.
 The prescription glasses will include side-shields that must meet the applicable
standards.
 Coverall glasses or goggles shall be required for prescription glasses that do
not meet the standard.
 When using a face shield, safety glasses are also required under the face
shield.
3. HAND PROTECTIONS
Employees must have appropriate gloves available for their task. Gloves are to be
worn when conducting work activities with hazards that may cause injury to hands.
4. FOOT PROTECTION
 Employees and Other Personnel on Site must wear safety footwear.
 6” high cut boot are appropriate for the task.
 No running shoes of any kind are permitted on Sites.
 Safety footwear must be in good condition. It is the responsibility of the
employee to verify that their footwear is in proper working condition
5. HIGH VISIBILITY VESTS
 High visibility will be worn whenever GCCIA Personals and mobile equipment
are working in a common area.
 High visibility Vest will be worn by GCCIA Personals whenever there is Sand
Storm
 High visibility Vest will be worn by GCCIA Personals before entering to Site
 High visibility Vest will be worn by Security Personals dealing with traffic
control
 High visibility Vest will be worn by Security Staff who are on the Gates for
vehicle access control.
 High visibility Vest will be worn by all the Security Staff on Site in Night shift.
 High visibility Vest will be worn by all the Security Staff (supervisors) who are
doing patrolling of Site.

6. HEARING PROTECTION
GCCIA Personals will receive an overview of hearing protection requirements. The
training shall include identification of any hearing protection required areas, the
hazards associated with noise exposure, and the purpose, use, maintenance, and
limitations of the protective equipment provided on Site.
Employees and Other Personnel should not be exposed to noise in excess of the
occupational exposure limits (OEL) listed below:
85 dB Lex daily noise exposure level. This may be accomplished by:
 Instituting engineering controls;
 Work practices/administrative control; and/or
 Providing personal hearing protection.
There are two types of recognized hearing protection available for use in effectively
reducing noise exposure – earplugs and earmuffs. In most instances, earplugs are
acceptable hearing protection.
 When using earmuffs for hearing protection special care must be given to
check they are disinfected before being used by another employee.
 GCCIA personals are to be informed of the hazards associated with exposure
to noise and the purpose and limitations of protective hearing devices by their
respective Supervisors.
7. LIMB AND BODY PROTECTION
Where there is risk of injury to a G Personals limb and/or body, adequate limb and
body protection must be worn and equipment designed to protect Employees from
injury to their limbs and body must be used (i.e. for dog handlers -
gloves/gauntlets, arm guards, attack suits, helmets, etc.).
Where there is risk of injury due to congested work area and/or the movement of
heavy equipment in and/or around the work area, Employees must wear high
visibility apparel.
When work is being done in extreme hot or cold temperatures, the protective
clothing being worn must be reviewed to verify that it is adequate.
GCCIA Personals must be informed of any special precautions that need to be taken
or special protective clothing that needs to be worn.
8. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
This section provides a description of various types of respirators that may be used
at the Site for respiratory protection.
Respiratory Protection Options include:
7.6.4. DISPOSABLE DUST/PARTICULATE RESPIRATORS

Single use disposable particle masks (double strapped types) are designed to
protect the lungs from nuisance particles.
7.6.5. AIR PURIFYING, HALF MASK RESPIRATORS
Air purifying, half mask respirators have a rubber face seal that fits over the nose
and under the chin. It is fitted with cartridges which purify the air as the wearer
breathes. Different types of cartridges are available for different types of air
contaminants.
7.6.6. AIR PURIFYING, FULL FACE-PIECE RESPIRATORS
Air purifying, full face-piece respirators work on the same principal as the half-mask
respirators described above. The face-piece extends around the entire face,
covering the eyes, nose, chin, and mouth. This type of mask should be used when
working with highly corrosive chemicals to protect the eyes and face from chemical
splashes or where a face-shield and respirator combination is required.
7.6.7. POWERED AIR PURIFYING RESPIRATORS (PAPR)
PAPR features a battery powered, portable fan which draws air through a
particulate or chemical filter and blows it to the face-piece. The fan and filter unit
may be an integral part or the face-piece or mounted on the wearer’s back or belt.
This type of respirator is typically used when high particulate concentrations are
present.
7.6.8. RESPIRATOR FIT TESTING
Prior to issuing a reusable, face-fitting respirator to a GCCIA Personals, the GCCIA
Personals must successfully pass a qualitative fit test on that respirator. Aspects of
the fit test requirements are outlined below:
 A GCCIA Personals cannot be fitted with a face-sealing respirator if there is
any facial hair present that would come between the skin and facemask
sealing surface. Moderate stubble at the sealing surface is considered
excessive facial hair.
 Any GCCIA Personals who exhibits difficulty breathing or a severe
psychological reaction during any phase of fit testing the worker must be
examined by a physician, and the examining physician must be provided with
sufficient information to allow the physician to advise the employer of the
ability of the worker to wear a respirator.
 Fit testing repeated at least annually, or more frequently, if any change occurs
which may alter respirator fit (i.e. weight loss or gain)
Note: Records of fit tests are to be submitted to the Safety officer
7.6.9. CLOTHING AND JEWELRY
For personal protection and to limit the spread of construction related contaminates
throughout the facility, workers will not be permitted to wear:

 loose fitting clothing or jewelry

 greasy or oily clothing;
 torn or ragged clothing;
 cut-off or “muscle” shirts
Site Personals wearing shirts, other clothing and stickers displaying any offensive
language or opinion will be asked to remove the offensive material or leave the Site
immediately.
7.6.10. FIRE RETARDANT CLOTHING
Fire Retardant Clothing (“FRC”) must be used where there is risk of fire (i.e.
welding) or explosion, Where FRC is required, the outer layer of worker’s clothes,
including rain gear, must be made of fire retardant material
7.6.11. INSPECTIONS AND AUDITS
The purpose of an inspection is to identify conditions and hazards in the workplace
that can lead to an incident and identify positive conditions, behaviors, and
observations.
The purpose of an audit is to evaluate the implementation of systems and
processes.
7.6.12. INFORMAL INSPECTIONS
Informal inspections include the daily visual inspection of workplace conditions.
These inspections are conducted by Employees as a part of their regular work tasks.
7.6.13. FORMAL INSPECTIONS
Formal inspections are documented visual tours of the work place, used to
identify hazards and hazardous conditions. Formal inspections will be conducted
monthly by Safety Manager and the Project manager. All noted deficiencies are to
be signed off on the HSE Inspection report.
7.6.14. HAZARD CLASSIFICATION FOR INSPECTIONS
When a non-conformance item has been identified (during an inspection), a hazard
classification is assigned. The hazard classification rating system contains the
following:
Class A Hazard – A condition or practice likely to cause permanent disability, loss of
life or body part, or extensive loss of structure, equipment or material, or significant
negative environmental impact that has the potential to be reported to authorities.
Class B Hazard – A condition or practice likely to cause serious injury or illness
resulting in temporary disability or property damage that is disruptive but not
extensive.
Class C Hazard – A condition or practice likely to cause minor (non-disabling) injury
or illness, or no disruptive property damage.

7.7. EMERGENCY EVACUATION PROCEDURE:

7.7.1. PURPOSE:
To establish a system for handling emergencies arising out of natural calamities or
otherwise. This Emergency Response Procedure has been formulated for
implementation in accordance with applicable customer's general instructions,
safety policies and standards. This is a confirmation of the commitment of GCCIA to
safeguard, protect lives and property of clients and any other third party in
connection with the work to be performed.
7.7.2. SCOPE:
All areas, activities and operations carried out in GCCIA properties.
7.7.3. RESPONSIBILITY:
Personnel and Employees.
7.7.4. ACTIVITIES:
7.7.4.1. Emergency contact details within the facility for obtaining outside support
7.7.4.2. Must be displayed at appropriate locations i.e., following informative posters must
be displayed:
7.7.4.3. Fire escape route and to reach safe assembly area.
7.7.4.4. Emergency contact phone numbers of key personnel.
7.7.4.5. Nearest police station number.
7.7.4.6. Police control room phone number.
7.7.4.7. Fire and Emergency services phone number.
7.7.4.8. First Aid kit location sign.
7.7.4.9. All emergency response activities are to be conducted within boundaries of
training levels, appropriate procedures, and governmental regulations
7.7.5. IDENTIFICATION OF EMERGENCY:
7.7.5.1. A situation, which has the potential to be classified and treated as an emergency,
may become apparent in any of the following ways:
7.7.5.2. An accident in which a worker(s) has sustained injuries or death or significant
property damage has occurred.
 An automatic warning device has been activated by fire, smoke, and heat /
gas detection.
 A fire or gas emission has been discovered and a manual alarm has been
activated.
 An individual is aware of a situation but unable to raise a general alarm.
Assuming that the situation is of such a magnitude that the individual who first

becomes aware of it cannot safely provide immediate assistance to Employees and

Other Personnel who may be injured or in imminent danger, then the prior
responsibility of that person is the immediate sounding of a general alarm (if
available) and to notify more senior person with the specific location and facts of
the incident.
7.7.6. ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN AN EMERGENCY:
7.7.6.1. All work is stopped at once.
7.7.6.2. All equipment is shut down.
7.7.6.3. Employees to be evacuated to a predetermined assembly area. A roll call is taken
and every employee is accounted for.
7.7.6.4. No one is permitted to return to work until notification has been received from the
Safety Manager or "All Clear" alarm is given.
7.7.6.5. When driving, upon hearing the "STOP WORK ALARM" or "DISASTER SIREN" park
the vehicle at the right side of the road (clear of hydrants, etc.) stop engine, leave
the key inside the vehicle and readily proceed to the nearest assembly point and
stay in the area until notification has been received from the Safety Manager or "All
Clear" alarm is given.
7.7.6.6. In the event of actual emergency, all work permits are automatically cancelled. All
certified work permit receiver or Site supervisors will ensure that no activity
resumes in the area, unless the permit is renewed and re-issued by the work permit
receiver or Site supervisors.
7.7.7. EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY AREAS:
7.7.7.1. Designated emergency assembly area will be identified and locations of the specific
assembly areas will be posted in Site, offices and will be informed to all employees.
7.7.7.2. If a designated assembly area is not accessible for some reason (i.e. downwind or
in close proximity to the scene of emergency), then Employees and Other Personnel
must take the safest route toward an alternate assembly point. A safe assembly
area is an open area in a crosswind or upwind direction.
7.7.7.3. Each Department heads will ensure that all workers are accounted for. They will
then report to the top management.
7.7.7.4. Drills will be conducted frequently as required in order to acquaint Employees and
Other Personnel in case of emergency and result of the drills will be recorded
7.7.8. IMMEDIATE EVACUATION:
7.7.8.1. All affected employees, immediately upon having been alerted of the emergency,
shall stop the work, shut down all equipment and quickly proceed to predetermined
safe assembly area.
7.7.8.2. Nobody shall be allowed to return to Site until an instruction from the safety officer
/ Civil defense is given.

7.7.9. LEAK/SPILL OPERATION CONTROL ACTIVITIES:

7.7.9.1. GCCIA personals will not directly participate in the actual leak spill and fire
operational control activities.
7.7.9.2. The operations spill response team as per GCCIA requirements will carry out this
undertaking. However, upon arrangement, GCCIA personals may be required to
assist the post-incident activity.
7.7.10. SITE DEVELOPMENT MONITORING:
7.7.10.1. GCCIA Security Staff and Safety officer shall keep in touch with representative until
such time the emergency is under control and Site normal condition resumed. Any
development from the incident requiring further action, e.g. total pull out from the
plant as may be necessary, will be taken / relayed to Site Employees accordingly.
7.7.11. MEDICAL EVACUATION PROCEDURE:
7.7.11.1. Asset Management personals will ensure that each vehicle is, at proper
condition at all times, manned by a licensed driver and readily available to
transport seriously ill or injured Site Employees and Other Personnel to
the nearest health care facility or designated clinic/hospital.
7.7.11.2. All drivers on Site will be made aware of the location of the nearest health care
facility or hospital where ill or injured Employees and Other Personnel are to be
taken. A sketch of traffic routes where necessary, including telephone numbers
provided to the drivers.
7.7.12. In The Event Of A Serious Injury, The Following Steps Will Be Taken:
7.7.12.1. The witness or the immediate companion of the injured Employees and Other
Personnel shall immediately call for assistance. Send someone to call for an
ambulance.
7.7.12.2. If the injured Employees and Other Personnel is ambulatory, assist him to the Site
first aid clinic for first treatment. In case of fall injury or suspected broken
bones/dislocated joints, do not attempt to move the injured person except when
absolutely necessary to prevent further injuries. Leave this to the qualified first
aider or nurse.
7.7.12.3. Project Nurse, upon reaching the injured person shall evaluate the extent of injury,
administer the appropriate first aid treatment and accompany the injured person to
the nearest affiliated hospital.
7.7.12.4. In an extreme emergency, assistance from client medical services organization
through a telephone emergency number may also be contacted. The caller
clearly identifies:
o His exact location
o Nature of emergency
o Service required

o His name
o His badge number
7.7.13. GAS RELEASE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
7.7.13.1. If there is a reason to suspect a "Gas Release" in the area through which you are
driving, or when your vehicle suddenly stops without warning at an in-plant facility,
(hydrocarbon gas may be present), do not try to re-start.
 Quickly proceed to the nearest control room
 Inform plant operation Employees and Personnel of the situation.
 Do not go and investigate, leave this to the operations.
 Do not return to drive the vehicle until operation's Employees and
Other Personnel declare everything is "ALL CLEAR".
7.7.14. ON-SITE EMERGENCY OF FIRE:
7.7.14.1. Any person who notices or suspects a fire within Site premises, must raise alarm by
yelling "Fire" and / or breaking the glass of the nearest fire alarm point, or call the
concerned person.
7.7.14.2. If the source of the fire is detected, fire extinguishers placed in nearest location
should be used as required.
7.7.14.3. The area in front of the warehouse is to be kept clear to allow the fire brigade easy
access to ware house.
7.7.14.4. Once the fire has been brought under control and the premises declared safe for
entry, by the fire authorities, Employees and Other Personnel can resume their
work.
7.7.14.5. The following information and guidance must be used for the selection of fire
extinguisher.
7.7.15. CLASSIFICATION OF FIRE: FIRES CAN BE CLASSIFIED INTO FOUR
CATEGORIES:
7.7.15.1. Class A fire: Fire due to combustible materials such as wood, paper, textiles etc.
7.7.15.2. Class B fire: Fire due to flammable liquids like oils, solvents, petroleum products,
varnishes and paints etc. Fire extinguishers: Foam, Carbon dioxide, and Dry
Chemical Powder (DCP).
7.7.15.3. Class C Fire: Fire involving gaseous substances under pressure where it is
necessary to dilute the burning gas at a very fast rate with an inert gas or powder
is suitable for extinguishing such type of fires. Fire Extinguishers: Carbon dioxide,
Dry Chemical Powder (DCP)
7.7.15.4. Class D fires: Fire involving metals like Magnesium, Aluminum, Zinc, Potassium
etc., where the burning metal is reactive to water and which require special
extinguishing media or techniques. Sand buckets are suitable in most cases. Dry

powder extinguishers are also suitable in some cases if special type of powder is
used.
7.7.16. IMPORTANT:
7.7.16.1. Do not use DCP on electrical panels, electronic gadgets like PCs, servers etc., as
the dust will spoil the equipment and render it beyond repair. Use CO2
extinguishers only to put out panel fires.
7.7.17. NON-ELECTRICAL FIRES:
7.7.17.1. In case of non-electrical fires, such as insulation and oil fires, electrically isolate the
individual equipment first and put out the fire by using foam, DCP or CO2
extinguishers. Water may be used to fight the fire but only after isolating the
equipment electrically.
7.7.18. TESTING THE PLAN:
7.7.18.1. The veracity of the plan has to be checked once a year. Safety team must plan for
this and conduct the mock-drill by declaring the emergency. The actions should be
mock tried by posting some observers at critical places and the feedback from the
observers to be obtained and any improvement suggested if found fit should be
incorporated. Record of this must be maintained.
7.7.19. OFF-SITE EMERGENCY:
Any emergency situation involving equipment's / utilities, which can be controlled
using the outside help, and which may affect the public or the residents nearby is
called OFF-SITE Emergency.
7.7.19.1. Vacate the premises. Call the fire brigade.
7.7.19.2. Do not cut-off communication until the address has been repeated by the fire
brigade.
7.7.19.3. Keep all access to the building clear for fire brigade.
7.7.19.4. Inform HSE & Security Department and top management regarding the emergency
and necessary action to be taken.
7.7.19.5. Once the fire has been brought under control and the premises declared safe for
entry by the fire authorities, Employees and Other Personnel can resume their
work.
7.7.19.6. HSE & Security Department must ensure that "FIRE EXIT PLAN" is displayed
at appropriate locations.
7.7.19.7. Security Staff must head count at assembly point and ensure that Employees and
Other Personnel have come out of the building.
7.7.19.8. Supervisors must ensure that necessary medical help is given to the affected
people.
7.7.20. OTHER EMERGENCY:

7.7.20.1. Other than On-Site and Off-Site fire emergencies, other emergencies like medical
emergency, bomb threat, riots, emergency due to natural calamity etc. may also
arise. In such cases concerned person should contact the Police Department and
seek their guidance for initiating further action.
7.7.21. EMERGENCY RESPONSE REPORTING:
7.7.21.1. Safety officer must make a report (Emergency Response Report) on the nature of
emergency encountered, response details, and suggestions/recommendations for
improving response measures. This report must be submitted to the top
management for initiating corrective and preventive actions as appropriate.
7.8. TRAFFIC CONTROL, VEHICLE SAFETY AND

ANSPORTATION:
7.8.1. TRAFFIC CONTROL:
Traffic control is an essential component of incident response in order to move road
users safely and expeditiously past or around a traffic incident, and to reduce the
likelihood of secondary crashes.
 Reduce traffic delays and preclude unnecessary use of the surrounding road
system,
 Reduce the likelihood of secondary crashes,
 Move road users safely and expeditiously past or around the traffic incident,
and
 Reduce injuries to those involved in response activities.
A traffic incident is defined as an emergency road user occurrence, a natural
disaster, or other unplanned event that affects or impedes the normal flow of traffic.
Emergency road occurrences, natural disasters, or other unplanned event that
disrupts traffic flow and identifies a specific color (black legend on fluorescent pink
background) for warning and guide signs used for temporary traffic control. Traffic
incidents are divided into three general classes of duration, each with unique traffic
control characteristics and needs. Those classes are:
A. Major – expected duration of more than 2 hours;
B. Intermediate – expected duration of 30 minutes to 2 hours; and
C. Minor – expected duration under 30 minutes.
These classes of incident duration are important to responders arriving at traffic
incident in order for them to assess the magnitude and begin placing temporary
traffic controls consistent with the event.
 Ensure responder safety
 Proper placement of apparatus and signage
 Apparatus Placement

 Park in a manner that reduces the chance of being struck by oncoming traffic
 Park in a manner that shields responders and the operational work area from
being exposed to oncoming traffic
 Park in a manner that allow effective deployment of equipment and resources
to handle the incident
 Operations on Surface Streets
a. Park off the street when possible
b. Close the street completely, if necessary
c. Do not block access to later arriving apparatus
d. Create a blocking position if street can’t be closed
e. Never park on railroad tracks
f. Position pump panel in shadow area, if possible
 Required if incident is Intermediate or greater
 Distances
Higher speeds = Longer distance
2nd 1st Transitio

Speed Warnin Warning n Taper Buffer Work Termination Taper
g Sign Sign (A) Area Space Space Area
(B)
30
mph 100 350 70 625
40
mph 350 350 125 825 As 100 feet per lane
Needed
50
mph 500 500 375 1000
60
mph 1500 1000 450 1300

70
mph 1500 1000 525 1450

Example of Distances
• Termination
Taper – 100 feet
• Work Space –
As Needed
• Buffer Space –
625 Feet
• Transition
Taper – 70 feet
• Sign A –
100 feet
• Sign B – 100
feet.
The Scene
Example of Placement

7.8.1.1. SECURITY RESPONDER PARKING

 Drive past the scene before parking
 Park completely off the road in termination taper area
 Turn off all lights except hazard lights
 DO NOT block emergency lighting on apparatus already on scene
 DO NOT park in such a way as to block egress of apparatus
7.8.1.2. VEHICLE SAFETY AND TRANSPORTATION
This Section describes minimum requirements for operating motor vehicles within
areas under Clients jurisdiction, including driver performance and vehicle
maintenance.
7.8.1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Only authorized drivers shall operate motor vehicles. Operator credentials shall be
verified prior to their being allowed to operate motor vehicles.
Drivers operating motor vehicles on highways and client property and/or Sites shall
have in their possession a valid Saudi Arabian Government (SAG) driving license.
Drivers shall be held accountable for the safe operation of the vehicle.
Drivers shall:
 Abide by all KSA traffic regulations and KSA traffic requirements at all times in
all locations.
 Wear seat belts at all times and ensure that all passengers wear their seat
belts as well.
 Report any damage immediately to their supervisor.
 Perform a 360-degree walk around before getting into the vehicle
 Ensure the vehicle is safe to operate and contains all required safety
equipment prior to use.
 Ensure the vehicle is properly equipped before operating in remote
locations.
 Not exceed the posted speed limit at any time.
 Not use a cell phone, eat or drink while driving.
 Properly transport materials and ensure loads do not exceed the vehicle
manufacturer’s design load capacity. Loads shall be properly secured and tied
down.
Materials shall not extend over the sides of the vehicle. Loads extending beyond the
front or rear shall be marked with a red flag and trailers shall be equipped with
visible brake and taillights.

 Secure loose materials in the driving compartment or truck cargo area. Hard
hats and other loose materials shall not be placed on the rear window shelf.
 Ensure unauthorized persons are not transported in vehicles.
 Not transport more passengers than the number of seat belts provided in the
vehicle.
 Not transport passengers in the rear of pickups or on truck beds.
 Only park in designated parking areas. Parked vehicles shall not obstruct other
vehicles, roadways, access ways or fixed firefighting installations.
 Reduce vehicle speed under hazardous weather or road conditions
 Not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
 Always set the parking or emergency brake when the vehicle is parked.
 All motor vehicles shall be serviced and repaired according to the
manufacturer’s maintenance schedule
7.8.2. VEHICLE INSPECTION:
Drivers shall inspect vehicles on a monthly basis using a detailed inspection
checklist. The checklist items shall cover, but not be limited to, the availability
and/or condition of:
7.8.2.1. Two reflective warning triangles.
7.8.2.2. Windows, windshields, inside and outside rearview mirrors and windshield wipers.
7.8.2.3. Headlights, taillights, brake lights, turn signal lights, horn, etc.
7.8.2.4. Foot and emergency brakes.
7.8.2.5. Tires, wheels, spare tire(s) and jack and wrench.
7.8.2.6. Vehicle fluids (e.g., radiator coolant*, oil, brake fluid, transmission oil [checked with
engine running], steering fluid, wiper washer water, and distilled water for the
battery).
*NOTE: The driver shall check the radiator coolant level only when the engine is cool. When
necessary, coolant shall be added to the level marked on the overflow expansion
tank, if provided.
7.8.3. MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT
7.8.3.1. Motor vehicle accidents (MVA) that occur on Sites shall be reported to the nearest
Police Station by telephone.
7.8.3.2. The driver shall immediately inform his supervisor of an MVA, after meeting
the requirements of police and the traffic police.
7.8.3.3. Drivers shall not leave the scene of an incident or move the vehicle after a collision
until released by the police officer.
7.8.3.4. Reflective triangles shall be used to warn approaching traffic if a damaged vehicle is

blocking traffic or is stopped on the road.
7.9. PREVENT AND PROTECT AGAINST FIRES AT SITES:

This section describes minimum requirements to prevent and protect against fires at
sites.
7.9.1. LAYOUT
The following principles of Site layout and organization shall be used to minimize
fire risks:
7.9.1.1. Congestion around machinery and equipment shall be avoided, especially where
there is a high level of activity and traffic.
7.9.1.2. Operations having a high fire risk, such as welding and open-flame activities, shall
be isolated or specially protected from flammable and explosive materials.
7.9.1.3. Adequate emergency access roads shall be provided. Fire Department access roads
shall not be less than 6 m (20 ft.) in width with an unobstructed overhead clearance
of not less than 5.5 m (18 ft.). Emergency access roads shall not be obstructed at
any time.
7.9.1.4. More than one access road shall be provided when emergency access by a single
road could be impaired by vehicle congestion, condition of terrain, climatic
conditions or other factors.
7.9.1.5. Storage of flammable and combustible materials shall be restricted to the minimum
quantities necessary for an uninterrupted cycle of operations or activities. Storage
and handling of flammable and combustible materials shall meet NFPA 30. See
Sections 7.7 and 7.8.
7.9.1.6. Sites shall be provided with the numbers and types of fire extinguishers suitable for
the hazards, and as needed to meet the requirements of NFPA 10 and SAES-B-019.
Fire extinguishers and other firefighting equipment locations shall be clearly marked
on the Site layout plans. See Section 7.9
7.9.1.7. Access roads between and around combustible/flammable storage stacks/areas
within an outdoor storage yard shall be at least 4.5 m (15 ft.) wide and shall be
maintained free from accumulation of rubbish, equipment or other material.
7.9.1.8. Access roads at storage yards shall be spaced at a maximum grid size of 15 m x
45.7 m (50 ft. x 150 ft.)
7.9.1.9. Flammable materials (e.g., paints, fuels, chemicals) shall be separated and stored in
a designated flammable liquid storage area away from heat sources, electrical
equipment and other ignition sources. See Section 7.7 for further information
regarding storage of flammable and combustible materials.
7.9.1.10. Incompatible materials (e.g., flammables and oxidizers) shall not be stored
together.
7.9.1.11. Vegetation (e.g., weeds and grass) shall be kept down and a regular procedure

provided for periodic cleanup of the entire area.

7.9.1.12. Storage areas shall be graded to divert possible spills away from buildings and
adjacent working areas, or shall be surrounded by a curb or earth dike at least 30
cm (12 inches) high. Provisions shall be made for draining off accumulations of
ground/rain water and spills of flammable/combustible liquids when curbs or dikes
are used.
7.9.1.13. All materials shall be stored and handled according to their fire characteristics.
7.9.1.14. Incompatible materials that may create a fire hazard shall be segregated by a
barrier having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour.
7.9.1.15. Material shall be stacked to minimize the spread of fire and permit firefighting
access. Aisle space shall be maintained to safely accommodate the widest vehicle
that may be used within the building for firefighting purposes.
7.9.1.16. For building areas/rooms without sprinklers, a minimum clearance of 0.6 m (2 ft.)
shall be maintained between the ceiling and the top level of any stacked material
below.
7.9.1.17. For building areas/rooms with sprinklers, a minimum clearance of 0.5 m (18 inches)
shall be maintained between the top level of any stacked material and the sprinkler
heads/deflectors.
7.9.1.18. Adequate clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to prevent
ignition of combustible materials.
7.9.1.19. Combustible/flammable materials shall be maintained at a clearance of at least
7.9.1.20. 0.6 m (2 ft.) around fire-rated doors.
7.9.1.21. Materials shall not be stored/located where they obstruct access to exits or visibility
of exit signs.
7.9.2. CONTROL OF IGNITION SOURCES
7.9.2.1. Employees and Other Personnel shall take the precautions necessary to prevent
ignition of materials, lubricants, fuels used in the job itself, etc., including as
follows:
7.9.2.2. Temporary wiring shall be installed according to the provisions of NFPA 70.
7.9.2.3. Electrical equipment shall be regularly checked for defects.
7.9.2.4. Ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs) shall be provided where required per NFPA
70.
7.9.2.5. Smoking is permitted only in designated areas. “No Smoking” signs shall be
prominently displayed, particularly where flammable or combustible materials are
stored.
7.9.2.6. Welding equipment, asphalt kettles, heating appliances and other open flames or
hot surfaces shall be segregated from flammable and combustible materials.

7.9.2.7. Precautions shall be implemented as needed to control indirect sources of ignition

(e.g., hot welding slag falling from a height or sparks from a fire under an asphalt
kettle).
7.9.2.8. Open fires and/or open burning of materials are strictly prohibited. Authorization
shall be obtained from the SA Fire Protection Department.
7.9.2.9. Proper bonding and grounding techniques shall be used for any operation where
static electricity could become an ignition source.
7.9.2.10. Ignition sources shall be immediately removed (e.g., engines shut down) if there is
a hydrocarbon liquid or gas leak.
7.9.2.11. Temporary enclosures constructed for the protection of operational components and
equipment shall be of fire retardant materials.
7.9.2.12. Precautions shall be implemented as needed to control indirect sources of ignition
(e.g., hot welding slag falling from a height or sparks from a fire under an asphalt
kettle).
7.9.2.13. Open fires and/or open burning of materials are strictly prohibited. Authorization
shall be obtained from the SA Fire Protection Department.
7.9.2.14. Proper bonding and grounding techniques shall be used for any operation where
static electricity could become an ignition source.
7.9.2.15. Ignition sources shall be immediately removed (e.g., engines shut down) if there is
a hydrocarbon liquid or gas leak.
7.9.2.16. Temporary enclosures constructed for the protection of operational components and
equipment shall be of fire retardant materials
7.9.3. PORTABLE FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT:
7.9.3.1. Appropriate portable and mobile firefighting equipment shall be as needed to
address Site hazards (e.g., hot work activities).
7.9.3.2. Firefighting equipment shall be located at convenient, conspicuous locations and be
easily accessible.
7.9.3.3. For flammable/combustible liquid storage areas located outdoors, portable fire
extinguisher(s) suitable for the fire hazard involved shall be located not less than
7.6 m (25 ft.) nor more than 23 m (75 ft.) from the fire hazard.
7.9.3.4. For storage areas located outdoors without flammable or combustible liquids,
portable fire extinguisher(s) suitable for the fire hazard involved shall be located so
that maximum travel distance to the nearest unit does not exceed 30 m (100 ft.).
7.9.3.5. Firefighting equipment shall be maintained in good working order and be protected
from harsh environmental conditions as needed (e.g., cover wheeled fire
extinguishers)
7.9.3.6. The area around firefighting equipment (e.g., fire extinguishers, fire hydrants) shall
be kept clear so that they are readily accessible in case of an emergency.

7.9.3.7. All applicable Employees and Other Personnel shall be aware of the firefighting
equipment available on-Site and shall be trained in its use.
7.9.3.8. Inspection and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems and Equipment's
7.9.3.9. Fire protection systems and equipment, whether temporary or permanent, shall be
inspected and maintained by the contractor/consultant on monthly basis. Inspection
report to be given to Head of HSE & Security Department.
7.9.3.10. Equipment inspection records shall be maintained (an inspection log book and
equipment inspection tags shall be used at a minimum)
7.9.3.11. Any fire protection system component or firefighting equipment that does not pass
inspection shall be immediately replaced or repaired.
7.9.3.12. Housekeeping
7.9.3.13. Waste shall be removed from the Site at regular intervals and at the end of each
work day.
7.9.3.14. Storage of combustible materials shall not be allowed underneath buildings or
stairways.
7.9.3.15. Metal bins with close-fitting lids shall be provided and used for disposal of oily rags,
wood shavings and other highly combustible waste. Oily rags shall not be disposed
of in the same container as other combustible waste.
7.9.3.16. Contents of ash trays shall not be mixed with other combustible or flammable
waste.
7.9.3.17. Noncombustible absorbents shall be used to remove oil spills or leaks.
7.10. EVALUATING AND PREVENTING HEAT-RELATED

ILLNESSES AT WORK LOCATION:
This section describes minimum requirements for recognizing, evaluating and
preventing heat-related illnesses at work locations
7.10.1. RESPONSIBILITIES
7.10.2. SITE MANAGEMENT, SUPERVISORS
7.10.2.1. When the potential for heat-related illness exists, monitor environmental conditions
(e.g., air temperature, relative humidity) and communicate the current heat stress
danger category and corresponding control.
7.10.2.2. Document heat stress mitigation measures in the specific work plan, which shall
specify the specific work practices to be implemented at the Site to avoid heat-
related illness during periods of high heat stress potential and may include:
 Scheduling the most strenuous work during the coolest times of the day (e.g.,
early morning and evening/night).
 Minimizing work time in direct sunlight as much as possible.

 Not allowing Employees to work alone.

 Rotating workers in and out of hot areas, as possible.
 Communicating locations of designated break/recovery areas, emergency
reporting procedures and nearest medical facilities to workers.
 Scheduling work/rest rotations for workers according to the current heat
index, which is based on temperature and relative humidity (see Appendix A).
 Minimizing high-intensity manual work activities (e.g., use
mechanical/powered equipment to replace manual labor), as practical.
7.10.2.3. Do not let schedule or productivity demands supersede heat stress awareness or
controls used to prevent heat-related illness.
7.10.2.4. Conduct periodic (e.g., weekly) safety meetings/talks during hot weather
emphasizing heat stress hazards and precautions, with added emphasis on this risk
during Ramadan if it occurs in summertime.
7.10.2.5. Display educational information related to heat stress conditions, illness/symptoms
and preventive measures Schedule heat stress training and monitor new workers
and workers returning from vacation to ensure they acclimatize at a progressive,
controlled rate to the change in environmental conditions.
7.10.2.6. Provide drinking water stations (e.g., coolers with chilled or ice water) for workers
and remind them to drink plenty of water even if not thirsty.
7.10.2.7. Replenish drinking water supplies as needed to ensure availability and provide more
frequent collection of sanitary wastewater from portable toilets.
7.10.2.8. Provide personal water bottles or insulated containers (2 liter capacity) to workers
as needed (e.g., during high heat stress danger categories).
7.10.2.9. Provide designated shaded and cool areas for periodic “cool down” breaks and
recovery from minor heat-related illness. Where possible, these areas are to be air
conditioned.
7.10.2.10. Monitor the heat-related health condition of Employees, as well as the
effectiveness of any engineering/administrative controls and personal protective
equipment (PPE) being used.
7.10.2.11. Be able to recognize early signs and symptoms of heat-related illness and take
appropriate action to prevent serious heat illness (see Appendix B).
7.10.2.12. Respond appropriately to any heat-related illness (see Appendix B).
7.10.2.13. Be knowledgeable of emergency reporting and response procedures, including the
location of the nearest medical facility with a qualified medical doctor who can
provide proper treatment for a victim of severe heat exhaustion or heat stroke.
7.10.3. EMPLOYEES:
a) Follow instructions for controlling heat stress; including taking periodic “cool

down” breaks and drinking enough water (see Appendix A). Begin drinking
water early in the day.
b) Wear appropriate clothing (e.g., light colored, lightweight, breathable, loose
clothing is best)
c) Know and be alert for signs/symptoms of heat-related illnesses in themselves
and others. See Appendix B.
d) Take appropriate action upon developing symptoms of heat cramps, heat
exhaustion or heat stroke. See Appendix B
7.10.4. HEAT STRESS DANGER CATEGORY
 When the potential for heat-related illness exists, the actual heat index (see
Appendix A) shall be periodically determined (e.g., every hour) at the Site
using calibrated weather monitoring equipment provided by the GCCIA.
 The heat stress danger category, obtained from the current heat index (see
Appendix A), shall be declared at the Site when the potential for heat- related
illness exists.
 The heat stress danger category shall be used to determine control measures,
including minimum resting times and drinking water needed (see Appendix A).
 The current heat stress danger category and corresponding control measures
shall be communicated to Employees as conditions change (e.g., by use of
color-coded flags, information signs, mass distribution of SMS mobile phone
text messages to Site supervisors, Employees and Other Personnel non
restricted areas).
7.10.5. CONTROL OF HEAT STRESS
7.10.5.1. During periods of high heat stress potential (i.e., danger category III or IV in
Appendix A) at the Site, the following measures shall be implemented as applicable
to control heat stress. As with any hazard, feasible engineering controls are the
primary control measure, followed by administrative (work practice) controls and
personal protective controls, in that order of preference.
7.10.6. ENGINEERING CONTROLS
7.10.6.1. SHADE
Designated shaded break/rest areas shall be provided at a distance not
greater than 100 m (330 ft.) from Employees and Other Personnel working in direct
sunlight for extended periods of time. When feasible, shade is to be provided for
work areas, including single shades to accommodate flagmen, etc.
7.10.6.2. LOCAL VENTILATION
When the air temperature is less than 37 °C (99 °F), fans or portable air movers
may be used to reduce heat stress by increasing the air flow in the work area.
7.10.6.3. PORTABLE AIR COOLING SYSTEMS
Portable blowers with built-in air chillers shall be used as needed (e.g., when
confined spaces and enclosed work areas have ambient temperatures exceeding 43

°C [110 °F]) to provide cooling for confined spaces and similar enclosed work areas.
7.10.7. ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS
7.10.7.1. SCHEDULING
Schedule work for the cooler times of the day, especially during the month of
Ramadan if it falls in the summer.
7.10.7.2. ACCLIMATIZATION
Deliberate acclimatization shall be used to expose new Employees to work in a hot
environment for progressively longer periods. New Employees in jobs where heat
levels may produce heat stress shall be exposed to 20% of normal exposure on day
one, with a 20% increase in exposure each additional day.
7.10.7.3. WATER REPLACEMENT (HYDRATION)
Workers shall be encouraged to drink plenty of water prior to the start of each shift.
Ample supplies of cool drinking water shall be located within 100 m (330 ft.)
walking distance of each worker and in all designated break/rest areas. Workers
shall drink small amounts of water on a frequent basis based on the actual heat
index at the Site (see Appendix A).
Sports drinks, juices and electrolyte replacement/rehydration mixes may also be
made available to workers in order to help maintain the body’s water and salt levels.
However, workers shall not consume more of these drinks than plain water.
Workers shall not take salt tablets due to potential adverse side effects (e.g.,
nausea/vomiting, dehydration).

7.10.7.4. WORK/REST ROTATIONS

Work and rest rotations shall be based on the actual heat index at the Site. See
Appendix A. Work rotations shall be established for workers performing remote
activities in high heat stress exposures (e.g., flagmen). Workers shall be allowed
additional break time and water as they deem necessary for their health.
7.10.7.5. PERSONAL MONITORING AND BUDDY SYSTEM
Employees shall work in pairs or teams and shall observe each other for signs of
diminished capacity and heat-related illness. Prescribed check times and buddy
system controls (see Section 13.5) shall be used to determine whether a worker is
experiencing diminished capacity or symptoms of heat stress.
7.10.7.6. RED HEAT STRESS DANGER CATEGORY IV WORK PRACTICES
The following additional precautions shall be taken while a red heat stress danger
category IV, “Extreme Danger,” (see Appendix A) exists at the Site:
 Work required to be performed in direct sunlight for an extended period of
time shall be stopped, except: (1) work deemed necessary for continuing
plant operations by the SA Proponent Organization (“SAPO”),
 (2) Emergency maintenance or (3) rescue operations.
 Any other work deemed by contractor Site management or the SAPO to be
unsafe shall also be stopped (e.g., work in confined spaces, at elevated
locations or involving high physical exertion).
 Nonemergency work shall be stopped if workers exhibit symptoms of serious
heat-related illness (see Appendix B).
 Workers shall be provided a minimum of 10 minutes of break time after every
20 minutes of work (i.e., 20:10 minute work: rest periods).
 Workers shall be advised to drink one cup of water every 10 minutes. Each
worker shall be provided with his own personal water bottle/insulated
container (2 liter capacity) and have it with him at all times. A “no water, no
work” Policy shall be strictly adhered to.
 No person shall work alone while a red heat stress danger category IV
condition exists at the Site.
 Extra precautions shall be taken when FRC are required to be worn while a
red heat stress danger category IV exists at the Site, as such fabrics can
intensify heat stress. Other types of fabrics which may increase heat stress
(e.g., polyester, nylon) shall not be worn while a danger category IV exists at
the Site
7.10.7.7. RECOVERY
Any employee experiencing symptoms of a heat-related illness (see Appendix B)
shall immediately stop work and report to his supervisor. The victim shall be allowed

to fully recover in an appropriate recovery area before returning to work. Recovery

areas shall be shaded, cool and supplied with water. Victims of severe heat
exhaustion or heat stroke shall be immediately evacuated to the nearest medical
facility with a qualified medical doctor who can provide proper treatment. Such
incidents shall be properly reported.
7.10.7.8. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS DURING RAMADAN
Appropriate planning and heat stress mitigation measures shall be incorporated into
the specific work plan (e.g., Job Safety Analysis) for workers who are fasting during
Ramadan if it occurs during the summer. Supplies of cool drinking water shall be
made available for workers as needed during Ramadan (e.g., for a worker
experiencing symptoms of a heat-related illness).
7.10.7.9. OTHER ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS
Other administrative controls shall be used as appropriate to reduce heat stress
(e.g., increase the number of workers assigned to a task, limit worker occupancy
duration within confined areas)
7.10.8. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE CONTROLS
7.10.8.1. ICE COOLING GARMENTS
Commercially available ice vests, neck/wrist wraps, etc., may be provided to
Employees as needed (e.g., who work for extended periods inside a confined space
during hot weather). Ice packets shall be replaced as required.
7.10.8.2. Clothing
Light colored, lightweight, breathable clothing that covers as much of the body as
possible, including the head, shall be worn when working in direct sunlight. Since
FRC and other synthetic fabrics (e.g., polyester, nylon) increase heat stress,
appropriate planning and mitigation measures shall be incorporated into the specific
work plans (e.g., Job Safety Analysis) for Employees and Other Personnel wearing
this type of clothing while working in conditions with a high heat stress potential.
7.10.8.3. Wetted Clothing/Towels
During periods of high heat stress potential, employers are to provide Employees
with wetted terry cloth towels and/or allow them to wet their normal work clothes
as necessary to provide cooling for their body. Cool water supplies (not ice water)
separate from drinking water shall be used for this purpose (e.g., containers of
clean water with a faucet/spigot for sanitary distribution, instead of dipping).
7.10.9. HEAT STRESS TRAINING

Heat stress awareness training shall be provided just before and during the hot
summer months to all applicable Employees and Other Personnel (e.g., who work
outdoors) and those who manage Employees and Other Personnel and have
responsibilities for establishing heat stress mitigation measures.

Heat stress awareness training shall include the following elements:

 Hazards of heat stress.
 Recognition of signs and symptoms of heat stress. See Appendix B.
 First aid procedures for heat stroke and other heat-related illnesses.
 Employee responsibilities in avoiding/responding to heat-related illness.
 Supervisor responsibilities in avoiding/responding to heat-related illness.
 Dangers of the use of drugs, including prescription and over-the- counter
medicines, in hot work environments.
 Measures Employees can take to minimize the effects of heat stress
(hydration, work pace, use of wet towels, good nutritional habits, etc.).
 Personal monitoring and buddy system controls.
Note: Training shall emphasize that heat stress can affect an individual’s ability to
reason.
8. ANNEXURE
8.1. List of Related SOPs
S. No Document Title Document Number
1. NO SMOKING Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-002
2. Access Control Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-003
3. Disaster Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-004
4. Fire Prevention Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-005
5. KEY CONTROL Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-006
Staff Identification Badges Policy and
6. HSE-PRO-007
Procedure
Announcement-After Official Working
7. HSE-PRO-008
Hours Procedure
8. Parking Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-009
Security Management Policy and
9. HSE-PRO-010
Procedure
10. Fire Systems Test Policy Procedures HSE-PRO-011
Safety Management Plan Policy and
11. HSE-PRO-012
Procedure
12. Visitors Access Policy and Procedure HSE-PRO-013
8.2. List of Related Forms/ Charts / Checklist

S. No Document Title Document Number

1. N/A

Gulf Cooperation Council

GCCIA
GCC Interconnection Project

Phase III
AREVA T&D
Protective Relays
Coordination principles
REV. DATE REVISED APPROVED REVISION STATUS
2008
00 JM JCM First Issue FA
August 08
2008
01 RF JCM Updating following meeting in AL KHOBAR dated August 17th FA
September 05
2008
02 JM JCM Updating following SNLC comments dated 2008 September 25 FA
November 18
2011-01-11
03 JP RA Updating following inclusion of Phase III SILLA SS FA
Jan. 11
2011-01-15
04 JP RA Updating following meeting at Alstom, Bahrain with GCCIA FA
Jan. 11
Updating following comments on submission through letter
2011-02-10
05 JP RA GCCIA-Phase III-Lot C8-2010-76 FA
Feb. 11
2013-01-16 As built ( updated the Auto reclose dead time and BF setting )
06 AK RA FI
Jan. 16
2013-03-31 As built ( updated GCCAI comments )
07 AK RA FI
Mar. 31
Contractor:
Gulf Cooperation Council
GCCIA
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION

Designed: JPS Approved: RA
Checked: JM Sheet No: 1 GCC Interconnection Project - Phase III
Standard: No. Sheets: 248 Protective Relays
Date: 16/01/2013 Coordination Principles
Scale: -
Dimensions: - A4 Control and Protection
GCC No.:
Contractor No.: GCCIA-3-A/GEN-31-D-131 07
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) General Phase I Pages 1-1 to 1-3

1(a) General Phase III Pages 1(a)-1 to 1(a)-3
2) Relay Scheme Phase I Pages 2-1 to 2-19

2(a) Relay Scheme Phase III Pages 2(a)-1 to 2(a)-20
3) Distance relay coordination Phase I Pages 3-1 to 3-36
3(a) Distance relay coordination Phase III Pages 3(a)-1 to 3(a)-27
4) Breaker Failure relay coordination Phase I Pages 4-1 to 4-4
4(a) Breaker Failure relay coordination Phase III Pages 4(a)-1 to 4(a)-5
5) Coordination with interconnections Phase I Pages 5-1 to 5-9

Pages 5(a)-1
5(a) Coordination with interconnections Phase III
6) Autorecloser Phase I Pages 6-1 to 6-31
6(a) Autorecloser Phase III Pages 6-1 to 6-66
7) Appendix Phase I Pages 7-1 to 7-11
7(a) Appendix Phase III Pages 7-1 to 7-11
•1(a)…..7(a) concerns with PHASE III SILLA SS .
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131-07 GCCr N° Page 0-1

0 ) History of document revisions
Revi Date of issue History

sion
00 2008 August 08 First issue
01 2008 Sept. 05 Update following Meeting of August 18th 2008 at SNCL Office –
Al Khobar.
Modifications :
-Addition of 33kV trip signal from TEE1Reactor protection.
-Use of only Z1 in back up distance protection.
-Addition of DEF protection principle
-Addition of calibration criteria for overcurrent protection
-Proposal of 27/59 settings
-Review of zone 3 setting philosophy
-Addition of power swing detection principle in distance
protection
-Addition of fuse failure principle in distance protection
-Review of Ghunan - Al Jasra line protection
-Review of protection philosophy for interconnections
02 2008 Nov. 18 Updating following SNLC comments dated 2008 September 25
03 2011 Jan. 11 Updating following Phase III SILLA SS inclusion
04 2011 Jan. 15 Updating following Meeting at 12th January 2011 at Alstom,
Bahrain with GCCIA.
05 2011 Feb. 10 Updating following comments by GCCIA on letter GCCIA-
Phase III-Lot C8-2010-76.
Modifications :
-Addition of sheets in AR for some more system conditions.
-Phase I Relay Schemes with 5 dia. Earlier it was with 3
dia. similar to phase III.
-50AL clarification and change to 50RN.
-5th Feb. 2011 Meeting points notes in respective pages.
-Shuweihat SS shown with double breaker previously it was
shown 1 and ½ breaker system.
06 2013 Jan. 16 As – built

Updating following points
-Auto reclose dead time for Phase – 3 substation
- BF timing setting
07 2013 March. 31 Updating following comments by GCCIA
- OST function enabled feeder details
- 32F and 32R, 67N and 67 Characteristic angle added in
the Silla summary sheet.
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 07 GCCr N° Page 0-2

1-1 ) General Phase I
In the following the principle of coordination of the protective relays of the 400kV GCCIA network is described
The GCCIA network consist of seven 400kV substation and 5 interconnections with existing networks
Please refer to the single line diagram on next pages.
The aim of this document is to give the setting philosophy in order to achieve protection performances as
described in the technical specifications reference [1]
The protection systems is designed to detect and isolate fault occurrence on the 400kV network in case of
protection equipment failure (N-1). The protection failure includes protection equipment out of service for periodical
maintenance or testing.
The complete loss of telecommunication system (N-2) is also taken into account with degraded performance.
This document gives the principles used to protect all the equipments of the 400kV GCCIA network :
Description of protection principles (selection of protective relays functions, operation of circuit breaker) especially
in case of equipment failure (circuit breaker failure, communication failure,…)
Setting calibration criteria of protection functions
Interface with utilities
Finally this document will be used as the reference protection setting guidelines for each substation coordination
study.
It takes into account all modifications requested by SNCL/GCCIA as per [3] and setting criteria adjustment
following Al Fadhili calculation note.
1-2 ) References
Reference Rev. Date

[1] Technical spec ref. 016403-3000-48ES-5100 00 2005. Oct
[2] Protection relay coordination principles ref. GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 00 2008/08/08
[3] Minutes of Meeting at Al Khobar ref. GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 00 00 2008/08/18
[4] Simplified Single Line Diagram Phase I & III 01 2005/01/07
ref. 017048-SL00-47D3-0001
[5] document ref 017048-AC116-60CV-0007 "Protection Coordination 2008/03/18
Study - Line Impedance" from SNCL
[6] document ref 017048-AC116-60CV-0067 "Data for ICC EMS-SCADA 2008/08/12
System" from SNCL
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 Rev. 07 GCCr N° Page 1-1

1-3 ) Executive summary
-This document confirms the philosophy of distance protection reach setting. The starting zone (Zone 3) has
been reduced in order to not detect any fault on the utilities side. As a consequence, fault on the adjacent line will
not be covered by the zone 3 in all the cases.
- To provide ultimate back up (N-2 case), inverse time overcurrent protection are proposed to clear phase to phase
fault and earth fault with reasonable clearance time as coordination is the priority.
- The reach of zone 2 distance protection at Ghunan is set at 125% of total Ghunan – Al Jasra line impedance
(OHL + UGC) to clear fault on the submarine cable in zone 2 time delay in case of full failure of cable differential
protection communications (N-2 case).
In addition Z1 of back up distance function of the differential relay located at Al Jasra is set to cover the entire
submarine cable impedance (set at 70% of total Al Jasra – Ghunan line impedance)
-The summary of the protection philosophy is given in appendix 7-3. This document provides the setting
calibration criteria of each protection function and will be used as reference setting guideline for each substation
coordination study. Obviously this document cannot cover all the specific situations and the criteria may have to
be adapted in the substation calculation note from case to case.

To existing
G1D Power station
(Kuwait)
Al ZOUR
L1 L2
292km
OHL
Al FADHILI
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
HVDC
To existing
Al FADHILI
(Saudi Arabia)
L3 L4
115km
OHL
GHUNAN Al JASRA
To existing
Al Jasra
(Bahrein)
OHL RAQ UGC

40km L9 43km
L10
L5 L6
235km
OHL
SALWA
OHL
115km
L11
L12
SILAA L7 L8
97km
OHL
DOHA SOUTH
To Future To existing
SCHUWEHAT DOHA SOUTH SUPER
(United Arab Emirates) (Quatar)

2) Relay Scheme Phase I
In the following, for each protective relay following details are shown :
- The connection to the CT or the VT
- The protected zone (the zone where a fault is detected by the relay
- The resulting actions (which circuit breaker is tripped)
The description is based to the Al FADHILI substation which has been taken as an example. However the principles
are identical for any other substation.
Al FADHILI substation has been chosen as an example because it is the more representative substation.

1(a)-1 ) General (Phase III)
To provide common and easy document for reference, in the following the principle of coordination of the
protective relays for the 400kV GCCIA network Phase-1 and phase-III has been described. While points 2 to 7
deal with Phase-1, points 2(a),3(a)……7(a) will be explain Phase-III.
The GCCIA network consist of nine 400kV substation and 6 interconnections with existing networks.
Please refer to the single line diagram on next pages.
The aim of this document is to give the setting philosophy in order to achieve protection performances as
described in the technical specifications reference [1]
The protection systems is designed to detect and isolate fault occurrence on the 400kV network in case of
protection equipment failure (N-1). The protection failure includes protection equipment out of service for periodical
maintenance or testing.
The complete loss of telecommunication system (N-2) is also taken into account with degraded performance.
This document gives the principles used to protect all the equipments of the 400kV GCCIA network :
Description of protection principles (selection of protective relays functions, operation of circuit breaker) especially
in case of equipment failure (circuit breaker failure, communication failure,…)
Setting calibration criteria of protection functions Interface with utilities.
Finally this document will be used as the reference protection setting guidelines for each substation coordination
study.
It takes into account all modifications requested by SNCL/GCCIA as per Phase-1 Document.
1(a)-2 ) References
Reference Rev. Date

[1] Project Technical Specification 00 May-08
[2] Protection Relay coordination principle Phase-1 02 Nov.-08
[3] Single line diagram Phase I & III E Oct.-09
[4] GCCIA system contract Details 03 Apr.-08
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131-07 GCCr N° Page 1(a)-1

1(a)-3 ) Executive summary
-This document confirms the philosophy of distance protection reach setting. The back up zone (Zone 3) has
been reduced in order to not detect any fault on the utilities side (interbus transformer LV side). As a
consequence, fault on the adjacent longest line will not be covered by the zone 3 in all the cases.
- To provide ultimate back up (N-2 case), inverse time overcurrent protection are proposed to clear phase to phase
fault and earth fault with reasonable clearance time as coordination is the priority.
-OST protection is provided in P443 and P544 relay at SILLA as per GCCIA practice.
-In case of single phase fault when the phase is de-energized, there is still energy fed into arc and can be
maintained through circuit capacitance and hence the time for its extinction increases. So we have to consider
dead time for single phase fault from 500-800ms.To allow sufficient time for arc getting quenched.
-High Impedance reactor differential doesn’t provide protection to Auxiliary winding as this is having very low fault
current .
-The summary of the protection philosophy is given in appendix 7-3(Phase-I) and 7(a)-3(Phase-III). This
document provides the setting calibration criteria of each protection function and will be used as reference setting
guideline for each substation coordination study. Obviously this document cannot cover all the specific situations
and the criteria may have to be adapted in the substation calculation note from case to case.

To existing
G1D Power station
(Kuwait)
Al ZOUR
L1 L2
292km
OHL
Al FADHILI
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
HVDC
To existing
Al FADHILI
(Saudi Arabia)
L3 L4
115km
OHL
GHUNAN Al JASRA
To existing
Al Jasra
(Bahrein)
OHL RAQ UGC

40km L9 43km
L10
L5 L6
235km
OHL
SALWA
OHL
L11 L12 96.21km
L7 L8
97km
OHL
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
122.71km
OHL
L13 L14
To existing
DOHA SOUTH SUPER
(Quatar)
SHUWEHAT
(United Arab Emirates) To existing
SHUWEIHAT
(UAE)

2(a) Relay Scheme (Phase III)
In the following, for each protective relay following details are shown :
- The connection to the CT or the VT
- The protected zone (the zone where a fault is detected by the relay
- The resulting actions (which circuit breaker is tripped)
Remote End
Trip
Trip
The description is based to the SILLA substation which has been taken as an example. However the principles are
identical for any other substation.
SILLA substation has been chosen as an example because it is under scope.

87B1-
87B1-A
Low Impedance
differential relay Al Zour L1 Al Zour L2 Spare
F/O
P741
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 Rev. 07
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
P742 P742 P742 P742 P742

GCCr N°
P742 P742 P742 P742 P742
87B2-
87B2-A
Low Impedance
differential relay BUS 2A
F/O
P741
differential relay
Low Impedance
87B1-A
HVDC Converter 3 Ghunan L3 Ghunan L4 HVDC Converter 2 HVDC Converter 1
Page 2-2
87B1-
87B1-B
High
Impedance
differential Al Zour L1 Al Zour L2 Spare
relay
P122
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
GCCr N°
87B2-
87B2-B
High
Impedance
differential
relay BUS 2A
P122
differential relay
High Impedance
87B1-B
Page 2-3
Al Zour L1 Al Zour L2 Spare
BUS 1A
TEE1
High Impedance 33kV 33kV
differential relay
P122
33kV Station
Service .
410V AC
Transformer
breaker Trip
GCCr N°
BUS 2A
differential relay
High Impedance
T E E1
Page 2-4
BUS 1A
87RA
High Impedance
Protected
differential relay zone
P142
33kV 33kV
33kV Station Service .

410V AC Transformer
breaker Trip
Trip
GCCr N°
BUS 2A
differential relay
High Impedance
87R A
Page 2-5
BUS 1A
87RB
High Impedance
differential relay Protected
zone
33kV 33kV
P122

410V AC Transformer
breaker Trip
Trip
GCCr N°
BUS 2A
differential relay
High Impedance
87R B
Page 2-6
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
TEE1
High
Impedance
GCCr N°
differential
relay
P122
remote end
Intertripping
BUS 2A
differential relay
High Impedance
T E E1
Page 2-7
50RN BUS 1A
Earth Fault
P122
33kV 33kV
Alarm to DCS system

GCCr N°
BUS 2A
Earth Fault
50AL
Page 2-8
Note:- As per latest recommendation ( 24 July 2012), this relay was used for alarm purpose only.
BUS 1A
50/51R
Non directional
Phase O/C
33kV 33kV
50/51NR
Non Directional
Earth Fault
P122

410V AC Transformer
breaker Trip
Trip
GCCr N°
BUS 2A
Phase O/C
Non directional
50/ 51R
Earth Fault
Non Directional
50/51NR
Page 2-9
BUS 1A
(1)
Back up distance function
automatically set in operation 33kV 33kV
in case of line differential
communication failure
Only Zone 1 is used :
Z1 : 70% of the line
No teleaction
87LB/
No reverse zone
21 BU
Internal VT supervision block
67 BU
Power swing block
Line diff. relay
Back up distance (1)
Back up overcurrent (2)
(2)
Out of step (4)
Back up directional
overcurrent function
automatically set in
GCCr N°
operation in case of line

differential
Inverse time overcurrent
See appendix 7-3
(3)
Intertrip signal via
communication channel of
MiCOM P544 P544
(4)
Out of step Proetction
BUS 2A
(3)

(single channel)
Communication
Line diff. relay

50BU
21B U /
8 7 L B/
Page 2-10
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
(1)
GCCr N°
27/59
Over and (1)
under
voltage
P921
BUS 2A
voltage
Over and under
27/ 59
Page 2-11
(1)
remote end
Intertripping
(1) Tripping from function 59(over voltage) only

No tripping from function 27 (under voltage)
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
GCCr N°
Line diff.
Line diff. relay
relay 7SD522
P543
Communication
Communication
BUS 2A
diff. relay
HVDC Line
Page 2-12
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
GCCr N°
32R (1) 32F (2)

Active Active
power power
relay relay
Reverse Forward
P132 P132
Alarm
remote end
Intertripping
BUS 2A
Forward
Active power relay
32F
Reverse
Active power relay
32R
(1) Export Power (from utility toward GCCIA)
Page 2-13
Applicable for HVDC feeders of Al Fadhili (3) (2) Import Power (from GCCIA toward utility) trips it’s own breaker
Applicable for any feeder interfaced with utility and tie breaker with remote Inter trip to LV of transformer (If only
present). Intertrip is not applicable for OHL feeders
(3) At Al Fadhili : 32F alarm only
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
21A/67NA
Distance Relay
DEF
Stub bus
GCCr N°
P443
In case line
isolator opened,
MiCOM P443 is
converted to
P0R communication
overcurrent
(1) Out of step Proetction
relay.
(stub bus
scheme (1)
protection)
Out of step
Protection
BUS 2A
Stub bus
DEF
Distance Relay
21A/67NA
Page 2-14
(1)POR : Permissive Over reach

(Téléaction sent for Z2 fault)
BUS 1A
bus VT bus VT
P442 P442
33kV Close Close 33kV

line VT line VT
line VT line VT
79/25
Autorecloser
Voltage control
Important note : the P442 P442
Voltage control function is
used to check In case of 3p
autoreclose sequence only Close Close
line VT line VT
GCCr N°
line VT
line VT
P442 P442
Close Close
bus VT bus VT
BUS 2A
Voltage control
Autorecloser
79/ 25
Page 2-15
BUS 1A Bus VT Bus VT Bus VT Bus VT Bus VT
25A 25A 25A

Synchronizer 25A 25A Synchronizer Synchronizer
(1) Synchronizer Synchronizer (1) (1)
MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG
Close Close Close Close
33kV 33kV Close
line VT line VT line VT line VT line VT
line VT line VT line VT line VT line VT

25A 25A
Synchronizer 25A 25A Synchronizer 25A
Important note : (1) Synchronizer Synchronizer (1) Synchronizer
used to check Live Bus Live
line conditions. In case of MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG
manual close from BCU
only when BCU not able to Close Close Close Close Close
give directly the
GCCr N°
authorization for closing

- initiation of MX3EG is line VT line VT line VT line VT line VT
received from BCU
-if
if conditions are OK : line VT line VT line VT line VT
Breaker closing given by line VT
MX3EG 25A 25A
25A 25A Synchronizer 25A
-if
if conditions are not OK : Synchronizer Synchronizer
Synchronizer Synchronizer (1)
-Voltage rise or decrease (1)
signal sent to BCU MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG MX3EG
MX3EG
-Frequency rise or
decrease signal sent to Close Close Close Close
Close
BCU
-Signal “Synchro in
progress” sent to ICC Bus VT Bus VT Bus VT Bus VT
Bus VT
BUS 2A
Synchronizer
25A
Page 2-16
(1)Relays installed in the panels with

inputs connected but close
command not connected
BUS 1A
1st stage
(Retrip)
2nd 2nd 2nd
50/62 stage
2nd stage stage stage
Breaker trip
trip trip trip
Failure
33kV 33kV
Note : retrip is
P821
sent to the two trip
coils
Tripping of adjacent
remote end
Intertripping to
breakers through P740

bus bar protection
2nd tripping circuit
stage
trip
GCCr N°
Breaker fail Initiation:-

1. BF1 from 86BF of TIE breaker.
2. BF1 from respective BB protection.
3. BF1 from 86A and 86B of Reactor.
BUS 2A
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
Page 2-17
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
2nd stage
Note : retrip is sent trip
to the two trip coils
50/62
Breaker P821
Failure
GCCr N°
1st stage
(Retrip)
2nd
stage
trip
Intertripping Breaker fail Initiation:-

BUS 2A
remote end 1. BF1 from 86BF of adjacent breakers.
2. BF1 from 94A and 94B of adjacent
HVDC Converter 3 Ghunan L3 line breaker. Ghunan L4 HVDC Converter 2 HVDC Converter 1
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
Page 2-18

Line/Reactor breaker.
BUS 1A
33kV 33kV
Note : retrip is
sent to the two
trip coils
2nd
stage
trip Tripping of adjacent
bus bar protection
tripping circuit.
GCCr N°
50/62
Breaker
Failure P821
2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd
1.BF1 from 86BF of TIE breaker.
stage stage stage stage
2. BF1 from respective BB protection. 1st stage trip trip trip trip
3. BF1 from 94A and 94B of line. (Retrip)
4. BF1 from 86A and 86B of line.
BUS 2A
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
Page 2-19
87B1-
87B1-A
Low Impedance
differential relay Salwa L11 Reactor XL1 Salwa L12 Reactor XL2
F/O
P741
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131-07
BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
P742 P742 P742

GCCIA N°
P742 P742 P742
87B2-
87B2-A
Low Impedance
differential relay BUS 4B2
F/O
P741
differential relay
Low Impedance
87B1-A
Page 2(a)-2
Shuweihat L13 Shuweihat L14

Salwa L11 Reactor XL1 Salwa L12 Reactor XL2
87B1-
87B1-B P142
High
Impedance BUS 4A2
differential
relay
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
87B2-
87B2-B
High
Impedance
differential
relay BUS 4B2
P142
differential relay
High Impedance
87B1-B
Page 2(a)-3

To Remote end Salwa L11 Reactor XL1 Salwa L12 Reactor XL2
trip via DTT
BUS 4A2
TEE
High Impedance
differential relay P142
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
differential relay
High Impedance
T E E1
Page 2(a)-4

BUS 4A2
POR communication
scheme (1)
33kV 33kV
P443
21A/67NA
Distance Relay
DEF
Stub bus
GCCIA N°
In case line
isolator opened,
MiCOM P443 is
converted to
overcurrent
relay.
(stub bus
protection)
BUS 4B2
Stub bus
DEF
Distance Relay
21A/67NA
Page 2(a)-5

(1) POR : Permissive Over reach
(Téléaction sent for Z2 fault)
(3)
Salwa L11 Reactor XL1 Salwa L12
(single channel)
Communication
Reactor XL2
BUS 4A2
(1)
P544
Back up distance function
automatically set in operation 33kV 33kV
in case of line differential 87LB/
communication failure 21 BU
Only Zone 1 is used : 67 BU
Z1 : 70% of the line Line diff. relay
No teleaction Back up distance (1)
No reverse zone Back up overcurrent (2)
Internal VT supervision block
Power swing block
(2)
Back up directional
GCCIA N°
overcurrent function
automatically set in
operation in case of line
differential
Inverse time overcurrent
See appendix 7(a)-3
(3)
Intertrip signal via
communication channel of
MiCOM P544
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-6
Line diff. relay

50BU
21B U /
8 7 L B/
Intertripping Salwa L11 Reactor XL1 Salwa L12 Reactor XL2
remote end
(1)
BUS 4A2
27/59 P141
Over and
under
voltage
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
voltage
Over and under
27/ 59
Page 2(a)-7
(1) Tripping from function 59(over voltage)

only No tripping from function 27 (under
voltage)
BUS 4A2
87RA
High Impedance 33kV SST.
differential relay breaker Trip
Protected
P142 zone
33kV 33kV
Trip
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
differential relay
High Impedance
87R A
Page 2(a)-8

BUS 4A2
87RB
High Impedance 33kV SST
differential relay breaker Trip
P132
33kV 33kV
Trip
Protected
zone
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-9
differential relay
High Impedance
87R B
BUS 4A2
50/51R
Non directional 33kV SST
Phase O/C breaker Trip
50/51NR 33kV 33kV

Non Directional
Earth Fault
P141
Trip
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-10
Phase O/C
Non directional
50/ 51R
Earth Fault
Non Directional
50/51NR
50RN 33kV SST
BUS 4A2 Earth Fault breaker Trip
P141
Trip
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-11
Earth Fault
50R N
Note:- As per latest recommendation ( 24 July 2012), this relay was used for alarm purpose only.
BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
TEE1
High
Impedance
P142
differential
relay
remote end
Intertripping
BUS 4B2
differential relay
High Impedance
T E E1
Page 2(a)-12

BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
TEE2
Low
Impedance
P633
differential
relay
remote end
Intertripping
BUS 4B2
differential relay
Low Impedance
T E E2
Page 2(a)-13

BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
SIEMENS
SCOPE
OST+ Distance
Line diff. Z1 relay
relay
Line Dist
relay 7SD522 P443
7SA522 P544
OST+ Distance
Communication
Communication
Z1 relay
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-14
relay
Line Protn.
Shuweihat
Note:- * DEF will also trip permanent trip relay . This is applicable for the
Shuweihat OHL L13 & L14 only.
BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
GCCIA N°
32R (1) 32F (2)

Active Active
power power
relay relay
Reverse Forward
P132 P132
Alarm
BUS 4B2
Forward
Active power relay
32F
Reverse
Active power relay
32R
Page 2(a)-15
(1) 32R Export Power (from utility toward GCCIA)

Applicable for any feeder interfaced with utility
(2) 32F Import Power (from GCCIA toward utility) will trip its
own breaker and Tie Breaker. No remote trip required as
Transformer is not available.
BUS 4A2
bus VT bus VT
P841 P841*
Close 33kV Close 33kV

line VT line VT
line VT line VT line VT
79/25
P841* P841 P841*
Important note : the Autorecloser
Voltage control function is Voltage control
used to check In case of 3p Close Close Close
autoreclose sequence only
GCCIA N°
line VT
line VT
P841* P841
Close Close
bus VT
bus VT
BUS 4B2
Voltage control
Autorecloser
79/ 25
Page 2(a)-16
* These relays will get blocking signal from remote BUS duct operated relay.
BUS 4A2 Bus VT Bus VT

line VT
25A/25SC 25SC 25A/25SC

Synchronizer Synchro check Synchronizer
7VE61 7VE61 7VE61
Close 33kV Close Close

33kV
25A/25SC 25A/25SC 25A/25SC

Important note : Synchronizer Synchronizer Synchronizer
used to check Live Bus Live
7VE61 7VE61 7VE61
line conditions.
- initiation of 7VE611 is
received from BCU. For Close Close Close
GCCIA N°
Manual closing separate

Input from LCC will initiate
line VT line VT Bus VT
7VE611 relay.
-if
if conditions are OK :
Breaker closing given by line VT
7VE61 line VT Bus VT
-if
if conditions are not OK :
25A/25SC 25A/25SC
Synchronizer Synchronizer 25SC
-Voltage rise or decrease
7VE61 Synchro check
signal sent to BCU 7VE61
-Frequency rise or 7VE61
decrease signal sent to Close Close
BCU
-Signal “Synchro in Clos
progress” sent to ICC Bus VT Bus VT e
line VT
-This process is same for
manual as well as remote BUS 4B2
closing.
Page 2(a)-17
Synchronizer
25A
Intertripping to
remote end BUS 4A2
1st stage
(Retrip)
2nd 2nd
50/62 stage stage
Breaker trip trip
2nd 33kV 33kV
Failure stage
Note : retrip is trip
sent to the two trip P841
coils
Tripping of adjacent
bus bar protection
tripping circuit . 2nd stage
trip
GCCIA N°
2nd
stage
trip
1. BF1 from 86BF of TIE breaker.
2. BF1 from respective BB protection.
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-18
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
BUS 4A2
Intertripping 33kV 33kV

remote end 2nd stage
Note : retrip is sent trip
to the two trip coils
50/62
Breaker P841
Failure
1st stage
GCCIA N°
(Retrip)

1. BF1 from 86BF of adjacent breakers.
2. BF1 from 94A and 94B of adjacent line
breaker.
Line/Reactor breaker.
2nd
stage
trip
BUS 4B2
Page 2(a)-19
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
BUS 4A2
33kV 33kV
Note : retrip is
sent to the two
trip coils

1.BF1 from 86BF of TIE breaker.
2nd Tripping of adjacent
2. BF1 from respective BB protection. breakers through P740
stage
3. BF1 from 94A and 94B of line. trip bus bar protection
tripping circuit .
GCCIA N°
50/62
Breaker
Failure 2nd
P841 stage
trip
2nd 2nd
stage stage
1st stage trip trip
(Retrip)
BUS 4B2
Intertripping
remote end
Page 2(a)-20
Failure
Breaker
50/ 62
Zone 1 setting criteria
3) Distance protection – Zones settings Phase I

In the following the principle of coordination of the zones of the distance relay will be described
The distance relay (MiCOM P443) is used as a main 2 protection in parallel with the line Main 1 differential relays (MiCOM P543)
Operating characteristic is quadrilateral.
The relay is programmed with 3 forward zones (Z1, Z2, Z3 and one reverse zone (Z4)
3-1) Zone 1
3-1-1) Aim of Zone 1

X
The zone 1 is aimed to protect the first section of the feeder independently of the
communication scheme;
Communication scheme is Permissive Overreach :
Aided trip signal is sent to the remote end if the fault is seen in zone 2
Zone 1 underreach
Tripping occurs if fault :
in Zone1
in Zone 2 and aided trip signal received
in Zone 2 trip after T2 R
in Zone 3 trip after T3
In Zone 4 trip after T4
3-1-2) Fundamental requirements

The following requirement must be, in any situation, fulfilled.
The Zone 1 is not allowed to overreach the line
See example below.
GHUNAN SALWA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI
With above zone 1 setting at Al FADHILI, a fault as shown would make simultaneous zone 1 trip at Ghunan
and Al Fadhili instead of Gunhan only.
This is not acceptable because, in case of no parallel line operation, the interconnection between Al Zour
and Al Jasra would be lost without any reason.
GHUNAN DOHA
SALWA
Al FADHILI SOUTH
With above zones settings, a fault as shown would make trip at Ghunan only .
The interconnection between Al Zour and Al Jasra will not be lost.
Zone 1 is set at 70% of the protected line so that the increase of reach in case of parallel line open
and earthed at each end will not make overreach the line (see § 3-1-3-1-2)

Zone 1 setting criteria (Cont.)
3-1-3) Influencing factors on zone 1 reach
3-1-3-1) Influence of the parallel line
3-1-3-1-1) Mutual coupling

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 1 reach for an
earth fault will be affected by the mutual coupling effect between the
two lines.
However it must be considered that :
1) The zone 1 cannot overreach the line as this effect occurs only for
faults on the line. As soon as the fault is further the remote bus, the
mutual coupling has no more influence.
2) The zone 1 of the distance relay at one end may be reduced, but
the zone 1 of the distance relay at the other end will be increased, so
that the overlapping will remain (fast fault clearing time for middle
section of the line
As a result to the above considerations, no setting adjustment of zone

1 is required to cope with the influence of mutual coupling.
Note : the zero sequence current from the adjacent line is connected
to an analog input of the MiCOM P443 distance relay. This input is not
taken into account in the zone measurement of the relay for
simplification reasons (as showed above this is not necessary)
3-1-3-1-2) Operation with the parallel line open and earthed
When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose,
the zone 1 reach will increase and may overreach the line.
This means that a fault on the adjacent line but close to the busbar could
make, under these maintenance conditions, an undesired zone 1
tripping of the distance relay.
A first possibility would have been as follow : If the condition (parallel line opened and earthed for maintenance purpose) would
stay during a long period of time (which is normally unexpected), Zone 1 reach setting of distance relays at both ends should be
temporarily reduced from 80% to 70% during this period.
This could be made using the second setting group (setting group 2) so that the setting change can be easily performed from the
relay front panel.
It should be noted that automatic setting change is not possible, as the earthing can be made via earthing clamps.
Note that the temporary setting should not be reduced less than 65% in order to guarantee the overreach of the zone 1 of the two
distance relays.
A second possibility is to use a setting of 70% of the line instead of typical value 80% in order to avoid to change the setting.
This value is adopted by experience by some utilities for 400kV parallel line applications in order to avoid any zone 1 overreach.
1
Referring to the bibliography given in § 7, the overreach factor is :
2
ZM0
1-
ZL0 2
1
Typical value for 400kV OHL is : = 1,36
1 - 0,266
With a setting of 70%, the maximal reach can therefore be 70% x 1,36 = 95% which means that the zone 1 will not overreach the
line.

Nota : because the CT used by the distance protection are located “external” to the zone between the line earthing switches or
earthing clamps, the zero sequence mutual current connection will not improve the zones reach. So, the mutual compensation of
the parallel line will be disabled in the distance relay.
line earthing switch or earthing clamp
No current is seen by the parallel line

current transformers because the
location of the earthing switch or
earthing clamp versus the CT.
3-1-3-1-3) Reduction of the reach because current share

Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current from end A, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be
reduced.
The reduction of the reach because current share is no concern for the zone 1 because only reaches of zones after the remote
bus are influenced (i.e. zone 2 and zone 3).
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
B
two lines in
parallel

3-1-3-1-4) Increase of the reach because adjacent line operated in parallel

Because the lines beyond the remote bus are operated in parallel, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be
increased.
The increase of the reach because adjacent line operated in parallel is no concern for the zone 1 because only reaches of zones
after the next to the remote bus are influenced (i.e. zone 3 only).
Operation with
B
one line
Operation with
two lines in
parallel
3-1-3-2) Infeed at the remote busbar

The infeed at the remote busbar is no concern for the zone 1 because only reaches of zones after the remote bus are influenced
(i.e. zone 2 and zone 3).
3-1-3) Zone 1 time setting

No time delay is associated with Zone 1 as no coordination is required. (Zone 1 always underreach the line)

3-2) Zone 2
X
3-2-1) Aim of Zone 2

The zone 2 is aimed to trip in Permissive Overreach mode (POR) in cooperation with the zone 2
of remote distance relay :
Zone 1 underreach
in Zone1 R
3-2-2) Fundamental requirements

The two following requirements must be, in any situation, fulfilled.
3-2-2-1) Fundamental requirement N°1
The Zone 2 reach should be overreaching the line

in any condition
This is necessary for the correct operation of the POR scheme
3-2-2-2) Fundamental requirement N°2
The Zone 2 should not overreach the zone 1 of the adjacent line
GHUNAN SALWA
With above zones settings, a fault as shown which could not be cleared by the protective relays at Salwa via POR would make
simultaneous trip at station Ghunan and Salwa.
This is not acceptable ( the interconnection between Al Zour and Al Jasra would be lost)
GHUNAN SALWA
Correct coordination is shown above.
Zone 2 is set at 125% of the protected line in order to guarantee the overreach requirement
(see § 3-2-3-1-3).
In case of zone 2 overlapping the zone 2 of adjacent line distance protection (long line
followed by short line for example), the only way to ensure selectivity is to increase the time
delay of the zone2.
The technical specification gives the priority to fast action of zone 2 for remote end fault in
case of signaling failure, also the time grading is not acceptable and the overlapping must be
accepted as a compromise.

3-2-3) Influencing factors on zone 2 reach
3-2-3-1) Operation with a parallel line

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 2 reach for
an earth fault will be affected (reduced or increased) by the mutual
coupling effect between the two lines.
If no precaution is taken, there is a risk than the zone 2 may not
overreach the line anymore. In case of fault at the remote end the
distance relay would not detect the fault in zone 2 and therefore will
not clear the fault when Carrier (aided trip signal) received.
The underreach effect is by experience considered to make a reach

reduction of a factor of 0,88 maximum.
In order to guarantee the overreach, zone 2 is set at 125% of the

protected line. (125%x0.88=110%)

When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose, the zone 1 and zone2 reach will increase.
if the zone 2 is set too long, the zone 2 may overreach the zone 1 of the adjacent shortest line which would mean loss of coordination.
In order to cope with this, zone 2 setting should not be more than 125% of the protected line.
Note that the overlapping between zone 2 and zone 1 of the adjacent line can make a coordination a problem only in case of no
operation of the line differential relay and no operation of the transfer trip signaling system. However, although the probability is quite
low, coordination has to be done.


Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current from end A, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be reduced.
This reduction of the reach because fault current shared between the two lines will make a reduction of the reach beyond the remote
bus. (the reach from the remote bus to the limit of zone 2 will be reduced by a factor of 0,5)
This is no influence for the Permissive Overreach scheme as this phenomena cannot make a zone 2 underreach. (this phenomena has
an influence only for faults beyond the remote busbar)
Operation with B
one line
Operation with B
two lines in
parallel

increased.
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
two lines in
parallel


In case of infeed at the remote bus, the zone 2 reach will be reduced.
This is no influence for the Permissive Overreach scheme operation as this phenomena cannot make a zone 2 underreach the line.
(this phenomena has an influence only for faults beyond the remote busbar)
3-2-4) Zone 2 time setting
The zone 2 time delay must be coordinated with the breaker failure relay timer.
The situation to be considered is a fault on the remote busbar as described below. The breaker failure will clear the fault at the
remote station in 300ms. (see chapter 4 : local fault clearing time 300ms)
Therefore Zone 2 time setting when the remote bus is equipped with circuit breaker failure relay should be set at 400msec
After 300ms, the

distance relay do not
see the fault
The distance relay see
the fault in zone 2
The busbar protection

gives tripping orders
This breaker
fails to open
Breaker failure
Bus Bar Diff
After 300ms the local backup

breakers are open

Zone 3 forward setting criteria
3-3) Zone 3 forward

X
3-3-1) Aim of Zone 3 forward
3-3-1-1)
The zone 3 forward is aimed to provide a back up for remote fault.
Note that zone 3 forward will operate under one of the very improbable following situations :
- No operation of both distance relay and line differential relay (note that in case of communication
R
failure, back up distance and phase overcurrent function are activated in line differential relay
or
- No operation of the line circuit breaker together with no operation of the breaker failure relay
or
-No operation of the line circuit breaker followed by correct operation of the breaker failure system but
no operation of the back up breaker tripped by the breaker failure relay
Two main setting philosophy may be applied for zone 3 forward setting.
3-3-1-2) Setting Philosophy #1

Zone 3 forward is set in order to provide a back up of the remote feeder under all circumstances
This means that the reach of zone 3 forward has to be considerably increased in order to take into account the reduction of reach due
to parallel line and infeed at the remote bus.
The result is a very long reach of zone 3 forward, with overreaching the 400kV/245kV autotransformers and the 245kV/66kV power
transformers at Al Zour or Al Jasra or Doha South Super.
The risk of such a zone 3 forward setting philosophy is an undesired trip of a 400kV line for a fault on 66kV network at Al Zour, Al Jasra
or Doha South
Please see the reach diagram made for Doha South to Salwa distance protection on the following page.
This diagram has been established with the assumption that the reduction of the reach beyond Salwa busbar is 1/3 as an example.
However this reduction may vary considerably depending of the infeed current in respect to the current seen by the distance relay at
Doha South. This diagram is a typical example. However this setting philosophy #1 is not adopted.
3-3-1-3) Setting Philosophy #2

Zone 3 forward reach is limited in order to avoid any undesired tripping for a remote fault
Therefore Zone 3 forward reach is set so that zone 3 cannot operate for a fault on 245kV under no circumstances.
Setting philosophy is described in § 3-3-1-4 below
This means that the reach may not cover the entire adjacent under some circumstances as described in the example page 3-14 and
3-15
In order to limit the risk of 400kV interconnection trip for a 66kV or 225kV fault, and considering the low probability of the failure
described in 3-3-1-1), the setting philosophy 2 has been adopted.
3-3-1-4) Adopted philosophy ( #2 )
Zone 3 forward is set at the minimum value between :

- 120% of [Protected line impedance + longest adjacent line impedance].
- Protected line impedance + 80% of the 3 autotransformers in parallel at the remote substation (if
autotransformers at the remote substation)
- Protected line impedance + equivalent impedance of shortest adjacent lines operated in parallel
+ 80% of the 3 autotransformers in parallel at the substation at the end of the shortest adjacent
line (if no autotransformers at the remote substation)

Zone 3 forward setting criteria (Cont.)
3-3-2) Influencing factors on zone 3 forward reach
3-3-2-1) Operation with a parallel line

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 3 forward
reach for an earth fault will be affected (reduced or increased) by
the mutual coupling effect between the two lines.
However the zone 3 forward setting is not concerned by this
phenomena as the zone 3 forward is not aimed to protect faults on
the line but faults on adjacent lines.

When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose, the zone 3 forward reach will increase and the coordination
with the zone 2 of the adjacent line can be lost.
However this is not a concern for zone 3 forward setting because the loss of coordination can be accepted for zone 3 forward.


Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be reduced.
bus. (the reach from the remote bus to the limit of zone 3 forward will be reduced by a factor of 0,5)
However, as previously mentioned, this has to be accepted as a compromise.
Operation with B
one line
Operation with B
two lines in
parallel

increased.
after the next to the remote bus are influenced (i.e. zone 3 forward only).
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
two lines in
parallel


In case of infeed at the remote bus, the zone 3 forward reach will be reduced.
The 3 following pages describe the influence of parallel line operation and infeed
Note that, depending of the situation, zone 3 forward reach is either too short to provide a backup for remote fault or too long to
guarantee that no operation can occur for 230kV or 275kV faults.
Zone 3 forward setting criteria is a compromise which cannot cope ideally with all situations

Note : The sketch indicates the

impedances (same scale used for line
and transformer impedances)
80%
AL JASRA
Zone 3 forward reach when Doha South to

Salwa line is not operated in parallel and
Salwa to Gunhan line is not operated in
parallel and there is no infeed at Salwa
GUNHAN
SALWA
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH


AL JASRA
Zone 3 forward reach is reduced because

GUNHAN
the Salwa-Gunhan line is operated in parallel
SALWA
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH


AL JASRA
GUNHAN

and because the infeed at Gunhan
SALWA
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH

3-3-3) Zone 3 forward time setting

The zone 3 forward time delay must be coordinated with the Zone 2 time delay of the adjacent distance relay.
Zone 3 forward time delay is set at 800msec

Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) setting criteria
3-4) Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse)

3-4-1) Aim of Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse)
The zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) is aimed to provide a back up for busbar protection.
Note that zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) do not have to be coordinated with the forward zones of the remote X
distance relay as long as the Permissive Overreach scheme is used.
Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) is set at 20% of the protected (forward) line
3-4-2) Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) time setting

Note that zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) do not have to be coordinated with the forward zones of the remote
zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) time delay is set at 800msec = Zone 3 forward time delay

Resistive reach
3-5) Resistive Reach

The resistive reach should not be set too high in order to avoid any tripping in case of high load (avoid load encroachment)
X
The minimum impedance is given by the following assumptions
Maximal load through the line : 1200MW with a voltage depressed at 0,9 Vn and
power factor 0,8
1200MW
I max = = 2400 A R
0,9 x 400kV x √3 x 0,8
Minimum single phase voltage

Z Load mini (Ohm) =
Maximum phase current
0,9 x 400kV
Z Load mini (Ohm) = √3 = 86 Ohms (primary value)
2400 A
In case of the parallel line is tripped, the load transfer will make current increase. (x 2) and therefore Load impedance decrease
(factor 2)
86 Ohms = 43 Ohms (primary value)
Z Load mini (Ohm) =
2
Resistive reach is set at 40 Ohms phase (Primary value)
The Relay would not be capable to detect fault resistance higher than 40 Ohms
In case of phase to earth fault, the resistive reach must be higher than the tower
foot resistance + the arc resistance.
We assume a foot tower resistance of 10 Ohms
C. Warrington established an empirical formula which gives the arc

resistance depending the arc length and the arc current :
28710 x L arc (m)
R arc (Ohms) =
I arc current 1,4
Let us assume a minimum fault current of 1000A
For such a current, the arc resistance would be :

28710 x 6,3
R arc (Ohms) = = 1,8 Ohms
1,4
1000A
The total fault resistance is equal to 11,8 Ohms which is much lower than 40
Ohms
Any fault will be detected with the 40 Ohms setting with a large safety margin

DEF
3-6) Directional Earth Fault with signaling

In case of high resistance fault (higher than the resistive reach of the distance protection), the distance function cannot operate
and must be completed by Directional Earth Fault with directional comparison scheme
X
This function uses permissive overreach transfer trip (POR) : Resistive fault outside
distance characteristic
Tripping logic = Fault forward + Signal from remote end received
Signal send logic = Fault forward
Phase selection is carried out by the DEF protection, also one pole tripping is R
selected.
Setting of directional earth fault threshold :
Threshold :
The threshold is set to 20% of rated CT primary current as permanent residual current may exist due to parallel lines.
Directional polarization :
Usually, the directional reference (polarizing signal) for DEF is the residual voltage. Because of zero sequence mutual coupling
between the parallel line, use of residual voltage is problematic and negative sequence polarization must be used.
3-7) Back up directional earth fault

This function is used as ultimate back up of the DEF for high resistance fault in case of signaling failure.
Threshold :
The threshold must be set forward to see fault on the line.
Time delay (TMS) :

An Inverse Definite Time Delay must be used (Normal inverse from IEC 60255 as required in section 4.510 of technical specifications
[1]).
Criteria #1
To ensure coordination with remote end protection, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) must be set so that the tripping time for a remote
fault is longer than the maximum fault clearing time of the adjacent feeder.
> 1,5s
67N
Adopted criteria #1 for TMS setting :

21
A fault at remote bus is cleared in >1,5s
Criteria #2
To prevent incorrect 3 pole tripping by 67N, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) must be set so that the tripping time for a close fault is
longer than the fault clearing time by Main 1 and Main 2 protections.

67N
A close fault is cleared in > 0,5s
> 0,5s
21

Power Swing Blocking
3-8) Power swing blocking logic
A power swing may cause the impedance presented to the distance relay to move from the normal load area into the tripping
characteristic (see following drawing).
The MiCOM P443 relays do not use the conventional impedance band method which consist in measuring the
the apparent impedance speed of entry into the start-up characteristic (∆R & ∆X) as a power swing is slower than in the case of a
fault.
conventional impedance band method
The MiCOM P443 relays use advanced technique which does not requires any start up impedance characteristics to be set.
The detection technique uses superimposed current (∆I) as follow :
The Power Swing Blocking is used to block all the zones

The protection does not use any impedance or current threshold setting

OUT of STEP (OOS)
3(a)-9) OUT of STEP protection
Protective relays are prone to respond to stable or unstable power swings and cause unwanted tripping of
transmission lines or other power system elements.
The philosophy of out-of-step relaying is simple and straightforward: avoid tripping of any power system element
during stable swings. Protect the power system during unstable or out-of-step conditions. When two areas of a
power system, or two interconnected systems, lose synchronism, the areas must be separated from each other
quickly and automatically in order to avoid equipment damage and shutdown of major portions of the power system.
Out-of-step protection functions detect stable power swings and out-of-step conditions by using the fact that the
voltage/current variation during a power swing is gradual while it is virtually a step change during a fault.
Actual implementation of measuring the impedance rate of change is normally performed through the use of two
impedance measurement elements together with a timing device. If the measured impedance stays between the
two impedance measurement elements for a predetermined time, then an OOS is declared and an out of-step
blocking signal is issued to block the distance relay element operation. If it crosses the two Impedance loop then trip
is generated.
In GCCIA trip is only for Utilities experiencing the Swing.
Load
To guarantee that there is enough time to carry out blocking of the distance elements after an OOS is detected, the
inner impedance measurement element of the OOS detection logic must be placed outside the largest distance
protection region that is to be blocked. The outer impedance measurement element for the OOS detection has to
be placed away from the load region to prevent inadvertent OSB logic operation caused by heavy loads.
Setting of reactance lines Z5 and Z6 will depend on how far from the relay location the power
oscillations are to be detected. Normally, there is only one point where the system is to be initially split
and that point will be determined by system studies.

To existing
G1D Power station
(Kuwait)
OUT of STEP protection is enabled in

the below mentioned locations
Al ZOUR
L1 L2
292km
OHL
Al Fadhili to Al Zour line
Al FADHILI
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
HVDC
To existing
Al FADHILI
(Saudi Arabia)
L3 L4
115km
OHL
GHUNAN Al JASRA
To existing
Al Jasra
(Bahrein)
OHL RAQ UGC

40km L9 43km
L10
Ghunan to Salwa line L5 L6
235km
Ghunan to Al Jasra line

OHL
SALWA
OHL
115km
L11
L12
SILAA L7 L8
97km
OHL
DOHA SOUTH
To Future To existing
SCHUWEHAT DOHA SOUTH SUPER
(United Arab Emirates) (Quatar)

VT Fuse Failure
3-10) VT Fuse failure

Blocking logic :
Loss of one or two phase voltage :

The VT failure blocking operates on detection of negative phase sequence voltage in
absence of negative phase sequence current.
Loss of all 3 phase on load condition :

The VT failure blocking operates on absence of 3 phase voltage without a
corresponding change in any of the phase current signals.
Loss of all 3 phase upon line energization :

The VT failure blocking operates on absence of 3 phase voltage without detecting an
overcurrent element (the overcurrent element must be set higher than the load,
charging or transformer inrush current).
This overcurrent is used to prevent blocking of the distance protection in case of
closing onto a 3 phase fault.
Unblocking logic :
Two overcurrent thresholds are used to override VT failure blocking in event of a fault occurring on the system
which could trigger the blocking logic :
- A three phase overcurrent element : I>
- A negative phase sequence element : I2>
These thresholds must be set in order to detect 3 phase and 2 phase fault conditions and to not operate for
normal loading condition.
Setting will be calculated on each relay setting calculation note.
The blocking will be latched after a settable time delay.

The reset of the blocking is made automatically after restoration of the 3 phase voltage (voltage detector level)

3-11) Application example : Al Zour to Al Fadhili feeder
In the following, the illustration of the zones settings criteria to the Al Zour – Al Fadhili feeder is given.
Calculation of zone reach is done according to the zone philosophy settings : Al ZOUR
OHL 292km
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
OHL 115km
Al
GHUNAN JASRA
OHL 235km RAQ
SALWA
OHL 40km UGC 43km
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 Rev. 07 GCCr N° GCCIA-1-A/AJR-31-D-131 00 Page 3-24

Zone 4 (reverse) reach
Set at 20% of reverse line (aimed to give
a back for busbar faults)
Al ZOUR
Al ZOUR
OHL 292km
The coordination between
Zone 1 reach zone 2 and 3 and the back to
back protections, including
Set at 70% of Al Zour-Al Fadhili line 50/51 is demonstrated in the
(POR scheme) substations settings
calculation notes
Al FADHILI
Feeders protected by
differential relays
Do not have to be
Al FADHILI considered for
coordination
Back to Back
Zone 2 reach
Set at 125% of Al Zour-Al Fadhili line
Small risk of zone 2

GHUNAN overlapping but should
OHL 115km
not occur due to the

infeed at Al Fadhili
Zone 3 reach =
Al
Set at 120% of (Al Zour - Al Fadhili line
GHUNAN JASRA
impedance + Al Fadhili – Ghunan line
impedance)
OHL 235km RAQ
SALWA
OHL 40km UGC 43km

Al ZOUR
Al ZOUR
OHL 292km
Zone 2 time setting
The zone 2 time setting must be
Breaker coordinated with the Breaker failure time
failure setting at Ghunan
time zone 2 time setting is 400ms Al FADHILI
setting
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
Zone 3 time setting

GHUNAN coordinated with the zone 2 of the
OHL 115km
distance relay of the adjacent line
zone 3 time setting is 800ms
Al
GHUNAN JASRA
OHL 235km RAQ
SALWA
OHL 40km UGC 43km

Al FADHILI
3-12) Application example : Al Fadhili- Gunhan feeder

In the following, the illustration of the zones settings criteria to the Al Fadhili - Gunhan feeder is given
Back to Back
OHL 115km
GHUNAN Al JASRA
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
750MVA
220kV
150MVA
OHL 235km
66kV
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI

Set at 20% of the reverse line (aimed to
give a back for busbar faults)
Back to Back
Al FADHILI
time
Zone 1 reach
OHL 115km
Set at 70% of Al fadhili-Ghunan line
(POR scheme)
GHUNAN Al JASRA
GHUNAN
RAQ
Zone 2 reach
OHL 40km UGC 43km
Set at 125% of Al Fadhili-Ghunan line
750MVA
220kV
150MVA
OHL 235km
66kV
Zone 3 reach
Set at (Al Fadhili - line impedance +

Ghunan - Al Jasra line impedance in
parallel + 80% of Al Jasra global
transformer impedance)
SALWA
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
DOHA
SOUTH
SILAA SILAA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI
Back to Back
Al FADHILI
time
Zone 2 time setting
OHL 115km
coordinated with the Breaker failure time
setting at Ghunan
GHUNAN Al JASRA
GHUNAN
Breaker RAQ
failure
time
setting at Zone 3 time setting OHL 40km UGC 43km
Ghunan
The zone 3 time setting must be 750MVA
coordinated with the zone 2 of the
distance relay of the adjacent line 220kV
zone 3 time setting is 800ms 150MVA

OHL 235km
66kV
SALWA
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI
3-13) Application example : Gunhan – Al Jasra feeder

In the following, the illustration of the zones settings criteria to the Gunhan-Al Jasra feeder is given
Back to Back
Note that because there is no circuit breaker at RAQ, the zone 2 is set in order to cover the total line impedance (OHL +
UGC impedance).
The benefit is to clear a fault on the UGC in zone 2 time clearance in case of full failure of the differential communication
channels (loss of the 2 UGC differential protections).
In addition, in case of full failure of the differential communication channels, we propose to set the back up distance
protection of the differential at Gunhan and Al Jasra as follow :
OHL 115km
-Z1 set to reach 70% of the total line impedance in order to cover the complete UGC impedance
-Z2 set to reach 125% of the total line impedance to clear fault on terminal end of the line.
Zone 3 reach is set in order to not overlap the 3 autotransformer in parallel. The result is that Z3 reach is close to Z2
reach. Also we propose to disable the zone3. Al JASRA
GHUNAN
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
750MVA
220kV
150MVA
OHL 235km
66kV
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI
Back to Back
Zone 4 reverse reach
OHL 115km
Set at 20% of the reverse line
GHUNAN Al JASRA
GHUNAN
Zone 1 reach
Set at 70% of Ghunan-RAQ line
(POR Scheme)
RAQ
Zone 2 reach RAQ
AL JASRA Set at 125% of Ghunan-Al Jasra line

to cover the total line impedance in OHL 40km UGC 43km
case of full failure of differential
protections which protect the UGC. 750MVA
220kV
Zone 3 reach 150MVA

OHL 235km
66kV
Set at maximum line impedance + 80%

of autotransformer impedance (3
autotransformer in parallel) at Al Jasra.
Note : as zone 2 and zone 3 reach are
quite similar, Z3 is disabled.
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

Al FADHILI
Back to Back
Zone 2 time setting
OHL 115km
setting at Al Jasra
GHUNAN Al JASRA
GHUNAN
RAQ
RAQ
AL JASRA
OHL 40km UGC 43km
750MVA
220kV
220kV
150MVA
OHL 235km
66kV
Breaker
failure time
setting at Al
Jasra
SALWA
OHL 115km
OHL 97km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

To Al FADHILI
GHUNAN
3-14) Application example : Ghunan - Salwa feeder

In the following, the illustration of the zones settings criteria to the Gunhan- Salwa feeder is given
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
OHL 235km
SALWA
OHL 102km
OHL 96.21km
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

OHL 122.71km
To DOHA SOUTH SUPER (MEW)
SHUWEHAT

To Al FADHILI
GHUNAN
Set at 20% of reverse line
GHUNAN
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
Zone 1 reach
OHL 235km
Set at 70% of Ghunan-Salwa line
(POR scheme)
SALWA
Zone 2 reach
SALWA Set at 125% of Ghunan-Salwa line
OHL 102km
OHL 96.21km
overlapping but should
infeed at Al Fadhili SILAA DOHA SOUTH
SILLA
DOHA
SOUTH
Zone 3 reach
OHL 122.71km
Set at Ghunan – SALWA line

impedance + Next parallel line
Impedance (SALWA to Doha South)+
80% of global transformer To DOHA SOUTH SUPER (MEW)
impedance at Doha South
SHUWEHAT

To Al FADHILI
GUNHAN to SALWA feeder (cont.)
GHUNAN
Set at 20% of reverse line
GHUNAN
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
Zone 1 reach
OHL 235km
Set at 70% of Ghunan-Salwa line
(POR scheme)
SALWA
Zone 2 reach
SALWA Set at 125% of Ghunan-Salwa line
OHL 102km
OHL 96.21km
Zone 3 reach
SILLA
DOHA SOUTH
Set at Ghunan – Doha South line

OHL 122.71km
impedance + 80% of global

transformer impedance at Doha
South
SHUWEHAT

To Al FADHILI
GUNHAN to SALWA feeder (cont.)
GHUNAN
GHUNAN
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
OHL 235km
SALWA
Zone 2 timing
coordinated with the Breaker failure
SALWA time setting at Ghunan
OHL 102km
OHL 96.21km
Zone 3 timing
SILLA
DOHA SOUTH

OHL 122.71km

distance relay of the adjacent line
SHUWEHAT

3(a) Distance protection – Zones settings (Phase III)

In the following the principle of coordination of the zones of the distance relay will be described
The distance relay (MiCOM P443) is used as GROUP ‘A’ protection in parallel with the line GROUP ‘B’ differential relays (MiCOM
P544)
Operating characteristic is quadrilateral.
The relay is programmed with 3 forward zones (Z1, Z2, Z3 and one reverse zone (Z4).
3(a)-1) Zone 1
3(a)-1-1) Aim of Zone 1

X
The zone 1 is aimed to protect the first section of the feeder independently of the
communication scheme;
Communication scheme is Permissive Overreach :
Zone 1 underreach .
in Zone1
in Zone 2 trip after T2 R
3(a)-1-2) Fundamental requirements

The following requirement must be, in any situation, fulfilled.
The Zone 1 is not allowed to overreach the line
See example below.
GHUNAN
SILLA SALWA DOHA SOUTH
With above zone 1 setting at SILLA, a fault as shown would make simultaneous zone 1 trip at SALWA and
SILLA instead of SILLA only.
This is not acceptable because, in case of no parallel line operation, the interconnection between SALWA
and SHUWEIHAT would be lost without any reason.
GHUNAN
SILLA
DOHA
SALWA SOUTH
With above zones settings, a fault as shown would make trip at SALWA only .
The interconnection between SILLA and SHUWEIHAT will not be lost.
Zone 1 is set at 70% of the protected line so that the increase of reach in case of parallel line open
and earthed at each end will not make overreach the line (see § 3(a)-1-3-1-2)
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 07 GCCr N° Page 3(a)-1

3(a)-1-3) Influencing factors on zone 1 reach
3(a)-1-3-1) Influence of the parallel line
3(a)-1-3-1-1) Mutual coupling

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 1 reach for an
earth fault will be affected by the mutual coupling effect between the
two lines.
However it must be considered that :
1) The zone 1 cannot overreach the line as this effect occurs only for
faults on the line. As soon as the fault is further the remote bus, the
mutual coupling has no more influence.
2) The zone 1 of the distance relay at one end may be reduced, but
the zone 1 of the distance relay at the other end will be increased, so
that the overlapping will remain (fast fault clearing time for middle
section of the line
As a result to the above considerations, no setting adjustment of zone

1 is required to cope with the influence of mutual coupling.
Note : the zero sequence current from the adjacent line is connected
to an analog input of the MiCOM P443 distance relay. This input is not
taken into account in the zone measurement of the relay for
simplification reasons (as showed above this is not necessary)
3(a)-1-3-1-2) Operation with the parallel line open and

earthed
When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose,
the zone 1 reach will increase and may overreach the line.
This means that a fault on the adjacent line but close to the busbar could
make, under these maintenance conditions, an undesired zone 1
tripping of the distance relay.
A first possibility would have been as follow : If the condition (parallel line opened and earthed for maintenance purpose) would
stay during a long period of time (which is normally unexpected), Zone 1 reach setting of distance relays at both ends should be
temporarily reduced from 80% to 70% during this period.
This could be made using the second setting group (setting group 2) so that the setting change can be easily performed from the
relay front panel.
It should be noted that automatic setting change is not possible, as the earthing can be made via earthing clamps.
Note that the temporary setting should not be reduced less than 65% in order to guarantee the overreach of the zone 1 of the two
distance relays.
A second possibility is to use a setting of 70% of the line instead of typical value 80% in order to avoid to change the setting.
This value is adopted by experience by some utilities for 400kV parallel line applications in order to avoid any zone 1 overreach.
1
Referring to the bibliography given in § 7, the overreach factor is :
2
ZM0
1-
ZL0 2
1
Typical value for 400kV OHL is : = 1,36
1 - 0,266
With a setting of 70%, the maximal reach can therefore be 70% x 1,36 = 95% which means that the zone 1 will not overreach the
line.

Note : because the CT used by the distance protection are located “external” to the zone between the line earthing switches or
earthing clamps, the zero sequence mutual current connection will not improve the zones reach. So, the mutual compensation of
the parallel line will be disabled in the distance relay.
line earthing switch or earthing clamp
No current is seen by the parallel line

current transformers because the
location of the earthing switch or
earthing clamp versus the CT.
3(a)-1-3-1-3) Reduction of the reach because current share

Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current from end A, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be
reduced.
The reduction of the reach because current share is no concern for the zone 1 because only reaches of zones after the remote
bus are influenced (i.e. zone 2 and zone 3).
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
B
two lines in
parallel

3(a)-1-3-1-4) Increase of the reach because adjacent line operated in parallel

increased.
Operation with
B
one line
Operation with
two lines in
parallel
3(a)-1-3-2) Infeed at the remote busbar

The infeed at the remote busbar is no concern for the zone 1 because only reaches of zones after the remote bus are influenced
(i.e. zone 2 and zone 3).
3(a)-1-3) Zone 1 time setting

No time delay is associated with Zone 1 as no coordination is required. (Zone 1 always underreach the line)

3(a)-2) Zone 2
X
3(a)-2-1) Aim of Zone 2

The zone 2 is aimed to trip in Permissive Overreach mode (POR) in cooperation with the zone 2
of remote distance relay :
Zone 1 underreach
in Zone1 R
3(a)-2-2) Fundamental requirements

The two following requirements must be, in any situation, fulfilled.
3(a)-2-2-1) Fundamental requirement N°1
The Zone 2 reach should be overreaching the line

in any condition
This is necessary for the correct operation of the POR scheme
3(a)-2-2-2) Fundamental requirement N°2
The Zone 2 should not overreach the zone 1 of the adjacent line
SILLA SALWA
With above zones settings, a fault as shown which could not be cleared by the protective relays at Salwa via POR would make
simultaneous trip at station SILLA and Salwa.
This is not acceptable ( the interconnection between SILLA and GCCIA would be lost)
SILLA SALWA
Correct coordination is shown above.
Zone 2 is set at 125% of the protected line in order to guarantee the overreach requirement
(see § 3(a)-2-3-1-3).
In case of zone 2 overlapping the zone 2 of adjacent line distance protection (long line
followed by short line for example), the only way to ensure selectivity is to increase the time
delay of the zone2.
The technical specification gives the priority to fast action of zone 2 for remote end fault in
case of signaling failure, also the time grading is not acceptable and the overlapping must be
accepted as a compromise.

3(a)-2-3) Influencing factors on zone 2 reach
3(a)-2-3-1) Operation with a parallel line

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 2 reach for
an earth fault will be affected (reduced or increased) by the mutual
coupling effect between the two lines.
If no precaution is taken, there is a risk than the zone 2 may not
overreach the line anymore. In case of fault at the remote end the
distance relay would not detect the fault in zone 2 and therefore will
not clear the fault when Carrier (aided trip signal) received.
The underreach effect is by experience considered to make a reach

reduction of a factor of 0,88 maximum.
In order to guarantee the overreach, zone 2 is set at 125% of the

protected line. (125%x0.88=110%)
3(a)-2-3-1-2) Operation with the parallel line open and earthed

When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose, the zone 1 and zone2 reach will increase.
if the zone 2 is set too long, the zone 2 may overreach the zone 1 of the adjacent shortest line which would mean loss of coordination.
In order to cope with this, zone 2 setting should not be more than 125% of the protected line.
Note that the overlapping between zone 2 and zone 1 of the adjacent line can make a coordination a problem only in case of no
operation of the line differential relay and no operation of the transfer trip signaling system. However, although the probability is quite
low, coordination has to be done.


Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current from end A, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be reduced.
bus. (the reach from the remote bus to the limit of zone 2 will be reduced by a factor of 0,5)
This is no influence for the Permissive Overreach scheme as this phenomena cannot make a zone 2 underreach. (this phenomena has
an influence only for faults beyond the remote busbar)
Operation with B
one line
Operation with B
two lines in
parallel

increased.
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
two lines in
parallel


In case of infeed at the remote bus, the zone 2 reach will be reduced.
This is no influence for the Permissive Overreach scheme operation as this phenomena cannot make a zone 2 underreach the line.
(this phenomena has an influence only for faults beyond the remote busbar)
3(a)-2-4) Zone 2 time setting
The zone 2 time delay must be coordinated with the breaker failure relay timer.
The situation to be considered is a fault on the remote busbar as described below. The breaker failure will clear the fault at the
remote station in 300ms. (see chapter 4 : local fault clearing time 300ms)
Therefore Zone 2 time setting when the remote bus is equipped with circuit breaker failure relay should be set at 400msec
After 300ms, the

distance relay do not
see the fault
The distance relay see
the fault in zone 2
The busbar protection

gives tripping orders
This breaker
fails to open
Breaker failure
Bus Bar Diff
After 300ms the local backup

breakers are open

Zone 3 forward setting criteria
3(a)-3) Zone 3 forward

X
3(a)-3-1) Aim of Zone 3 forward
3(a)-3-1-1)
The zone 3 forward is aimed to provide a back up for remote fault.
Note that zone 3 forward will operate under one of the very improbable following situations :
- No operation of both distance relay and line differential relay (note that in case of communication
R
failure, back up distance and phase overcurrent function are activated in line differential relay
or
- No operation of the line circuit breaker together with no operation of the breaker failure relay
or
-No operation of the line circuit breaker followed by correct operation of the breaker failure system but
no operation of the back up breaker tripped by the breaker failure relay
Two main setting philosophy may be applied for zone 3 forward setting.
3(a)-3-1-2) Setting Philosophy #1

Zone 3 forward is set in order to provide a back up of the remote feeder under all circumstances
This means that the reach of zone 3 forward has to be considerably increased in order to take into account the reduction of reach due
to parallel line and infeed at the remote bus.
The result is a very long reach of zone 3 forward, with overreaching the 400kV/245kV autotransformers and 220/66kV Power
transformers at Doha South.
The risk of such a zone 3 forward setting philosophy is an undesired trip of a 400kV line for a fault on 66kV network at Doha South .
Please see the reach diagram made for Doha South to Salwa distance protection on the following page.
This diagram has been established with the assumption that the reduction of the reach beyond Salwa busbar is 1/3 as an example.
However this reduction may vary considerably depending of the infeed current in respect to the current seen by the distance relay at
Doha South. This diagram is a typical example. However this setting philosophy #1 is not adopted.
3(a)-3-1-3) Setting Philosophy #2

Zone 3 forward reach is limited in order to avoid any undesired tripping for a remote fault
Therefore Zone 3 forward reach is set so that zone 3 cannot operate for a fault on 245kV under no circumstances.
Setting philosophy is described in § 3(a)-3-1-4 below
This means that the reach may not cover the entire adjacent under some circumstances as described in the example page 3-14 and
3-15
In order to limit the risk of 400kV interconnection trip for a 66kV or 225kV fault, and considering the low probability of the failure
described in 3(a)-3-1-1), the setting philosophy 2 has been adopted.
3(a)-3-1-4) Adopted philosophy ( #2 )
Zone 3 forward is set at the minimum value between :

- 120% of [Protected line impedance + longest adjacent line impedance].
- Protected line impedance + 80% of the 3 autotransformers in parallel at the remote substation (if
autotransformers at the remote substation)
- Protected line impedance + equivalent impedance of shortest adjacent lines operated in parallel
+ 80% of the 3 autotransformers in parallel at the substation at the end of the shortest adjacent
line (if no autotransformers at the remote substation)

3(a)-3-2) Influencing factors on zone 3 forward reach
3(a)-3-2-1) Operation with a parallel line

In case the two lines are operated in parallel, the zone 3 forward
reach for an earth fault will be affected (reduced or increased) by
the mutual coupling effect between the two lines.
However the zone 3 forward setting is not concerned by this
phenomena as the zone 3 forward is not aimed to protect faults on
the line but faults on adjacent lines.
3(a)-2-2-1-2) Operation with the parallel line open and earthed

When the parallel line is opened and earthed for maintenance purpose, the zone 3 forward reach will increase and the coordination
with the zone 2 of the adjacent line can be lost.
However this is not a concern for zone 3 forward setting because the loss of coordination can be accepted for zone 3 forward.


Because the relay A sees only 50% of the total fault current, the reach of the zones beyond the remote bus will be reduced.
bus. (the reach from the remote bus to the limit of zone 3 forward will be reduced by a factor of 0,5)
Operation with B
one line
Operation with B
two lines in
parallel

increased.
The increase of the reach because adjacent line operated in parallel is concern for the zone 3 because if Transformer is
connected next to remote bus it will go to LV side of transformer and may lead to unwanted trip.
So we select zone reach such a way that it never overreaches Transformer. However, if line is not operated in parallel this will not
cover full line of even longest adjacent line will not be covered completely, this has to be accepted as a compromise.
Operation with
one line B
Operation with
two lines in
parallel


In case of infeed at the remote bus, the zone 3 forward reach will be reduced.
The 3 following pages describe the influence of parallel line operation and infeed
Note that, depending of the situation, zone 3 forward reach is either too short to provide a backup for remote fault or too long to
guarantee that no operation can occur for 220kV or 245kV faults.
Zone 3 forward setting criteria is a compromise which cannot cope ideally with all situations


SILLA
SALWA
Zone 3 forward reach when SILLA to
Salwa line is not operated in parallel and
Salwa to DOHA SOUTH line is not
operated in parallel and there is no infeed
at Salwa.
DOHA SOUTH


SILLA
SALWA
Zone 3 forward reach is increased because

the Salwa-Doha South line is operated in
parallel.
DOHA SOUTH
Up to 80% of Transformer Impedance


SILLA
SALWA
Zone 3 forward reach isreduceed because

the SILLA to SALWA line is operated in
parallel.
DOHA SOUTH


SILLA
SALWA

and because the infeed at SALWA.
DOHA SOUTH

3(a)-3-3) Zone 3 forward time setting

The zone 3 forward time delay must be coordinated with the Zone 2 time delay of the adjacent distance relay.
Zone 3 forward time delay is set at 800msec

Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) setting criteria
3(a)-4) Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse)

3(a)-4-1) Aim of Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse)
Note that zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) do not have to be coordinated with the forward zones of the remote X
Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) is set at 20% of the protected (forward) line
3(a)-4-2) Zone 4 (Zone 3 reverse) time setting

Note that zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) do not have to be coordinated with the forward zones of the remote
zone 4 (zone 3 reverse) time delay is set at 800msec = Zone 3 forward time delay

Resistive reach
3(a)-5) Resistive Reach

The resistive reach should not be set too high in order to avoid any tripping in case of high load (avoid load encroachment)
X
The minimum impedance is given by the following assumptions
Maximal load through the line : 1350MW with a voltage depressed at 0,9 Vn and
power factor 0,9
1350MW
I max = = 2400 A R
0,9 x 400kV x √3 x 0,9
Minimum single phase voltage

Z Load mini (Ohm) =
Maximum phase current
0,9 x 400kV
Z Load mini (Ohm) = √3 = 86 Ohms (primary value)
2400 A
In case of the parallel line is tripped, the load transfer will make current increase. (x 2) and therefore Load impedance decrease
(factor 2)
86 Ohms = 43 Ohms (primary value)
Z Load mini (Ohm) =
2
Resistive reach is set at 40 Ohms phase (Primary value)
The Relay would not be capable to detect fault resistance higher than 40 Ohms
In case of phase to earth fault, the resistive reach must be higher than the tower
foot resistance + the arc resistance.
We assume a foot tower resistance of 10 Ohms
C. Warrington established an empirical formula which gives the arc

resistance depending the arc length and the arc current :
28710 x L arc (m)
R arc (Ohms) =
I arc current 1,4
Let us assume a minimum fault current of 1000A
For such a current, the arc resistance would be :

28710 x 6,3
R arc (Ohms) = = 1,8 Ohms
1,4
1000A
The total fault resistance is equal to 11,8 Ohms which is much lower than 40
Ohms
Any fault will be detected with the 40 Ohms setting with a large safety margin

DEF
3(a)-6) Directional Earth Fault with signaling

In case of high resistance fault (higher than the resistive reach of the distance protection), the distance function cannot operate
and must be completed by Directional Earth Fault with directional comparison scheme
X
This function uses permissive overreach transfer trip (POR) : Resistive fault outside
distance characteristic
Tripping logic = Fault forward + Signal from remote end received
Signal send logic = Fault forward
Phase selection is carried out by the DEF protection, also one pole tripping is R
selected.
Threshold :
However operating quantity remains residual current.
3(a)-7) Back up directional earth fault

This function is used as ultimate back up of the DEF for high resistance fault in case of signaling failure.
Threshold :
The threshold must be set forward to see fault on the line.
Time delay (TMS) :

An Inverse Definite Time Delay must be used (Normal inverse from IEC 60255 as required in section 4.510 of technical specifications
[1]).
Criteria #1
To ensure coordination with remote end protection, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) must be set so that the tripping time for a remote
fault is longer than the maximum fault clearing time of the adjacent feeder.
> 1,5s
67N

21
A fault at remote bus is cleared in >1,5s
Criteria #2
To prevent incorrect 3 pole tripping by 67N, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) must be set so that the tripping time for a close fault is
longer than the fault clearing time by Main 1 and Main 2 protections.

67N
A close fault is cleared in > 0,5s
> 0,5s
21

Power Swing Blocking
3(a)-8) Power swing blocking logic
A power swing may cause the impedance presented to the distance relay to move from the normal load area into the tripping
characteristic (see following drawing).
The MiCOM P443 relays do not use the conventional impedance band method which consist in measuring the
the apparent impedance speed of entry into the start-up characteristic (∆R & ∆X) as a power swing is slower than in the case of a
fault.
conventional impedance band method
The MiCOM P443 relays use advanced technique which does not requires any start up impedance characteristics to be set.
The detection technique uses superimposed current (∆I) as follow :
The Power Swing Blocking is used to block all the zones

The protection does not use any impedance or current threshold setting

OUT of STEP (OOS)
3(a)-9) OUT of STEP protection
Protective relays are prone to respond to stable or unstable power swings and cause unwanted tripping of
transmission lines or other power system elements.
The philosophy of out-of-step relaying is simple and straightforward: avoid tripping of any power system element
during stable swings. Protect the power system during unstable or out-of-step conditions. When two areas of a
power system, or two interconnected systems, lose synchronism, the areas must be separated from each other
quickly and automatically in order to avoid equipment damage and shutdown of major portions of the power system.
Out-of-step protection functions detect stable power swings and out-of-step conditions by using the fact that the
voltage/current variation during a power swing is gradual while it is virtually a step change during a fault.
Actual implementation of measuring the impedance rate of change is normally performed through the use of two
impedance measurement elements together with a timing device. If the measured impedance stays between the
two impedance measurement elements for a predetermined time, then an OOS is declared and an out of-step
blocking signal is issued to block the distance relay element operation. If it crosses the two Impedance loop then trip
is generated.
In GCCIA trip is only for Utilities experiencing the Swing.
Load
To guarantee that there is enough time to carry out blocking of the distance elements after an OOS is detected, the
inner impedance measurement element of the OOS detection logic must be placed outside the largest distance
protection region that is to be blocked. The outer impedance measurement element for the OOS detection has to
be placed away from the load region to prevent inadvertent OSB logic operation caused by heavy loads.
Setting of reactance lines Z5 and Z6 will depend on how far from the relay location the power
oscillations are to be detected. Normally, there is only one point where the system is to be initially split
and that point will be determined by system studies.

To existing
G1D Power station
(Kuwait)
OUT of STEP protection is enabled in

the below mentioned locations
Al ZOUR
L1 L2
292km
OHL
Al Fadhili to Al Zour line
Al FADHILI
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
HVDC
To existing
Al FADHILI
(Saudi Arabia)
L3 L4
115km
OHL
GHUNAN Al JASRA
To existing
Al Jasra
(Bahrein)
OHL RAQ UGC

40km L9 43km
L10
Ghunan to Salwa line L5 L6
Ghunan to Al Jasra line

235km
OHL
SALWA
OHL
L11 L12 96.21km
L7 L8
97km
OHL
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
Silla to
Shuweihat
122.71km
line
OHL
L13 L14
To existing
DOHA SOUTH SUPER
(Quatar)
SHUWEHAT
(United Arab Emirates) To existing
SHUWEIHAT
(UAE)

VT Fuse Failure
3(a)-10) VT Fuse failure

Blocking logic :
Loss of one or two phase voltage :

The VT failure blocking operates on detection of negative phase sequence voltage in
absence of negative phase sequence current.
Loss of all 3 phase on load condition :

The VT failure blocking operates on absence of 3 phase voltage without a
corresponding change in any of the phase current signals.
Loss of all 3 phase upon line energization :

The VT failure blocking operates on absence of 3 phase voltage without detecting an
overcurrent element (the overcurrent element must be set higher than the load,
charging or transformer inrush current).
This overcurrent is used to prevent blocking of the distance protection in case of
closing onto a 3 phase fault.
Unblocking logic :
Two overcurrent thresholds are used to override VT failure blocking in event of a fault occurring on the system
which could trigger the blocking logic :
- A three phase overcurrent element : I>
- A negative phase sequence element : I2>
These thresholds must be set in order to detect 3 phase and 2 phase fault conditions and to not operate for
normal loading condition.
Setting will be calculated on each relay setting calculation note.
The blocking will be latched after a settable time delay.

The reset of the blocking is made automatically after restoration of the 3 phase voltage (voltage detector level)

SILLA
3(a)-11) Application example : SILLA-SALWA feeder

In the following, the illustration of the zones settings criteria to the SILLA - SALWA feeder is given
OHL 96.21km
SALWA DOHA SOUTH
OHL 102kM
400MVA
220kV
OHL 234.5km
GHUNAN
Cable50km
OHL 114.9km
RAQ
AL FADHILI AL JASRA
OHL39.4km
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131_07 GCCr N° Page 3(a)-25

SILLA

Set at 20% of the reverse line (aimed to
give a back for busbar faults)
SILLA
time
Zone 1 reach
OHL 96.21km
Set at 70% of SILLA-SALWA line
(POR scheme)
SALWA DOHA SOUTH
Set at 125% of SILLA – SLAWA line

SALWA
Zone 2 reach
OHL 102kM
400MVA
Zone 3 reach 220kV

OHL 234.5km
Set at SALWA – Doha South line

parallel impedance + 80% of global
transformer impedance at Doha
DOHA
South(3 transformer in parallel)
SOUTH
GHUNAN
GHUNAN
Cable50km
OHL 114.9km
RAQ
AL FADHILI AL JASRA
OHL39.4km

SILLA
SILLA
time
OHL 96.21km
Zone 2 time setting
setting at SILLA.
SALWA DOHA SOUTH
SALWA
Breaker
failure
time
setting at
Zone 3 time setting OHL 102kM
SLAWA The zone 3 time setting must be 400MVA
distance relay of the adjacent line 220kV
OHL 234.5km
DOHA
SOUTH
GHUNAN
GHUNAN
Cable50km
OHL 114.9km
RAQ
AL FADHILI AL JASRA
OHL39.4km

4) Breaker Failure relay coordination
4-1) General
In the following, the breaker failure relay coordination (time setting) is described
The breaker failure operates in two steps

First step (retrip) : If the current is not cleared after tBF1, a retrip of the circuit breaker attached to the breaker failure relay
is performed.
As the retrip use trip circuit independent of the trip circuit from the main relays to the breaker, this gives a chance to clear
the fault without opening the adjacent back up breakers.
Second step (back up trip) : If the current is not cleared after tBF2, this means that the retrip attempt has been
unsuccessful. At tBF2 a tripping order to the adjacent back up breakers is given (see § 2)
Fig 4-1) describes the sequence in case of correct operation of the circuit breaker to which the Breaker failure relay is
attached
Fig 4-2) describes the sequence in case of no fault current clearing following the initial trip order by main relays, but
correct fault clearing by the breaker after retrip order given by the breaker failure relay.
Fig 4-3) describes the sequence in case of no fault current clearing following the initial trip order by main relays, and no
fault current clearing following retrip order given by the breaker failure relay.

Trip command sent to
the breaker coil
+ Breaker failure
Fig 4-1 initiated
20ms
Breaker
Main Relay maximal fault Security
clearing time margin
Interposing (50ms) (30ms)
Breaker Failure Rel. 10ms
relay Retrip Security margin (70ms)
Re trip timer tBF1 (80ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
breakers Trip order External trip timer tBF2 (150ms)
CB Breaker Failure relay setting

to be changed as per Phase - 3
timing in all GCCIA Phase -1
substations.
Both breakers
clear the fault
correctly
Tripping orders
from the relay to
the breakers
Main CB Breaker
3 pole initiation Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Pole per pole initiation Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection

The fault will be cleared typically after :
20ms (main relay)

Trip command sent to + 10ms (interposing relay)
the breaker coil +80ms (tBF1)
+ Breaker failure + 10ms (interposing relay)
Fig 4-2 initiated + 50ms (breaker)
= 170ms
20ms
Main Relay Interposing
relay
Breaker
Interposing maximal fault
Breaker Failure Rel. 10ms clearing time
relay Retrip (50ms)
Security margin
(10ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
Tie breaker do not

clear the fault first
because broken wire
between main
protection and trip coil
Because the current has not

reset at the end of tBF1,
tripping order is sent to the
breaker (1) (2)
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection
(1)
Tripping order sent pole per pole for Main Breaker failure
Tripping order 3 pole for Tie CB
(2)
The fact that the tripping circuit is another tripping circuit will
increase the chance to open locally the breaker

The fault will be cleared by remote
breakers typically after :
20ms (main relay)
+ 10ms (interposing relay)
+150ms (tBF2)
the breaker coil
+ 30ms (teletransmission)
+ Breaker failure
Fig 4-3 initiated
+ 20ms (trip relay at remote end)
+ 50ms (breaker)
= 280ms
20ms
Main Relay
Interposing Breaker
Rel. 10ms maximal fault
Breaker Failure 30ms 20ms clearing time
relay Retrip (50ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
Tripping via
trip relay
Teletransmission time
minimum : 20ms
maximum : 37ms
Typical : 30ms
Tie breaker do not

Because the current has not clear the fault
because operating
tripping order is sent to
adjacent and the remote mechanism failure
breakers (as an example)

reset at the end of tBF1,retrip
order is sent to the Tie breaker
Trip coil 1 and Trip coil 2.
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection

4(a) Breaker Failure relay coordination (Phase III)
4(a)-1) General
In the following, the breaker failure relay coordination (time setting) is described
The breaker failure operates in two steps

First step (retrip) : If the current is not cleared after tBF1, a retrip of the circuit breaker attached to the breaker failure relay
is performed.
As the retrip use trip circuit independent of the trip circuit from the main relays to the breaker, this gives a chance to clear
the fault without opening the adjacent back up breakers.
Second step (back up trip) : If the current is not cleared after tBF2, this means that the retrip attempt has been
unsuccessful. At tBF2 a tripping order to the adjacent back up breakers is given (see § 2)
Fig 4-1) describes the sequence in case of correct operation of the circuit breaker to which the Breaker failure relay is
attached
Fig 4-2) describes the sequence in case of no fault current clearing following the initial trip order by main relays, but
correct fault clearing by the breaker after retrip order given by the breaker failure relay.
fault current clearing following retrip by main breaker fail relay leading to backtrip and BB protection intiation.
fault current clearing following retrip order given by the breaker failure relay.

the breaker coil
+ Breaker failure
Fig 4-1 initiated
20ms
Breaker
Main Relay maximal fault Security
clearing time margin
Interposing (50ms) (30ms)
Breaker Failure Rel. 10ms
relay Retrip Security margin
(70ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
Both breakers
clear the fault
correctly
Tripping orders
from the relay to
the breakers
Main CB Breaker
3 pole initiation Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Pole per pole initiation Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection

The fault will be cleared typically after :
20ms (main relay)

Trip command sent to + 10ms (interposing relay)
the breaker coil +80ms (tBF1)
+ Breaker failure + 10ms (interposing relay)
Fig 4-2 initiated + 50ms (breaker)
= 170ms
20ms
Main Relay Interposing
relay
Breaker
Interposing maximal fault
Breaker Failure Rel. 10ms clearing time
relay Retrip (50ms)
Security margin
(10ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
Tie breaker do not

clear the fault first
because broken wire
between main
protection and trip coil

breaker (1) (2)
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection
(1)
Tripping order sent pole per pole for Main Breaker failure
Tripping order 3 pole for Tie CB
(2)
The fact that the tripping circuit is another tripping circuit will
increase the chance to open locally the breaker

20ms (main relay)
+150ms (tBF2)
the breaker coil
+ Breaker failure
Fig 4-3 initiated
+ 50ms (breaker)
= 275ms
20ms
Main Relay
Interposing Breaker
relay Retrip (50ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
minimum : 20ms
maximum : 30ms
Typical : 25ms

remote breakers and BB
protection relay.
BB protection relay for adjacent

breaker tripping.

same breaker trip coil TC1 and
TC2.
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection

20ms (main relay)
+150ms (tBF2)
the breaker coil
+ Breaker failure
Fig 4-4 initiated
+ 50ms (breaker)
= 275ms
20ms
Main Relay
Interposing Breaker
relay Retrip (50ms)
Breaker Failure
relay adjacent
Tripping via
trip relay
minimum : 20ms
maximum : 30ms
Typical : 25ms
Tie breaker do not

Because the current has not clear the fault
because operating
remote and adjacent breakers. mechanism failure
(as an example)

reset at the end of tBF1, retrip
order is sent to the Tie breaker
both trip coil 1 & 2.
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Tie CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main CB Breaker
Failure relay
Main Protection

5) Coordination with utilities interface substations
In the following the principle of coordination with the utilities interface substations is described
5-1) Coordination between Al ZOUR and G1D Al ZOUR Power station (MEW Kuwait)
The coordination between Al Zour and G1D Al Zour is described in the following. The same principle is applicable
for every interface with utility.
67/67N will be used in any interface with utility.
The power station is protected by following relays :
Generator feeder :
- Generator Differential relays
- Generator 3ph Overcurrent relay (50)
- Generator earth fault relay (50N) G1D Al Zour
Power station
Al ZOUR
Autotransformers feeders :
- Cable differential relays : 2 differential relays (87L)
- Directional Earth fault relay (67/67N) – MiCOM P127
directionality as showed in the sketch
To Al Fadhili
Generator feeder :
- Generator Differential relays 50
51
- Generator 3ph Overcurrent relay (50) 50N
- Generator earth fault relay (50N) 51N
Autotransformers feeders :
- Cable differential relays : 2 differential relays (87L)
- Directional Phase and Earth fault relay (67/67N) – MiCOM
P127
directionality as showed in the sketch 67/
67N
245kV
To GCCIA 400kV
Contractor N° GCCIA-1-A/GEN-31-D-131 Rev 07 GCCr N° Page 5-1

The coordination between the 400kV GCCIA protection system and the above mentioned differential relays is
guaranteed because no GCCIA relay will detect a fault on the protected zones of these differential relays. It should
be reminded that the zone 3 of GCCIA distance relays are set shorter than 80 % of the autotransformers
impedance
The only coordination to be checked are :
Coordination with autotransformer main protections

An earth fault in the cable section or in the autotransformer will make operation of the directional earth fault element
only in case of failure of cable differential or autotransformer differential relays
Coordination with Generator 3ph Overcurrent relay

A fault on GCCIA network should not make Generator 3ph Overcurrent relay (50) tripping. This will be guaranteed
by setting a short time delay of directional overcurrent (the overcurrent threshold will be set over the maximum
transformer through fault current)
Coordination with Generator Earth fault relay

A fault on GCCIA network should not make Generator earth fault relay (50N) tripping. This will be guaranteed by
setting a short time delay of directional overcurrent (the overcurrent threshold will be set over the maximum
transformer through fault current)

5-1-1) Coordination with autotransformer main protections
The aim of the directional overcurrent relay is to detect fault in the cable section or the autotransformer - see
sketch below.
The directional overcurrent relay is a back up of cable differential and autotransformer differential relays which
should trip the fault first. The directional overcurrent relay will operate only in case of failure of cable differential
(87L) or autotransformer differential (87T) relays.
Recommended setting = 300ms
67 67 67 67
67N 67N 67N 67N
Al ZOUR Al ZOUR

5-1-2) Coordination with Generator 3ph Overcurrent relay
The generator 3ph Overcurrent (50/51) relay must not operate in case of fault as showed below.
The generator 3ph Overcurrent (50/51) must be coordinated with the busbar, cable section, autotransformer
differential relay and directional overcurrent relay installed on the utility side of the autotransformer.
Minimum time delay must grade with 67 time delay (300ms) and with 275kV network protection time delays.
Current setting should be fixed by the generator feeder supplier in coordination with generator characteristics
50
51
50N
51N
67 67
67N 67N
Al ZOUR

5-1-3) Coordination with Generator Earth Fault relay
The generator Earth fault relay (50N/51N) relay must not operate in case of fault as showed below.
The generator Earth fault relay (50N/51N) must be coordinated with the busbar, cable section and
autotransformer differential relay.
Minimum time delay must grade with 67N time delay (300ms) and with 275kV network protection time delays.
Current setting should be fixed by the generator feeder supplier in coordination with generator characteristics
50
51
50N
51N
67 67
67N 67N
Al ZOUR

5-2) Coordination with Back to Back HVDC Al Fadhili
(Saudi Arabia)
5-2-1) Coordination with 400kV 50 Hz H Filters

Each H filter is protected by a differential relay and a breaker failure
relay
As the zones 2 of distance relays at Al Zour (Al Zour-Al Fadhili line

and at Gunhan (Gunhan- Al Fadhili line) overreach the Al Fadhili-
Back to Back UGC , coordination between these relays has to be
checked
Trip
Differential protection
No time delay
Action : trip the filter circuit breaker
Breaker Failure relay

setting : 150ms
Actions :
Trip the circuit breakers at Al Fadhili
Trip the HVDC converter
Trip
5-2-1-1) Coordination with Filter differential protection

Filters differential protection is not time delayed. The coordination is
guaranteed by the zone 2 time delay (400ms)
5-2-1-2) Coordination with Filter Breaker Failure protection

Breaker failure is set at 150ms
Fault clearing time will be
30ms (H filter differential relay)+ 150ms (tBF2) + 70ms (Breaker) = 250ms
The zone 2 setting (400ms) guarantee the coordination with the breaker
failure relay.
In case of a H filter fault with no operation of the associated breaker, the
adjacent breakers will clear the fault and no operation of remote distance
relays will occur.

5-2-2) Coordination with 400kV 50 Hz YNy0 380MVA transformer
The 400kV 50 Hz YNy0 380MVA transformers are protected by :
- Main 1 and Main 2 differential transformer relays

- Main 1 and Main 2 restricted earth fault relay
- Neutral overcurrent relay
5-2-2-1) Coordination with differential and restricted earth fault protections

Trip
The distance protections of 400kV network are the only 400kV
protections which have to be coordinated with the Transformer
differential and restricted earth fault protections are not time delayed.
The coordination is guaranteed by the zone 2 and zone 3 time delay
of the 400kV distance protection.
5-2-2-2) Coordination with Neutral overcurrent relay

The Neutral overcurrent relay is aimed to trip an earth fault that could not be
tripped by other protective relays.
The Neutral overcurrent relay will detect a current for any earth fault on the
GICC network. The time delay should be longer than the longest time delay
of GCCIA network.
The Neutral overcurrent relay will make tripping of circuit breakers at Al
Fadhili and tripping of the HVDC converter (see sketch)
The maximum clearing time of a fault on GCCIA network is 800ms (Zone 3

of distance relays)
The time setting of the neutral overcurrent relay should therefore be above
800ms + 250ms (selectivity interval) = 1050ms
Time setting of the neutral (DMT) is 4000ms

Selectivity is guaranteed.
A 400kV fault will not make any undesired tripping of the neutral overcurrent
relay.
Earth fault in
GCCIA network

5-3) Coordination between Al JASRA and Existing Al JASRA (Bahrain)
5-3-1) Coordination with main autotransformer protection relays
The aim of the directional overcurrent relay is to detect a fault in the cable section or the autotransformer - see
sketch below.
The directionality allow that a fault as showed below will make tripping of only the Overcurrent relay of the
transformer where the fault is located.
The directional overcurrent relay is a back up of cable differential and autotransformer differential relays which
should trip the fault first. The directional overcurrent relay will operate only in case of failure of cable differential
or autotransformer differential relays.
Recommended setting is 300ms
GHUNAN Al JASRA
RAQ
OHL 40km UGC 43km
750MVA 750MVA 750MVA
67 67 67
67N 67N 67N
220kV
150MVA
150MVA
150MVA
66kV

5-3) Coordination between DOHA SOUTH and Existing DOHA SOUTH SUPER (MEW)
The situation is the same as the coordination between Al Jasra and existing Al Jasra
Please refer to § 5-2)
SALWA
DOHA SOUTH
750MVA 750MVA 750MVA
67 67 67
67N 67N 67N
Existing DOHA
SOUTH SUPER
220kV
150MVA
150MVA
150MVA
66kV

5a) Coordination with utilities interface substations (Phase III)
Coordination for Over current relay
This co-ordination is not applicable because there is no over current protection available at Silla for Silla to
Shuweihat feeder presently and directional earth fault element (67/67N) in Group A and Group B relays of Silla
line will be looking in the forward direction which is towards the GCCIA network (Towards SALWA SS) and hence
no co-ordination will be required with UAE network.
Moreover distance relay present at Salwa for Salwa to Silla will not be a concern as Zone 3 will be having big time
delay and it will be operating in worst case as described in zone 3 philosophy on page 89 of this document under
heading 3(a)-3-1-1.

6) Autorecloser Phase I
In the following the principle of autorecloser and voltage control during autorecloser sequence is described
The autorecloser and voltage control functions are performed by MiCOM P442 relay.
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
3p Tie CB autorecloser
BCU OFF 3p closing order
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
Main (Bus) CB 3 separate closing
BCU OFF autorecloser order (1 per pole)
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip
Force 3 pole trip (2)
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the
autorecloser in specified by the BCU
(2)
Signal transmitted through wiring and
Goose signal (IEC 61850)
(between protection relays only)
GHUNAN

Autorecloser : programmed to reclose 3 pole only (the tie
breaker is opened 3 poles)
Voltage control : close command occurs if voltage on both sides
of the breaker is present and fulfill conditions (magnitude, phase
angle, frequency). (LB-LL condition only)
Autorecloser : programmed to reclose 1pole or 3 pole depending of the

position of the switch and the type of fault.
Voltage control : voltage are checked before closing in case of 3 pole
reclosing only. Control is as follow :
For one end of the line : close command occurs if voltage on bus side of the
breaker is present and voltage on the other side is not present. (LB-DL)
For the other end of the line : close command occurs if voltage on both
sides of the breaker is present and fulfill conditions (LB-LL)
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip Autorecloser/Voltage
S ph trip
T ph trip control at end A is
Differential trip programmed LB-DL
Force 3 pole trip (2) (Live Bus-Dead Line)
Autorecloser/Voltage
(1) control at end B is
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the programmed
autorecloser in specified by the BCU LB-LL
(Live Bus-Live Line)
(2)
Signal transmitted through wiring and and
Goose signal (IEC 61850) DB-LL
(between protection relays only) (Dead Bus Live Line)
GHUNAN
Important note : Autoreclosers are locked out in

case of Direct Transfer Trip signal received from
the remote end.
This Direct Transfer Trip signal can be received
from :
Tie Breaker failure relay
Tie High impedance relay
Over or undervoltage relay

Fig 6-2)
3 pole autoreclosing dead times
Nota :
The end set with the shortest lDL3p will be
programmed to close in case of Live Bus-Dead Line
conditions (will reclose first if conditions OK)
The end set with the longest lDL3p will be
G1D Power station
programmed to close in case of Live Bus-Live Line
conditions or Dead Bus-Live Line conditions (will
Al ZOUR reclose second if conditions OK)
tDL3p
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
Line I Line II Opened
tDL3p = 5.0 sec tDL3p = 7.5 sec L1 L2

Closed
Opened
Closed
Line I Line II
tDL3p = 10.0 sec tDL3p = 12.5 sec
Al FADHILI
Line I
Back to Back
Line II
Line I Line II
L3 L4
GHUNAN Al JASRA
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Line I Line II
Line I Line II
L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA DOHA SOUTH


Fig 6-3)
3 pole autoreclosing dead times (Cont)
Nota :
The end set with the shortest lDL3p will be
conditions (will reclose first if conditions OK)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR reclose second if conditions OK)
tDL3p
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
Al FADHILI
Back to Back
Line I Line I
Line II Line II
L3 L4
GHUNAN Al JASRA
Line Al JASRA
L5 I RAQ MEW Bahrein
Line I
L9
SALWA Line
L6 II
OHL L10 II
Line UGC
Line I Line I
tDL3p = 10.0 sec tDL3p = 14,5 sec
L11 L12 L7 L8 Line II Line II
SILAA DOHA SOUTH

tDL3p = 12,5 sec tDL3p = 17 sec

Fig 6-4)
3 pole autoreclosing
Voltage control settings
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
Live Bus-Dead Line

(Will reclose first)
L1 L2
Live Bus-Live Line
Or Dead Bus Live Line
(Will reclose second)
Al FADHILI
Live Bus-Dead Line

Live Bus-Live Line

Back to Back
Live Bus-Live Line
Or Dead Bus Live Line Or Dead Bus Live Line
(Will reclose second) (Will reclose second)
Live Bus-Dead Line

(Will reclose first) L3 L4
GHUNAN Al JASRA
Live Bus-Live Line
Al JASRA
Live Bus-Dead Line L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
(Will reclose first) SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Live Bus-Live Line

L11 L12 L7 L8
Live Bus-Dead Line
SILAA DOHA SOUTH (Will reclose first)

Fig 6-5)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
tDL1p tDL3p
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
Closed Closed

Al FADHILI
Back to Back
GHUNAN Al JASRA
Faults in Ghunan – Salwa line make 3

pole autoreclosing only (one shot)
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Faults in the OHL section make 3 pole

autoreclosing only (one shot)

L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA DOHA SOUTH tDL1p = 0.300 sec tDL1p = 0.350 sec

Fig 6-6)
3 pole autoreclosing dead times – Tie Breaker
Nota :
G1D Power station The Tie Breaker autorecloser is programmed to
close in case of Live Bus-Live Line conditions
Al ZOUR
tDL3p
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
Opened
Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
tDL3p = 11 sec tDL3p = 13.5 sec

Al FADHILI
Back to Back
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
tDL3p = 8.5 sec L3 L4 tDL3p = 11 sec
GHUNAN Al JASRA
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
tDL3p = 6.0 sec OHL L10 UGC
tDL3p = 18 sec
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
tDL3p = 15.5 sec

tDL3p = 11 sec
L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA DOHA SOUTH
tDL3p = 8.5 sec
tDL3p = 6.0 sec

6-2) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault
1/6
Fault Occurs
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip Single pole 3 pole
T ph trip opening ph R opening
Differential trip
(1) Single
When the switch is in BCU position, the phase R to
autorecloser in specified by the BCU earth fault Single pole 3 pole
occurs opening phR opening
(2)
GHUNAN
o
o

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault (cont.)
2/6
CB Opened
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the Force 3 pole signal is sent to
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the distance and Line differential relay
autorecloser in specified by the BCU If the fault is still present when the
(2) breaker is closed, both distance and
Signal transmitted through wiring and line differential relay will trip 3 pole
GHUNAN
Important note :
In case a new fault occurs in phase S (or T), a new
autoreclose initiation will occur on phase S (or T)
The distance and the differential relays will trip 3ph

(because “Force 3 pole” signal received)
The Main autorecloser will then stop the single pole

reclosing sequence and switch to 3 pole reclosing
sequence (one 3 pole reclosing attempt followed by
autorecloser lockout in case of unsuccessful
reclosing)

3/6
Dead time
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

4/6
Main CB reclosing at
station A and B
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
This breaker makes first a
single pole closing ph R
MiCOM P543 (with no voltage control)
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
Force 3 pole trip (2) After a time delay (dead
time at Ghunan set longer
that at Al Fadhili(3)) this
breaker makes a single
(1) pole closing ph R
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the (with no voltage control)
(2)
(3) GHUNAN
Refer to 017048 SLCC0 48EE 0001
April 2008 - page 25

5/6
Tie CB reclosing at station A
and B
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip If there is voltage on both
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip sides of the breaker and if
Force 3 pole trip (2) the voltage conditions are
fulfilled (magnitude, phase
MiCOM P543
R ph trip angle, frequency) then
S ph trip closing will occur (3)
T ph trip
Differential trip
If there is voltage on both

(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the Force 3 pole signal will reset at sides of the breaker and if
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the the end of the reclaim time the voltage conditions are
autorecloser in specified by the BCU fulfilled (magnitude, phase
(2) angle, frequency) then
Signal transmitted through wiring and closing will occur (3)
(3)
GHUNAN
The dead time is given in page 6-4
(same dead time as for 3 pole
autoreclosing sequence)

6/6
Final situation
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

6-3) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault
Unsuccessful reclosing at first attempt 1/11
Fault Occurs
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Single
occurs opening ph R opening
(2)
GHUNAN
o
o

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault
Unsuccessful reclosing at first attempt (Cont.) 2/11
CB Opening
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip Phase R is
T ph trip deenergised
Differential trip
(1)
Signal transmitted through wiring and line differential relay will trip 3 pole.
GHUNAN

Dead time
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

station A and B
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip This breaker makes first a
Force 3 pole trip (2) single pole closing ph R
MiCOM P543
(with no voltage control)
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
Force 3 pole trip (2) After a time delay (dead
time at Ghunan set longer
that at Al Fadhili(3)) this
breaker makes a single
(1) pole closing ph R
When the switch is in BCU position, the (with no voltage control)
(2)
(3)
Refer to 017048 SLCC0 48EE 0001 GHUNAN

Fault appears again
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Fault has

When the switch is in BCU position, the not been
autorecloser in specified by the BCU cleared !
(2)
GHUNAN

Fault is cleared
When the new trip signals are received,

the main autorecloser will switch to the dead
time of the second (3pole) attempt
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole tripping
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the Force 3 pole signal is still present, 3 pole tripping
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the both distance and line differential
autorecloser in specified by the BCU relay will trip 3 pole
(2)
GHUNAN

3 pole dead time
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

Main CB reclosing at station A
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Force 3 pole trip (2) Before closing, the
autorecloser/voltage control
MiCOM P543
R ph trip (MiCOM P442) will check that
S ph trip Live Bus / Dead Line
T ph trip
Differential trip
condition is fulfilled
Before closing, the

(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the autorecloser/voltage control
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the (MiCOM P442) will check that
autorecloser in specified by the BCU Live Bus / Live Line or
(2) Dead Bus/Live Line condition
Signal transmitted through wiring and is fulfilled.
Goose signal (IEC 61850) Closing will not occur as long
as line will not be reenergized
(3)
Refer to 017048 SLCC0 48EE 0001 from the remote end. GHUNAN
Note that, although this is not

strictly required for corect
operation, the dead time at
Ghunan is set longer than the
dead time at Al Fadhili (3)

Main CB reclosing at station B
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the When the Live Bus / Live Line
autorecloser in specified by the BCU condition is fulfilled (because
closing at the other end was
(2) successful), closing occurs.
GHUNAN

Tie CB closing
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
As there is voltage on
MiCOM P543
R ph trip both sides of the breaker
S ph trip and if the voltage
T ph trip
Differential trip
conditions are fulfilled
(magnitude, phase angle,
frequency) then closing
will occur.
As there is voltage on
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the both sides of the breaker
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the and if the voltage
autorecloser in specified by the BCU conditions are fulfilled
(2) (magnitude, phase angle,
Signal transmitted through wiring and frequency) then closing
Goose signal (IEC 61850) will occur.
GHUNAN

Final situation
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

6-4) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to phase fault
1/7
Fault Occurs
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the 2ph or 3ph
autorecloser in specified by the BCU fault occurs
(2)
GHUNAN

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to phase fault (Cont.)
2/7
CB Opening
Initiation of
autoreclosers
takes place
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole 3 pole
T ph trip opening opening
Differential trip
(1)
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the distance and line differential relay
autorecloser in specified by the BCU If the fault is till present when the 3 pole 3 pole
breaker is closed, both distance and opening opening
(2)
Goose signal (IEC 61850) Then the recloser will lockout
GHUNAN
o
o

3/7
Dead time
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
GHUNAN

4/7
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
T ph trip
Differential trip
condition is fulfilled :
Force 3 pole trip (2) Closing will occur as
(magnitude, phase angle and
frequency)
Before closing, the
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the autorecloser/voltage control If the fault is still present on
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the (MiCOM P442) will check that closing, definitive trip and
autorecloser in specified by the BCU Live Bus / Live Line or autorecloser lockout will
(2) Dead Bus/Live Line condition occur. The other end
Signal transmitted through wiring and is fulfilled. autorecloser will not be able
Goose signal (IEC 61850) Closing will not occur as long to close and will also lockout
(3)
Refer to 017048 SLCC0 48EE 0001 from the remote end. GHUNAN
Note that, although this is not

strictly required for correct
Ghunan is set longer than the
dead time at Al Fadhili (3)

5/7
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the When the Live Bus / Live Line
autorecloser in specified by the BCU condition is fulfilled (because
closing at the other end was
(2) successful), closing occurs.
GHUNAN

6/7
Tie CB reclosing
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
c
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip sides of the breaker and if
S ph trip the voltage conditions are
T ph trip
Differential trip
angle, frequency) then
closing will occur.

(1)
Signal transmitted through wiring and closing will occur.
GHUNAN

7/7
Final situation
Al FADHILI
MiCOM P442
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P442
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P543
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the Force 3 pole signal will reset at
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the the end of the reclaim time
(2)
GHUNAN

6(a)-1 Autorecloser (Phase III)
In the following the principle of autorecloser and voltage control during autorecloser sequence is described
The autorecloser and voltage control functions are performed by MiCOM P841 relay.
Note:- As we have mentioned that numerous conditions are possible and it is not practical to
cover all the condition in Philosophy document.
In this document we will have following conditions.

SALWA
• Fixing of priority substation and Closing condition for Auto reclose ( Fig. 6-4).
MiCOM P841
3p • 3 pole and 1 pole
Tie CB dead time (Fig. 6-2 to 6-6).
autorecloser
(1) • 6(a)-3 AR sequence in case of single phase to earth fault (Main and Tie both closed).
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
• 6(a)-4 Autoreclosing
MiCOM P841 sequence in case of single phase to earth fault Unsuccessful
1p 3p 1p/3p reclosing.
(1)
• 6(a)-5 Autoreclosing sequence in case of 3 pole AR (Main and Tie both closed).
• 6(a)-6 Autoreclosing sequence

MiCOMin case of single phase to earth fault (Main CB open)
P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip sequence in case of 3 pole AR (Main CB open).
• Force 3 pole trip (2)sequence in case of single phase to earth fault (Tie CB open).
6(a)-8 Autoreclosing
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip sequence in case of 3 pole AR (Tie CB open).
T ph trip
Differential trip
sequence in SILLA to SHUWEIHAT feeder.
(1)
Weposition,
When the switch is in BCU Propose the to have Live Bus-Dead Line for Tie breaker at Priority station. Otherwise
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) Reclose
Auto of the sequence will fail in some condition if Main breaker at priority Station is out
then tie for Check synchronizing will not have live line.
(2)
(between protection relaysWe
only)request
GCCIA to provide us timing for Breaker (Dead time) for Auto reclose in
various substation as per Phase-1.
SILLA

Autorecloser : programmed to reclose 3 pole only (the tie
breaker is opened 3 poles)
Voltage control : close command occurs if voltage on both sides
of the breaker is present and fulfill conditions (magnitude, phase
angle, frequency). (LB-LL condition only)
Autorecloser : programmed to reclose 1pole or 3 pole depending of the

position of the switch and the type of fault.
Voltage control : voltage are checked before closing in case of 3 pole
reclosing only. Control is as follow :
For one end of the line : close command occurs if voltage on bus side of the
breaker is present and voltage on the other side is not present. (LB-DL)
For the other end of the line : close command occurs if voltage on both
sides of the breaker is present and fulfill conditions (LB-LL)
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip Autorecloser/Voltage
S ph trip
T ph trip control at end B is
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip programmed
Force 3 pole trip (2) LB-LL
(Live Bus-Live Line)
MiCOM P544
R ph trip and
S ph trip DB-LL
T ph trip
Differential trip (Dead Bus Live Line)
(1)
(2) Autorecloser/Voltage
Signal transmitted through wiring and control at end A is
(between protection relays only) programmed LB-DL
(Live Bus-Dead Line)
SILLA
Important note : Autoreclosers are locked out in

case of Direct Transfer Trip signal received from
the remote end.
This Direct Transfer Trip signal can be received
from :
Tie Breaker failure relay
Tie High impedance relay
Over or undervoltage relay

Fig 6-2
Nota :
G1D Power station The end set with the shortest lDL3p will be
Al ZOUR conditions (will reclose first if conditions OK)
Line I Line II
reclose second if conditions OK)
Line I
Line II
tDL3p = 10.0 sec tDL3p = 12.5 sec tDL3p

Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
Closed Closed
Line I Line II Opened
Al FADHILI Closed Closed
tDL3p = 10.0 sec tDL3p = 12.5 sec Opened
Line I Line II
L3 GHUNAN Back to Back Al JASRA

Line I Line II L4
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Line I Line II
tDL3p = 15.0 sec tDL3p =17.5 sec
Line I Line II
tDL3p = 15.0 sec tDL3p =17.5 sec

L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA Line I Line II

DOHA SOUTH
L13 L14
NOTE :
3 Phase AR is not applicable for Silla –
shuweihat feeders s L13 & L14 . Hence 3
pole auto reclose dead time is not indicated.
SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-3)
3 pole autoreclosing dead times (Cont)
Nota :
G1D Power station The end set with the shortest lDL3p will be
Al ZOUR conditions (will reclose first if conditions OK)
reclose second if conditions OK)
tDL3p
Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
Closed Closed
Opened
Opened

L4
Line I Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Line II
Line I Line I
tDL3p = 10.0 sec tDL3p = 14,5 sec
Line II Line II
L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA
tDL3p = 12,5 sec tDL3p = 17 sec
DOHA SOUTH
Line I Line II
L13 L14
Line I Line II

SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-4)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
Live Bus-Dead Line

Live Bus-Live Line

(Will reclose second) L1 L2
Al FADHILI
Live Bus-Live Line

Or Dead Bus Live Line Live Bus-Dead Line
(Will reclose second) (Will reclose first)
Live Bus-Dead Line


Live Bus-Live Line L4
Al JASRA
Live Bus-Dead Line L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
(Will reclose first) L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC Live Bus-Live Line
Live Bus-Live Line

L11 L12 L7 L8
Live Bus-Dead Line
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
L13 L14
SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-4)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
L1 L2
Al FADHILI

L4
Live Bus-Live Line

(Will reclose second) Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
Live Bus-Dead Line

L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
Live Bus-Live Line

L13 L14 Or Dead Bus Live Line
Live Bus-Dead Line

SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-5)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
tDL1p tDL3p
Closed Closed
L2 Opened
L1
Closed Closed

L4
Faults in Ghunan – Salwa line make 3
pole autoreclosing only (one shot)
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC

L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
Faults in the OHL section make 3 pole

autoreclosing only (one shot)
L13 L14
SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-5)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR
tDL1p tDL3p
Closed Closed
L2 Opened
L1
Closed Closed

L4

Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
L13 L14
t
SHUWEIHAT
DL1p = 0.400 sec tDL1p = 0.450 sec

Fig 6-6)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR Nota :
The Tie Breaker autorecloser is programmed to
tDL3p = 6.0 sec tDL3p = 8.5 sec tDL3p

Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
Closed Closed
Opened
Opened
tDL3p = 11 sec
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
tDL3p = 8.5 sec

L4
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
tDL3p = 18 sec
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
tDL3p = 15.5 sec

tDL3p = 11 sec
L11 L12 L7 L8
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
tDL3p = 8.5 sec
tDL3p = 6.0 sec
L13 L14
SHUWEIHAT

Fig 6-6)
G1D Power station
Al ZOUR Nota :
The Tie Breaker autorecloser is programmed to
tDL3p
Closed Closed
L1 L2 Opened
Closed Closed
Opened
Opened

L4
tDL3p = 18.5 sec

Al JASRA
L5 RAQ MEW Bahrein
L9
SALWA L6
OHL L10 UGC
tDL3p = 16.0 sec
tDL3p = 11.0 sec
L11 L12 L7 L8
tDL3p = 13.5 sec
SILAA
DOHA SOUTH
L13 L14 tDL3p = 13.5 sec
SHUWEIHAT

6(a)-3) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault
1/6
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Single
occurs opening phR opening
(2)
SILLA
o
o

2/6
CB Opened
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
SILLA
Important note :


reclosing)

3/6
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

4/6
station A and B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
After a time delay (dead
time at SALWA set longer
MiCOM P544 that at SILLA this breaker
R ph trip
S ph trip makes a single pole
T ph trip closing ph R
Differential trip (with no voltage control)

(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the single pole closing ph R
(2)
(3) SILLA

5/6
and B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
MiCOM P544
T ph trip
Differential trip

(1)
(3)
SILLA
The dead time is given in page 6(a)-
10 (same dead time as for 3 pole
auto reclosing sequence)

6/6
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Unsuccessful reclosing 1/7
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Single
(2)
SILLA
o
o

Unsuccessful reclosing (Cont.) 2/7
CB Opening
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip Phase R is
T ph trip deenergised
Differential trip
(1)
SILLA

Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

station A and B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip After a time delay (dead
Force 3 pole trip (2) time at SALWA set longer
that at SILLA this breaker
MiCOM P544 makes a single pole
R ph trip
S ph trip closing ph R
T ph trip (with no voltage control)
Differential trip

(1) single pole closing ph R
When the switch is in BCU position, the (with no voltage control)
(2)
(3)
Refer to 017048 SLCC0 48EE 0001 SILLA

Fault appears again
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Fault has

When the switch is in BCU position, the not been
autorecloser in specified by the BCU cleared !
(2)
SILLA

Fault is persisting
When the new trip signals are received,

the main autorecloser will send lockout and
forced 3 pole trip to main relays.
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole tripping and
T ph trip lockout
Differential trip
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the Force 3 pole signal is still present, 3 pole tripping and
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the both distance and line differential Lockout
autorecloser in specified by the BCU relay will trip 3 pole
(2)
SILLA

Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA
Note:- The case will be similar for Multi phase

faults as the first reclose will be 3 pole and
subsequent 3 pole closing will be first from
SILLA then SALWA. At closing fault will be
present and System will go 3 pole trip and
lockout.

6(a)-5) Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault
1/8
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault (Cont.)
2/8
CB Opening
Initiation of
autoreclosers
takes place
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA
o
o

3/8
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

4/8
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Before closing, the

autorecloser in specified by the BCU (MiCOM P841) will check that
Live Bus / Dead Line
(2)
condition is fulfilled :
Goose signal (IEC 61850) Closing will occur as
(between protection relays only) conditions are fulfilled
(3) (magnitude, phase angle and
April 2008 - page 23 frequency)
c
Note:- If the fault is still present on closing of main CB at SILLA,

definitive trip and autorecloser lockout will occur. The other end
autorecloser will not be able to close and will also lockout

5/8
Tie CB reclosing at End A
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip

(1)
SILLA

6/8
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Before closing, the
Force 3 pole trip (2) autorecloser/voltage control
MiCOM P544 (MiCOM P841) will check that
R ph trip Live Bus / Live Line or
S ph trip
T ph trip Dead Bus/Live Line condition
Differential trip is fulfilled.
Force 3 pole trip (2) Closing will not occur as long
from the remote end.
(1) Note that, although this is not

When the switch is in BCU position, the strictly required for correct
SALWA is set longer than the
(2) dead time at SILLA.
(3)

7/8
Tie CB reclosing at station B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip When the Live Bus / Live Line
T ph trip condition is fulfilled (because
Zone 1 or Zone 2 CR trip closing at the other end was
Force 3 pole trip (2) successful), closing occurs.
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

8/8
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

6(a)-6) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault (Main CB open)
1/6
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole
T ph trip opening
Differential trip
(1) Single
(2)
SILLA
o
o

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault Main CB open
(cont.) 2/6
CB Opened
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
SILLA
Important note :


reclosing)

(cont.) 3/6
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

(cont.) 4/6
station A
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
Force 3 pole trip (2) After a single pole dead
time this breaker makes a
(1) as it is priority station.
(2)
(3) SILLA

(cont.) 5/6
and B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
MiCOM P544
T ph trip
Differential trip

(1)
(3)
SILLA

(cont.) 6/6
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

6(a)-7) Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Main CB open
1/6
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Main CB open (Cont.)
2/6
CB Opening
Initiation of
autoreclosers
takes place
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole
T ph trip opening
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA
o
o

3/6
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

4/6
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
T ph trip
Differential trip condition is fulfilled :
frequency)
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the If the fault is still present on
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the closing, definitive trip and
autorecloser lockout will
(2) occur. The other end
Signal transmitted through wiring and autorecloser will not be able
(between protection relays only) to close and will also lockout
(3)

5/6
Tie CB reclosing
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
c
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip sides of the breaker and if
S ph trip the voltage conditions are
T ph trip
Differential trip
angle, frequency) then
closing will occur.

(1)
SILLA

6/6
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

6(a)-8) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault (Tie CB open)
1/6
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip Single pole
T ph trip opening ph R
Differential trip
(1) Single
(2)
SILLA
o
o

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault Tie CB open (cont.)
2/6
CB Opened
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
SILLA
Important note :


reclosing)

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault Tie CB open
(cont.) 3/6
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault Tie CB open (cont.)
4/6
station A and B
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
Main (Bus) CB 3 separate closing c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
time at Silla set longer
MiCOM P544 that at Salwa this breaker
R ph trip
S ph trip
makes a single pole
T ph trip closing ph R

(1)
(2)
(3) SILLA
c

(cont.) 5/6
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip

(1)
(3)
SILLA

(cont.) 6/6
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

6(a)-9) Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Tie CB open
1/6
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Tie CB open (Cont.)
2/6
CB Opening
Initiation of
autoreclosers
takes place
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
Main (Bus) CB 3 separate closing o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole
T ph trip
Differential trip opening
(1)
(2)
SILLA
o
o

3/6
Dead time
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Tie CB open(Cont.)
4/6
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
T ph trip
Differential trip condition is fulfilled :
frequency)
(1)
When the switch is in BCU position, the If the fault is still present on
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the closing, definitive trip and
autorecloser lockout will
(2) occur. The other end
Signal transmitted through wiring and autorecloser will not be able
(between protection relays only) to close and will also lockout
(3)

Autoreclosing sequence in case of phase to phase fault Tie CB open(Cont.)
5/6
Tie CB reclosing
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
Main (Bus) CB 3 separate closing c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip Before closing, the
T ph trip autorecloser/voltage
control (MiCOM P841)
will check that Live Bus
R ph trip
MiCOM P544 / Live Line or Dead BUS
S ph trip /Live Line condition is
T ph trip
Differential trip fulfilled :
(magnitude, phase
angle and frequency)
(1)
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p) of the the end of the reclaim time If there is voltage on both
autorecloser in specified by the BCU sides of the breaker and if
(2) the voltage conditions are
Signal transmitted through wiring and fulfilled (magnitude, phase
Goose signal (IEC 61850) angle, frequency) then
closing will occur.
SILLA

6/6
Final situation
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SILLA

1/6
Fault Occurs
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1) Single
autorecloser in specified by the BCU earth fault
occurs
(2)
Signal transmitted through wiring and Single pole
Goose signal (IEC 61850) opening phR
SHUWEIHAT

2/6
CB Opened
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
Important note :

SHUWEIHAT
reclosing)

3/6
Dead time
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SHUWEIHAT

4/6
station A and B
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p c
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
time at Silla set longer
MiCOM P544 that at Shuweihat this
R ph trip
S ph trip breaker makes a single
T ph trip pole closing ph R

(1) single pole closing ph R
(2)
(3)
SHUWEIHAT

5/6
and B
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
c
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
MiCOM P544
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
(3)
SHUWEIHAT

6/6
Final situation
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SHUWEIHAT

6(a)-4) Autoreclosing sequence in case of multi phase to earth fault
1/3
Fault Occurs
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SHUWEIHAT

Autoreclosing sequence in case of multi phase to earth fault (contd.)
2/3
CB Opened
Initiation of
autoreclosers
takes place
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
Goose signal (IEC 61850) 3 pole
(between protection relays only) opening and
Lockout
SHUWEIHAT

Autoreclosing sequence in case of multi phase to earth fault (contd.)
3/3
Final situation
SILLA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
Differential trip
(1)
(2)
SHUWEIHAT
Note: As Shuweihat is only 1 pole autoreclose is allowed, for any 2 or 3 phase fault it will
go for lockout trip and being priority side no line charging (closing on Live Bus-Dead Line)
will take place and consequently at SILLA will also no AR will take place, because
condition of Live line will not be fulfilled.
6(a)-3) Autoreclosing sequence in case of single phase to earth fault or Multi Phase fault
with Switch selection in OFF 1/2
Fault Occurs
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
o
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p o
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip 3 pole
T ph trip opening
Differential trip
Three pole
opening as Ar
switch in OFF
will force 3
(1) Single
When the switch is in BCU position, the pole trip only.
phase R to
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p or OFF)
of the autorecloser in specified by the earth fault 3 pole
BCU or Multi opening
(2) phase fault
Goose signal (IEC 61850) occurs
SILLA
o
o

CB Opening
Initiation for single

phase Fault
SALWA
MiCOM P841
(1)
authorized
(priority)
Reclose
MiCOM P841
1p 3p 1p/3p
(1)
MiCOM P443
R ph trip
S ph trip
T ph trip
MiCOM P544
R ph trip
S ph trip Line is out of
T ph trip service.
Differential trip
(1)
operating mode (1p, 3p, 1/3p or OFF)
of the autorecloser in specified by the
BCU
(2)
SILLA

7) Appendix Phase I
In the following, appendix are given :
Appendix 7-1 : Description of the distance relay phase selection in case of simultaneous fault on the two parallel lines
Appendix 7-2 : Bibliography concerning the increase of zone 1 reach in case of parallel line open and earthed at both ends.
Appendix 7-3 : Summary of protection philosophy settings
Appendix 7-4 : Calculation of distance zone reach

7-1) Simultaneous faults on parallel lines
7-1-1) General
The 400kV parallel lines of GCCIA network are supported by a unique Gantry.
There is a possibility that a fault on say phase R of line I would create a fault on phase S of line II.
See fig. below.
This can occur typically in case of direct lightning stroke on a conductor, followed by a flashover of the insulating support
which makes an increase of the gantry voltage and, in return, a second flashover on the parallel line.
The line I should normally be tripped single phase (phase R) by both distance and line differential relays
The line II should normally be tripped single phase (phase S) by both distance and line differential relays
As no special care is taken, distance relays A I and A II will make a 3 pole tripping of the two parallel lines, and jeopardize
the correct phase selection of the line differential relays.
The result is that the two parallel line are tripped 3 phase (and make autoreclose) with loss of network synchronism power
during the dead time. See description of the reason of incorrect phase selection in § 7-1-2).
A time delay on tripping for a fault in zone 2 with carrier receive could be introduced in order to solve the incorrect phase
selection. See description in § 7-1-3)
The time delay as described in 7-1-3) is not used for following reasons :
- keep fast tripping in case of fault in zone 2 with Carrier receive,

- Low occurrence of lightning stoke faults
Therefore the incorrect phase selection for simultaneous faults on parallel line has to be accepted be accepted
R R R R
S S S S
T T T T Line
Line II
Line II
Line I
Line I
Distance relay A I
differential
relay
AI A II
Zone 1 reach of
distance relay A I
Zone 2 reach of
distance relay A I
Transfer trip signal

between distance relay
A I and B I (Permissive
Overreach Z2)
BI B II
Zone 1 reach of
distance relay B I
Distance relay B I

7-1-2) Incorrect phase selection of distances relays
As described below, the distance relay of line I at end A would make a 3 pole trip because the fault in line II is seen
in zone 2.
The situation would be as follow :

The phase segregates line differential relay of line I will make a correct tripping on phase R
The Distance relay of line I at end A will make a 3pole trip
For the same reasons the distance relay of line I at end A would also make a 3 pole trip.
1) Because the fault on line I is

seen in Zone 1 phase R by the
distance relay B I, POR
(Permissive Overreach Zone 2)
authorization signal is sent to
the distance relay A I
AI A II
2) Because the distance relay A I also
Line II
Line I
see the line II fault in zone 2 phase S,

3p tripping will occur when the Carrier
signal will be received
(Zone 2+CR is not time delay)
R S
BI B II

7-1-3) Relay settings to avoid incorrect phase selection (for memory only)
In order to avoid 3 pole trip of distance relay A I, a time delay of 100ms of the Z2+CR trip could have been applied.
The time delay must be sufficient to allow the line differential relay of line II and/or the zone 1 of distance relay B II to
trip first, before the decision to trip in Z2+CR is taken.
The time delay of Z2+CR is determined as follow :
Line II Phase S Fault clearing time :

30ms (diff relay) + 70ms (Circuit breaker) = 100ms
Assuming that the fault on Line II will occur latest 20ms after the fault on line I, the fault on line II will be cleared
100ms+20ms = 120ms after the distance relay A II see the fault
Tripping decision of Distance relay A II in case of Z2+CR :
20ms (dist relay B I zone 2) + 20ms (POR signal transmission) + 120ms (time delay of Z2+CR) = 160ms
The 60ms margin between line II fault clearing time and tripping decision Z2+CR of distance relay A I will allow reset
of zone 2 distance element A I before the Z2+CR time delay elapsed.
The drawback of the Z2+CR time delay is that zone 2 with CR tripping time is increased.
This would actually not increase the fault clearing time under normal circumstances because the line is protected by
the phase segregated line differential relay (fault clearing time 100ms as shown above)
Only in case of line differential relay unavailability, the fault clearing time will be :
20ms (dist relay A I basic time) + 120ms (Z2+CR time delay) + 50msec (Circuit breaker) = 190ms instead of
20ms (dist relay A I base time) + 20ms (CR signal) + 50msec (Circuit breaker) = 90ms

distance relay B, POR transfer
trip signal is sent to the distance
relay A
AI A II
2) The fault on line II phase S is
Line II
Line I
cleared by the Line II differential

relay and zone 1 of distance
relay at B II after typically
100ms (see above description)
3) Because the fault on line II phase S

has been cleared, at the end of the
time delay of Z2+CR, the distance
relay at end A will only see the fault
on line I phase R and will trip the R S
correct phase
BI B II
The same description applies for
distance relay A II

7-2) Bibliography concerning the increase of zone 1 reach in case of parallel line open and
earthed at both ends.
Following is an extract of Network Protection & Automation Guide Edition July 2002 - ALSTOM

7-3) Protection Philosophy Summary
Following is the summary of the protection philosophy summary. This will be used as guidelines
for the coordination studies.

7-3) Protection Philosophy Summary Phase I
Following is the summary of the protection philosophy summary. This will be used as guidelines for the coordination studies.
PROTECTED PROTECTION PROTECTION SETTING PHILOSOPHY

ELEMENT FUNCTION PANEL
21 A Z1 = 70% of line impedance – time delay = 0s

Z2 = 125% of line impedance – time delay = 400ms
Z3 = minimum value between :
120% of (line impedance + longest adjacent line)
line impedance + 80% of global impedance of remote autotransformer if any
line impedance + shortest line connected to autotransformer in parallel + 80% of global
impedance of autotransformer (if no autotransformer at remote substation)
time delay = 800ms
Z4 = 20% of protected line – time delay = 800ms
Signaling scheme : Permissive Overreach (POR)
67N A IN> = 20% of CT rated primary current
TRANSMISSION DEF Directional forward : Angle = -30° : polarizing element = Negative Phase Sequence voltage
LINE Signaling scheme : Permissive Overreach (channel separated from distance element)
67N BU A IN> = 20% of CT rated primary current
Directional forward : Angle = -30° : polarizing element = Negative Phase Sequence voltage
Time delay : IEC Normal Inverse
TMS set to the highest of the two following values :
- TMS1 set to get a minimum tripping time of 1.5s for a fault on the remote end of the line (TMS
must be calculated for the maximum earth fault current
- TMS 2 set to get a minimum tripping time of 500ms for a fault on the close end of the line
87L B Differential current threshold must be set higher than the charging current of the line
Idiff> = 2.5 x I Charging
If charging current is low :
Idiff> = 20% of CT rated primary current

21 BU B Activated in case of communication failure
Z1 = 70% of line impedance
Only Z1 activated
67 BU B Activated in case of communication failure :
We recommend directional element as the protection must trip for fault on the line.
I> = Warning current of the OHL
TRANSMISSION must be calculated for the maximum phase to phase fault current
LINE - TMS 2 set to get a minimum tripping time of 500ms for a fault on the close end of the line
27/59 B Voltage tripping must occur after operation of the voltage regulation plan on the 400kV: primary
regulation, On load Tap Changer operation, secondary regulation (operation of shunt
reactance, load shedding).
we propose the following settings :
27 :Undervoltage
V< = 80% of rated voltage - time delay = 30s without intertripping of remote end
59 : Overvoltage
V> = 120% of rated voltage – time delay = 30s with intertripping of remote end
V>> = 140% of rated voltage – time delay = 2s with intertripping of remote end
87T + REF A Idiff> = set to 20% of rated current (Low impedance) - This value and tripping characteristic will
be adjusted depending on the On load Tap Changer voltage range in each coordination study
50/51 TT A This function is used to protect the tertiary winding against phase to phase fault:
50: The threshold and time delay must be graded with the downstream feeder protection (data
to be supplied by SNCL/GCCIA).
AUTOTRANSFORMER We propose to set the function as follow :
- I> = lower than the minimum phase to phase short circuit on the tertiary bus side
- Time delay : set to grade with downstream protection (coordination to be done in each
coordination study
51 : Set to 125% of In tertiary – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a minimum
tripping time of 0.5s for a fault on the tertiary bus side

50N/51N TT A This function is used to protect the tertiary winding against phase to earth fault :
50N: this function is not used as the protection must grade with downstream protection (data to
be supplied).
51N: IN> = 80% of the neutral resistor permanent current - time delay = IEC standard inverse.
TMS set to get a minimum tripping time of 2s for a fault on the tertiary bus side
32F/32R A Power flow from GCCIA network towards Utility (IMPORT) :
Alarm :
- 110% of Pn – Time delay = 10s
TRIP :
- Al Zour, 120% of Pn- 48,5 Hz*
- Al Jasra, 120% of Pn - 49,42 Hz*
- Doha, 120% of Pn - 49,16*
- Al Fadhili, 120% of Pn no trip
- Time delay = 10s
AUTOTRANSFORMER Power flow from Utility network towards GCCIA (EXPORT) :
Alarm :
-110% of Pn – Time delay = 10s
*Frequency thresholds provided by SNCL
87T + REF B Idiff> = set to 20% of rated current (Low impedance) - This value will be adjusted depending on
the On load Tap Changer voltage range
50/51HV B 50 : Set to 130% of through fault current – time delay = 0.1s
51 : Set to 120% of In – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a minimum tripping
time of 2s for the maximum through fault current
50N/51NHV B 50N : Not used as it could lead to spurious trip due to inrush current. Moreover fast clearance
time is provided by differential and REF protections.
51N: Set to 20% of In – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a tripping time of 2s
for a fault on the HV bus to grade with Back up overcurrent protections
810/81U B Data to be supplied according to frequency recovery plan

87R A Idiff> = set to 10-15% of rated CT rated current (high impedance principle)
87R B Idiff> = set to 10-15% of rated CT rated current (high impedance principle)
50/51 R B 50: Set to 250% of In – time delay = 0.1s
51: Set to 130% of In – time delay = IEC very inverse. TMS set to get a tripping time of 0.5s for
a fault close to the reactor bushings
50N/51N R B 50N: Not used as it could lead to spurious trip due to inrush current. Moreover fast clearance
SHUNT REACTOR time is provided by differential protections.
51N: Set to 20% of In – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a tripping time of
0.5s for a fault close to the reactor bushings
50AL/51N B 50 AL :
Set to 10% of In – time delay = 5s to avoid alarm signaling during single pole autoreclose
following phase to earth fault on the 400kV network
51N : Set to 20% of In Reactor – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a tripping
time of 2s for a fault on the HV bus to grade with Back up OHL overcurrent protections

7- 4) Calculation of distance zone reach
Following is the zone reach calculation according to setting philosophy. These settings will be adjusted on detailed coordination studies of
each substation.

7(a) Appendix (Phase III)
In the following, appendix are given :
Appendix 7(a)-1 : Description of the distance relay phase selection in case of simultaneous fault on the two parallel lines
Appendix 7(a)-2 : Bibliography concerning the increase of zone 1 reach in case of parallel line open and earthed at both
ends.
Appendix 7(a)-3 : Summary of protection philosophy settings
Appendix 7(a)-4 : Calculation of distance zone reach

7(a)-1) Simultaneous faults on parallel lines
7(a)-1-1) General
The 400kV parallel lines of GCCIA network are supported by a unique Gantry.
There is a possibility that a fault on say phase R of line I would create a fault on phase S of line II.
See fig. below.
This can occur typically in case of direct lightning stroke on a conductor, followed by a flashover of the insulating support
which makes an increase of the gantry voltage and, in return, a second flashover on the parallel line.
The line I should normally be tripped single phase (phase R) by both distance and line differential relays
The line II should normally be tripped single phase (phase S) by both distance and line differential relays
As no special care is taken, distance relays A I and A II will make a 3 pole tripping of the two parallel lines, and jeopardize
the correct phase selection of the line differential relays.
The result is that the two parallel line are tripped 3 phase (and make autoreclose) with loss of network synchronism power
during the dead time. See description of the reason of incorrect phase selection in § 7(a)-1-2).
A time delay on tripping for a fault in zone 2 with carrier receive could be introduced in order to solve the incorrect phase
selection. See description in § 7(a)-1-3)
The time delay as described in 7(a)-1-3) is not used for following reasons :
- keep fast tripping in case of fault in zone 2 with Carrier receive,

- Low occurrence of lightning stoke faults
Therefore the incorrect phase selection for simultaneous faults on parallel line has to be accepted .
R R R R
S S S S
T T T T Line
Line II
Line II
Line I
Line I
Distance relay A I
differential
relay
AI A II
Zone 1 reach of
distance relay A I
Zone 2 reach of
distance relay A I
Transfer trip signal

between distance relay
A I and B I (Permissive
Overreach Z2)
BI B II
Zone 1 reach of
distance relay B I
Distance relay B I

7(a)-1-2) Incorrect phase selection of distances relays
As described below, the distance relay of line I at end A would make a 3 pole trip because the fault in line II is seen
in zone 2.
The situation would be as follow :

The phase segregates line differential relay of line I will make a correct tripping on phase R
The Distance relay of line I at end A will make a 3pole trip
For the same reasons the distance relay of line I at end A would also make a 3 pole trip.

distance relay B I, POR
(Permissive Overreach Zone 2)
authorization signal is sent to
the distance relay A I
AI A II
2) Because the distance relay A I also
Line II
Line I
see the line II fault in zone 2 phase S,

3p tripping will occur when the Carrier
signal will be received
(Zone 2+CR is not time delay)
R S
BI B II

7(a)-1-3) Relay settings to avoid incorrect phase selection (for memory only)
In order to avoid 3 pole trip of distance relay A I, a time delay of 100ms of the Z2+CR trip could have been applied.
The time delay must be sufficient to allow the line differential relay of line II and/or the zone 1 of distance relay B II to
trip first, before the decision to trip in Z2+CR is taken.
The time delay of Z2+CR is determined as follow :
Line II Phase S Fault clearing time :

30ms (diff relay) + 70ms (Circuit breaker) = 100ms
Assuming that the fault on Line II will occur latest 20ms after the fault on line I, the fault on line II will be cleared
100ms+20ms = 120ms after the distance relay A II see the fault
Tripping decision of Distance relay A II in case of Z2+CR :
20ms (dist relay B I zone 2) + 20ms (POR signal transmission) + 120ms (time delay of Z2+CR) = 160ms
The 60ms margin between line II fault clearing time and tripping decision Z2+CR of distance relay A I will allow reset
of zone 2 distance element A I before the Z2+CR time delay elapsed.
The drawback of the Z2+CR time delay is that zone 2 with CR tripping time is increased.
This would actually not increase the fault clearing time under normal circumstances because the line is protected by
the phase segregated line differential relay (fault clearing time 100ms as shown above)
Only in case of line differential relay unavailability, the fault clearing time will be :
20ms (dist relay A I basic time) + 120ms (Z2+CR time delay) + 50msec (Circuit breaker) = 190ms instead of
20ms (dist relay A I base time) + 20ms (CR signal) + 50msec (Circuit breaker) = 90ms

distance relay B, POR transfer
trip signal is sent to the distance
relay A
AI A II
2) The fault on line II phase S is
Line II
Line I
cleared by the Line II differential

relay and zone 1 of distance
relay at B II after typically
100ms (see above description)
3) Because the fault on line II phase S

has been cleared, at the end of the
time delay of Z2+CR, the distance
relay at end A will only see the fault
on line I phase R and will trip the R S
correct phase
BI B II
The same description applies for
distance relay A II

7(a)-2) Bibliography concerning the increase of zone 1 reach in case of parallel line open and
earthed at both ends.
Following is an extract of Network Protection & Automation Guide Edition July 2002 - ALSTOM

7(a)-3) Protection Philosophy Summary
Following is the summary of the protection philosophy summary. This will be used as guidelines
for the coordination studies.

7-3) Protection Philosophy Summary Phase III
Following is the summary of the protection philosophy summary. This will be used as guidelines for the coordination studies.
PROTECTED PROTECTION PROTECTION SETTING PHILOSOPHY

ELEMENT FUNCTION PANEL
21 A Z1 = 70% of line impedance – time delay = 0s

Z2 = 125% of line impedance – time delay = 400ms
Z3 = minimum value between :
120% of (line impedance + longest adjacent line)
line impedance + 80% of global impedance of remote autotransformer if any
line impedance + shortest line connected to autotransformer in parallel + 80% of global
impedance of autotransformer (if no autotransformer at remote substation)
time delay = 800ms
Z4 = 20% of protected line – time delay = 800ms
Signaling scheme : Permissive Overreach (POR)
67N A IN> = 20% of CT rated primary current
TRANSMISSION DEF Directional forward : Angle = -45°: polarizing element = Negative Phase Sequence voltage
LINE Signaling scheme : Permissive Overreach (channel separated from distance element)
67N BU A IN> = 20% of CT rated primary current
Directional forward : Angle = -45°: polarizing element = Negative Phase Sequence voltage
must be calculated for the maximum earth fault current
- TMS 2 set to get a minimum tripping time of 500ms for a fault on the close end of the line
87L B Differential current threshold must be set higher than the charging current of the line
Idiff> = 2.5 x I Charging
If charging current is low :
Idiff> = 20% of CT rated primary current

21 BU B Activated in case of communication failure
Z1 = 70% of line impedance
Only Z1 activated
67 BU B Activated in case of communication failure :
We recommend directional element as the protection must trip for fault on the line.
I> = Warning current of the OHL
Time delay : IEC Normal Inverse ; Angle = 45°
TRANSMISSION must be calculated for the maximum phase to phase fault current
LINE - TMS 2 set to get a minimum tripping time of 500ms for a fault on the close end of the line
27/59 B Voltage tripping must occur after operation of the voltage regulation plan on the 400kV: primary
regulation, On load Tap Changer operation, secondary regulation (operation of shunt
reactance, load shedding).
we propose the following settings :
27 :Undervoltage
V< = 80% of rated voltage - time delay = 30s without intertripping of remote end
59 : Overvoltage
V> = 120% of rated voltage – time delay = 30s with intertripping of remote end
V>> = 140% of rated voltage – time delay = 2s with intertripping of remote end
32F/32R A Power flow from GCCIA network towards Utility (IMPORT) :
Alarm :
- 110% of Pn – Time delay = 10s
TRANSMISSION TRIP :
LINE (L13 & L14 only) -60MW – 48,4 Hz*
Power flow from Utility network towards GCCIA (EXPORT) :
Alarm :
-110% of Pn – Time delay = 10s
*Frequency thresholds provided by GCCIA

87R A Idiff> = set to 10-15% of rated CT rated current (high impedance principle)
87R B Idiff> = set to 10-15% of rated CT rated current (high impedance principle)
50/51 R B 50: Set to 250% of In – time delay = 0.1s
51: Set to 130% of In – time delay = IEC very inverse. TMS set to get a tripping time of 0.5s for
a fault close to the reactor bushings
50N/51N R B 50N: Not used as it could lead to spurious trip due to inrush current. Moreover fast clearance
SHUNT REACTOR time is provided by differential protections.
51N: Set to 20% of In – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a tripping time of
0.5s for a fault close to the reactor bushings
50AL/51N B 50 AL :
Set to 10% of In – time delay = 5s to avoid alarm signaling during single pole autoreclose
following phase to earth fault on the 400kV network
51N : Set to 20% of In Reactor – time delay = IEC standard inverse. TMS set to get a tripping
time of 2s for a fault on the HV bus to grade with Back up OHL overcurrent protections

7- 4) Calculation of distance zone reach
Following is the zone reach calculation according to setting philosophy. These settings will be adjusted on detailed coordination studies of
each substation.

GCCIA Cyber Security Language
1.1.1 Cyber Security Target Asset Procurement Specification
1. The Supplier will provide sufficient documentation for the Target Asset describing a typical asset
composition and data flow. The documentation shall identify and describe any engineering control
methods that are recommended by the Supplier to mitigate any weaknesses or vulnerabilities for the
Target Asset.
2. The Supplier shall document the specific Target Asset cyber security features, functions, and
capabilities that are provided by the Supplier as part of the Target Asset in each control method, and
the specific aspects of the control method that are required to be implemented by [GCCIA].
3. The Supplier shall recommend [GCCIA] shared control methods for mitigation of any unresolved
vulnerabilities or weaknesses identified for the Target Asset.
4. The Supplier is fully responsible for the Target Asset cyber security features, functions, and
capabilities of the Target Asset that are provided by the Supplier. This shall include any control
methods that are identified in item 2
1.1.2 Secure Development Integration and Delivery (SDID) Procurement Specification
All supplier’s work on digital computers, digital components, digital control systems, digital
communications systems, and digital networks installed or planned to be installed at [GCCIA’s facility] are
subject to the requirements of this contract. The purpose of these requirements is to protect new and
existing plant systems and networks from cyber-attacks that would act to modify, destroy, or compromise
the integrity or confidentiality of data, software, or equipment; deny access to systems, services, or data;
and impact the operation of systems, networks, and plant equipment. These requirements are applied
during the development, integration, and delivery life-cycle phases.
Requirements for Suppliers providing Digital Equipment and Software during the development,
integration, implementation, testing, and construction phases at their facilities.
Supplier shall document that it established and maintained a Secure Development, Integration, and
Delivery (SDID) environment throughout the development, testing, and delivery phases for digital
computers, digital components, digital control systems, digital communications systems, and digital
networks planned to be installed or modified at [GCCIA’s] facility. This responsibility ends at the conclusion
of the warranty phase provided Delivery to [GCCIA] is complete.
1. The Supplier shall provide documentation of a cyber security program for SDID that includes a cyber
security strategy, policies, and procedures with roles and responsibilities clearly identified.
2. The Supplier shall provide documentation of Software and Hardware development and integration
practices including standards applied to Supplier provided Platform and Application Equipment and
Software which have been and will be used to ensure a high level of defense against unauthorized
access and the insertion of unauthorized Software, Malware, or Equipment components.
3. The Supplier shall implement and provide documentation of a methodology for identifying
development assets and development asset attack surface weaknesses or vulnerabilities, and
mitigation of those associated with development asset attack surfaces using both target asset
engineered control methods and shared control methods (technical, operational, or administrative)
that include protect, detect, and respond & recover security functions. This includes temporary
connections from transient assets.
4. The Supplier shall implement and provide documentation of a methodology for incorporating risk
including a method for target asset and development asset consequence analysis.
5. The Supplier shall implement and provide documentation of a defense in depth architecture that
includes segmentation and isolation with physical and logical boundaries including separation of
business networks and applications from development assets to protect against social engineering
attacks.
6. The Supplier shall implement a program for secure remote access when access to target assets or
development assets is required from outside established logical and physical boundaries.
7. The Supplier shall institute a program to formally review and resolve compilation, configuration,
security, and error logs during the development cycle, startup testing, factory acceptance testing and
applicable regression testing.
8. The Supplier shall implement a configuration management and change control procedure that includes
establishing and documenting a known good baseline configuration with methods for restoring assets
to a known good baseline configuration for both the target asset/system and development assets.
9. The Supplier shall implement logical access control methods to ensure that only properly authenticated
and authorized personnel are allowed access to target assets and development assets that includes
the capability to protect, detect, and respond & recover from unauthorized access that include access
control lists and access control methods that incorporate identity and account management, least
privilege, separation of duties, and authenticator management where feasible.
10. The Supplier shall implement physical security access control methods to ensure that only properly
authenticated and authorized personnel are allowed access to target assets and development assets
that includes the capability to protect, detect, and respond & recover from unauthorized access, and
unauthorized personnel from gaining access to target asset storage areas. Asset handling and storage
facilities, laydown yards, and transportation vehicles should have physical barriers and deterrents that
guard against unauthorized access. Both temporary and permanent storage areas should have the
same physical security.
11. The Supplier shall implement a comprehensive personnel security training program appropriate to
each job role that includes cyber security awareness and cyber security procedure training as part of
employment, and periodic cyber security awareness and cyber security procedure training conducted
at least annually, when any procedures have changed, or in support of incident response or corrective
action.
12. The Supplier shall implement a role-based personnel security procedure for unescorted access
(electronic or physical) to the development environment including pre-employment verification,
background checks/investigations, and personnel termination procedures that include procedures to
immediately remove identification, facility, and system access for terminated employees.
13. The Supplier shall implement a visitor access control procedure including awareness and training,
escorted access, and control of visitor transient devices such as vendor laptops.
14. The Supplier shall strictly control the possession and use of Transient Assets within the development
environment. All Equipment and Software shall be screened for Malware prior to entry into the
development environment.
15. The Supplier shall maintain a detailed Software inventory at all times during the development phase
that includes a formal method to introduce and remove Software from the development
environment. This inventory process will include tagging of Software objects with cryptographic
hashes. This inventory, with supporting configuration management documentation, shall be available
for inspection by the [GCCIA].
16. Third-party Software integrated into Supplier’s products shall be assessed and mitigated for security
vulnerabilities. This shall include scans for vulnerabilities and unauthorized codes and functions. The
scans may be implemented via a commercial malware and forensic scanning, source and binary code
vulnerability scanners, and forensic analysis system tools.
17. The Supplier shall conduct an independent security assessment of the Supplier’s SDID program and
provide detailed results in report format, including any immediate and planned corrective actions, to
[GCCIA]. This assessment will be based on [GCCIA Specified Requirements].
18. The Supplier shall remove or disable all Software components on custom developed Software that are
not required for the operation and maintenance of the component or system prior to the Factory
Acceptance Test (FAT) including documentation of what is removed or disabled.
19. At Secure Delivery, the Supplier shall provide a complete inventory of all Software objects, including
firmware with cryptographic hash tags to establish a baseline.
20. The Supplier shall conduct a security assessment, including vulnerability, Malware, and forensic scans
of the Supplier’s FAT target asset/system prior to the commencement of FAT. This assessment will be
based on the requirements of the [GCCIA Specified Requirements] and any specified Cyber Security
Functional and Design Requirements. The results, including any immediate and planned corrective
actions, shall be provided to the [GCCIA].
21. The Supplier shall test and verify Cyber Security Functional and Design Requirements during the FAT.
22. At the successful conclusion of the FAT, Supplier shall deliver the following items to [GCCIA] with the
Target Asset/System or component in an importable database, XML, or XLS format:
a. An inventory of all Software utilized in the FAT
b. A cryptographic hash tag for all Software
c. A date-time stamped list of all Software
d. A tested disaster recovery saved set of all Software.
23. The Supplier shall implement a procedure for security advisories, vulnerability assessments, and patch
management for target assets and development assets.
24. All sub-tier suppliers shall be on the approved supplier list that is vetted according to the GCCIA’s
procurement procedures. The sub-tier suppliers should meet cyber security requirements that include
the requirements from this methodology.
25. The Supplier shall apply appropriate aspects of the supplier cyber security program to sub-tier
suppliers including use of this procurement methodology.
26. The Supplier shall implement methods for verifying the authenticity of sub-tier supplier code, libraries,
objects, and hardware including track and trace programs to establish provenance of all parts,
components and systems.
27. The Supplier shall implement sub-tier supplier inspections/audits to verify processes and
implementation.
28. The Supplier will maintain the FAT tested target asset/system without modification until installation
and acceptance of the system by [GCCIA]. Should modifications be required prior to acceptance,
Supplier shall re-perform applicable portions of the FAT test including the security assessment.
29. The Supplier shall implement a contingency plan and disaster recovery policies and procedures that
include an alternate storage site and incident response including control methods for response and
recovery from unauthorized activities.
30. The Supplier shall retain records to include, but are not limited to, all digital records, log files, audit
files, and non-digital records that capture, record, and analyze security events and vulnerabilities
associated with items delivered to [GCCIA] and the development assets used to develop and produce
them. These records shall document the access history to these items and development assets, and
may be used to discover the source of cyber-attacks or other security-related incidents affecting
Target Assets.
31. The supplier shall retain superseded portions of these records for at least 3 years after the record is
superseded.
32. [GCCIA] reserves its right under this Contract to perform periodic reviews, surveillances, inspections,
and audits of Supplier’s Facilities as well as procedures for and Supplier’s performance related to the
security of Software and Equipment within the development environment for Secure Delivery under
the Contract.
Requirements for Suppliers providing Digital Equipment and Software during the delivery, receipt,
handling and storage to and from their facilities
Secure Delivery to [GCCIA]
1. The Supplier shall provide a Certificate of Analysis (C of A) where appropriate, and a Certificate of
Conformance (C of C) to certify that the target asset or services meets the cyber requirements of this
contract or purchase order.
2. The Supplier shall utilize physical packaging so that a tamper seal can be affixed to the package in
order to detect (or provide resistance to tampering, if feasible) any attempt at unauthorized physical
access to the target asset. Tamper seals shall be certified to ISO 17712-2013, “Freight containers –
Mechanical Seals” or ISO 18185 Freight Containers – Electronic Seals. Higher consequence target
assets shall utilize High-security or Security seals as applicable.
3. The Supplier shall clearly label the target asset to identify the shipping method, the sender, and
intended recipient. Accompanying documentation should clearly identify the enclosed contents,
provide tamper seal details and instructions, electronic verification and decryption instructions for
electronic files, and reference the GCCIA’s procurement identifiers. The accompanying
documentation shall include at least the following:
a. Associated tamper seal unique number and inspection instructions (if applied)
b. Number of items and inventory in the package or software inventory
c. Model name, Model number, part number, description, number of units, and serial number for
each item
d. Certifications and Test results including cyber security requirements from the contract or
purchase order
e. Purchase order/procurement number
f. Invoice number and date
g. Date shipped, From/To
h. Shipper contact details (if applicable)
i. Shipping/freight company package identifier, name, and contact details (if applicable)
4. The Supplier shall implement cryptographic methods to allow [GCCIA] to verify the authenticity of
digital files and software.
5. The Supplier shall implement encryption for secure transmittal of digital files and software including
secure cryptographic key management.
Secure Receipt from Sub-Tier Suppliers
1. The Supplier shall require sub-tier suppliers to meet the requirements of this section where feasible.
2. The Supplier shall implement receipt inspection procedures to confirm that the item received
conforms to purchase order, contract, and supplier documentation Number of items in the package
including:
a. Model name, Model number, part number, description, number of units, and serial number for
each item
b. Certifications and Test results
c. Purchase order/procurement number
d. Invoice number and date
e. Date shipped, From/To
f. Shipper contact details
g. Shipping/freight company package identifier, name, and contact details
h. Tamper seal inspection:
– Verifying tamper seal unique number
– Evidence of tampering
i. Verifying electronic files using the supplier cryptographic control methods such as a
cryptographic hash or digital signatures.
j. Verifying target asset security features and functions through review of documentation.
k. Documentation of any out of specification conditions
l. Written name of person conducting receipt inspection, signature, and date
3. The Supplier shall implement secure receipt of digital files and software with a secure software
electronic storage area.
[GCCIA] Receipt Inspection and Acceptance
1. [GCCIA] reserves the right to perform malware scans as part of its Receipt Inspection of Software and
Equipment prior to Acceptance of Delivery of Software and Equipment. Receipt Inspections may be
conducted in whole or in part at the Supplier’s facility prior to shipment or at [GCCIA] Facilities upon
receipt.
2. [GCCIA] shall reject Delivery and return the Software and/or Equipment to Contractor for correction
or replacement if Malware is detected prior to Acceptance of Delivery or transfer tamper detection
mechanisms are compromised.
3. Supplier shall be responsible for the detection and removal of Malware, the certification that
corrected Software or Equipment meets the Specifications and Warranties of the Contract, preparing
complete documentation of the corrective work and testing performed to ensure the fitness of the
corrected Software or Equipment, and the Secure Delivery of the corrected or replacement Software
or Equipment to [GCCIA], all at Supplier’s sole expense.
Definitions
Target Asset: Digital computers, digital components, digital control systems, digital communications
systems, and digital networks that may be decomposed into digital sub-components such as
software or hardware modules that are being purchased for installation in the [buyer’s] facility
including materials, components, parts/replacement parts, (including any software permanently
embedded therein), tools, computer hardware, or other goods furnished, supplied, or otherwise
delivered by supplier.
Data Flow: The directions, pathways, methods, and states (in transit or at rest) of critical data as it
flows through a target asset’s data topology.
Shared Control Methods – methods of control that are not integrated in the target asset. The
methods can be shared between multiple devices/facilities. Examples of shared control methods:
company policies, security devices (data diodes, firewalls), etc.
Engineered Control Methods - methods of control that are integrated in the target asset. The
methods are the devices features, functions, and capabilities that are a part of the target asset.
Examples of engineering control methods: Key lock for programming, passwords built-in to the
target asset, log files, etc.
20-11-2022
SDH and PDH Replacement for GCCIA’s
Telecommunication Network
Tender No. 303/2022
Network Topology

Volume III - Technical Specifiction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume III - Technical Specifiction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume III - Technical Specifiction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gulf Cooperation Council ‫هيئة الربط الكهربائي لدول مجلس‬

400kV Oman Direct Link Project

Document Document Document Document

Employer’s Requirements- Standard Requirements

Name Signature Date

Document Number Revision Issue Date

ODL – 31800 – EPE – TPSS – TSP - 0001 00 09.07.2024

VOLUME III- TABLE OF CONTENT

400kV Oman Direct Link Project

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

11 COMMON REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUPPLY 16

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

Annex 01 – Drawings Title Block 29

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

2 CODES AND STANDARDS

American National Standards Institute Inc. (ANSI)

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

Association for Materials Protection and Performance (AMPP)

ANSI/AWS D1.1 American Welding Society- Structural Welding Code - Steel

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental Testing – Part 3-3: Supporting documentation and

SSPC – Vol. I SSPC Painting Manual -Vol I: Good Painting Practice.

Compliance with Specification

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

 General outline drawings.

3.1 Work Control Schedules

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

3.2 Progress Report

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

4.1.1 Outline Drawings

4.1.2 Assembly Drawings

A bill of material must be provided with all assembly drawings.

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

4.2 Technical Data Schedules

4.3 Instruction Manuals

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

The frequency of inspection and maintenance requirements of each component/system shall be

5.1 Seismic Requirements

Horizontal acceleration: 0.25 g

Vertical acceleration: 0.16 g

A study report including computer simulation (modal analysis) of complex construction or a

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

5.2 Environmental Conditions and Tropicalization

Altitude, m.a.s.l. 1000 max

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

6 ANTICORROSION PROTECTION, CLEANING, PAINTING

6.1 Type of Paint and Painting Procedure

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

6.2 Cleaning and Surface Preparation

6.3 Paint Application

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

6.4 Characteristics, Mixing and Dilution of Paint

6.5 Atmospheric Conditions

General Technical Requirements # Date Page

6.7 Method to Apply the Paint

6.8 Manufactured Parts

7.2 Galvanization Layers